Vrnjaka Banja, Serbia

10th INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT IN MECHANICAL INDUSTRY

RaDMI 2010 PROCEEDINGS Vol. 2

Editor: Predrag V. Dai Donji Milanovac, Serbia 16 - 19. September 2010.

Publisher:

SaTCIP (Scientific and Technical Center for Intellectual Property) Ltd., 36210 Vrnjaka Banja, Serbia

For publisher: Jovan Dai, Director of the firm SaTCIP Ltd. Reviewers: Prof. dr. Branislav Dragovi, vice-dean, Maritime Faculty, University of Montenegro, Kotor (Montenegro) Prof. dr Volodymir Fedorinov, rector, Donbass State Machinery Academy (DSMA), Kramatorsk (Ukraine) Prof. dr Raycho Ilarionov, vice-rector, Technical University of Gabrovo (Bulgaria)

Technical processing and design: Predrag Dai Jovan Dai

Approved by: Decision no. 004/2010 from 01-06-2010 from SaTCIP Ltd., Vrnjaka Banja (Serbia)

Disclaimer Note The content of this publication, data, discussions and conclusions presented by the authors are for information only and are not intended for use without independent substantiating investigations on the part of potential users. Opinions expressed by the Autors are not necessarily in accordance with SaTCIP Ltd. as the Publisher, and the organizer and editor are not responsible for any statement in this publication. Copyright SaTCIP Ltd. All rights are reserved for this publication, which is copyright according to the International Copyright Convention. Excepting only any fair dealing for the purpose of private study, research, review, comment and criticism, no part of this publication can be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, mechanical, electrical, electronic, optical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior expressly permission of the copyright owners. Unlicensed copying of the contents of this publication is illegal.

Circulation: 80 exemplars Printed by: SaTCIP (Scientific and Technical Center for Intellectual Property) Ltd. 36210 Vrnjaka Banja, Serbia

II

ORGANIZER

Vrnjaka Banja, Serbia http://www.satcip.com/

ORGANIZING COMMITTEE
1. Predrag Dai, SaTCIP Ltd., Vrnjaka Banja (Serbia), Chairman 2. Milan Marinkovi, INTERHEM Research Center, Belgrade (Serbia) 3. Dr Milutin Milosavljevi, University of Pritina Office Kosovska Mitrovica, Technical Faculty, Kosovska Mitrovica (Serbia) 4. Marina Stanojevi, University of Ni, Faculty of Economics, Ni (Serbia) 5. Dr Slobodan Radosavljevi, Mining Basin Kolubara, Lazarevac (Serbia) 6. Veis erifi, Technical Faculty, aak (Serbia) 7. Jovan Dai, SaTCIP Ltd., Vrnjaka Banja (Serbia) 8. Danka Milievi, SaTCIP Ltd., Vrnjaka Banja (Serbia) 9. Ana Kari, SaTCIP Ltd., Vrnjaka Banja (Serbia)

III

SCIENTIFIC COMMITTEE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. Prof. dr Grigoryev Sergey Nikolaevich, rector, Moscow State Technological University STANKIN, Moskva (Russia), Chairman Prof. dr Valentin Nedeff, rector, University of Bacu, Faculty of Engineering, Bacu (Romania), Vicechairman Prof. dr Friedrich Franek, University of Vienna and president of Austrian Tribology Association, Vienna (Austria), Vice-chairman Prof. dr Raycho Ilarionov, vice-rector, Technical University of Gabrovo (Bulgaria), Vice-chairman Dr Syed Ahmed, CSEM S. A., Surface Engineering Division, Neuchtel (Switzerland) Prof. dr Emilia Assenova, Technical University of Sofia, Sofia (Bulgaria) Prof. dr Anatoly P. Avdeenko, Donbass State Machinery Academy, Kramatorsk (Ukraine) Prof. dr Milun Babi, University of Kragujevac, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Kragujevac (Serbia) Prof. dr Nada Barac, University of Ni, Faculty of Economics, Ni (Serbia) Prof. dr Rade Bioanin, University of Novi Pazar, Technical Faculty, Novi Pazar (Serbia) Prof. dr Leonid Borisenko, Belarusian-Russian University (BRU), Mogilev (Belarus) Prof. dr Konstantin D. Bouzakis, Aristoteles University of Thessaloniki, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Thessaloniki (Greece) Prof. dr Miodrag Bulatovi, University of Podgorica, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Podgorica (Montenegro) Traian Buido, University of Oradea, Faculty of Management and Technological Engineering, Oradea (Romania) Prof. dr Mikhail V. Burmistr, academician, rector, Ukrainian State University of Chemical Engineering, Dniepropetrovsk (Ukraine) Prof. dr Alexander I. Burya, academician, Dniepropetrovsk State Agrarian University, Dniepropetrovsk (Ukraine) Prof. dr Ilija osi, dean, University of Novi Sad, Faculty of Technical Scientific, Novi Sad (Serbia) Prof. dr Predrag osi, University of Zagreb, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering Naval Architecture, Zagreb (Croatia) Prof. dr George Dobre, University Politehnica, Bucharest (Romania) Prof. dr Alexandre Dolgui, Ecole Nationale Suprieure des Mines de Saint-Etienne, Saint-Etienne (France) Prof. dr emal Dolianin, rector, University of Novi Pazar, Technical Faculty, Novi Pazar (Serbia) Prof. dr. Branislav Dragovi, vice-dean, Maritime Faculty, University of Montenegro, Kotor (Montenegro) Prof. dr Ljuben Dudesku, vice-dean, University of Skopje, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Skopje (Macedonia) Prof. dr Petru Dusa, Technical University Gh. Asachi, Faculty of Mechanics, Iai (Romania) Prof. dr Ljubodrag orevi, University of Union, Faculty of Industrial Management, Kruevac (Serbia) Prof. dr Vladan orevi, academician, University of Belgrade, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Belgrade (Serbia) Prof. dr Sabahudin Ekinovi, rector, University of Zenica, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Zenica (Bosnia and Herzegovina) Prof. dr Volodymir Fedorinov, rector, Donbass State Machinery Academy, Kramatorsk (Ukraine) Prof. dr Milomir Gai, University of Kragujevac, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Kraljevo (Serbia) Prof. dr Manfred Geiger, University Erlangen-Nuremberg, Erlangen (Germany) Prof. dr Anatoly Ivanovich Grabchenko, National Technical University, Kharkov Polytechnical Institute, Kharkov (Ukraine) Prof. dr Nicolae Valentin Ivan, University Transilvania of Brasov, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Brasov (Romania) Prof. dr Ratomir Jemenica, University of Kragujevac, Technical Faculty, aak (Serbia) Prof. dr Milan Jurkovi, University of Biha, Technical Faculty, Biha (Bosnia and Herzegovina) Prof. dr Isak Karabegovi, dean, University of Biha, Technical Faculty, Biha (Bosnia and Herzegovina) Prof. dr Baki Karami, Erciyes University, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Kaysei (Turkey) Prof. dr Branko Katalini, University of Vienna, Vienna (Austria) IV

38. Prof. dr Veijo Kauppinen, Helsinki University of Technology, Espoo (Finland) 39. Prof. dr Marianna Kazimierska - Grebosz, Technical University of Lodz, Faculty of General Mechanics, Lodz (Poland) 40. Dr Sergei A. Klimenko, Director of Association of Mashine Bulding Technologists of the Ukraine ATMU, Kiev (Ukraine) 41. Prof. dr Karel Kocman, Technical University of Brno, Brno (Szech Republic) 42. Prof. dr Janez Kopac, University of Ljubljana, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Ljubljana (Slovenia) 43. Prof. dr Marian Kralik, vice-dean, Slovak University of Technology, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Bratislava (Slovakia) 44. Prof. dr Zdravko Krivokapi, vice-dean, University of Podgorica, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Podgorica (Montenegro) 45. Prof. dr Janos Kundrak, University of Miskolc, Faculty of Production Engineering, Miskolc, (Hungary) 46. Prof. dr Evgeniy A. Kundrashov, academician, State Technical University, Chita (Russia) 47. Prof. dr Cristian N. Madu, Pace University, Lubin School of Bussiness, New York (USA) 48. Prof. dr Velibor Marinkovi, University of Ni, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Ni (Serbia) 49. Prof. dr Vlatko Marui, University of Osijek, Mechanical Engineering Faculty, Slavonski Brod (Croatia) 50. Prof. dr Ostoja Mileti, vice-rector, University of Banja Luka, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Banja Luka (Bosnia and Herzegovina) 51. Prof. dr Onisifor Olaru, dean, University Constantin Brancusi of Tg-Jiu, Faculty of Engineering, Tg-Jiu (Romania) 52. Prof dr Constantin Oprean, rector, Lucian Blaga University of Sibiu, Sibiu (Romania) 53. Prof. dr Liviu Palaghian, vice-dean, University of Galati, Galati (Romania) 54. Prof. dr. Nam Kyu Park, Tongmyong University, Busan (Korea) 55. Prof. dr Jozef Peterka, vice-dean, Slovak University of Technology, Faculty of Material Sciences and Technology of Trnava, Trnava (Slovakia) 56. Prof. dr Georgios Petropoulos, University of Thessaly, Faculty of Mechanical & Industrial Engineering, Volos (Greece) 57. Prof. dr Narcisa Popescu, University Politehnica, Bucharest (Romania) 58. Prof. dr Stanislaw Pytko, Technical University of Krakow, Krakow (Poland) 59. Prof. dr. Zoran Radmilovi, Faculty of Transport and Traffic Engineering, University of Belgrade Belgrade (Serbia) 60. Prof. dr Sneana Radonji, vice-dean, University of Kragujevac, Technical Faculty, aak (Serbia) 61. Prof. dr Miroslav Radovanovi, University of Ni, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Ni (Serbia) 62. Prof. dr Georgi Rashev, dean, Technical University of Gabrovo, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Gabrovo (Bulgaria) 63. Prof. dr. Milorad Rakovi, dean, Maritime Faculty, University of Montenegro, Kotor (Montenegro) 64. Prof. dr. Dong-Keun Ryoo, College of International Studies, Korea Maritime University, Busan (Korea) 65. Prof. dr Igor Sergeevich Sazonov, rector, Belarusian-Russian University (BRU), Mogilev (Belarus) 66. Prof. dr Adolfo Senatore, University of Salermo, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Fisciano (Italy) 67. Prof. dr Ivana Simi, University of Ni, Faculty of Economics, Ni (Serbia) 68. Prof. dr Dimitri Yu. Skubov, State Technical University of Sankt Petersburg, Sankt Petersburg (Russia) 69. Prof. dr Georgy Slynko, academician, Zaporozhye National Engineering University, Zaporozhye (Ukraine) 70. Prof. dr Mirko Sokovi, vice-dean, University of Ljubljana, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Ljubljana (Slovenia) 71. Prof. dr Viktor Starkov, Moscow State Technological University, Moscow (Russia) 72. Prof. dr Ljubodrag Tanovi, University of Belgrade, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Belgrade (Serbia) 73. Prof. dr Oleg Vasilevich Taratynov, academician, Moscow State Industrial University, Moscow (Russia) 74. Prof. dr Mirela Toth-Tascau, Politehnica University of Timioara, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Timioara (Romania) 75. Prof. dr Nikolaos Vaxevanidis, Institute of Pedagogical & Technological Education, N. Heraklion Attikis (Greece) 76. Prof. dr Karol Velisek, Slovak University of Technology, Faculty of Material Sciences and Technology of Trnava, Trnava (Slovakia) 77. Prof. dr Edward Walicki, University of Zielona Gora, Faculty of Mechanics, Zielona Gora (Poland) 78. Prof. dr Ton vad der Wiele, Erasmus University, Rotterdam School of Management, Rotterdam (Netherlands) 79. Prof. dr Carol Zoller, University of Petrosani, Faculty for Mechanical and Electrical Engineers, Petrosani (Romania) 80. Prof.dr Jeroslav ivani, dean, University of Kragujevac, Technical Faculty, aak (Serbia) 81. Prof. dr Dragan ivkovi, High Technical School, Zrenjanin (Serbia) V

VI

PREFACE
The First Conference Research and Development in Chemical and Mechanical Industry - RaDMI 2001 was held upon the initiative of Predrag Dai and prof. dr Miroslav Radovanovi in Kruevac from October 22-24, 2001. Until now, 9 conferences were realized. The conference accepted and published over 1.500 papers, from which 1.100 were from abroad from 40 various countries of the world. Total number of authors and coauthors is over 2.000. Papers of the 8th conferences were published in 16 proceedings in hard copy and 8 proceedings in electronic form (CD-ROM). Amount of printed material was approximately 11.000 pages. Some papers from the 8th International conference RaDMI 2008 will be printed in special issue of international journal from SCI-E paper Strojniki Vestnik Journal of Mechanical Engineering Vol. 55, no. 2 (2009) (Web site: http://en.sv-jme.eu/). Tenth International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry RaDMI 2010 will be held on 1619th September 2010 in Donji Milanovac, Serbia. Topics of the Conference RaDMI 2010 are: Plenary Session: Invitation papers, with 18 papers; Session A: Research and development of manufacturing systems, tools and technologies, new materials and production design, with 52 papers; Session B: Transport systems and logistics, with 9 papers; Session C: Application of information technologies in mechanical engineering, with 23 papers; Session D: Quality management, ISO 9000, ISO 14000, TQM and management in mechanical engineering, with 49 papers; Session E: Application of mechanical engineering in other industrial fields, with 50 papers. The aim of organizing the Conference is: animating scientists from the faculties and institutes and experts from the industry and their connecting and collaboration, and exchanging the experiences and knowledge of domestic and foreign scientists and experts. On behalf of the organizers, we would like to extend our thanks to all organizations and institutions that have supported the initiative to have this anniversary gathering organized. We would also like to extend our thanks to all authors and participants from abroad and from the country for contribution to this conference. This Tenth International Conference RaDMI is entirely dedicated to the late Prof. dr Georgios Petropoulos, our friend and active participant in all the previous conferences.

Donji Milanovac, September 2010.

CHAIRMAN OF ORGANIZING COMMITTEE Predrag Dai, prof.

VII

CONTENTS Volume 1
PLENARY SESSION (INVITATION PAPERS)
P-1.

P-2.

P-3.

P-4.

P-5.

P-6.

P-7.

P-8.

P-9.

P-10. P-11. P-12.

P-13. P-14.

Petropoulos G. (Volos Greece), Dai P. (Vrnjaka Banja Serbia), Vaxevanidis N. M. (Attikis Greece) RESEARCH OF PROCESSED SURFACE ROUGHNESS IN FIELD OF METALWORKING Vaxevanidis N. M., Galanis N. (Attikis Greece), Dai P. (Vrnjaka Banja Serbia), Fountas N. (Attikis Greece) PRODUCTION ROUTES TOWARDS CLEAN CUTTING: DRY, HARD AND HIGH SPEED MACHINING Fedorinov V., Kovalevskyy S. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) COMPARATIVE ANALYSIS OF MODERN SYSTEMS OF AUTOMATED DESIGNING OF MACHINES ON KOKHONENA'S CARDS Arora P.K. (Ghaziabad India), Haleem A. (New Delhi - India), Singh M. K. (Mathura India) OPTIMAL DESIGN OF CELLULAR MANYFSCTURING SYSTEMS: A REVIEW Toth-Tascau M., Rusu L. (Timisoara Romania) MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF A TESTING DEVICE OF A LUMBAR SPINE STABILIZATION SYSTEM Buido T., Ursu M.P. (Oradea Romania) THEORETICAL AND EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH ABOUT THE WIRE ELECTRICAL DISCHARGE MACHINING OF THE ACTIVE PARTS OF MOULDS Bonjak S., Zrni N., Gai V., Petkovi Z. (Belgrade Serbia) CHANGEABILITY AS A BASIC WORKING LOAD CHARACTERISTIC OF MACHINES FOR MECHANIZATION Dragovi B. (Kotor Montenegro), Park N.K. . (Busan Republic of Korea), Metrovi R. (Kotor Montenegro), Zrni N. (Belgrade Serbia) PORT SEASIDE LINK AS FINITE WAITING SPACE BULK QUEUEING SYSTEMS Marinkovi A. (Belgrade Serbia), Milosavljevi M. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia),Vukovi G., oli M., Uskokovi P.(Belgrade Serbia) AMINO-FUNCTIONALIZATION, CHARACTERIZATION AND BIOLOGICAL EFFECT OF MULTI-WALLED CARBON NANOTUBES Park N.K., Lim C. (Busan Republic of Korea), Dragovi B. (Kotor Montenegro) SYSTEM DYNAMIC MODEL OF TRANSSHIPMENT PORT CHOICE Yordanov S., Ilarionov R., Simeonov I., Kilifarev H., Ibrishimov H. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) NON-CONTACT ULTRASONIC INVESTIGATION OF THE STEEL HARDNESS Marui V. (Slavonski Brod Croatia), Rozing G. (Osijek Croatia), Novoselac V. (Slavonski Brod Croatia) ACTUALITY OF THE APPLICATION OF TRIBOLOGICAL REGULATORS AT REDUCING LOSSES IN OIL PRESSING FACTORY Pehan S., Kegl M., Kegl B. (Maribor Slovenia) ANALYSIS OF FRICTION IN SMALL ENGINES USING VARIOUS OILS Slavkovic R, Jugovic Z., Milicevic I., Popovic M. (aak Serbia) APPLICATION OF MODAL ANALYSIS IN THE IDENTIFICATION OF VIBRATION OF TECHNOLOGICAL EQUIPMENT

1 11

19 32 38 48 58 68 75

83 90 99

106 115

IX

P-15. Jevti D., Zaki D., Savi A. ( Belgrade Serbia)

128 140 150 157

STATE-OF-THE-ART IN THE FIELD OF TOUGHNESS EVALUATION OF FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT COMPOSITES P-16. Petkovi D., oki J., Mini D. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia) BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGIES AND PROCESSING DEVICES FOR ENVRONMENTAL IMPACT REDUCTION IN SECONDARY LEAD PRODUCTION P-17. Andjelkovi Pei M. (Ni Serbia) THE POSSIBLLE WAYS OF THE SIX SIGMA CONCEPT IMPROVEMENT P-18. Radosavljevi S. (Lazarevac Serbia), Dai P. (Vrnjaka Banja Serbia), epanovi S. (Belgrade Serbia) RISK MANAGAMENT FROM MINING - APPLICATION FMECA METHODS

SESSION A RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT OF MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS, TOOLS AND TECHNOLOGIES, NEW MATERIALS AND PRODUCTION DESIGN
A-1. A-2.

A-3. A-4. A-5. A-6.

A-7. A-8.

A-9.

A-10. A-11.

A-12.

A-13. A-14. A-15.

Bagnaru D.G., Cataneanu A., Cataneanu M. (Craiova Romania) CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT THE VIBRATIONS OF GEAR WHEELS Bagnaru D.G., Cataneanu A., Cataneanu M. (Craiova Romania) THE COMPATATIVE ANALYSIS BETWEEN THE CROSS DISPLACEMENTS FIELD OF A REPOSE LINEAR-VISCOELASTIC BAR AND THE SAME BAR, BEING THE CONNECTING ROD OF A CRANK GEAR Balashev I. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) PROFILE ELASTIC COUPLINGS Boji N. (Arilje Srbija), Jugovi Z. (aak Serbia) ANALYSIS OF STRESS IN PLATES WITH HOLES Bolundu I.L. (Petrosani Romania) CONSTRUCTION OF DRILLING EQUIPMENTS Bran I, Rou R., Popescu M., Opri C., Li M. (Timisoara Romania) EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCHES TO OBTAIN HYDROXYAPATITE BIOCOMPATIBLE MICROLAYERS BY HVOF THERMAL SPRAYING METHOD Chiculita S., Spanu C., Ciortan S. (Galati Romania) SURFACE QUALITY MODIFICATIONS UNDER SLIDING INDENTATION TEST Copaci I. (Arad Romania), Tnsoiu B. (Napoca Romania), Tnsoiu A. (Arad Romania) ON THE EFFECTS CAUSED BY THE SHOCK DUEING RAILWAY VEHICLE BUFFING amagi I. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia), Burzi Z. (Belgrade Serbia), Cvetkovi S. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia) THE ANALYSIS OF THE FRACTURE RESISTANCE FROM THE ASPECT OF THE APPLICATION OF THE PARAMETRES OF THE FRACTURE MECHANICS FOR A WELDED JOINT OF LOW-ALLOY STEEL WITH HIGHER SOLIDITY IN THE PRESENCE OF CRACKS Dai P. (Vrnjaka Banja Serbia), Barac N., Andjelkovi A. (Ni Serbia) STRUCTURE AND CONCEPT OF E-MANUFACTURING urii Lj., Petrovi R., Zdravkovi N., Bokovi G. (Kraljevo Serbia) SELECTION OF OPERATING PARAMETERS AND SYNCHRONIZATION OF HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS Fleser T. (Timisoara Romania) EVALUATION OF LOAD BEHAVIOR IN CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT, NON-ALLOYD STEEL WELDED JOINTS Fleser T., Szuhanek C. (Timisoara Romania) CHARACTERIZATION OF WELDED JOINTS OF THIN NiTi WIRES AND STRIPS Gavrish P.A., Tulupov V.I. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) PRELIMINARY HEATING AT WELDING OF COPPER WITH STEEL Ghiba M.O., Dreucean M., Prejbeanu R., Vermesan D. (Timisoara Romania) RAPID PROTOTYPING IN THE CREATION OF HIP IMPLANTS WITH 3D LATTICE STRUCTURES X

169 175

181 189 199 205 210 214 225

234 238 244 250 256 259

A-16. Golubovi D. (aak Serbia), Mijatovi M. (Trstenik Serbia) A-17. A-18.

263 267 274 278 283 287 294 300 304 311 319 324 331 337 346 354 360 366 372 378 384 391 397 404

A-19. A-20.

A-21.

A-22. A-23. A-24.

A-25. A-26.

A-27. A-28. A-29.

A-30. A-31.

A-32. A-33.

A-34.

A-35.

A-36. A-37. A-38.

A-39.

STATIC TESTING NPU3 MEHATRNICKOG AID EQUIPMENT Janjuevi Lj., Kutin M., Radojkovi B. (Belgrade Serbia) FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING AND THE USE OF INDUSTRIAL ROBOTS WITHIN Korchak E.S. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) CREATING RELIABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS OF HYDRAULIC PRESSES RETURN CYLINDERS Kovalevskyy S., Tulupov V. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) ALGORITHM OF CALCULATION OF CONDITIONS EILWH Kovalevskyy S., Tulupov V.(Kramatorsk Ukraine) DETERMINATION OF TECHNOLOGICAL CONDITIONS BY ELECTRO-IMPULSE LATHE WORK HARDENING Kovalov V.D., Klymenko G.P., Tkachenko M. A., Vasylchenko Y.V. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) CUTTING TOOL WEAR OPERATING ON HEAVY LATHE Kudina E.F., Pechersky G.G. (Gomel Belarus) DEVELOPMENT OF SELF-RESTORING GEL-LIKE POLYFUNCTIONAL MATERIALS Kumar H. (New Delhi India), Sharma C. (Delhi India), Gupta S. (Chandigarh India) DEFLECTION STUDIES OF A FORCE TRANSDUCER Lazarevi A. (Belgrade Serbia), Marinkovi V., Lazarevi D. (Ni Serbia) EXPANDED NON-LINEAR MATHEMATICAL MODELS IN THE THEORY OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN: A CASE STUDY Lorena G.D., Alina M.C., Ciortan N.S. (Galati Romania) SURFACE QUALITY EVALUATED BY 3D FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS Marii I., Golubovi D. (aak Serbia) COMPARISON BETWEEN ANALYTICAL, EXPERIMENTAL AND FINITE ELEMENT ANALISYS DATA FOR RUPTURED FORCE OF WELDED CONSTRUCTION Mari A. (Kruevac Serbia), Risti O. (aak Serbia), orevi Lj. (Trstenik Serbia) THE FAULT TREE AND RELIABILITY ANALYSIS IN PROCESS INDUSTRY Mijajlovi M., Mili D., uranovi M. (Ni Serbia) HEAT GENERATION TEMPERATURE PHASES OF THE FSW PROCESS Mijatovi M. (Trstenik Serbia), Golubovi D. (aak Serbia) PROGRAMMABLE DYNAMIC TESTS OF ELEMENTS AND COMPLEX STRUCTURES BY MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS Mili D., Mijajlovi M. (Ni Serbia), Radojevi M. (Rataje Serbia) WOOD FURNITURE PARAMETRIC MODELING AS AN INTERIOR DESIGN STRATEGY Miti S. (Ni Serbia) INFLUENCE OF THE PLATE GEOMETRY ON THE STABILITY OF A PLATE WITH TWO FIELDS Miti S. (Ni Serbia) STABILITY OF STEPPED PLATES WITH A CLAMPED EDGE Nedeff V., Panainte M., Macarescu B.C., Mosnegutu E., Ristea M. (Bacau Romania) REDUCING POLLUTION FROM ELECTRICITY -DUSTING FACILITY MODERNIZATION FROM ENDOWMENT A LARGE COMBUSTION PLANTS Nenchev P., Anchev A. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) RESEARCH OF THE RELAXATION PROCESSES OBSERVED DURING THE WORK OF HYPER ELASTIC MATERIAL IN CLOSED CELL Nikoli R. (Kraljevo Serbia), orevi Lj., Trifunovi D. (Trstenik Serbia) MODEL OF TEMPERATURE FIELD IN THE CUTTING TOOL DURING DRY MACHINING AS A BASIS FOR RESEARCHING THE NEW COOLING SYSTEMS Oleshchuk O., Popel O., Kopytchuk M. (Odessa Ukraine) MATHEMATICAL MODELS OF DYNAMIC IMAGES Petkov T., Andreev H. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) MICROCONTROLER MEASURING SYSTEM FOR ELECTRO-MECHANICAL DEVICES Petrovi R., urii Lj., Zdravkovi N., Bokovi G. (Kraljevo Serbia) IDENTIFICATION AND OPTIMIZATION OF HYDRAULIC PNEUMATIC CILINDAR PARAMETERS Podaru G., Ciortan S., Birsan I. G. (Galati Romania) THERMAL ASPECTS OF RUBBER LIP SEAL - POLYMER ROD COUPLE BEHAVIOR IN DRY SLIDING CONDITIONS XI

A-40. Roganov M., Roganov L., Korotenko Y. (Kramatorsk Ukraine)

408 411 416 421 431 438 442

A-41.

A-42.

A-43.

A-44.

A-45.

A-46.

A-47.

A-48.

A-49.

A-50.

A-51.

A-52.

CONSTRUCTIVE TECHNIQUES OF IMPROVING THE ACCURACY OF MACHINE TOOLS Rudnev A.V. (Kharkov Ukraine) RESEARCH OF DIAMOND WHEEL PRODUCTIVITY WHILE MACHINING FINE-GRAINED DIAMOND HARD PLATES Simeonov S., Tsvetanov G., Nencheva D. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) LOST MOTION OF TOOTH GEARINGS OF ASYMMETRIC TOOTH PROFILE Slavkovi R., Dui N. (aak Serbia), Zdravkovi N. (Kraljevo Serbia), Bokovi N. (aak Serbia) THE METHODOLOGY OF VIBRATION ISOLATION OF TECHNOLOGICAL SYSTEMS Spanu C., Ciortan S., Birsan I., Mereuta V. (Galati Romania) METHOD FOR OPTIMIZING MACHINE PARTS DESIGN BASED ON ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWOKS Stanca I., Popa T., Bungu C. . (Oradea Romania) A MICROSCOPIC MODEL FOR THE ORIGIN OF PHOTOVOLTAIC EFFECT IN HTSC YBCO THIN FILMS Todorovi M. (Trstenik Serbia), Dedi M. (Kraljevo Serbia), ajetinac S., Jevremovi V. (Trstenik Serbia) DETERMINATION OF DEFLECTION AND SLOPE OF SPATIAL TRUSS BEAMS BY CONTINUUM MODELLING Velji M. (Beograd Serbia), Pozhidaeva V. (Sofia Bulgaria), ivkovi D., Medenica M. (Beograd Serbia) OPERATING READINESS OF DISC PLOUGHS AS A CRITERION FOR SUCCESFULNESS OF ITS MAINTENANCE Vigaru C., Rusu L. (Timisoara Romania) EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF VIBRATIONS AT WEAVING MACHINE IN ORDER TO IDENTIFY SOURCES OF VIBRATION Vreki S. (Kragujevac Serbia) EFFECTS FROM DEVELOPMENT OF EURO STANDARDS AND PROMOTION USE OF ALTERNATIVE FUELS Vodolazskaya N. (Donetsk Ukraine), Iskritzskiy V. (Kramatorsk Ukraine), Vodolazskaya E. (Donetsk Ukraine) CALCULATION METHODS OF WORKING PARAMETERS OF THE MESHING MECHANISM OF RARELY IMPACT WRENCH WITH INERTIAL MESHING Zdravkovi N., Gai M., Savkovi M., Markovi G. (Kraljevo Serbia) LOAD ANALYSIS OF THE ARTICULATING BOOM SECTIONS OF THE MOBILE ELEVATING WORK PLATFORM IN RELATION TO THE OPERATOR BASKET POSITION Zhelezarova D., Angelov I. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) ALGORITHM FOR ASSESSING THE QUALITY OF METAL ACCORDING TO THE CRITERION OF DEFECT GROWTH AT SYMMETRICAL CYCLIC LOADING

448

454 460 466

474 483

SESSION B TRANSPORT SYSTEMS AND LOGISTICS

B-1.

B-2. B-3.

B-4.

Dragovi B. (Kotor Montenegro), Ryoo D-K. (Busan Korea), Kova N., kuri M. (Kotor Montenegro) LITERATURE REVIEW OF ADVANCED MODELING TECHNIQUES FOR CONTAINER TERMINAL PLANNING Dragovi B., Zrni N. (Kotor Montenegro) CONTAINER SHIPS EVOLUTION: IMPLICATION FOR QUAY CRANES DEVELOPMENT Gurning S., Cahoon S. (Tasmania Australia) THE CYCLES OF MARITIME DISRUPTIONS IN THE AUSTRALIAN INDONESIAN WHEAT SUPPLY CHAIN Park N.K., Heo S.K., Dragovi B. (Busan Republic of Korea) MOBILE HARBOR CONCEPT FOR SHORT SEA SHIPING

489

498 505 513

XII

B-5. B-6. B-7. B-8. B-9.

Park N.K., Lu Bo. (Busan Republic of Korea) PERFORMANCE EVALUATION OF THE CONTAINER PORTS WITH DEA Radmilovi Z. (Belgrade Serbia), Markolovi T. (Kotor Montenegro) QUEUE LENGTH OF INDIVIDUAL SHIPS AT INDEPENDENT WATERWAY LOCKS kuri M., Dragovi B., Markolovi T., Jovovi D. (Kotor Montenegro) CONTAINER YARD MODELING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT Urdea G.B., Itu V., Dumitrescu I., Cozma B.Z. (Petroani Romania) SYSTEMIC ANALYSIS OF TRANSPORT AT LIVEZENI MINE Zrni N., orevi M., Bonjak S. (Belgrade Serbia), Dragovi B. (Kotor Montenegro) DEVELOPMENTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLY TECHNOLOGIES FOR RTG CONTAINER CRANES

519 526 530 537 543

SESSION C APPLICATION OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGIES IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

C-1.

C-2.

C-3. C-4.

C-5. C-6. C-7.

C-8.

C-9.

C-10.

C-11.

C-12. C-13.

C-14.

Aleksandrov S., ajetinac S., elija D. (Trstenik Serbia) DIDACTIC SYSTEM FESTO MPS - SORTING STATION AND ITS APPLICATION IN EDUCATION IN THE FIELD OF MECHATRONICS Bili S. (Slavonski Brod Croatia), Misiraa D. (Gradika Bosnia and Herzegovina), Bili H. (Mostar Bosnia and Herzegovina), Rajili S. (Novi Grad Bosnia and Herzegovina) COMPUTER USAGE IN CALCULATEING THE EXPENDITURE OF REINFORCEMENT Cveji R. (Belgrade Serbia) COMMERCIAL MANAGEMENT INFORMATICS AND NEW TECHNOLOGIES Cveji R. (Belgrade Serbia), Pavlovi V. (Novi Sad Serbia), oki G. (Novi Sad Serbia) PROVIDING INFORMATION SECURITY IN BUSINESS SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC BUSINESS ajetinac S., elija D., Aleksandrov S., Todorovi M. (Trstenik Serbia) PWM CONTROL OF THE PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR BY PLC CONTROLLER Damnjanovi Z., Petrovi D., Mili V., Pantovi R. (Bor Serbia) ICT AND THERMOGRAPHY IN MINING INDUSTRY Debelac C, Nstac S, MCUT S. (Galati Romania) ADVANCES ON COMPUTATIONAL DYNAMICS OF WHEEL LOADER BUCKET CHARGING Eri D. (aak Serbia) METHOD FINITE ELEMENTS FOR ANALYSIS AND SIMULATION TECHNOLOGY PROCESS IN THE CONTEXT CONCURRENT ENGINEERING Ilarionov R., Kartunov S. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) WORKING OUT A SYSTEM FOR ECOLOGICAL MONITORING AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ZONES AND OUT- OF -TOWN TERRITORIES IN BULGARIA, BASED IN INFORMATIONAL INTERNET ENVIRONMENT Jovani P. (Belgrade Serbia), Damnjanovi Z., Petrovi D. (Bor Serbia) THERMAL ANALISIS OF SCHRS 800 CONTINUOUS EXCAVATOR CONSTRUCTION FRAME ON OPEN PIT DRMNO Kartunov S., Rachev P. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) CLASSIFICATION OF TECHNOLOGICAL ERRORS ON BASIS OF MANUFACTURING PROCESS INFORMATION MODEL Marjanovi Z., Brzakovi R. (Kragujevac Serbia) INFORMATION SYSTEM FOR INNOVATION MANAGEMENT Maovi S. (Belgrade Serbia), Saraevi M. (Ni Serbia), Milovi B. (Subotica Serbia), Kamberovi H. (Novi Pazar Serbia) INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY AS A TOOL FOR ESTABLISHING E-HEALTH Mihalcea S., Stnescu N.D. (Piteti Romania) CAM SYNTHESIS FOR A TIMING MECHANISM WITH MECHANICAL VARIABLE VALVE LIFT XIII

549 554 560 565

572 578 584 590 595

600 610 614 624

632

C-15. Mikhov M.R., Mitrinski G.D. (Sofia Bulgaria)

638 644 651 656 664

C-16. C-17. C-18.

C-19.

C-20. C-21.

C-22.

C-23.

ANALYSIS OF SOME ALGORITHMS FOR POSITION CONTROL OF TWO-COORDINATE DRIVING SYSTEMS Miki D. (Gornji Milanovac Serbia), Aonja A. (Novi Sad Serbia) SOLVING INVERSE KINEMATICS WITHOUT APPLYING THE MATRIX ROTATION Robertov P., Pulov D., Deneva D. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) ELECTRONIC OPTIMETER Saraevi M. (Ni Serbia), Maovi S. (Belgrade Serbia) , Meedovi E. (Ni Serbia) APPLICATION OF OBJECT-ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN IN NAVIGATION SYSTEMS AND TRANSPORT NETWORKS Shopov N. (Plovdiv Bulgaria), Ilarionov R. Simeonov I., Kilifarev H., Ibrishimov H. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) COMPUTER SYSTEM FOR IDENTIFICATION OF WATER-ETHANOL BINARY MIXTURES erifi V. (aak Serbia), Cveji R. (Belgrade Serbia) MANAGEMENT AND MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS Yordanov S., Ivanov S., Nenov T. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) AUTOMATED SYSTEM FOR CONTROL OF PROCESSES OF EXPERIMENTAL ANAEROBIC BIOREACTOR Yordanov S., Simeonov I., Ilarionov R., Kilifarev H., Ibrishimov H., Madjarov N. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) INTELLIGENT ULTRASONIC SENSOR Zaharia S.M., Martinescu I. (Brasov Romania) ACCELERATED LIFE TEST MODEL FOR LIFE PREDICTION OF A INDUSTRIAL PRODUSCT USING MONTE CARLO SIMULATION

671 680 686 691

Volume 2
SESSION D QUALITY MANAGEMENT, ISO 9000, ISO 14000, TQM AND MANAGEMENT IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
D-1.

D-2. D-3.

D-4.

D-5.

D-6.

D-7. D-8.

Avdagi M. (Sarajevo Bosna i Hercegovina) TECHNICAL AND TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT THE FOUNDATION OF SOCIAL CHANGES Avramovi M. (Leskovac Serbia) QUALITY MANAGEMENT SERVICES Azemovi N., Haderi E. (Novi Pazar Serbia) TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN FUNCTION OF INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL USERS Badi M. (Novi Pazar Serbia) SECURITY INTELLIGENCE ACTIVITIES IN THE TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT DANGEROUS Bataveljic D. (Kragujevac Serbia) AIR CARE IN SERBIA AND ITS CONTRIBUTION TO MAINTENANCE OF ECOLOGICAL BALANCE Bioanin R. (Novi Pazar Serbia), Lojanii R. (Berane Montenegro), Martinovi B. (Prijepolje Serbia) BIO-EFFECTS OF IONIZING RADIATION AND PROTECTION Boji B., Peuli V., Djodji T. (Sarajevo Bosnia and Herzegovina) KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN CREATING COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE Bojovi P., Kari D., Ivanovi A. (Beograd Serbia) FINANCIAL ANALYSIS OF STOCK MANAGEMENT IN PRODUCTION, INDUSTRIAL AND OTHER COMPANIES XIV

697 702 708 712 720 726 734 741

D-9.

D-10.

D-11. D-12.

D-13.

D-14.

D-15.

D-16.

D-17.

D-18.

D-19.

D-20.

D-21. D-22.

D-23. D-24.

D-25.

D-26.

D-27.

D-28. D-29.

Bugariu D., Toth-Tascu M., Bereteu L. (Timisoara Romania) MODELING AND FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF TWO TYPES OF TOTAL KNEE PROSTHESES api M., Luki Lj. (Kraljevo Serbia) INTEGRATED MODEL OF BUSINESS PROCESS AS A KEY TO THE INTEGRATION OF MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS orevi V., Lepojevi V., Jankovi-Mili V. (Ni Serbia) SAMPLING PROCEDURE FACTORS IN STATISTICAL INFERENCE Gerasymchuk V.H. (Kiev Ukraine) CHNOLOGICAL MODERNIZATION OF INDUSTRY AS A BASIS FOR IMPROVING THE ECONOMIC POTENTIAL OF STATES Gherghel S., Indrie L., Prichici M. (Oradea Romania) TECHNO-ECONOMICAL ASPECTS OF APPLYING QUALITY OF MAINTENANCE TO INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT Huduti E. (Novi Pazar Serbia), Muratovi . (Belgrade Serbia), Milisavljevi J. (Novi Pazar Serbia) INTEREST RISK MANAGEMENT IN BANKS Ivovi J. (Pe Serbia) STANDARDIZATION AND LABELING AS THE ASPECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT OF THE PRODUCT Krivun V.S., Korchak E.S. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) CREATING OBJECTS OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY IS THE PLEDGE OF EFFECTIVE TECHNICAL EDUCATION Knivald M. (Belgrade Serbia) IMPACT OF WORLD ECONOMIC CRISIS ON INDUSTRY AND APPLYING OF ECOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES Kranovi D., iki M., Rajkovi R. (Bor Serbia) DETERMINING THE REAL MINIMUM WIDTH OF WORKING SPACE FOR TRUCKS ON THE OPEN PITS Labovi D. (Belgrade Serbia), Dimitrijevi M. (Ni Serbia) CREDIT SPECIFIC FINANCIAL PRODUCTS WITH SPECIAL ATTENTION TO RISK AND NETTING Mijailovi J. (Novi Sad Serbia), Rajakovi J. (abac Serbia), Doljanica S. (Kragujevac Serbia) MOTIVATION AS A FACTOR IN THE SUCCESS OF THE MODERN COMMERCIAL SOCIETY IN SERBIA Mkva M., Paulov I. (Trnava Slovak Republic) MEET CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS = CUSTOMER SATISFACTION Momcilovic O. (Belgrade Serbia), Rajakovic V. (Novi Sad Serbia) , Doljanica D. (Belgrade Serbia) SATISFACTION IN HUMAN RELATIONSHIPS Niin N., Niin S. (Belgrade Serbia), Milenkovi . (Kruevac Serbia) FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT - MEASURING THE SUCCESS OF THE COMPANY Nikezi S., Badic M., Biocanin R., Matic M. (Novi Pazar Serbia) DEVELOPMENT OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP MODEL AND ITS INFLUENCE ON QUALITY IMPROVEMENT Nikoli S. (Kruevac Serbia), Cvetkovi Z., Radomirovi J. (Ni Serbia) REENGINEERING AS AN EFFICIENT SOLUTION TO REDESIGN ACTIVITIES AND PROCESSES OF AN ENTERPRISE Nikolic S. (Kruevac Serbia), Tesanovic B., Arsic S. (Belgrade Serbia) REENGINEERING AS AN EFFECTIVE SOLUTION TO REDESIGN THE ACTIVITIES AND PROCESSES OF AN ENTERPRISE Ostafiychuk A.V. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) FORMATION OF COLLECTIVE REPRESENTATION OF EMPLOYEES ON THE MISSION AND STRATEGY OF ENTERPRISE Peci Lj. (Trstenik Serbia) CONTROLING PERFORMACES OF THE COMPANY Peci Lj. (Trstenik Serbia) MANAGING AND CORPORATION MANAGEMENT

747 753 759 765 774 780 784 791 794 801 805 812

821 826 833 839 846 850 857 862 867

XV

D-30. Radovi D. (Kruevac Serbia) , Anii J. (Belgrade Serbia) , Sajfert Z. (Zrenjanin

D-31. D-32.

D-33. D-34. D-35.

D-36. D-37.

D-38.

D-39.

D-40. D-41. D-42. D-43.

D-44.

D-45. D-46. D-47.

D-48.

D-49.

Serbia), Radovi B. (Belgrade Serbia) REAL SECTOR IN SERBIA BETWEEN TRANSITION AND CRISIS Skorobogatova N., Andros S. (Kiev Ukraine) ANALYSIS OF DYNAMICS OF FOREIGN INVESTMENTS TO UKRAINE Stankovic B. (Novi Pazar Serbia) LEGAL FRAMEWORK FOR REFORM ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND MARKETS RAILWAY LIBERALIZATION Stankovi J., Jankovi-Mili V., Pei M. (Ni Serbia) MODELS OF LIFE INSURANCE Stankovi J., Todorovi O., Pei M. (Ni Serbia) QUANTITATIVE METHODS FOR MEASURING OPERATIONAL RISK Stankovi S., Todorovi O., Stankovi J. (Ni Serbia) THE SIGNIFICANCE OF DETERMINATION OF ECONOMIC CAPITAL FOR RISK MANAGEMANT IN BANKS AND OTHER FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS Stefanov S., Vojinovi-Miloradov M., Sokolovi S., Bancov . (Novi Sad Serbia) MONITORING OF INDUSTRIAL POLLUTANTS IN COMPLEX PROCESS SYSTEM Stefanov S., Vojinovi Miloradov M., Sokolovi S., Bancov . (Novi Sad Serbia) THE BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE CONTROL AND REDUCTION OF POLLUTION IN POLYOLEPHINIC COMPLEXES erifi V., uri S. (aak Serbia), Dai P. (Vrnjaka Banja Serbia) ONE ALGORITHM OF IMPLEMENTATION PROCESS OF THE INVESTMENT BUILDING PROJECT erifi V. (aak Serbia), Dai P. (Vrnjaka Banja Serbia), uri S. (aak Serbia) ALGORITHM OF THE PROCESS OF DECISION-MAKING, DEVELOPMENT AND CONTROL OF TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION IN INVESTMENT BUILDING evi D., Beker I. (Novi Sad Serbia), Mari A. (Kruevac Serbia) DESIGN BASED ON THE PROBABILISTIC APPROACH Tahirbegovi S., Terhani E. (Novi Pazar Serbia) ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION Topliceanu L. (Bacau Romania) SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT AND LIFE CYCLE ASSESMENT Toovi-Spahali S., Mrgud V., Kovaevi S. (Sarajevo Bosnia and Herzegovina) MODELING THE PROCEDURE FOR THE CONTROL OF MONITORING AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS (ISO 9001:2000) Toth-Tascau M., Menyhardt K. (Timisoara Romania) INFLUENCE OF THE DENAVIT-HARTENBERG PARAMETERS ON ROBOT POSITIONING ACCURACY Trnavac D. (Kruevac Serbia) FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT INVESTMENT-A CLIMATE IN SERBIA Vaov J., Kuerov M. (Trnava Slovak Republic) CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT IN QUALITY MANAGEMENT Varagi R. (Belgrade Serbia), Badi M., Bioanin R. (Novi Pazar Serbia), Varagi M. (Belgrade Serbia) ECOLOGICAL MANAGEMENT IN THE FUNCTION OF IMPROVING THE ENVIRONMENT Vidovi A. (Banja Luka Bosnia and Herzegovina) QUALITY MANAGEMENT WITH SPECIAL ATTENTION TO STANDARDS-ISO 9001 AND ISO 14000 Zhelezarov I. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) IMPROVEMENT OF INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

871 880 887 893 898 903 908 917 927 933 940 945 953 959 965 971 975 979

990
994

XVI

SESSION E APPLICATION OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING IN OTHER INDUSTRIAL FIELDS

E-1.

E-2. E-3.

E-4.

E-5. E-6.

E-7.

E-8. E-9.

E-10.

E-11.

E-12.

E-13.

E-14. E-15.

E-16. E-17. E-18.

E-19.

E-20.

Aonja A. (Novi Sad - Serbia), Miki D. (Gornji Milanovac - Serbia) THE ECONOMIC JUSTIFICATION OF SUBSTITUTION OF CONVENTIONAL METHOD OF LUBRICATION WITH SYSTEMS FOR AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION Arabadzhieva N., Petrishki N., Shopov N. (Plovdiv Bulgaria) DETERMINING THE STRENGTH OF OPENING OF CARDBOARD BOXES Avdeenko A.P., Konovalova S.A., Avdeenko E.A. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) ANTIBACTERIAL RESISTANCE INVESTIGATION OF EMULSIONS USED FOR FORGING PRESS Avdeenko A.P., Konovalova S.A., Avdeenko E.A. (Kramatorsk Ukraine) PROCESSABILITY INVESTIGATION OF SALTS OF ACID ALKYLPHOSPHATES ON BASIS OF FATTY ALCOHOLS Bajmak . (Pritina Serbia) ANALYSIS AND ASSESSMENT OPTIMAL PARAMETERS OF LEPOSAVIC PIPELINE Bajmak . (Pritina Serbia) ANALYSIS DISTRICT COOLING . DEFINING THE TERM COEFFICIENT REMOTE REFRIGERATION (COEFFICIENT DISTRICT COOLING) Bajmak . (Pritina Serbia) DETERMINING THE OPTIMAL TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE OF CENTRALIZED HOT WATER HEAT SUPPLY OF LEPOSAVIC Bajmak . (Pritina Serbia) ECOLOGICAL ASPECTS DISTRICT HEATING SYSTEM IN LEPOSAVIC Brkovi D., Milosavljevi M., Marinkovi A. (Beograd Serbia) A COMPARATIVE SYNTHESIS OF N-(SUBSTITUTED PHENYL)-O-ISOBUTYL THIOCARBAMATES Burya A.I. (Dnepetrovsk Ukraine), Tkachenko E.V. (Sevastopol Ukraine), Kolesnikov V.I. (Rostov Russia), Sychev A.P. (Dnepetrovsk Ukraine) ORGANOPLASTICS BASED ON POLYAMIDES. PROPERTIES AND APPLICATION IN INDUSTRY Craciun M., Dreucean F., Ioanovici G. (Timisoara Romania) QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR THE MEDICAL ACT BY MODULAR REMOTE INTENSIVE CARE TELEMEDICINE SYSTEM Dimova B. D. (Sofia Bulgaria) VERIFICATION OF THE APPROACH TO PREDICTING FATIGUE LIFE OF NOTCHED SPECIMENS OF MAGNESIUM ALLOYS BASED ON TYPES AM50 AND AE42 eki P., Temeljkovski D. (Ni Serbia), Nusev S. (Bitola Macedonia), Stefanovi V., Stoiljkovi M. (Ni Serbia) APPLICATION OF RECYCLED RUBBER IN PRODUCTION OF INSULATION PANELS Eri Obuina J. (Trstenik Serbia), Obuina V. (Kraljevo Serbia) MODELING OF HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM TRUCK Galin R., Atanasova Y., Hristov H., Petkov G. (Gabrovo Bulgaria), Fiskuchev S. (Rousse Bulgaria) SOLID-PHASE ZINC PLATING Galin R., Atanasova Y., Savekov R. (Gabrovo Bulgaria), Fiskuchev S. (Rousse Bulgaria) EQUIPMENT FOR THERMODIFFUSION ZINC COATING. CAPACITIES AND PROSPECS Guts V., Gubenia O. (Kyiv Ukraine), Stefanov S., Hadjiiski W. (Plovdiv Bulgaria) MODELLING OF FOOD PRODUCT CUTTING Hristov H.G. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) MORPHOLOGY OF WIDMANSTTTEN STRUCTURES OBTAINED IN HYPOEUTECTOID STEELS Itu V., Dumitrescu I., Ridzi M.C., Cozma B. Z. (Petroani Romania) STRAINS AND DISPLACEMENTS FROM THE STRUCTURE OF THE TOWER OF THE HOISTING INSTALLATION NEW SKIP OF PETRILA MINING PLANT Koeva D. (Sliven Bulgaria), Rachev S. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) AN ALTERNAIVE APPROACH OF BRUSHLESS MOTORS DESIGN XVII

999 1005 1011 1013 1017 1025 1035 1043 1051 1055

1063 1070 1076 1082 1089 1095 1100 1105 1108 1114

E-21. Lekic M., Cvejic S. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia)

1120 1126 1132 1138 1142 1148

E-22. E-23.

E-24.

E-25.

E-26.

E-27.

E-28.

E-29.

E-30.

E-31.

E-32. E-33.

E-34.

E-35.

E-36. E-37.

E-38.

E-39. E-40.

OSCILLATING SOLUTIONS OF LEGENDRES EQUATION AND LOCATION OF ZERO OSCILLATIONS Lekic M., Cvejic S. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia) STATIONARY POINTS OF ANALYTIC PERIODIC FUNCTIONS Litovchenko I. (Kyiv Ukraine), Mihaylov I., Stefanov S. (Plovdiv Bulgaria) MODELING OF SOME PROCESSES OF FILLING OF MINCE WITH ONE TYPE OF SPIRAL FEEDING MECHANISM Macuta S., Gheorghies C., Debeleac C. (Galai Romania) EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCHES OF THE INNER MICRODEFORMATIONS IN THE ROLLING TRIBOSYSTEMS Mijailovi S. (Gornji Milanovac Serbia), Golubovi D. (aak Serbia) PROGRAMMABLE TEACHING TOOL LEGO MINDSTORMS NXT IN TEACHING COMPUTER SCIENCE IN HIGH SCHOOL Milenkovi J., Levi S., Manojlovi V., Raji N., Bugarski B. (Belgrade Serbia), Suliman M. (Haifa Israel), Jemenica M., Nedovi V. (Belgrade Serbia) PRODUCTION OF ALGINATE/ZEOLITE ADSORBENT BY DIRECT EXTRUSION METHOD Milenkovi J., Levi S., ManojloviV., Raji N., Jovanovi M., Bugarski B., Nedovi V. (Belgrade Serbia) COPPER ADSORPTION BY ALGINAT AND ALGINAT/ZEOLITE BEADS Milisavljevi S. (Kosovska Motrovica Serbia), Milosavljevi M., Marinkovi A., Brkovi D. (Belgrade Serbia) DETERMINATION OF THE WATER QUALITY IN ACCORD WITH REGULATION OF WATER CLASSIFICATION Milojevi S., Radosavljevi D. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia), Pavievi V. (Belgrade Serbia), Markovi M. (Kosovska Mitrovica Serbia) SUBSTITUTION OF CONVENTIONAL FUELS FOR HEATING WITH GEOTHERMAL ENERGY CONTRIBUTION TO CLEANER PRODUCTION Mitev R. (Sofia Bulgaria), Hadjiiski W., Stefanov S., Sazdov C. (Plovdiv Bulgaria) MODELLING AND TESTING OF RESISTANCE PETALOID BOTTOM OF PET BOTTLES FOR CARBONATED DRINKS Nenov N., Tomchev P., Ivanova R. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) HIGH-FREQUENCY TRANSISTOR INVERTER FOR SOLDERING OF HARD-ALLOY PLATES Nenov N., Tomchev P., Ivanova R. (Gabrovo Bulgaria) INDUCTION HEATING IN COOPERAGE Pantovi R., Damnjanovi Z., Stojadinovi S. (Bor Serbia), Ignjatovi S. (Belgrade Serbia), Ignjatovic M. (Bor Serbia) EMPIRICAL PROCEEDURE FOR TYPE OF TRICONE BIT SELECTION ON OPEN PIT MINES Popescu M, Duma S.T., Locovei C. (Timioara Romania) EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH CONCERNING STRUCTURAL AND HARDNESS STABYLITY OF 100Cr6 STEEL MACHINE PARTS Rachev S., Koeva D.(Gabrovo Bulgaria) DYNAMIC STUDY OF CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DRIVEN BY ELECTRIC INDUCTION MOTOR Radosavljevi S., epanovi S., Radosavljevi M. (Lazarevac Serbia) DIAGNOSTIC EXPERTS SYSTEMS BASED ON RISK IN MINING AND ENERGY Radovanovic D., Bukvic N., Todorovic B. (Sarajevo Bosna i Hercegovina) SOCIALLY RESPONSIBLE COMPANY IN BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA - COCA - COLA HBC BH DOO SARAJEVO Sftescu-Jescu C., Stoia D.I., Bereteu L. (Timisoara Romania) CAD MODELING AND NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF TWO IMPLANTED LUMBAR SPINE UNITS Slavov Z.D. (Varna Bulgaria) FIXED POINT PROPERTIES IN CONTINUOUS ENGINEERING MAXIMIZATION Slavov Z. (Varna Bulgaria), Evans C. (Washington USA), Slavova D. (Virginia USA) BASIC OPTIMAL CONCEPTS AND METHODS IN ENGINEERING OPTIMIZATION PROBLEMS XVIII

1153 1158

1163

1168 1174 1177 1181

1189 1195 1203 1212 1218 1224 1229

E-41. Stnescu N.D., Mihalcea S. (Piteti Romania) E-42. E-43.

1235 1241 1247 1251 1256 1262 1268 1274 1281

E-44.

E-45. E-46.

E-47. E-48. E-49.

E-50.

NORMAL FORMS FOR THE NON-LINEAR VIBRATIONS Stoia D.I., Toth-Tascau M. (Timisoara Romania) SOME BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS OF RAPID PROTOTYPING Stojanovi M., Kuli Z. (Lazarevac Serbia), Ristovi I. (Belgrade Serbia) IMPLEMENTATION OF STANDARDS ISO 14001 AND OHSAS 18001 IN LARGE MINING COMPANIES Sukachev V.V., Burya A. I. (Dniepropetrovsk Ukraine) ELASTOMERS MODIFICATION WITH SILICON-ORGANIC OLIGOURETHANISOCYANATES Tanasoiu A., Tanasoiu B., Copaci I. (Arad Romania) ON THE TRAVEL SAFETY OF TANK RAILWAY WAGONS Temeljkovski D. (Ni Serbia), Nusev S. (Bitola Macedonia), Rani B., eki P. (Ni Serbia) BALING MACHINES AS A CONSTITUENT PART OF THE WASTE RECYCLING SYSTEM Toth-Tascau M., VigaruC., Pasca O. (Timisoara Romania) METHODS FOR FOOTPRINTS AND PLANTAR ARCH INDEX DETERMINATION Ursu M., Buido T. (Oradea Romania) PUTTING INTO OPERATION AND TESTING OF THE 800W MAGNETRON Zoller C. (Petrosani Romania), Dai P. (Vrnjaka Banja Serbia), Dobra R. (Petrosani Romania) SEQUENTIAL ALGORITHM AND FUZZY LOGIC TO OPTIMUM CONTROL THE ORE GRIDDING AGGREGATES Zoller I., Stark A. (Petrosani Romania) APPLYING MULTIDIMENSIONAL SPACE DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY METHODS IN THE GRAPHICAL EXPRESSION OF THE TRIPLE INTEGRAL

1290

XIX

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

TECHNICAL AND TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT THE FOUNDATION OF SOCIAL CHANGES

Mehmed Avdagi
Economy Academy University Faculty of Education of graduate lawyers and graduate economists for executive staff - Novi Sad, Sarajevo, BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA, e-mail: ppdivut@bih.net.ba

Summary: technical and technological development, as the foundation for social changes, cannot be relativized in the sense that social changes also occur independently. Most certainly, they can be significant stimulators for technical and technological development due to their innovations, but they can also be the brakes, which we were convinced of through medieval era of humanity. Therefore, technical and technological progress and development necessarily change social relations as well as the relations of entire society, in which case the institutions of society can help or hinder, but cannot stop the progress because it is in the nature of man to constantly explore and bring innovations into his life and the lives of his contemporaries. Key words: Technical and technological changes, social changes, eras, innovations, pre-industrial age, industrial revolutions, post-industrial society.

Technology is defined as practical application of knowledge; as a set of all practical resources which man uses in order to satisfy his needs, i.e. as a systemic application of organized knowledge in practical activities, especially the production activities; as any other tool or technique, the production process and the method used for work or creating something, and which serve the people for increasing their capabilities. Technical and technological products lead to changes in social relations, system of people's thinking, their convictions and way of life. Discoveries of light bulb, telephone, radio, film, television, cars and Internet, during several decades, have led to major social changes in the way of life, organization of life, work, production, business and time of the millions of people. Technology is society, and society cannot be understood, nor illustrated without its technological tools [6]. Therefore, when in 1970s, primarily in the USA, people began to establish new technological paradigm, based on information technology, it was all about a specific part of American society, which has, in interaction with global economy and geopolitics, began to materialize in the new form of production, communication, management and living. The fact that the establishment of that paradigm took place in USA, mostly in California in 1970s, had significant effects on the forms and evolution of new information technologies. For example, regardless of the key role of military financing and market in establishing the early phases of electronic industry during the period from 1940s to 1960s, technology boom that has occurred in the early 1970s, to a certain extent, can be linked with the culture of freedom, individual innovation and entrepreneurship, which have emerged from the culture of American Universities in 1960s. Technology implies the use of scientific and technical achievements in the sense of solving practical problems, and in that way, it has a strong influence on man, organization and way of life, as well as the society as a whole. Which are those big social changes that had a strong influence on both the organization of work and social production, and the latter ones on the society and its changes? If the society does not determine the technology, it can suppress its development, primarily through the mediation of state. Another possibility, again through the intervention of state, is to begin with the accelerated process of technological modernization, which can change the destiny of economy, military power and social welfare in only a few years. Therefore, the ability, or inability, of the society to master the technology that is of a strategic significance to each historic period largely shapes the destiny of society, so we could even say that,

697

although the technology by itself does not determine historical evolution and social changes, the technology is the foundation of society by which it is changing. Social production has passed through big historical periods, eras of production and work, such as: - pre-industrial - industrial - post-industrial Pre-industrial, craft or agrarian era of production and work lasted until the 18th century, and it was characterized by: - hunting and fishing; - agriculture (large share of natural production, and in addition to the use of labor, the physical force of animals had a large share in the production); - crafts and trade; - creation of primitive tools; - construction and architecture (pyramids, Great Wall of China, Greek and Roman architecture); - development of settlements; - division of labor by sex and age. Crafts are based on manual production and direct tools handling, processing largely depended on the craftsman (he is a direct participant and executor of production). Craftsman had to be familiar with all the phases of work (with the appearance of manufacturing, the work process, based on manual work, i.e. craft, is divided into individual partial operations that are performed by particular workers). The productivity is determined and limited by muscle strength, and transport is reduced to manual movement and use of handcarts. Craft work and craft technology of production is slow and expensive, but aesthetic production, in which the product is distinctive, is special and expensive. Significant social effects of craft technology are: - craftsman is respected and enjoys the reputation and status, because he owns the knowledge and skills necessary for that process of work and production; - work conditions in workshops were mostly poor (suffocativeness, humidity, inadequate temperature, great physical efforts, long working days, short vacations); - there existed the producer's satisfaction with the produced object (pride and personal satisfaction with the object that was made and which has materialized their knowledge, skills, work, art and aesthetic); - the work was interesting and it enjoyed a reputation; - economically speaking, work and production process were slow, low-productive and expensive. This era of production, work and society was autarchic; with customs as collective patterns of life and oral culture (press was in traces). Life was subjected to a higher order God is the eternal Creator of everything; you have to work the whole day, from childhood to late old age: non-working days are Sundays and holidays; the children were taught simple rules of life. However, the Age of Discovery has provided the necessary stamp for the development of industry. The Age of Discovery is a period in history that lasted from the half of 15th century to the half of 16th century. During those hundred years, European explorers visited the most of populated areas in the world and discovered that the world is much more spacious and diverse that anyone could imagine. Their reports, which were spreading thanks to the new printing technique, attracted the attention of wide audience. Expansion of geographic and other knowledge was enormous by its width and speed, and thus no other period in history until then can be measured with it. Big geographic discoveries had roots in new technologies and ideas that have appeared during the Renaissance, and they involved the progress in cartography, navigation and shipbuilding. Therefore, the Age of Discovery is considered a boundary between the ending of Middle Ages, and beginning of a new great era of human history called the New Age. The need for greater amounts of floating products at the end of 15th and in the first half of 16th century will lead to the emergence of a new form of production, manufacturing, and to the emergence of the entrepreneurship, because the medieval economy could not adjust the production to the requirements of the world's market. The entrepreneurs organized the production out of the city centers, employing a bigger number of workers, and each of those workers has performed only one action in production process. In that way, the division of labor and specialization were implemented, the productivity and quality of the products were increased and their price was reduced. Manufacture (from Latin manus, hand; facere, to do) is also the name of the new mode of production with implemented labor division and of the workshops in which it was produced in this way. Non-European areas were conquered, European countries were conquering their colonies, which were economically exploited. Colonies served as sources of raw materials and export markets. Colonial forces were maximally exploiting the population of conquered countries. Under the influence of the industrial revolution, there comes to the changes in crafts technology: craftsman is still an important factor of production, but the division of labor and specialization of work are more and more developed, so that the worker performs one or a few work operations, while the craftsman coordinates the process of work and production. Industrial revolution is a term that implies rapid development of productive

698

forces and technology in industry, transition from crafts to machinery is a label for industrial revolution, which occurred when it came to the replacement of biological drive power energy with the energy of the wind, water, coal, liquid fuel. There are two industrial revolutions: (First) Industrial Revolution is the process through which, in the second half of 18th and first half of 19th century in England and then in all other countries of West Europe, an entire series of new technologies was introduced, by which the contemporary economy, based on people's work, was replaced with industry based on steam engine. Industrial revolution has far-reaching consequences on economic, political and cultural situation in Europe and in the world. In the countries that went through industrial revolution, the industry obtained an advantage over agriculture. Industrial revolution has provided for many European countries to rapidly strengthen in comparison with other parts of the world, which has brought to the boom of colonialism in the 19th century, and also to the improved economic and other communication. A new economic and political context is created, and within that context, it comes to the disintegration of feudal systems and ascent of a new social force bourgeoisie. Namely, thanks to the revolutionary changes in the political map of Europe, the bourgeoisie finally takes the leading political role in the countries of Western Europe, and thus the economic force and initiative of the bourgeoisie gained momentum. In the second half of the 19th and at the beginning of the 20th century, it comes to the new scientific and numerous technical discoveries. Then, there was a time of great changes in economy the Second Industrial Revolution. The first oil well was discovered in the USA in 1859. From that moment, the oil will gradually become the most important source of propulsion energy in the world. In the decades that followed the discovery of oil, there were a few revolutionary inventions. In 1885, English engineer Henry Bessemer found the procedure for production of steel disassembled raw iron. That discovery encouraged the development of heavy industry. In 1877, German engineer Nikolaus August Otto designed the engine with internal combustion. In 1896, German Rudolf Diesel invented the engine that runs on oil. Industrial era of production is the era of mass production, which represents a system of industrial production, which is characterized by producing large amounts of products. Is originated as a system of replacing traditional craftsmanship, craft skills and creativity, with mechanized factory operations of mass production, for the production in large amounts. Its strong development has began in 1903, in the Ford car factory in USA by introducing the mobile belts in the production process. In the economic aspect, this type of production has led to the development of labor division, improvement of technological process, development of the production organization, reduction of production costs and increase of profit. From the technical and technological aspect, this is the period of mechanization. In the process of mechanization, the work is intensified and the productivity of work is increased, labor division is more developed, man is freed from the use of manual work because the machine is the one that now performs the operations that were done by man, and it turns the worker into its supplement. For that reason, the number of the employed workers (living labor) is reduced, the work is intensified in the production process and for that reason, it becomes non-creative and alienated, monotonous and boring, and work motivation decreases. The work is simplified and the training for performing it is reduced. Hence, the changes in education occur (in accordance with the knowledge and amount of knowledge necessary for this form of the technology of production). Even though the worker is relieved from fatigue, still, because of the simplified production process and routinization of work, which is uninteresting, non-creative and alienated, there are abstinences, absences from work, and various professional diseases of the producer. In addition to previous characteristics and properties of mechanization, there should also be mentioned the significant social consequences of mechanization, and they are referred to: - relieving the workers from fatigue; - attachment of the machines to one territory, which will provide the faster development for that territory, and it will last until the emergence of electric power and automatization, when the decentralization of production forces starts, which will, with the introduction of nuclear technology, contribute to further development of that process; in that way, the process of abolishing the privileges of particular regions of the industrial development begins; - progress of economy; - dissatisfaction of workers due to poor working conditions (working day lasted for 15, 14, 12, and later for 10 hours, and women and children worked for 14 hours in difficult conditions, even at night); - emergence of trade unions [1] and other workers' associations for the protection of economic, political and social interests of workers. In the period of introducing nuclear facilities, electronic computers and synthetic materials in the practice, there comes to the several waves of scientific and technological development. This period of high developmental investments and strong automatization can be observed through three phases. In the first, there comes to the production and use of new materials, exploitation of the new energy sources, strong expansion of science and technology, as well as the development of modern organization of work, while in the second phase, it comes to a

699

significant increase of work productivity, there is more efficient finding and use of information, as well as the increase of technological knowledge. In the end, the third phase is characterized by an extraordinary development of information technologies. Despite the attempts to observe these phases separately, it is much better to note that it is about one process, with dynamic changes in a relatively short period which is called scientific-technological revolution. Therefore, the transition from the phase of mechanization to phase of automatization is called scientifictechnological revolution, which implies the mechanization and automatization of production process (with cybernetics and informatics), the use of new energy sources, changes in the object of work and changes in the content of work (increase of education and eligibility of labor), shortening of working hours, increased leisure time, international integrations, growth of spiritual production (knowledge, science, education, which become significant elements of productive forces), increased development of fundamental services and their quality, professional mobility (change of profession, but also the adoption of new knowledge and skills in the same professions). Characteristics of automatization are automatization of the process of production, assembly and packaging (automatized machines receive the instructions from the environment and decide without the mediation of a man), integration of production processes, continuity of production process, rationalization of production. Automatization can be: - partial such an organization of production and work, in which the producer, man, participates in some production phase (for e.g. switching on or off the mechanical facilities), - complete (total) from which a man is completely excluded i.e. he is excluded from the production process and management. Automatization process brings along the problems and disadvantages that refer to the fact that in its case there is an excess of labor and unemployment, that the producers find it difficult to adapt to the rapid changes, that the old habits are rapidly changing and that there appear new ones, as well as new knowledge and skills, that numerous ecological problems appear. However, besides those disadvantages and problems, automatization also brings along the advantages that refer to the reduction of the participation of direct, living work, reduction of energy consumption, raw materials consumption and the intervention of man in production process, improvement of working conditions, increase of productivity of production, faster mastering of the space, control of biological processes (growth, diseases, maintenance of food). Social consequences of automatized technology of production refer to the fact that work is responsible, that it requires more knowledge, education and experience in relation to the work on assembly line. Post-industrial society is a society of intellectual labor, production of knowledge and information: information are non-material (inexhaustible and durable, because they can be used unlimitedly), mass (mass use) and useful (use-value is increased, if they are used more than once). In post-industrial society, it is evident that education and science are increasingly developed at the global level and they become the initiators of the development of society and social organization of work; organized knowledge is the main driving factor of scientific and technical development; education is very rapidly developed, because scientific and technical development and innovations will represent the essential factors of progress. Scientific, cultural and technological achievements become massively available. Dominance of service industry over production leads to the reduction of the number of employed people in agriculture and industry and feminization of the labor, i.e. mass employment of females. Inconstancy of employment and frequent changing of the production jobs, increase of unemployment rate, increase of social differences between the rich and poor are important characteristics of this society as well as strong urbanization, frequent migrations, changes of residence, increase of time spent for going to work, as well as the increase of social contacts, but it is difficult to establish lasting friendships (alienation). In addition, of course, all of these processes will also bring to the disintegration of traditional families. Therefore, for the post-industrial age, era of production and work, it important and characteristic that in: - economic sector- comes to the transition from processing industry and economy of mass industrial production to the production of services; - technology central significance goes to new industries, based on science and production of knowledge; nit comes to the change in the approach to the use of information; - sociological aspect information society is formed and new technical elites and new forms of stratification are developed, as well as new forms of organization of the social and individual life. Post-industrial era of production and work introduces new technologies, which are highly intensified and which develop a high productivity. They are scientifically, technically and informationally highly determined, require little raw materials and less pollute the environment (with the exception of nuclear technology and biotechnology); influence the development of other technologies and industries, because they are base technologies. In addition, they increase the level of changing the professions, supersede the live work from the sphere of production and increase the unemployment, change the way of life and influence the social changes lead to the changes in organization of work processes.

700

In its essence, post-industrial society is the society of knowledge in the double sense because theoretical knowledge: - more strongly links the science and technology, and in which the research is the source of innovation, and - becomes a significant field of financial appropriation of GSP. Post-industrial society is the society of the new values, new way of life, new forms of communications and new technologies. Providing services, creating intellectual technologies (electronic computers, informatics, cybernetics), the universities and institutes become significant because science and education have a special importance. Production of services (transition from economy of goods to service economy), production of knowledge, information and science (knowledge becomes the foundation of innovations and of shaping the social policy), the existence of telematics, i.e. the connection of computers with telecommunications, social control of technology, dominance of intellectual technologies in the processes of decision-making, socio-cultural technologies in the processes of decision-making, socio-cultural changes that imply changes in the way of life, as well as the changes that emphasize the significance of the ideas, knowledge, science and new values those are the essential technical, technological and social characteristics of post-industrial society.

CONCLUSION
For understanding the relationship between the technology and society, it needs to be realized that the role of a state, which slows down, releases or leads the technological innovation, is the key factor in the overall process, because it expresses and organizes social and cultural forces that prevail at certain time and in certain space. For the good part, the technology expresses the ability of society to reach the level of technological knowledge by the mediation of social institutions, including the state. Historical process, through which such a development of production forces goes on, is characterized by the properties of technology and its involment in social relations, processes and changes. The same can be said for the current technological revolution. It did not appear by accident and spread itself in the historical period of global restructuring of capitalism, to which it served as key tool. Hence, the new society, which originates from such process of change, is capitalist and information at the same time, although in various countries it brings significant historical variations, depending on their history, culture, institutions and their specific attitude towards the global capitalism and information technology.

REFERENCES
[1] Avdagi Mehmed, Sindikati Bosne i Hercegovine i njihova uloga u drutvenoj tranziciji, Sarajevo 2001. godine [2] Bijker, W.E., Hughes Th., Pinch T., (eds) 1984, The Social Construction of Technological Systems, MIT Press [3] Ellul, J., 1964, The Technological Society, Knopf, New York [4] Habermas, J., 1985, Znanost i tehnologija kao ideologija, kolska knjiga, Zagreb [5] Mumford, L., 1986, Mit o maini, GZH, Zagreb [6] Pinch, T.J., Bijker,W.E., 1984, "Drutveno proizvonenje injenica i tvorevina: O cjelovitom pristupu izuavanju znanosti i tehnologije", Gledita, 25:21-57 (1984), Mart - April [7] Rogi, I., 2000, Tehnika i samostalnost, Hrvatska sveuilina naklada, Zagreb

701

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

QUALITY MANAGEMENT SERVICES

Mira Avramovi
High Business School of Leskovac, SRBIJA, e-mail: mimik@infosky.net

Summary: Today, in terms of increasing competition and increasing demands of consumers, quality is the main factor in the survival of companies in the market. Increasing profitability and competitiveness and the development of the overall economy becomes the determining factor of a nation. Quality, effectiveness and competitive advantage become crucial factors in turbulent markets. Access to quality has evolved from terms relating to quality of products and services related to the notion of direction. TQM is the management system that ensures the achievement and maintenance quality, increased flexibility, efficiency and work effectiveness. The TQM system is fully oriented towards the market, and it is a process that begins and ends with consumers. This paper will discuss the dimensions of service quality, use of the TQM approach as a service and the service quality improvement process. For the writing of this paper, the relevant literature in the field of management and other economic disciplines will be used. Key words: service, quality, management services, marketing services, TQM system, the market, consumers.

1. INTRODUCTION
Quality as a concept means to produce and provide market services that will fully satisfy the requirements, desires and expectations of consumers. Consumers are becoming more sophisticated, and it requires constant analysis and adjustment of market supply demand. Quality becomes a decisive factor in the effectiveness and competitiveness in a turbulent market. Problems in regards to the quality of service are directly related to the problem of meeting the needs and expectations of consumers. Quality management is an integral part of meeting the needs and expectations of internal and external customers. The process of quality management is linked to the management of internal operations and marketing. It requires a clear understanding of consumer desires and capabilities of the organization for their fulfillment. The system of promotion and quality management has developed rapidly in recent years. They can be categorized in order of occurrence: quality inspection, quality control, quality assurance, total quality control and the TQM approach to quality. Development of service management has led to progress in the standards of quality management. The International Standard (1) is a standard that was written especially for services and is adapted to the characteristics that accompany this activity. The standard explains to "professionals" in the application. It occurs as a result of the development of new concepts of service management, noting among other things, human aspects, social processes, customer perception, image, culture, organization and motivation. Most important is that it points out that consumer assessment of the final measure of quality of service. In addition, he points out that qualitative and quantitative characteristics of the services must be taken into account.

2. DEFININIG QUALITY OF SERVICE

The word quality is often mentioned both in business and in everyday life. Many scientists and experts have attempted the answer to the question, What is quality? Depending on the approach and execution, there may be different definitions of the following types of service quality (2): - transcendental approach and definitions of quality, - production-based definition,

702

- definition based on the user, - process-based definition, - value-baseddefinitions The transcendental approach to the definition assumes that there is an unsurpassed service-degree of perfection. This is visible only through the experience of the service. This approach is particularly applicable in the feature and visual art forms. It requires repeated exposure to customer service. From the standpoint of managers, it does not help a lot of statements about the quality of services after the service is used, then it may be too late if the consumer is dissatisfied. Production-based definitions have a precise and measurable definition. The difference in quality is the result of the different ingredients or attributes from which the product is made. So here is a category of objective measurements of adaptable, physical tangible goods, where the taste, needs and preferences of consumers have no influence on the perception of quality. Definitions based on the user starting from the basic conclusion that the quality lies in the eyes of consumers, equated with maximum customer satisfaction. These definitions are subjective and are in demand. The production company gives process-based definitions, where the leading role-played is played by engineers and other specialists involved in the production. It is understood that approval of internally-defined specifications are often conditioned by the desire for greater productivity and lower costs. Value-based definitions of quality are seen in the dimensions of values and costs, ie. Quality is the value for the price. Quality can therefore be defined in different ways and with a distinct standpoint of the product and all processes. Unlike traditional physical, tangible assets, determining the meaning and essence of quality in the service sector is far more complex issue because, "it is not a function of statistical measures of quality, this includes physical disabilities or evaluation managers, it is the way the consumer views the service." (3) Continuing from this point, we can say that quality is, "a set of characteristics of an entity to meet established and expressed needs." Consumers buy products/services because of the benefits provided. The uses may be distinct, but the basic elements serve to satisfy certain desires and needs of consumers. Therefore, the definition should start with the facts. Basic concepts of quality in the service context are therefore to be in its definition and identification of earnings from the consumer, and from the consumers understanding and perception of quality. That proves that the quality of everything that the consumer or target market segments is as the consumer perceives it. Quality is the ability of this product or service to meet or exceed consumer expectations.

3. DIMENSIONS OF SERVICE QUALITY

Consideration of the concept of quality in the service sector is very important for any company that is oriented to the market access of business and that the focus is the needs and desires of consumers and ways to respond in a profitable way to them on a long term basis. The positive effects of a strategic services company that issues access to quality is reflected primarily in the following: (4) - helps the company to achieve a competitive advantage, - contributes to the company's image, - the main prerequisite of building a long-standing loyalty, - increases the value of services and thus enables the formation of higher prices, - increases company profit. For these reasons, the company must know what the dimensions of quality are that predominantly affect whether the consumer is satisfied or not, and whether or not it has an impact on his decision to buy. Specificity of services and business services sector makes a difference in the perception of quality in the context of service quality and size of manufacturing enterprises, tangible or physical goods. So, for certain durable consumer goods (eg. refrigerator), dimensions of quality defined in terms of manufacturing companies could present through the following: (5) - performance - how it works - features - product attributes - reliability (whether or not it spoils) - appropriate specifications - validity (providing value over the long term) - the possibility of repair service - sensuous feeling of consumers (aesthetics, smell, taste) - perceived quality (the impact of reputation, brand, etc.). Dimensions of the quality of service companies are subject to separate analysis. Specificity of services affects the specificity of observation dimensions of quality. Consumers are more difficult to objectively measure the quality of services in relation to the quality of the product, because there are fewer tangible signs (associated

703

mainly with the service environment and related products). In addition, the perception of service quality result from (subjective) comparisons of consumer expectations with actual service performance, which is again difficult to determine and compare in terms of the quality standards. Scores are made on the basis of results (used) services, but include a service evaluation process (delivery). According to the SERVQUAL model of service, quality dimensions are (6): - reliability (ability to deliver promised services in an appropriate manner), - responsibility (effort, willingness to help and provide prompt service) - security (knowledge and courtesy of employees, and the ability to gain their trust) - empathy (providing personalized service, monitoring the customer as an individual) - tangible elements (presence of natural elements - the materialization of services). SERVQUAL is a multidimensional scale that compares the perception of consumer expectations in terms of quality of service. Perceptions are measured on a scale of 1 (not at all agree) to 7 (total agreement). The results are compared with the responses of consumers in terms of expectations of "world-class companies," (ie. "great company" or "excellent company" in a given industry). While the specific issues related to the particular enterprise customer experience with the services of the company, and therefore define their perception (ie. the consumers personal vision) of which the results are given to an imaginary or real ideal company, in fact, represent the wishes and expectations of consumers in the service given business. The results are comparable in general and on specific dimensions and reveal where the largest discrepancies in consumer expectations are in the service sector.

4. APPLICATTION OF TQM, APPROACHES IN SERVICE

The largest number of applications of the TQM approach was usually limited to the industrial sector. Managers have been under the influence of traditional thought and, until recently, believed total quality should be measured only if it produced a tangible product. However, it is now observed in the components that TQM philosophy is applicable to all business sectors, including service companies. Service companies must also prepare for the fierce competition within the service industry. The TQM approach, especially in recent times, has attracted more attention as the solution or key to continuously improving quality, and thus also achieving long-term competitive advantage. This approach does not always provide the expected results, but it creates a satisfactory improvement in the quality and competitive advantage. Quality improvement leads to a reduction in costs resulting from reduced errors and omissions as well as increased sales, which are the result of higher levels of customer satisfaction. The process of improvement of service quality has the essential aim to increase income from sales, and reduce costs by reducing or eliminating errors and omissions in the provision of services. Adoption of profitable decisions related to the cost of quality improvement is a key management issue. All efforts for the improvement of quality must be financially justified, which means knowing where to invest efforts and when to reduce their investments. The effects of improvement of service quality are: (8) Increased capabilities of service companies to attract consumers because of the positive personal message (word of mouth), as well as the ability of companies to promote their offers. This effect has a great similarity with the repositioning of products and is part of "offensive marketing," which strives to attract new consumers. Increased current customer satisfaction leading to repeat purchases so that small customer retention rates have an enormous impact on company profits. Marketing costs to attract new customers are five to six times higher than the costs of retaining existing customers and to existing customers, who tend to buy more than new customers. The way to keep current customers with a higher level of satisfaction is called "defensive marketing." The TQM model must take into account access to the quality of yield. This approach to quality is based on several assumptions: - quality of the investment, - efforts to improve quality must be financially justified, - it is possible to overspend on quality, - not all costs that are invested in quality are equally valid. The process of quality management can be presented in a new way of using the model of service quality improvement and profitability. The model requires that the costs of quality improvement are treated on the same basis as other investment decisions. The absence of treatment costs as a result of lack of investment is a solid basis for assessing the financial impact. The model provides a framework for evaluating the financial impact of the efforts that have been taken into account to improve quality. The second assumption says that the efforts related to quality must be financially justified, or as a synergy, assuming that the quality justifies investment.

704

Some efforts to improve can be inefficient in the sense that there is too much wasted (decreasing returns), or that the money is spent on improving the wrong things (inefficient use of funds). The last two assumptions of the model must be fully consistent with the first two assumptions. Gronroos proposed a program of quality management services that helps implement a service management strategy, which causes a constant increase in service competition, as it should be increased. This program is composed of six subprograms: - development of service concepts, - consumer expectations management program - service score management program, - internal marketing program, - physical environment management program, and - consumer perception management program. The construction of a consumer-oriented service concept allows management to create high-quality resources and successful activities. Traditional marketing activities should never be planned and implemented in isolation. One must always be associated with the experience and skills of service providers who are ready and able to provide a service to consumers. The issue of managing customer expectations is an integral part of each program to achieve quality of service. This being the case, the intense management communication is an important element of service management. Technical quality of service is the result of interaction between consumers and sellers and is a part of the overall experience of services. The product of interaction is necessary in developing and maintaining accordance with the service concept, which is in line with the needs and desires of target consumers. The key to superior service quality and achieving competitive advantage is the functional quality of the process, which is observed in the interaction between customer and vendor services. This dimension of quality is dominant and is reflected through courtesy, flexibility, and general service staff to contact preference through their ability and willingness to act as part-time marketers. One of the major features of access control for total quality is the way we attract managers from all parts of the organization to work together, beyond the traditional functional boundaries, in order to improve quality and management. As a result, quality becomes an integral concept of production and marketing orientation. Marketing is always lacking in the method by which it can reconcile the wishes of consumers on the one hand, and possibilities for their satisfaction of the company on the other. Quality management services are a relatively unknown link. Therefore, the proposed series integration link between marketing and operations phases of planning and execution of operations are oriented to the improvement of quality. The effects of such management should be visible through improved productivity by way of improved sales (build loyal customer bases). The service quality management program should provide adequate orientation to managers in the field of providing services to consumers. The internal service provider market, contact staff, managers, marketers and other types of employees should be considered first. In that sense, continuous and strategic internal marketing processes are assessed as a key in the development of quality management. Physical resources, technology and system service organizations must be developed in line with efficient internal standards. The resources and physical environment can often produce a negative impact on the perception of the interaction between seller and buyer services. Therefore, management of the physical environment is an indivisible part of the overall program quality. It is advantageous to inform consumers on how to proceed in the interaction between customer and consumer services. If the consumer does not want, or does not know how to behave in accordance with the expectations of service providers, the quality can be destroyed. This can be reflected through the long waiting periods or a gloomy atmosphere, which greatly deteriorates the quality of services.

5. PROCESS OF IMPROVEMENT OF SERVICE QOALITY

Improving service quality is not a simple process, considering that there must be significant implications for the entire culture of the organization. Activities that may lead to the successful improvement of service quality are: - identifying the primary determinants of service quality, - managing consumer expectations, - manifestations management, - consumer education regarding service, - developing a quality culture, - automatic quality, - monitoring services.

705

Recognizing determinants of service quality is crucial for improving quality. There is a problem because consumers and service providers are not necessarily perceived service quality based on common determinants, even if these determinants are supported. The problem is that they are evaluated in different ways. In order to gain new customer service, organizations resort to giving consumers the promise of creating a certain level of expected service. Organizations make promises to consumers in accordance with their abilities to provide services so that consumers accept them and use them to create a competitive advantage over the service industry. It is far better not to promise to exceed the level of service quality; otherwise it may lead to adverse consequences for the organization. As for the exceptional form, it involves many parties. Consumers often see from demonstrators how services could be credible (expectations before using the services) and how the service was actually accepted (rating the service after purchase and use). Physical phenomena and people play an important role in the formation of the organization's image. Retailers are particularly interested in architecture and design, aspects which can be very successful determinants of its image-in a similar way, the atmosphere affects the image, as well as consumer expectations and their perceptions of services, different factors, such as color, music, furniture, space and others. Consumers can wake up with different feelings about the service organization. These are feelings that can manifest as a friendly feeling, thrift, sobriety, authority, rationality, stability and flexibility. Consumers expect the physical aspects of the service; physical signs should be consistent with the nature of the services. Otherwise, there may be uncertainty and inconvenience, which may lead to loss of purchase. Providing opportunities for consumers to understand the nature of the services is a prerequisite for determining the quality of service. The quality of services is provided through the organization, which carries all of its flaws. Orientation of service quality implies the engagement of all parts of the organization. However, a number of institutional factors can help but also hinder the provision of quality services. The following is frequently referred to: (8) - human- full profile of the workplace, selection, training, rewards and career, - organization and Structure- integration and coordination function and reporting structure, - measuring- monitoring complaints and consumer satisfaction and evaluation of performance, - system- includes technical support, computer support databases, - services- including VAT, range and quality and performance standards, which meet the needs and expectations of consumers, - complaints- management complaints, asset sales and promotion and management of resources, - communications (internal)- policies and procedures, feedback within the organization, and - communication (extremes)- education of consumers, creating expectations. Describing the problems that are related to services is best accomplished with the help of people who are directly involved in the work. The first step could be to organize groups that have the task to overcome boundaries between departments. Creating a high level of visibly achieved results can support the process of service management. The development of service quality must be understood as a driving force within the organization and as something that will surely get acclamation and reward. Enthusiasm for the development and quality development can be encouraged within the organization through seminars, programs to encourage enthusiasm and internal newsletters. The inconsistency of quality staff that is present in the quality of services can be completely avoided by the application of process automation servicing. It is therefore necessary to investigate and determine which parts of the services that require the presence of people can be automated. In undertaking efforts to improve the quality of services, the financial justification of the process must be taken into account. One of the major objectives of each program of measuring customer satisfaction and quality of service is to enable management to accurately define the processes and sub processes to quality improvement efforts, which lead to a greater degree of consumers care. By improving access to quality services, which includes the financial justification, we collect information to support management decision on the involvement of financial resources, only after it is assured that the investment in the system is profitable. The improvement process of service quality consists of the following stages: (9) 1. Preliminary information gathering - surveys of consumers, market information, internal information. This phase is typical in that it is difficult to use the opinion of management, so inevitably arise information gaps even in leading-edge companies. 2. Identification of potential opportunities - managers identify the best opportunity for profitable improvement of quality. 3. Limited testing of improvement - whether anticipated costs and the extent to which the expected percentage change in the percentage satisfied or very satisfied really exists. 4. Financial projections based on hard data - the financial impact of the equation, the estimated cost of correctness and efficiency, which is now used as input.

706

Eventually fully adjust for quality improvement - management must adapt to these efforts to secure strong financial returns derived with the necessary costs associated with undertaking these efforts. Continuous quality improvement then requires management to return to phase one of the business process and revalue on the basis of updated data from consumer surveys in order to apply the potential future opportunities.The company must continuously communicate internally as well as with consumers in the extreme as to what they think of the given service and what to do in order to maintain improvement. The international standard ISO 9001:2000 defines the requirements for quality management system and is focused on the effectiveness of the system to meet the demands of consumers. Model Quality Management System to ISO 9001:2000 process includes orientation, which implies that any product or service is the result of a process or a set of interrelated activities. This model shows the links that exist between the processes defined in the standard requirements, but does not provide a detailed review process. The aim of the international standard ISO 9001:2000 is to achieve an effective quality management system by enabling the company to identify its strengths and weaknesses in the market.

6. CONCLUSION
In order to be a competitive company in the market, it is important to define the appropriate strategic approach to quality products and services. Strategic approach to quality refers to a strategy of quality in one of four ways:as a functional strategy, recognizing the need for a quality management function in the company, which can contribute to optimal use of resources companies and affect the functioning of enterprises, as the only competitive strategy that focuses on a certain level of quality in order to create adequate consumer perceptions about the company and thus create differentiated value for the customer to the competition, as one dimension of competitive strategy in which quality is regarded as one of several strategic variables, and as an organizational culture that fits any competitive strategy and where to put quality above all other considerations.

REFERENCES
[1] Felts, C., Quality Management and Quality Sistems Elements, IOS, London, 2007, p.112 [2] Gronroos, C., Service Management and Marketing, John Willey and Sons ltd., England, 2007, p.34 [3] Giese, J., Cote, J., Defining Consumer Satisfaction, Academy of Marketing Science Review, 1/2002., p. 75 [4] Peter, Paul J., Olson, Jerry C., Consumer Behavior & Marketing Strategy, McGraw Hill International, 2005, p.111 [5] Lovelock, Ch., Wirtz, J., Services Marketing, 6th edition, Pearson International, 2007, p.412 [6] Veljkovi, S., Marketing usluga, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd, 2009, pp.111-112 [7] Rust, R., Zahornik, A., Keinghan, L., Making Service Quality Finnancially Accountable, Journal of Marketing, 2002, pp. 58-70 [8] Palmer, A., Principles of Services Marketing, McGraw Hill, England, 2005, pp.74-76 [9] Wilson, A., Zeitnaml, V., Bitner, J., Gremler, D., Services Marketing, McGraw Hill, England, 2008, pp.7375.

707

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN FUNCTION OF INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL USERS

Nedad Azemovi, Emir Haderi
BK - Univerzitet, Novi Pazar, SRBIJA, e-mail: emir.hadzeric@gmail.com

Summaryt: quality improvement is becoming a priority of not only businesses, but governemtal agencies as well, educational and scientific institutions, professional and expert associations. Introduction and improvement of quality should contribute to quality of life, standard, environment and security. The process of market globalization will even more affirm quality as a fundamental source of competitive advantage. Key words: quality, concepts, targets, users.

1. INTRODUCTION
Total=Quality involves everyone and all activities in the company Quality=Conformance to Requirements Management=Quality can and must be managed [6]. Total quality management is a philosophy, a set of tools and processes the outputs of which bring customer satisfaction and continual improvement. All members of total quality of an organization thrive to promote business through participation of all members in solving problems in all parts of an organization. TQM is a concept focused on satisfying demands of both external and internal users. The results of TQM include processes that produce faultless goods, with competitive price and formidable value. Above all, TQM provides satisfying needs of all users, improving internal processes that increase profit of an organization, creating conditions for producing new products and services. The success of TQM requires three factors: effective training, effective implementation and total commitment of top management [7].

2. CONCEPTS OF TQM
Basic concepts of TQM are: Continual process improvement User/customer focus Prevention of defects Universal responsibili [1].t Continual improvement of process. Most of the employees think that their tasks and jobs are isolated from the whole organization. The first step in improving a process is to make the employees realize that their job is a very important part of the whole organization and continual improvement of a process. A process is defined as a set of interrelated activities and resources that turn input elements into output ones. In order to improve a process, we need to exactly know who our users are and what their needs and demands are. A continual improvement represents a process and understands that improvements of a process become part of the whole organization and that constant incremental improvements occur. Focus on user/customer. Everybody is a user. An external user is a person who buys a product or a service. An internal user is a person that takes over the outputs of a process of other employees.

708

Each employee must think of how to provide an additional value for the following one. This includes establishing users needs and demands, and meeting them through corresponding processes. For example, an internal user of supply control will request to receive daily reports on possible delays and prompt assistance in solving problems with suppliers. Ford Motor Co. introduced a unique free telephone system for customers throughout the US in order to provide a constant follow-up of customer satisfaction with company products. A satisfied customer brings profit. Ford calculated that a company must spend five times more money in order to attract a new customer compared to retaining an old one. Preventing defects. TQM is an approach focused on preventing defects, not merely on dry inspection that sorts defects after they show up. The methods which are used in preventing defects are: Statistical Process Control, a Tagucci method for designing experiments and other. Preventing defects saves time and money. Imagine a production. The parts are produced, assembled and the product is delivered to a user. The costs of correcting defects after the customer has discovered them are far greater than the costs of prevention. Universal responsibility. Universal responsibility understands participation and commitment of all departments in an organization, not only quality department. The quality must spread throughout the whole organization. Each working group in an organization must constantly look for ways of improving their own products and services.

3. GOALS OF TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Some of the most important goals of TQM are: Lower costs Higher income Involvement of people Most satisfied users Lower costs. Better quality means reduction of errors and needs for additional work that does not contribute to improving the product value. In the last decade companies throughout the world have shown that quality often means lower costs. The costs of prevention made in designing phase are far lower than the ones in the production itself; these are on the other hand, far lower than the costs of establishing defects and corrections after the final control has been made, and are again lower than the costs of correction after establishing defects by the user. Higher income. Better quality provides customer satisfaction, greater market share, higher degree of customer retaining, increased customer loyalty, and even acceptance of the highest prices. The users are increasingly expecting higher quality of goods and services. By overcoming the level of quality of competition offer, the organizations acquire new customers, retain the old ones and break through into new markets. Very often, informed users are willing to pay highest prices for high level quality which understands new, useful features and has an impact on total life cycle product costs. Involvement of people. For years the organizations had deemed their employees a means for acquiring lower costs, generating higher profit and satisfied users. Today, the leading companies consider employee satisfaction one of major TQM goals. The concept of appropriately authorized employees represents a framework for a myriad ofnew concepts in quality area [1]. Appropriately authorized employees are able to establish mechanisms of managing their own work. However, the concept of appropriately authorized employees understands much more than managing ones work. The employees most often posses knowledge, skills and experience to implement changes in processes, improving them both in effectiveness and efficiency. Satisfied customers. Satisified customers are those who incessantly buy your products and services, who advertize them and promote them, who first check whether you have certain goods or services and than look for them elsewhere. Loyal users are the ones who buy goods and services from exclusively one user. The studies have shown that satisfied customers have a great impact in the market.

4. PRINCIPLES OF TQM
The most significant principles of TQM are: 9 Customer focus 9 Involvement of all employees 9 Continual learning and promotion

709

Customer focus. Modern definition of quality says it comes down to meeting and overcoming the user demands. The companies must pay attention to all aspects of goods and services that bear an impact on quality and customer satisfaction. We are not simply referring to mere satisfaction of customer needs, reducing defects and number of complaints. The efforts of an organization must be directed to development of new products that really charm users, whereas one must promptly react to all changes of customer and market demand. From TQM point of view, all strategic decisions made in organizations must rest on understanding the user. Organizations must understand that interior users are as important in providing quality as the external ones, which are the ones who buy products. Employees who view themselves as a part of chain suppliers and users best understand their own relationship with quality of end product. Involvement of all people and teamwork. Juran thought that skill of managers to mobilize knowledge and creativeness of the whole organization is the basic reason of fast progress of quality in Japan. The situations where managers put necessary resources on disposal of employees and encourage them to take certain actions almost always result in better production processes and products. By allowing the employees to, either individually or in teams, take part in decision making which affects their jobs and users as well, managers create wide space for improving quality. Good intentions, without particular steps, are not sufficient for success. Removal of bureaucratic obstacles and empowering employees in making decisions which contribute to satisfying user needs is a pre-condition for establishing trust and creating productive environment in workplace. Continual learning and promoting. Continual promoting has roots in the industrial revolution. The father of scientific management, Frederic Taylor, claimed that management is responsible for finding the best way to do a job and train employees appropriately [5]. Continual promotion and learning should become an integral part of managing systems and processes. Continual improvement refers to both incremental-small, gradual and big and quick improvements. Improvements are manifested in the following manner: By increase in results and efficiency of resourse using By increase of response and shortening of production cycles By decrease in errors, defects and faults By increase of value delivered to user through improved products and services [2]. Learning is an idea related to adjustment to changes, which results in setting modified goals and acquisition of new approaches. In modern conditions, managers and other employees are required to accept concept of lifelong learning. By learning they at the same time impact what is already known inside the company. Speed of learning of an individual determines speed of learning of a company and vice versa. Organizational learning expresses ability of a company to create and acquire new knowledges, new concepts and successfully adjust them to their unique business environment. Organizational learning is nourished by encouraging teamwork, communication among different business functions and readiness to communicate with different stakeholders and to improve performances.

5. TQM INFRASTRUCTURE
The idea of infrastructure is related to basic management systems critical for good functioning of organizations. The infrastructure that supports basic principles of total quality contains the following elements: 9 Leadership 9 Strategic planning 9 Human resource management 9 Process management 9 Data and information management Leadership. Success of each organization depends on results of employees on the lowest scale in an organization. Ross Perot once said that things are managed, and people should be led. All managers must act as leaders in quality area. Their task is to establish value system of quality and to instill it into the structure of the organization. Personal participation of top managers in everyday activities that all employees know, serves as an example for all the employees [3]. The most significant features an excellent leader should posses are: o Noticeable, dedicated and educated o Missionary o High goals o Tough manager o Exceptional communication skills o Organizer o Constant contact with customers

710

Strategic planning. Acquiring quality and leadership in the market requires a vision of the future, for the sake of which organizations must deal with some fundamental issues: 9 Who are our users? 9 What is our mission? 9 What principles our organization values? Strategic business planning should be the instigator of quality improvement in the whole organization which must be, long-term, dedicated to interests of all stakeholders: users, employees, subcontractors, shareholders, public and community. Human resource management. Acquiring goals related to quality requires a completely dedicated, educated, trained and process-included labor force. The employees, who come into direct contact with users must posses the ability for complete understanding of their demands and needs; the workers in production lines are required to posses specific technical skills, and all the employees, with no exception, are required to be able to use data and information for constant improvement. These abilities can only be acquired by appropriate education and training. The greatest challenges in employee development understand integrating practice of human resource management selection, awarding, quality of work, training and career promotion and its fitting into business streams [4]. Process management. Process management consists of projecting processes that result in products and services that satisfy user needs, daily control of correctness of their functioning and their continual improvement. Well projected processes result in quality products and services, less defects and need for additional work. Process management understands undertaking prevention activites. Prevention understands installing quality when projecting, in products and services, as well as in processes they generate. The costs of prevention in projection phase are considerably lower than costs that originate when correcting the occurring problems. Data and information management: modern business more and more comes down to measurements and analyses in planning, re-examining of business results, improvement of processes and operations, comparing to competing organizations. The application of statistical methods, with real data, represents powerful means for problem solving and constant improvement. Measurements provide the most important data on key processes, products, services and acquired results. A number of data types and information is used to evaluate and improve quality: On user needs Market research results On product and service features On employee work On operation implementation The analysis of data and information creates a base for decision making at all levels in an organization.

6. CONCLUSION
Having in mind that the quality determines success and vitality of organizations, a management system that starts from quality and leads to goal is required. A system of quality management is in no way a formality that needs to be fulfilled in order to meet the standards of world market, but a particular social technology that goes into the manner and organization of businesses. Quality management should be harmonized with strategic determinations of organizations, character of their business activities and the kind of products they offer to customers. The customer is the one who determines the quality rather than the producer. To estimate quality, one needs to know the needs of users.in different markets, expectations of customers as to the quality are different. In more developed markets, requirements are stricter and expectations more refined. Customer orientation shows that the concept of quality is marketing-based. Therefore only market-oriented economy in which organizations consistently apply marketing approach can meet the challenges of quality revolution.

REFERENCE
Bokovi G., Upravljanje kvalitetom u industriji , Ekonomski fakultet u Niu, Ni, 2004. Omochou K. V., Ross E. J., Principle of Total Quality, Boca Raton, Florida, 2004. Rakovi R., Kvalitet u upravljanju projektima, Graevinska knjiga, Novi Sad, 2007. Stoner D., Friman E., Gilbert D., Menadment, elnid, Beograd, 2000. uriin D., Janoevi S., Menadment i strategija, Centar za izdavaku delatnost Ekonomskog fakulteta u Beogradu, Beograd, 2005. [6] http://home.att.net/~iso9k1/tqm/tqm.html [7] http://hr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Potpuno_upravljanje_kvalitetom [8] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Total_Quality_Management. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

711

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SECURITY INTELLIGENCE ACTIVITIES IN THE TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT DANGEROUS

Mirsada Badi
State university of Novi Pazar , Novi Pazar, SERBIA

Summary: World of work, according to numerous official and respectable research data, both at international and at national level, faced with massive violation of the physical and psychological integrity in the work environment. Dangerous goods may be radioactive, flammable, explosive, toxic, corrosive, biohazardous, an oxidizer, an asphyxiant, a pathogen, an allergen, or may have other characteristics that render it hazardous in specific circumstances. We are the witnesses of numerous NHB accidents caused by traffic accidents and damages in railroad, road, air, sea and river transportation of dangerous and deleterious substances, especially because our country represents natural and artificial intersection of national, regional and international transportation. Many raw materials, by-products and final chemical products include certain risk during preparation, transport and discharge; it represents the growing danger that can lead to immense and long-term consequences for the people and the environment. Hitherto experience in the world and in our country points to practical statement-nobody is safe in the case of large-scale NHB accidents during transportation of dangerous and deleterious substances. The goal of safety and health at work is to protect employees' health and preservation of property and contribute to productivity, product quality, work motivation. Key words: danger goods, railway transport, security intelligence activities, NHB accidents, transportation, contamination, monitoring, NHB protection, decontamination, safety and health at work.

1. INTRODUCTION
Dangerous chemicals, biological agents and materials are transported as hazardous substances by road, rail and water for the purposes of further processing or utilization. This may lead to potential risks to health. Safe packaging, logistics concepts, traffic guidance, quality control and accident prevention strategies are all designed to reduce the threat to public safety. Great risks in the production, transport, storage and use of hazardous substances and harmful to life and health of humans, animals and plants lie in the possibilities of nuclear, chemical and biological accidents in peace, and the imminent threat of war. These types of accidents are sudden and uncontrolled release of hazardous and harmful substances in the work and the environment. Fires, explosions, high pressure and sudden release of contaminants caused great sacrifice, injury, destruction, huge material damage and degradation of the environment for a long time and with unforeseeable consequences. The transport of dangerous goods is mainly handled on the basis of international provisions. According to an unwritten rule, nuclear and chemical crashes usually happen at night, sudden and very often, in several batches one after the other.

2. RECOMMENDATIONS ON THE TRANSPORT OF DANGEROUS GOODS

The UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods are contained in two documents prepared by the Sub-Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods of the United Nations Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC). They cover the transport of dangerous goods by all modes of transport except by bulk tanker. They are not obligatory or legally binding on individual countries, but have gained a wide degree of international acceptance: they form the basis of several international agreements and many national laws. "Dangerous goods" (also known as "hazardous materials" or "HAZMAT" in the United States) may be pure chemical substance (for example, trinitrotoluene (TNT), nitroglycerin), mixtures (for example, dynamite,

712

gunpowder) or manufactured articles (for example, ammunition, fireworks). The transport hazards that they pose are grouped into nine classes, which may be subdivided into divisions and/or packing groups. The most common dangerous goods are assigned a UN number, a four digit code which identifies it internationally: less common substances are transported under generic codes such as "UN1993: flammable liquid, not otherwise specified". The first version of the Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods was produced by the ECOSOC in 1956.[1] From 1996, the Recommendations were effectively split into two parts: the Model Regulations, which form a suggested drafting for laws and regulations on the transport of dangerous goods; and the Manual of Tests and Criteria, which contains technical information about methods of testing products to ascertain their hazards. An example of the simplest form of transport label is given to the right. The advantages of using arabic numerals as the primary identifier of the substance are immediately obvious: it is not necessary for transport workers to know that Wasserstoff, and all refer to hydrogen, as the translation into any local language can be found from the number. The red diamond and the flame symbol indicate that the main transport hazard is the flammability of the product, and the number "2" at the bottom of the diamond indicates that the product is a gas under ambient temperatures and pressures. The container requirements include some material and construction requirements but also performance testing is required. The package testing is based on the packing group (hazard level) of the contents, the quantity of material, and the type of container.

3. CHARACTERISTICS OF HAZARDOUS CARGO

A dangerous good is any solid, liquid, or gas that can harm people, other living organisms, property, or the environment. An equivalent term, used almost exclusively in the United States, is hazardous material (hazmat). According to the OECD-world organization, chemical crashes are classified according to the number of victims, but the material damage: a) technological disasters / with 25 or more dead, more than 10 million dollars /, b) major crashes (from 5 to 24 dead), c) significant crashes / 3 to 4 dead /.

raznevrste roba.

Figure 1: Cross-border transport of dangerous goods Significant transport of hazardous characteristics, where NHB accident occurs, reflected in the following: - Until an accident occurs suddenly, often at night and often in the series; - Crashes are very unpredictable, given the location, time, type and location, especially when it comes to the accident to transport hazardous materials; - Have a lot of specifics, given the possibility of and extent of consequences for people working and living environment; - Quite often, in spite of stopping the process of uncontrolled release of hazardous substances, clean result is difficult and requires long-term process; - The site creation, crashes are related mostly to viksne installations and transport; - Provision of NHB accident in peace requires complex measures (monitoring, protection, elimination of consequences) and the reaction ie. "Answer" to the fortunes of the pre-prepared plans for defense and security. . The main causes of accidents at dangerous NHB transport are reflected in the following: - Violation of regulations related to the organization of transport, - Inadequate choice of means of transport, - The use of defective transport,

713

- Defect of roads, railways and canals - Non-compliance with the discipline of the participants in traffic, - Non-compliance by a safety and health at work. The most widely applied regulatory scheme is that for the transportation of dangerous goods. The Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods of the United Nations Economic and Social Council issues Model Regulations on the Transportation of Dangerous Goods. Most regional and national regulatory schemes for hazardous materials are harmonized to a greater or lesser degree with the UN Model Regulation. For instance, the International Civil Aviation Organization has developed regulations for air transport of hazardous materials that are based upon the UN Model but modified to accommodate unique aspects of air transport. Individual airline and governmental requirements are incorporated with this by the International Air Transport Association to produce the widely used IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations. Similarly, the International Maritime Organization has developed the IMO Dangerous Goods Regulations for transportation on the high seas. Many individual nations have also structured their dangerous goods transportation regulations to harmonize with the UN Model in organization as well as in specific requirements. Dangerous goods are divided into classes on the basis of the specific chemical characteristics producing the risk. Note: The graphics and text in this article representing the dangerous goods safety marks are derived from the United Nations-based system of identifying dangerous goods. Not all countries use precisely the same graphics (label, placard and/or text information) in their national regulations. Some use graphic symbols, but without English wording or with similar wording in their national language. Refer to the Dangerous Goods Transportation Regulations of the country of interest.

4. TRANSPORT OF DANGEROUS GOODS

During transport and transportation of hazardous materials can be using motor vehicles and trailers that are specially designed and adapted for the transport of certain types of hazardous substances such as. Autocisterne, vehicles with containers and the like. Can also be used for motor vehicle transportation of freight, provided that they meet certain requirements for certain types of hazardous substances regulated by the Law and the European Agreement (ADR). Requirements that must be met in the transport of dangerous goods are as follows: - Knowledge of physical-chemical properties of matter; - Proper storage and transport; - Vessels for transportation (tanks, boxes, containers, cans, casks, drums, sacks, bags); - Determination of safety during transportation and accidents; - Knowledge of national and international regulations for transport; - Control of cross-border transport; Knowledge of traffic regulations (classification of hazardous material, method of labeling, transport conditions): 1) RID International regulations for transport by rail; 2) ADP-European agreement on international road transport; 3) AND-European agreement on international inland waterway transport; 4) IMDG-international regulations on maritime transport; 5) IATA international air transport regulations; - Properties of chemical substances (explosivity, flammability, toxicity, reactivity, korozivost); - Recognizable labels 0-9 and combinations; - Parts of railway traffic (objects within the SR, marshalling yard, pretakalita, loading points, transport directions (lines of internal traffic, transit traffic and the lines of international traffic from the point of departure or arrival in the Republic of Serbia); - Estimate and forecast the risk of accidents (risk identification, assessment and analysis of the consequences, the assessment of the situation meteo, territory and security forces of the accident); - Plan security of chemical accidents in peace; - The establishment of agencies for environmental protection; - Training and training of personnel and forces; - Into a single system linking NBC Republic of Serbia; - Establishment of mobile units. In terms of managing harmful content, transport, safety and health at work includes: - General principles of prevention of professional risks; - Obligation to determine and implement safety and health at work by employers and employees; - Elimination of risk factors that could cause an injury at work; - Training of employees and their representatives for independent and safe operation; - Principles of information and consultation;

714

- Supervision over the implementation of laws and regulations. Security and Intelligence provides a comprehensive contribution to productivity, product quality, work motivation in preparing the cross-border transport of hazardous cargo within the country and cross-border traffic.

Figure 2: International agreements for the transport of dangerous cargo

5. REQUIREMENTS FOR HAZARDOUS TRANSPORTATION OF FREIGHT

The most basic requirements of the ADR regulations must meet vehicles for the transport of dangerous goods are: - Vehicle must be equipped with one (positive and 2) switch off electrical circular flow; - Loading space must be enclosed or covered awning; - Obligation of diesel engines and spark catcher Outlet Pipe-to flammable substances; - Exhaust system directed to the vehicle and was located outside the cargo or to zatiem mask to prevent fires; - Fuel tank must be located away from engine and exhaust system, protected from attack and that in case of failure of fuel leaks on the ground; - Cab drivers must be built from hard flammable material; - A device for heating must be placed in front of the rear cabin wall at a height of 80 cm. from the floor of the cabin, that is secured on fire; - Hot parts are protected and have a device to quickly start the fan; - That the terminal plus protected rubber cap; - Lighting load must be in the appropriate explosive protection. Motor vehicles that transport hazardous materials must have the following equipment: 1) Driving tool and jack for vehicles; 2) at least two fire extinguishers, one of which is to extinguish the engine fire extinguishers and other fire in the cargo vehicle, and that such a charge, which considering the amount and other characteristics of hazardous materials provides an effective fire-fighting; 3) two hand-battery electric lamps with flashing or constant light orange color, which can be seen from a distance of at least 150 meters; 4) The two characters which means the vehicle is stopped on the roads, two bars to indicate vehicles that transport hazardous materials, two shovels, a hack; 5) transmitting a lamp that can be included in the battery and is built so that it can cause an explosion or fire. Motor vehicle which transports hazardous materials can be only one trailer or semi. Trailers carrying hazardous materials must be equipped with braking devices that come into effect by pressing the brake shoe key towing vehicle, in case of interruption or the loss of foreign connection to towing vehicle, automatically stops the trailers.

715

ADR i RID

Figure 3: Marking of vehicles transporting dangerous goods

6.THE PROCEDURE BODY IN CASE OF ACCIDENTS POLICE

The procedure duty police officer: - The driver or other person who registers a car accident, in addition to general data is taken and data on the type of dangerous goods that are transported by a vehicle which is uesvovalo in the accident, the consequences (type and degree) caused an accident, the measures to be taken to prevent the spread and threat to life middle of a dangerous substance; - Sends a patrol to secure the scene and immediately notify the head of duty; - Notify the nearest health facility; - Notify the Inspector KP duty, if necessary, the investigating judge, public prosecutor, Inspector OPPP; - Maintain a connection to the Patrol on the spot, follow the situation and take appropriate measures to repair incurred danger (information and call authorities, companies and institutions: Municipal Staff CZ et al.). The process of police patrols on site: - Provides the scene (to prevent access by unauthorized persons, curious, alert to the danger). In connection with this set the corresponding characters: 50 m in front of and behind the vehicle, they are visible at a distance 150 m, a security zone 30-60 meters; - Assesses opportunities road traffic in the event of prolonged downtime, seek permission to use alternative routes; - The driver takes the data type and characteristics of hazardous materials, risks to life and threatening human health and the environment and measures to remove hazards.

Figure 4: Common sights in cross-border transport of hazardous cargo

716

7. TRANSPORT OF DANGEROUS GOODS BY RAIL

On Serbian Railway network there are several dozen kinds of danger goods and the analysis show relatively great number of accidents. In order to eliminate or at least reduce possible causes of accidents, it is necessary to organize danger goods transport monitoring according to law regulations, make data base and establish efficient monitoring system supported by computer equipment. Monitoring system enables improvisations and indolent attitude in the process of danger goods usage and transport, thus protecting peoples lives and material goods and fully preserving the environment. Railway transport companies who make the transport of dangerous goods are obliged to, depending on the type of hazardous substances, taking preventive protective measures provided guidelines on specific security measures that must be taken at the reception, carriage and transfer of hazardous substances and the measures envisaged in the above rules, to protect life and health, environment, material goods and traffic safety. One characteristic of defects in rail transport, as with stationary objects, the impossibility of knowing the time when it will happen.

Figure 5: Transport of dangerous chemicals by rail But another characteristic of the accidents, the place where accidents can happen, only approximately known. This follows from the fact that the route of movement composition appropriate to me at any time we change the coordinates of the point where the composition. If one of the dimensions of Zack take the length of the composition, as well as important (because it is the other - the width of the composition is negligible), then the number of points on the route length of only 10 km about 20 and the length of several hundreds and even thousands of kilometers is very big. Movement of the train changes his point average position. Because we know only approximately - somewhere on the route.

Figure 6: Heavy accident, but effective interventions mobile unit

717

8. PREVENTIVE ECO-ACCIDENT MEASURES

The most widely applied regulatory scheme is that for the transportation of dangerous goods. The Committee of Experts on the Transport of Dangerous Goods of the United Nations Economic and Social Council issues Model Regulations on the Transportation of Dangerous Goods. Most regional and national regulatory schemes for hazardous materials are harmonized to a greater or lesser degree with the UN Model Regulation. For instance, the International Civil Aviation Organization has developed regulations for air transport of hazardous materials that are based upon the UN Model but modified to accommodate unique aspects of air transport. Individual airline and governmental requirements are incorporated with this by the International Air Transport Association to produce the widely used IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations. Similarly, the International Maritime Organization has developed the IMO Dangerous Goods Regulations for transportation on the high seas. Many individual nations have also structured their dangerous goods transportation regulations to harmonize with the UN Model in organization as well as in specific requirements.

Figure 7: Cross-border transport of R-control cargo

9. CONCLUSIONS
The experience gained in the course of its business and executing the war task are numerous and very important for strengthening the system of defense and protection of labor and the environment, and the level of qualifications, training, staffing and equipment provided by the successful resolution of all problems. After the passing of new legislation on work, in all likelihood, conditions are ripe for review and redefinition of many institutions, including safety and health at work. Among the various interpretations of the concept of safety and health at work and present earlier in the literature, we gave priority to the legal definition, which has a basis in law of international organizations. The main part of the system should be monitoring and notification service, which should possess all information about the chemical substances that are transported, their destination and other necessary information. Najglavniji part of this service unique to the territory of the state plan would be intervention in cases of accidents, which must ensure that a shorter time to early intervention.

REFERENCES
[1] Burton I, "What happened at Mississaga?", Planning emergency responce system for chemical accidents, Adminitrative Guidelines, World Health Organization, Regional office for Europe, Copenhagen, 1981. [2] UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods. Manual of Tests and Criteria (Fourth revised ed.), New York and Geneva: United Nations, 2002. [3] UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods. Model Regulations (Fifteenth ed.), New York and Geneva: United Nations, 2007. [4] Beara B. Uticaj saobraaja na ivotnu sredinu, EKOLOGIKA br.2, Beograd, 2000.

718

[5] Bioanin R. Procena rizika i mere zatite od akcudenata, "BEZBEDNOST" br.5, RMUP Srbije, Beograd, 1991. [6] Bogdanovi M, "Opasnosti od hemijskih akcidenata u Niu i postupci za zatitu ivotne sredine", Fakultet civilne odbrane i zatite, Beograd, 1998. [7] Bioanin R., Stjepan P., Amidi B. Quantification poluters on environment, Sympozionului International de Management (SYM), 22-24. 11. 2007. Temisoare, Romania. [8] uki J. Zatita ivotne okoline, Zavod za udbenike i nastana sredstva, Sarajevo 1990. [9] Pojatar D. Prevoz i rukovanje opasnim materijama, KLASA 1, KLASA 2 i KLASA 3, Valjevo 1994. [10] Bioanin R., Obradovi M., Hyrlova J. Multicriteria optimizationof ekclogical-safety in transport of dangerous cargo, VIII Simpozijum SAVREMENE TEHNOLOGIJE I PRIVREDNI RAZVOJ, 23-24. oktobar 2009. Leskovac. [11] Bioanin R., Vukadin D. Upravljanje rizikom pri transportu opasnih materija, I Nauna konferencija EKOLOSKA BEZBJEDNOST U POSTMODERNOM AMBIJENTU ICAMA-2009, 26-27.jun 2009. Banja Luka. [12] Tomi D., Mayer G. , Prirunik Transport opasne robe u praksi, ID, Novi Sad, 2007. [13] Radmilovi V. Kancerogeni u radnoj i ivotnoj sredini, IP " VELARTA", Beograd, 2002. [14] Radojevi R. Upravljanje kvalitetom i zatitom ivotne sredine, Drutvo OPISJ, Beograd.2000. [15] Zagorac M. Industriska toksikologija, Fakultet zatite na radu, Ni, 1978. [16] Bioanin R., Amidi B., Bioanin I. Ekoloka etika u funkciji bezbednosti, Nauna konferencija Modernizacija i izazovi bezbednosti, 06-08. jul 2007. Vrnjaka Banja. [17] Bioanin R. Quantification of influences on environment in quality system exellence, VIII Balkan Conference on Operational research (BALCOR-2007), 14-17. September 2007. Belgrade-Zlatibor. [18] Joldi V. Pravni aspekti zatite vazduha, XXXIV Savetovanje sa meunarodnim ueem ZATITA VAZDUHA 2006, 24-25. 01. 2007. Beograd. [19] Bioanin R. Strategijski menadment u obezbeenju od nuklearnog, hemijskog i biolokog terorizma, II nacionalna konferencija sa meunarodnim ueem "Ocena profesionalnog rizika-teorija i praksa", 2627.maj 2005. Ni. [20] Vojinovi Miloradov M., Bioanin R., Zatei M. Nuklearni akcidenti-rizici, pretnje i zatita u sistemu bezbednosti, XXXIII Simpozijum o operacionim istraivanjima-SYM-OP-IS 206. 03-06. oktobar 2006. Banja Koviljaa. [21] Bioanin R., Amidi B., Nikoli D. Zatita vode u uslovima radioloke, hemijske i bioloke kontaminacije, V Jubilarna meunacionalna konferencija " Kvalitet vode smanjenjem gubitka vode i odvoenje otpadnih voda", 18-20.maja 2005. Pale-Jahorina, Bosna i Hercegovina. [22] Pravilnik o nainu prevoza opasnih materija u eleznikom saobraaju, Zajednica Jugoslovenskih eleznica, Beograd 1992. [23] Uputstvo za prevoz opasnih materija na J Zajednica Jugoslovenskih eleznica, Beograd 1992. [24] Zatei I., Gavri D., Bioanin I. Upravljanje eko- rizicima pri transportu opasnih materija, I Naunostruna konferencija sa meunarodnim ueem RIZICI I EKO-EZBEDNOST U POSTMODERNOM AMBIJENTU, 10-12. juna 2010. godine, Novi Pazar.

719

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

AIR CARE IN SERBIA AND ITS CONTRIBUTION TO MAINTENANCE OF ECOLOGICAL BALANCE

D. Bataveljic Faculty of Law, University of Kragujevac, SERBIA, e-mail: bataveljic@jura.kg.ac.rs
Summary: The biggest environmental problem in urban areas is air pollution particularly that caused by a dirty technology, motor vehicles, hazardous waste, nuclear-chemical-biological (NHB) crashes. In fact, once released into the atmosphere, NHB weapons and energy, to this day, are big concern for humanity. When we take a better look on the bombing of Yugoslavia, we can see that, among other things, there was an attempt of provoking chemical and radiological war, as well as provoking an ecological disaster. Therefore, the author points out that the end of the twentieth and beginning of the twenty-first centuries are passing under the sign of three interlinked processes: globalization, the strong development of science and technology and global vulnerability of ecological systems. Key words: air, environment, air pollution, global warming, hole in ozone layer, greenhouse, Serbia, air protection, legislation, international environmental law

1. INTRODUCTION
Environmental problems in the protection and improvement of the environment, particularly the protection and improvement of air, essential part of humans life, have become the world's problems. Numerous countries leave these issues for later, expecting that the same problems will be solved by the next generation, and in the meantime often bring inappropriate short-term solutions, which have contributed to the pollution of air and water, soil, food and, in particular, to the creation of radioactive waste. Environmental ethics is completely forgotten, and smog, acid rain appears in the air. There is also a creation of the greenhouse phenomenon and the formation of holes in the ozone layer. In the twentieth century, which can be said to be a century of technical and technological changes, living conditions of most of the world have significantly improved. However, it has raised a number of problems that endangered, primarily, the air we breathe, polluted land, water and environment in general. There is an accumulation of garbage and waste (medical, nuclear), noise and vibration are increased, acid rains and radiation appear. Uncontrolled use of pesticides and artificial fertilizers make the increasing pressure on natural receding resources. There is no much left of drinking water, and clean rivers are very rare. By the highest international institutions that take care of basic living resources, it was concluded that air and water, the cradle of life and eternity, due to everyday pollution and disappearing, are the most critical factor that can reverse any society. In particular, it is stressed that because of them, in the near future, numerous local and wide-scale wars may be driven.

2. AIR AS A PRIORITY
"The greatest treasure of the red man's air. All living beings breathe the same air-the animals, tree, a man. All the air is needed. The air is all around us" (this is from the letter from a chief of the tribe Seattle, to the U.S. president, Abraham Lincoln). Before that, the chief sent a very extensive and shocking letter to the then President of the United States, Franklin Pierce, who in 1854 offered the state to buy much of Indian country and promised Indian people to build them a reserve. So, 150 years ago, although considered uninformed and illiterate, the Indian chief understood the importance of air for all living creatures on earth and in a very beautiful and emotional way told it to the President of the United States. Unfortunately, "the enlightened and literate" did

720

not take his warnings into consideration and now it leads to the fact that the survival of man on the planet Earth is in danger. The air is all around us, any crack, hole and space, if not filled with something else, are filled with air. Many neglect the importance of air, because t is invisible, tasteless and cant be touched. But the air is still something. It is like water, food - a source of life, because in it there is more than 30 different substances. The original earth atmosphere did not contain oxygen, so the living world could not have been settled then. Only when the process of photosynthesis of plant cells began and oxygen was released, the life on the planet was made. But, this process leads to the consumption of carbon dioxide, and its production and consumption, or better to say a balance of carbon dioxide led to the life on earth. However, the decrease or increase of the correlation of oxygen and carbon dioxide, can lead to catastrophic consequences, and even to the destruction of life. The increasing demand for energy will further cause increase in emissions of carbon dioxide, and that emission is the main cause of the effect of "greenhouse". The World Health Organization (WHO) indicates that the concept of air-pollution is a situation in which atmospheric properties contain substances in concentrations that can be harmful to man and his environment. Air-pollution is the oldest form of environmental pollution, because in the ancient times, volcanoes and the occasional forest fires were the biggest polluters of the atmosphere. However, the polluted air that we are now forced to breathe, is a consequence of human activities. Significant air pollution began with use of fossil fuels, particularly from the seventeenth century until today. However, the biggest and most serious pollution of the atmosphere is that with hazardous radioactive materials, which began in the 1945, by dropping the first atomic bombs on Hiroshima and culminated in the1986 with the explosion of a nuclear bomb in Chernobyl. Today, more than two thirds of the world population can not breathe clean air. The most difficult situation is in urban and industrial centers, where the air is particularly polluted. The creation of smog, acid rains, the phenomenon "emission of greenhouse gases", and "holes" in the ozone layer and so on happened because of the inadequate protection from the air pollution. It is important to say that the word smog is a word of English origin, the coin from the words smoke and fog. There are different types of smog. The most famous is the socalled "London", "Los Angeles" and other types. These kinds of smog are caused by the accumulation of harmful substances. For example, from December the 5th to December the 9th 1952 the smog (fog and smoke) in London was so thick, that in the absence of wind about 4,000 people died. However, the first accident caused by smog was recorded in 1881 when 1063 people died of smog poising. In 1948, also in London smog killed 600 people , while in New York in 1963 400 people died. As a result of air pollution in Bhopal (India) in 1984 2500 people died, and 60,000 people lost their sight. Because of this, the consequences of the impact of polluted air on the human body are enormous. The number of people who suffer from asthma, bronchitis, cardiovascular and malignant diseases increases on the daily basis. Here we should particularly point out the phenomenon of so-called "Greenhouse effect", which represent a layer of carbon dioxide (CO2), created above the ground as a result of the global annual production of over 610 tons of the gas by its combustion. This layer of carbon dioxide releases the Sun rays that fall on the ground and heat it. However, the thick layer of carbon dioxide that is formed around the Earth, do not allow returning of the excess of infrared radiation in the universe, and it leads to the increased warming of the ground. The disastrous consequences of the increased content of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere would be seen maybe in the first half of the XXI century. Namely, it is considered that the temperature of the earth will increase by 1-4 C, which would lead to raising sea levels due to melting of snow and ice; tundra will disappear completely, there would be 10 % less forests, deserts will continue its growth, and the ratio of the mountains and the wind will change. The sunlight bounces off of the surface of the Earth, when once penetrate it, and return to space. However, in the middle of the twentieth century, it was discovered that a group of thirty atmospheric gases has a feature to allow sun's rays to penetrate the atmosphere when they come from space to Earth, but does rejected those bounced off the ground and returned to the atmosphere. Retention rays leave in that way all the heat in the atmosphere, and thus there is an appearance of the phenomenon called "greenhouse effect" and these are: methane, oxides of sulfur and nitrogen, and others. It was found that the largest amount among these gases is carbon dioxide and that its increased pollution increases the greenhouse wall, and thereby increasing the reserved amount of heat. It is estimated that the average temperature increase to the 2070 in part of Europe where we live may be up to 7 C. Spain, France, Italy, the Balkans, Greece and Turkey are first to think of.

3. ECOLOGICAL LEGISLATION IN THE WORLD AND IN OUR COUNTRY

For every person in this world, environmental issues, particularly air quality and its protection, is and will be a priority, in every possible aspect, the political and the social. As a result, each country needs to inform its citizens on time and give correct information about a kind of water they drink, what food they eat, how to troubleshoot problems with waste and, above all, what kind of air they breathe.

721

The countries, members of the European Union, are concerned about natural resources, such as forests, mineral water, ores, running water, lakes, air ... as a legacy for the future! No matter that our country is not a member of the European Union (and we expect that in the foreseeable future it becomes), this obligation also applies to our country. Serbia must respect the laws used for decades in the world, and must apply adequate and effective measures and penalties to all who are careless in their work and, in that way, pollute the environment, particularly air that all of us breathe. According to the policies of the World Health Organization (WHO), healthy environment includes five basic conditions: 1) clean air, 2) accuracy and sufficient quantities of drinking water 3) correct and well-balanced diet, 4) safe and peaceful settlement and 5) a stable eco-systems in which people can lead a high life. Clean air program for Europe, adopted in 2001 (CAFE-Clear Air for Europe) can be considered to be the basis for the thematic strategy on air quality, and the most important document in this area is the Kyoto protocol on climate change. Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (known as the Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change) is an addition to an international agreement on climate change, signed with the aim of reducing emissions of carbon dioxide and other emissions of greenhouse effect. Until now it was signed by 170 countries and governmental organizations (status: December 2006). The Protocol entered into force on 16 February 2005 when it was ratified by Russia. Countries that have ratified it are 61% of pollutants. The Protocol was opened for signature in the Japanese city of Kyoto, organized by the United Nations Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), 11 December 1997. At least 55 states were needed to ratify it for its entry into force and the countries that have ratified the protocol are at least 55% of pollutants. This happened on the 16th February 2005 when Russia ratified the Protocol. Serbia has accepted the Kyoto Protocol on 24th September 2007. However, it should be emphasized that the United States, which are major polluters of air, have signed this agreement. The Protocol requires reducing discharges of six gasses that are the main source for greenhouse effect. Those gases are: carbon dioxide, methane, nitrogen dioxide, fluoro-hydrocarbons, perfluoro-hydrocarbons and hexafluoride. In the last few decades the concentration of these gases have increased in the atmosphere due to the use of fossil fuels in industry, transport, etc., which contributes to global warming and climate change. United States and some smaller states have refused to ratify the Kyoto Protocol. Greenpeace believes that the protocol has set too modest goals that will not achieve greater progress. The UN Conference on climate change was held from the 3rd to 15th December 2007 on the island of Bali in Indonesia. The future of the Kyoto Protocol was discussed there. The Protocol establishes a procedure for reducing emissions of greenhouse gases and, among other things, developing clean development mechanism (CDM-Clean Development Mechanism). Here it is important to note that the mentioned protocol supports "sustainable development of developing countries, and if those countries want to be to be a host of CDM projects, then they have to ratify the Kyoto Protocol. When it comes to legislation in the field of environmental improvement and protection of air quality, it should be noted that there are justifiable reasons for harmonization with the European Union, because the area of the environment includes mutually horizontally harmonized legislation and legislation in the fields. The first involves assessing the impact on the environment, accessing to information, public participation in decisionmaking, ways of reporting, responsibility for damage caused to the environment and the second, legislation in areas includes air, water, nature and natural resources (forests, land, etc.) climate change, radiation, waste and more. The harmonization of legislation in the field of environment is necessary both for better functioning of the internal European market and for the improvement of the living conditions of citizens, not only for those citizens of EU countries, but also those who are citizens of countries that are in the process of joining a large European family.

4. SERBIAN READINESS FOR MAKING NEW LAWS

Constitution of the Republic of Serbia (Article 68) stipulates that "everyone has the right to protect its own mental and physical health." In addition, Article 74 of Serbian Constitution stipulates that "everyone has the right to live in a healthy environment and to be informed on time about the real situation of that environment." Also, it is stipulated that "everyone, especially the Republic of Serbia and autonomous provinces, are responsible for environmental protection. Constitution of the Republic of Serbia, also guarantees citizens the right to public information, while the mass media, which is financed from public funds have a obligation to pass the information on time and always give the right information. Law on Agricultural Land (Article 15) stipulates that agricultural land has to be used only for agricultural production and can not be used for other purposes, except in cases and under conditions specified

722

by the law itself. In addition, it is forbidden to release and dispose the hazardous and harmful substances on agricultural land, and in canals for drainage and irrigation. Obviously, none of these constitutional rights, established and guaranteed by the highest general legal acts in our country, as well as these legal obligations are respected by citizens of our country. That is why the Ministry of Environment and Spatial Planning of the Republic of Serbia proposed a series of laws in this area that should make some order. In fact, an essential process involves civilizing of our relationship toward the nature. The great burden of the environment above all is uncontrolled pollution of the air we breathe, and today it is Serbian burning issue for the preservation of health of the future generations. Namely, it is known that a man can live without food more than a month, without water for several days, without air not even a few minutes, and it is exactly this natural resource toward which a man, throughout history and especially today, acts extremely out of hand, and thus leaves lasting consequences on of peoples health and safety on the only planet we have - the Earth. When it comes to our country, then it should be noted that the first significant moves in terms of air protection were made on February the 14th 1990 by the ratification of the Vienna Convention on the Protection of the Ozone Layer , and the text of the Convention has become an integral part of our legislation. The Convention is followed by the appropriate protocols, so they together provide an obligation to prevent air pollution by chemicals that adversely affect the ozone layer. Of course, this should be added to the Law on Ratification of the Treaty on a comprehensive nuclear test ban, the protocol also provides protection of the air. "Subjects - pollutants are required to maintain records on the types and quantities of harmful and dangerous substances discharged into the air-this is the article 102 of the Law on Environmental Protection of the Republic of Serbia from 2004. Unlike the earlier provisions of the Act, according to Article 29 Paragraph 3 of the current Law on Environmental Protection in 2004 the limits of emission that must not be exceeded, are prescribed by the Government of the Republic of Serbia. The Regulation on limit values of emissions is adopted in the Republic of Serbia for the purpose of proper and adequate protection of air, manners and terms of measuring and recording data , which have clearly recorded harmful and dangerous substances. It is obvious that the Serbian laws do not have enough elements for the protection of air, primarily because the present elements of legislation, both inherited from the SFRY, the FRY and of Serbia and Montenegro, as well as those established within the Republic of Serbia, do not cover all pressing issues. This was why there was the very long working on the draft of Law on Air Protection of the Republic of Serbia, which, finally, was adopted in the National Assembly of the Republic of Serbia (Official Gazette no. 36/09) on May 12th 2009. This law regulates the management of air quality and determines the measures and the ways for organizing and controlling the implementation of protection and improvement of air quality as the natural value of public interest that enjoys special protection. The decrees of this Law shall not be applied to the pollution caused by radioactive substances, industrial accidents and natural disasters. The current Law on Air Protection established three categories of air quality, namely: 1) the first category - clean or slightly polluted air where the limits do not exceed the level for not even one polluting substance 2) the second category - quite polluted air where the limits exceed value levels for one or more pollutants, but they go beyond the tolerant values of pollutants, and 3) the third category - over-polluted air, where the limits are extremely exceeded by one or more pollutants. This law now considerably pays more attention to protect and improve air quality. Thus, in the zone in which it was determined that the air quality falls within the first category, preventive measures are implemented to prevent values of air pollution to go across borders, while in the zone, where it was determined that the air quality falls within the second category, measures are implemented to reduce air pollution and to achieve the limit values. Finally, in the zone in which it was determined that air quality falls within the third category, measures are implemented to reduce air pollution in order to achieve short-term accomplishment of values that could be tolerant and long-term accomplishment of limited values. However, if we want the protection and promotion to achieve its purpose, the Ministry, the competent authorities of the autonomous province and the competent authorities of the local self-government have the obligation to timely inform the public in the case of excess concentration. They do it through radio, television, daily newspapers, the Internet or in other suitable way. Also, Article 65 says that the competent authority shall inform the other agencies and organizations and the public through electronic and print media, at least once in the local newspaper, on each of the official languages, as well as through the Internet, of: 1) air quality, 2) plans for air quality 3) plans for achieving the target values in areas where there has been exceeding the target value, 4) the annual report of all the pollutants covered by the law. A special type of pollution is the pollution of natural resources and in that case the government, is required to bring a list of zones and agglomerations every year, which were established in excess of the limit values and derived from natural sources. Also, it is especially important to establish instruments of national policy and planning of air protection. These instruments include: 1) air protection strategy, 2) air quality plans, 3) Shortterm action plans, 4) national program for gradual reduction of the maximum annual national emissions of pollutants and 5) the operator plans to reduce emissions from stationary facilities.

723

In order to protect air and improve the quality of air, in the Republic of Serbia, the latest Law on Air Protection, established the bans: 1) production of substances that damage the ozone layer, 2) import and / or export of substances that damage the ozone layer, 3) drain, and marketing of substances that damage the ozone layer and also fluorine greenhouse gases, 4) flushing substances damaging the ozone layer and so on. The Ministry shall keep records of imports and / or export, placing on the market and consumption of substances that damage the ozone layer and fluorine greenhouse gases, while within other measures for preventing and reducing air pollution fall measures of prevention and rehabilitation, while Article 57 provides the prohibition of newly constructed or reconstructed stationary sources of air pollution. Funds for the financing the protection and improvement of air quality are set by the budget of the Republic of Serbia and the income of the Fund for Environmental Protection. These funds are provided in the budget of the autonomous province, as well as in the budget of local selfgovernment. Our country is dealing with many problems and with major activities that have to be achieved: the adoption of certain policies and appropriate regulations, the adoption of necessary legislation, determining the required location for the construction of individual centers for environmental protection, strengthening of administrative and human capacity for strategic planning in environmental , legislation on air protection, encouragement of education in the field of environmental protection and sustainable development at all levels of teaching innovation in the field of air quality and, most importantly, providing the conditions for the implementation of legal regulations to be made. Serbia is a leader of UNEP, the only global international organization dealing with environmental issues in 2010 and 2011. Our country took over the presidency of this organization at a meeting in Nairobi on February 2009, and then made the conclusions that should give a new foundation for the development of the world, new concerns for environmental protection and air quality. The origin of today's global and environmental crisis could be found in human greed, uncontrolled spending of resources which are not infinite, and, most importantly, in not taking care for future generations. The mankind, in order to deal both with environmental and the economic crisis, has to develop a concept so called "Green economy". One of the models in this concept is the sustainable development, as well as finding new jobs in green industries, which include renewable energy sources that do not jeopardize future generations. This concept accepts the fact that all resources are exhaustive, especially those on which are up to now based economic development of mankind. Unfortunately, Serbia is at the very beginning, to say in embryonic stage of development if we speak about dealing with this issue. In Serbia there is no an integral cadastre of polluters of air and we still do not know what we breathe and what is like our environment. We have only roughly estimated that a Serbian citizen lives in an unhealthy environment, where, of course, there are differences between city and countryside. Citizens of Serbia are faced with dangers of all kinds, especially when we tae into the consideration the consequences after the bombing by the NATO aggressors in the spring of 1999. The question is what we can do to deal with numerous environmental problems that bother us in Serbia, especially with polluted air, not bounded by any limits, without which life is impossible. We expect that the Serbian Parliament will, at the proposal of the ministry, adopt the necessary laws. Namely, the Ministry of Environment and Spatial Planning presented 16 new Laws covering all areas of environmental protection. A large number of working groups was working on making laws, regulations, forms, procedures concerning the commencement of investment in the green economy. Of course, even though we all know that we can not go any further without laws and regulations; we can not do it also without changing the consciousness of citizens. We will do nothing if our citizens continue to behave in the same way they have been behaving before. Namely, the state can make the best laws, set the system in which million euros can run into for the green economy, but this is an essential process that involves civilizing of our relationship toward nature. It is obvious that our country understood the seriousness of the problem and the importance of environmental pollution, primarily air, for the health of the whole population. Until now, the community delayed environmental problems for later, bringing the various transitional solutions, leaving the solution of the problem to the next generation. This approach has led to the destruction of natural resources: air, water, plant material, soil, cultural resources, as well as to the increase of nuclear pollution. There is the creation of smog, acid rains, greenhouse phenomenon in the air; the ozone layer is thinner, which leads to the creation of "holes" in the layer. These negative phenomena increase more and more every year, and in the1986 at the South Pole the size of this "hole" was big as the surface of the North American continent. Of course, this catastrophe didnt turn away even from the North Pole. According to the measurements made in1995 the Arctic ozone layer is very thin, one third thinner than it is normal, and because of that condition there could appear "hole" . Experts Republic Hydro meteorological Service of Serbia believed that the ozone layer was ancient thing. However, when they started to perform measurements of weather conditions, they found that atmospheric belts of the northern and southern hemisphere, for example over Canada, Australia and New Zealand, had holes in ozone layer. It is necessary to perform measurements of the ozone layer throughout the world, and it is scheduled for Belgrade to be the point of measurement for the entire region, because the nearest place to Belgrade where those measurements are held is Budapest. Therefore, International Convention on the Protection of the Ozone

724

Layer was adopted in 1985, and in 1987 the International Protocol on Substances that destroy ozone layer was adopted too. It is obvious that climate change threatens the planet Earth, so the new global plan for reducing greenhouse gas emissions must be respected by all countries.

5. CONCLUSION
From the above, it can be concluded that, today, the environment has become an unavoidable issue of modern society. In fact, a man is responsible for bringing into questions the survival of his environment and his own survival on this planet. People do not take enough care of the resources of nature, but by increasing the production and unlimited earnings they ignore the criteria of protecting and promoting the environment. In addition, they do appreciate enough neither the quality of technology, which has affected the environment, pollution of air, water, land nor the disappearance of many species of flora and fauna. If there is global warming, as well as further uncontrolled environmental pollution and if people do nothing to stop it on time, over a million plants and animal species will disappear only during the twenty-first century. As a result, environmental protection must become a continuous process of achieving integration of economic and environmental goals. For long time the value of the environment has been underestimated. Therefore, it is necessary to undertake a range of activities in the fields of economic revitalization and environmental protection, education, and human resources for the protection and improvement of the environment. Environmental policy should aim at building a society that will be developed in harmony with nature. It is necessary to take the peoples awareness and environmental culture to the next level in order to protect and improve the environment. This is a long-term process of protecting and improving the environment where the integration of ecological requires is environmental not only in the national but also in the regional and global development policy.

6. REFERENCES
[1] Law on protection from pollution of air, Fig. Gazette of the Republic of Serbia, no. 8 / 1973, 33/1977. [2] The Law on Environmental Protection of Serbia from 1991. and 2004. year. [3] Joldi, V., Environmental Crime, Institute for Criminological and Sociological Research, Belgrade, 1995. [4] Pantelic, M., Ecological book - questions and answers, Cacak, 2008. [5] Popovic, S., protection of water and air pollution, NIP, Belgrade, 1985. [6] Law on Ratification of Amendment to the Montreal Protocol on Substances that damage the ozone layer, Official Gazette, no. 24/2004. [7] Bataveljic, D., Vojvodi, M., sanitary-environmental legislation and oversight, high health and sanitary school of professional studies "VISAN", Belgrade, 2009. [8] Joldi, V., Air Protection - legal reality and possibility; example of Serbia, Proceedings of the International Scientific Conference "Air Quality Protection 2008", Chamber of Commerce of Serbia, Belgrade, October 2008, pp. 147-153. [9] Bataveljic, D., Vojvodi, M., Law, high health and sanitary school of professional studies "VISAN", Belgrade, 2009.

725

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

BIO-EFFECTS OF IONIZING RADIATION AND PROTECTION

1

Rade Bioanin1, Radojko Lojanii2, Branka Martinovi2

Department for Bio-Chemical and Medical Sciences, State University of Novi Pazar, SERBIA 2 Faculty of Management in Transport and Communications, Berane, MONTENEGRO 3 Health Center, Prijepolje, SERBIA

Summary: Radioactive elements and ionizing radiation are present in all the universe and planet Earth as well. From its beginning until today, life on Earth has constantly been exposed to the effects of radiation from natural and artificial sources. Functioning of a cell from the moment to moment is the result of the sum of total bio-chemical reactions that are constantly taking place in it. Radiation may directly influence the molecule in some biological system through energy transfer when the molecule is ionized (or excited), or indirectly, through the energy transfer from another ionized molecule. Indirect effect of the radiation is of a particular significance for biological systems. It is known that proteins have the largest number of roles in an organism, and they are, in chemical terms, amino acid polymers, and the part most sensitive to radiation is amino group. Living environment represents a space in which a large number of different people live, and its preservation represents the preservation in terms of radiation and RHB contamination, as well. In this paper, bio-effects of ionizing radiation have been considered and measures of radiological protection in the system of eco-safety have been suggested. Keywords: environment, electromagnetic radiation, non-ionizing radiation, ionizing radiation, food, health, interaction, bioeffects, R-protection.

1. INTRODUCTION
Two phenomena contributed to the abundance of radiation on the early Earth. One of them are cosmic showers, strong fluxes of cosmic radiation that occur when it comes to supernova explosions. The other phenomenon includes the natural nuclear reactors, deposits of uranium ore, in which fission chain processes have spontaneously occurred, such as those in the Oklo, uranium mine in Gabon (Africa). Radionuclides that result from human activities, either in fission processes or by radiating stable isotopes in nuclear reactors, as well as in radiation with high-energy particle beams in accelerators, represent by far the most numerous and diverse radiation sources on our planet. Today, we are familiar with about a thousand radionuclides: for each element in the periodic table, one or more radioactive isotopes are known.

2. ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION AND ENVIRONMENT

The existence of non-ionizing radiation (NIR) sources in the environment raises the question of whether exposure to this radiation is detrimental to health, and makes the investigation of the possible effects of exposure necessary. In this article some characteristics of electromagnetic radiation, possible mechanisms of interaction with tissues and possible functional and biological effects of NIR are presented. Also, the possible effects of electromagnetic radiation to the environment, the possible risk factors and protection measures for the working personnel are discussed. Electromagnetic fields are ubiquitous in modern society. It is well known that exposure to strong fields can result in acute effects, such as burns; the mechanisms behind such effects are well established. There is, however, also a concern that long-term exposure to weak fields might have health effects due to an as-yet unknown mechanism. Because of the already widespread exposure, even small health effects could have profound public health implications. Comprehensive research efforts are therefore warranted, and are indeed ongoing.

726

The strongest evidence for health risks is from exposure to fields generated in connection with use of electric power. As for fields used by telecommunications technology, there is still considerably fewer data available and for the time being there is only very weak support for the existence of health effects. However, extensive research activities are ongoing and much more data will be available in the near future. This situation of scientific uncertainty and considerable public concern creates dilemmas for decision makers. Non-ionizing radiation is electromagnetic radiation that does not have sufficient energy to remove electrons from the outer shells of atoms. Types of non-ionizing radiation are: ultraviolet (UV), visible light, infrared (IR), microwave, radio (and television), and extremely low frequency (ELF, sometimes referred to as EMF or ELFEMF). Non-ionizing radiation is produced by a wide variety of products in the home and in the workplace, from lasers to power lines, tanning beds to household appliances, cellular phones to ham radios. Electromagnetic radiation, or light, can be considered to be composed of particles (photons) or waves. The electromagnetic spectrum is the complete range of wavelengths of the electromagnetic radiation. The properties of each radiation depend on its wavelength: longer waves are less energetic than shorter waves - photons with long wavelength have less energy than short-wavelength photons. Electromagnetic radiation is usually described as bands of radiation of similar wavelength, e.g., infrared, radio waves, microwaves, gamma rays, X-rays.. These bands of radiation roughly correspond to the range of wavelengths which can be detected by different instruments. Only a small fraction of the entire range of electromagnetic radiation can be detected by the human eye: visible light, or what in everyday-life is referred to simply as light. The human eye cannot detect wavelengths longer than those of the visible light, such as those of infrared light, microwaves (wavelengths of centimeters), or radio waves (wavelengths of meters). Wavelengths shorter than visible light cannot be seen either: ultraviolet light, X-rays, gamma rays (the most energetic). Electromagnetic radiation can be described in terms of wavelength (L), measured in meters (m), or frequency (f), measured in hertz (Hz). The relationship between these two is given by: f = L/c where c= speed of light.

3. SOURCES OF IONIZING RADIATION

Sources of ionizing radiation can be: a) Cosmic rays It is believed that cosmic rays are one of the most significant factors in induction of spontaneous mutations, which are the foundation of life evolution. Since the intensity of cosmic rays increases with the increase of height, it implies that technological progress in the conquest of universe and the development of passenger traffic with supersonic aircrafts that fly at the height of 20-25 km also increase the risk of radiation damage, due to the increased cosmic radiation. b) Sources of radioactivity in the nature Those are natural isotopes: uranium-238, thorium-232, radium-226 and the products of their radioactive decay, as well as potassium-40 and radioactive isotopes of carbon C14 and hydrogen H3 that occur because of cosmic rays bombardment. c) Radioactivity of nuclear explosions-accidents In the world, there is a frightening amount of nuclear weapon of different strength and power, which is still pilling up and improving with a constant expansion of possessor countries. Nuclear accidents are also possible in this case, especially in terms of transport and nuclear materials storage. Sources of radiation after the explosion of nuclear weapons emerge from radioactive precipitation, and they can be: external sources (short-lived -emitters, zirconium-95, niobium-95 and long-lived --emitter cesium-137) and internal (strontium-90, cesium-137)

4. BIO-CHEMICAL EFFECTS OF RADIATION

Bio-chemical structure of organism represents the base of all the other life phenomena. Functioning of a cell, from moment to moment, is the sum of total number of chemical reactions, which constantly occur inside it. Radiation can directly influence the molecule in some biological system through energy transfer, when molecule gets ionized (or excited), or indirectly by transferring the energy from another ionized molecule. Direct impact of radiation on biologically active molecules can be considered by using the classical explanations of target theory. If an enzyme is radiated in its dry state, decrease of its specific enzymatic activity is noticeable. It is supposed that, in such a case, some molecules suffer one, two, three or more strikes, and some do not get hit at all. Considering the case that each molecule of a substance suffers one strike in average, the probability for the molecule to be hit 0,1,2n times is calculated by Poisson distribution that explains the distribution of rare events of onstant probability:

727

Pm = e

-a a m m!

m = number of hits P = probability for a molecule to m hits a = average number of hits in the target-molecule

So, in case that a = 1, the probability for a molecule to remain safe is P0 = 0,368 i.e. the remaining enzymatic activity after irradiation with a = 1 dose, is 37% from the initial activity. Indirect effect of radiation is of a special significance for biological systems. Living organism is composed of inorganic component water and mineral molecule, and organic molecules proteins, lipids, carbohydrates, nucleic acids and intermediate products in metabolism. Since water has the largest percentage in organism (most frequently from 60 to 80%), radiation primarily ionizes the molecules of water, and they transfer the obtained energy to the other classes of molecules. Dissociation of water under influence of radiation, radiolysis, as a consequence has the creation of high-reactive molecular forms, radicals, that react with organic molecules by removing the hydrogen atoms (H) or the entire parts of molecules from them (the remaining part of molecule is called organic radical), i.e. by breaking molecular connections. Removing hydrogen atoms (H) or groups of atoms, or breaking molecular connections is of a smaller significance for biological effect. The behavior of remaining organic radical, which usually gets involved in the reaction with another radical or molecular oxygen due to which new types of molecules appear, is more significant. Final consequence is that macromolecules lose their biological function.

Figure 1: Possible risks due to modifications-mobile genetic elements The largest number of roles in organism belongs to proteins that are amino acid polymers in chemical aspect. Amino group is in each amino acid the most sensitive part to radiation. However, since it forms a strong peptide bond with carboxylic group of neighboring amino acid in protein molecule, it can not be easily removed from protein molecule. For the same reason, COOH group does not enter the reaction after radiation, so that the side chains of proteins are the most sensitive to radiation, as well as weak hydrogen and disulfide bonds. Under the effect of radiation, the H atom can be removed from side chain, or the discontinuation from any of the two atoms can occur, due to which the side chain gets altered. Due to the discontinuation of hydrogen and disulfide bonds, a partial or complete unbinding of peptide chains and loss of three-dimensional structure can occur. Thus, the protein becomes non-functional after radiation due to the changes on side chains or configuration, and not because of breaking peptide bonds or disorder in the primary structure. Lipids are organic substances that are insoluble in water and they are soluble in organic solvents. Lipids represent a source of energy for organism and structural elements of cell. Among them, the most numerous are simple lipidsesters of fatty acids with alcohol. It is believed that radiation effects the lipids in a way that free radicals remove the hydrogen atom from the part of lipid molecule that belongs to fatty acid, when the organic radical (R) emerges, and it reacts with molecular oxygen and gives peroxy radicals RO2, which react with each other and create organic peroxides. This reaction is often a chain reaction, because RO2 radicals also remove hydrogen atoms from lipid molecules. Carbohydrates are aldehyde or ketone derivatives of multiple-based alcohols, whose general formula is (CH2O)n. They are classified as mono-, di-, tri- and polysaccharides. Some monosaccharides are the constituents of nucleic acids, while the others represent a substrate for cell nutrition. Starch and glycogen are carbon hydrate reserves in

728

organism, while the cellulose is the building material of plant cells. Depending on radiation dose, molecules of carbon hydrates can be dissolved into subunits or discontinued, or they can form polymers by cross-bonding, in the absence of oxygen. Extremely high radiation doses dissolve the molecule of sugar into various products of degradation, but it is believed that this effect has a small significance for biological systems due to the required high doses. Nucleic acids are the carriers of genetic information (instructions) about the structure and function of the cells. Due to the specialized type of RNA (mRNA), genetic instructions come from the nuclei to the ribosomes in cytoplasm, where they are realized through the synthesis of proteins. Nucleic acids are macromolecules-nucleotide polymers. The sugar in DNA molecule is deoxyribose, and bases are purines (adenine and guanine) and pyramidines (cytosine and thymine), while in RNA the sugar is ribose, and instead of thymine there is pyramidine base uracil. These two types of nucleic acids also differ in the fact that RNA molecule is single-chained, while DNA molecule consists of two chains of nucleotides that are mutually linked with hydrogen bonds between opposing bases and twisted in such a way that they form a double helix. Pairs of bases are specific: adenine (A) is always paired thymine (T), and guanine (G) with cytosine (C). Genetic information come from the sequence of basis along the DNA molecule, which is transferred on the sequence of amino acids in peptide chain, in the processes of transcription and translation. Hence, each disturbance in the sequence or number of basis in DNA, if it is fixed (not corrected) during replication, necessarily leads to the altered genetic program (genetic mutations) that can be expressed in the form of big bio-chemical or physiological changes in the cell and organism. These changes can also occur due to major damages of DNA structure, such as disconnections of one or both chains in one or more places, after which there occurs a loss of some bigger or smaller segments (deletion), cross-bonding of chains within double helixes or between them, as well as cross-bonding of DNA molecules with proteins. Sequence of bases can be disturbed either by chemical alteration (deamination, dehydroxylation) or by its loss. Radiation can also destroy the hydrogen bonds between bases, but the opinions about biological implications of this type of damage are different, because it is assumed that broken hydrogen bonds are immediately renewed, unless there is a large number of such bonds that are broken.

5. BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF RADIATION

Ionizing radiation, by passing through matter, regardless of whether it is living or dead matter, causes evident effects of ionization. A part of radiant energy, which is absorbed in the matter, is spent on eviction of electrons from atoms and creation of ion pairs. In non-living matter, the ionizing process does not leave any consequences. However, ionization in the tissue causes deep biological changes that appear some short time after the radiation. If the ionizing radiation is applied in larger doses, it can cause the death of cells and tissue. This characteristic of x-rays or any other ionizing radiation is used in the diagnostics treatment of malignant tumors. It is known that ionizing radiation, after the absorption in matter, causes a series of ionizations that cause biochemical changes in living beings. Today, it is considered that ionizing radiation in the matter can act in two ways: - indirect action of ionizing radiation, - theory of a direct hit of ionizing radiation. Effects of ionizing radiation from the water molecule separates one electron that immediately reacts with another water molecule and thus another ion pair emerges, according to the following reaction: H2O H2O+ + eH2O + e- H2O-

Water arises from normal ions but H and Oh are very unstable and very reactive molecules that generate free radicals HO2 i H2O2. These generations of radicals in the tissue last for a very short time and later on, the key role have the free radicals that effect primarily SH-enzyme groups, and thus disulfide groups arise and also the denaturation of proteins and depolymerization of high-molecular compounds. According to the theory of direct hit by ionizing rays, one cell structure can be damaged only if it is directly hit by ionizing particle. According to the place of creation, mutations within a cell can be divided into gene, chromosomal and plasma, while according to the type of cell in which these changes occur, they can be divided into: a) germinal or hereditary, which are transferred to the descendants, and arise because of the effect of radiation on the sex cells, depending on the dose and number of mutations per genes, the consequences can be different: complete sterility, spontaneous abortion, deadbornes, of the rapid death of liveborns. b) somatic changes, which take place in somatic cells, are transferred to the cell clone, which has emerged by the division of stem cell, but they are not transferred to the descendants. Somatic mutations emerge in the form of devitalization, rapid aging and cell cancerization. It is determined that, for example, the radiologists have ten times more chances to get skin cancer or leukemia that other doctors.

729

Figure 2: Necessity of knowing the effects of ionizing radiation However, the phenomenon that certain damages that occur in DNA during radiation pass without any consequences indicates the fact that there are certain mechanisms that can correct the errors made in DNA construction. The latest investigations demonstrate that there are multienzyme systems in all the living cells that correct individual damages and they are called reparatory systems. Harmful bio-chemical effects on man are caused by ionizing radiation that manifests itself through the damage of organs and tissue, in case of people or animals. This term is most frequently used to denote acute poisoning with big doses of radiation in the short period, although it is also used for longer periods. Clinical diagnosis of this poisoning is professionally called acute radiation syndrome (ARS). Chronic radiation syndrome exists but it is very rare and most frequently, it appears with the workers in nuclear facilities and plants. The difference between acute and chronic poisoning in the period of exposure to radioactive sources: in case of acute poisoning, the most frequent is short exposure to big radiation doses, while in case of the chronic, a longer period of constant exposure is necessary. Exposure to radiation increases the risk of cancer, tumor and mutations. Later diseases are considered as random effect relationship with radiation poisoning.

Figure 3: Biological effects or radiation to the organism of man

730

For a certain number of chemical compounds, it is known that they can demonstrate the favorable effect on the outcome of radiation damages, if they are applied before or during the radiation. So far, the most significant of all the examined groups of chemical protectors are tioles (organic compounds with sulfide group SH), such as, for example, the amino acid cysteine (2-amino3-meckap-topropionic acid) and cysteamine (2-mercaptoethylenamine, MEA, Becaptan). In recent years, the bioprotectors on the selenium base have been intensely studied, for the reduction of negative impact of radiation on the organism. Similar to sulfur, selenium can only be found in a few allotropic modifications. Stable form is grey selenium, on the room temperature. At the same time, that is the densest form of selenium (4.819g /cm3 at 25C) and it has the characteristics of metalloids. Selenium melts at 217C, and boils at 685C, approximately. It is insoluble in water, but resolvent in concentrated sulfuric acid. Selenium also forms a series of solid solutions and alloys with sulfur and selenium. Selenium also forms a big number of organic compounds. This leads to the increased consumption of selenium, which is sold in form of various diet supplements such as selenium enriched yeast with the vitamins A, C and E, and other products with selenium. Selenium enters the composition of macromolecule GPX (glutathione peroxidase) and MnSOD (mangan superoxid dismutase) that are, basically, the generators of immune system on cell level. In the experiments conducted on males of Witstar rats that were exposed to radiation, it was demonstrated that the animals who took selenium supplement through food survive significantly more than those who took food without selenium. The most sensitive part to radiation of each amino acid is the amino group. However, since it forms a solid peptide bond in protein molecule with carboxylic group of neighboring amino acid, it cannot be easily removed from protein molecule. Of all the natural radionuclides, the biggest problem for the protection of people represents radon, radioactive gaseous element, which is noble (inert) gas by its chemical properties in the periodic table. Radon appears as the product of radioactive decay of radium from natural radioactive series of uranium (U238). Another radon isotope, Rn220(thoron) emerges from thorium series. As uranium and thorium can be found anywhere in the Earths crust, the concentration of radon will depend on geological and geomorphologic features of the terrain as well as the materials used for building the houses. It is known that granite has a higher content of uranium and radium, and extremely high content, over the allowed boundaries, have some types of sand and materials that are used for making ceramic tiles. For that reason, according to legal regulations, the material needs to be tested on radioactivity before it is used for building. Radiation doses for different parts of lungs, caused by inhaled radon and its descendants, cannot be measured. For that reason, they have to be assessed by a computer, using the models that consider different processes: inhalation, deposition, cleaning and radioactive decay of radons descendants in airways of the lungs. In order to obtain such models that will provide the real values for doses, it is necessary to provide the reliable information in the following fields: - volume of inhaled radioactivity distribution - morphology of the respiratory tract - respiratory tract physiology - identification and distribution of cells at risk

6. MEASURES OF RADIOACTIVE PROTECTION

In terms of R-contamination, it is necessary to take certain actions, within the framework of nuclear protection, in order to reduce the contamination to minimum. However, if those actions are not sufficient, then certain measures of decontamination should be taken, and that refers to the amount of water that is the most important and necessary for particular needs. After performing the decontamination, it is necessary to check the quality of water and effectiveness of decontamination, so that such water could be used effectively, because radioactive contaminants are especially dangerous if they get into the organism through food and water. Contemporary scientific-technical investigations do not provide the neutralization of the effects of ionizing radiation. Anesthetics and antiemetic that ease the pain in case of medium and large doses of radiation are mostly used in treatment, while antibiotics are used as support to the immune system of irradiated person, in whose case the radiation destroys or severely damages immune system (as the prevention or mitigation of later diseases). It is also worked on the medications that ease the long-term effect of radioactive particles on the cells and their removal from organism. Measures of protection from NHB accidents in peace are a part of overall eco-safety and they are taken in order to prevent the surprises, undertake the adequate measures of control, protection and removal of consequences. For environmental protection from accidents with the sources of ionizing radiation, necessary safety organization is conditioned with: - Legal regulation of conditions for working with the sources of ionizing radiation, - Preventive measures, - Necessity of an earlier detection of nuclear accident,

731

- Prevention of consequences in accordance with organization and possibilities of society and - Efficient removal of consequences of the nuclear accidents. Safety system starts with the functioning of assessment, monitoring and determining of an extraordinary event. It can be by direct answering from the company institution, region, municipality (when the accident occurs in the country) or on the basis of compact monitoring (when the accident occurs abroad). This information should get to the competent authorities as soon as possible (in order to make an adequate decision). When activated, the Commission for the Protection from Ionizing Radiation, at the state level, which has on its disposal all the facts about the accident that were unknown until then, determines the characteristics of the accident and suggests further measures for the competent authorities, depending on the type and volume of the accident. In order to successfully master the planned program content of protection from ionizing radiation, we need to: - understand and apply the paradigm of sustainable development in further professional development, - analyze the deficiencies in developmental concepts in particular sectors, - create sustainable solutions in the development and protection of the environment, on micro and macro level, - perform the synthesis of all three developmental pillars of sustainable development (economy, social development and environmental protection), with the use of systematic approach to this issue. Public health is the science and art of developing the health, prevention of diseases and extension of life through organized efforts of the community, in all the terms of environmental degradation, and especially in terms of radiation and RHB contamination.

7. CONCLUSION
Environmental protection represents such an activity of man that is supposed to resolve the contradiction between mans growing need for raw materials, energy, food, etc and provision of its own survival. Environmental protection appears as a new category in the economy of nature, in its foundation and as a technological process. Consequently, in production process, it represents the finding of such technical and technological solutions, which will provide the most rational use of natural raw materials with maximal processing and the waste, and reduce the environmental pollution to the least possible measure. When it comes to our Republic of Serbia, Montenegro and B&H, the appropriate epidemiological study and monitoring of health condition of the possible risk groups of population in the vicinity of NATO bombing and use of MOU are desirable, if there exist economic and professional conditions for that. About long-term consequences (primarily having in mind the cumulative effect of the entire series of R-pollutants), we should speak with more details, after complex interdisciplinary and multidisciplinary investigations, which are in progress. It is necessary to develop the assessment of radiation risk for the occurrence of later effects (malignant diseases and genetc damages) with population in the zones of munitions use from OU and overall harmful effects to biodiversity of those areas. Ecological safety is multidisciplinary and it should represent a permanent duty of all the members of society. It is multidisciplinary because health, living environment and social conditions represent a complex of fields and problems that are in a constant interaction, especially in the terms that are considered in this paper. Hence, each disorder in the environment leads to eco-disorders and the disorders of social relations that are interrelated and mutually conditioned.

REFERENCES [1] Favor, J. Risk estimation based on germ-cell mutations in animals. Genome, 1989. [2] Grover, S.B., Kumar, J. A review of the current concepts of radiation measurement and its biological [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
effects. 2002. Jankowski, C.B. Radiation and pregnancy. Putting the risks in proportion. Am J Nurs, 1986. Gruji R., Gruji S. 2009. Osnove tehnologije prerade i uvanja prehrambenih proizvoda, Pan-Evropski univerzitet APEIRON, Banja Luka P. J, Stapleton, A. M, Cooney, W. M. Hix Jr. :"Environmental Management Systems"- An tmplementation Gutde for Smalt and Medium-Sized Organizations, NSP International, Michigan, 1996. Bioanin R., uki V. Nuklearni udesi i zatita, 29. Konferencija "ETRAN 2005" sa meunarodnim ueem, 5-10.jun, 2005. Budva. Radmilovi V. Kancerogeni u radnoj i ivotnoj sredini, IP " VELARTA", Beograd, 2002. Radojevi R. Upravljanje kvalitetom i zatitom ivotne sredine, Drutvo OPISJ, Beograd.2000.

732

[9] Stankovi D. Medicina rada, Medicinska knjiga, Beograd-Zagreb, 1986. [10] Bioanin R. Quantification of influences on environment in quality system exellence, VIII Balkan
Conference on Operational research (BALCOR-2007), 14-17. September 2007. Belgrade-Zlatibor.

[11] Joldi V. Pravni aspekti zatite vazduha, XXXIV Savetovanje sa meunarodnim ueem ZATITA
VAZDUHA 2006, 24-25. 01. 2007. Beograd.

[12] Bioanin R., Amidi B. Meunarodna zdravstvena organizacija-znaaj i pravac razvoja,

VII Meunarodna konferecija MEUNARODNE ORGANIZACIJE, Centar za strateka istraivanja nacionalne bezbednosti, 18-20. jul 2008. Srebrno jezero. [13] Bioanin R., Stjepan P., Amidi B. Quantification poluters on environment, Sympozionului International de Management (SYM), 22-24. 11. 2007. Temisoare, Romania. [14] Bioanin R. Strategijski menadment u obezbeenju od nuklearnog, hemijskog i biolokog terorizma, II nacionalna konferencija sa meunarodnim ueem "Ocena profesionalnog rizika-teorija i praksa", 2627.maj 2005. Ni. [15] Vojinovi Miloradov M., Bioanin R., Zatei M. Nuklearni akcidenti-rizici, pretnje i zatita u sistemu bezbednosti, XXXIII Simpozijum o operacionim istraivanjima SYM-OP-IS 2006, 03-06. oktobar 2006. Banja Koviljaa. [16] Bioanin R., Amidi B., Nikoli D. Zatita vode u uslovima radioloke, hemijske i bioloke kontaminacije, V Jubilarna meunacionalna konferencija " Kvalitet vode smanjenjem gubitka vode i odvoenje otpadnih voda", 18-20.maja 2005. Pale-Jahorina, Bosna i Hercegovina. [17] Danelien D., Bioanin R., Anii O. Menadment dijagnostike i leenja uz korienje e-zdravstva, Ma inski fakultet Univerziteta Kragujevac, 2008.

733

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN CREATING COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE

Bruno Boji, Velibor Euli, Tarik Djodji
Foreign Trade Chamber of Bosnia and Herzegovina, Sarajevo, BOSNA AND HERZEGOVINA, e-mail: bruno.bojic@fpsp.edu
Summary: Today, numerous and different definitions of competitiveness can be found in literature, in which case there is a clear difference between macro and micro competitiveness made. According to those definitions, macro competitiveness refers to the competitiveness of one economy, i.e. its ability to produce and distribute the goods in a way that will increase the living standard of the population. On the other hand, micro competitiveness refers to the competitiveness of a company and implies its relative efficiency to sell its products and services in the markets where the international competition is present [2, 3]. The competitiveness of economy is directly determined by productivity, i.e. the competitiveness of its companies. There are no competitive economies unless the products and services of its subjects are competitive, and thus there is no need to draw the lines between microeconomic and macroeconomic competitiveness. Keywords: management, knowledge management, competitive advantage.

1. INTRODUCTION
The competition grows bigger over the years, and the companies find it hard to survive in such conditions. Long time ago, it became evident that being average is not enough, but it is necessary to present products and services that offer something new and which can draw the attention of consumers. In relation to that, the largest companies in the world annually invest billions of dollars in development and research. Products and services are innovated, as well as the entire work processes. The company must continuously change and adapt to the new conditions in order to survive in such a turbulent environment. If a company wants to be the best and obtain significant profit, it has to act proactively, i.e. to anticipate the events and to be prepared for them, to make changes and leave the others to adapt to those changes. Of course, it is not at all simple to establish the conditions and rules of the game, but it is much harder to be always a step ahead of the competition. A prerequisite for the successful operation of a company in difficult circumstances is that it becomes aware of the environment and its own possibilities in time so that it could achieve competitive advantage. In addition, it should know what conditions its behavior and what it can do in order to manage the changes. The 20th century is marked by the information technology, and the intellectual capital has become the main weapon of the companies in the struggle for survival and making a profit. In the future, only those companies that learn to manage the knowledge and realize that the investments in training and development of the staff are the most important will survive. In this, we have to agree with Thomas A. Stewart: Information and knowledge are thermonuclear competitive weapons of our time [6]. Individuals are bombarded with knowledge. The speed of the bombarding is increasing every day. Average business manager is not able to follow the intensification of knowledge in the world, because the society is rapidly improving by daily technology progress. The following list, which contains the terms that are mostly new to us, speaks about the growing significance of knowledge advantages in organizations: intellectual capital, knowledge capital, knowledge organizations, organizational learnings, information century, and the era of knowledge, information advantages, intangible advantages, intangible management, high values and human resources. These terms describe the new conceptsforms of economic value, and they have already been included in modern economic dictionaries as such. These terms belong to the paradigm in which competitive advantage is based on individual workers and organized knowledge. The trust in tangible advantages of production such as raw materials, fixed capital and even

734

managerial knowledge are not included in investing and knowledge, created by new and prosperous companies. Instead, the power of knowledge a key reason linked to the corporation success stories such as the application of high technologies and the growing number of Internet companies. It is very difficult to approach these intangible terms to an ordinary man, but is is worth trying, because the 20th century is marked by information technology and knowledge management has become the main weapon of the companies in their struggle for survival and making the profit. In the future, only those companies, which learn to manage the knowledge and which realize that investing in training and development of the staff is essential, will survive [4].

2. A NEW CONCEPT OF MODERN BUSINESS

The new concept of modern business should include low prices of technological infrastructure that reduces the costs, low prices and accuracy of electronic transactions with business partners, low prices of the entire approach to information as well as the possibility for the companies to provide cheap services to the consumers. Economic forces motivate the movement towards the application of the modern business concept, within the organization itself as well as in relation to the environment. External integration implies the creation of a unique spatial network of suppliers, government agencies, large corporations and other elements in order to provide an easy communication over a computer platform. In the organization, which has an internal integration, the coming orders as well as the information are being automatically sent not only to the production, but also to the accounting, investment sector and top management. Internal integration also provides for the critical data to be digitally stored on data carriers, which enables a simultaneous retrieval and electronic transmission. The key to both integrations is the coordination of data flow. The influence of consumers the application of the modern business concept in marketing provides a more comfortable execution of marketing activities. Primarily, the determination of microsegments, and then the creation of the new ways of providing services and support to the consumers serve to increase the satisafaction of consumers. In order to remain competitive, those who are engaged in marketing need to develop methods for achieving low prices for the consumers, relations with the consumers and they need to gain their loyalty. Changes in technology digital technology allows us to convert the audio, images and video. In addition, all the types of records can be combined, stored, efficiently and easily transmitted even in large quantities, without the loss of quality. Revolution in multimedia causes changes in the domain of communication, entertainment, and publishing. The changes in technology, multimedia impact and the transition to distributed work in Internet environment give strength to the concept of digital integration. Digital integration enables the modeling of information and software. It enables the creation of computer and network infrastructure that enables the coordination and integration of production process with the environment. Integration enables us to compress and store the digitized information, so that they can travel through wireless or cable system. Today, the equipment provides the lines for transmission of voice, data, images and videos. From the standpoint of business operations, an easier approach to the network and creation of new delivery channels for new and old products, for existing and new consumers, is provided [4]. 2.1. The types of e-business There are three separate classes of modern business [4]: 1. Externally organized (to the business environment) from the standpoint of perspective of externally organized modern business, there are activities related to several factors: Suppliers electronic applications help the companies to reduce the number of suppliers and to provide the reduced procurement costs for their business partners. Supplies electronic applications shorten the order delivery billing cycle (if the business partners are electronically related, it is possible to realize a current transfer electronically, instead by fax or mail, which facilitates the tracking of supplies, changes of supplies and provides that we do not run out of supplies). Exchange of documents applications for the transfer of various documents such as bills, orders or similar requirements, should provide faster and more accurate information. Channels of information distribution electronic applications provide quick spreading of information among business partners. Payments electronic applications connect the companies with suppliers and distributors, and so the payments can be sent and received electronically.

735

2. Internally organized (within the organization) the most applications for business operation within a company serves as help in overcoming the relations that are critical. From the standpoint of modern business, integration of different functions in a company enables the following: Group communication these applications enable the managers to communicate with the employees via e-mail and video conferences. The aim is to use the technology in order to execute the information distributions and to inform the staff better. Electronic publishing these applications enable the companies to organize the existing staff and resources within an organization. Through tools, such as www, the companies are enabled to inform the employees in the best possible way. The aim is to provide the information that will facilitate the making of strategic and tactical decisions in organizations. In addition, on-line publishing immediately displays and distributes the documents, quickly delivers the information and eliminates those that are out of date. Increase of sales these applications improve the information flow between the production and sale, between those who offer the products through services and the consumers. Companies can provide a better approach to the information market through better integration with other parts of organization, which provides a better strategy. The aim of this activity is to enable the companies to collect the information about the market and to analyze them thoroughly. 3. Consumer to business type of organization by electronic transactions that take place between consumers and suppliers of products and services, the consumers learn about the products through electronic publishing, buy products electronically and obtain information on the product through the network. This type of business offers: Social integration electronic applications enable the consumers to communicate via e-mail, forum, chat, conference etc. Managing personal finances electronic application enable the consumers to facilitate the process of making a decision on investing and regulate their finances by using on-line banking tools. Purchasing products and collecting the information enables the consumers to find on-line information about the existing and new products and services.

3. INDICATORS OF COMPETITIVENESS STRATEGY

World Economic Forum follows the competitiveness by two dimensions, i.e. two indexes: Index of competitive growth and Index of microeconomic competitiveness. The first index is an indicator of the ability of one economy to achieve a steady growth during the medium period. In which case, the sustainability of competitive growth is determined by quality of macroeconomic environment, public institutions and technology (innovations). Each year, World Economic Forum shows the results of its investigations that refer to the ranking of economy according to the competitiveness growth. According to the research for 2005, Bosnia and Herzegovina is at the defeating 95th position, according to the Index of competitive growth, from a total of 117 countries that were surveyed. Index of microeconomic competitiveness is shown through two subindexes: subindex of business strategy and subindex of business environment. Subindex of business strategy is lower in relation to the previous years, which shows that our companies are not able to use the little chances they get from business environment. According to this indicator, Bosnia and Herzegovina is at 101st position from the total of 116 countries. Far ahead of Bosnia and Herzegovina, there are the nearest neighbouring countries: Slovenia at 27th position, Croatia at 70th , Macedonia at 89th , and Serbia is the only one behind it, at 108th position. That disorientation and poor business results warn about the necessity of changes when it comes to strategic orientation of domestic companies and moving the focus from price to non-price elements of competitiveness. The given tables show the positions of ten leading nations according to these indexes, as well as the position of the countries from the nearest environment with the aim to show the worrying situation for our economy, when it comes to its competitiveness [2, 3]. Causes of a very low competitive advantage of our economy can be found in numerous factors of economic and non-economic nature: infavourable market structure, the absence of the rule of law and legal state, non-existence of numerous market elements and institutions, presence of grey market and corruption. Low competitiveness is a consequence of wars, sanctions, state collapse and the loss of market, non-investing in technology and knowledge, and finally, the insufficient and poor quality export. Bosnia and Herzegovina exports very little, even less than it is able to do, which is confirmed by numerous researches. It mostly exports the products based on natural components whose processing does not require any sophisticated technological solutions. This means that the work-intensive products, i.e. the products that do not bring high incomes and that respond to the requirements of developed markets by quality, dominate in the structure of export. The export usually refers to the market such as our (Macedonia, Serbia, Croatia), and as for the rest of the world with whom they trade, Bosnia and Herzegovina imports more than it exports.

736

Table 1: Ranking of countries according to the index of competitive growth [7] Countries Competitive growth Countries Competitive growth
Finland USA Sweden Denmark Taiwan Singapore Iceland Switzerland Norway 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Australia Germany Slovenia Greece Bulgaria Croatia Serbia and Montenegro Macedonia Bosnia and Herzegovina 10 15 32 46 58 62 80 85 95

Table 2: Ranking of countries according to the index of microeconomical competitiveness [7] Countries Competitive growth Countries Competitive growth
USA Finland Germany Denmark Singapore Great Britain Switzerland Japan Netherlands 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Austria Slovenia Greece Croatia Bulgaria Macedonia Serbia and Montenegro Bosnia and Herzegovina 10 32 40 63 78 83 86 94

Insufficient export and unfavorable export structure (based on the price elements of competitiveness) are the causes of a very high external trade deficit, and also of the low competitiveness of economy. At the global market, the growing trend is competing with non-price elements: quality, safety and reliability of products, ease of use, duration of life span, speed of delivery, packaging, i.e. the elements that our offer misses. The main reason of poor export results should be looked for in the lack of investments in modern equipment, technology and human capital (figure 1). By investing in technology and knowledge, the growth of productivity, i.e. competitiveness, would be encouraged. On the other hand, a more competitive economy implies the growth of nominal GDP and living standard, as well as a faster servicing of debt.

Figure 1: Effects of new investments

4. CREATION OF COMPETITIVENESS BY KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT

The causes of the extremely worrying situation in which our economy is for a long time now should not be searched in the policy of the state only, but also in the behavior of our managers, i.e. entrepreneurs. The state can do much to improve the competitiveness of economy. However, some measures that are implements in that field would not be productive if there were no initiative and support of our entrepreneurs. If we know that our market is still under the influence of a large number of non-economic factors, that such a market misses numerous elements and institutions, role of the state in creation of a healthy and competitive environment should not be neglected. The state direcly or indirectly influences the productivity growth by the measures of economic policy, with full appreciation of critical factors of competitiveness that prevail in certain sectors. It is responsible for defining and implementation of monetary and fiscal policy. It largely regulates the relations in the market and

737

determines its structure, deals with privatization and restructuring of large companies, identifies the sectors in which it is possible to easily enhance the export, creates the conditions for development of private business, establishes the rule of law, regulates the institutional infrastructure and such [2, 3]. However, the question is what can be done at micro level? What is the responsibility of the manager for failures in foreign market? Those questions are inevitable if it is known that the companys role and significance in international exchange are constantly increasing and that only those companies who have realized the significance of proactive and flexible reacting survive in the world market. Management bears the greatest responsibility for successes and failures of the companies, i.e. the economies in the global market. Management either starts or breaks the process of globalization. Each economic entity that is involved in global world trends needs to have in mind a few things. Entering the international market implies the greater need for knowledge, innovation, quality and marketing. It also implies the encountering with a new, more aggressive competition, the emergence of new partners. Investments in intangible assets of a company become essential for achieving the broad-scale recognition. Globally-oriented managers realize the significance of the changes in environment, and they change and adapt to them. They are flexible, learn quickly, react and in every moment they know which are the requirements of the market. They are not the bosses in organization, but coaches in the team. They motivate and create the positive atmosphere, invest in their knowledge and the knowledge of their employees as well. They are not turned to themselves and their interests, but to the interests of the entire society. Dynamic environment and business that becomes more and more globalized direct the managers to different cultures, which they get to know and respect. The approach to the global market requires an appropriate strategic orientation, new combination of business functions adapted to the business goal, conquering the markets out of national borders. The ability of a manager to recognize the opportunities in the environment, select target markets, get to know and adapt to cultural and other differencies of selected markets, becomes crucial [2, 3].

Figure 2: Three generic categories of competitive advantage [5] More and more noticeable heterogeneity of the demand justifies the more intensive application of differentiation and segmentation in conquering the market. Having lower prices than the competition is a good, but not sufficient source of competitiveness. The differentiation, which is more and more present, relies on the strong maketing activities and its own researches. From the marketing, it is expected to find new markets and thus enable the vitality of a company, i.e. to indicate the positions on which the company might be in the future. A strong objection to our managers refers to the lack of awareness when it comes to the significance of innovations in the creation of competitiveness. Generally speaking, the managers in Bosnia and Herzegovina are not proactively oriented, they resist to changes, do not invest in technology and knowledge. Our managers do not understand very well the relation between the company and environment; do not understand its complexity. They do not pay great attention to market investigations. If it is known that the fastest win in the world market, i.e. those companies that more rapidly react to the emerging situations than the others, it is difficult to expect of our manager to fit into new rules of the game, without clearly understanding of the concept of marketing. Without marketing and research it is not possible to find the sources of competitiveness, as well as the ways for their adequate use. With such an approach, it is almost impossible to meet the global consumer whose requirements are growing bigger. In the turbulent and changing environment, the sources are being found actively and permanently, because the existing can lose the significance overnight. While the big world companies are the organizations that learn, our managers still do not realize the role and significance of knowledge, as a source of competitive advantage (figure 2). Knowledge

738

management implies the creation of such a culture in an organization in which the knowledge is systematically collected and shared to others in order to achieve better business results. An additional problem is that if the knowledge does exist in our companies, the managers do not find ways for its appropriate use. The same occurs in the environment, for example: in 1994, for the first time there was a serious research conducted about Serbian management. Center for management of the University of Belgrade, within its project, tries to investigate the characteristics of Serbian managers. On the basis of investigations, we have come to the conclusion that there are a few types of managers in Serbia and that some of the common characteristics of our managers are: strong resistance to change, avoiding risk and uncertainty, slow decisionmaking, self-confidence, lack of knowledge in the field of management, too expressed desire for success and so on. Our managers do not like compromises and they ofteny cross the lines of morality for the sake of success [1]. Poor export results and low level of competitiveness of our products are the evidences that there are no significant changes in our management, from the period of research up to now. If there were any changes, it would all be much different. How much the situation is worrying is shown by the index of microeconomic competitiveness.

CONCLUSION
One can freely say that the information technology has marked the 20th century, especially the last decade of the 20th century. Today, hardly anything can be imagined without the application of information technology that is precisely the consequence of the proper use of knowledge in the processes of research and development. Today, there is no workplace, on which an employee who owns knowledge works, that can be imagined without modern computers that will provide them with the access to information. Owning the right information in the right time provides proactive behavior and timely reaction to changes for the individuals or organization. The company has to develop methods and ways by which it will manage knowledge, so that the employees would be able to use the information properly. Knowledge management aims at increasing the efficiency and effectivity of an organization, enabling the employees at all the levels to reach the right information for achieveing the organizations goal by using their knowledge, experience and skills. More precisely, that is the most effective use of intellectual capital of a job. Development of an organization in the future will depend on whether it invests enough money in training and development of its employees, who are the greatest treasure that a company has. Human capital, i.e. intellectual capital, should be the most important point in the strategic planning in an organization. The latest information technology, the greatest and the most advanced computer cannot replace a man, his knowledge and his ability to use that knowledge adequately. The knowledge that an employee owns and the proper knowledge management are the basis for achieving the competitive advantage of an organization. This paper has demonstrated that the higher interaction models that contain qualitative variables are necessary in measuring the refunds that result from IT application and investing. These models need to be distinguished, especially at micro and macro levels. Globalization and advancing of IT characterize the new economic era. IT development, both locally and globally, requires a multidimensional and multidisciplinary approach. It is very important that the criteria of IT development are in compliance with micro and macro goals. Globalization, as well as widespread innovations in the field of technology have significantly changed the rules of game in the world market and introduced innovations in business orientation of the company. Struggle to win market space becomes increasingly aggressive and dynamic and only those companies who have put the high level of flexibility and innovation into business environment can survive in that struggle. New marketing orientation of the company implies moving the focus from the production to the consumer, but also to the all other participants in the market, especially the competition. To be competitive in the global market implies meeting the requirements of consumers in terms of the quality of products and services, faster than other rivals in the market. Under new and significantly changed business conditions, there in no one and universal behavior for all the participants in the market, but the management is expected to define the appropriate strategy for particular circumstances, on the basis of the thorough analysis of the key business factors.

REFERENCES
[1] Eric, D.: Na putu ka teoriji S tri tipa srpskog mendmenta, izazovi menadmenta i marketinga u globalnom okruenju, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd, 1998. [2] Jefferson Institute, Konkurentnost privrede Srbije, Beograd, Jefferson Institut uz podrku Narodne banke Srbije, 2003.

739

[3] Lazarevi, M.: Uloga menadmenta u kreiranju konkurentske prednosti na svetskom tritu, Beograd, 2007. [4] Markovi, A.; Dulanovi, N.: Menadment znanja Odluujui faktor savremenog e-poslovanja, Beograd, 2005. [5] Porter, M. E.: Compatitive Advantage, New York, The Free press, 1985. [6] Thomas, A. S.: Intellectual Capital The New Wealth of Organizations, Doubleday, New York, USA, 1997. [7] Word Economic Forum, The Global Competitiveness Report 2005.

740

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

FINANCIAL ANALYSIS OF STOCK MANAGEMENT IN PRODUCTION, INDUSTRIAL AND OTHER COMPANIES

1

Petar Bojovi 1, Duica Kari2, Aleksandar Ivanovi3

Professor at the Union University in Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: psbojovic@sbb.rs 2 Associate professor at the Alpha University in Belgrade, SERBIA 3 Assistant and lecturer at Metropolitan University in Belgrade, SERBIA

Summary: The financial analysis of stock management is insufficiently investigated in economic and financial literature, and therefore the objective of this paper is to point out to a possible new approach of financial analysis of the stock phenomenon. Key words: financial analysis, stocks, stockpiling, stock costs, stock management, stock flows, optimal size of the order, moment of placing the order, measuring the effectiveness of stock management.

Stock management represents a very significant but also a very complex job of competent managers. They have a permanent task to provide sufficient raw materials and materials by the types, quantity and quality in order to provide the production continuity and desired quality of the products. Complexity of stock management arises from the necessity to provide the necessary funds with minimal investment in stocks. Investing in stocks leads to blocking a certain amount of money, due to which there are certain costs. Stocks are one of the most significant and the most sensitive forms of investing, and thus they constitute a permanent source of internal reserves by whose careful management we can improve the economy of the company. All the stocks in a company are divided into three large groups: o Stocks of raw materials and materials, o Stocks of production in progress and o Stocks of finished products. Stocks of raw materials and materials include all the raw materials that the company uses, basic, secondary and overhead material, small inventory, packaging and more. Stocks of raw materials and materials provide a continuous functioning of the production process. Stocks of production in progress represent the means that are in the production in progress, and they arise by the resettlement of the stocks of raw materials and materials to the production. Stocks are in this form from the beginning of the firs production operations and until the completion of the last operation, i.e. until the delivery of finished products in the storage. Stocks of finished products exist from the moment when the production process is completed until the delivery of products to the buyers. These stocks carry the highest business risk. Not before the realization of finished products, does the company see the results of its work.

1. STOCKPILLING
In order to understand the problems of stocks, it is very important to explain the statement that the stocks are the necessary evil. The necessity of stocks is in the fact that the continuity of production, as well as the continuity of sale in the stores, cannot support the shortages in material, i.e. goods. Since it is impossible to completely adjust the moment of procurement with the moment of the need, the stocks are inevitable. However, the stocks have a double negative impact on the business operations of the company. Firstly, because they engage the working capital, and secondly, because they cause a whole series of costs. Due to that, the whole strategy and tactics of the stocks are brought down to keeping the stocks at the lowest level, which does not jeopardize the

741

normal business operations. That level of the stocks provides an easier way to reach a good financial stability, and thus the purchasing ability, and also it brings the costs of financing and stock keeping down to the least possible level. Stocks represent a big investing of cash, and therefore they are the concern of financial manager. However, he needs to adjust his views and decisions with the managers of other business functions in order to determine the level of different stocks necessary for the business processes. Sales manager wants have the larger stocks of finished products at his disposal in order to satisfy all customer orders. However, excessive stocks require much money, create costs, and finally reduce the business success of the company. Financial manager controls the rational use of the funds, and therefore he analyzes the planned sales volume with the production manager. Based on that plan, the production manager plans the quantity and dynamics of the production. For the realization of production, the stocks of raw materials and materials are necessary. Sales manager wants to have the stocks of high quality and required range at his disposal. In addition, he tends to produce the optimal amounts of products in order to provide the required stocks of finished goods and reduce the cost per unit of the product. His activities are controlled by the financial manager in order to check whether the stocks and costs are within acceptable limits. Procurement manager can create more stocks of raw materials and materials than it is optimal, so that a continuity of production would not be endangered and in order to use the quantity discounts offered by the suppliers. Financial manager verifies whether the savings resulting from the procurement in larger amounts can cover the additional costs of maintaining the higher level of the stocks of raw materials and materials.

2. COSTS OF STOCKS
The costs of stocks are most frequently divided into three groups: o costs of obtaining the stocks o costs of keeping the stocks and o costs of lacking the stocks. Costs of obtaining the stocks are caused by replacing the stocks of raw materials and materials for the needs of production, as well as by replacing own stocks of finished goods for the needs of selling. These costs include: the costs linked to the investigation of procurement market, costs linked to the negotiations with the suppliers, reception, control and storing, costs of incoming invoices and missed quantity discounts. When making a decision, the above-mentioned costs are taken as fixed costs per one order. Preparation costs of one production series are treated as fixed costs per one series, and they include: the costs of work orders, costs of manipulation with raw materials and materials, when the amounts of this costs depends on the number of series, costs of regulating the machines and such. Costs of keeping the stocks represent the costs that result from existence and keeping the stocks in a company. These costs include: costs of storage, insurance costs, costs of amortization and depreciation and the costs of funds related to stocks, which are the most significant part of the costs of keeping stocks. These costs have a proportional character. Costs of lacking the stocks appear when the lack of raw materials and materials necessary for the production process appears, or the lack of stocks, finished products in order to meet the customer orders. In case of raw materials and materials lack, there are additional costs of new orders, and there is an increase of individual and total production costs due to the interruption of production. If there is a lack of finished products, the company is not able to meet the received orders, and therefore it will not be able to acquire a profit from sale. All of this influences the reduction of markets reputation (goodwill) and a total profit of the company.

3. STOCK MANAGEMENT
Starting from the fact that significant funds are engaged for the stocks in most companies, the efforts for finding a way for more successful and rational business and stock management are understandable. The aim of the managers is reduce the costs caused by stocks to a least possible level. In order to acquire that, they make the following decisions: how much stocks should be acquired in one order and in which intervals should the stocks be acquired. Answer to the question of how much stocks should be acquired in one order depends on many factors, but primarily the costs of acquiring and the costs of owning the stocks. If the procurement would be done once a year, it would cause the low costs of acquiring the stocks and high costs of keeping the stocks and vice versa. For that reason, it is necessary to determine the number of raw materials, materials or goods units that will be acquired by placing one order so that the total costs would be minimal. That amount represents an optimal size

742

of the order. Therefore, the optimal size of order minimizes the total costs of acquiring and keeping the stocks. The optimal size of the order can be reached by using the tabulation and graphical method, as well as by using various mathematical models. If we assume that the company yearly purchases 9.000 kg of one material, which is continuously spent in approximately equal amounts every day during the year, then the costs of one order are approximately 30.000 dinars, and the costs of keeping the stocks are 20% in relation to the purchase price and that the purchase price is 300 dinars per 1 kg of the material, in that case the graphical determination of such an order is shown in the figure 1.

Figure 1: Flows and balance of material stocks Diagram shows us two possibilities: that the total amount is acquired once or six times a year. The line A shows the movement of material stocks if the procurement is done at once, and the line B shows the flow of stocks that would be purchased 6 times a year. When a company buys material once a year, the average stocks are 4.500 kg, and if it buys them 6 times a year, then the average stocks would be reduced to 750kg. Total costs of the stocks for previous two possibilities could be calculated in the way shown in the table 1. Table 1: Total costs of the order For one order Size of order kg Average stocks kg Value of average stocks Annual costs: Costs of keeping the stocks Costs of order Total costs 9 000 4 500 1 350 000 270 000 30 000 300 000

For 6 orders 1 500 750 225 000 45 000 180 000 225 000

As it is seen from the calculation, the total costs of stocks are smaller when the material is purchased six times a year. Whether the decision to buy the material six times a year is optimal can be seen in the cost estimate in the table 2.

743

Number of orders

Table 2: Cost estimate of the relevant costs of stocks Size of order Average Value of the Costs of Costs of stocks average keeping the order stocks stocks 9 000 4 500 3 000 2 250 1 800 1 500 4 500 2 250 1 500 1 125 900 750 1 350 000 675 000 450 000 337 000 270 000 225 000 270 000 135 000 90 000 67 500 54 000 45 000 30 000 60 000 90 000 120 000 150 000 180 000

Total costs

1 2 3 4 5 6

300 000 195 000 180 000 187 500 204 000 225 000

On the basis of the cost estimate, we can see that the optimal size of order is 3.000 kg and that the company should purchase the material three times a year. The optimal size of order can also be determined graphically, according to the figure 2.

Figure 2: Optimal size of the order Optimal size of the order is at the intersection of the line that represents the costs of order and the line that represents the costs of keeping the stocks, when the function of total costs of stocks reaches the minimum. Tabular and graphical methods for determining the optimal size of order are expensive and slow. For that reason, various mathematical models are used: Optimal size of the order Qopt is calculated by the following formula:

Qopt =

2 xAxS ci

A = total annual usage of the material in units, S = costs of one order, i.e. the costs of keeping the stocks per one order C = purchase cost per unit of the material, i = costs of keeping the stocks of material in % of the purchase price, If we include the data of a hypothetical company into this formula, we will have the following result: Qopt =

2x 9000x30000 = 9000000 = 3 000 kg 300x 0,20

744

A company should buy the material in orders of 3.000 kg. Considering that the company should obtain 9.000 kg, the material will be purchased three times a year (9 000 : 3 000 = 3). Correctness of these models depends on the reality of the assumptions on which they are based. As we have stated, the elements are determined on the basis of the assessment, so that these elements are of a relative accuracy. The reliability of the assessment depends on the situation in the company and stability of the market. Another significant decision is related to finding the right moment for placing the orders for replacement of the stocks consumed. Optimal moment for placing the order can be determined on the basis of the data about the daily use of materials and the time required for executing the order. Daily use of the materials is obtained by dividing the planned annual use of the material by the number of days in the year. The order execution time represents the number of days that pass from the moment of placing the order to the time of delivery. The moment of placing the order could be determined in the following way: Moment of placing the order = order execution time x daily use

In this example, the daily use of the material is 25 kg (9 000 kg : 360 days). If it is assumed that order execution time is 12 days, then: Moment of placing the order = 25 x 12 = 300 kg The order should be placed when the stocks of material are lowered to 300 kg. Namely, at the end of the 12th day, the stocks will drop to zero, but there will be a new delivery that is equal to the optimal size of order. Considering that the companies operate in terms of uncertainty, it is necessary for them to keep the so-called safety stocks.

4. MEASURING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF STOCK MANAGEMENT

The effectiveness of stock management is expressed by the stock turnover ratio. The stock turnover ratio shows the number of stock turnovers in a particular period, usually one year. Stock turnover ratio is calculated as a relation between the use of stocks and average stocks, both for total stocks or for their particular segments. It is useful to measure the efficiency of the total stocks and particular groups of stocks, because a better illustration of stock management is obtained in this way. The effectiveness of stock management is measured by the following turnover ratios: Total stocks turnover ratio = Cost of the products sold -------------------------------------------Average total stocks

Finished products turnover ratio

Cost of the products sold = --------------------------------------------Average stocks of finished products

Production in progress Cost of finished products delivered to the storage turnover ratio = --------------------------------------------------------------Average stocks of the production in progress

Material turnover ratio =

Costs of the material delivered to the production -------------------------------------------------------Average stocks of material

On the basis of turnover ratio, it is possible to calculate the number of days of tying up the stocks, which shows the average number of days of keeping the stocks of material, finished products and semi-finished products in the storage, and in case of production in progress stocks, it shows the average number of days of the production of finished product. The number of days of tying up the stocks is calculated as the relation between the number of days in the year and turnover ratio.

745

Number of days of tying up the total stocks

Number of days in billing period = -------------------------------------------Total stocks turnover ratio

The calculation of the number of days of tying up the stocks serves for determining the average costs of stocks. Although many opposite opinions on the significance of the stocks turnover ratio can be found in literature, the practice shows that it is a useful financial indicator of the efficiency of stock management. Efficiency of total stock management, and every other form, is as greater as the turnover ratio is, and the number of days of tying up the stocks is smaller.

REFERENCES:
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Brighman, E.F., Gapenski, L.C, Financial Management, The Dryden Pres, Forth Worth, 1994. Brealey, R. And S. Myers, Principles of Corporate Finance, Mc Graw- Hill, 1998. Ivanievi, M, Poslovne finansije, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd, 2008. Rankovi, J, Upravljanje finansijama preduzea, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd, 1998. P. Bojovi i dr, Finansijska analiza poslovanja, ig, Beograd, 2010. (redaktor: P. Bojovi), P. Bojovi i dr, Finansijska kontrola i revizija, ig, Beograd, 2010. (redaktor: P. Bojovi), P. Bojovi (koautor) Savremeni finansijski menadment, ig, Beograd, 2010 P. Bojovi (koautor), Poslovno raunovodstvo, ig, Beograd, 2010. (redaktor P. Bojovi), P. Bojovi (koautor), Mikrofinansije, str. 493, ig, Beograd, 2009. (redaktor: P. Bojovi), P. Bojovi (koautor), Upravljanje poslovnim finansijama, Univerzitet za poslovne studije, Banja Luka, 2009. P. Bojovi (koautor), Uvod u finansijski menadment, igoja tampa, Beograd, 2005. (redaktor: P. Bojovi), P. Bojovi i dr, Korporativne finansije i poslovni plan, FIM, Kruevac, 2005. P. Bojovi (koautor), Finansijsko poslovanje, Zavod za udbenike i nastavna sredstva, Beograd, etvrto izdanje, 2009. P. Bojovi (koautor), Osnovi finansija, Zavod za udbenike i nastavna sredstva, Beograd, peto izdanje, 2009. (redaktori: P. Jovanovi Gavrilovi i P. Bojovi), P. Bojovi, Poslovne finansije, igoja tampa, Beograd, 2006. P. Bojovi, Ekonomska analiza, FIM, Kruevac, 2005. Van Horne Wachovicz, Osnovi finansijskog menadmenta, Data, Beograd, 2008. Shapiro, A.C, Modern Corporate Finance, Mc Millan Publishing Company, New York, 1990.

746

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MODELING AND FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS OF TWO TYPES OF TOTAL KNEE PROSTHESES
POLITEHNICA University of Timioara, Timioara, ROMANIA, 1 e-mail: delia@cmpicsu.upt.ro 2 e-mail: mirela@cmpicsu.upt.ro, 3 e-mail: liviu.bereteu@mec.upt.ro

D. Bugariu1, M. Toth-Tascu2, L. Bereteu3

Summary: Knee is one of the largest joints of the human body, and one of the most exposed to stress. This paper presents the design and analysis of two types of total knee prostheses. One of the prosthesis has a smooth surface that comes into contact with the femur; the other one contains Lattice structures on this surface. The Lattice structures have an important role in osteointegration process. The two types of prostheses have been designed using Solid Edge software, and the Finite Element Analysis has been performed with ANSYS Workbench V9.0 software. Keywords: knee joint, total knee prosthesis, numerical analysis, Lattice structure.

1. INTRODUCTION
Diseases like osteoarthritis, gonarthrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, or osteonecrosis can affect the knee joint. Frequently the patient feels pain and stiffness around the joint, loss of mobility and flexibility of the joint. If the problem cannot be treated with medication, or by other methods, the patient's only chance to lead a normal life is the knee arthroplasty. Total knee arthroplasty (TKA) is a common procedure with established outcomes that replaces the knee joint surfaces, to relieve the pain and disability, and improve walking ability. The total knee prosthesis (TKP) is recommended in case when the whole surface of the joint is affected. In this case the replacement of the meniscus, cartilage and the affected bone part of the two condyles is highly recommended. The general structure of a TKP is shown in figure 1.

Femoral component Polyethylene part Tibial tray

Figure 1: General structure of a TKP

747

In the last years the development and building of prostheses significantly advanced, creating various types of such implants. There are over a hundred models of knee prostheses on the market. ASTM F2083 - 08e1 Standard Specification for Total Knee Prosthesis classifies the knee prostheses into three kinds according to degree of constraint [4]: The first type is considered constrained which prevents dislocation of the prosthesis in more than one anatomic plane and consists of either a single, flexible, across-the-joint component or more than one component linked together or affined. The second one is a semi-constrained joint prosthesis which limits translation or rotation, or both, of the prosthesis in one or more planes via the geometry of its articulating surfaces. It has no across-the-joint linkages. The third type is a non-constrained joint prosthesis which minimally restricts prosthesis movement in one or more planes. Its components have no across-the-joint linkages.

2. DESIGN OF TOTAL KNEE PROSTHESES

For different types of the tibio-femoral joint affections, if other solutions dont prove to be efficient, knee arthroplasty is recommended. The total knee arthroplasty or knee replacement is a surgery practiced for over 50 years now, but the complexity of the knee joint began to be discovered and understood only 30 years ago. Total knee replacement, or total knee arthroplasty, is a surgical procedure in which parts of the knee joint are replaced with artificial parts (prostheses) [2] [3]. The materials used in knee prosthesis depend on a few factors, including patients age, level of activity and the degree of joint disease. All devices shall be fabricated from materials with adequate mechanical strength and durability, corrosion resistance, and biocompatibility. The choice of materials is understood to be a necessary but not sufficient assurance of function of the device made of them [4]. The paper proposes two types of total knee prostheses designed using Solid Edge V 19 software. The difference between the two prostheses appears on the femoral component. The total knee prosthesis is made out of three parts: a femoral component, a tibial plate and a middle polyethylene part. The femoral component (Figure 2) has the condyles shape and is clasped in the bone with two pegs of 10 mm diameter and 20 mm length, after the bone and cartilage affected parts have been removed.

Figure 2: Femoral component of the TKP The tibial component (Figure 3) is placed on the tibial-bone, which, like the femoral component, replaces the affected cartilage and bone surface. Between the two components a polyethylene part of high density polyethylene (Figure 4) is introduced, to allow a better sliding of the femoral component on the tibial part, and to absorb a part of the shocks that are transmitted to the joint during walking (when the patient touches the ground).

748

Figure 3: Tibial component of TKP

Figure 4: Midlle polyethylene part of TKP

The tibial component has a plane metallic platform shape and is placed on the tibial plate. On the part that is placed on the bone (Figure 5), this component has ribs to favor the osteointegration process.

Figure 5: Tibial component with ribs These dimensions are not standardized; they are different from case to case. The surgeon chooses the prosthesis type, the stem length and diameter, adequate for each surgery. The stem of the proposed prosthesis has 80mm length and a 10mm diameter. Fixation of the knee prosthesis can be made by cementation, with bone cements, or non-cemented. In case of non-cemented prosthesis the surfaces that come into direct contact with the bone, can have a Lattice structure that has an important role in the osteointegration process. This structure can be placed either on all the prosthesis sides (Figure 6), either on only some (Figure 7).

Figure 6: Femoral component with Lattice structure on all internal parts

Figure 7: Femoral component with Lattice structure on some internal parts

For this prosthesis the Lattice structure base is a rectangle with 1x1.5 mm sides.

749

3. NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF TOTAL KNEE PROSTHESES

Finite Element Analysis (FEA) represents an important tool in behavior study of biomechanical structures. Numerical solutions to even very complicated stress problems can now be obtained routinely using FEA [1]. The used software for the FEA of the tibio-femoral joint prosthesis was ANSYS Workbench V9.0. The Finite Element Analysis has been performed for a total prosthesis, with a smooth surface that comes into contact with the femur, as well as for prosthesis with Lattice structures on this surface. Both types of prostheses have been studied, to compare results of the Finite Element Analysis, and to observe the possible changes that may occur at structural level. In both cases the chosen materials are titanium and polyethylene. The fixed support (Figure 8) is placed on the inferior side of the tibial-bone. The force acting on the femoral head (Figure 9) has two components: one of 500N on z axis (vertical) and the second one of 300N on x axis (horizontal). The magnitude of the torque acting on the femoral head (Figure 10) is 100Nm. The application points of the force and momentum are on the femoral head.

Figure 8: Fixed support

Figure 9: Force components

After the meshing (Figure 11), 20270 nodes and 9780 elements have been obtained for the smooth surface prosthesis and 103533 nodes and 59109 elements for the Lattice structure prosthesis.

Figure 10: The torque

Figure 11: The meshing

750

It can be clearly seen from figure 12 and figure 13 that the maximum deformations occur on the femoral head in both cases, and their values dont differ very much for the two types of prostheses.

Figure 12: Total deformations for the prosthesis with smooth surface

Figure 13: Total deformations for the prosthesis with Lattice structure

For the equivalent stress and equivalent elastic strains, the maximum values appear in the same zone for both prostheses (Figure 14 and 15); their maximum values differ from 2,7662e9 Pa, for the simple prosthesis to 2,1041e9 Pa, for the Lattice structures prosthesis in case of equivalent stress and from 0,10876 m/m, for the simple prosthesis to 0,090979m/m for the Lattice structures prosthesis in case of equivalent elastic strains.

Figure 14: Equivalent stress

Figure 15: Equivalent elastic strains

Maximum principal elastic strains, for the prosthesis with Lattice structure, dont occur at their level (Figure 16), the maximal value of maximal principal elastic strain in that part of the prosthesis is 5,7617e-003 m/m. The normal elastic strain has the maximal value on the polyethylene component (Figure 17).

751

Figure 16: Maximum principal elastic strains

Figure 17: Normal elastic strain

4. CONCLUSION
Knee replacement surgery consists of replacing the diseased or damaged joint surfaces of the knee with metal and plastic components designed to allow continuous movement of the knee. The prosthesis is selected for each patient depending on their individual requirements. The surfaces of the TKP that come into direct contact with the bone can have a Lattice structure on all the prosthesis sides, or only on some parts. The Lattice structure has an important role in the osteointegration process. As it resulted from Finite Element Analysis, the Lattice structure does not affect the mechanical strength of the prosthesis: the behavior of the prosthesis with Lattice structure is similar to that of the prosthesis without Lattice structure.

AKNOWLEDGEMENT
This work was partially supported by the strategic grant POSDRU 6/1.5/s/13, (2008) of the Ministry of Labor, Family and Social Protection, Romania, co-financed by the European Social Fund Investing in people.

REFERENCES
[1] Sudesh Sivarasu, M.: Finite Element Analysis of a Novel High Flexion Knee (Ti UHMWPE) used in Total Knee Arthroplasty, Available on Web site: http://www.ispub.com/journal/the_internet_journal_of_bioengineering/volume_4_number_1_56/article_print able/finite-element-analysis-of-a-novel-high-flexion-knee-ti-uhmwpe-used-in-total-knee-arthroplasty.html [2] Martin, G.M.: Patient information: Total knee replacement (arthroplasty), Available on Web site: http://www.uptodate.com/patients/content/topic.do?topicKey=~7.Rzl/10Ljt1FR. [3] Palmer, S.H.: Total Knee Arthroplasty, Available on Web site: http://emedicine.medscape.com/article/1250275-overview. [4] ASTM F2083 - 08e1 Standard Specification for Total Knee Prosthesis. Available on Web site: http://www.astm.org/Standards/F2083.htm.

752

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

INTEGRATED MODEL OF BUSINESS PROCESS AS A KEY TO THE INTEGRATION OF MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Mirko Djapic1, Ljubomir Lukic2
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering Kraljevo, Kraljevo, SERBIA, 1 e-mail: djapic.m@mfkv.rs, 2 e-mail: lukic.lj@mfkv.rs

Summary: Many organizations encounter the problem of development and implementation of Integrated Management System (IMS), based on the quality requirements (ISO 9001), preservation of environment (ISO 14001) and occupational health and safety assessment standard (OH&SAS 18000). In order to help the organizations in this venture, the paper presents some of the key definitions which explain the concept. This work provides an approach to the integration of different standards requirements, based on the interrelation of mutually connected business processes. Keywords: IMS, QMS, EMS, OH&SAS, Business processes.

1. INTRODUCTION
The aim of the International Organization for Standardization ISO is to develop, based on the best global practices, ISO standards in various domains of human activity which will provide comprehension, cooperation and expeditive communication on the global market. Many organizations are trying to develop and implement the integrated management system (IMS) which will satisfy requirements of the ISO 9001, ISO 14001 OHSAS 18001, ISO/IEC 27001 standards etc. What they need now is a clear structure of the new system and time schedule of actions that will provide them certification without major problems. Similarities in the framework and structure of standards ISO 9001, ISO 14001, OHSAS 18001 ISO/IEC 27001 etc. point out that this integration can be performed. The ISO has undoubtedly assisted this goal, by defining, at the proposal of the Dutch Institute for Standardization as early as 1998., the preliminary specification ISO Guide 72 - Guide on Justification and Drafting of Management System Standards. This Guide has been endorced in 2002. ISO Guide 72 is intended to improve the interface between the standards developing committees and the market they serve, as well as to make optimal use of resources by only developing management system standards for which there are clear market requirements /8/. Organizations beginning integration of different management systems usually have developed and implemented one or two systems. Most often it is the QMS according to requirements of ISO9001, or EMS according to requirements of ISO14001. These systems were developed in different time intervals, with different sets of documents. There has been confusion in the market place as to what constitutes an integrated management system. This was the basic reason why BSI developed and introduced new specification for management system integration /2/. In order to assist organizations that are starting this venture, the paper presents and explains several key definitions that will surely facilitate this work. It also demonstrates how orientation toward business processes represents the key for integration, that is, how business processes represent the backbone of integration.

2. INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IMS-QEHS)

Integrated management system represents the reality facing top management in every organization and each process owner. It can be argued that each organization has some form of integrated management system, the

753

leadership and the executive officers (top-menagement) having the obligation to implement legal and other national regulations regarding the fulfillment of demands of interested parties: society, owners, employees, customers, suppliers and others. Question should be asked to what extent is such an IMS formalized (documented), efficient and effective, giving management the opportunity of insight into every part of the business system, enabling them to make timely business decisions based on facts? Having the certificate for quality management system, ISO 9001:2000, testifies only (usually) that the organization successfully controls processes significant for product quality. However, QMS certificate does not necessarily mean the fulfillment of requirements of interested parties. Fast development and spreading of influence of the ISO 9000 series standards have induced the emergence of other standards in the domain of management, such as environment protection (ISO 14000), occupational safety and occupational health and safety assessment (OHSAS 18000), information safety (ISO/IEC 27001), information technologies (ISO 2000) etc. New standard series are being prepared for other management systems (in health care and occupational safety ISO 18000, risk ISO 31000, finances ISO/TR 10014 etc.), establishing partial requirements for specific management domains, which will be mutually complementary. Emergence of ISO 14000 standards and the development of the management systems for environment protection according to this standard implied its integration with QMS. When this occurred (in the second half of the past decade), the researchers and practitioners were faced with the problem of integrating these systems. This problem gains in significance later on as an entire series of new management systems emerged, some of which have been listed above. The researchers and practitioners were faced with two key problems. They are: 1. What does "integration" of management systems mean, how should it be defined? 2. How to perform this integration, how to implement it, measure it and finally how to improve it? Literature in English gives a variety of different answers to these questions. These topics have been a frequent subject of journals such as Quality World, Quality Progress and TQM Magazine.
Integrated Management

Combined Assessment

Compatible Implementation

Integrated Management

9001 14001 18001

9001 14001 20000 / 27001 18001

9001 14001
PAS 99

18001

20000 / 27001

BS25999

BS25999

20000 / 27001

BS25999

Figure 1: Integration and connection of different management system standards

2.1. Integration, Connection and Compatibility of Different Standards of Management Systems Introduction of a new concept into business practice invariably imposes the need to define it. The basic reason for this is unimpaired and unambiguous communication between researchers and practitioners. When speaking of integrated management systems (IMS), the need arises to define the term "integrated", in the way that it is most frequently used in standardization and in the system approach to management. An excellent basis for this is the study of MacGregor Associates of 1996. This study points out the need to precisely define "integrations" and "connections" of standards. Integration is viewed as a unique essential standard of the highest management level with optional modules covering different (specific) requirements, such as PAS 99:2006. Connection implies "parallel standards of management systems specified for a particular discipline, having high level of uniformness of structure and contents" (Figure 1.) In /9/ a definition is given of integrated management system as: "Integrated Management System is where an organization has a single management system that is a combination of two or more management systems standards (e.g. ISO 9001, 14001, 27001,...) and also complies with PAS 99:2006 - Specification of common management system requirements as a framework for integration (Figure 5.). If we want to imply management integration, then the kernel of the management system (Figure 2.) must cover QMS, EMS, OHSMS, ISMS etc., as well as all future standards to be developed.

754

Environment (ISO 14001:1996)

ES

Safety (OH&SAS18001: 1999)

QES QE QS

Quality (ISO9001:2000)

Management system

Figure 2: Integration and connection of quality, environment protection and safety Backing the above statement, it is interesting to quote the ISO/TAG 12 recommendation of the technical group, requiring that ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 series should not be joined but made compatible. Under compatibility of standards, we consider "that common elements of standards can be implemented in such a way as to fulfill all standards in their entirety or in part, without unnecessary duplication or imposing requirements that are mutually exclusive". 2.2. Models of Integrated Management Systems Quite a number of models can be found in literature. We point out models of Wilkinson and Dale /6/ and Karapetrovi /7/ model (Figure 3.).

Figure 3: A model of IMS /7/ BSI has in 2006. established the standard for integrated management systems. BSIs intention was to simplify the implementation of multiple management system standards and any associated conformity assessment. Based on ISO Guide 72, BSI recommends integrated approach to /7/: Management review that considers the overall business strategy and action plan; An integrated approach to internal audits upon the integrated system; An integrated approach to policy and objectives setting; An integrated approach to looking at the aspects, impacts, and risk to the business; An integrated approach to systems processes;

755

An integrated documentation set including integrated desk instructions and work instructions; An integrated approach to improvement mechanisms (Corrective Action, Measurement and Continual Improvement); Unified management support and a coherent participation PAS 99 is a Publicly Available Specification of common requirements for management systems that can be used as a framework for an integrated management system. Organizations with more than one management system can view PAS 99 as an aid to achieving a single holistic management system. PAS 99 takes account of the six common requirements for management systems standards outlined in ISO Guide 72 guidance document. These six common requirements are: Policy Planning Implementation and Operation Performance Assessment Improvement Management Review Integrated management model is providede on figure 4 and 5.

General Review input Review output

ACT
Policy Management Review

Policy and/or principle

PLAN
Selection of significant aspects to be addressed Objectives and targets Identification of resources Identification of organizational structures, roles, responsibilities and authorities Planning of operational control Contingency preparedness for foreseeable events

Management System
Planning

Corrective action Preventive action Continual improvement

Improvement

CHECK
General Monitoring and measurement Analyzing and handling nonconformities Management system audit

Performance Assessment

Implementation and Operation

DO
Operation control Management of Human Resources Management of other resources Documentation and its control Communication Relationship with suppliers and contractors

Figure 4: PAS 99 PDCA cycle

Specific requirements for Specific requirements for Specific requirements for Specific requirements for

OM E Q O OM

Common requirements

Common requirements

Common requirements

Common requirements

PAS Common requirements

E Q

Environment Quality

O OM

OH&S Other MSS

Figure 5: Integration of requirements of different management systems according to BS PAS 99:2006

3. BUSINESS PROCESSES KEY TO THE INTEGRATION OF MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Many organizations starting the development of IMS have implemented at least one management system. The problem they are faced with is how, under such circumstances, to develop and implement an integrated system.

756

The first step that has to be performed is to analyze whether there exists a business justification for such a project. It is important to consider requirements of all interested parties, as well as the influence of the new system on them. If the answer to the first question is affirmative, it is necessary to plan everything and to provide resources and the necessary budget for the implementation of IMS. The next key task is to determine where does the organization stand with respect to the requirements of all standards constituting the scope of IMS. It is important to asses the efficiency of the existing management system.

Process Owner

Procurement
Process Owner

Production Contracting
Process Owner

D es i gn and dev el opm ent

Dr Mirko Djapic

Figure 6: Designing process enterprices Diagram of business processes in the designing process enterprices (Figure 6.) is a useful tool for this analysis. If it has not been made previously, it should be generated now. Based on this diagram, it can be determined how are the standard requirements making the scope of IMS implemented in all organizations processes, and especially in basic processes. In this way business process becomes the backbone of the integration requirements of different standards (Figure 7.).

PROCESS OWNER SUBPROCESS OWNERS PROJECT TEAM MEMEBERS

PROCESS BORDERS
Information securiry

INTERFACES ISO/IEC 27001

. . .

PROCESS BORDERS

O2`

INPUT
Process core . . .

O1

O2

O3

ISO 9001 ISO 14001 OHSAS 18001 ISO/IEC 17025 17021 17024 BS 25999

On

OUTPUT

Business continuity

ORGANIYATION UNIT 1

ORGANIZACIONA UNIT 2 DIRECTION OF PROCESS FLOW

ORGANIYATION UNIT n
M. api

Figure 7: Integrated model of business proces Within the structure of business processes, not every process has the same potential for integration of different standards requirements. Integrated model of business proces is multy layer model. We can identifced tree layers. Processes core (Figure 7) having the greatest potential for integration of requirements of quality, environment protection and occupational health and safety.

757

Existence of three or more separate approaches to operative production process management can lead to confusion among employees about which approach is best to be used. Many organizations generate different manuals referring for example to quality, environment protection and occupational health and safety. Such manuals are usually made without analyzing their mutual influence, and most often they are mutually conflicting. In this way, they can lead to misunderstandings, especially when novice employees being introduced to particular activities in the process are introduced to them. Therefore it is useful to identify strategy for the integration of these requirements /5/: Identify those activities in the production process that can influence quality, environment, and occupational health and safety. With the help of employees engaged in the production process, develop and document procedure(s) for operative management of the production process with operating manuals that clearly define operative criteria for the production of high quality products observing occupational health and safety, which least affect the environment. Develop and operatively manage processes in order to ensure that raw materials, parts in the production process, and final products are clearly identified. Develop and operatively manage processes for handling, storage, packing and delivery of products. Benefits from integrating requirements are: Organizations that have integrated operative management of the production process have great support from the employees. Confusion and conflicts that can be generated by mutually contradictory documents are decreased. Employee training is less tedious. The greatest benefit is that in this way the developed management system displays how the tasks are performed and controlled within the organization.

4. CONCLUSION
Many organizations wishing to satisfy requirements for quality, environment protection and occupational health and safety are faced with the problem how and in what way to integrate different management systems. Integration of several systems into one is more efficient and economical than developing and implementing separate systems. In order to aid organizations that are starting this project, the paper presents and explains several key definitions that will surely facilitate this venture. Also, it is demonstrated how orientation toward business processes is the key to integration, that is, how business processes represent the backbone of integration.

REFERENCES
[1] Djapic, M., Lukic, Lj., Arsovski, S., Integrated Management Systems - Requirement of Contemporary Business Practices, VI International Conference "Heavy Machinery - HM 08", Kraljevo, Serbia, 24. 09. 2008, pp (G.1 - G.6) [2] Wang, Wilhelm, PAS 99:2006 - Integrated Management System, BSI Management systems presentation, Mexico City, May 2008. [3] BS PAS 99:2006, Specification of common management system requirement as a framework for integration, British Standard Institution, 2006. [4] MacGregor Associations, Study of Management Systems Standards, British Standards Institute, 1996. [5] Phillips, A., Integrating Green into an Existing Management System: Most Commonly Integrated Process, ASQs 56th Annual Quality Congress, Colorado, May 20.-22. 2002. [6] Wilkinson, G, Dale, B. G., Integrated management systems: an examination of the concept and theory, The TQM Magazine, Vol. 12., No. 1., 1999., pp. 95-104. [7] Karapetrovic, S., Willborn, W., Integration quality and environmental management systems, TQM Magazine, Vol. 11., No. 3., 1998., pp. 204-217. [8] De Grood, R., Hortensius, D., ISO Guide 72 on justification and drafting of management system standards, ISO Bulletin, March 2002. [9] Wang, Wilhelm, PAS 99:2006 - Integrated Management System, BSI Mangement systems presentation, Mexico City, May 2008.

758

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SAMPLING PROCEDURE FACTORS IN STATISTICAL INFERENCE

2

Faculty of Economics, Nis, SERBIA, e-mail: vera.djordjevic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs e-mail: vinko.lepojevic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs, 3 e-mail: vesna.jankovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs

Vera Djordjevi1, Vinko Lepojevi2, Vesna Jankovi-Mili3

Summary: The aim of this paper is to point out the possibility of increasing the representativeness of samples. Bearing in mind that the sampling is a very complex process, subject to the effects of many factors, the paper singled out only the most important sampling factors. The type and size of the sample from which conclusions are made have major impact on the accuracy of the conclusion, so this paper dedicated great importance to the this topic. All of the factors that influence the accuracy of sampling were analyzed from the perspective of researchers. Keywords: sample, basic set, error, sample size.

1.INTRODUCTION
Statistical inference has become a way of thinking and decision-making in the modern approach to business and work in wide diapason of human activities. Thus sampling has become the dominant way of determining the parameters in population, primarily because resources and time are limited. Sampling takes risk of getting approximate and sometimes inaccurate assessment of the parameters in population. Therefore, researchers need to recognize opportunities to improve the accuracy of statistical reasoning. In the social surveys research many phenomena have the random characters and as such they can be studied with the help of probability theory or statistical inference. Registered sample data (statistics) are used for drawing conclusions about the unknown parameters of the observed phenomena (population). The sample should be representative for making conclusions about basic set parameters. Representative sample is achieved by proper selection of sample. There are several reasons for the analysis of the data sample and sampling. Sampling makes it possible to obtain information on the basic parameter set comes with a lower cost and in a relatively short period of time especially when it comes to large population. Any statistics research focuses on the emergence of the basic set that consists of individuals, objects or events that are the subject of research. The first step in the research is to define the basic set (conceptual, time and content). [3] Certain limitations in the choice of sample water to the sample that will be not representative (biased). Biased sample is one that doesnt represent a basic set from which it is drawn. It is necessary eliminate bias in choosing the sample as long as possible. In fact, it is very difficult to completely eliminate bias and provide a truly representative sample. What can be done is to take steps to minimize bias. It is possible to identify three sources of bias: - Method of selection units in the sample. If we are using a non-random sample selection, or intended to estimate the possible influence of researchers on the process of selection units, so that some units will have a higher probability of selection in the sample than others. This source of bias can be eliminated by applying random sampling method. - Determination of sample frame - listing all the basic set of units from which the sample will be drawn. When the sample is not a comprehensive framework or inaccurate, or has some other disabilities, the sample which is drawn can not represent a basic set, even when applied to random sampling method. - If some respondents refuse to participate or can not be contacted, if there is no response. - Error of measurement - The process of measurement in practice is often carried out so that there is a convenient, but not the necessary data. The collected data may contain sampling error related to the interviewer or respondents.

759

2. THE TYPES OF SAMPLES

It must be point out that in the random sampling method is impossible completely eliminates the sampling error, but they are in any case less than the non random samples. Also, the random sampling method enables researchers to use statistical significance tests, which provide conclusions about the population from which the sample is drawn. Simplest kind of random samples can be explained through examples. Suppose that we are interested in the level of training, skills development and teaching staff. We can decide to conduct our research in one company. This means that our basic set is all employees of the company, which will mean that our findings can be generalized only to the company. We simply can not assume that the level of training, for example, is the same in other companies. We can also decide to conduct a survey of employees who are full-time employed, so that other employees of the company off. Imagine also that this company has 9000 employees with a full-time. Simple random sample - the one of the basic types of random sampling. In this sample, each basic set unit has the equal probability of inclusion in the sample. Suppose that we have sufficient funds to interview 450 employees in the company. This means that in our example we select 5% or pattern, or the probability of inclusion in the sample is 450 / 9000 (elected for 1 of 20 employees). Key steps in the formation of simple random sampling are: 1. Defining the basic set; 2. The choice or determination of the sample. It is assumed that personal service in the company has data on all employees and this will allow us to exclude them from the database that do not meet our criteria for the selection of the sample, and that all employees except those who have full-time; 3. Selection of sample size. In this case, n = 450; 4. Establishing of a list of all employees and assigned numbers from 1 to N; 5. Using the Tables of random numbers, or a computer program that will generate random numbers, and thus selection of 450 different random numbers that are between 1 and 9000; 6. Employees who meet 450 random numbers made sample. A systematic sample - It is like a simple random sample. It is used when the sample is large so that the choice of using Tables of random numbers, massive job. Thus, in this sample units are selected directly from within the sample, without using Tables of random numbers. That means, in our example, that we select one employee of 20 employees. Stratified random sample this type of probability sample is often used to increase the accuracy of assessments based on a sample. It can be used in situations where the basic set can be divided into groups stratum which should contain homogenous units with respect to the variable that is tested. In our example, one of the features we want to emphasize that sampling may be proportional to the presentation of various departments in which employees work. For the company there may be separate boxes for each sample class, i.e. that there is no data belonging to certain classes of employees in the company. That basically means meeting the basic stratification according to the criterion of belonging to a particular department and extraction or simple random sampling or systematic sampling of these strata. In our case, if the company there is 5 classes we will have five strata. The advantage of stratified sampling in the case such as this is obvious. Stratified sample ensures that the resulting sample is distributed as well as the basic set. In other words, in this way increase the sample significance and the precision of statistical conclusions. When used simple random sample or systematic sample, there is a small probability to obtain such a distribution of frequencies in the sample. Two facts are very important here. Stratified sample can be formed only in circumstances where it is relatively easy to identify and allocate units in the stratum. If this is not possible or very difficult to do, then the stratified sample is not feasible. Secondly, one can use more than one criterion for stratification. Stratified sample is possible if the relevant information is available. Multi-stage cluster sample - Suppose that we drawing out a national sample of employees (total sample at the country level). That means the gaseous interviewers to travel all over the country to interview subjects who were selected in the sample. This causes high costs and requires a lot of time. This problem occurs whenever the aim is to interview sample unit which was drawn from a very basic set of spread, such as at the country level, or a large region or city. One way of overcoming this problem is to establish a cluster sample. In cluster sampling, primary sampling unit (the first level of sampling procedures) is the group of units, i.e. clusters. For example, if we wish to form a nationally representative sample of 5,000 employees who work for the 100 largest companies in Serbia, the use of simple random sampling leads to a spread sample and requires a long and

760

arduous journey for the interviewer. One solution in this case is to create a model company and interviewed employees from each company in the sample. Random sampling method should be applied at each level. Thus, we randomly select 10 companies a way around the set of the 100 largest companies in the Serbia, so we get 10 clusters, and interview of 500 randomly selected employees at each company. This is a good solution, but there is no guarantee that these 10 companies reflect the diversity of levels of activity that could be seen observing the entire base set. One of the solutions, too, is a grouping of the 100 largest companies by SIC (Standard Industrial Classification). The next step is random selection of companies in each SIC group, and then from the selected companies the choice of number of employees. The cluster sample is always characterized by multi-stage approach, because the first causes or clusters and then further clusters or a set of basic units are sampled. Convenience sample - Suitable or convenience sample is one which simply corresponds to the researcher because of its availability. Imagine that a researcher who teaches at the university wants to examine how managers deal with some ethical issues when making business decisions. It can be divided questionnaires in the classroom in a class (group). The chances of all respondents returned completed questionnaires are very large, so in this way provides a very high level of responding (beyond the problem of failing to respond). The obtained results can be very interesting, but the problem with such a sampling strategy is how those results or conclusions can be generalized, because no one knows what kind of population this sample represents. This is simply a group of students (future managers) that are available to researchers. But that does not mean that this sample should never be used. It can serve as a pilot sample or as a prelude to some serious research. Snowball sample - Snowball sample is a form of a suitable sample, but these two types of samples have some differences. This type of samples has become very popular in recent years. With this approach to sampling, the investigator makes the initial contact with a small group of people that are relevant to the topic of research, and then use them to establish contact with others. This sample was used Bryman (1999) in the survey of visitors to Disneyland. They are also the technique of forming the sample used and Boshof and Maas (2005) to identify ownersmanagers and success in small and family businesses in South Africa. Snowball sample in any sense is not accidental, because there is no way to determine the exact volume (size) sets the base should have. In other words, there is no available and understandable framework for the basic set of samples from which the sample should be formed. Therefore, the complexity of establishing such a framework means that the sample is the only possible approach. The problem with snowball sampling is that it is unlikely that such a sample will be representative. Snowball sample, in spite of lack of use, is used in qualitative research more than in quantitative. But, this type of sample is not completely irrelevant for quantitative research. When researchers need to direct attention to the reflection connections between people - snowball sampling gives better results than classical random sample for the detection origin connection. Quota sample - Quota sample is extensively used in commercial research, such as market research or political poll. The aim of quota sampling is to obtain a sample which reflects the population in terms of relative participation of people from different categories, such as gender, ethnicity, age, socio-economic background, background region, or a combination of the given category. [2] In contrast to the stratified sample, at this sample selection of individuals is not random, but it is given up to the interviewer. Once, when is determined the certain number of people who will be interviewed from each category (quotas), researcher can choose the subjects that belong to these categories. Quotas will be interconnected. Similar to stratified sample, the population will be divided into the stratum, for example, by gender, social status, age, or ethnicity. Data from the census can be used to determine the number of subjects that should be in each subgroup. The number of subjects in each subgroup would reflect the population. Polls usually ask people who have access to the features that are essential for the determination of his membership in a particular subgroup. The choice of respondents was left to a researcher. Criticisms of quota sample are: - Sample may not be representative, because the choice of subjects left to the researcher, - Respondents who are involved in research may not be typical representatives of their categories, - Not recommended for the calculation of standard errors on the basis of quota sampling method because non random unit choice prevents the calculation of the basic set parameters. Some advantages of quota sampling are: - It can be made faster and cheaper than a simple random sample, - Interviewers do not have to repeatedly call or return to the people that the first attempt did not find.

761

3. SAMPLE PRECISION FACTORS

The precision of the statistical inference can be increased over the sample size (n). In this sense, the question that is often raised in the research is how large a sample should be and whether the sample is large enough. The decision on the size of the sample depends on a number of important facts and there is no one definitive answer. The fact is that the higher sample size leads to the more accurate estimation and vice versa. Larger sample increases the time and costs of research. Frequently the decisions that relate to the size of the sample are made taking into account the time and cost. Decisions about the size of the sample represent a compromise between the limits given in time and costs on the one hand and demands for accuracy and other requirements on the other side. [4] The absolute and relative size of the sample - One of the essential facts, and also surprising, is that the not relative sample size is matter, but absolute. This means that, for example, a national sample of 1,000 units in Vojvodina, just as valid as a national sample of 1,000 units in the territory of Serbia proper, no matter what Serbia has a lot more people. The fact is also that with increasing sample size increases the accuracy of the sample. However, a large sample can not guarantee the accuracy of, and may be better to say that the increasing of sample size likely increases the accuracy of the sample. This means that with increasing the sample reduces the sampling error. Thus, an important component of the decision on the size of the sample should be how much sampling error can be tolerated. Fowler (1993) warns against easy acceptance of this criterion. He argued that researchers in practice base their decisions on the size of the sample at a variable rate. In many studies there are many variables that are important. It is also argued that in much research it is not logic to advance determine the level of precision. Also, bearing in mind that the sampling error is only one type of error that occurs during the research, it is not realistic that the level of accuracy that is based on this error to be authoritative for the sample size determination. [1] The time and costs - Consideration of the time and cost is very important in determining the sample size. It has been shown to increase the sample size contributes to a small increase in accuracy on the one hand, while on the other side - uneconomic demand. Heterogeneous of basic set -When the sample is very heterogeneous, as a sample from across the country or around the city, it is likely that a basic set has high variability. But when the sample is relatively homogenous, such as employees of a company, variability is less. This means that when the basic set is more heterogeneous, the sample should be higher. Type of analysis - Finally, the researchers during the sample formation should have in mind the type of analysis that want to implement it. For this purpose, one often uses contingency tables. It shows the relationship between two variables in the form of tables from which you can see how variation of one variable dependent on the variation of other variables. [5] Consider our example with the development of skills and knowledge in the 100 largest companies in Serbia. The table could show how 5000 employees that make up the sample characteristics vary according to skills and knowledge, expressed in the training during the previous 12 months. The table should show the differences between companies that are grouped by SIC classification. If companies are selected from each group of these classifications, some rows in the contingency table will be empty. In order to overcome this problem, the sample would have to be designed differently, and to eliminate some of the criteria that were used during the formation of the sample. It will be then linked to the number of employees who are included in each company. Sampling frame - Statistics is the subject of drawing conclusions about the unknown parameters based on the basic set of registered data - also called statistical data - and thus with probability best describes the incidental occurrence. As a rule, data sample are using to make some findings. To perform a proper choice of units in the sample and to avoid errors in statistical inference is necessary to determine the sample frame. As a rule, the sample is selected from the basic set list, or maps (list of employees, company registers, a list of suppliers, etc.). These lists and maps represent the sample framework. One can not put an equal sign between the basic set and the sample frame. For a large number of basic sets there are no lists, or no sample frame which makes the sampling procedure more complicated. Framework greatly facilitates the work with the sample. For any reliable statistical inference it is necessary to correctly determine the sample frame. In most cases sampling is based on the sample frame - because it allows faster selection of elements in the sample with a lower choice costs. As is usually the sample frame is the same as and the basic set from which the sample extract, and then there may be two types of basic sets: - Basic sets, which are by nature the same as the sample frame,

762

- Basic sets for which there is no sampling frame, which makes it difficult for any serious research. In the first case the sampling simplifies the fact that there are basic sets whose sample framework is given by the nature of things: an official or unofficial law or otherwise furnished evidence of basic sets elements. Measurement error - Measurement error are the one type of error in the social survey research. The other types are shown in Figure 1. This type of error represents the irregularities recorded answers to questions in questionnaires. Questionnaire is made to obtain relevant information from a sample of population. In the practice we often have a convenient and not the necessary data. The information obtained from this data is a substitute, but not real data that we really want to research. Such data, or measurement error, come as a result of poor formulation of questions. Subjective questions should be avoided. There are three types of measurement errors: - Ambiguously worded questions - give inaccurate answers, and a mistake can be reduced by proper formulation of questions, - Halo effect - occurs when the respondent felt obliged to satisfy the examiners. Proper training of examiners of this error can be avoided, - Error in the response - the result of excessive or not enough effort invested in the respondent answering the questions. These errors can be avoided by new random selection of respondents to check the data already collected, in particular checking unusual response.

Error

Sampling error

Sampling-related error

Data collection error

Data processing error

Figure 1: Four sources of error in social survey research [1, p. 202] Non-responding - Most of the research is faced with this problem. In our example it is likely that not all employees agree to participate in the study. If our goal is to ensure that 450 employees answered the questionnaire, and if we think it is possible non-answering rate of about 20%, it is necessary to include the 540550 employees in the sample, considering that about 90 of them will not respond. For example, in one research in 1995th year, 143 questionnaires were sent to a research, only 40 questionnaires were returned with responses, and of these only 36 were usable, which means that the rate of responding is 25%. Such percentage of respond has much influence on sample representativeness. It should be also noted that is the growing tendency of respondents refusing to participate in research.

4. CONCLUSION
One of the main goals of statistical reasoning is an attempt to under information obtained from the sample derivative conclusions about the parameters of basic set. Statistical inference about parameters based on statistics obtained from the sample has become a way of thinking and decision making in the modern approach to business and work. However, the statistical conclusion takes the risk assessment to get the parameter values that are approximate, imprecise and sometimes inaccurate. Past experience shows that proper selection of sample, sample size, the proper formulation of questions in the questionnaire, determining the proper sample frame - can provide basic set parameters estimation with a minimal or tolerant error.

5. REFERENCES [1] Bryman, A.; Bell, E.: Business Research Methods. New York: Oxford Unevrsity Press Inc.,2007. - pp. 786.
ISBN 978-0-19-928498-6.

[2] Chakrapani, C.: Statistic in Market Research. New York: Oxford Unevrsity Press Inc.,2007. - pp. 197. ISBN
978-0-34-076397-1.

[3] orevi, V.: Statistika u ekonomiji. Ni: Faculty of Economics, 2009.- pp. 385. ISBN 978-86-85099-58-8.

763

[4] orevi, V.; Lepojevi, V.; Jankovi-Mili, V.: The role of quantitative tehniques in decision making
process. Ekonomske teme, Vol. 46, br. 1 (2008), str. 1-10. ISSN 0353-8648.

[5] orevi, V.; Lepojevi, V.; Jankovi-Mili, V.: Primena naprednih tehnika u istraivanju trita. U: Zborniku radova 12. Meunarodne konferencije Upravljanje kvalitetom i pouzadnou DQM-2009,
Beograd, 25-26. jun 2009. Editor: Ljubia Papi. Prijevor: DQM Istraivaki centar, 2009, str. 604-608. ISSN 1451- 4966.

764

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

CHNOLOGICAL MODERNIZATION OF INDUSTRY AS A BASIS FOR IMPROVING THE ECONOMIC POTENTIAL OF STATES
National Technical University of Ukraine Kiev Polytechnic Institute, Kiev, UKRAINE, e-mail: gerasimchuk@kpi.ua
Summary: Progress of trade and economic relation trends are analyzed between Ukraine and Republic Serbia. Attention is accented on the necessity of increase in the structure of commodity turnover of products of machine-building industry as to the locomotive of development of economy of the state. The basic problems of development and realization are examined innovative investment models of development of economy of Ukraine. The features of application of marketing complex are probed during realization of export-import operations by the producers of industrial products. Measures are offered on the increase of efficiency of management technological innovations for the necessities of both internal and external, market. Key words: management, innovation, technology, marketing, motivation, efficiency, competitiveness.

Vasyl H. Gerasymchuk

1. INTRODUCTION
Mens agitate molem (.). Opinion causes [movement] of matter. As an author of the article is a
representative of Ukraine, and collection of materials goes out in Serbia under scientific guidance of scientist with the world name Predrag Dasic, expediently, in our view, first to confront the problems of economic development of two brotherly Slavonic countries. One of fragments of such comparison the analysis of structure of trade and economic relation can come forward between Ukraine and Republic Serbia. In 2010r. from Ukraine to Serbia remained the basic groups of export of commodities: ores, slags and ash; power materials are oil and natural gas; black metals are cast-iron and steel; wood and wares is from it; paper and cardboard; salt, sulphur, clout materials, cement. Basic groups of import of commodities from Republic Serbia to Ukraine in 2010r.: polymeric materials, plastics; pharmaceutical products; tobacco; paper and cardboard; wood and wares is from it; seed and garden-stuffs of oil plants; extracts of dublin, dyes; special fabrics. Positive tendencies of output of world economy, including Ukrainian, and Serbian, from an economic crisis that observed from the second half-year last year, allow expecting noticeable increase of volumes of two extraneous trades. At the same time, not hardness to come to the conclusion, that barter between two countries is carried out mainly power and raw material materials with the low level of value-added. For the production of these materials and in one, and high qualification of labour force, most modern technology, difficult, high technology equipment, is not needed in other country. Although national economy of and Ukraine, and Serbia, can not successfully function without raw material and power resources, but in the conditions of globalization high technology, highly technological processes determine the competitiveness of country, above all things. Exactly they are able to satisfy necessities both internal, and definitely overseas market. In the conditions of open economy, influence of external factors increases on development of national economy. It requires the proper, maybe, protective actions from the side of imperious structures, from the side of enterprise sphere. Degree of influence of external factors on the level of economic development of every country, sure, different. If to analyze a situation on the European continent, and more precisely, within the framework of the European concord (ES), the most critical condition is presently observed in Greece, Spain, Portugal, Latvia. Something is other gates folded situation in Indium, China, some other states, where not falling takes place, but vice versa, stability or even increase of rates of the economy growing. Explanation of positive economic trends is that the state usually cares of the internal market, about wide of a particular branch diversification, about a domestic commodity producer.

765

Duration and depth of the crisis phenomena testify in a world economy, that mechanisms of self-regulation of market economy are without operative, enough hard interference from the side of the state on occasion does not enable successfully to go out from difficult situations. From a review marked development and realization of the operative, self-weighted measures, directed on the exit of country from a crisis situation is required. Also these measures must be instrumental in creation of more proof, more reliable in relation to external threats economic system. Under the circumstances the separate states appear in more winning position, other get to the number of outsiders with all proper consequences both for a country on the whole and for every citizen of this country separately. An innovative way of development of country is on principle important, as in the conditions of growings integration processes in a world economy quality of management innovative processes, their support from the side of the state becomes the determinative of competitiveness of national economies. To our opinion, high level of competitiveness a country can attain subject to condition, if principle of innovation is inculcated in life in all spheres of functioning of the state: to the moral, spirituality, culture, education, science, sphere of production, sphere of consumption. Ukrainian country's leader V.F. Yanukovych marked strategic course: during ten years Ukraine must enter in a number 20 powerful economies of the world. Ukraine, from data of International Monetary Fund (IMF) after 2007 r., in the world rating after the level of GDP after the parity of purchasing power (PPP) occupies a 33-te place with the value of GDP (PPP) 320,126 million international dollars. 20-te place - after Netherlands from GDP (PPP) 639,512 million international dollars [1]. It is needed to overcome a difference Ukraine in 318,386 million dol. It is de been sees necessary to pass Ukraine: Greece, Venezuela, Sweden, Malaysia, Belgium, Egypt, Pakistan, PAIR, Thailand, Argentina, Saudis Arabia, Poland, and finally, Netherlands. Then it will take the 20-te place. Average annual rates of growth of GDP in Ukraine must be not below, than during the last three ten of years in China, 7,0%. Such rates, in particular, in 7,0% there were a few years back and in Ukraine. But not a single country stands in place. It costs to take into account that world GDP grows on the average on a 3,5 percent (production of goods of agriculture 1,5-2,5%, industrial products 4,0-5,0%). Consequently operating is needed not twice (compare GDP of Ukraine and Netherlands), and, at least, three times more vigorously the competitors. Intentions by intentions but moving are needed under any circumstances. It is desirable forward and up the Ladder. Already not once speech went and about steps, and about breaches, and about the duty programs of duty president, duty government. Lately and at world level, and at the level of ES, and at the level of country, and at the level of enterprise speech goes about the innovative model of socio-economic development. For realization innovative investment models in Ukraine, on the face of it, created solid normatively legal base as laws, decrees, decisions, conceptions, et cetera (from 1991r. over 400 documents are accepted at state level). In Ukraine there is a process of not development, but regress. And stable inertia character of negative colouring carries this process. And in quantitative and in high-quality indexes. And in the cost and in natural measuring. By comparison to the pas of Ukraine (for example, from 1990r.), by comparison to countries-neighbours by comparison to the countries of the CIS by comparison to the countries of ES, by comparison to other countries. In difficult situations in Economics mention science, technology, basic production funds. Recall that scientific and technological progress (synonyms in modern scientists and politicians: Infrastructure, innovation and investment model of economy and technological innovation policy, research and innovation and technological development, etc.) will provide up to 90,0% (now: 65,0-70,0%) economic growth. Power of country in future must show more attentive attitude toward education and teachers, to science and research workers, to new technologies, to the new technique, to engineering labour (designer, technologist, mechanic, power engineering specialist, metrologies, et cetera).

2. RAISING OF TASK
Vere scire est per causas scire (.). Veritable knowledges are knowledge of reasons. The problems of innovative development were found by reflections in labours of such research workers, as: Aleksandrovoi V.P., Alimova O.M., Amoshi O.I., Androschuka G.O., Ansoffa I., Bazhala Y.M., Valdayceva S.V., Galuzi S.G., Geycya V.M., Glaz'eva S.Y., Glukhova V.V., Gradova O.P., Dasica P., Zgurskogo V.A., Jovanoski D., Kaliticha G.I., Karenova R.S., Mazura O.A., Malickogo B.A., Pavlenko A.F., Pakhomova Y.M., Podpryatova S.E., Pokropivnogo S.F., Radosavlevicha J, Rutkauskasa A.-V., Solovyova V.P., Tvissa B, Fedulovoi L.I., Franka I.Y., Chirkova V.G., Chuzhikova V.I., Yackiva V.S. and many other. Dependence is set in Ukraine: than more laws, decrees, decisions, strategies, programs, projects, monographs, textbooks, dissertations, conferences, symposiums, conferences, articles, speeches, the worst results of innovative and socio-economic development. Results of socio-economic development of Ukraine: the most short-story life-span, lowest middle fettlings, the greatest level of corruption, is in Europe. Philosophy of brain, philosophy of creation is step by step replaced philosophy of stomach, philosophy of consumption.

766

The aim of geared-up research consists in the improvement of methodology of development and realization of strategy of innovative development of Ukraine in the conditions of globalization. Speech goes both about a theory and methodology, id est., about the aggregate of methods, methods, and ways of achievement of strategic aims. For achievement of the formulated aim it is needed to consider the problems of preparation and retraining of shots of innovative sphere, increase of effectiveness of sphere of science, modernization of industrial complex. We emphasize engineer, when speech goes about a national economy, her industrial complex. Economic potential of the developed countries is based first of all on industrial potential. Is there, indisputably, an engineer in basis of industrial potential. An engineer in the wide understanding of this phenomenon is preparation of specialists in the universities of technological type, organization of fundamental and applied scientific searches, development of designer decisions perfection of technology of production, introduction of new technique, producing of competitive products, realization of export deliveries, maintenance of hi-tech products, 100-percent utilization of obsolete items. Development of industries of engineer is carried out in the conditions of market, in the conditions of economy of open type. In this connection it is important to be determined at direction of trade and economic relation of the state, in determination of perspective markets of production of domestic commodity producers distribution. We support intentions of power in Ukraine in relation to the necessity of strengthening of trade and economic relationship with Russian Federation, countries of European Union, USA. Important attention in political, economic relations with the outer world must be spared to the states-neighbours. That at Ukraine overland and Marylou is 10: Russia, Belarus, Poland, Slovakia, Hungary, Romania, Moldova, Bulgaria, Turkey, Georgia. The special value Ukraine must spare to trade and economic relationship with the Balkan countries: by Bulgaria, By Albania, Greece, and also by countries which appeared after disintegration of Socialistic Federal Republic of Yugoslavia - Serbia, Macedonia, Montenegro, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Croatia, and Slovenia. We talk about countries, about people of these countries, with which we are constrained historically during many centuries. The Slavic people have general traditions, identical written language (Cyrillic alphabet), religion (orthodoxy). Certain reasoning concerning activation of trade and economic relationship with the Balkan countries spoke out by us on the pages of materials of conferences of LEMiMA, ANTiM, RaDMI. Will mark that these conferences get organized on initiative our colleagues known Serbian scientists - Predrag Dasic, Zivota Radosavljevic, Ilija Cosic [2].

3. METHODOLOGY
Principium rationis sufficientis (.). Law of sufficient ground. Theoretical and methodological basis of scientific research is a dialectical method of cognition of truth, principles of analysis of the systems, methods of statistical treatment and analysis of information, design, theory of market economy, economic theories of laureates of Nobel bonus, conception of globalization and steady development, domestic normatively-legal base on questions strategy of innovative development, development of industrial complex publications of structural subdivisions are United Nations, European Union, international organizations.

4. RESEARCH RESULTS
4.1. Morality as a fundamental principle of successful social and economic development

Aegumenta et bonum est lex legume (.). - Justice and welfare is a law of laws. A moral comes forward to one of basic methods of conduct of man in society. A moral embraces vital orientations and principles, aims and reasons of acts and relations. A moral conducts a limit between good and evil, honour and ignominy, justice and injustice, norm and abnormality, mercy and cruelty. The atmosphere of moral in the state is estimated also after the level of corrupted. From data of Transparency International in 2009. Ukraine took the 146th place collecting 2,2 points, on the ten-point scale of honesty of power. Than more subzero place, the higher level of corruption. Ukraine divided a 146th place with Russia, Zimbabwe, Kenya and Cameron. The most corrupted countries in the world are Somalia and Afghanistan. The greatest rating of honesty of power was got by New Zeeland and Denmark. Transparency International will nurse words corruption from the extended understanding. She plugs in this concept also excessive payments, opaque financial structures and offshore. Negative role in the assertions of morality and spirituality plays in the state oligarchy. Oligarchy is the form of state government, which concentrated power in the hands of a narrow circle of individuals (oligarchs). This form meets the personal interests of oligarchs, not the interests of the people. Aristotle used the term oligarchy in the sense of power-rich. He contrasted the oligarchy aristocracy. M. Gonchar says: The basic process of the Ukrainian (origin and form, but not the essence!) Parasitizing oligarchy is in the economic organism of the

767

country. Therefore, the development of Ukraine as a state or in an industrial or a post-industrial sense in decades that ends not happened. Financial swelling number of oligarchic business conglomerates in growth areas, especially in the gas sector, chemical industry, metallurgy, was due to positive trends on foreign markets and schemes to minimize taxes. Cheap raw material and energy input in the production chain + low wages - the cost of energy efficiency + artificially-indicative unprofitable enterprises + offshore + corruption = maximum profit at least a + state + tax bribes to officials and MPs + cheap TV-show soap operas, football and other spectacles for small Ukrainian [3, pp.8]. Moral of the country should contribute to its development. 4.2. Trends industry in Ukraine

Lucrum unius est alterius damnum (.). Profit one - a loss for another. During 1990-1999rr. in the
economy - depression. The causes of depression were disastrous, regressive, destructive processes in the transformation of consciousness, morality, politics, law and economic relations. Since 2000 the country started economic growth (an average of 7% per year). At the end of 2008 Gross domestic product (GDP) surpassed the mark of 70% compared with 1990 (1999 - 62%). GDP in 2008 constituted 80,5% of GDP in 1991. Then - crisis. If in 2008 total GDP in Ukraine reached a value of 179,5 billion. USA, in 2009 Estimated IMF 115,7 billion. USA. Given the dynamics of exchange rate, falling just one year was 35,6%. This - the highest in Europe. Official statistics in a figure of 15,1% Fall of GDP in Ukraine in 2009. If in 2008 Ukraine GDP per capita amounted to 3,9 thousand dollars. USA, in 2009 2,5 thousand dollars. United States (in Belarus 5,1 thousand dollars, US , Russia 8,9, Poland 11,1). The Law of Ukraine On state program of economic and social development of Ukraine for 2010 [4] stated: the crisis in 2008-2009rr.demonstrated a significant imbalance of the world economy and structural backwardness of the Ukrainian economy, its unwillingness to sharp fluctuations in demand, increased competition in commodity markets. In commodity markets aimed domestic export potential. In 2009 greatly complicated the test fell to an industrial complex of Ukraine. Depth of falling industrial output reached 21,9%. Its level reached the 2003 mark 2004. Following 2009 fall was significant: in industry - 26,7%, chemical and petrochemical industry 23,0 %, mechanical engineering - 44,9%, food industry 6,0%. Almost two-fold drop engineering production due to reduced investment demand in the domestic market. Productions of Ukrainian producers are uncompetitive in the global and domestic market. One reason - reducing the cost of research and development. This led to a decline in product quality, slow process of recovery, loss of market position. A large number of companies every year stop innovation. On low innovative enterprises figures show features innovative products. Thus, the total industrial outputs only 4,8% have signs of innovation. There is considerable scientific capacity of lower domestic production. Its share of world market of high-tech products is only 0,05-0,1% (in Russia - about 1%). Structural changes in the last decade characterized by significant technological lag. For output third technological way in Ukraine is 58,0%, 4th 38,0 % and only 4,0% - the fifth technological way. In the state does not create conditions for effective implementation of innovation. Implementation obstacles hinder innovation in organizational, financial, political, legal matters. Today, over 90% of industrial production has a modern logistics. This causes unprofitable ness and low competitiveness of most domestic goods. The current situation is characterized by low levels of engineering processes. This level is twice lower than the European level. The level of automation and complex mechanization almost three times lower than the level of industrialized countries. Depreciation of production assets in engineering is 65-75%. The average age of equipment and equipment of about 30 years. In Ukraine, the development of new high technologies, new materials with special properties and new technological equipment is moving slowly. Sectored structure of Ukrainian industry focused on primary raw materials and semi finished products. The share of machinery less than 2-3 times the level of developed countries. Domestic mining and smelting complex has the following problems: structural deficiencies, significant deterioration of fixed assets (65,0%), high energy and materials consumption of metal products, reducing the domestic base of iron ore and coal; high dependence on imported raw materials, export orientation of sales in the domestic market so underdeveloped. Decline in production in light industry only in January 2009 was 37,9%.This production decrease due to reduced investment, the drop in industry sales in the domestic market, reduction of production in related industries, a sharp decline in effective demand. The volume of production in the automotive industry declined by 84%, headcount decreased almost twice. Space industry, shipbuilding and aircraft construction, machine building, other areas are under complete collapse or destruction. The main tasks of the industrial complex of Ukraine: the internal market to reduce dependence on imported products, increasing the competitiveness of domestic products in domestic market reform technical legislation of Ukraine according to international and European norms; harmonization of national regulations with international, adoption and application of technical regulations in the priority sectors of industry, ensuring the

768

competitiveness of chemical products, improving the efficiency of enterprises of the military-industrial complex; technical re-equipment of mining enterprises. 4.3. Science and Technology Policy in Ukraine

Disce, sed a doctis, / [indoctos ipse doceto] (.). - Learn to, but scientists [ignorant teach himself].Ukraine (one of the founders of the UN) on the eve of its independence (1991) belonged to the elite group of countries with the highest level of scientific capacity of the economy. It had great scientific potential. Ukraine worked on all the national economic needs of the Soviet Union. Expenditures for science in 1990 accounted for more than 3% of gross domestic product (GDP) of Ukraine. These figures were in most developed countries: Japan, USA, Germany, France, and Great Britain. Technological development of domestic economy in those days was lower than the listed price. A large proportion of products could not compete in world markets. However Ukraine belonged to the industrialized countries. The production share of basic mechanical engineering and metal processing belonged. Market mechanisms could automatically provide a new independent state rapid modernization of the economy. During the post-Soviet period in Ukraine held degradation economic structure of industrial high-tech (space industry, aircraft construction and shipbuilding, etc.) in raw material side, mining. Substantially decreased its scientific and technical level. The process of privatization was not directed to state interests and the future. Orientation was for temporary profits. Models of advanced countries in their implementation in Ukraine have yielded positive results [5, c. 20-28]. Among the key issues of innovation: unavailability of scientific innovation to speed the introduction of scientific and technical products to industry, energy, housing and utilities. Today the situation is characterized by deterioration of the national science age structure of scientific personnel. There is a critical situation with logistical base. It caused a number of negative factors: the insufficient level of financial support and structure, a significant dispersion of scientific institutions; uncertainty of the priorities of economic development, low demand for the results of scientific and technical activities of the real economy, the underdevelopment of the national innovation system (NIS), a high level of risk to the commercialization of innovation. The main goals of intensification of innovation include: improve legislation, improve the efficiency of public administration and the formation of public-private partnership, not corruption schemes, creating an efficient system of knowledge generation; formation of innovation infrastructure and technology transfer, development of intellectual property; stimulate demand for innovation. The main thing the state should take care of creating all necessary conditions for creative activity. Cares must, first and foremost on those who create wealth, not those who resells or consumes only.
4.4. Specific experience of innovation policy (for example the Netherlands)

Fabricando fabricamur (.). Creation we create ourselves. The last list of 20 largest economies of the
Netherlands. Ukraine wants to join the 20 largest economies in the world community. Look at the experience of innovation in this country. Implementation of innovation policy in the Netherlands delegated to the Ministry of Economy and Ministry of Education, Culture and Science. Ministry responsible for the development of innovation and introduction of scientific research and advanced technologies in the industry. Education, Culture and Science is responsible scientific policy [5, c. 377-383]. The country launched a program between ministerial Knowledge and Innovation. The basis of the program assigned long-term strategy onwards sustainable development plans, performance. In the public sector research carried out 13 universities and numerous research laboratories / institutes of the following areas: basic research for new knowledge, strategic research for the development of society, industry research orders. Netherlands Organization for Applied Scientific Research (TNO) specializes in conducting effective research. Innovation is becoming more essential for economic development. The state assigns a central role TNO accumulation of advanced scientific discovery and knowledge for businesses, government agencies and NGOs. More than 500 employees engaged TNO latest scientific research. They carry out independent examination, advising, issuing licenses and certificates. In the development of innovative strategies used cluster approach. The whole economy is divided into 10 mehaklaster: assembly engineering and instrument-making industry, chemical industry, energy, construction, etc. Support innovation through a centralized network of innovation centres. This network is funded by the government. Centres have initiated a new product, conduct technology transfer from universities to enterprises, especially small and medium businesses. The main form of implementation of investments in the sphere of science and innovation is discounted. Techno parks created when powerful university centres [6]. Production or research firms in the industrial park to work actively involve teachers and students. The initiative to create technology parks owned by local authorities. Companies invest in R&D, provide scholarships to students, scientists or individual schools. The most high-tech industries Netherlands industry is shipbuilding and aerospace, electronic sensors, radar and radio systems,

769

software, manufacturing components and systems for aircraft and ground equipment: vehicles, trailers, road equipment. 4.5. Problems in the implementation of import and export

Ut desint vires, / tame nest laudanda voluntas (.) Although not enough forces but the desire is worthy of support. According to the State Statistics Committee of Ukraine [7], in January-May 2010 exports of goods amounted to 18769 million. U.S. imports 20869,3 million. Compared with January-May 2009 exports increased by 31,4%, import - by 25,9%. Negative balance of foreign trade amounted to 2100.3 million dollars. (January-May 2009 2290,3 million). Foreign trade in goods with Ukraine has partners in 200 countries. In the CIS countries 35,1% of all exported goods to EU countries 24,0 % (January-May 2009 - Respectively 33% and 22,6%). Russian Federation remains the largest trade partner of Ukraine (24,9% of export and imports 37,1%). There is increasing as the negative balance in foreign trade with Russia and EU countries (Table 1).Increased export of goods to all major partner countries: Italy - by 89,7%, Poland - by 71.8%, Russia - on 68,2%, Turkey by 56,8%, Belarus - by 40,7% , Germany - by 37,8%, India - by 25,6%.
Table 1: Turnover between Ukraine and the EU (2001-2009rr.) (According to State Statistics Committee of Ukraine and the calculations of the author) Exports from Change on the Import to Change on the Balance, Ukraine, previous year,% Ukraine previous year,% billion. USA billion. USA billion. USA 5,7 122,2 4,9 115,5 +0,7 6,5 113,8 5,7 115,5 +0,7 9,1 140,5 8,1 142,0 +0,9 11,7 128,6 9,9 122,3 +1,7 10,8 92,5 12,6 128,1 -1,7 12,6 116,1 16,8 132,6 -4,1 14,8 117,0 23,0 137,2 -8,2 17,5 118,2 30,1 130,9 -12,5 9,5 54,3 15,4 51,2 -5,9

Year 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009

Compared with January-May 2009 increased exports of railway or tramway locomotives, road equipment - in 2,6 times of energy, oil and oil products - 2,2 times, ores, slag and ash - by 84,5%, milk and dairy products, eggs, honey - by 69,1%, ferrous metals - by 47,3%fats and oils of animal or vegetable origin - by 36.6%, motor vehicles - on 35,4%, electric cars - at 16,%.Diminished export crops - 26%, products from ferrous metals - by 17,3%. From CIS countries imported 44,1% of all goods from EU countries 31,3% (January-May 2009 - Respectively 45,2% and 32,2%). Has increased against January-May 2009 import volumes in rates with the Russian Federation (2,2 times), China (at 61,4%), Belarus (at 31,6%), Italy (at 20,4%), USA (at 11,8% ), Poland (10,5%), Germany (to 9,6%).In total imports of goods increased imports of ores, slag and ash - 2 times, ferrous metals by 74,8%, electric machines - at 72,2%, polymers and plastics - to 40,7%, vehicles, than rail - at 27,3%, pharmaceuticals at 19,4%energy materials, oil and products - to 16,8%, mechanical machines - 7,0%. Effectively performed export-import operations with Goods Company in Kyiv, Donetsk and Dnipropetrovsk regions. Among the main problems of Ukrainian exports: raw nature of much of the export, the absence of a clearly defined policy of structural change in exports, a small percentage share of products with high value added exports; not adjusted financial state support of export development, inadequate levels of investment in upgrading export-oriented industries, lack of significant new technologies, obsolete transportation infrastructure of crossborder communication; spread introduction of restrictive practices and protectionist measures by countries and leading multinationals, the presence imbalances in bilateral trade with major partners; high risks of financial losses during export operations unprofitable export credit terms. The main goals of intensification of foreign economic activity are: the formation of an effective export policy of Ukraine according to international norms and principles, increase the share of high-tech economic activity in Ukrainian exports, providing further integration of Ukraine into the European and world economic system. 4.6. Structure of turnover Ukraine - Republic of Serbia

Pyladea amicitia (.). Piladova friendship (true and repeatedly tested) Analysis of trade and economic relations between Ukraine and the Republic of Serbia shows a stable trend of increasing trade turnover (Table 1).

770

Cause of the positive trends become a world financial crisis in 2008-2009rr. Serbia among the partners of Ukraine, took 46th place and 35th place in terms of Ukrainian goods. Ukraine is among the 20 largest partners of the Republic of Serbia. In 2008 the volume of exports to the Republic of Serbia Ukraine ranked 17th place after Russian Federation, Germany, Italy, China, France, Romania, Hungary, Slovenia, Austria, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Croatia, USA, Bulgaria, Slovakia, Turkey and Poland. In 2002.turnover of Ukraine and Serbia made up 130,77 million USA. In 2007 it reached 508,67 million dollars USA. Trade turnover between the two Slavic countries in 2009 amounted to 450,28 million dollars USA, 48% or 417,34 million USA less than that seen in the previous year. Ukrainian exports to Serbia amounted to 270,65 million dollars USA. He dropped by 59%, or 390,33 million USA. Serbian imports to Ukraine amounted to 179,63 million dollars USA. He declined compared with the corresponding period of 2008 - 13% or 26.98 million dollars USA. The positive balance of Ukraine in 2009 declined to 91,02 million. Against 454,37 million dollars USA in January-December 2008. Table 2: Dynamics of two sided trade between Ukraine and the Republic of Serbia, 2003-2010rr. (According to State Statistics Committee of Ukraine and the Republic of Serbia, mln. USA .dol.) Indicators 2003. 2004. 2005. 2006. 2007. 2008. 2009. I quarter 2010. Commodity 208,07 324,9 363,6 412,35 508,67 867,59 450,28 60,8
circulation Export Imports Balance

167,6 40,5 +127,0

275,1 49,8 +225,2

283,7 79,9 +203,8

289,04 123,31 +165,7

373,56 135,11 +238,45

660,98 206,61 +454,38

270,65 179,63 +91,02

49,2 11,5 +37,7

The main positions of Ukrainian exports in 2009 remaining raw materials: mineral ore and scrap metal 96,65 million USA (35,7%), iron and steel 71,03 million. USA (26,2%), stony coal, coke and briquettes 43,27 million. USA (16,0%), paper, cardboard and goods made from cellulose 11,48 million USA (4.2%), fertilizer, except organic 11,22 million. USA (4,15%), cork and wood 5,49 million USA (2,0%), organic fertilizers and minerals 4,45 million USA (1,6%), natural gas and industrial 3,97 million USA (1,5%), products of organic chemistry 1,96 million USA (0,7%), products from non-metallic minerals 1,44 million USA paint and tannin 1,1 million USA (0,4%). Among high-tech products occupy a special place: industrial machines for general purpose 2,58 million USA (1,0%), electrical machinery and apparatus 1,06 million USA (0,4%). The structure of Serbian imports to Ukraine in 2009 occupied the largest share: petroleum and petroleum products 103,78 million USA (57,8%), various finished products (flooring) 40,1 million USA (22,3%), medical and pharmaceutical products 5,66 million USA (3,1%), yarn, textiles and articles thereof 5,45 million. United States (3,0%), paper and pulp products from 2,97 million USA (1,65%), vegetable raw materials 2,57 million USA (1,4%), sunflower seeds 2 million USA (1,2%), iron and steel 1,74 million USA (1,0%), paint and tannin 1,44 million USA (0,97%) [8] [9]. According to the Ministry of Economy of Ukraine 01.10.2009r. Ukraine's economy attracted 44,1 million USA investments from Serbia. This constitutes 0,1% of total foreign investment in Ukrainian economy. For 9 months of 2009r. investment growth from Serbia to Ukraine amounted to 1,9 million USA. The largest volume of investments from Serbia engaged in processing industry 41,8 million USA (94,8% of total investments). On the territory of Ukraine registered company in 1942 with capital of Serbia. According to State Statistics Committee of Ukraine the exchange of goods and services between Ukraine and the Republic of Serbia in the first quarter of 2010r. amounted to 60,8 million USA. It is 35,0% higher first quarter 2009r. performance. Ukrainian exports of goods and services for the first quarter of 2010r. amounted to 49,2 million. United States (up to 41,0%) and Serbian imports to Ukraine 11,5 million United States (increase of 13,4%). The positive balance for Ukraine was 37,7 million USA. In January-March 2010r. main groups of exported goods from Ukraine to Serbia remained: ores, slag and ash 69,0% energy materials 12,0%;ferrous metals 4,0%, wood and wood products 4,0%, paper and cardboard 3,0%, salt, sulphur, plaster materials, cement 2,0%. The main Ukrainian exporter is Mital Steel, Poltava Mining, Zaporizhstal, Dniprospetsstal, Novokramatorsky Engineering Works (NKMZ),Quantum (in Kharkiv), Yenakieve, Makiyivka and others. The main groups of imports from the Republic of Serbia to Ukraine in the first quarter of 2010r.were: polymeric materials, plastic 38,0%, pharmaceutical products 19,0%, tobacco 5,0%, paper and cardboard 3,0%, wood and wood products 3,0%, seed and fruit-bearing plants 3,0%, tanning extracts, dyes 2,0%, special fabric 2,0%. In 2010r.expected to increase bilateral trade to $ 400 million USA.

771

4.7. Peculiarities of the marketing mix in making export-import operations

Proba merx facile emptorem reperit (.). - Quality product is easy to find a buyer. Expanding trade
relations with foreign countries caused by different needs of the enterprise: increased foreign competition in the domestic market; overcome the dependence on the domestic market and scattering at risk by landing the conquest of foreign markets, enterprise solution depends on seasonal changes in demand in the domestic market, improving download existing and planned facilities; lower costs for raw materials, energy, transportation, increased efficiency in sales activities, compensation for exchange rate fluctuations through the production and marketing of products abroad, access to know-how, price stabilization policy. The basic idea of marketing theory is the production of products that the consumer wants. Consumers should be able to a wide selection of goods. Constantly increasing requirements for all actors play social product of textbook scheme (labour theory of value): production - distribution - exchange - consumption. Supporters of the theory of marginal utility (marzhynalisty) hold other sequence categories of the market economy: the consumer demand - value - demand - offer (production). If you have any theories, the main market players are the producers and consumers. Increased consumption leads to reduction in product life cycle. The opening of trade borders with the establishment of the WTO changed the conditions of competition between manufacturers. Will benefit from this especially MNCs, big business that he is able in minimum time to develop and market new products to offer. Now high technology industrial production in Ukraine does not exceed 0,3%. This is in 10-20 times below the world level. A small proportion of domestic high-tech products in the GDP 1,2%. In developed countries, 90% GDP growth achieved through innovative development. The share of domestic high-tech products in the world market is only 0,1% to 6,0% in China, 17,0% - in Germany, 30% - in Japan, 36,0% - in the USA [10, c. 39].One reason for the weak position of the domestic high-tech products in international market is the lack of qualified specialists. They should have several foreign language skills in engineering, marketing, finance. In the process of market expansion of domestic production complex marketing should be consistent with WTO rules, with legal regulations in individual partner countries. In the exercise of commercial policy in the face of fierce competition should consider norms and standards that governed the quality and degree of product safety. Regulation of pricing in international trade related to the discounts and price discrimination, dumping and antidumping legislation. Each country has its criteria for determining optimal prices for goods. Its defining costs high technology and quality, the purchasing power of consumers, product life cycle, currency fluctuations, advertising, etc. Prices of capital goods dictate the world's leading companies. In the field of merchandising bulk of regulatory rules regarding promotional events. An important task in the experimental policy in foreign markets is creating a positive image of domestic enterprises. The campaign must take into account social and cultural environment of partner countries. Particular attention should be paid to the analysis of size and structure of external markets, dominance of the media, their availability, establishing partnerships with other specialized firms. Effective instrument of the country's export potential, investment and credit resources is part of Ukrainian companies in international exhibitions and fairs. Weighty role in international marketing given the global computer network Internet. Thanks to Internet marketing the opportunity to multi-communication.

5. CONCLUSION
Quod erat probandum (.). What and had to prove.
1. In Ukraine, during 1991-2010rr. observed decline of scientific innovation and technological spheres. In the state is gaining strong positions in philosophy stomach - philosophy of consumption, forcing out philosophy of the brain - the philosophy of art. 2. Scientific-technical way of economic development is possible when attention is focused on the generator of ideas, a specialist in engineering. Around the engineer must create the appropriate infrastructure. You decide motivation engineer, intellectual property, facilities and others. Innovations are touching the first industrial complex engineering. They determine the competitiveness of the economy and the state as a whole. 3. Compiling the principles of foreign policy must take into account economic aspects of changes in the structure of modern world civilization. You must consider the impact of globalization, sustainable development. When you select segments of international markets for commodity and geographic export potential of the industrial complex of Ukraine to implement especially in the markets of neighbouring countries, the markets of EU, CIS, BRIC. In Ukraine since 2005. growing negative balance of goods turnover. This is due to the weakening position of exporters, strengthening its presence in the domestic market with imported goods. 4. At first win foreign markets MNCs, large companies. They have strong potential to position personnel, scientific, logistical, informational and financial support. Big business creates the preconditions for the development of medium and small businesses.

772

5. In case of import and export of industrial production for each commodity group for each target market segment has developed a special marketing program. Implementations of marketing programs promote the conquest of the strategic position in this country. This is true for market research, consumer, development and implementation of merchandise, competitive pricing, choice of distribution channels, promotional events.

REFERENCES
[1]. http://ru.wikipedia.org [2]. Gerasymchuk V. Balkan vector in strategy of innovative development of Ukraine in the conditions of globalization. // Proceedings of 1st International Conference Law, Economy and Management in Modern Ambience - LEMiMA 2009 , Sokobanja, Serbia, 25-27. September 2009. Edited by ivota Radosavljevi. Novi Sad: University of Business Academy. Faculty for Education of the Executives, 2009, pp. 224-230. ISBN 978-86-87333-08-6. [3] . . // , 18 (798), 15 2010., . 8 [4]. 2010 20 2010 2278-VI. [5]. 2010-2020 /.-.: .. , ... , .., ... .: -, 2009. 632 . [6]. , .. . / .. , .. . .: -, 2009. 70 . [7]. http://www.ukrstat.gov.ua/ [8]. http://www.mfa.gov.ua/serbia/ua/3194.htm [9]. http://mynews-it.net/news/society/2009/12/23/152395.html [10]. . // , 2006, 8, . 35-40.

773

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

TECHNO-ECONOMICAL ASPECTS OF APPLYING QUALITY OF MAINTENANCE TO INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT

Sabina Gherghel, Liliana Indrie, Mariana Prichici
University of Oradea, Oradea, ROMNIA, e-mail: sgherghel@uoradea.ro
Summary: Quality is defined as the entirety of properties and characteristics of a product or service which confer it the ability to satisfy the requirements expressed or implied by the user. The study looks holistically at some of the stringent problems in achieving quality in industrial processes, aiming to eliminate nonconformity and find the most effective approach to quality assurance for the entire system. Keywords: quality, maintenance, conformity, nonconformity.

1. INTRODUCTION. THE QUALITY EXPRESSION

QUALITY is not an expression used to state a comparative or quantitative superlative for technical evaluation. For those cases a qualificative can be used, such as the following terms: - Relative quality to classify products or services, in a qualitative sense; - Quality level when precise technical evaluations are done, in a quantitative sense. Because manufacturers are confronted with difficult problems they must touch on: Complexity Market globalization Socio-cultural evolution. After tackling these quality issues, managers and executives can approach the following situations: - Economic exigency sell more by manufacturing better, - Competitive exigency adapt to the users needs, - A new culture promote the idea that in our society each individual has a qualitative duty, - A new state of mind you must learn to work in a team and enjoy it.

2. ACHIEVING QUALITY
A diagram of the factors that influence the achievement of quality is shown in Figure 1. Figure 2 presents quality as a new relationship between client and supplier, and the functional structure of quality is presented in Figure 3.

774

Figure 1: Factors that influence the achievement of quality The new relationship between buyer and supplier is shown below:

Figure 2: Quality as a new client supplier relationship.

775

The functional structure of quality is shown in the diagram below:

Figure 3: Functional structure of quality During the process of quality assurance a series of frequent errors may occur, errors which are listed below: Error type Superficiality Precipitation Alibi Mismatch Individualism Traditionalism Messages Fashion Symbol Dispersion Table 1: Frequent errors Characteristics Examples Superficial quality assurance programs Pretentious intentions and messages Lack of background changes Quality programs introduced hastily to An important drop in revenues and solve a crisis bringing in a quality consultant for a very fast comeback Starting a quality action only to drop it Naming a quality assurance manager, later starting a training program, then moving on to other things Launch a quality-related program to solve Social unrest, unanalyzed malfunctions. problems of an unrelated nature Why a quality assurance program? Everyone concerned only with their own Lack of coordination between circles quality and not that of others only individual quality indicators Reflexes of the weve always done it Only improving individual parts of like this, why change anything type previous quality control programs Broadcasting messages about quality Posters, brochures Quality actions are in vogue. Eveyone is Copying the Japanese model or that of doing it. succesful actions of the competition Faith in the miraculous instruments for The symbols of quality the last quality sold by duplicating consultants resort which must be implemented at any cost Dispersed elements without a global Quality disconnected from approach to the issue of quality functionality, small goals and targets

776

3. PREVENTING NONCONFOMITIES
The prevention of nonconformities is done based on the actions described in Figure 4. ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT BOOKS QUANTIFIED OBJECTIVES : - quality on use reliability - maintainability - purposes PROJECT REVISION VALUE ANALYSIS FORCAST EVALUATIONS ANALYSIS OF FAULTING CAUSES, AND THE EFFECTS OF CRITICALNESS DEFECTS TREE CALCULATION OF FORCASTED AVAILABILITY COST CALCULATIONS FOR FORCASTED LIFECYCLE ASSURING THE FUNCTION OF QUALITY PROTOTYPE FORCASTS Feedback regarding: - products - means CONTROLS VERIFICATIONS FOR ALL ASSIGNMENTS FOR TESTS WITH THE PROTOTYPE Figure 4: Diagram of nonconformity prevention Quality is a vector of industrial excellence. Industrial excellence is defined as the capacity of an industrial company to make profit, and at the same time insure that the clients demands are satisfied. Industrial excellence implies the following: # product and service quality and diversity, # competitive prices, # quick response times to client requests. To attain a level of excellency a goal is necesary: zero defects and zero client losses. The evolution of the factors involved in forming quality in industrial companies can be visualized in figure 5. Attaining total quality involves profound changes that target the following: - an obsession with quality, shared by all the leaders, - an ideology and a directory system for quality, - a quantitative evaluation of the quality problem, - rewarding work well done, - training, specializing, familiarizing all company employees with quality evaluation technologies, - implementing interdisciplinary or multisystem teams to initiate actions in the field of quality, - a constant encouragement for everything that is low profile, but directed towards achieving quality, - relevant actions to improve quality, even by organizing parallel actions within the company, - involving all employees in the companys quality program (supplier, production, retail, clients), - reducing costs as a result of a quality improvement program, - constant exploration for quality improvement. Total quality is a set of principles and methods united in a global strategy executed by a company to improve: EXPERIENCE PLANS RELIABILITY, MAINTAINABILITY USE APPROVAL PERFORMANCES

777

- the quality of its products and services, - the quality of its functioning, - the quality of its goals. Total quality in a holistic conception encompasses: - all the companys functions, - all the functions activities, - all employees regardless of position, - all improvements in quality: solving existing problems, preventing other problems, - the entire lifecycle of the product, - all the relationships: supplier, sub-suppliers, partners, client relations, - all markets: existing and potential. CURRENT ACTIONS

INSTRUMENTAL APPROACH TECHNIQUE SOCIOORGANIZATIONAL Develop The quality circles methods apparatus

VALUE APPROACH QUALITY

INTEGRATED APPROACH STRATEGIC ACTIONS Functional improvement

The most frequent Figure 5: Structure of factors that influence quality

4. CONCLUSION
The arguments for total quality can be grouped as follows: 1. Commercial arguments: - the need to adapt the product to the clients needs, - the need to increase market share, - the perspective of a strong global competition. 2. Technological arguments: - product, service and procedure complexity, - the need for a systemic approach to system quality. 3. Economic arguments: - development of international trade, - the huge cost of nonconformity. 4. Organizational arguments: - improvement of employee work quality, - implementation of quality assurance procedures. 5. Social arguments: - improving work and living conditions for the employees, - dynamizing social alternatives, - meeting expectations. 6. Cultural arguments: - mobilizing axis, - possibility of applying quality values to the companys projects. To implement total quality means to promote quality systems within companies and to develop two essential factors: - state of mind with respect to quality, - the dynamics and speed of quality improvement.

778

Approaching process maintenance with the intent of achieving total quality based on minimizing total costs (design execute production-integrated implementation open market) will lead to profit generation for the industrial company.

REFERENCES
[1] Andone, I., Mockler, J.R., Dologite, D.G., ugui, A.: Dezvoltarea sistemelor inteligente n economie , Editura economic, Bucureti, 2001. [2] Coroescu, T.: Sisteme informatice pentru management, Editura Lumina Lex, Bucureti, 2002. [3] Hardwick, Ph., Langmead, J., Khan, B.: Introducere n economia politic modern, Editura Polirom, Iai, 2002. [4] Maurice, C., Thomas, C.: Managerial Economics, Irwin McGraw Hill, 1999. [5] arpe, D.A., Gavril, E.: Microeconomie Teorie i aplicaii, Editura Economic, Bucureti. [6] Simon, H.: Organisations and markets, Journal of Economic Perspectives, vol.5, nr.2, Toronto, Canada, 2001.

779

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

INTEREST RATE RISK MANAGEMENT IN BANKS

2

ALFA Bank, Novi Pazar, SERBIA, e-mail: elmedin.huduti@gmail.com High School of Design, Management and Technology, Belgrade, SERBIA 3 Freight forwarding, Novi Pazar, SERBIA

Elmedin Huduti1, aban Muratovi2, Jelena Milisavljevi3

Summary: Interest rate risk is one of the key financial (market) risks for the bank. As the bank cannot be isolated from the impact of interest rate risk, and in order to protected itself from adverse impacts of interest rate movements, the management needs to recognize the sources and forms of interest rate risk and thus the bank can use particular protection mechanisms. Key words: Interest rate risk, repricing or maturity risk, yield curve risk, basis risk, optionality, interest rate risk management.

1. INTRODUCTION
Interest rate risk represents financial exposure of the bank to adverse movement of interest rates. Managing that risk is an important task for the banks, because interest rate risk can be an important source of impact to profitability and value of shareholders property. The changes of interest rates affect the incomes of banks due to the changes of net interest incomes, interest sensitive assets and operating costs.

2. SOURCES OF INTEREST RATE RISK IN BANKING

An efficient process of interest rate risk management in banks requires learning about the sources of interest rate risk in banking, which are at the same time the primary types of interest rate risk. Main sources (types) of interest rate risks (Figure 1) to which the banks are exposed are the following [1]: 1. maturity risk, repricing risk, 2. yield curve risk, 3. basis risk, 4. optionality. Maturity risk implies the time inconsistency of maturity (for fixed interest rates) and risk of re-evaluation of interest rates (repricing) of assets, liabilities and off-balance positions (for variable interest rates). The existence of maturity is primarily related to basic operations. For that reason, it can expose banks earnings and its economic value to unexpected changes of interest rates. If the bank finances its portfolio of long-term loans with short-term deposits, the growth of interest rates can cause a decline in earnings. The growth of interest rates decreases the value of the portfolio of long-term loans, and on the other hand, taking new deposits at higher interest rates influences the growth of banks costs. And finally, the decline of income and growth of costs will result in reduced earnings of the bank.

780

Figure 1: Main sources (types) of interest rate risks Yield curve risk appears as a probability of unforeseen change of the shape and slope of the yield curve, which has a negative effect on the earnings or economic value of the bank. If the bank would protect itself from the changes in the value of its portfolio of ten-year state bonds by a short position of five-year state notes, a sudden severe slope of the yield curve could have consequences for the bank. The slope of the yield curve is normally upward, but the change of the slope means higher growth of short-term interest rates than long-term ones, which is the loss for the bank in this case. Basis risk represents a probability of non-existence of a perfect correlation of adaptation to the changes of interest rates that are charged or paid for various financial instruments, and they can affect the banks operations. Optionality represents a type of interest rate risk that is reflected in the existence of possibility of using the optionality right to the assets by buying or selling monetary flows related to particular financial instruments or contracts, for example the bonds with the option for buying or selling, loans with the right of the borrower to make early loan repayment or deposits with the possibility of withdrawal.

3. INTEREST RATE RISK MANAGEMENT IN BANKS

Managing a bank implies a skill based on respecting certain principles or generally-accepted attitudes acquired by practice. The task of the banks management is to make such an optimal combination of theory and practice so that a bank could survive in extremely varying legislative, financial and economic environment. However, there is no unique, generally acceptable and everywhere applicable theory of bank management. Basic element is reliability assessment of each bank is also the existence of the risk management system. Interest rate management includes managing the structure of assets and liabilities of the bank, in an effort to monitor how interest rates affect the banks financial result. For that reason, the practice by which a bank optimizes the way of taking over the interest rate risk in its business is called risk management. Overall efforts in interest rate risk management should be transformed into policies and procedures of interest rate risk management. The meaning and uniqueness of interest rate risk management vary from bank to bank, and they depend on: 1. banks size, 2. nature and complexity of its positions of assets and liabilities, 3. height of its positions exposed to the interest rate risk, 4. the banks risk tolerance and its risk profile. Interest risk management in a bank includes the following [6]: 1. establishment and implementation of reliable and prudential interest rate policy, 2. development and application of appropriate techniques of measurement of the exposure of positions to interest rate risk, 3. development and application of the system of efficient interest rate risk management, 4. determination and application of control procedures. Established policies and procedures of interest rate risk management need to provide the control of nature and amount of interest rate risk to which the bank is exposed. Policies and procedures of interest rate risk management should contain: criteria for classifying the assets into various portfolios, in accordance with the needs of interest rate risk management and banks objectives, the psychology of accepting the risk in a bank and

781

acceptable exposure to interest rate risk, but also the determination of constraints (limits) in exposure to interest rate risk in compliance with banks psychology. The division of the banks assets into various portfolios can be implemented on the basis of various criteria, such as economic conditions that affect banks liabilities, nature of the products and services of the bank and investment (business) objectives. Banks psychology in accepting the risk represents a tolerated risk level, which the bank is willing to accept. The banks should determine the constraints (limits) in their exposure to interest rate risk and try not to exceed the determined limits. Banks limits in exposure to interest rate risk are usually associated with net interest income. When choosing the right way to measure the effect of change of the interest rate risk on the balance, the bank will consider the possible volatility of interest rates during a certain period in which it can realistically respond to adverse movement of interest rates. For the measurement of exposure to interest rate risk, the banks have a large number of techniques available: gap-techniques, the techniques of measuring the sensitivity of banks earnings to interest rate changes and simulation techniques. Banks can use one of them, but the combination of techniques in risk exposure management is desirable. Every technique has a different approach to interest rate risk, it has different advantages and disadvantages, and for that reason the techniques are more effective when they are combined. The selected measurement techniques need to be appropriate to the adopted psychology of the bank and limitations in portfolio of assets. The basic assumption in interest rate risk management is the fact that interest rates are constantly changing. Interest risk management requires a clear understanding of the size of the risk to which the bank is exposed and the influence of interest rate changes on its risky position. In order for the system of interest rate risk management to function, it is necessary to provide the two appropriate right information in order to take the right measures in a relatively short period. If it takes longer to identify the risks and take measures for their elimination or avoidance, the bank is threatened with business losses. The main task when managing the assets and liabilities of the bank is to predict the movement of interest rates. Predicting is one of the ways for the bank to accomplish its goals related to the height of monetary flows that it plans to realize and to reduce the probability of surprise (interest rate shock) in its business to the least possible measure. Precisely for those reasons, managing the assets and liabilities can be defined as making the best possible choice trade off between the return and risk for the bank [7]. In fact, managing the assets and liabilities of the bank can be reduced to two phases - maximize the profit and minimize the risk. The banks need to develop such a system of interest rate risk management. Every bank needs to develop and apply efficient procedures and information system for management, monitoring and control of interest rate risk management in compliance with psychology and policies of the bank. Control of interest rate risk management in a bank should be given to internal control. Control system should be focused on establishing the internal audit and efficient system of limitations in risk exposure. Control process needs to be appropriate considering the complexity and size of the bank, and then it is necessary provide the following: 1. suitability of policies and procedures of interest rate risk management, 2. efficient managing the risky positions of the bank, 3. establish the credibility and suitability of management reporting, 4. ensure personal involvement of the workers in interest rate risk management with fully understanding the policies of interest rates and constraints. Committee for managing assets and liabilities, treasury and other organizational units should be subjected to audit by the control system in the bank. In order for the bank to successfully manage the interest rate risk, it is necessary for the management model to be based on the ability of employees in the sectors responsible for risk management to recognize and identify potential risk for the bank, to monitor the influence of interest rate risk on the bank, but also to take certain activities for protecting the bank. Procedures and activities in the managing process need to be constantly improved, but also supervised and revised.

4. CONCLUSION
Performing its two basic functions, the bank collects the deposits, sources of funds and directs them to the loans, securities (investments) and other forms of borrowing, by which it is faced with one of the main risks of banking interest rate risk. The impact of interest rate risk depends on the values of balance sheet and off balance sheet positions that are sensitive to risk, i.e. it depends on balance structure, volatility of interest rates and time period in which there is an exposure to interest risk. Main sources (types) of interest rate risk to which a bank is exposed are the following: maturity risk or repricing risk, yield curve risk, basis risk and optionality. Changes in interest rates affect the height of realized incomes and costs of the bank through the structure of its assets and liabilities in its balance sheet. When it comes to interest rates growth, the depositors want to withdraw their deposits, especially there is such a contractual option of premature withdrawal of deposit, in order to

782

achieve greater returns on investments with higher interest rates. In that case, the bank is encountered with the problem of maintaining liquidity. Due to deposit withdrawal, the bank needs to compensate for withdrawn amount (quantitative effect) in its balance sheet, and in case of a new borrowing, it will pay for the funds by new, higher interest rates (cost effect). The change of interest rates affects the value of portfolio of the banks debt and equity securities, but it also affects its market value. Interest rate risk management includes prudential managing of the banks assets and liabilities structure, attempting to control the influence of the changes of interest rates on the financial result of the bank.

REFERENCES
[1] Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, Principales for the Management and Supervisin of Interest Rate Risk, listopad 2003, [2] Bessis, J.: Risk Management in Banking, 2nd ed., Willy & Sons Ltd., Chichester, England, 2001, [3] Mishkin, F. S.: The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, 7th ed., Addison Wesley, Boston, USA, 2004. [4] Offices of the Superintendend of Financial Institution Canada, Standards of Sound Business and Financial Practices Interest Rate Risk Management, veljaa 1998. [5] Standards of Sound Business and Financial Practices Interest Rate Risk Management, Offices of the Superintendend of Financial Institution Canada, veljaa 1998. [6] D.G. Uyemura, D. R. Van Deventer: Financial Risk Management in Banking The Theory &Application of Assets & Liability Management, McGraw-Hill, New York,USA,1993, str. 59-77.

783

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

STANDARDIZATION AND LABELING AS THE ASPECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT OF THE PRODUCT

Jelena Ivovi
High economic school of professional studies Pe-Leposavi, SERBIA e-mail: ivovicjelena@yahoo.com

Summary: Environmental management system is a part of the overall management system, which includes the organizational structure of the planning activities, responsibilities, practice, gradual processes and resources for the development, implementation, achieving, reviewing and maintaining the policy of environmental protection. Environmental goals can be achieved by the division of tasks among the appropriate levels and their harmonization and efficient implementation. According to this, there were developed the standards oriented to environmental characteristics, which include the standards of a subseries ISO 1402x that include the guidelines for environmental labeling, the standards of subseries ISO 1404x that contain the guidelines for the determination of all environmental impacts of the product during its life cycle and standards of the subseries ISO 1406x that contain the guidelines for treatment of ecological aspects in the standards for products. At the level of product, standard series ISO 14000 include the standards for: assessment of the life cycle of the products, labeling the products and environmental design of products. The aim of this research paper is to indicate the significance of the implementation of regulations and standards in the field of ecology in order to eliminate environmental trade barrier. In addition, when it comes to the environmentally friendly products, the aim is to point out to raising the image of the companies who have adopted environmentally friendly approach for their products. This paper demonstrates characteristic current eco-labeling in the world and the main directions of eco-influence in the process of labeling the most developed countries as well as the analysis of the life cycle of products in the programs of eco-labeling. Key words: environmentally friendly product, phases of the products life cycle, eco-labeling

1.INTRODUCTION
Products placed on national and international markets have to meet the relevant technical requirements. It is a necessary precondition of their competitiveness, and it is proved by the prescribed procedures of assessing the compliance that should enable the placement of products on the market with no additional costs for testing and certification. This is also maintained by international agreements. Globalization, characterized by an increasing flow of information, ideas, production factors, technologies and goods has contributed to the extensive integration of global economy. Traditional the trade barriers, such as customs regulations, deny the previous role, primarily because of the new international trade policy. Successive rounds of international negotiations about free trade on global and regional level (lead by the World Trade Organization WTO or associated countries of various regions) have systematically reduced the customs barriers, and they have a growing influence on the socalled non-tariff barriers of trade. As technologies become more complex, consumers and users of the products and services are becoming more aware of the fact that they depend on products whose construction and design they often cannot understand. Realizing this, the consumers want to be sure that the product they are using is reliable (safe) and that it will satisfy their expectations in the aspect of performances, safety, durability and other criteria. Essential question is how can the users in industry or final consumers be sure that they have purchased the products that meet the standards by which their safety in use is defined? Conformity assessment and product certification systems are developed precisely to provide the safety for consumers in such cases. Using ISO/IEC standard in conformity assessment procedures allows, through harmonization throughout the world, not only the facilitation of international trade between the countries but also the acceleration of trade within particular countries by imposing the obligation to the deliverers of products and

784

services, so that their products/services would meet specified requirements. However, conformity assessment procedures facilitate the acceptance of goods and services everywhere, on the basis of only one assessment in one of the signatory countries, accelerating the exchange of goods and helping the international trade system to be more efficient [17]. In the production, there is the appropriate technical documentation for each product. Over the time, it has come to the harmonization of various technical regulations and specifications between the producers, especially in industries whose products are used as inputs in some other production, for massive use of the product. The producers have suffered great losses in mutual pursuit for imposing their standard, so that they have decided to cooperate and jointly create their unique standards. This autonomous harmonization of manufacturing standards wasnt always acceptable for consumers, so there were negotiations on the acceptance of standards that were optimal from the aspect of the entire social community. For that purpose, the special bodies for the determination of national standards were established. This has solved the problem of the same products traffic within one country. However, each country has established its own optimal standards, so now there is a problem of different technical regulations and adopted national standards because they create obstacles in international goods traffic. Technical regulations are mandatory requirements or standards that determine the characteristics that a specific product needs to have. Those are the documents that contain technical specifications of products, which are produced according to them, and they oblige the producers. Products that have various technical regulations and corresponding standards in various countries often cannot be internationally traded or they sometimes need some changes that make them significantly expensive. The reasons for which the countries adopt the regulations on compliance with standards, which particularly refers the testing of products, labeling and such can be found in the desire for preserving the safety of citizens when using imported products and in protecting the rights of consumers. These are reasonable requirements that are imposed on importers of products, but only so far as the country, i.e. its organs are not using it to protect domestic producers, instead of consumers. That is mostly reflected in imposing some inadequate standards, by complicating and preventing the procedures of certification and the like. In this case, those regulations become significant barriers in goods traffic. These barriers are removed only by international regulation of standards. In practice, new regulations and standards appear all the time, such as environmental standards. Today, developed countries mostly insist on implementation of environmental regulations, which developing countries interpret as new barriers to the trade and they are classified as one of technical barriers to foreign trade, because they imply fulfillment of particular technical specifications and compliance with standards. When the export from one country to another is disabled due to the strict regulations on environmental standards, we say that there are environmental trade barriers. In the countries in which there are regulations on environmental protection, particular examination of compliance with environmental standards when importing particular goods is required. One study, conducted by UNCTAD and International Trade Center, has found that out of 4917 observed products that are globally traded, there are 3746 influenced by environmental trade barriers. The products influenced by environmental trade barriers participate with 88% in total world trade in goods in 1999. Such a significant impact of environmental regulations on the trade has led to considerable debate in international community on the priorities of environmental preservation or the growth of trade and increase of peoples standard. The final result of the debate on the relation between foreign trade and ecology in international community is a conclusion that environmental protection is vital for reducing the pollution of the planet, but that protection needs to be implemented at international level, so that it would not be much of the threat for the development of economy and world trade. The global concept of so-called sustainable development, which implies the natural development with environmental preservation, has been launched.

2. SUITABILITY OF PRODUCTS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Idea of sustainable development has obtained a wide circle of supporters in the last decade of 20th century. Direct consequence of that was a wide circle of stakeholders who expect the operations of enterprise and organization and their products to be adapted to the changes in relationship towards environment. Todays state of natural environment is a consequence of non-systematic thinking about the past. Planners, engineers, designers and other participants in the creation of products traditionally were responsible only for specific characteristics of product, and they were not responsible for the waste that appears, nor for the resources that are uncontrollably used in that situation. New approach in the creation of products is based on the prevention of pollution and excessive consumption of natural, material and energy resources with acceptable costs, efficiency, productivity and performance concerning the environmental protection [18]. Product is a central object of the most human activities. Its life cycle develops in the natural environment and with the help of natural environment. The need for products is such that their number is, both absolutely and by the types, constantly increasing. Therefore, it is understandable that mutual effects of products and economic

785

environment are more intensively analyzed today. Hence, each material product or material part of a combined program is in a certain interaction with natural environment. Raw materials are extracted from it, and the product is being made, packed, stored, transported and used within it. And in it, only by-products are being discharged. Components of sustainable development, which refer to the consistent economic growth (production and consumption), implies the rational use of natural resources when creating and using the products for multipurpose and reusable consumption. Sustainable development, based on the principles of design for the environment (during 21st century) will imply the reorientation of industries to the production of products, materials and equipment that is reusable. This means that, after the period of use, that particular object (product) can be used again for the same or some other purpose: in the same form, amended or improved, for another purpose or as raw material (through recycling). Such a product is suitable from the aspect of the environment, and thus it is characterized by environmental suitability as well. Environmentally friendly products are those that have the following characteristics: no harmful effects on the environment; they satisfy the principle of frugality and sustainability in consumption and use of the necessary energy and other natural resources; they are safe for the man and environment; they satisfy the principle of avoidance, recycling or safe disposal of waste. Environmentally friendly product should have these characteristics in all the phases of its complete life cycle (extraction of raw materials, production of materials, processing the materials in order to make a product, use of the product, end of product use waste, finishing re-use of the product, processing of waste-recycling, waste disposal, transport), which satisfies the principle of integral approach to environmental friendliness of the product.

3. ISO 14000 SERIES OF STANDARDS AS THE ASPECTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL PRODUCT MANAGEMENT

ISO 14000 is a series of voluntary, international standards for environmental management managing the environmental protection, which is developed as a practical set of tools for implementation of activities that support the concept of sustainable development. Standards are meant for organizations, both commercial ones and all the others that want to participate in this global movement. An important characteristic of the standards is that they are voluntary. It means that there is no legal obligation for their implementation, but there has to be a business decision on the implementation (on a voluntary basis). ISO 14000 series of standard include two types of standards, one is meant for issuing the certificate on compliance on the basis of fulfilling the requirements, and the other type is used informatively, i.e. as guidelines for implementation of specific activities. Standards of this series can be roughly divided into two groups[15]: Standards that are implemented at the level of organization, Standards that are implemented on products-services. At the level of organization, series of standards includes the following standards for: The system of environmental management managing the environmental protection, Evaluation of environmental protection effect, Verification of environmental management system. At the level of products-services, the series includes the following standards for: Life cycle assessment, Labeling of products and services, Eco-design of products design for the environment. The whole series of standards is defined as a systemic approach to meeting the requirements linked to the environmental protection. It is structured in such a way that it enables the organizations to achieve effectiveness in the field of environmental protection, in which case it serves as a measure of the value of processes that are included by organization. The first group of standards includes the standards that have specification and guidelines for eco-management system, standards of subseries ISO 1401x that provide the guidelines for assessing the environmental effect (these guidelines are necessary for successful implementation of eco-management system because the success of eco-management system cannot be checked without measurable requirements). The second group includes the standards of subseries ISO 1402x that include the guidelines for eco-labeling, standards of subseries ISO 1404x that provide the guidelines for determining all the environmental effects of the products during their whole life cycle and standards of subseries ISO 1406x that include the guidelines for the treatment of environmental aspects in the standards for products. Figure1. The basic structure of the ISO 14000x [15] series

786

14050 Dictionary

Orientation to products Eco-labeling of products 1402x Life cycle assessment 1404x Environmental aspects in standards for products 1406x Eco-management systems 1400x Additional instruments Environmental verification (audit) 1401x Environmental performance evaluation 1403x Managing the phases of product life cycle. Organizations of enterprises can manifest their environmental concern through experiments with ways to review and redesign the phases of the life cycle of their products. In this context, the assessment of life cycle by the application of LCA method (Life Cycle Assessment), described by ISO 1404x standard, is focused on environmental aspects in development of products and design, including energy and material inputs and outputs in production, consumption and disposal of products, i.e. during the entire product life cycle including the raw materials extraction, processing of materials, production, transport, use and reuse of products, recycling and, finally, the waste disposal. In that way, the environmental burdens, which are connected with the production, processes or activities, as well as the opportunities for their improvements are objectively assessed. Managing the phases of product life cycle includes the following activities (by the phases) [19]: 1.Development phase. It is traditionally characterized by the supply of raw materials, component parts and subassemblies. Alternative approach is referred to encouraging the producer to verify the environmental programs of all the suppliers; to require minimum package of input and consider the material sources that are renewable or recyclable. 2.Production phase. Production companies are encouraged to reduce the emissions, toxicity and waste, as well as to conserve water and energy. They are also encouraged to look for and develop alternative use of products in waste phase (for example, the processes of waste renewal); to revise the production processes in order to minimize the creation of waste, use of energy, or try to find alternative energy sources. 3.Consumption/use phase. The minimization of package, conservation of energy and minimization of waste during maintenance and service. In addition, the companies should promote the energy conservation and provide information on recyclability or re-use of packaging or products in the waste/dead product phase. 4.Waste phase. Final phase in product life cycle is the phase of its disposal. Eco-marketing introduces the concepts of re-use and recyclability with the concept of the reduction of products. Design for the environment is today spread to the production of all the parts of a product. It includes the material and energy necessary for production of those parts and their destiny in the moment when the product is destroyed or recycled. Green design or the Design for EnvironmentDFE represents a philosophy of environmental consideration during the design of process, both for the products and for the packaging. DFE, which is applied to the design of product and packaging, includes the design for waste disposal, design for recycling, design for prevention of pollution and design for resource conservation. DFE encourages the development of ideas that include the following: reduction of products in processes of production, recycling of products or packaging (by which they become compostable), and all that with the aim of facilitating the changes in the process of design, which provide much more benefits that costs for a company that applies it. Selling the products and emphasizing its ecological characteristics is not enough anymore, buyers and business entities primarily make decisions on the value during the assessment of product. Perception of added value in case of ecological benefits represents a part of overall marketing plan and it should not be viewed as a separate, special component for a small and unique segment of the market.

787

When it comes to eco-marketing, it should be noted that such a marketing requires a lot more than just green label or displaying pictures of wild life in nature for promotional purposes. The essence of eco-marketing is in the development of environmentally friendly products, for which the customers believe to have these values added, and thus they decide to buy them. In the development of added values of products on environmental basis, organizational leaders need to establish a level of their environmental obligations, which is the most appropriate and the easiest to perform in terms in which the organization is found. Companies, which have adopted some of environmental responsibilities, have faced the benefits that come with the adoption of ecological approach. Some of the activities, which are, by the way, implemented, include the following [15]: Development of requests for green products by customers; Spending the money on the education of customers (for example, printing various informative brochures) Building new infrastructure in order to provide the recycling and prevention of pollution. Having the brand green company can represent a potential benefit for the organization. Green image creates a much more positive public image, which in return improves sales, increases the price of supplies and opens the access to main markets. In addition, this kind of image can increase the overall perception of products quality, and when it is put together with environmental benefits contained in the product or its use, it can provide added value, which will be preferred by environmentally-oriented consumers. Also, we should have in mind that the changes in legal regulations can influence the decisions and strategies of marketing in one organization. 4. Environmental labeling General goal of eco-labeling is environmental protection that is achieved through ecological education and appropriate behavior of producers and consumers. Of course, the main actors of eco-labeling are the state and ecological groups, but also business structures are increasingly recognizing the interest for their participation in those actions. Inability to obtain eco-mark, logo etc, can be significant trade barrier, and especially the barrier for the export to developed industrial countries (OECD) and especially in European Union. In this area, the developing countries, whose eco-products do not have big internal traffic due to the weak domestic purchasing power, are facing with many difficulties. Main directions of ecological impact in the procedure of labeling [20] German program Blue Angel. It is based on the following dominant ecological factors: Conservation of resources (products that save the energy), Reduction of the polluting emission to the water, air, land (e.g. environmentally friendly detergent), Reduction of noise (e.g. less noisy industrial equipment), Reduction of waste (elimination and re-processing, such as recycled paper or plastic), Reduction of hazardous substances (e.g. mercury-free batteries), Japanese eco-mark. Most products that have this mark have to satisfy three following criteria: Recyclable (ability to recycle the product within the boundaries of the country), Recycled (products that contain the elements of waste), Degradable and biodegradable (products that decompose to harmless substances thanks to microorganisms), Protects ozone layer (use of chemical substances that do not destroy ozone layer), It can be composted (decomposition of organic matter into useful fertilizer), Environmentally friendly (attention is directed to some specific ecological attributes, such as organic colors or unbleached coffee filter). Procedure. Ecological marks, as well as standards are, as a rule, assigned by the third party, i.e. International Organization for Standardization, ISO. Producers address to it according to the principle of voluntariness and subject to the procedure that has two phases. In the first phase, the production categories are selected, and also the criteria for obtaining a mark are defined and developed. The criteria are disclosed to public (about 60 days) in order to provide the impact of public opinion i.e. the consumers. They are reviewed every 3-4 years, in order to consider the changes in technology and general eco-sensibility of the consumers. In the second phase, which represents administrative procedure, i.e. the procedure and process of verification, the suppliers and producers are applying for the assignation of a mark, submitting all the costs of testing, certification and examination of facilities, as well as the compensation for the use of eco-mark. Although the procedure is very expensive, criteria problematic, eco-labeling system has the trend of expansion in the world. The first program was German Blue Angel, established in 1977 and it includes more than 900 producers and 3,500 products [21]. Japanese Eco-mark also has a large scope of products. After developed countries, eco-labeling was accepted by many developing countries, first of all by India, Korea, Singapore... Types of eco-labeling. International Organization for Standardization ISO has defined three types of ecolabeling:

788

Type 1 or the third-party criterion. It is about establishing the criteria by various interest groups, available to the public. Selection is made by Board of Directors, and logo and eco-mark can be used in a particular period; Type 2, i.e. producer declaration criterion. In this case, the producers themselves, mostly multinational companies, provide the declaration of biodegradability or recycling, i.e. disposal of the product; Type 3, which is based on production information. It is about qualified producer information, without an independent opinion, as in case of USA certification. Eco-labeling programs. When it comes to particular national programs, it is good to know that they were established under the big influence of ecological theory and business practice throughout the world, but primarily in the most developed market economies. Ecological standardization, as well as the entire ecobusiness, is of a more recent date and they represent the result of changes in behavior, certain maturity, i.e. ecological education and culture of consumer and producer, as the participants of modern market economy. The overview of programs and the year of introducing ecological market programs is shown in the Table 2. Country/group Germany Canada Japan Nordic countries USA Sweden New Zealand India Austria Australia Korea Singapore France European Union Croatia Name of the program Blue Angel Environmental choice program Eco-mark White Swan Green seal/stamp Good ecological mark Ecological choice Eco-mark Austrian eco-mark Ecological choice Eco mark Green mark of Singapore NF Ecology European flower Ecologically friendly Year of establishing 1977 1988 1989 1989 1989 1990 1990 1991 1991 1991 1992 1992 1992 1992 1993

Analysis of the life cycle in eco-labeling programs. European Union: matrix 8x5 is used, taking into account 8 ecological fields during 5 phases of product life cycle, in order to identify significant environmental aspects. Ecological fields are the following: Waste, Pollution and land degradation, Water pollution, Air pollution, Noise, Energy consumption, Natural resources consumption, Effects on ecosystems. France. It uses complete quantification of LCA that requires extensive collection of data, analysis, resources and time. Germany. Although the basic criterion for assignation of eco-label is the fact that the product is environmentally friendly, which is assessed by LCA, the focus is on specific environmental impact, usually in the phase of consumption and warehousing. Netherlands. Matrix 25x5 is used, which has 25 types of environmental impacts grouped into 8 narrower groups in 5 phases of life cycle, in order to identify the significant environmental aspects for which the criteria were established. 4. CONCLUSIONS Entire series of standards in the field of ecology is defined as a systematic approach to meeting the requirements linked to the environmental protection. It is structured in such a way to enable the organizations to achieve the effectiveness in the field of environmental protection, in which case it serves as a measure for the process and its value, which are included by the organization.

789

ISO 14000 is a series of voluntary international standards for ecological management/managing the environmental protection, which is developed as a practical set of tools for the implementation of activities that support the concept of sustainable development. Standards are meant for organizations, both commercial ones, as well as all the others that wish to participate in this global movement. Standards are voluntary, i.e. there is no legal obligation concerning the implementation of standards, but there needs to be a business decision on voluntary implementation. The lack of ecological knowledge, logistics can be a significant trade barrier, and especially the barrier for exporting to developed industrial countries and EU. At the level of products, it is necessary to assess the life cycle by using EU practice about the use of eight ecological fields and five phases of product life cycle.

REFERENCES
[1] Holz J.,Einfrhrung in die Warenlehre, Oldenbourg Verlag, Munchen Wien,1989. Jovanovi Gavrilovi, B., Evolucija shvatanja o razvoju- od privrednog rasta do odrivog ljudskog razvoja, Ekonomski anali, br.145, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd, 2000, str.153-177. [2] Juran J.M.,Oblikovanjem do kvaliteta, Grme, Beograd, 1997. [3] Leki T., Vlahovi M., Janetovi- Atanasovska M.,Roba i tehnoloki razvoj, Savremena administracija,Beograd, 1992. [4] Uumli, D.,Luki, R.,Upravljanje kvalitetom materijalnih proizvoda, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd, 2006. [5] Uroevi S.,Komercijalno poznavanje robe, savremena administracija, Beograd 1971. [6] tetne i opasne materije, Hemijsko- tehnoloki prirunik, Beograd,1984. [7] Uroevi, S: Tehnologija, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd, 1979. [8] Stock,J.R.: Development Inpelmentation of Reverse Logistics Program, Oak Brook, IL: Council of Logistics Management, 1998. [9] Pavlovi Bugarski, Lj., Koncepcija razvoja jugoslovenske standardizacije u obalsti zatite ivotne sredine, Kvalitet, VIII, br.1-2(1998). [10] Noori H.,Radford R.,Production and Operation Managment, McGraw-Hill,New York, 1995. [11] Milovanovi. G., Barac, N.,Strategijski menadment logistike, Univerzitet u Niu, Ni, 2006. [12] Miloji,D., Standardi ISO 14000 za upravljanje zatitom ivotne sredine u organizacijama, Kvalitet, VIII, broj 1-2 (1998). [13] Filipovi V., i dr., Ekoloki aspekt marketing strategije, Strategijski menadment, broj 3-4, 1997. [14] Ayres R. L., Industrial Ecology, Edward Elgar, Cheltenham, UK, Brookfield, US, 1996. [15] Petrovi, N., Ekoloki menadment, FON, Beograd, 2009. [16] Jovanovi-Kolomejceva, L., Ekoloki menadment, UBK; Beograd, 2004. [17] Jaki, B., Ocenjivanje usaglaenosti proizvoda kao element konkurentnosti kvaliteta, Poslovna politika AD, br.7-8, Beograd, 2008. [18] Jovanovi, Gavrilovi, B., Evolucija shvatanja o razvoju- od privrednog rasta do odranog ljudskog razvoja, Ekonomski anali, br.145, Ekonomski fakultet, Beograd 2000, str.153-177. [19] Schmitz, S., Life-cycle assessment for drinks packaging systems, Berlin, Unweltbundjesamt, 1996. [20] Izvor:UNCTAD, prema V. Mileusni, Ekoloko oznaavanje u svetu, Poslovna politika april, 1997. [21] V., Mileusni, Ekoloko oznaavanje u svetu, Poslovna politika april 1997. str.56-57.

790

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

CREATING OBJECTS OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY IS THE PLEDGE OF EFFECTIVE TECHNICAL EDUCATION

Valentina S. Krivun, Elena S. Korchak
Donbass State Engineering Academy, Kramatorsk, UKRAINE, e-mail: helen_korchak@ukr.net
Summary: Science is a source of fulfilling system of High technical education with new knowledge and at the same time it forms market of Industrial property. Owing to this market Science has a brilliant chance to realize itself effectively in Industry. This is the main fibula of the article. Keywords: industrial property, patent, R&D, innovation, invention.

1. INTRODUCTION
Creation and exploration of new approach concerning processes of industrial property (IP) objects generation, protection, commercialization and defence is the trend of great priority while developing system of effective use of R&D potential of High Technical Schools (HTS). Nowadays, the primary activator in economy is IP. That is why HTS play the decisive role as the main creators of these potentially valuable non-material assets. In spite of the fact that system of legal IP protection has been already created in Ukraine, our society cannot even realize yet the most important thing IP rights cost much more than material values. Insufficient well-informing of general community in the points of IP protection causes IP laws abuse and hampers introduction of IP objects in civil turnover. On that ground it affects adversely on the State economical growth and net profits of its citizens. Every HTS in Ukraine has in its educational program the discipline Intellectual property which is to further the development of innovative efficiency and to form in society a positive image of scientist-innovator. It will help to involve actively young scientists and specialists in the process of generating commercial IP objects. In this context its important to notice that one of the main targets of HTS is to teach people to appreciate the created IP objects as much as possible [1].

2. FEATURES OF CONNECTION OF HIGH TECHNICAL SCHOOLS WITH INDUSTRY

Achievements of science and engineering fulfill system of High technical education which distributes it according to its purpose among HTS. Activity of HTS is aimed at forming indivisible intellectual potential of the State [2,3]. Besides science by means of education is to forms IP market (see Figure 1), collecting in its measures different sectors of scientific engineering which is in popular demand in the world. Exactly owing to this IP market science is provided with ample opportunity to realize itself effectively in Industry. Science and education being combined in HTS can increase the effectiveness of its R&D potential usage on the base of developing of complex system of encouraging HTS inventing activity and managing the processes of creating, protecting, commercialization and defence IP objects.

791

3. THE MAIN ASPECTS OF CREATING OBJECTS OF INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY WITHIN THE SYSTEM OF HIGH TECHNICAL EDUCATION
The main step to provide innovating development of the State lies in great necessity of involving students and post-graduate-students of HTS, as the future intellectual potential, in inventing activity. To attain success in this target it is necessary to accomplish the following.

Figure 1: Diagram of connection of HTS with the industry Firstly, instill into HTS the trend Every student innovator and inventor. Undoubtedly, 100% of students cant immediately be transformed into inventors. But everybody has skills to conceive creatively. That is why its necessary to start this step with the most gifted in inventing students. Then the norm for individuals becomes the one for majority and afterwards for everybody. Such circumstances will give students possibility to realize their vocation in studying and innovating space and make them surer in their knowledge. In this case combination of based technical disciplines with discipline Intellectual property while studying in HTS gives students opportunity to take part in R&D works as co-authors and co-designers of different patented developments. Especially such activity can bring brilliant benefits if to co-operate with specialists from Industry while practical training for students, performing degree and thesis works, etc. In this case industrial specialists can be personal consultants of the students or co-leaders of their course and diploma projects. This example demonstrates inalienability of HTS (science and education) from Industry using IP in the capacity of a connecting link. Secondly, practically investigate by students patent system by means of introduction into course and diploma projects required part Patent investigation according to the course (diploma) subject. This will make students widen their outlook, meet with up-to-date implements, technologies and tendencies in the chosen scientific branch, improve theoretical IP knowledge got before, etc. Thirdly, every head and lecturer of HTS must be his own innovator and inventor to involve students to inventing activity according to the principle Do as I do. Because the most effective is education on ones personal example which is the object of students striving for approximation. That is why the thing of great importance is constant improvement of every lecturers skills including IP. Scheme of involving students of HTS in inventing activity is shown on Figure 2.

Figure 2: Scheme of involving students of HTS in inventing activity

792

The scheme (see Figure 2) shows that all the measures (steps) in complex usage can generate the effective intellectual capital of HTS, which is to provide innovating development of the State.

4. MEASURES OF EFFECTIVE REALIZATION OF THE STRATEGY OF INVOLVING STUDENTS IN INVENTING ACTIVITY

To realize the steps described above in every HTS must be developed its own generation and control system of quality of inventing activity on the basis of the following measures [4]: Hold regular seminars according to the questions of IP for HTS research workers, lecturers and executives. On these seminars it is necessary to invite lecturers of IP discipline, experts from IP departments of enterprises and HTS, patenting attorneys, etc with the aim to interchange of experience in IP sphere with the obligatory involving students to these seminars. Adjust the close co-operation of HTS and enterprises, i.e. science and production with the aim of maximally efficient usage of the intellectual potential (capital) and production experience. Keep by enterprises and HTS managements intelligent economical politics for creating, supporting and developing of innovating processes. Continuous improvement of the level of scientific and technical decisions being patented with the aim to increase the interest in these developments of leading producers of high-tech products and competitive productions. Create effective system of the state stimulation of inventing and innovating activity. Create system of technology transfer from R&D sector to industry. Create conditions for development of technology spreading processes for technical re-equipment of different branches of production.

5. CONCLUSION
The most effective education is the one that generates intellectual capital within HTS and realizes it through IP market into industry. And in this case IP, including patented scientific developments of HTS, is the best instrument to make this target moving in the best way. That is why it is rather important to involve students and post-graduate-students of HTS, as the future intellectual potential, in inventing activity. To attain success in this target it is necessary to realize the following steps: trend Every student innovator and inventor; part Patent investigation according to the course (diploma) subject; principle Do as I do. Besides that in every HTS must be developed its own generation and control system of quality of inventing activity of research workers, lecturers, executives and students.

REFERENCES
[1] .., .. - \ . 10, 2008. ISSN 1608-6422. pp.68-69. [2] ., . ' / , 4, 2008. ISSN 1608-6422. pp.22-26. [3] . / . 9, 2009. ISSN 1608-6422. .5. [4] Valentina S. Krivun, Elena S. Korchak. Problems with introduction of patented scientific objects of high schools into production/ Papers from the 1st International Conference Science and higher education in function of sustainable development SED 2008, 17-19. September 2008, Uzice, Serbia. pp.253-255.

793

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

IMPACT OF WORLD ECONOMIC CRISIS ON INDUSTRY AND APPLYING OF ECOLOGICAL PRINCIPLES

Marija Knivald
Faculty of trade and banking, University Braa Kari, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: knivald@gmail.com
Summary: The aim of this report is to show how world economic crisis influenced on world industry and on implementing of new machines, ecological and quality standards and procedures. The crisis originated from far 2001. and its structural disease embeded deeply in all areas of public life and it slows down any development and improvement. The scientific innovation is in problem as well as implementation of new procedures and machines. The descriptive and comparative methods are used in this paper and they combine theoretic knowledge with current situation in industry and public life. Its evidently that crisis and bad managing of industrial enterprises slowed down their progress and implementation of up to date machines, standards and procedures. The best and only solution is to improve primarly government system, and afterwards to optimize administrative implementation of improved laws in the very smallest issues of society. Keywords: world economical crisis, development, up to date machines, cutting edge quality procedures, government problems.

1. INTRODUCTION
World economic crisis emerged in USA because people, e.g. with 50$ wages in their pockets, got loans of about 250$ per person. These loans were guaranteed with the real estate mortgages. When people couldnt have paid their debts, a lot of banks emerged in the monetary market, trying to sell those real estates (to encash those mortgages). Market was overcrowded and a main economical principle took place here. When the supply is bigger than the demand, prices are getting down. In this situation, banks cannot get money and payback their loans. Also banks cannot place that money to new borrowers and all parts of one economy is becoming paralysed. [1] In this situation a lot of banks bankrupted. Total number of banks which bankrupted in USA during 2008. is 19. Federal institution for insurance of investments in USA took control over Franklin bank from Huston and Security Pacific bank from Los Angeles. That institution closed up the most of banks from 1993., where Washington Mutual and Indi Mac Bancrop were the biggest banks in the modern history of banking. Federal institution for insurance of investments in USA looks after of dealing of 8,451 institutions in USA, with total asset of 13,3 billion $, while it guarantee investments up to 250,000 $ for one investor in one bank, as well in some pension funds. Expectations are that this institution will have to double insurance of banks once again. It is expected also that it will have to increase its reserves up to 40 billion till 2013. because of financial crisis. Because of all this situation total amount of credits decreases. In the Table 1. there is participation of the most popular loans in USA in the period from 2006. till 2009. The table shows great fall of total value of loans in financial system in USA in that period.

2. MECHANICAL INDUSTRY
2.1 Scientific work World economic crisis indirectly influenced all areas of science. The main problem in mechanical industry, as well as in others, is the lack of capital and investments. It appears as if nobody had free amounts of money. Its

794

true, and even those small amounts are very carefully invested. Everyone want to earn money and to skim the interest rate from money placed to borrowers. Holders of the free money dispose it very carefully, because the crisis has diiferent impacts and can strike all, even hidden aspects of science. Crisis is classified, quite, slow and erosive regarding the fact that its unpredictable and have diiferent effects on science. Table 1.: Values and kinds of loans in USA in period 2006 - 2009 2006 2007 2008 2009 Short consumer loans 461 484 223 4 Credit cards 67 68 95 57 Mortgage loans 251 138 86 3 Loans for automobiles 85 81 74 36 Student loans 63 67 61 28 Other 245 417 362 36 TOTAL 1172 1253 902 163 Resource: IFSL Research Securities Industry and financial market association p. 3 As I described previously, free money is hard to find, because all financial streams and flows were obstructed due to impossibility of encashing mortgages. Banks couldnt get money from those mortgages and didnt have money to pay back their loans and to place money to new borrowers. In that situation everything is stopped, banks cannot work, financial systems fail, enterprises cannot get vital resources live money for their functioning. [2] Science has been future in all societies, from ancient times till now. Its establishing stone and basis for our prospects. Thats why scientific researches have to be thorough and well conducted. Researches have to be managed in high level because reality needs accuracy and precision. Innovations should be well studied, tested and verified. The truth is prerequisite because nothing could sustain if its not conducted according to natures laws. Nature principles couldnt be changed by nones will, so truth is truth, and it either functions or not. Crisis had impact on the whole world and in the situation in which all aspects of numerous societies are struck, everything is paralysed. Financial system breaks down, real sector fails because of the lack of the money, industry is stopped and it pulls all other aspects of public life. In that situation all powers are set away from science because its not primary in situation where people dont have money for bare living. Although the mighty again had money during the crisis, they were really struck because couldnt live so rich life with yachts, houses, cars, trips etc. Common people werent so amazed by the crisis because they were used to it. Thats just psychological effect when the rich are not used to lack of the money and never felt awful fear of poverty, so when they experienced it for the first time, it was disaster for them. And for the middle class and the poor it was just one strike in the row of different strikes. [3] When industry doesnt function, there is a great unemployment. People dont have money for bear living, let alone for paying taxes and monthly bills, although they are obligatory. States budget doesnt fill and can hardly be fulfilled. When the budget is empty a lot of problems occur. All public sectors cannot be financed, the most important: health sector, military sector, administrative sector in descending gradation. Also there isnt money for pensions because when there is great unemployment there is nobody to pay payrolls which will fulfill pension fund. So, the only solution is enterprises to work while scientists work on new inventions. When small moves are made, its better for one society than to stay still. [4] 2.2 Mechanical industry and problem of funding Financial problems emerged problem of inventing of new machines and equipment, as well as procedures and standards. Scientific work hasnt still been primary. The main aim was optimal functioning of financial and real sector. Also, there isnt much money for implementing new machines, procedures and standards although they are future. There is general problem of financing all these activities because almost all entities are heavily in debt. There are several economies in world which are not very struck by crisis: Denmark, Sweden, Switzerland. The crisis made ambient of impossibility of lending and funding, because that was general financial shock.[5] The next problem is impossibility of developing countries is transition. The main issues are bad privatisation of big firms, industrial giants and engines of mechanical industry. The big number of those privatisations are not well done, so they need additional financial support, while the country which is already in great debts and fighting with small budget and gross domestic product (GDP), cannot fund those firms. Getting money from external sources, for example, in the case of my country Serbia, from the International Monetary Fund (IMF), can be very tricky. All money helps were very expensive, so states should avoid these ways of financing and it should be the final instance.

795

Except bad privatisations in developing countries, developed countries fight impossibility of good quality mergers and acquisitions (M&A). Mergers are gathering of two firms building a new one, and acquisition is incorporation of small firm into a big one. Although these affiliations seem good, there is a problem especially when they are international and among different continents. Different habits, standards, equipment and currencies make a trouble and when they are fortified by bad effects of crisis, it become very tricky for functioning of heavy and light industry. [6] In the whole world mechanical industry is one of the biggest resource of earnings. It employs the biggest number of residents of one country, and accounts great part of GDP. In the big number of countries there is slightly descending exported industrial output, and what is most anxious import in the most countries is higher than export which creates a deficit which is higher from year to the year. Only small number of countries dont have that score. The physical volume of industrial production is mostly stagnating, some countries have positive scores, but some are in great minus. According to present forecasts, mechanical industry will continue to offer interesting opportunities for foreign investments and collaborations. Metal/mechanical workers in Europe should be highly skilled and very familiar with European market requirements and standards. The developing countries sector and enterprises are often using obsolete technologies and are still in need of modernization, improved design and compliance with market requirements. Workers qualification also needs more training and support in order to yield professional staff capable of handling new trends and expectations of a very demanding global market. [7] Lets look how connection of industry and regarded issues functions on the example of Serbia. As regards foreign investment and industrial cooperation, the following considerations apply: investing in Serbian metal/mechanical industry means acquiring some very important economical benefits such as low labour costs (especially medium skilled labour) and low transport costs due to the geographic position of Serbia. Investing in Serbian production will not only allow a company to access a fast growing local market with a strong and growing request for machineries but will also provide them a further access to the various other markets holding preferential trade agreements with Serbia. As regards industrial collaborations, a lot of opportunities are available especially in the field of sub-contracting agreements. High credit cost, obsolete machineries and lack of western-style management and sales skills, are some of the main reasons why local companies tend to welcome subcontracting agreements. Serbian metal industry is a large supplier to the German and French automotive industries, as well as to producers of food and pharmaceutical machine producers in Europe. Companies have great experience in manufacturing process equipment, equipment and tools made of stainless steel, solar boilers, containers, filtering materials etc. [8] Serbian metal/mechanical industry has very high expectations as regards the joint venture between FIAT and ZASTAVA agreements, which will allocate significant investments up to approximately 700 million . Initially plans were that these new production units produce over 200,000 vehicles per year, but due to world economy crisis, total number will be lower. Serbia is member of CEFTA providing dutyfree access to a regional 31 million people market. With the population of 7.5 million people the Serbian market itself is among the largest in the region. Furthermore, Serbia enjoys a Free Trade Agreement with Russia, offering customs-free access to its market of 150 million people. Serbia signed the Stabilisation and Association Agreement (SAA) and an Interim Agreement covering traderelated matters on 29th April 2008, meaning that all products of Serbian origin can be exported freely into the EU. Industrial production in Serbia in February 2009 recorded drop of 21.9% in relation to the same period of the last year. The mostly affected is the metal industry. This segment of domestic industry that until so far occupied the first place in total export of the country, is directly affected by the global economic crisis that resulted in decreased demand. However, there are several factories that in spite of the crisis managed to conclude significant export deals and keep production at the last year's level such as Goa (rail track vehicles), elezara (steel plant) in Smederevo and Kruik. According to the more recent statistical data, mechanical sector in many countries experiencing a serious stagnation. Hence entering new international market will be difficult. In order to take maximum advantage of its strengths, a strong investment in technology and know-how is mandatory. Lack of a sector development strategy is likely to provoke serious damages not only to this industry but also to the entire economy and additionally to the social problems. 2.3 States and issue of subvention In many countries there is problem of gap among import and export. Its very serious problem. When there is bigger import over export that diagnoses huge problem in state. However, when theres big import all funds go outside country, and there is a lack of foreign reserves. Economy getting vulnerable and this mechanism pulls a lot of side effects. Reputation of a country decreases and national currency value reduces. After some time this

796

process can pull reverse mechanism. Reducing national currencys value is making national goods cheaper in the international market and its production and export increase. But, in the same time foreign goods become expensive and its not imported any more. Problem of export and import strike entrepreneurs and firms, and national economys health depends on them. So their health is a main matter. States should fund engines of economies or give them subventions on getting machines, factories, row materials, etc.[9] There is problem of funding in poor and developing countries. Entrepreneurs dont have enough money for modern machines and appliance of state of the art technologies. There should be made conditions for their cheap crediting in order to be competetive on the domestic as well as on the foreign market. All these fundings would increase production and sales, contracts and deals and it would affect on increasing of GDP. Otherwise, each country would become an island which cannot function alone and by itself. In that situation, import would increase and export wouldnt exist and that would contribute to huge external deficit. In order not to reach external deficit its good to improve industry, implement new procedures and standards. In this way each country would become competetive on world market and would achieve positive external balance. Countries which have industrial giants should put them in full operation and that way they would achieve competetive advantages. States should be aware of this and subsidize these factories. Firstly, states should diagnose competetive benefits and natural wealth of their country over the other and to manage their industry in that direction. After that, they sholud also find out in which sectors old machines, procedures and standards are applied and to make a national plan in which sectors machines and procedures would be replaced by the new one. In some sectors, the momentary machines and standards are not primary to be replaced, and it should be replaced when there would be purpose and benefits of that. There is not enough money in each very country and its impossible for all sectors to be modernized. We should be smart and find out which sectors should be funded and developed, so we should have national plan.[10] 2.4 Ecological problems Ecological issues are very much present in modern world. Its true that we must economize and save our planet. Although its expensive to import new technologies, machines and procedures, the opposite behaviour is more expensive on long term period. When you calculate side effects of those old technologies, regarding polution and spending of energy, it becomes obvious that modern technologies are minor air, ground and water polutors than the old ones. Machines and plants which spend a lot of energy resources should be replaced by the new ones. Natural resources are not eternal, and they should be spared. Also, theres some air problems: quantity of CO2 increases and makes problem of greenhouse effect. Ground is also poluted by insecticides, pesticides and plastic materials. Woods are cut and theres a little bit of oxygen. There have been done some things regarding this, for example there have been made plastic bags which decompose in 5 years and not in 50 years as prevoius ones. Theres coming a conclusion that its good to invest in science because its really beneficial when theres a new procedures, new non poluting materials and surogate materials. Its very important in this era of globalisation and global production. In the past, e.g. 50 years ago, everyone thought that natural resources are exhausless, but it appeared not to be so.

3. GLOBAL INDUSTRIES
3.1 European industry Mechanical engineering is one of Europes largest industry sectors with a share of some 9% of total EU manufacturing output. It is also one of the largest employers with some 169.000 companies employing 3.3 million people. With 36% of the world market, Europe is the world's largest producer and exporter of machinery. Mechanical engineering is an essential part of the industrial fabric of Europe. It is not only a supplier of capital goods to all other sectors of the economy, but it is also a significant consumer and provider of materials produced by the primary industries and increasingly a consumer and provider of services. Moreover, mechanical engineering provides not only the equipment, but also the skills and knowledge for improving existing processes and for developing new products in other industries. Its prime customer is the manufacturing industry. It is a highly cyclical industry whose performance depends on the investment cycles of its clients. Mechanical engineering provides the largest trade surplus to the EU economy of any sector, some 78,9 billion in 2004. It is therefore vital for the sector to remain competitive and flourishing, so that it can contribute as a motor of growth in the EUs economy.

797

3.1.1 Economic situation The European mechanical engineering industry reached an annual value of production of about 450 billion in 2009. Employment is estimated to have reached 3 million employees. This sector of the engineering industry that represents almost 9 % of the value of industrial production in the EU plays a key role in the evolution of both competitiveness and productivity of industry in general. Among the most important customers is the manufacturing industry itself. It is a rather cyclical industry whose performance depends on the investment cycles of its clients. The economic and financial crisis has affected industry of mechanical engineering more than any other sectors. Investment budgets were slashed and capacity utilisation fell dramatically in manufacturing industry, thereby reducing the market for investment goods. Volume of production contracted by 20 % in 2009. 3.1.2 Outlook 2010/2011 Based on the official data for Orgalime (Orgalime is the european federation representing the interests at the level of the EU institutions of the european mechanical, electrical, electronic and metal articles industries as a whole) industries available so far for early 2010, its seen that the volume of production has levelled off. As a matter of fact the level or production has increased slightly since early autumn 2009. The results from various business surveys have improved lately. The Orgalime Commissions monthly business survey shows that most of sectors still consider order stocks well below average, but that the inflow of new orders has increased slightly. Inventories of finished goods have been reduced strongly over the last couple of quarters and will therefore not affect future production negatively. The financial sector across the globe is however not functioning properly. In many countries, credit is still tight, as banks are forced to consolidate their balance sheets, while not necessarily shunning the financial investments which led up to the crisis. Investment will therefore continue to be negatively affected. On top of this capacity utilisation in industry is still low. These factors among others will have a negative impact on investment goods industry that dominates european industry. However, economic policies are clearly accommodating as interest rates are still low. Some factors are in place for a recovery, but any future expansion 2010. will be rather limited and start from a very low level. Orgalime expects a modest increase in volume of production in 2010. or by about 1.5 %. Foreign trade in terms of exports is expected to increase by 2.5 %. Demand outside EU is clearly expanding at present, especially in Asia and South America. It is also estimated that employment will contract rather sharply in 2010, by some 2.5 %. Low utilisation of capacity and limited access to credit negatively affect fixed investment. Its expected that fixed investment will contract in european industry by 3.5 % in 2010. Economic shocks that the industry have experienced earlier as the oil shocks in the 1970s, financial turbulence in early 1990s and the burst of the IT-bubble some ten years ago show that the road to pre-level crisis could be bumpy and also take some time or about 4 years on average. There are reasons to believe that this will also be the case with the most recent crisis. 3.2 Chinese industry Chinese government statistics show that exports from that country slipped 2.2% in November 2009, when calculated in dollars, after seven years of rapid growth. Convert the export figures into Chinas own currency, factor in inflation over the last year, and the plunge in exports was 11.4%, (New York Times, 1/1/2010). The Economist claims that the World Bank and other forecasters still expect Chinas GDP to grow by 7.5% in 2010 but that is below the 8% level regarded, almost superstitiously, as essential if huge social dislocation is to be avoided, (12/13/2009). Huge social dislocation is already in effect in China. Here are two examples out of many: In Guangdong province, so many factories are shuttering without paying their employees that some workers are resigning preemptively and demanding immediate pay before their employees go bankrupt. In Sichuan and other provinces, municipal officials are desperately searching for ways to provide jobs for millions of out of work migrant laborers whose families no longer need them for farming, (New York Times, 1/1/2010). China has a lot of potential in industry as a whole. All global markets are overcrowded with chinese goods. With the magnitude of their brains, there are some good predictions about their economy. Although Japanese economy is regarded as an enourmous one, there are some predictions of a 6.6 % growth in Chinas industry compared by previous year.

798

3.3 Russian industry Russian industry covers a wide range of manufactures: automobiles, trucks, trains, agricultural equipment, advanced aircraft, aerospace, machine and equipment products; mining and extractive industry; medical and scientific instruments; construction equipment. Steel market conjuncture of the current months is gradually recovering; there appears an uncertain demand of the products. But it should always be kept in mind that growing is far from dropping: for instance, 50% growth is a lot less than the previous 50% drop, if considering absolute expression. More to that, growth rates are not even close to the drop rates levels. Economists do not see any optimistic prospects of steel market conjuncture recovering. So the steel products prices will likely be climbing in proportion to inflation rates and, ceteris paribus, last summers highs will not be reached again soon. Regarding mining and quarrying there havent been a significant change during last 4 years as well as in manufacturing of food products, textiles, leather, wood. There have been a slight upper change of 5 7 % in the last 4 years in manufacturing of chemicals, rubber and plastic products, non metallic products, machinery and equipment, electrical and optical equipment. There have been a down change of 4 5 % in manufacturing of pulp and paper products, coke and refined petroleum, basic metals and fabricated metal products. Production and distribution of electricity slightly increased as well as manufacture of gas and distribution of gaseous fuels. In steam and hot water supply as well as in purification and distribution of water there havent been a significant change. 3.4 African industry The so called cradle of life, or simply known as Africa, is the worlds second largest continent. However, large as it may be, the climate just is not going their (Africas) way. The scorching hot temperature is not favourable for Africas agriculture. The heat causes water scarcity, gives the animal less water source and causing them to be thinner. A plant does not get proper nourishment because of to much heat all this contribute to Africas economic trouble. However, the richness in Africas mining resources helps them compensate for this. It slowly makes them rise above, economically speaking. Unable to adapt to stiff global competition, at a time when investment levels in Africa also were declining, many of the continent's fledgling industries were forced to scale back or shut down. African exports of manufactured goods declined drastically. Even in countries such as Ghana that had major increases in industrial output during the late 1980s, eventually "the exposure to world competition led to a steady deceleration of industrial growth. Meanwhile, structural adjustment programmes have encouraged the export of raw mineral and agricultural products, basing Africa's trade even more solidly on primary commodities. The main natural wealth are oil reserves. According to the 2009 BP Statistical Energy Survey, Africa had proven oil reserves of 117.481 billion barrels at the end of 2008 or 9.49 % of the world's reserves and in 2008 the region produced an average of 10317.6 thousand barrels of crude oil per day, 12.5% of the world total and a change of 3.1 % compared to 2007. Five countries dominate Africa's upstream oil production. Together they account for 85% of the continent's oil production and are, in order of decreasing output, Nigeria, Libya, Algeria, Egypt and Angola. Exploration is taking place in a number of other countries that aim to increase their output or become first time producers. Included in this list are Chad, Sudan, Namibia, South Africa and Madagascar while Mozambique and Tanzania are potential gas producers.

4. CONCLUSION
World economic crisis had a bad influence on world industry. Theres evident lack of money. New technologies are the future and they will be implemented some day or other. States, national and international organisations should finance entrepreneurs and whole society will get advantages of their operation. Marketing is a future of businesses. Advertising of entrepreneurs who apply modern technologies would change a consciousness both bussines sector and residents. Commercials can do a lot about showing advantages of these modernities. Economic crisis showed that states and governments dont function properly in some countries. Regarding this, control and governmental mechanism as well as administrative sector should be changed and replaced by new one. Every country should have tight policy and thorough national plans. Thats one of the best way to overpass the crisis. Information technologies are still the future and should be implemented in mechanical industry. Synergy of these issues can make significant advantage.

799

REFERENCES
[1] Markovi, D.: Monetarne finansije, Lomovi i ostali, Kragujevac, 2003., pp. 130-210. [2] Jaki, M.: Razvoj ekonomske misli, Ekonomski fakultet Beograd, 2003., pp. 60-170. ISBN 86-403-0559-5 [3] Dai, D., Principi internacionalne ekonomije, Fakultet za trgovinu i bankarstvo Univerzitet Braa Kari, Beograd, 2005. pp. 101-220. ISBN 86-83237-25-7 [4] `Whats happening to the economy? (Socialist Outlook no.14, February 2008) [5] uri, D., Finansijski menadment, Europrint, Beograd, 2006., pp. 19-130. ISBN 86-83237-38-9 [6] Nikoli, M.; Malenovi, N.; Pokraji, D.; Paunovi, B., Ekonomika preduzea, Ekonomski fakultet Beograd, 2004, pp. 130-280., ISBN 86-403-0578-1 [7] http://www.ambbeograd.um.dk [Accessed on 4th August 2010] [8] Dragii, D.; Ili, B.; Medojevi, B.; Pavlovi, M., Osnovi ekonomije, Ekonomski fakultet Beograd, 2004, pp. 250 480. ISBN 86-403-0602-8 [9] Pelevi, B., Uvod u meunarodnu ekonomiju, Ekonomski fakultet Beograd, 2006., pp. 80-193, ISBN 86-4030758-X [10] Varijan, H. (Varian Hal R.), Mikroekonomija, Ekonomski fakultet Beograd, 2005., pp. 403-529., ISBN 86403-0714-8

800

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DETERMINING THE REAL MINIMUM WIDTH OF WORKING SPACE FOR TRUCKS ON THE OPEN PITS
1

Daniel Kranovi1, Miodrag iki2, Radmilo Rajkovi3

B.Eng.mining, Mining and metallurgy Institute Bor, e-mail: daniel.krzanovic@irmbor.co.rs 2 B.Eng.mining, Technical faculty in Bor, University in Belgrade, SERBIA 3 B.Eng.mining, Mining and metallurgy Institute Bor, SERBIA

Summary: The real minimum width of working space for a truck is a technical and technological parameter that is the limiting factor for truck in very crowded conditions, ie. at close distances. Given that the main parameter that characterizes the truck it's nominal payload capacity, it is possible to establish a functional dependence of the real minimum width of space from the nominal payload capacity. Also, the value of the real minimum width of space depends on the conditions under which work is done on the open pit by the truck, in concrete terms. In this paper is given the procedure of determining the real minimum width of space of the truck as a function of it's nominal payload capacity, for work on open pit, and considering the real conditions prevailing of work site. Keywords: trucks, real minimum width of space, nominal payload capacity, open pit.

1. INTRODUCTION
Trucks have virtually universal means of transportation to work in all conditions and for the transport of all types of cargo. Truck transport have great use on openpits mines, thanks to a series of advantages over other means of transportation. They are used as the main form of transport or in combination with other means of transportation. Truck transport in surface mining is applicable to the opening and operation of all types of deposits of mineral resources. Construction and technical performance of the truck allow the transport of all types from soft, light and loose rocks to very hard, heavy and compact. For proper selection of models of trucks it is necessary to know the dimensions and operating parameters. These are, beside the turning radius, width and length of trucks, loading and unloading height, the internal dimensions of body and etc. The real minimum width of space for the truck is a technical and technological parameters which, in addition to other technical and technological parameters, representing a limiting factor for truck work in very crowded conditions, ie. at close distances. Also, the dimensions and operating parameters of the truck set the minimum length of transport, which actually represents the minimum distance between the loading and unloading place, the adopted scheme of work, where possible, ie. reasonable to apply the precise model truck. In this paper is shown the procedure of determining the real minimum width of space for the truck, from which can be quickly and accurately determine its value, which is relevant in designing work. Determination of the real minimum width of space for the truck can be analytical and graphical procedures.

2. PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION THE REAL MINIMUM WIDTH OF WORKING SPACE FOR TRUCKS
Minimum width of working space for trucks in real terms is determined based on the scheme shown in Figure 1, and by the expression:

801

Bksmin = Rks + 2lk + ak , (m) where: Rks - the real truck turning radius ak truck width lk truck length.

(1)

R ks

lk

lk

ak

Rk
t

R ks

B ksmin

Tp
Rk

Tp

lk l k

ak
Figure 1: Given that the main parameter that characterizes a truck its nominal capacity is possible to establish a functional dependence on other dimensions of the nominal capacity. Based on the analysis of data on the theoretical radius values given in the manufacturers' prospects of establishing a functional depending on the size of lk and ak from qk. Also, the real truck turning radius can be expressed through the theoretical radius, the image 1, and by the expression: Rks = Rkt + Tp , (m) where: Tp (m) - difference between real and theoretical truck turning radius. Considering that the value of the measurement Tp, is directly dependent on the model of truck, ie. of his theoretical radius Rkt, it can be represented by the expression: Tp = f(Rkt), (m) respectively (3) (2)

802

Tp = K Rkt , (m) where K - constant, which represents conditions under which the truck is maneuvering on the open pit Bearing in mind the above, the expression (2) can be written in the following form: Rks = Rkt + K Rkt = Rkt (1+K), (m)

(4)

(5)

The size of the theoretical radius, truck width and truck length depends on the model truck (construction solution), and the nominal capacity of the truck, which shows formulas: ak = f(qk), (m) lk = f(qk), (m) Rkt = f(qk), (m) (6) (7) (8)

To analyze truck mining equipment manufacturer based on previous CATERPILLAR have the following form: ak = 1ln(qk) 1 (m) lk = 2qk + 2 (m). Rkt = 3ln(qk) + 3 (m) Rks = 4ln(qk) + 4 (m) (9) (10) (11) (12)

When the expressions (9), (10), and (12) included in the expression (1) gives the final expression for the minimum width of working space for trucks in real terms: Bksmin = 5 ln(qk) 5 (m) (13)

In Figure 2 provides a graphical representation of the relationship between the minimum width of working space Bkmin and the nominal capacity qk trucks. Also In the same Figure is shown the graphical procedure to determine the real minimum width of working space depending on the nominal capacity. For a specific model truck with a known nominal load capacity in the diagram can be read values for its real minimum width of working space.

Figure 2:

803

3. CONCLUSION
The real minimum width of working space for the truck is a technical and technological parameters which, in addition to other technical and technological parameters, representing a limiting factor for truck work in very crowded conditions, ie. at close distances. This paper presents a procedure to determine the real minimum width of working space for the truck, on the basis of which can be quickly and accurately determine its value, which is relevant for designing work. Determination of the real minimum width of working space for the truck can be analytical and graphical procedures. The procedure is as follows: 1) Establish the functional dependence of catalog value of turning radius (theoretical radius), truck width and truck lenght of the nominal capacity of the truck. This dependence is shown by analytical and graphical method. 2) Analyzes the work of the truck in real terms. 3) Establish the dependence of the real value of the turning radius of the theoretical values of turning radius. This dependence is expressed through the constants that represent the conditions under which work is carried out-maneuver the truck on the open pit, in concrete terms. 4) Establish the functional dependence of the real value of the minimum width of working space for the truck of the nominal capacity of the truck. Dependence is shown by analytical and graphical way.

4. REFERENCES
[1] D. Kranovi, Determination the optimum length of transport by the loaders on open pits, Master thesis, Technical faculty in Bor, Bor, 2010. [2] CATERPILLAR PERFORMANCE HANDBOOK, CAT publication by Caterpillar Inc., Peoria, Illinois, U.S.A., 2000 [3] www.caterpillar.com [4] V. Pavlovi, Surface mining technology, Faculty of mining and geology in Belgrade, Beograd, 1992 [5] KOMATSU SPECIFICATIONS AND APPLICATION HANDBOOK, Training & Materials Group, Product Support Department, Tokyo, Japan, 2000 [6] www.terex.com [7] W. Hustrulid, M Kuchta, Open pit mine planning & design, A. A. Balkema, Rotterdam, 1995

804

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19 September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

FINANCIAL SPECIFICITIES OF CREDIT DERIVATIVES WITH SPECIAL RETROSPECT ON THE RISK AND NETTING
1

Dragana Labovi1, Milovan Dimitrijevic2

2

ALFA UNIVERSITY, 11000 Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: drlabovic@eunet.yu Min Holding Co., umadijska 1, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: mildim@yahoo.com

Summary: Credit derivative is an instrument the payment of which, to a great extent, is determined by the credit of the other party. Credit derivatives are used to separate market risk from credit risk and allow separate trading with the credit risk. Low transaction costs and easy application of the derivatives have given the companies the flexibility to adjust the companys or the portfolio risk. Corporations have been the especially passionate users of derivatives for managing interest rate and the exchange risk. In general, the derivatives have a high degree of power. If used inappropriately, they can drastically increase the risk, sometimes putting the survival of the company at stake. Key words: credit derivatives, financial markets, derivatives, netting

1. INTRODUCTION
In the early 1990-ies, a great innovation in credit risk management appeared on the scene: credit derivatives. Credit derivative is the instrument designed to separate market risk from credit risk and allows separate trading for later on. More precisely, it is the derivative or the instrument as derivative with paying off determined depending on whether a third party effects the promised payment for the debit obligations. Credit derivatives allow a more efficient allocation and estimation of the credit risk value. The parties that wish to get rid of the credit risk may enter into transactions with credit derivatives to transfer the credit risk to the other party which is willing to accept it. Finally, this transfer of risk is to a great extent beneficial to those taking and giving loans, as well as to those whose transactions with the derivatives are subject to non-fulfillment of the obligations, because it helps them in the belief that the premiums connected to the risk of non-fulfillment of obligations are appropriate for the certain level of risk. Banks, especially, use credit derivatives as the buyers and the sellers. A bank has to limit the sum of exposure for a certain borrower, for a certain geographic area or for a certain business activity. They can often give a loan, servicing the loan taker, but they can then sell the credit risk by using the credit derivatives. Of course, for any party eliminating the credit risk there has to exist the party accepting it. The provision of credit risk not related with the risk already in the portfolio can assist the portfolio diversity. Further, the speculators can be willing to accept that the credit risk is lower than it has been estimated in the contract. Mostly the parties accepting the credit risk transferred through credit derivatives are other banks, insurance companies, hedge funds.

2. CREDIT DERIVATIVES TRANSACTIONS

The credit derivatives transactions include three parties. One of them is a buyer of credit derivatives; it is the party having the credit risk wishing to eliminate it. The other party is the seller of the credit derivatives, the party willing to take on the credit risk. The third party is the party based on which the transactions is founded on. This party is referred to as the reference entity. The reference entity is included into the credit derivative only by the name. In fact, it can be unaware that it is the reference entity in credit derivative transaction. It is the right of the party exposed to the credit risk of the reference entity to sell the risk to the other party without engaging the

805

reference entity. Credit derivatives are in some way more complex than other derivatives due to various reasons. It is much more difficult to measure the credit risk, and the losses from credit events are less frequent than the losses from developments of, let's say, interest rates or exchange rates. Thus, it is more difficult to construct a historical model of credit losses. Credit derivatives are also less liquid than common derivatives, and they include complex legal issues related to the terms of the contract and documentation as well as to the definition of what the credit loss is comprised of. Credit derivative by itself is a subject of credit risk. If the party that has promised to pay is not able to pay in case of the credit loss, then there is the credit loss of credit derivative. The potential for non-fulfillment of obligations by parties, the reference entity and the seller is, however, usually very small. There are various types of credit derivatives. Further in the paper we will use the term buyer, which will be related to the buyer of credit derivatives and the party wishing to eliminate the credit risk, and the seller related to the seller of credit derivatives which is the party willing to accept the credit risk.

3. TOTAL RETURN SWAP

Perhaps the simplest derivative is the total return swap, which is the swap transaction wherein the buyer agrees to pay the total return on certain reference assets, such as is a special bond issued to the seller by the referential entity. In return, the seller agrees to pay to the buyer the interest such as LIBOR plus the interest margin. As in any swap, these payments are effected by a schedule, usually quarterly or semi-annually. The total return involves any payment of interests as well as the unrealized capital gains. If the bond creates the loss in capital, the buyer then receives the payment from the seller. In fact, the buyer has promised to pay to the seller the total return of the bond and analogously receive the interest payment and in that way free itself from the risk of price change caused by the factors unrelated to the interest rate development. Presumably, such price changes will primarily appear also as the change in the credit risk of reference entity. Figure 1. illustrates the structure of total return swap. Unrealized capital gains and losses are non-cash amounts but the swap requires payment in cash for unrealized capital gains and losses. The total return swap is dealing with the bond in the possession of the buyer. The seller is demanding the return form the bond without buying the bond. The market risk founded on interest rate movements is not completely eliminated because such movements are reflected onto the payment off of LIBOR. The payment of LIBOR can alternatively be fixed interests or can be converted from LIBOR into fixed interests by plain vanilla swap. Notice that the total return swap is much like a common swap, but that that its interest payments are paid on specific bonds and unrealized capital gains and losses. Total return swaps are practical only for reasonably liquid bonds but not for common loans. The reason for it is that the parties have to be able to identify the total return during the agreed period for the purpose of determining how much the buyer is owing to the seller. As the consequence, there has to exist a reliable measure of market value of the bond, which can only appear if there is an active trading market for the bond and the dealer willing to determine the price for the bond. Credit derivatives buyer
Interest + unrealized capital gains/losses

Credit derivatives seller

LIBOR + difference Interest + unrealised capital gains/losses

Reference entity Figure 1: Total return swap

4. SWAP IN CASE OF NON-PERFORMANCE OF CREDIT OBLIGATION

The other type of derivative is swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation. The buyer is holding a bond or loan issued by the reference entity and enters into swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation, which

806

obligates him to make a series of periodical payments to the seller. If credit events appear for the reference entity, the seller compensates the loss to the buyer. This compensation can take on one of the two basic forms. In cash offset, the seller pays to the buyer the difference between the amounts of non-effected payment minus each amount received again. In physical transfer of the ownership, the buyer simply submits the reference instrument to the seller. One other kind of settlement, called fixed settlement, is also used, although rarely. In fixed settlement, the seller pays to the buyer a fixed amount regardless of the amount of the loss. Even though the swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation is called swap, it is easy to perceive why it is in fact the insurance policy. The buyer pays to the seller a periodic fee, which is similar to the insurance premium. The seller then compensates to the buyer in case there comes to the event of credit loss. Credit swaps can be signed on bonds and loans of the reference entity. Swap in case of one-performance of the credit obligation is illustrated in Figure 2. Swaps in case of non-performance of the credit obligation are probably the most widely applied derivatives, and there are many variations of it. One of the main differentiating characteristics is the way a certain reference entity is determined. A type of swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation we have described is based on individual reference entity. There are other swaps in case of non-performance of credit obligation wherein the reference entity is in fact the portfolio of loans and bonds of various reference entities. This portfolio is usually called a basket. For the swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation on the basket, a swap is determined to be effected when the n-th party non-fulfilling the obligation really does not fulfill it, where n is the contractually determined number. Namely, the swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation first the default will be paid off when the first entity in the basket does not fulfill its obligation. The swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation second the default will not be paid until there appears the non-fulfillment of the obligation by the other party. The payment is based only on the second non-fulfillment of obligations and does not cover the losses from the first non-fulfillment of the obligations. Due to it, n can be any number till the total number of reference entities in the basket. Credit derivatives buyer Interest plus principal Reference entity Figure 2: Swap in case of non-fulfillment of credit obligation Periodic fee Credit derivatives seller

Principal-compensation if there comes to non-fulfillment of obligation

5. OPTIONS OF CREDIT DIFFERENCE

It is the option on the difference of the bond issued by the reference entity. Usually at the bond market, the difference between the bond gains from the gains of comparably payable U.S. Treasury instruments is called the gain difference. It varies with the sense of investor on the credit risk at the market. This instrument is as a common option, but in its basics is the difference of the bond from in another way comparable U.S. Treasury security. This type of credit derivative also requires that the basic bond is satisfactorily liquid and such that a reliable estimate od its credit difference can be performed. Figure 3. illustrates the options of credit differences Credit derivatives buyer
Option payment: max (0,difference- applied interest)

Credit derivatives seller

Insurance premiums paid in advance Interest + unrealised capital gains/losses

Reference entity

807

Figure 3: Options of credit difference

6. CREDIT RELATED SECURITIES

Another type of credit derivatives is credit related security. This type of instruments appears to be a common bond or bill of exchange, for payment of interest and principal. In the basis of the bill, however, is the credit quality of the reference entity. If the reference entity has not settled the obligation in some other specified instrument or bond, the credit related security is paid less that its total principal. The diagram No.4 shows credit related securities
Interest + scheduled payment of principal, decreased by Any unsettled amount by the reference entity

Interest + scheduled payment of principal, decreased by any unsettled amount by the reference entity Prodavac
kreditnog entiteta

Figure 4: Credit related securities

7. SYNTHETIC CDO
When the bases of securities are bonds and loans instead of the mortgages, this instrument is called the debt-covered obligation or CDO. When the bases of securities are bonds, the instrument is sometimes called the obligation covered by the bond. When the bases of securities are loans, the instrument is sometimes called the obligation covered by the loan. These types of instruments have played an important role in development of credit derivatives. As such, credit derivatives especially, are sometimes combined into a portfolio, and the outstanding claims for that portfolio are sold through swap in case of non-performance of credit obligation. This type of instrument is known as synthetic. In literal sense, it is not a unique credit derivative which is merely a combination and pre-packing of the existing credit derivatives. But the CDO in so broadly applied that it is really worth of effort treating it as a special instrument. With CDO the issuer provides swap portfolio in case of non-fulfillment of credit obligation of different reference entities. If we view this portfolio as the basic credit portfolio, the issuer then eliminates the credit risk through issuing combinations of swap installments in case of non-performance of credit obligation with other parties. In the synthetic CDO these installments take over, according to a specific order of priorities, credit losses of basic credit portfolio. The installment of the highest priority bears credit losses, and each installment under it bears credit losses successively earlier. At least one installment will probably bear a small credit risk because all the other installments will take over any losses before it. The installment with the lowest priority will bear most of the credit risk, because it will have to take over the first credit losses of the basis credit portfolio. The other installments found between two extremes bear different levels of credit risk. Diagram No.5 illustrates the synthetic CDO.
Swap of credit obligation nonperformance 1

Top priority installment

Swap of credit obligation nonperformance 2

Synthetic CDO issuer

Second at priority installment

Swap of credit obligation nonperformance n

Lowest priority installment

808

Figure 5: Synthetic CDO The taken over risk is of course the top determinant of the estimate of costs of the installments. The parties that provide the more risky installments pay less and have more of the expected returns due to the risk. The cost estimate of credit derivatives is quite complex. The basic idea originates from the concept of non-fulfillment of obligations as an option, as it is considered earlier in this text, however, while the theory is solid, the implementation is difficult. Furthermore, the cost estimate of credit derivatives is further complicated by the fact that the installments are often conditioned by the credit risk of numerous entities. Due to the reason, the correlations between individual credit risks of various entities are important and quite difficult for estimation. Regardless of the complexity of credit derivatives, market is, as it is noticed earlier, in the constant growth. In fact, credit derivatives have become so popular instrument so that the numerous organizations have created the registries of credit derivatives performances. These registries are useful measures of general level of credit risk in an economy. Further, it is possible to buy and sell the registries as one of ordinary securities. Thus, as an addition to the engagement in direct transactions with credit derivatives, the market participants can buy and sell the credit risk even though it is a mutual fund.

8. TYPES OF CREDIT RISKS IN DERIVATIVES

There are two types of credit risk in derivatives. The current credit risk is a risk for one party that the other party is not able to effect the payments it owes at the moment. The current credit risk is the one a party is facing in transactions with the derivatives, the party holding the contract as the assets. In other words, the amount owed to the party is positive so that it is the subject of possibilities that the other party will not fulfill its obligation. Potential credit risk is the risk that the other party will not fulfill its obligations in the future. With both risks, current and potential risk over-the counter-option, only the buyer is faced with. Since the buyer pays the premium to the seller and need not doing anything else, the seller does not face with the credit risk. However, the buyer can eventually apply the option and up to that moment the seller has perhaps gone bankrupt. FRA and swaps have a two directional credit risk. Each party is obligated to do something for the other one. Keeping the other things constant, the credit risk from the FRA or the swaps interest rate is determined by the credit quality of the other party, by terms of the contract and the form of the deadlines' structure. In case of interest rates swaps, the potential credit risk is the highest in the midst of the swaps duration. The potential credit risk is low at the beginning of the swaps duration because it has been presumed that the swap will not be entered into if there are significant problems in the nearer future. The potential credit risk is high during the middle part of the swaps duration because the other party has had the time to worsen its financial conditions. The potential credit risk is low in the last part of the swaps duration because several more payments have remained. The interest rates' swap does not include the exchange of the principal but the exchange rate swaps often do that. This also keeps the credit risk low at the end of the interest rates swap lifetime but it also uplifts it a way for the exchange rate swap. Specifically, the derivatives transaction costs do not always differ only according to the credit risk of the transaction. Many derivatives dealers and end users will enter into the transaction only with the clients having the minimum of the acceptable credit quality. Meaning, the other parties that barely pass the limit pay as much as the other parties that are essentially risk free. The estimates of credit risks of the other parties has been done in an almost the same way when the credit is being prolonged. Financial calculations and the estimates of financial state are performed together with the simulation and other statistical techniques. VAR can also be adopted in order to adjust the credit risk, although it is a harder way to do it. Stress testing is usually used for estimating the credit risk through supposition that the extreme economic conditions appear and by establishing the probability of nonfulfillment of the obligations. Although the parties that qualify pay the same applied rates on the transactions with the derivatives, there are some implied methods for differentiation between the parties with different credit risk. The basic method used for credit risk management is limiting the sum of exposure according to the given party. The greater the credit quality of the other party, the greater is the sum of the business which can be done with it. This is similar to the principle of diversification. The party expands its transactions to the numerous end users or

809

dealers. The extreme case of this method is that no business is done with the party the credit quality of which is under the minimum level. The deposit is usually used in lending and it has also become increasingly used in transactions with the derivative. Two parties can agree to put a deposit through committal of cash or securities with a bank or through giving a letter of credit by the other bank. The parties can agree that at any date of the calculation, the party for which the derivative value is negative will put a pledge equal to the given percent of the exchange rate amount or the contract value. The other type of the agreement is that neither party puts a pledge but if the credit of any of the parties is lowered in the estimate by any agency for estimation, the party will put a certain amount as a pledge. Some transactions are structured so that the fall in the estimate gives to the other party the right to terminate the contract at that moment, meaning the swap value is due and payable at the moment. Pricing according to market price is designed to decrease the credit risk through forcing the losing party to pay to the receiving party before the losses accumulate up to a large amount. Some terminal contracts are structured so that they contain the pricing according to market price on a periodical basis. Someone can at some time presume that the party with a lower credit is a dealer. Many dealers are banks the credit rating of which is kept low by the possibility of loss in the loan in their domestic and global banking business. The other procedure widely applied for decreasing the risk of non-performance of obligations is netting or balancing (netting)

9. NETTING
Netting is the term describing similar processes that are used for decreasing the amount of cash paid by one party to the other party by deduction of any cash owed by the letter party to the previously mentioned one. Netting between two parties is called bilateral netting whereas netting between several parties is called multilateral netting. In effect, the multilateral netting is what is happening when there is a bilateral bureau such as are the bilateral bureaus of options or the terminal business. There are several forms of netting. The installments netting, wherein two parties owing to one another the money, agree on a given day to simply determine the owed net amount and that one pays to the other. This is almost a standard procedure in interests swaps. In interproduction netting, the payments for one type of transactions are netted against the payments for the other type of transactions. Consequently, the interproduction netting frequently occurs in case of bankruptcy or in taking over including two parties, and both owing to one another different amounts originating from different transactions. If the parties agree to perform netting by the innovation (by renewing), the net value of their mutual obligations is replaced by a new transaction. Closeout netting is contracting in case there comes to non-fulfillment of obligation, and only rhe net amount is owed. This to a great extent decreases the credit risk through decreasing the sum of cash owed by the party not fulfilling the obligation, through the sum owed to it. Nowadays, there is no doubt about closeout netting. It is a standard in a practically any swap in most countries, and the laws on bankruptcy of most countries have been modified to recognize the legitimacy of the closeout netting. In the existence of netting, the credit risk of swaps is clearly limited to the net payments, which is less then todays value of payments with an interest to the loan of an equal exchange rate amount. Due to it and due to the fact that over-the-counter markets of derivatives have imposed strict demands in order to decrease credit risk, their success on the issue of non-fulfillment of obligations are excellent.

10. CONCLUSION
As pointed out in this paper, credit derivatives are the instruments designed in such a way to separate market risk from credit risk and allow separate trading later on. There are various types of credit derivatives. The total return swap is a type of credit derivatives similar to the common swap. It characterizes in a way that credit losses of the bond are transferred from the buyer to the seller. The second type of credit derivative is a swap in case of non-performance of the credit obligation, probably the derivatives with the widest application, and there are many types of their variations. The third type of derivative is the option of credit difference which is the option to the difference of the bonds gain. Credit related security is a type of credit derivative wherein the

810

party issuing the bill of exchange or bond in which the payment of the principal can be decreased by each credit loss happening to the reference bill or bond. Then, pointed out is also CDO as the instrument of securing in the form of installments representing priority outstanding claims on the portfolio of swap in case of nonperformance of the credit obligation. Briefly reviewed is the credit risk, observing how the credit risk contains the elements of the estimation theory of options' value. Further, how the current credit risk is differentiated form the potential credit risk, and also on the procedures for decreasing credit risk, including netting.

REFERENCES
[I] Abken, Peter A. An Introduction to Portfolio Insurance." Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta Economic Revievv 72 (November-December 1987), 2-25. [2] Abken, Peter A. Bevond Plain Vanilla: A Taxonomy of Svvaps." Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta Economic Revievv 76 (November-December 1987), 12-29. [3] Barone Adesi, Giovanni, and Robert E.Whaley. Efficient Analytic Approximation of American Option Values." The Journal of Finance 42 (June 1987): 301-320. [4] Abken, Peter A. Valuation of Default-Risky Interest-Rate Swaps." Advances in Futures and Options Research 6 (1993): 93-116. [5] Alexander, Gordon, and Michael Stutzer. A Graphical Note on European Put Thetas." Journal of Futures Markets 16 (1996): 201-209. [6] Anderson, Ronald W. The Regulation of Futures Contract Innovations in the United States." The Journal of Futures Markets 3 (1984): 297-332. [7] Anson, Mark J.P. Accounting and Tax Rules for Deriavtives. New Hope, PA: Frank Fabozzi Associates, 1999. [8] Arak, Marcelle, Arturo Estrella, Laurie Goodman, and Andrevv Silver. Interest Rate Svvaps: An Alternative Explanation." Financial Management 17 (1998): 12-18. [9] Arak, Marcelle, Philip Fiscer, Laurie Goodman, and Raj Daryanani. The Muncipal-Treasury Futures Spread." The Journal of Futures Markets 7 (1987): 355-371. [10] Arak, Marcelle, Laurie Goodman, and Suan Ross. The Cheapest to Deliver Bond on the Treasury Bond Futures Contract." Advances in Futures and Options Research 1, part B (1986): 49-74. [11] Arditti, Fred D. Derivatives: A Comprehensive Resource for Options, Futures, Interest Rate Swaps, and Mortgage Securities. Boston: Harvard Business School Press, 1996. [12] Austin, Michael. Index Option Overwriting:Strategies and Results." Derivatives Quaterly 1 (Summer 1995): 77-84. [13] Baer, Herbert L., Virginia Grace France, And James T.Moser. What Does a Clearinghouse Do?" Derivatives Quaterly 1 (Spring 1995): 39-46. [14] Barone Adesi, Giovanni, and Robert E.Whaley. Efficient Analytic Approximation of American Option Values." The Journal of Finance 42 (June 1987): 301-320. [15] Baxter, Martin, and Andrevv Rennie. Financial Calculus. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press, 1996. [16] Bojovi, P. (koautor), Poslovno bankarstvo i osiguranje, Alfa, Beograd, 2010. [17] Bojovi, P. (koautor), Praktikum iz bankarstva i osiguranje, Alfa, Beograd, 2010. [18] Bojovi, P. i dr, Bankarske finansije i raunovodstvo, igoja tampa,str. 497, Beograd, 2009. (redaktor P. Bojovi) [19] Bojovi, P. (koautor), Monetarne finansije, igoja tampa, Beograd, 2008.

811

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MOTIVATION AS A FACTOR IN THE SUCCESS OF THE MODERN COMMERCIAL SOCIETY IN SERBIA

1

Jelena Mijailovi1, Jasmina Rajakovi2, Suzana Doljanica3.

UNIVERSITY BUSINESS ACADEMY, Novi Sad, SERBIA, e-mail: yeya_m9@yahoo.co.uk 2 LTD PRIVILEG, Sabac, SERBIA, e-mail: e-mail: yeya_m9@yahoo.co.uk 3 NGO KRCKO, Kragujevac, SERBIA, e-mail: suzana.doljanica@gmail.com

Summary: The needs of individuals and factors that are considered to be motivated are object of intense research and analysis from which emerged many motivational theories. Regardless of the large number of theories of motivation, ways of research are open. The problem of motivation is the crucial question of human activity, of personality, work and human relations in which the process takes place. One of the key tasks of strategic management today is to build a system of motivation and effective management of human resources. Human resources are the base on which to build strategies for the organization and all the resources ( machines, raw materials and capital) which people raise with their actions. Human capabilities and knowledge are no longer so much in condition because they are undoubtedly huge, but how to motivate and encourage constructive changes in the function of these opportunities to achieve organizational goals and development. An important reason for theoretical concept of work motivation and factors which determine the practical needs of understanding the mechanisms of behavior, as the base for the construction of certain motivation, overall practice, policy and management organization with intention of achieving greater engagement and creative contribution of people, which becomes basic problem of modern business and development. Motivation, development and employee satisfaction are becoming the center of attention of management because they represent the main tool of competitive advantage in the market. Managers need to use all skills, organizational and psychological to build a quality program and combination of motivating techniques that suit the specific situation, create favorable atmosphere and conditions in which employees can realize their needs and desires and thus give the maximum contribution to the success of the organization. Keywords: motivation factor, success, commercial society, changes, development, knowledge

1. INTRODUCTION
The concept of motivation, since its inception to date has experienced great changes. There were various approaches to the interpretation of the process of motivation. Campbell has divided motivational theories into two groups, content and process. Meaningful says what motivates- the concept of needs, a process involved in the process of motivating and relevant to the question of how to motivate. Most theories of motivation have its roots in the concept of hedonism. The concept of hedonism goes back to the early Greek philosophers and was rebuilt in the 18th and 19th century in the work of numerous authors such as Lock, Bentham, Mill, Helvecius. In the late 19th century theory of motivation starts moving from domain of philosophy and goes more to empirically based science- psychology, and later towards the industrial sociology. The new theories of motivation try to identify relationships between sets of variables which are used to predict behavior.

2. RESEARCH PROBLEM
The process involves the introduction of new methods, better methods of evaluation and quality control mechanisms. Form of training should be conducted continuously especially by developing appropriate programs and quality standards. The problem of research is noted as one of key problems in our economy, especially today

812

in our country, because motivation does not get enough attention to the extent that would mean the interest of the organization and its employee, because: - Bad situation in the economy and education - Transition in which we are, and - Technological backwardness, and so on Since the essence of good business is successful management, leadership is in order to achieve given strategic goals. Problem of research is to determine the level of motivation with the understanding the present situation in Branievskom district, on the example of PD in Kostolac. Bearing in mind that this is a dynamic and complex area where is present number of impact of different factors, the dynamics of changes is increasing and the parameters related to motivation of employees is constantly changing. Research should contribute to identifying the dynamic of these changes and key factors which effect them, suggesting that in this process there is one constant- conditionally undeniable success of the organization developing the concept of motivation. Our society, so as our organizations need visible affirmation of the importance of motivation. Instead of natural resources or industrial facilities, management of motivation becomes a vital resource of modern society. Training of the population and economy in these skills is a great opportunity for Serbia to join the developed countries and to take active participation in global economy, but at the same time with preserving national economic sovereignty. Managing motivation should focus on the activities of the future, on strengthen of the knowledge of its staff, because this is a constantly developing process. Strategic priorities in the field of employee motivation are: - Increasing motivation of all employees - Construction of a modern education system which is adapted to the needs of modern society, - Encouraging research and development Modern society requires adequate, trained and skilled workforce that is able to work in conditions of highly competitive global economy , such workforce can be created only if it is motivated. Informatics society requires adequate social changes, trained and skilled workforce that is able to work in conditions of highly competitive global economy. Changes in the modernization of the education system are very complex process, which must be carefully designed . This area refers to the activities which aim to prepare the entire population for the society of knowledge and educated worker.

3. CASE STUDY
Previous research on motivation in Serbia are outdated. Recent historical circumstances in which was Serbia prevented matching of liability of organization in modern and developed countries of Europe. Therefore, in question is existing system of motivation in Serbia because it often shows certain limitations which manifest in different ways. Actuality this theme is reflected primarily in its presence in the organizational theories in recent decades. Detection of mechanisms that drive people to achieve better results produced number of motivation theories. Today in highly developed countries of Europe there are teams who are very active in discovering new, continuous trainings of the motivation impact, as opposed to our country. The level of developing treatment of motivation in various countries developed differently, as in our country. People may have a number of different motifs which occur simultaneously . This complexity presents a challenge for theories of motivation. Given the nature of the research problem and available resources a research is conducted in the area of the city Kostolac, having in mind the level of motivation and corporate culture in specified area. The subject of this paper is motivation of employees, its influence on the behavior of people in the organization and total organizational activities.

4. GOALS AND OBJECTIVES OF RESEARCH

Presentation of theoretical thinking and practical solutions should create already world confirmed solutions in the field of management and motivational techniques. The main objective of work is to determine whether motivation is a key factor of modern organization, and to explore and critically evaluate the program of motivation and training in our organizations. Also, the goal is to determine the capability and model of motivation and its constant improvement. The aim is explanation through research, identification of motivation in our organization which fights for its place in the market of developed countries. The practical aim of this paper will be based on the results of the research and will designed a model that would contribute to a better concept of motivation in the existing terms and conditions. The final goal is the full development of scientific knowledge about the achievements of theoretical thoughts and attempt to set motivational model in commercial

813

society. The aim of this research is to determine accurately what factors change in the relation to the realty, and also to recognize all possible effects of these changes and its performance. Scientific and social objective of this work would be to make scientific description of the influence of motivation to improve performance of companies same as highly developed countries, which have used motivational techniques for a long time. As particularly relevant the following research tasks can be extracted: - Investigate the attitudes about motivation - Investigate the level of knowledge which possibilities offers motivation. - Investigate the level of qualifications for the use of motivational techniques - Investigate, analyze and critically evaluate the training program of motivational techniques - Set new model of motivation for employees Motivation in organizations is a complex concept, much broader than that often that term implies. Concepts of motivation can have educational function by encouraging employees to spend their working life actively. Therefore, planning and implementation of motivation in particular area or country is one of the basic conditions for achieving profit and value. Research should contribute to access to the process of the employee motivation as a specific function which can not bi defined in advance, which is different from person to person.

5. THE RESEARCH HYPOTHESIS

In addition with the problem, the object and purpose of research as well as available information is defined as zero or basic research hypothesis, which states: Motivation is one of the main factors for development of companies in Serbia. Confirmation of basic hypothesis will be achieved by using auxiliary hypothesis: It is assumed that participants would be satisfied if they can change job? It is assumed that participants are satisfied with management treatment? It is assumed that participants are satisfied with professional care which company provides for them?

6. ORGANIZATION AND RESEARCH RESULTS

Given the complexity of the case of this research, especially in view of formulated aim of the research as well as selected research methods, research has been conducted on the territory of Branicevo district, exactly PD case study with 112 participants. The sample included the valid number of participants. The study included all participants who where present that day in their organizational units. This samples can be classified as intentional random samples. During the field work designed samples and methods of selecting samples were fully realized. Realized sample size of 112 subjects is sufficient for the purpose of this research in full. The number of subject provides reliable conclusions. The research is conducted by accurate procedures and instructions so it is provided reliability of the data. Basic indicators of samples are: 1. Sex, 2. age of participants, 3. work experience of participants, and 4. level of education. During testing subjects were answering the following questions, giving its position (satisfied, unsatisfied, unspecified): 1. Are you satisfied with number of information you have about your business organization? 2. Are you satisfied with your job? 3. Are you satisfied with your salary? 4. Are you satisfied with conditions in the workplace? 5. Are you satisfied with the conduct of your direct superior? 6. Are you satisfied with the relations between management and employees? 7. Are you satisfied with the conduct of corporate director? 8. Are you satisfied with opportunities for improving? 9. Are you satisfied with your contribution for improving and developing? 10. Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? 11. Are you satisfied with conduct towards new employees? 12. Are you satisfied with personal motivation? 13. Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? 14. Are you satisfied with the results of recent research which revealed that motivation is ahead earnings?

814

According to the research and its results, satisfied, unsatisfied, unspecified, we can conclude the following (table 1. and 2.): - Most of the responses, 67, can be determined from question five. Are you satisfied with the conduct of your direct superior? Or 59,82%, and the smallest number of answers,22, can be determined from question 10: Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? 19,64%. - Most responses for answer unspecified, 49, can be determined from question 13: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? 43,75%, and the smallest number of responses referred to the same position can be determined from question 5:Are you satisfied with conduct of your direct superior? 16,96%. - Most answers referring to the position unsatisfied, 57, can be determined from question 3: Are you satisfied with your salary? 50,89%, and the smallest number of responses,22, referring to the same position can be determined from question 13: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? 19,64%. Table 1 Frequency position of claims set in research
Research 1. Are you satisfied with number of information you have about your business organization? 2. Are you satisfied with your job? 3. Are you satisfied with your salary? 4. Are you satisfied in conditions in workplace? 5. Are you satisfied with a conduct of your direct superior? 6. Are you satisfied with relations between management and employees? 7. Are you satisfied with the conduct of corporate director? 8. Are you satisfied with opportunities of improving? 9. Are you satisfied with your contribution for improving and developing? 10. Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? 11. Are you satisfied with the conduct towards new employees? 12. Are you satisfied with personal motivation? 13. Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? 14. Are you satisfied with the results of recent research which reveled that motivation is ahead earnings? Satisfied 36 55 24 58 67 24 46 34 55 22 37 46 41 23 Unspecified 30 30 31 21 19 38 37 31 29 36 44 26 49 37 Unsatisfied 46 27 57 33 26 50 29 47 28 54 31 40 22 52 Overall 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112

Table 2 Percentage of claims

Research 1. Are you satisfied with number of information you have about your business organization? 2. Are you satisfied with your job? 3. Are you satisfied with your salary? 4. Are you satisfied in conditions in workplace? 5. Are you satisfied with a conduct of your direct superior? 6. Are you satisfied with relations between management and employees? 7. Are you satisfied with the conduct of corporate director? 8. Are you satisfied with opportunities of improving? 9. Are you satisfied with your contribution for improving and developing? 10. Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? 11. Are you satisfied with the conduct towards new employees? 12. Are you satisfied with personal motivation? 13. Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? 14. Are you satisfied with the results of recent research which reveled that motivation is ahead earnings? Satisfied 32,14% 49,10% 21,43% 51,79% 59,83% 21,43% 41,07% 30,36% 49,11% 19,64% 33,03% 41,08% 36,61% 20,53% Unspecified 26,79% 26,79% 27,68% 18,75% 16,96% 33,93% 33,04% 27,68% 25,89% 32,14% 39,29% 23,21% 43,75% 33,04% Unsatisfied 41,07% 24,11% 50,89% 29,46% 23,21% 44,64% 25,89% 41,96% 25,00% 48,21% 27,68% 35,71% 19,64% 46,43% Overall 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 99,99% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00% 100,00%

The question- statement: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? We research statements of participants 2 result at both threshold of significance, as it was shown in table (3.).

815

Table 3 Determination of 2 test for both threshold of significance for question: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? Would you be satisfied in case Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall you can change job? 41 49 22 112 Observed frequency 37,33 37,33 37,33 112 Expected frequency On the basis of comparison we got the following result: - That all 2= 10,3036, statistically significant at level 20,05=5,9915 and 20, 01=9,2103 and at that level we reject the hypothesis - Based on the hypothesis of equal distribution of responses in both categories of statements 37,3333, which states that there is no systematic difference by chance, so test rejected the hypothesis at the level of 99% and that means that differences are so big that it can not be considered random, but real. Due to easier research table (3.a is reduced to table 3.b). Table 3a Observed frequency of changing answer: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? In relation to the level of education Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? Level of education Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : II III IV V VI VII Overall : 0 6 15 7 2 12 42 1 4 21 7 1 14 48 1 5 6 3 0 7 22 2 15 42 17 3 33 112

Correlation of responses to the question: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? In relation to the level of education can be seen in tables (3.b and 3.v.). Table 3b Observed frequency of changing answer: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? In relation to the level of education Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? Level of education Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : 28 33 15 76 II IV 14 15 7 36 VI VII 42 48 22 112 Overall : Table 3v Observed frequency of changing answer: Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? In relation to the level of education Would you be satisfied in case you can change job? Level of education Satisfied Unspecified Satisfied Overall : 28,50 32,57 14,93 76 II IV 13,50 15,43 7,07 36 VI VII 42 48 22 112 Overall : On basis of comparison we got the following result: - That 2=0,0459 statistically not significant at the level 20, 05=5,9915 and 20, 0,1=9,2103, and at that level we accept the hypothesis - Based on the hypothesis of equal distribution of responses which states that no systematic difference is created but by chance , the test accepted the hypothesis at the level of 99% , which means that differences are so small that they can be consider random. Whit this we accept and confirm sub-hypothesis that participants would be satisfied if they could change job.

816

The question- statement: Are you satisfied with relation between management and employees? We explore the opinions of participants, 2 result at both threshold of significance as shown in table (4.). Table 4 Determination of 2 test at both threshold of significance for question: Are you satisfied with the relations between management and employees? Are you satisfied with relations between management and Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : employees? 24 38 50 112 Observed frequency 37,33 37,33 37,33 112 Expected frequency On the basis of comparison we got the following result: - That 2=9,0714, statistically significant at the level 20,05=5,9915 and at that level we reject the hypothesis - Based on the hypothesis of equal distribution of responses in both categories of statement 37,3333 states that non systematic difference is created but by chance, a test rejected the hypothesis at the level of 95% which means that differences are so big that they can not be considered random but real. On the basis of comparison we got the following result: - That 2=9,0714, statistically not significant at the level 20,01=9,2103 and at that level we accept the hypothesis. - Based on the hypothesis of equal distribution of responses in all three categories of statement 37,3333 states that non systematic difference is created, but by chance, the test accepted the hypothesis at the level of 99% which means that differences are so small that they can be consider random. In conclusion, 2=9,0714, statistically not significant at the level 20,01 =9,2103 and at that level we accept the hypothesis. Due to easier research table (4.a have been reduced to table 4.b). Table 4a Observed frequency of changing answer Are you satisfied with relations between management and employees? In relation to work experience Are you satisfied with relations between management and employees? Work experience Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : 4 4 1 9 0 10 11 20 21 30 31< Overall : 5 8 5 22 9 18 7 38 18 25 8 52 32 51 20 112

Correlations of answers for question: Are you satisfied with relations between management and employees? in relation to work experience will be seen in table (4.b and 4.v.). Table 4b Observed frequency of changing answer Are you satisfied with relation between management and employees? In relation to work experience, simplified version Are you satisfied with relation between management and employees? Work experience Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : 9 13 19 41 0 20 21 < Overall : 13 22 25 38 33 52 71 112

817

Table 4v Expected frequency of changing answer Are you satisfied with relation between management and employees? In relations to work experience, simplified version Are you satisfied with relation between management and employees? Work experience Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : 8,05 13,91 19,04 41 0 20 21 < Overall : 13,95 22 24,09 38 32,96 52 71 112

On basis of comparison we got the following result: - That x2=0.2696, statistically not significant at the level x20, 0,5=5,9915 and x20, 0,1= 9,2103 and at that level we accept the hypothesis - Based on the hypothesis of equal distribution of responses which states that non systematic difference is created but by chance, the test accepted the hypothesis at level of 99% which mean that differences are so small that they can be consider random. With this we accept and confirm the sub-hypothesis, that participants are satisfied with management treatment. The question-statement: Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? Exploring statements 2 result at both threshold of significance, shown in table (5.). Table 5 Determination of 2 test for both threshold of significance for question: Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? Are you satisfied with importance given by Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall: organization to professional development? 22 36 54 112 Observed frequency 37,33 37,33 37,33 112 Expected frequency On the basis of comparison we got the following result: - That all 2=13.7857, statistically significant at level 20,05=5,9915 and 20,01=9,2103, and at that level we reject the hypothesis - Based on the hypothesis of equal distribution of responses in both categories of statements 37,3333 which states that non systematic differences is created, but by chance, the test rejected the hypothesis at level of 99% which means that differences are so big that they can not be consider random, but real. Due to easier research table (5.a have been reduced to 5.b). Table 5a Observed frequency of changing answer Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? In relation to work experience Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? Work experience Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : 0 - 10 11 - 20 21 - 30 31< Overall : 2 6 10 5 23 6 7 15 8 36 1 19 26 7 53 9 32 51 20 112

Correlation of response to the question Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? In relation to work experience, shown in table (5.b and 5.v.).

818

Table 5b Observed frequency of changing answer Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? In relation to work experience, simplified version. Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? Work experience Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall : 0 - 20 21< Overall : 8 15 23 13 23 36 20 33 53 41 71 112

Table 5v Expected frequency of changing answer Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? In relation to work experience, simplified version. Are you satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development? Work experience Satisfied Unspecified Unsatisfied Overall: 0 - 20 21< Overall : 8,42 14,58 23 13,18 22,82 36 19,4 33,6 53 41 71 112

On basis of comparison we got the following result: - That 2=0,0659, statistically not significant at the level of 20,05=5,9915 and 20,01 =9,2103 and at that level we accept the hypothesis - Based on the hypothesis of equal distribution of responses which states that non systematic differences is created but by chance, the test accepted the hypothesis at the level of 99% which means that the differences are so small that they can be consider random. With this we confirm and accept the auxiliary hypothesis which states that participants are satisfied with importance given by organization to professional development. On the basis on auxiliary hypothesis we can conclude and confirm the main hypothesis: Motivation is one of the most important factors for developing companies in Serbia.

7. CONCLUSION
Reform is needed for strengthening employee motivation and for better flexibility in coping with in changing demands in world work. We need to use the experience curve, using experience of the most successful, helped with science and without mistakes, paying for years of stagnation, we should as quickly as possible achieve human resource management which represent wealth of human intellect and human labor. If we are irresponsible that will create serious and irreparable consequences in our economy, culture and society. Therefore this process should be considered very seriously so we can overcome the existing problems. It is necessary to understand the importance of motivation of employees because they are becoming a crucial developing resource of modern organizations and modern society. With conducted research we have confirmed hypothesis and shown the technical and social importance of this work. The research should be use as a base for future researches, which will improve the concept of motivation of employees; because it is only way that our business becomes successful like the one in developed countries. With the result of numerous researches and with different experience, we came to the answer that there is no universal solutions for employee motivation because it depends on individuals and specific situations and that is one reason more to continue this kind of research. Modern developments of business organizations, dynamic and turbulent environment, fast development of informatics and communication technologies and aggressive competition caused the increase of the role of the motivation in the economy, as an important segment of globalization. Knowledge based economy and good human resources became imperative for successful business in 21st century, need for talented and motivated staff is very big. To achieve the goals of modern society in unique standards , in information and in demands of global market, management most invest more in resources and in motivation of employees to improve their competitive skills. Increase of importance of human resources and their motivation, training and development led to so called educated workers, which are the most precious asset of modern organization. This paper highlighted the importance of motivation and training staff for modern organization, their business is based on new technologies and constantly reviewing and adapting the rules of organization. Motivated worker is the most important and the most powerful resource today, he is the most important factor for developing any

819

organization. Therefore, this paper points out that the permanent motivation of employees and a manager is a crucial condition for development of modern organization and modern society.

8. REFERENCES
[1] Adamovic, Z., Momcilovic, O., Nenadovic, S., Research Methodology, TEHDIS, Belgrade, 2002. [2] Adamovic, Z., Momcilovic, O, Savic, D., Valjarevic, S., Virtual Enterprise III (Re-engineering and knowledge management), TEHDIS, Belgrade, 2006. [3] Adamovic, Z., Momcilovic, O, Savic, D., Valjarevic, S., Factory future, TEHDIS, Belgrade, 2006. [4] Bazi, M., Momilovi, O., Ceran, K., Business negotiation and cultural identity of organization management, UNIVERSITY of ORADEA, FACULTY of MANAGEMENT and TECHNOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, IMT ORADEA - 2009, Felix Spa MAY 29th 30th, 2009. CD-ROM EDITION, VOLUME VIII (XVIII), 2009 ISSN 1583 0691, CNCSIS ACCREDITATION 2002-2004, "Clasa B+" 2007-2009 [5] Jankovic, S., Momcilovic, O., Milosevic, S., Marketing - the easy way, Familet, Beograd, 2008. [6] Leposava, G. N., Razvoj ljudskih resursa, AB Print, Novi Sad, 2005. [7] Marinkovi, V., Momilovi, O., Savremeni menadment & obrazovanje, TQM Centar Zrenajnin, 2010., ISBN 978-86-88065-08-5, COBISS.SR-ID 175485708, UDC 005, UDC 37 [8] Marinkovi, V., Momilovi, O., Menadment ljudskih resursa u kriznim situacijama, Ekonomski vidici, Drutvo ekonomista Beograda, Zlatibor, jun 2009. [9] Momcilovic, O., Specialist thesis: Application of Microsoft Excel - and 2000 in simulation research methods Monte Carlo, Technical Faculty Mihajlo Pupin, Zrenjanin, 1999. [10] Momcilovic, O., MA thesis: Determination of the reliability of multi-criteria analysis of technical grade point mixed Weibull distribution, Technical Faculty Mihajlo Pupin, Zrenjanin, 2003. [11] Momcilovic, O., Ph. D. thesis: Knowledge management and changes in the decisive factors of IT Education, Faculty of Management, Novi Sad, 2008. [12] Momcilovic, O., Dudic, M., Nikolic, M., Grbic. N., Kostic, I., Analysis of the processes of management and decision making of the active entrepreneurs as a strategic stability factor of companies, TTEM - Technics Technologies Education Management, BIH, Sarajevo, ISSN: 1840-1503, 2009. http://www.ttembih.org/ttem_2_2009.html (Thomson: ISI web of Science, Science Citation Index Expanded; Scopus, EBSCO: Education Research Index. Index Copernicus) [13] Momcilovic, O., Concept model "regional center for professional development of staff in the education" branicevo - podunavlje districts & judetul caras-severin, Analele Universitatii, Fascicola de Inginerie "Eftimie Murgu", Resita, Romania, ISSN: 1453-7394, 2009., http://www.anale_ing.uem.ro/ current_issue.html, (EBSCO Open Access Journals, RePEc: Research Papers in Economics, ProQuest, The International Consortium for the Advancement of Academic Publication: ICAAP) [14] Momcilovic, O., Rajakovic, J., Knowledge management as indispensable factor in the organizational changes, Analele Universitatii, Fascicola de Inginerie "Eftimie Murgu", Resita, Romania, ISSN: 1453-7394, 2009., http://www.anale_ing.uem.ro/current_issue.html, (EBSCO Open Access Journals, RePEc: Research Papers in Economics, ProQuest, The International Consortium for the Advancement of Academic Publication: ICAAP) [15] Momcilovic, O., Rajakovic, V., Transparency in risk management does mitigation and decision-making process of management, Analele Universitatii, Fascicola de Inginerie "Eftimie Murgu", Resita, Romania, ISSN: 1453-7394, 2009., http://www.anale_ing.uem.ro/current_issue.html, (EBSCO Open Access Journals, RePEc: Research Papers in Economics, ProQuest, The International Consortium for the Advancement of Academic Publication: ICAAP) [16] Momilovi, O., Marinkovi, V., Knowledge management and intellectual capital as decisive factors in contemporary economy, UNIVERSITY of ORADEA, FACULTY of MANAGEMENT and TECHNOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, IMT ORADEA - 2009, Felix Spa MAY 29th 30th, 2009. CDROM EDITION, VOLUME VIII (XVIII), 2009 ISSN 1583 0691, CNCSIS ACCREDITATION 20022004, "Clasa B+" 2007-2009 [17] Momilovi, O., Adamovi, ., Miloevi, S., Metodologija naunih istraivanja (aspekti sistemskih razmiljanja), Beograd, 2009, ISBN 978-86-912521-0-6, COBISS.SR-ID 157941772, UDC 001.891 [18] Momilovi, O., Teorijska razmatranja o menadmentu znanja i pormena kao katalizatora savremenog obrazovanja, TQM Centar, Zrenjanin, 2010., ISBN 978-86-88065-06-1, COBISS.SR-ID 175488012, UDC 005.94

820

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MEET CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS = CUSTOMER SATISFACTION

Faculty of Materials Science and Technology, Trnava, Slovak republic, 1 e-mail: miroslava.mlkva@stuba.sk 2 e-mail: iveta.paulova@stuba.sk
Summary: Every organization depends on its clients, therefore it has to understand their current and future needs, it has to meet their requirements and it also has to strive to overcome their expectations. The article is focused on implementation of the principle of quality management "customer orientation" as one of the fundamental principles of quality management. The article presents the part of the survey results. The survey is, mapping problems of monitoring and measuring customers` satisfaction within the framework of the research project Perspectives for development of quality management in conditions of Slovakia. One of the objectives of the research project was mapping the current state of implementation of various principles of quality management and then the consecutive comparison of the level of quality management realization in industrial sectors with the requirements of various models of quality management system according ISO 9001, TS 16949 and AQAP. Keywords: customer, quality management system, satisfaction of customer.

Miroslava Mkva 1, Iveta Paulov 2

1. INTRODUCTION
In the framework of a research project aimed to developing a quality management perspective in relation to the Slovak market we are dealing with issues of application of the eight fundamental principles of quality management in business practice. The research task is to draft a system solution for efficient and effective application of fundamental principles of quality management requirements with regard to business practices in accordance with the anticipated directions of quality management theory development and the needs of today's market. The basis for this proposal is to examine the current state of theoretical knowledge of quality management and the analysis of quality management principles in business practice which focuses on the application of quality management processes in certain industries in comparison with the requirements of various models of quality management system.

2. FOCUSE ON CUSTOMER
One of the basic principles of quality management which are the basis for the international standards for quality management systems but also the concept of TQM is the principle of concentration on customer respectively customer focused principle. The realization of this principle according to ISO 9000 means that the organizations depend on their customers and therefore should understand their current and future needs; they should meet customers requirements and strive to exceed their expectations." [3] All efforts in the organization must aim to satisfy customers needs, as the success of any organization depends on its ability to meet customer requirements. Especially in a competitive environment the meeting customers requirements is a major precondition for the economic survival of each organization. Customer is anyone to whom we give the results of our own activities. The standard ISO 9001:2008 very strongly encourages focus on defining the needs of all stakeholders, who are internal customers, agents, external customers and end-users. Applying the principle of customer focus in the organization leads to the following activities: Examining and understanding the needs and requirements of customers. Harmonizing the goals of organization with the requirements and expectations of customers.

821

Customer satisfaction measurement and action on the basis of the results Systematic management of relationship with customers Ensuring balanced relationship between customers and participated sides (owners, employees, suppliers, region ,..).

Customers` orientation is the first level of programming quality. It focuses on knowing the customer, his requirements and understanding of these requirements. When the company clarifies who are the real customers then it can proceed to define customers requirements and characteristics of their satisfaction. Customers` orientation, therefore, begins by clarifying customer requirements, assessing the current level of processes with regard to these requirements, by assessment of planning steps to meet customer requirements and it ends with creating action plan which contains a definition of the individual time steps aimed to improving the processes. 2.1. Processes related to customer Each process starts by inputs coming from suppliers and it ends by outputs aiming to customers. However, when we plan the quality we start with customer. All activities related to the identification, discovering needs, requirements and expectations of customer belong to scope of marketing. Marketing has a crucial role in fulfilling the first step in the whole spiral of product quality assurance during identifying customers requirements and the transfer of these requirements to the phase of research and development. Determination of requirements related to product When introducing new products to the market, the processes related to customer play a significant role. In the market economy the non-innovative products will not longer meet the changing requirements of the market and their manufacturer will lose revenue from sales, profit and its position on the market. The design of needs and expectations of customers requirements within the organization means the identification and review of relevant information. Review of requirements related to product The organization may produce products or provide services based on the findings of the customer's needs. In order to understand its needs, they must analyze and review the product requirements. Customer requirements are known to the organization or they are defined by well-known procedures. The organization has to define, implement and maintain the appropriate processes. The component part of the process must also address the procedures for changes in requirements. The examination must take place before sending the order confirmation or contract, it has to be attended by all s involved taff and the results of the examination must be recorded and must be fixed responsibility for the release of the confirmed offer. Communication with customer The customer usually wants to find the most information at the time of purchasing the product and during placing it in service. There is less communication over the use of the product. Communication with customer provides the organization with appropriate information on the evaluation of performance, durability, safety and reliability of the expected storage and operating conditions. Proper communication helps to optimize processes after delivery of the product. Monitoring of customer satisfaction The relationship of manufacturer to customer does not end with a successful sale. Through after-sales activities the quality management should analyze all relevant factors affecting the perception of the quality product by user. Monitoring of customer satisfaction and the loyalty is actually the most important part of meeting the principle of feedback of effective quality management. 2.2. Survey of application of the principle focusing on customer in industrial practice In the framework of a research project, we conducted a survey to assess the current status of the application of fundamental principles of quality management and comparison of the level of meeting the various requirements in different industries in Slovakia. The survey was conducted by questionnaire and it was attended by 124 organizations from different industries in Slovakia. During the evaluating of data, we divided the organization into three groups according to the kinds of industry. Structure of surveyed firms according the kinds of industry was as follows: 33% automotive industry, 30% engineering industry, 37% other kinds of industry. The vast majority of surveyed organizations have implemented and certified quality management system. In the questionnaire were also questions aimed to find, how in practice are realized the activities concerning principle of customers focus to two areas of issues: identifying the requirements of customers and their conversion into products' characteristics, monitoring and measuring customers` satisfaction.

822

Firstly we tried to find how is that principle understood and applied in business practice in quality management and whether there are differences in its application in business practice in organizations of different orientation. This paper presents some results obtained from the survey for the second area of this issue. In the questionnaire were the following questions: 1. Do you perform monitoring of customers satisfaction with products or services? 2. What form do you use to find out about the customers satisfaction? 3. How often do you perform the monitoring of customers satisfaction? 4. How do you evaluate data obtained from monitoring of customers satisfaction? 5. How does you organization use the information from the monitoring of customers satisfaction? 1. Do you perform monitoring of customers satisfaction with products, respectively services? In the survey, we found that from 124 surveyed Slovak organizations the monitoring of customers satisfaction is performed systematically according to a documented procedure by 56% of respondents. 27% of respondents perform monitoring of customers satisfaction only for selected products and 15% of respondents does not perform monitoring at all.

Figure 1: Graphical representation of responses to the question No. 1 2. The question What form do you use to find out about the customers satisfaction? There were possibilities to choose from several alternatives while it was also possible to mark several possibilities of usage during monitoring. 57 respondents (1) marked the questionnaire as the form of finding out satisfaction, 67 respondents (2) marked the personal discussion with customer, 22 respondents (3) snail mail or e-mail, 23 respondents (4) via telephone, 22 (5) during delivering product at customer and 17 (6) have chosen another form of finding out the customers satisfaction (e.g. evaluation based on coefficient, monitoring of returned products, via the volume of sales, by SW tools and so on.

Figure 2: Graphical representation of responses to the question No. 2 3. Dates of monitoring the satisfaction varied from monthly, through quarterly, half yearly, but most frequently occurred the term once a year. These terms depend on the manufactured product and the size of individual orders.

823

4. The question How do you evaluate the data obtained from monitoring of customers satisfaction? The examined organizations responded as follows: 13% of respondents identified the possibility of verbal evaluation, 34% of respondents evaluate the data statistically, 26% of respondents evaluate the data by the form of information summary, 6% reported other forms of evaluation (e.g., own forms, at meetings of management etc..) and 14% of respondents stated a combination of several options, especially the form of statistical form together with the summary of information. 7% of surveyed organizations have no comments on this issue. It can be assumed that the monitoring of customer satisfaction they do not do.

Figure 3: Graphical representation of responses to the question No. 4 5. The information from the monitoring of customer satisfaction is used in practice by 72 surveyed organizations such as the stimulus for process of improvement, 46 organizations use these information for evaluation of the effectiveness of quality management system, 50 organizations use the information as a basis for management review report, eight organizations reported other choice (for example, detecting the weaknesses in organization). The marketing analysis of customers' information is used only by 18 organizations. It may be concluded that the monitoring of customers satisfaction in the practice is mostly the area of quality management.

Figure 4: Graphical representation of responses to the question No. 5 The results of customers satisfaction measurement have to be the focus of continuous observation of all managers. Any negative trends in satisfaction should be viewed as a clear warning of the oncoming economic problems and especially as inputs for the adoption of effective improvement projects. Increasing the degree of satisfaction of external (but also internal customers) creates a precondition for their loyalty. For these reasons, it is necessary to understand the outcomes of processes for monitoring and measuring the customers satisfaction as major information inputs for the review of management processes to determine where resources will be directed to the improvement projects, especially for the purpose of creating, or strengthening the loyalty of key customers. [1]

824

3. CONCLUSION
In today's global market the quality of offered products and services is more balanced. The pressure of competition is growing and for the company which want to survived and build long-term relationship with customers is necessary to restructure processes aimed solely at commercial transactions. Customer relationship management, which includes all the important processes associated with customer relations, is the key factor for success of the company. It enables the companies to achieve optimal customers satisfaction. The basic criteria are: to present a consistent image to the customer, to ensure the highest quality of customers services at all contact points and the usage of all integrated customers information within the company. The organization depends on its customers and therefore should be able to understand their current needs and be able to estimate their future needs. It must strive to meet their requirements and expectations, which can achieve increased market share, increased efficiency of resource organizations to increase customer satisfaction, customer loyalty, which leads to repeated use or purchase of product. Characteristics of a successful company are given the ability to consistently overcome the customers' expectations. To meet the expectations of customers means only means to satisfy them, to overcome their expectations means to please them. Those customers, who were pleased by a particular supplier, will remain much more likely to continue its customers. The role of overcoming the heightened expectations is increasingly difficult and expensive. Many of today's customers want the highest quality, additional services, a great user comfort, individual adjustment to return unsatisfactory goods, warranty and all at the lowest price The contribution was prepared within the research project VEGA no. 1/0229/08 Prospects for the development of quality management in relation to the Slovak market demands.

REFERENCES
[1] Kuerov, M.,: Uplatovanie metd monitorovania spokojnosti zkaznkov v podnikovej praxi. In. Frum manara., - ISSN 1336-7773. - Vol. 2, . 2 (2006), s. 26-29 [2] Urdzikov, J.: Spokojn a lojlny zkaznk - zkladn kame spechu podniku. In: Kvalita. - ISSN 13359231. - Ro. 13, . 2 (2005), s. 24-26 [3] STN EN ISO 9004.2001 Systmy manarstva kvality. Nvod na zlepovanie vkonnosti, STN Bratislava. 2001.

825

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SATISFACTION IN HUMAN RELATIONSHIPS (Case Study Opoj juices - Ltd Herceg Novi, Montenegro)
2

ALFA UNIVERSITY, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: oliomaster@gmail.com UNIVERSITY BUSINESS ACADEMY, Novi Sad, SERBIA, e-mail: vesnarajakovic@yahoo.com 3 LTD SAGITA, Herceg Novi, MONTENEGRO, e-mail: ddoljanica@gmail.com

Oliver Momcilovic1, Vesna Rajakovic2, Dragan Doljanica3

Summary: Relationships between people are mutual and direct relations in different spheres of social life, whether an individual or a group are in question. These forms of social interactions can be developed as verbal or nonverbal communication, and considering theirs results they can be successful or not, satisfying or not. Man experiences the permanent process of establishing, development and breaking relations. Within that process, he receives and sends messages, he behaves in a certain way, and he communicates. That communication is connected to the mans need for the others, so that he can orient himself and his behaviour and also be emotionally satisfied. Subjects of this research are relationships between colleagues, the importance of accepting the team work in a field, opinions they have about each other, their relationship at job or personal ones. The research of relationships in the firm Opoj juices Ltd Herceg Novi, is based on motivation which is its most important aspect. Considering this job as a dynamic, because in this affiliate, besides being distributive, a part of its job is done in field (service of machines), good communication provides no conflict. On the other hand, these conflict can sometimes induce a creative idea, which are absent in this particular situation. Keywords: interpersonal relationships, Opoj juices, contact, communication, motivation, employees, fulfilment...

1. INTRODUCTION
Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi is an affiliate of the company Opoj juices Ltd. Slovenia, which has its affiliates all over the world. Being aware of all problems in the catering industry in Montenegro, particularly in the service of non-alcoholic drinks in hotels which provide all inclusive packages, the original company has decided to start up an affiliated firm in the territory of Montenegro. The company Opoj juices ltd. Herceg Novi was set up 29.04.2004 in accordance to The Law of industrial companies as Ltd companies. Since the beginning, this affiliate is running business successfully in the territory of Montenegro and cooperates with a numerous catering firms, in order to improve its services. All these information shows that the firm in question is the affiliate firm of the company from Slovenia, situated in Montenegro, which employs 30 workers. The firm does the foreign trade within domain of its registered activities, so as also the local trade. Services provided in foreign trade are following: - Foreign investment projects, - International traffic, agencies, transport of goods by road, - Representation of foreign firms, the use of lease and transfer of technologies between local and foreign firms, - The sale of foreign goods on consignment, and export, and - The last changes of goods. Being the affiliate firm, it comes as no surprise that the biggest part of products on the Montenegrin market, are products from the program of the parent company. The line of work in this company, Opoj juices Ltd. Slovenia, is the production and the sale of concentrated juices for concentrated bag-in-box juice machines. The affiliate Opoj juices ltd. Herceg Novi, imports concentrated juices respecting laws of Montenegro. Being a foodstuff, the special transport is required, and it is done by vehicles intended for that sort of transport i.e. refrigerator car.

826

While being imported, the market and sanitary inspection take samples of juices and send them to detailed analyses in the Institute for Public Health in Podgorica. The analyses of health safety are done, such as the presence of additives, the microbiological safety of the product, radioactivity. While being examined, the goods are stored in a bonded warehouse, adequately equipped for this sort of product. After the confirmation of the safety of products, the taxes are paid, and from there the further distribution is done. From the warehouse of the firm, the distribution to end users is done by specially equipped vehicles, regardless the distance. The fact that the distribution is done in the hottest period of the year should be born in mind. The buyers of concentrated juices are exclusively the best hotels in the territory of Montenegro. These hotels have all inclusive service i.e. unlimited consummation of food and drink during the day. That sort of service would be impossible without concentrated juices that this firm produces and distributes. The method used for the production of these products is organized in a way that all vitamins and minerals from the fruit are preserved. The fruit of the higher quality is used, and the company is required to have all certificates about the origin and quality of the fruit. Therefore the products have excellent quality. The possession of a HACCP system ensures the best production and sale of foodstuffs. Juices are packed in Bag-in Box hygienic packages for one use only. The HACCP system guaranties 100% hygiene and the quality of products. Juices are mixed with water in the ratio: 1kg of juice: 11l of water. When 8 Bag-in-boxes of different juices are put in concentrated bag-in-box juice machines, the end result are 1.920 l of juice, i.e. 9.600 glasses of cold drink whether sparkling or still. In order to serve that quantity of juice, using classic methods, the enormous warehouse would be necessary so as the refrigerator, and the place for the disposal of plastic packages. The number of employees would be much higher. The entire percentage of savings is higher than 30% in ratio to the classic methods of service.

2. THE STRUCTURE OF THE STAFF IN THE COMPANY Opoj juices

In the company Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi, the structure of the staff is in accordance to the organisation of the company. For each of three sectors, one executive manager is in charge. In each sector there are managers of smaller units. In the technical sector besides the manager, the employees are trained to install and maintain the equipment. The constant perfection of their knowledge is required, due to development of the technology of juice machines. In the marketing besides the manager, the employees work as: PR manager for public relations, sales assistant, IT person, warehouse clerk, and driver of car for transport. In the finances, besides the manager, there is also one expert in finances and in accountancy who is in charge for managing supplies. In accordance with the development politics of the company Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi, the extension of the staff is planned in the near future.

3. INTERPERPERSONAL RELATIONSHIPS
Relationships between people are mutual and direct relations in different spheres of social life, whether it is consider an individual or a group. These forms of social interactions can be developed as verbal or nonverbal communication, and considering theirs results they can be successful or not, satisfying or not. Man is defined as a social being. Therefore he has natural need and inclination to bonding with the others so as also a need to belong to the group and to live in a society. Man can only survive by living in a society with others, who define his needs and its fulfilment. That is the crucial motif that makes people to build relationships, and realise their significance. The contemporary psychology, oriented humanly, defines a human relationship as a relationship between two persons, in which the integrity of each other is accepted and respected by both sides. (Pregrad 2006) Man experiences the permanent process of establishing, development and breaking relations. Within that process, he receives and sends messages, he behaves in a certain way, and he communicates. That communication is connected to the mans need for the others, so that he can orient himself and his behaviour and also be emotionally satisfied.

4. METHOD OF THE RESEARCH

Problem The research of relationships in the firm Opoj juices Ltd Herceg Novi, is based on motivation which is its most important aspect. Considering this job as a dynamic, because in this affiliate, besides being

827

distributive, a part of its job is done in field (maintenance of machines), good communication provides no conflict situation. On the other hand, these conflict can sometimes induce a creative idea, which are absent in this particular situation. The subject of the research - Subjects of this research are relationships between colleagues, the importance of accepting the team work in a field, opinions they have about each other, their relationships at work or personal ones. In the firm Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi, there are 30 employees. Most of them are young (40%), up to 30 years old (23.33%), and up to 40 years old. The younger are usually the executive part of the staff, and the older are in charge for the management. Only two young employees are in leading positions. The time when this research is made in late March and early April 2010 in Herceg Novi. Goal throughout this research it is shown that the level of the quality of relationships in the firm Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi is satisfying due to good motivation. Hypotheses 1. Interpersonal relations in the firm Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi are good, both relation between younger and older and the management and the workers. 2. Personal relations outside the work are not necessary for the good relations on the work. Sample - 30 persons are questioned in the firm Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi. The survey is done during the working hours, in a field (with those who maintain machines), in hotels, in the affiliate (with those who are administrative workers, the executives). The instrument of the research the Questionnaire.

5. RESULTS OF THE RESEARCH

The survey was conducted by gender and age of the respondents, namely: 1. Gender of subjects table (1.). Table 1 Gender of subjects expressed in% Male female 60% 40% Comment the majority of employees are men i.e. (60%). Therefore they have more chances to establish better relationships. 2. Age of subjects table 2. Table 2 Age of subjects expressed in% Up to 30 years 31 - 40 years 41 50 years 51 60 years 40% 23,33% 20% 16,67% Comment employees up to 30 years are the majority, and smaller percentage are those who are 51-60 years old. Younger employees do the distributive work and the work in a field. The survey was based on allegations in the defined survey (with positions), as follows: 3. For how long have you been working in the firm? table ( 3.). Table 3 For how long have you been working in the firm? expressed in% Up to 5 6 10 11-15 1620 2125 Over 25 years years years years years years 16,67% 83,33% Comment Considering the fact that the firm was founded in Herceg Novi in 2004, and that it has been present in this territory for 6 years, we realise that 83.3 % are employed since the foundation, and the 16.6 % has been employed later in the distributive work. The firm plans to employ more persons during the summer, in order to enlarge the distribution in northern part of Montenegro. 4. Your post? table (4.).

828

Table 4 Your post? expressed in% Management Executives 36,67% 63,33% Comment the executive structure is a consequence of the nature of the work, because more persons are required in those posts. 5. It is important to me that my colleagues are correct at work, but personally, I have no interest in them table (5.). Table 5 It is important to me that my colleagues are correct at work, but personally, I have no interest in them expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 26,66% 10% 16,67% 6,67% 40% Comment - most of them think that the relationships at work are much more important than the personal ones. 6. I am satisfied with relationships between employees in my firm table (6.). Table 6 I am satisfied with relationships between employees in my firm expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 10% 6,66% 20% 26,67% 36,67% Comment the higher percentage shows that the most part is satisfied with relationships, which means that this staff is healthy, and well organised. 7. I think that I would do my job effectively, in case of better relationships? table (7.). Table 7 I think that I would do my job effectively, in case of better relationships? expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 33,33% 30% 20% 10% 6,67% Comment most of them consider that the relationships in firm are good, and there is no need for its improvement, because those who are satisfied are positive personalities, and those who are indifferent have no comment to this matter. They represent 20% that cannot be ignored, considering the fact that only 10% think that the improvement of relationships would increase the effectiveness of the work. Therefore they do not consider the motivation as an important factor.

8. Conflicts between the management and executive staff are present in our firm? table (8.). Table 8 Conflicts between the management and executive staff are present in our firm? expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 53,33% 13,33% 10% 13,34% 10% Comment 10% consider that conflicts are present between the management ant the staff, and according to 53.34% significant conflicts do not exist. 9. My biggest satisfactions at work are my colleagues and relationships with them? table (9.). Table 9 My biggest satisfactions at work are my colleagues and relationships with them? expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 6,66% 10% 10% 23,34% 50% Comment nearly half of the staff is satisfied with relationships at work. Adding 23,00% of those who have declared that they agree with this statement, but not entirely, there are 73,34% that have a positive opinion about this subject.

829

10. My working group is coherent and well organised? table (10.). Table 10 My working group is coherent and well organised? expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree comletely 10% 6,66% 6,67% 16,67% 60% Comment it is evident that in the firm Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi, people are organised in teams in order to distribute juices, to maintain machines, to change the packages of juices in hotels situated in Montenegrin coast, so as the fact that they are satisfied with their membership in the group. 11. It is of great importance to me, that my colleagues think the best of me? table (11.). Table 11 It is of great importance to me, that my colleagues think the best of me? expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 3,34% 13,33% 20% 33,33% 30%

Comment global impression would be that majority find this statement important but not crucial. 12. I am satisfied with the relationships between employees and the management in my firm? table (12.). Table 12 I am satisfied with the relationships between employees and the management in my firm? expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 13,34% 16,66% 3,34% 20% 46,66% Comment this relationship is evaluated positively which means that the staff is motivated by the management. 13. After work I socialize with my colleagues from work? table (13.). Table 13 After work I socialize with my colleagues from work? expressed in% Disagree completely Not agree Indifferent Agree Agree completely 33,34% 13,33% 13,33% 13,33% 26,67% Comment the majority does not socialize with others, but the percentage of those who does (26,67%) is not much lower than the majority (33,34%).

6. CONCLUTION
According to the research Satisfaction with interpersonal relationships in the firm Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi, the motivation at work, relationships between employees, the connectivity, and also the communication is in a very high level. Relations with others are the most important part of the human existence. After realising the nature of life, we percept everything as the learning process. Constantly the Earth is teaching us that there is a difference between the feeling of separation and the opposite: feeling of integrity. The relations are the last lecture we must learn before graduating. In most firms today nobody takes care about internal relationships. The negative attitudes concerning colleagues are present, which effects negatively on companies who are not aware of the importance of relationships and their fundamental role in the organisation. Every member of the staff is responsible, no matter the fact that most factors are imposed by others, and he should not allow himself to behave in a bad way. Here is an example how we should avoid someone who is gossiping about some other colleague. In ancient Greece, Socrates was knows as the great thinker and someone who appreciated the knowledge. One day, his acquaintance wanted to tell him something about their mutual friend. He asked him if his story was true and he answered he was not sure because he had just heard it. He also asked him whether his story is good or not, and he also answered not. He continued with the question whether that story was useful to him or not, and he answered negative. Therefore Socrates asked him: If that story is not true, and is not good for him, and is not useful for me, why would you tell me that at all?

830

According to this story, we must take care of what we say about each other, whether it is useful for someone or not. Damaging someones credibility does not lead anywhere. Good relationships in a firm are fundaments for a long-lasting prosperity. Therefore firm must aspire to achieve a healthy staff and good relationships. People who come from educated families, and who are also educated, they are more likely to have better relationships with others in a firm. Hypotheses: - Interpersonal relationship in the firm Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi are successful whether are considered those between younger and older, or those between the management and the executive staff. This hypothesis is correct because the young are hard-working, inventive, they fulfil their obligations at work, and also theirs ideas are examined and accepted. As a result, the affiliate Opoj juices Ltd. Herceg Novi functions in an excellent way. - Private relations with co-workers are not necessary in order to have good relationship at work. This hypothesis is correct, because the research has shown that besides having good relations at work these employees do not socialize privately. The reason for that could be the fact that that too much intimacy would lead to different relations at work Suggestions for the resolution: creating a new environment by creating a competitive atmosphere, by motivating certain sectors, by encouraging initiatives. In that way, their interpersonal relationships would not be endangered, but it would cause the constructive opposite opinions. With new ideas, the status of the firm, which has been working on the territory of Montenegrin coast for six years, would be improved.

7. REFERENCES:
[1] Adamovic, Z., Momcilovic, O., Nenadovic, S., Research Methodology, TEHDIS, Belgrade, 2002. [2] Adamovic, Z., Momcilovic, O, Savic, D., Valjarevic, S., Virtual Enterprise III (Re-engineering and knowledge management), TEHDIS, Belgrade, 2006. [3] Adamovic, Z., Momcilovic, O, Savic, D., Valjarevic, S., Factory future, TEHDIS, Belgrade, 2006. [4] Bazi, M., Momilovi, O., Ceran, K., Business negotiation and cultural identity of organization management, UNIVERSITY of ORADEA, FACULTY of MANAGEMENT and TECHNOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, IMT ORADEA - 2009, Felix Spa MAY 29th 30th, 2009. CD-ROM EDITION, VOLUME VIII (XVIII), 2009 ISSN 1583 0691, CNCSIS ACCREDITATION 2002-2004, "Clasa B+" 2007-2009 [5] Interni materijali preduzea, Opoj sokovi, Slovenija, 2010. [6] Interni materijali preduzea Opoj sokovi, d.o.o. Herceg Novi, 2010. [7] Jankovic, S., Momcilovic, O., Milosevic, S., Marketing - the easy way, Familet, Beograd, 2008. [8] Jankovic, S., Momcilovic, O., Martinovic, D. Management - time manager, "Familet, Beograd, 2008. [9] Leposava, G. N., Razvoj ljudskih resursa, AB Print, Novi Sad, 2005. [10] Marinkovi, V., Momilovi, O., Savremeni menadment & obrazovanje, TQM Centar Zrenajnin, 2010., ISBN 978-86-88065-08-5, COBISS.SR-ID 175485708, UDC 005, UDC 37 [11] Marinkovi, V., Momilovi, O., Menadment ljudskih resursa u kriznim situacijama, Ekonomski vidici, Drutvo ekonomista Beograda, Zlatibor, jun 2009. [12] Momcilovic, O., Specialist thesis: Application of Microsoft Excel - and 2000 in simulation research methods Monte Carlo, Technical Faculty Mihajlo Pupin, Zrenjanin, 1999. [13] Momcilovic, O., MA thesis: Determination of the reliability of multi-criteria analysis of technical grade point mixed Weibull distribution, Technical Faculty Mihajlo Pupin, Zrenjanin, 2003. [14] Momcilovic, O., Ph. D. thesis: Knowledge management and changes in the decisive factors of IT Education, Faculty of Management, Novi Sad, 2008. [15] Momcilovic, O., Dudic, M., Nikolic, M., Grbic. N., Kostic, I., Analysis of the processes of management and decision making of the active entrepreneurs as a strategic stability factor of companies, TTEM - Technics Technologies Education Management, BIH, Sarajevo, ISSN: 1840-1503, 2009. http://www.ttembih.org/ttem_2_2009.html (Thomson: ISI web of Science, Science Citation Index Expanded; Scopus, EBSCO: Education Research Index. Index Copernicus) [16] Momcilovic, O., Concept model "regional center for professional development of staff in the education" branicevo - podunavlje districts & judetul caras-severin, Analele Universitatii, Fascicola de Inginerie "Eftimie Murgu", Resita, Romania, ISSN: 1453-7394, 2009., http://www.anale_ing.uem.ro/ current_issue.html, (EBSCO Open Access Journals, RePEc: Research Papers in Economics, ProQuest, The International Consortium for the Advancement of Academic Publication: ICAAP) [17] Momcilovic, O., Rajakovic, J., Knowledge management as indispensable factor in the organizational changes, Analele Universitatii, Fascicola de Inginerie "Eftimie Murgu", Resita, Romania, ISSN: 14537394, 2009., http://www.anale_ing.uem.ro/current_issue.html, (EBSCO Open Access Journals, RePEc:

831

[18]

[19]

[20] [21] [22]

Research Papers in Economics, ProQuest, The International Consortium for the Advancement of Academic Publication: ICAAP) Momcilovic, O., Rajakovic, V., Transparency in risk management does mitigation and decision-making process of management, Analele Universitatii, Fascicola de Inginerie "Eftimie Murgu", Resita, Romania, ISSN: 1453-7394, 2009., http://www.anale_ing.uem.ro/current_issue.html, (EBSCO Open Access Journals, RePEc: Research Papers in Economics, ProQuest, The International Consortium for the Advancement of Academic Publication: ICAAP) Momilovi, O., Marinkovi, V., Knowledge management and intellectual capital as decisive factors in contemporary economy, UNIVERSITY of ORADEA, FACULTY of MANAGEMENT and TECHNOLOGICAL ENGINEERING, IMT ORADEA - 2009, Felix Spa MAY 29th 30th, 2009. CDROM EDITION, VOLUME VIII (XVIII), 2009 ISSN 1583 0691, CNCSIS ACCREDITATION 20022004, "Clasa B+" 2007-2009 Momilovi, O., Adamovi, ., Miloevi, S., Metodologija naunih istraivanja (aspekti sistemskih razmiljanja), Beograd, 2009, ISBN 978-86-912521-0-6, COBISS.SR-ID 157941772, UDC 001.891 Momilovi, O., Teorijska razmatranja o menadmentu znanja i pormena kao katalizatora savremenog obrazovanja, TQM Centar, Zrenjanin, 2010., ISBN 978-86-88065-06-1, COBISS.SR-ID 175488012, UDC 005.94 www.medjuljudskiodnosi.rs

832

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT MEASURING THE SUCCESS OF THE ENTERPRISE

Nevenka Niin1, Slobodan Niin2, ivomir Milenkovi3
1

e-mail: zicapress@yahoo.com

Summary: Where is the place of Finance in the organizational structure of the enterprise? Business ethics and social responsibility. Is the goal of maximizing stock prices consistent or inconsistent with high standards of ethical behavior and social responsibility? Agency relationships (agency conflict) stockholders versus managers and stockholders versus creditors. An enterprise could be considered successful if it corresponds to requirements and expectations of its stockholders. This indicates to a mix of common sense and competence. It is necessary to know the extent to which expectations of stockholder are satisfied: why, how and how much, or, ignoring this will result in a failure. Keywords: Financial management, Stockholders, Ratio numbers, Globalization Information technologies.

Good organization enables good business management. Good financial organization enables good financial management. The selection of the model of financial function organization depends on the size (it is directly related to the extent of financial function tasks) and complexity of the enterprise. According to the opinion of more than 10.000 managers, directors and analysts, the most successful companies have the best results through the following eight attributes: innovation, quality of management, talent of employees, quality of products and services, values of long-term investments, financial stability and using the corporations funds. The companies are focused on the use of the technology for reduction of costs, supplies and acceleration of the delivery of product. All the important business decisions have financial implications and they are made by the teams that are involved in finances, marketing, human resources, information technologies, production, accounting and legal department.

1. GOALS AND ACHIEVEMENTS OF THE CORPORATION

An enterprise is successful if it satisfies the needs and expectations of its stockholders [14]. This indicates to a mix of common sense and the competence. It is necessary to know the extent to which the expectations of stakeholders are satisfied: why, how and how much, or, ignoring this will result in a failure. Shareholders are the owners of corporations and they aim at achieving a good profit with no risk. In most cases, the shareholders choose the director who hires managers to run the corporation. Since managers work for the shareholders, they work on increasing the shareholder value. The main goal of management should be maximization of stockholder value i.e. the maximization of the enterprises stock price. In some cases, the managers that make the decisions are interested in personal satisfaction and comfort of the employees, and in the benefit of community and society. Maximization of share price is the essential goal in most corporations. Increasing the stock price and social amenities

Is it good or bad for the society that a company tries to maximize the stock price? It is mostly good. Some of the reasons are: the owners of shares are the society, for the welfare of customers maximization requires efficient, cheap tasks that produce the high quality of goods and services at minimum possible price, and for the welfare of

833

the employees mostly companies that successfully increase the stock price, grow and receive more workers, which helps the society. When financial management appeared as a separate field of science in the early 1900s, when it was emphasized due to the formation of new companies, different companies and different types of insurance companies, it has helped to increase the capital. Maximization of value represents the emphasis in 21st century. There are two trends present: business globalization and increased representation of informational technologies. Both trends provide new and exciting chances for the companies to increase their profitability and reduce risks. These factors lead to the increase of competitiveness and new risks. Is the maximization of share value in compliance or not with the high standards of ethical behavior and social responsibility? It mostly is. Many companies that have nurtured the social responsibility have created big values for their founders, and many other that were immoral have gone bankrupt. Business ethics in Websters dictionary, the word ethics is defined as principles of conduct or moral behavior. Business ethics can be viewed as the attitude of a company and its behavior toward the employees, customers, community and shareholders. High standards of ethical behavior require that a company equally treats everyone who cooperates with it correctly and fairly. Companys commitment to business ethics can be measured with the tendencies of the company and its employees to study the laws and regulations that refer to the safety and high quality of the product, fair relations with employees, correct marketing and sale policy, social activity, such as CHASE BANK has concluded that ethical behavior has increased the profitability, because it has helped to: a) avoid certain costs, b) build public trust, c) attract the customers who respect and support their policy, d) attract and keep good workers. Social responsibility whether the work should function only because the best interests of shareholders, or the companies are also responsible for the welfare of their employees, customers and environment in which they function? Companies have the responsibility to provide the environment for safe work and to produce safe and correct products. Socially responsible actions cost, and there are not many companies that voluntarily undertake such actions, i.e. costs. If an action that should be undertaken costs much and represents a big expenditure, it should be put to a vote, it much better than it being your responsibility.

2. AGENCY RELATIONS (CONFLICTS)

Owners of agencies versus managers and stockholders versus creditors

Managers and stockholders make business decisions together. Managers can, all by themselves, accomplish their personal goals that are against the maximization of shares and the theory of agency is also facing with such potential conflicts of interest. Agency relations appear every time when one or more individuals hires some other individual or organization called the agent to perform a service and also when they delegate the authorities to the agent who makes the decision. The basic agency relations are between shareholders and managers and between shareholders and creditors. Agency conflicts I (shareholders versus managers)

Potential problem for the agency appears when the companys manager owns less than 100% of basic shares. If a single company is managed by its founder, owner-manager will most certainly work on increasing personal benefit and comfort. However, when a founder-manager sells the shares of somebody else, there are certain conflicts of interest. At this point, the owner-manager can decide to lead a more relaxed life, and not work so much on maximization of shareholders profit. In the majority of big corporations, the potential agency conflicts are very important because the managers of those companies mostly have only a small percentage of shares. Main objective of some managers is maximization of the size of those companies. By establishing the large fastgrowing companies, the managers can increase the work security, increase personal power, status and income and create more opportunities for lower and mid-level managers. Possible morally risky problems occur when agents undertake the actions that are not monitored in their own personal gain, and these problems appear because it is impossible for the shareholders to monitor all the managerial actions. In order to reduce the agency conflicts and morally risky problems, the shareholders must have the costs of agencies that include all the shareholder costs, in order to encourage the managers to increase the share price of the companies rather than to

834

work for their own personal interests. Some of the specific mechanisms that are used to motivate the managers to work for the best interests of shareholders are: a) Managerial compensation plan naturally, the managers need to be rewarded, and the reward needs to meet two requirements: to attract and keep the managers and to connect the activities of a manager with the interests of shareholders, who are the most interested in maximization of share value. For an older manager, the typical reward consists of 3 parts (although there are various forms of reward in different companies): determined annual fee that needs to satisfy the costs of living, the cash or banks shares that are paid at the end of a year and depend on companys profitability during the year, the possibility of purchasing the shares, by which we can reward the manager for long-term efficiency. Managers are more focused on the maximization of the share price, if they are major shareholders, as well. A relatively new measure of managerial efficiency is EVA (economic value added). It is increasingly being used in the companies in order to connect the reward for the manager with maximization of shareholders gain. EVA represents a method for measuring the true profitability of the company. b) Direct intervention by the shareholder in previous years, the majority of shares were the property of an individual, and now the majority is in hands of institutional institutions, such as: insurance companies, pension funds and mutual funds. Using the money, institutional managers can apply their big influence to the majority of the activities and actions of the company. Firstly, they can talk to management of the company and suggest the ways in which the business should be run. In fact, they are acting as lobbyists for the stock body. Secondly, any shareholder who owns at least 1.000 $ of the companys shares in one year will sponsor the proposal that needs to be put to a vote at the annual meeting of shareholders, even if the proposal is rejected by the management. c) Threats to lay-off not so long ago, this option was very difficult to realize. Such a situation existed because the management control of the voting mechanisms was so strong, that it was almost impossible for the shareholders to obtain the votes they needed. However, the situation is now changing. In Baltimore Bancop, the shareholders have elected new directors that won all 6 seats on the board. Then, the board removed the general director from power, and a new manager team was appointed. Agency conflicts II (shareholders versus creditors)

Creditors lay claim to part of earnings of the company that is intended for taxes, interests, and the most important-for debts, and also if it comes to bankruptcy. Through the managers, shareholders have the control of the decisions that influence the companys risks, its property, there are expectations that refer to risk of the future increase in property, the existing structures of companys capital (amount of debt that is used for financing), expectations that refer to decisions on the future capital structure. They are the main determinants of risk in the flow of the companys money. Lets suppose that shareholders through management influence the company to sell the products and invest in big and new project, which is by far more risky than the previous one. That will result in the increase of the required companys return, which will cause the fall of the value of unreturned debt. Managers need to know what requires the attention, and according to that, what needs to be measured. Often, the companies are focused on measuring the factors that can be rapidly and easily measured. Those are usually the inputs, resources and efficiencies as results, while the effectiveness is more difficult to measure. Satisfying the needs and expectations of the key stakeholders is critical for a long-term prosperity. All the qualitative indicators influence the long-term financial results. It is necessary to look for the explanations when the results are disappointing or below a desired level. The attention is rapidly focused on the failure, which is not always the case with success. It is not unusual for the managers to consider success as the result of their own personal skills and brilliance. In reality, the success can be based on the happiness and absence of the stronger competitor. These advantages are short-term ones. Success can very quickly turn into failure. It is necessary to face the reality. The companies love to present the results as absolute numbers or profits, and the media report emphasizing each growth. Absolute growth in this form can be used to cover the real performances. Profitability, for example, is more important than the profit for understanding how the enterprise operates. Based on his research, Meyer [6] considers that managers, who are faced with the selection of proper measures, primarily need to understand the basic differences between financial and non-financial measures (see Table 1). In addition, he points out to two potential problems when using qualitative indicators: their significance is reduced by time and thus they lose the ability to distinguish good and bad performances and it is important to look for internally created criteria in the light of external values. There are five rules for combining financial and non-financial measures: 1) there should be at least three to five measures for monitoring the progress towards strategic objectives, 2) the presence of both types of indicators, 3) realistic possibilities for their improvement, 4)

835

there should exist the control of measurement, 5) the existence of a clear connection between non-financial performances and financial results. Table 1: Basic differences between financial and non-financial measures Source: Meyer (1996), p. 28. Financial measures Non-financial measures Several Many, their number has rapidly increased Standardized (by accounting conventions) Anarchic non-standardized Closely related usually mutual parts (financial ratio Not related numbers) Several innovations Unlimited inventiveness Limited pressure for number increase Led by internal, non-financial, functional interests and external initiatives (e.g. ISO 9000) Direct connection to financial performances Connection with / influence on financial performances requires statistical records Difference between good and bad performances is the Tendency to eventually lose the ability to differentiate basis good and bad performances Measuring does not completely demonstrate how an organization functions, the process of informing and managing the change is permanent and incremental, and it creates a new competitive paradigm. Measurement system should be flexible and able to manage difficult and easy questions. The essential question when designing measurement system is What should be measured? In developing the performance measurement system we can distinguish three main phases [7]: 1)1850-1925 development of cost and accounting management, 2)1974-1992 development of multidimensional analytic frameworks for performance measurement, 3)1992-2000 development of strategic maps, business models or diagrams of cause and effect. During the first phase, the basic accounting techniques have appeared. The work started to be paid per hour, and not per piece, as it was before. The first financial ratio numbers and budget control procedures were developed in DuPoint and General Motors, in the beginning of 20th century. Pyramid of financial ratios, introduced in DuPoint, had an extremely hierarchical structure and it connected the measures at different organizational levels. This analytical framework is relatively sophisticated method for the analysis of financial performances, which also exists today. The standards for production and costs, which enabled the comparison of enterprises performances, were introduced. The systems attempted to motivate the sales departments to increase their profits from sale, monitor the changes of demand, coordinate the sale, production, supply, and foresee the monetary flows. The key ratio numbers for measuring the success of investments and decision-making would be the income from the used capital. Changes in the environment caused the need for development of new performance measurement systems. Reduction of producers power and trade barriers has opened the markets to the global competition, which requires external focus of the performance measurement system. Moving from the capital to the society of knowledge and rapid changes in the supply chain has created three important stakeholders: society, employees and suppliers. The changes have conditioned the expansion of measurement system in order to include the requirements of the increased number of stakeholder. Introducing indicators for stakeholder value, economic profits, intellectual capital, satisfaction of consumers and employees, intangible assets and internal operations. The late 1980s were marked by the development of non-financial indicators as well as the development of framework for measuring multiple needs of stakeholders. Only efficient and effective organization will grow and be prosperous. Effective but inefficient business will survive, but the results will be below the expected, because the resources are being wasted. Efficient but ineffective enterprises will experience the decline of performance, because they do not satisfy the expectations of stakeholders simply, the things they do are wrong, but they are properly done. In the development of multi-dimensional frameworks for performance measurement, it is important to mention the Maltzs [8] research. He used the achievements of relevant disciplines: cooperative entrepreneurship, strategy, process and development of products, marketing and finances. Analytic framework has included five dimensions: financial, market/consumers, process, development of employees skills and future. The empirical part of the research has shown that the success of enterprise is multi-dimensional and that it cannot be defined by limited number of variables. However, there are 12 basic indicators that can be applied to various types of enterprises. As a result of many years of research, on the sample of 12 companies, Kaplan and Norton [9] introduce analytical framework called Balanced Scorecards, according to which, mission and strategic goals of an enterprise can be turned into a set of performance indicators [10].

836

Kennerley and Neely [11] listed the following deficiencies of Balanced Scorecards: Lack of competitive dimensions, Failure in recognizing the aspects of human resources and supplier performances and There is no specification of performance dimensions that determine the success.

Since the concept of Balanced Scorecards, it has been more than ten years, and meanwhile, there were many changes that have influenced the performances of enterprise. The new trend in performance measurement is a concept of corporate performance management [12]. Characteristics of this approach and it comparison with traditional and balanced measurement is shown in the Table 2. Table 2: comparative review of approach and changes in performance measurement of an enterprise Source: Bourne et al (2003), p. 20. Traditional performance Balanced performance Enterprise performance Changes in measurement measurement management Internally and externally Focused on the needs of Focus Internally focused focused relevant stakeholders Emphasis on assumptions and relations between Dimensions One dimension Multi-dimensional dimensions: Empirical testing of assumptions and strategic maps Innovations and learning Improving skills Drivers Costs through resource development Financial and nonComparative external Objectives Financial objectives financial objectives and competitive Maintain performance improvement through Desired benefits Costs control Strategically oriented focusing on business communication processes improvement There are three basic approaches to enterprise performance measurement: 1) Financial results for a long time, it measurement is used for assessment of relative success and prosperity of business. This includes ratio numbers, such as: capital income, income from investing in funds, earnings per share, share price, earnings ratio. Usually, the share price is compared with corresponding average of industrial branch. In is necessary to point out to two things. Firstly, although analysts always emphasize the profitability, the ratio of profit before and after the taxation and sales, capital incomes, still, the increase or decrease of incomes and profits are in the focus. Secondly, the share price is reflected on the future expectations and strategic leader can convince the public that better times will come. 2) Satisfaction of stakeholders a holistic approach incorporates the interests of all the stakeholders within and outside of the organization. This corresponds to the idea of Balance Scorecard by Kaplan and Norton. 3) Reputation of the enterprise large profits and income statements are very important, but they do not have to mean that the enterprise has a reputation. The most extensive research of the reputation of enterprise is conducted by Fortune in USA. About 10.000 managers and directors from 345 enterprises evaluate their rivals according to specific criteria. These criteria are: management quality, financial results, value of long-term investments, quality of products and services, ability of discovering, developing and keeping talents, innovation ability, management quality and responsibility towards the society and environment. In terms in which the knowledge, as the main factor of production, becomes obsolete in a few years, only those enterprises that are able to continuously create and apply new knowledge will survive. These enterprises maintain the competitiveness through innovation, creativity and high organizational capacity to work. Considering that in the age of knowledge the real competitive advantage of organizations is their ability to learn faster than their competitors, to collect and share the knowledge and keep increasing it [13], than the appearance of a new organizational concept organization that is still learning (organization of knowledge) seems logical.

837

3. CONCLUSION
A specific form of organization of the financial function in the enterprise is determined by a series of internal factors and the factors from environment that may have a decisive impact on the course of organization and execution of the tasks of financial function. Each form of financial function organization, which enables efficient management of finances in the enterprise and thus the rational management of overall business system, is good. The task of financial function is to ensure proper financial policy, research of the plans, financial analysis, control, as well as financial information. Financial function needs to ensure the efficient financial processes in order to achieve the main financial goals of the enterprise. In terms in which the knowledge, as the main factor of production, becomes obsolete in a few years, only those enterprises capable to continuously create and apply new knowledge will survive. These enterprises maintain their competitiveness through innovation, creativity and high organizational capacity to work. Considering that in the age of knowledge the real competitive advantage of organizations is their ability to learn faster than their competitors, to collect and share the knowledge and keep increasing it, than the appearance of a new organizational concept organization that is still learning (organization of knowledge) seems logical.

REFERENCES [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]

Niin N., Paspalj M. (2009), Ekonomija, Beogradska poslovna kola, Beograd Niin N. (2009), Mikroekonomija, Panevropski univeritet Apeiron, Banja Luka Niin N. (2008), Makroekonomija, Panevropski univerzitet Apeiron, Banja Luka Eugene F. Michael C. Ehrhardt (2002), Financial management, Theory and Practie, 10th Edition Lui I. (2004), Finansije,Fakultet za menadment, Novi Sad. Meyer M.W. (1996), The secrets that lay behind improved corporate performance, Financial Times Bourne M., Wilcox M. (2003), Predicting performance, Management Decision, 41/8 Maltz A.C. (2000), Defining and Measuring Organizational Success: A Multi-dimensional Framework, doctorate dissertation, Stevens Institute of Technology [9] Kaplan R.S., Norton D.P. (1992), The Balanced Scorecards-measures that drive performance, Harvard Business Review [10] Marr B.,Schiuma G. (2003), Business performance measurement-past, present and future, Management Decision, 41/8 [11] Kennerly M. , Neely A. (2000), Performance measurement framework a review, Proceedings of Performance Measurement 2000; Past Present and Future Conference, Robinson College, Cambridge [12] Bourne M., Franco M., Wilkes J. (2003), Corporate performance management, Measuring Business Excellence, Vol.7. No.3 [13] Senge P. (2003), Peta disciplina: Umee i praksa organizacije, Adies MC, Novi Sad [14] Stockholders are individuals or groups interested for the success of the enterprise. They may influence or be influenced by the organization. They are classified in three groups: 1) internal (owners, decisionmakers, unions and employees), 2) stakeholders that appear in the market (buyers, suppliers, competitors) and 3) external (Government, financial institutions, political groups, trade unions). According to Milievi, V. (1997): Strategijsko i poslovno planiranje, FON, Beograd, str. 67-68.

838

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DEVELOPMENT OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP MODEL AND ITS INFLUENCE ON QUALITY IMPROVEMENT

Sran Nikezi, Mirsada Badic, Rade Biocanin, Milutin Matic
Public University in Novi Pazar, Department for law and economics, Novi Pazar, SERBIA, e-mail: srdjan_nikezic@yahoo.com

Summary: In the business world today, quality is one of the most important factors for survival and development of companies. Important technological changes and global tendencies, especially during the last decade of the previous century, point toward the problem of leading companies based on the philosophy of Total Quality Management (TQM). During the implementation process of TQM, the key ingredient is entrepreneurship, which initiates changes and creates conditions for improved products and service quality. Besides, entrepreneurship initiates changes and creates conditions for improved market positions of companies, which face ever increasing domestic and foreign competition. This text offers solution for these dilemmas, presenting a new conceptual approach which explains explains basic contact between entrepreneurial and quality. The conceptual approach explains the importance of using appropriate entrepreneurship styles during different phases of the quality implementation process. Keywords: Entrepreneur, TQM, Small and Medium Companies, Development of National Economics

1. INTRODUCTION
The real development of natzional economies is based upon several factors, out of which kez role play natural potentials, development of human resources, technologz base and financial possibilities own and accumulated with foreign loans and credits. Again, efficient economic development implicates well grounded and developed system of entrepreneurial forms of economic activities organization, supported by institutional assumptions that means the following the basis for economic development are neither only nor prevalently big companies, with great capital and large number of employees, but various entrepreneurial forms, of small and medium size, economically efficient and flexible in period of crisis and global pressures due to reduction of economic activities and disturbances on financial markets. For transitional countries of the key importance is creation of institutional prerequisites for development of entrepreneurial models of doing business and their implementation in the conditions of fall in economic activities, high unemployment and lack of certain capital for investment needs and introduction of equality system in order to have better position on the market and strengthening of competitive advantages.

2. IMPORTANCE OF SMALL AND MEDIUM COMPANIES FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF ENTREPRENEURIAL MODEL
Creation of sustainable conditions for the development of entrepreneurial model of doing business is not easy. Of total 23 million companies and 100 million employers in European Union are working label in small and medium companies. In USA there are 25 million workers in small and medium companies, and in Japan there are 5 million workers in small and medium companies. In March 2000 during the European Union government meetings in Lisbon, it has been said that small and medium companies are the main subject of success in world industry until 2010. It is economy with dominant role of big companies, public enterprises that are not efficient enough, with, most often, outdated technologies and large number of employees, especially on less productive positions, in administration and services. Overall economic system was based upon concentration of

839

production factors, in spite of obvious defects that were approved during certain period of time through initiation of economy of scale, and less variety, quality and rational use of available resources. Therefore many countries in transition strived to reach more efficient system of economy through creation conditions for development of entrepreneurial forms in various economic sectors. Accordingly, Serbia is not an exception, in spite of the fact that transitional processes here had more controversies and misunderstandings. Hence, we could say that establishment of entrepreneurial model in our economy is lacking behind to some extent and reaching the turning point. In order to assure more intense economic development of Serbia it is necessary to: a) develop entrepreneurial potentials through more rational development and selection of human resources, b) revise the privatization process, c) erect adequate legislative and d) improvement in management knowledge and working label in small and medium companies. -Serbia has changed the regulations that regulate the matter of transformation and change in property structure. But, most of the companies were privatized through tenders and auctions. Some of the companies change their owner without compensation, or for symbolical one, cheap. Others were ruined after the privatization, because new owners only wanted to use available land and turn it into construction land, and rent the buildings and sell the existing equipment and machinery. Today many previous workers are not working, and strikes are everyday events. Defected privatization brought nothing good, except for those that divided among them national welfare and destroyed the existing economic system in the unseen manner, with the blessing from the state. Breaks of privatizations nowadays neither can improve nor significantly change the situation. The old system is irreversibly ruined, and the new one is not created. Therefore, it is hard to say today what our economy resembles of, what is its dominant characteristic and what are its prospective. Big economic systems are not present in there, as well as dominant entrepreneurial forms. It is absolutely devastated and subjected to the lobby impacts and interests. Trade is dominant here, and not the manufacture. It is well known that from the beginning of the privatization process 2550 companies got new owners, 435 purchasing agreements were dissolved and 428 criminal applications were submitted, and finally, the change of owners was in the function of purchase in order to sell and sucking out the money from the companies that were deliberately pushed towards bankruptcy by new owners [1, p. 20]. Withal, according to the one conducted pool among entrepreneurs in Serbia, badly performed privatization is on the fifth position among the reasons for obvious weakness of Serbian economy, out of 10 reasons, with 10.08% [2, p. 30]. On the first three positions are sanctions, inadequate economic policy of the Government of Serbia and break of the former Yugoslavia (13.5%, 13.17%, 10.41%), and the existence of monopolies 11.22% [2, p. 30]. -Creation of adequate legislative means to have such regulations that induce and support the development of entrepreneurial companies. These are regulations that enable for enterprises to gain some financial resources (capital) under the lower prices than market prices, to use some privileges in the phase of the establishment and privileges during reinvesting into their own development. Certain financial institutions, for examples banks, especially foreign ones, are not interested in such industry. They estimate the efficiency of the investment only through the level of interest rate and the possibility to return their investment. But, more important role could have investment funds that should receive the loan from the state, or NNP and that invest one RSD on every three borrowed. In such manner, the state would, through the legislative, purposely direct economic development and help rational concentration of capital in certain entrepreneurial forms, that would even in the initial phases of transition, to some extent, compensate the loss of big companies and accelerate the changes of overall economic surrounding and creation the conditions for the development of the new technologies and market competitiveness. The existing legislative is not good. It does not recognize the importance of institutional redirecting of capital from big towards small companies, and the role of funds in financing the development of smaller, efficient enterprises and the significance of economic incentives to the more priority, strategically important subjects. The concept of distribution of great funds through NIP, politically polyvalent, does not give the results and is more in the role of demonstration of state power and impact. Therefore, institutional changes are more that urgent, in order to save whatever is possible. -The third key assumption for the development of entrepreneurial model means the establishment and development of entrepreneurial skills of the individuals, and various social groups. It is delicate problem of human resources development in the conditions where there are not, or are very weak foundations for real demonstration of entrepreneurship and the predisposition for private initiative and business. It is, simply, the lack of domination of entrepreneurial values and creation of management genius according to the strange opinions and role models, characteristic for the processes of the first accumulation of capital. The real changes are related to the change of the existing culture and pattern of behavior, return of the wealth accumulated over night, better education, practice, etc, and media focus towards affirmation of capable, meritorious, modest and talented people, and not the virtual values, rudeness and primitiveness. The goal is to create capable leadership that is up to the requests of modern doing business and competitive market. (According to the previously demonstrated pool the management is the eighth reason for weakness of the economy, with 9.11% of votes) [2, p. 30].

840

Unique definition of European Union is very important, because it is used for a base in making legislative decisions in European Union. Definition of small business in European Union, 1996 says: Small company hires between 10 and 49 people or it has total gain of 11 million DM- all companies which gain is more or less than 11 million, and less than 10 and more than 49 hired people are micro, large or medium companies and the companies with more than 500 hired people are seen as a large companies. Table1: Definition of World Bank Micro Small NUMBER OF EMPLOYERS 10 50 TOTAL TURNOVER 0,1 MIL 3 MIL EURO EURO TOTAL ACTIV 0,1 MIL 3 MIL EURO EURO Medium 300 15 MIL EURO 15 MIL EURO

Creation of more adequate institutional bases would lead to the establishment of entrepreneurial model of doing business, as realistic basis for higher economic growth rate and social progress. On such conceptual bases, withal, are developed economies of USA, Japan, Great Britain, India, Israel, etc. Thanks to the entrepreneurial model of doing business in USA are founded 500 000 small companies and achieved leadership role in the world economy. Small companies compensated the loss of jobs in big corporations and created over 16 million of new jobs [2, p. 93-100]. The best example is the development of efficient companies in software industry that cover with its production over 70% of software market in USA. The similar situation is also in some other countries. 3. THE STRUCTURE OF SMALL AND MEDIUM COMPANIES IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP MODEL IN REPUBLIC OF SERBIA In the structure of enterprises are incorporated small, and most of medium companies. On the following table is presented the number, structure of the companies, and structure of employees according to the size of the company [4]. Table 2: Number and structure of employees according to the size of the company Size of the company Number of Number of Year companies employees Small 73.097 338.906 2004. Medium 2.121 264.535 Large 667 543.392 Small 73.549 386.296 Medium 2.412 253.898 2006. Large 677 468.514 Small 88.389 386.005 Medium 3.520 260.499 2008. Large 925 472.267 Source: F.N. National Bank of Serbia Direction for register and collection, 2004. From this table we could see the significant growth in the number of companies between 2004. and 2008., small, medium as well as big organizations. In the observed period is how the tendency of decreasing the number of employees, to the greater extent in large companies compared to small and medium companies. Therefore, large companies employ less than 50% of the total number of employees. In small companies, that make for 95.1%, are employed 386 000 employees, according to the statistical data from business 2008. year. In large organization were employed around 472 000 employees, in the same period in 2008. Small and medium companies have an important role in Serbian economy (Government of Republic of Serbia Development Strategy for competitive and innovative SMEs for the period 2008-2013). In the period between 2004. and 2007. in them were opened around 149 000 new jobs; that participate in the market with 67.7%, in gross domestic product with 36%, in gross value added with 58.3%, in profitability with 38.6% and productivity; in import with 50.2%, export 64% and investments into non financial sector with around 51.2%. Small and medium enterprises play key role in employment, especially long term, restructuring of the economy, its innovation growth and adjusting to the new technological request in strengthening of competitive capacities of

841

the economy, covenant of products with market needs, especially with requests of consumers that want to satisfy their needs fully, with various and more quality products, according to aspirations and purchasing power. With the participation of 99% of small and medium companies Serbia is approaching to the structure of market economy, typical for European Union. According to the available data in our economy are dominant small companies (micro) with the participation of 78%, and in them private companies with participation of 88% in total number of economy entities. The greatest numbers of small and medium companies are in the service sector, trade and services of around 50%, and in processing industry around 20%. In overall structure the number of employees increased for around 4% [5]. Table 3: Development of the sector of SMEs in the period between 2004. And 2007. Category Number of SMEs Number of employees Total turnover (in billion of RSD) GAV of SME sector (in billion of RSD) 2004. 285.139 752.740 2.496,8 357 2005. 276.695 810.862 2.771,5 467 2006. 268.515 870.979 3.588,5 592 2007. 296.086 906.669 4.106,8 720

Value of export of SME (in billion of RSD) Export growth rate (in %) Value of import of SME (in billion of RSD) Import growth rate (in %) Deficit in foreign trade (in billion of RSD) Cover of import-export, (in %) Profit of SMEs, (in billions of RSD) Value of profitability, (in %) Exploring and development (in %) Total number of companies (in %) Total employment (in %) Turnover (in %) GDP (in %)

115

182 41,2

227 16,1 653 21,2 425,8 277,9 38,6 5,5 99,8 65,5 67,6 58,3 50,3

391

503 14,2

276,3

320,7 165,6 38,9 99,8 63,1 67,5 56,9 51,2

99,7 54,7 68,2 51,8

99,7 59,0 65,5 54,1

Source: RDB Report on SME sector for the observed years On the table 2. Is presented the development level of SME sector in period between 2004. And 2007. According to the periods, in 2004. The number of SMEs was 285 139, 2005. It was 276 695, 2006. Was 268 515 and 2007. Was 296 086. In spite of the domination in the total number of companies and employees SMEs posses only 1/3 of the total capital in the economy, more precisely 32%, which demonstrates that they are in the phase of serious expansion, i.e. development? The real progress of SME is possible to track through the movement of certain economic indicators for the period between 2001. and 2006. [6], table no. 3. Table 4: Basic indicators of economic movements for SMEs (growth rates, in %) 2001. 2002. 2003. 2004. 2005. 2006. 2001-06. GDP, real growth 4,8 4,2 2,5 8,4 6,2 5,7 5,3 Retail prices 40,7 14,8 7,8 13,7 17,7 6,6 16,4 Number of employees 0,2 -1,7 -1,2 0,5 0,9 -1,9 -0,5 Net salaries, real growth 16,5 29,9 13,6 10,1 6,4 11,4 14,4 Labor productivity 4,6 6,0 3,7 7,9 5,3 7,8 5,8

842

Indicators of economic movements for SMEs are the result of general economic conditions and economic activities for observed periods. In 2006. are acquired certain results in dynamical economic growth, macro economical stability, inflow of foreign investments, strengthening of reserves in foreign currency, but were demonstrated certain difficulties, like unemployment, large deficit in foreign trade and growth of salaries over productivity.

4. DEVELOPMENT POLITICS OF SME IN SERBIA

Unlike USA and EU, Japan and countries of southeastern Asia (South Korea, Hong Kong, Singapour) have developed special, third classification of small and medium companies. Importance is on quality of goods and flexibility of goods. By the law from 1963 SME in industry and mining industry in Japan hires less than 300 workers, and they are managing with 5 milion dollars. The governmant of Japan and regional economy chamber encourage development of SME , they do not deal with them individually, they deal with them via their associations. Because of that they are fully integrated in Japanese economy. Small and medium entreprises have the key role in economic development and social prtogress in general. Regarding this, it is neccessary to create conditions and provide support to this segment of the economy, in order to develop their potentials and use available economic resources. In the selection of strategy for development we should start from the existing status: number of companies, number of employees, overall turnover that they achieve and gross value added that they create. On the graph number 1 is presented the structure, employment and economic effects [7]. From the graph it is obvious that micro companies are dominant regarding the participation inthe number of employees, turnover and gross value added, etc.

100% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0%

0,9 3,3

19,6

16,7

18,3

95,6

14,7 31,2

20 30,9

16,2 23,7

Broj preduze a

Broj zaposlenih

Ukupan promet

Bruto dodata vrednost

Figure 1: Structure of SME sector in the Republic of Serbia According to the data we could conclude that are neccessary certain changes towards strengthening of the economic position of SMEs, their competitiveness and technical and technological qualification. In this sense it is neccessary to: 1)establish larger number of SMEs; 2) strengthen their position in the initial phases of development; 3) provide more financial resources for their support, under favorable conditions; 4) ajust taxation policy and 5) more significantly support export oriented companies. In order to implement the strategy of strengthening of SMEs it is necessary to: 1) improve institutional frameworks, 2) remove the effects of inadequate privatization, 3) financially support the development of SMEs, through grants, as well as through forming real investment funds, without state interference and its bureaucracy, 4) separate local self government from economical millieus and their impact reduce to efficient administering in establishment and initiation of economic activities, and 5) develop the concept of mutual help between public and private sector. Such measures can strengthen strategic prospectives of SMEs and facilitate painful transitional processes of our economy.

843

5. ENTREPRENEURIAL AND TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT (TQM)

Introduction of quality system is important step in provision of sustainable development of entrepreneurial forms, whise development is intensified in transitional conditions of doing business. Entrepreneurial forms, basically, in transitional conditions are faced with several problems, with the problem of selection of development program (definition of vision and mission), provision of financial resources and overcoming of various institutional obstacles, that are derived from unprepared regulations and real market mechanisms, based on the institutes of developed markets. Within these problems entrepreneurs are faced with the question of standardization of jobs and definition of responsibilities for creation of high quality offer in the area of services or production of some goods. In the very start they have the advantage compared to big corporations and their alliances. Overall, it is facilitated marketing role because it is shorter path from the identification of market requests, that is needs for certain conditions or products, and market needs regarding quantities, prices and terms of delivery. Besides, is is easier to incorporate the requests of consumers through over looking the purchasing relations and revision of some of the market requests, and accept some of the demands from consumers and inform on it the employees in the company, that can react quick and efficient, without middle men and additional instructions. Entrepreneurial forms have more suitable organizational srtructure, concept of linking jobs and tasks, concept for linking some of the activities and their directing towards defined goals and transfering the right to make decision, and partly the responsibility to the individual and specialized teams. Entrepreneurial forms are more suitable for the requests of quality systems due to the following reasons: a) their structure is simple, and the system of communication less difuse compared to the large forms, i.e. companies; b) system of responsibility is transparent and adapted to the character of jobs performed and working places; c) pattern for information is less formal, more immediate, opened and based on communications and explanations, rarely is written format, which defines the number of documents and their rational use; d) employees are wider educated, so the rotation within organization is possible and desirable, without change in rules, instructions or directives; e) chain of control is shorter, because organizations are more shallow, so the directions are circulating faster and reach operatives, so the integral organization is kept under continuel monitoring and f) it is more obvious the link between work and effect, success and difficulties in order to achieve that. Beside the positive tendencies, in development of SME are not enough efficiency which we can see in non profitable buissnes. Because of that the loss od SMW is higer for 20 % of acomplished net earnings, and only small companiesas we can see done buisness as a whole. Absence of long therm sources has a bad impact on on investment in modern equipment and refreshing technology. What is characteristic for SME is that they get much harder the long term financial sources and with the weak property situation, entering the financial market without help of state funds is very hard. Finaly, entrepreneurial forms have good capacities, better than large companies, for identification of the results and creation of stimulative system for payments, introduction of rewards and bonuses, certain beneficies in achievements and stregthening so called delegated leadership of employees. If we look from that angle undoubtedly is that entrepreneurial forms are favorable model for implementation of the quality system and application of certain leadership styles, because they enable the following: a) members of the organization can observe easier where are they and where are they going, b) they can be included and involved easier in processes of introduction and improvement of quality system, c) they could dedicate to the capability for further independent activities in new conditions and other organizational forms [8, p. 164-168]

6. CONCLUSION
SMEs have great role and importance for the development of Serbian economy, employment and creation of efficient and flexible sector, especially in the stituation of creation objective market postulates and making easier transitional processes, that are preswent on several levels and with various consequences. SMEs induce dynamic economic development and enable to the economics and local economies to successfully operate in the restructuring period for big systems and transition to model of doing business, primarily, based on the concept organization of economic life through smaller, innovative entrepreneurial forms, that are flexible, innovative and based on capabilities of the individual, or smaller teams, to observe quickly rational business options, take over the risks and responsibility for good business.

844

In order to induce development of small and medium entreprises successfully it is necessary to create adequate regulatory systems, asumptions and developed market system suitable for development of thic economic segment. It is necessary to have adequate economic policy and incentive measures for the implementation of investment enterprise, focused to development of this segment of the economy. Development of small and medium entreprises up to now, their number, realized income, number of employees and contribution to economic development justify mentioned needs. Beside, stregthening of entrepreneurial economy in Serbia is coherent with the efforts from EU to dedicate maximal attention to the development of SMEs and with enacting Act on small companies introduce rules and principles for actions in this area. It is compatibile with the requests from quality system to provide sustainable development of companies, improve the quality and improve market position and satisfy the needs and demands from consumers better. Entrepreneurial forms are suitable framework for implementation of quality system.

REFERENCES
[1] Economist, no. 495, 13-19.November, 2009. [2] Economist no. 497, 20.November, 2009. [3] Harvard Business Review, 2000. [4] F.N. National Bank of Serbia Direction for register and collection, year 2004. [5] Ministry of economy: Bureau for the development of the Republic of Serbia and entrepreneurship, Belgrade, 2005. [6] Bureau for the development of the Republic of Serbia Report on SMEs for some business years [7] Government of Republic of Serbia, Strategy for the development of competitive and innovative small and medium entreprises for the period 2008 2013. [8] Nikola Stefanovi, Leadership and quality, Faculty of mechanical engineering in Kragujevac, 2007.

845

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

REENGINEERING AS AN EFFICIENT SOLUTION TO REDESIGN ACTIVITIES AND PROCESSES OF AN ENTERPRISE

2

Logistics Training Center of Serbian Army, Kruevac, SERBIA, e-maill: srboljub.nikolic@yahoo.com C&C-consultant, bankruptcz proceedings and consultings, Ni, SERBIA, e-maill: sekretarcc@yahoo.com 3 Faculty of Economics, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: radomirovicj@jahoo.com

Srboljub T. Nikoli1, Zoran Cvetkovi2 , Jelena Radomirovi3

Summary: The paper shows a series of opportunities linked to the technological, human and economic reengineering of activities and technological processes developed in a modern enterprise, adding new dimensions in the efficient development, on the market principles, in argument with the desiderate of the durable development of the society. Starting with these considerations we designed aspects linked to: business reengineering implementation, stages of this process, accentuating the management methods, delimitation on areas of activity of the effects on reengineering action. Key words: business process reengineering, reengineering enterprise, models and methods for reengineering project.

1. INTRODUCTION
Modern life takes place within the framework of permanent and more rapid changes. Namely, the changes influence all the aspects of our environment, primarily the economic infrastructure, technology, communications, market and finally, the life style. The changes have actually become one of the constants of our life. In a dynamic world like this, evolution is no longer a slow and random process. People, enterprises, and even nations are rapidly adjusting to changes for faster evolution. Companies suddenly begin to realize that traditional organizational structures, concept of customer services and business methods are no longer competitive in today's global market. In addition, they begin to realize that the old cost reduction methods are no longer a way for becoming more competitive. What is necessary is the organization that is customer-oriented and market-driven in its external relations, as well as focused on the processes and team-oriented in its internal operations. The most important business objectives in today's global economy are the speed, quality, flexibility and low cost. However, the traditional business systems are inherently incapable of achieving these objectives, because they are made in accordance with two basic principles: specialization of the working process, division of work in many smaller parts and hierarchical management setting a supervisor who will oversee the people who work. These principles have been appropriate in the period of industrial revolution, but today they are extremely inappropriate, because they inevitably lead to the dealys, errors, rigidity and high costs. These problems cannot be overcome by individual interventions and repairs. Reengineering is the only way to improvement. Working teams as opposed to large departments are more responsible and better for business processes. Team work is much more than a set of friendly people in one room. Team is a special group of people who complement and help each other in the work on a particular project.

2. MANAGEMENT PROJECT
Reengineering relies on a different school of thought, which continues the previous improvement processes. In extreme situations, reengineering implies that the current processes are irrelevant. We need to start from the scratch. The behavior should be projected and the following questions considered: How should the processes

846

look like?, What do my customers want?, What do the employees want to do?, How do the companies that are the best in ther fields do all this?, What can we do with new technologies? Such an approach is shown in the Figure below. It begins by defining the scope and objectives of own reengineering, that it is learned which processes should be occurring (from the customers, employees, competitors and non-competitors, with the advent of a new technology). With the advent of new knowledge, we are able to create a vision of the future and design new business processes. Then, we can make the plan of action (transition) based on the gap between current processes, technologies, structures and desires concerning the place where we want to be in the future. Then, the implementation of our solutions takes place.

Defining the scope of project

Learning from the others

Creating new processes

Transition plan (action)

Implementat ion of our solutions

Figure 1: Process improvement Extreme differences between the continuous process improvement and business process reengineering appear at the very beginning (with todays processes, and in a significant proportion and the obtained changes). Over the time, the products of breakthrough improvement and continuous improvement have come to the surface and managed to overcome the difficulties of implementation in corporations. It is difficult to find a unique approach that exactly fits a company and its needs, and it is a challenge to know which method should be used and when, and how to perform it successfully.

3. CASE STUDY
Serbian glass factory in Parain was erected on the foundations of the perished textile factory, by the equity, in 1907 by a group of traders from Belgrade, led by Milivoje Popovi. From the very beginning, the factory has based its work on modern technology and preserved the continuity of production. Today, Serbian glass factory has six subsidiary and one parent enterprise in which hundreds of millions of pieces of glass objects, different in the shape and size, are produced in manual, mechanical and automatic way. The benefits that were found in the ruins of the former factory of woolen cloth, the buildings, water proximity, deposits of limestone, sand, railway and road connections, were crucial for establishing the glass factory in Parain. The first glass furnance had 14 pots for manual production. The finishing and other machines were transferred from the former glass factory in Jagodina, whose production ceased in 1990. In 1907, with 350 employees, the factory starts the production of hollow and molded glass. The factory had many problems over the years, it has worked with delays and complete disruptions during the war. Section for automatic production of glass packaging, primarily bottles and then the jars, was started in 1950. Today, the organization Mechanical trade glass Ltd, Parain, is registered in the Register of economic entities with the Agency for Business Registers by the solution BD.48228-2007, registration number 17127250, activity code 26132 production of hollow glass and TIN 100939483, and it has 142 employees. Mechanical trade glass Ltd is functionally organized through the following functions: sale, marketing, production, planning, research and development, and administration (human resource management, information management). 3.1. Basis for changes Mechanical trade glass is oriented to mass production of glass products for consumers, where the mainstay in the market is a cheap and attractive product. In the previous period, the organization poorly operates in the market. One of the biggest reasons is the low productivity of workers inthe production and high costs. In relation to the molten glass mass, the percentage of packed finished products is below 50%. In the economic life span of this project, the percentage of capacity utilization is 70%, which is obtained by purchasing high-quality raw materials, tools, lubricants and by the remont of certain machinery and great discipline of workers. By increasing the final products in relation to the molted mass, a smaller cost would be obtained considering that the factory has high fixed costs, and in that way the conditions for gain are created. Placement of the planned production is not a problem considering the size and needs of the market, as well as the fact that 81% is exported, which is not negligible. With the formation of sales prices, the principle of prudence is used in order to observe the effects of future investments more realistically. Placement in the foreign (81%) and domestic (19%) market is provided for all the products in the planned range. The biggest customers are:

847

Table 1: Domestic customers Hernandez Paracin Fimas Belgrade Metro Belgrade Nera promet Novi Sad Disk komerc Krnjevo Madi Belgrade Imlek Belgrade Swisslion G.Milanovac The most significant customers from abroad are: Table2: Foreign customers CERVE S.P.A Italy VETRO PAINI Italy ALEKSANDAR COMMERCE Croatia UNITEHNA B&H METAL-INOD B&H BIH(Nera,BMD B&H Nevesinje,Buducnost,Zoka-trade...) All the raw materials from which glass packaging is derived come from the Earths crust, they are pure, of mineral origin and they make a product that does not pollute the environment. 3.2. Project plan Projects scope is interfunctional, i.e. it is related to the functions of sale, production, resource management and engineering design. Project plan consists of two associated phases and five subphases that are also mutually associated (Figure 2.)

1.1. Situation assessment 3 months

1.2.Redesign

1.3. Clear agreement 7 months

2.1. Technical adjustment 6 months

2.2. Social adjustment 8 months

5 months

Total length 29 months Figure 2: Reengineering project of Mechanical trade glass Ltd. Design phase is a normal thing and it requires a great understanding between management and the employees of the organization Mechanical trade glass Ltd, which is affected by designing, and all that with the aim of achieving project goals and the success of implementation phase. The emphasis of implementation phase is the implementation of the changes or a new order of managerial processes and related structural changes. 3.2.1 Design step: assessment of the current situation It is necessary to interview the key people, as well as to analyze the documentation. The results should be presented to the administration, realistically, exactly as they are. In this design phase, the problems need to be defined, as well as their major causes and then it is necessary to intervene. It should not be expected that all the barriers that hinder the project team will disappear. 3.2.2 Design step: redisign Redesigning should be started at the council meetings of a director and project team. On that occasion, set a vision of the process with high expectations. It is expected that the old habits will return both with workers and the supervisors, because the corporative structure is engraved in the tradition of the functioning of the

848

company. What was done in the past, it will be done in the same way and often not with consciously thinking, which usually appears in difficult situations in which we have encountered ourselves. In that way, each time when the problems would appear, the leadership would minimize the significance and it would not give enough support to workers. For that reason, we cannot change everything overnight, some changes require a lot of time so that the people could adapt to them, that the workers become relieved when making even the smallest decisions, and that the leadership allows the workers to decide. 3.2.3. Design step: clear answer This last step of design phase would last about seven months. This project phase requires including as larger number of employees in order to execute the change of process in the best way and according to the adopted plan. 3.2.4. Implementation phase: technical adjustment At the very beginning of this phase, the experience speaks that it is the best for the leadership to organize a celebration for all those who wish to come. In that way, the workers get a signal that a new era begins. A change of corporative structure is not expected in this phase. 3.2.5. Implementation phase: social adjustment There should not be a pause between social and technical adjustment. Changing personal behavior and changing of cultures represents the most difficult tasks of an organization.

4. CONCLUSION
Reengineering of the business processes leads to the change of all the dimensions of organization, of the way in which the tasks are performed, organizational structure in which those tasks are performed, the relations between managers and employees, reward system and criteria for promotion, values and beliefs, and organizational culture. Today, in the developed part of the world, the knowledge is considered a crucial resource for the success of a company, while raw materials, labor and capital are merely the limited resources. Specifically, the reengineering methodology is structured in phases of varyed complexity, in which the we use methods, techniques and procedures, of which some can be extremely complex for implementation. For an effective implementation of reengineering, it is necessary to understand reengineering completely, to be well-acquainted with the methodology of reengineering and of all the related management techniques and support systems as well.

REFERENCES
[1] Hammer M., Champy J.: Reengineering the Corporation: A Manifest of Business Revolution, New York, Harper Collins, 1993. [2] Harmon P.: Business Process reengineering with Objects. Object/Oriented Strategies, New York, Harper Collins, 1995. [3] Poslovni plan drutva Mainsko i trgovako staklo d.o.o., Parain, 2008. [4] Nikoli S.:Master rad: Uloga menadmenta u reinenjeringu poslovnih procesa za postizanje dramatinih poboljavanja performansi u poslovanju, Beograd, 2007.

849

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

REENGINEERING AS AN EFFECTIVE SOLUTION TO REDESIGN THE ACTIVITIES AND PROCESSES OF AN ENTERPRISEof

Srboljub Nikolic1, Branko Tesanovic2, Slavisa Arsic3
Logistics Training Center of Serbian Army, Krusevac, SERBIA, e-mail: srboljub.nikolic@yahoo.com 2 Military Academy-General Logistics Department, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: brate@verat.net 3 Military Academy-General Logistics Department, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: arsic.slavisa@gmail.com
1

Summary: Traditional solutions for gathering the information about the competition are usually unilateral. The companies that are engaged in gathering the information provide the technological means to facilitate the process of gathering the information, provide the results of independent research, which supplement the internal analysis, or offer the general consulting for leading the process. After a solution or report is provided, the company is left to itself to put the components together. The paper considers the restructuring of companys business, which is known as the business process reengineering as a concept of the new models in which new organizational and operational principles and procedures need to be established and classical ones need to be abandoned, because they do not achieve better performances in business. Key words: reengineering, business processes, reengineering project, business process reengineering, implementation

1. INTRODUCTION
Globalization of the economy, accelerated dynamics of modern world, information society and greater importance of human factor resulted in the emergence of some new branches in the field of science, unknown until today, which are progressing thanks to the necessity of amendments in various fields of contemporary science, especially in the domain of mathematics, information technology, sociology, psychology, ethics. Companies suddenly begin to realize that traditional organizational structures, concept of customer services and business methods are no longer competitive in today's global market. Classical business organization is based on the principles of Adam Smith division of industrial labor in unilateral and main tasks, and it is set for the earlier times that are of no use any more. At the reached level of development, classical organization of business does not provide the required performances in business, such as the amount of costs, quality, and speed of works, services and other for potential users. In addition, they begin to realize that the old methods of cost reduction are no longer a way of becoming more competitive. What is necessary is an organization that is customer-oriented and market-driven in its external relations, as well as focused on the processes and team-oriented in its internal operations. Reengineering can be one of the solutions. The reasons that establish the need for reengineering are rapid changes (Change), more demanding customers (Customers) and more severe competition (Competition). Organizational structure that appears is, by itself, a process and team organization. Within this structure, the teams are formed (the same people are engaged in multiple projects), organizational structures become flexible and innovative. Every company that responds to business challenges has to change, restructure, reorganize and redesign. The most important business objectives in today's global economy are the speed, quality, flexibility and lost cost. However, the traditional business systems are inherently incapable for achieving these objectives, because they are made in compliance with two basic principles: specialization of the work process, division of labor in many smaller parts and hierarchical management setting a supervisor who oversees the people who work. These principles were appropriate in the time of industrial revolution, but today they are extremely inappropriate because they inevitably lead to delays, errors, rigidity and high costs. These problems cannot be overcome with particular interventions and repairs. Reengineering is the only way to improvement. New direction in modern

850

management is known as reengineering and it represents the solution in overcoming the difficulties and in the growth of efficiency in the activities of the enterprise. At the same time, a number of researchers prefers the term business reengineering, while the others are willing to talk about this phenomenon only if it is strictly related to business processes, i.e. they use the term business process reengineering. Process organization of business is based on business processes that create new products, which bring long-term successes to the companies. All the problems of business in the modern world with no limits between national markets and alternative expectations of the customers are brought down to that the companies in 21st century need to organize their work around the process, because they will drastically improve their business performances in that way.

2. WHY IS A GOOD BUSINESS PROCESS REENGINEERING SO IMPORTANT?

In 1931, the distinguished American economist, William Edwards Deming, has said: If you cannot describe that what you are doing as a process, then you dont know what you are doing! In todays information technology, it is still hard to describe how a business application ends up as a part of functional business service. This is rarely described as a single process. At best, we try to articulate this through a several different methodologies of the process, and in the worst case, we do not recognize a single methodology and we re-discover the wheel with each new development of the project. During the business process reengineering we need to know what we are doing. It is equally important to know to record it and understand what we have done and how we have done it. This is the essence of the balanced control with good management. In order to achieve that, we need to provide the monitoring of a defined, consistent and redesigned process. The process exists to help people and it has some very important attributes that are necessary for providing the high-quality service of business process reengineering, as shown in the Table 1 below. [1]

Table 1: Attributes of the process [1] The process helps people, removes the uncertainty and unpredictability and introduces transparency and management Processes are: -renewable -consistent -reliable -verifiable -comprehensive Processes can be: -controlled -automatized -simplified -monitored -developed Measurable efficiency and results of the process Improving business processes is the most important goal that must be reached so that the company would remain competitive in the market. In the last 10-15 years, the companies were focused on improving their business goals, because the customers require better products and services. If the customers needs are not satisfied, the customers will turn to other producers. Many companies have begun the improvement of their processes by using Continuous Improvement Model. This model seeks to understand and measure (estimate) the current processes, and to improve them as much as possible in that way (shown in Figure 1). Identification and implement. of possible solutions Good processes are: -adaptive -sustainable -live -divisible -supported

Documenting the things done

Determining the measures

Drafting the process

Measuring the results

Figure 1: Measuring the current processes It is started with documenting the things that are currently done, determining what the customers want, drafting the process, measuring the results, and then the identification of possible improvements that can be done on the basis of obtained and collected data. Then, the implementation of improved processes is done and after that, the success of new processes is measured. This procedure is repeating over and over again, as long as we want and

851

can improve the processes and for that reason, the procedures name is Continuous Process Improvement. There are some other names, such as: Business Process Improvement Model, Functional Processes Improvement Model and so on. This method for improving business processes has gradually come into use. However, in the last 10 years, there are a few factors that accelerate the need for improving the business processes. The most significant among them is technology. New technologies (e.g. Internet) rapidly create new possibilities in business and in that way, also create a big competition because of which a constant improvement is necessary. Another obvious trend is open world market and enlarged free trade. Such a change leads to the increasing number of companies in the market, and the competitors become stronger. In todays market, big changes are necessary in order to self-survive. It has become the question of life and death for some companies. As the result of search, the companies have found many methods for faster improvement of the process. In fact, the companies want more energetic changes. Due to the growing number of influences and changes that occur, only a small number of companies can afford slow changes which are very expensive. One of the approach to the rapid changes is the Business Process Reengineering-BPR. BPR was first mentioned by Frederick Taylor when his published his article The Principles of Scientic Managmenet in 1900. In the Taylors time, there were no educated workers that were employed in the production process, which was the property of the wealthy at that time. [2] Creator of the business process reengineering do not have to be consultants or academics, they are ordinary everyday people with everyday problems. In the companies such as Ford, Hewlett-Packard, and Mutual Benefit Life, the managers have experimented with new possibilities of IT, in order to penetrate and overcome the existing boundaries of business processes. These people in the period around 1980 did not refer to business reorganization as the business process reengineering; this term appeared later, in 1990. In the USA, and some time later in Europe as well, the business process reengineering becomes a term as a replacement for downsizing, i.e. the basis of the project plan. Thus, business process reengineering becomes widely accepted winning combination in the leading circles of the corporations, particularly in production industry in the period of business crisis from the beginning of 1990 until today. At the famous Boston Forum, as the most significant features and characteristics of business process reengineering, M. Hammer, admits that business process reengineering has become a very contagious term, especially because of the uncorruptedness and links to the action in literal sense, which, in fact, represents the Reengineering. Nobody wants to be reorganized and to feel like a prisoner of war. [3] As an important point, Davenport emphasizes that business process reengineering is becoming some kind of a destructive management, unlike the Total Quality Management, which is more oriented and turned to people who also influence the process improvement. In any case, the business process reengineering is not a wrong discipline. The processes represent the way, which shows the people how to work. All those companies that ignore business processes or that do not manage to improve them create a big risk of failure in the future. However, there are a several different ways to improve the Business Process Reengineering, which needs to consider not only the reduction of costs and salaries, but also it needs to improve the ideas upon which the future of employees depends, and the health of the company depends on their creativity. Business process reengineering should not be performed by those who can be upset by losing the jobs as one of the normal events in reorganization, but they all need to be focused on the desire to transform the company into a newer and better organization. Thus, the most important requirement of business process revitalization is rejuvenation of employees, their behavior and direction of that positive behavior toward the future. Today, a valid definition of Deloitte&Touche is: reengineering is a multidisciplinary approach in leading the fundamental changes in the way of performing the work throughout the enterprise, for the dramatic improvement of performances and values that are significant for the stakeholders. [4] Reengineering is considered a multidisciplinary approach, because all the knowledges possible are used for its successful implementation. Fundamental changes imply the radical, not incremental changes. Reengineering influences the entire enterprise and it is not limited by functional boundaries. Dramatic improvement is the objective, because this is not about marginal goals. The key attitude is that it provides the creation of value for the consumer. This points out to the integrated solution using multidisciplinary approach, to the obligatory change in the attitude of the leadership for the more successful implementation of new solution in the practice, to obtaining the significant results in the focusing of the processes and to strategic focus. Gartner Group suggests the following definition of reengineering: fundamental analysis and radical reprojecting of business process and managing systems, definition of tasks, organizational structures, beliefs and behavior of employees in order to achieve the dramatic improvements of performances. The activity under which a company reviews its objectives and ways to achieve them, by respecting the disciplinary approach to the redesign of business processes. [5] Besides the mentioned reengineering definitions, there are many others that exist today, depending on how widely the particular authors include the reengineering.

852

2.1. Common goals of reengineering projects Reengineering relies on a different school of thought, which continues the previous improvement processes. In extreme situations, the reengineering implies that the current processes are insignificant. You need to start from the scratch. You need to project your behavior and wonder: How should the processes look like?, What do my buyers want?, What do the employees want to do?, How is all this done by the companies that are the best in their fields?, What can be done with new technologies? Such an approach is shown in the Figure below. It starts by defining the scope and goals of your own reengineering, then it is learned what kind of processes should appear (from your customers, employees, competitors and non-competitors, with the advent of new technology). With the advent of new knowledges, we are able to create a vision of the future and design new business processes. Then, we can create a plan of action (transition), based on the gap between current processes, technologies, structures and desires about where we wish to be in the future. Afterwards, the implementation of our solutions is performed (shown in the Figure 2). [6]

Defining the scope of project

Learning from the others

Creating new processes

Transition plan (action)

Implementation of our solutions

Figure 2: Constant process improvement Extreme differences between the continuous process improvement and business process reengineering occur at the very beginning (with todays processes, and in significant proportion and obtained changes). By the time, the products of the breakthrough improvement and continuous improvement have come into surface and thus they have succeeded in overcoming the difficulties of implementation in corporations. It is difficult to find a unique approach that exactly fits a company and its needs, and it is a challenge to know which method should be used and when, and how should it be performed successfully. Reengineering project should basically have the goal to direct executive operations to the satisfaction of customers requirements. Reengineering project should be complementary and to serve as a support to business processes in the enterprise. Reengineering team consists of designers, implementation experts and the people who are experts in technology. It should be multifunctional and to include the members from all the potentially affected organizations. The following tasks can be a part of every functional managerial approach of reengineering project: -Step 1 Define functional goals, establish and follow the functional strategy of the management for simplifying and standardization of the process and determining the basis for the systems of processes, data and information, from which the improvement process will begin. By defining these bases, goals and strategies, one framework is set. -Step 2 Analyze business processes in order to eliminate worthless processes, to simplify the processes of limited value and review all the processes in order to identify more effective and efficient alternatives for the process, data and systemic bases. -Step 3 Evaluate the alternatives of basic processes through a preliminary, functional economic analysis, in order to select a desirable mode of action. -Step 4 Plan the implementation of a desirable mode of action through the development of detailed statements about the requirements, consequences, costs, benefits and time plan. -Step 5 Approve. From the planning data, you need to select the information that are necessary for the finalization of functional economic analysis that is used by the directors to approve the continuation of the proposed improvement process and changes of the system and related data. -Step 6 Execute the approved changes of data and the processes and provide the functional validation of the changes in the system of information.

3. ENSURING THE SUCCESS OF REENGINEERING

The success of business process reengineering can be measured using the real achieved goals of the project. The companies that have executed business reengineering speak about a drastic improvement and changes of the business processes.

853

One study of the business reengineering conducted in the 30 Mexican companies, which were selected among the largest 500 in Mexico, had the amazing results (Table 3.1). Business reengineering had a large impact on the reduction of the management costs (82%), production costs (57%) and distribution costs (39%). [7] Table 2: Achievements of 30 businesses reengineering in Mexico Areas of the achieved success Costs reduction Optimization time Better service productivity Productivity growth More precise inform. for decision-making Improvement of the quality Better financial control Higher profitability Hierarchical level reduction Modernization of technology Personal motivation Increase of sale Market survival Business loss reduction Contact with the environment Increased market penetration Improvements % 69 62 59 59 52 45 41 38 38 34 34 28 28 21 17 14

Many researches were conducted in order to determine why many reengineering projects fail or do not succeed to change some things. Department of Defense indicates that the organizations with a successfully planned reengineering have a series of common elements. They have a strong support from the general directors, they are small or medium-sized, they are mostly willing to tolerate changes and support the uncertainty to which the changes may lead, and many have systems, processes or strategies that are worth hiding from competition. Here we have also mentioned the six critical factors of success that provide for the initiative of reconstruction to achieve the desired results that are listed in the publication of Sharon L. Caudle [8].

854

Understand the reengineering Build a business case

Table 3: Six critical factors of success -Understand the basis of business process. -Understand the reengineering. -Differentiate and integrate the approaches to process improvement. -Have the necessary and sufficient reasons for reengineering. -Have organizational commitment and capacities for initiating and sustaining of reengineering. -Provide and maintain political support for reengineering projects. -Understand the organizational mandate and given mission strategic directions and goals that go to the goals specifically linked to the process and decision-making in the organization. -Define, model and give priority to business processes that are important for the success of mission. -Adapt the organizational structure in order to support the initiatives of managing the process even better. -Develop an evaluation program in order to evaluate the leading of the process. -Achieve that the organizations understand the value and mode of measuring -Link the success management with current and future expectations of clients and suppliers

Adopt the approach to leading the process

Continuously measure and monitor the effectiveness Practice the management changes and provide central support

-Develop the strategies of human resource management in order to support the reengineering. -Develop the strategies of information resources management and technological frame in order to support the change of the process. -Establish a central support group in order to help the integration of reengineering attempt and other improvement attempts within an organization -Develop a comprehensive program of internal and external communication and education specifically linked to the project. -Have a clear critearia for selecting where should the reengineering be executed. Manage reengineering -Set the project on the right level with defined goals and purpose of the reengineering team. -Use well-trained, diverse team of experts in order to provide optimal success of the project. projects in order to obtain -Follow a structured, disciplined approach to reengineering. results

Besides the defects of the leaders at the highest level, some of the problems that have troubled the attempts of reengineering project are linked to the lack of information about measuring the effectiveness, lack of cost records and insufficient monitoring of the process. Here are several other factors that can endanger the success of reconstruction, and those were listed by Hammer and Champy: - Attempt to fix the process instead of changing it. - Not focusing on business processes. - Ignoring everything besides the process redesign. - Neglecting human values and beliefs. - Being prepared to satisfaction with small results. - Locating the previous problems in the problem definition and reengineering attempts. - Allowing the existing, corporative cultures and attitudes of management to prevent the beginning of change. - Attempting the reengineering execution from bottom to top. - Saving the resources that are meant for reconstruction. - Protecting the reengineering at some point in corporative agenda. - Wasting energy on many reengineering projects. - Not distinguishing reengineering from other programs of business improvements. - Concentrating on the design only. - Attempting the reengineering without negative consequences for anyone. - Pulling out when the people start to oppose the changes that the reengineering brings. - Protracting the attempt.

855

4. CONCLUSION
The necessity of reengineering is conditioned by the fast pace of todays life, endless and obligatory modification in internal and external environment of the enterprise. As a main conclusion, regardless of the ideas presented in this paper, I believe that the reengineering is an efficient solution to redesign of the process and activities of the enterprise. Such a solution is accepted not only by prosperous companies, but by all the enterprises that desire to maintain competitiveness. After the implementation, the enterprise becomes a subject of permanent transformations. There are differences between reengineering and improvement. The degree of changes needs to be radical in order for them to be improved. Reengineering is implemented once, while the improvements are expected to have continuity. The time necessary for changes is long, and for improvements it is short. Reengineering is planned from top to bottom, and implemented from bottom to top, and thus the improvements are directed from bottom to top. Reengineering includes a large scope, while the improvements can be noticed only at the level of the functioning of particular parts. The reengineering risk is high, while the improvement risk is focused. The basis of reengineering involves information andtechnologies, while the improvements are implemented by strategic management. Research conducted by the authors represents reengineering as an original management mode that requires new intellectual, but also the financial resources and that imposes the use of information technologies in order to create organizational structures, as well as the implementation of the modern administration methods. The promise and possibilities of reengineering are exciting and monumental, as it is noted in earlier records. However, in order to remain vital, the business process reengineering has to be reviewed and observed how the implementation process oftenly turns off the road. The power of this approach can be achieved only when a company engages in the process with courage and willingness to move into the unknown. Engaging an experienced consultant may facilitate this undertaking, but this still does not eliminate the risk, uncertainty or struggle through a company needs to pass in order to change consciously and radically. Reengineering may lead to the significant change in the requirements for products and services, to the significant change in controlling or limitation imposed on a business process, or to the significant change in technological platform that supports business process. Implementation of the initiative for reengineering usually has a significant impact on the organization itself, both the suppliers and the clients (customers).

REFERENCES
[1] Deming W. (1990), Sample Design in Business Research, Edition Wiley-Interscience, pp. 450-465 [2] Hammer M., Champy J. (1993), Reengineering the Corporation: A Manifecto for Business Revolution [3] Devenport T.H. (1993), Process Innovation, Reeingneering Work Through Information Tehnology, Harvard Business SchoolPress, Boston [4] Preuzeto sa sajta www.deloitte.com [5] Preuzeto sa sajta www.georgetown.edu [6] Leatt, P., Baker, G.R., Halverson P.K and Aird C. (2004), Downsizing, Reengineering and Restructuring: Long-Term Implications for Economical Organisations, Strategic Management Journal vol.13, No(4), pp. 578-599 [7] Lozano.L. (1996), Results of a Research Related to Business Process Reengineering in Mexico [8] Sharon C. (1995), Reengineering for Results: Keys to Success from Government Experience, National Academy of Public Administration

856

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

FORMATION OF COLLECTIVE REPRESENTATION OF EMPLOYEES ON THE MISSION AND STRATEGY OF ENTERPRISE

A.V. Ostafiychuk
Donbass State Engineering Academy (DSEA), Kramatorsk, UKRAINE, e-mail: mish_79@mail.ru
Summary: The concept and importance of internal PR in the strategic management of modern machine-building enterprise. The factors forming effective corporate culture and implementation stages are internal in a PR company. Key words: strategic management, machine-building enterprise, corporate culture.

1. CULTURE ENTERPRISES, STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT, PUBLIC RELATIONS, MENTALITY OF THE PUBLIC

Culture is seen as enterprise system beliefs, business principles and norms of behavior, traditions, symbols, which formed the company in the manufacturing process and a majority of employees and managers agree values and workers in each division of the company. Each company is formed and declared valid and real culture. Of course, the more they are equal, the more likely a real mix of all company staff during professional activity. Enterprise Culture affects employment and an employee of an enterprise as a whole. Depending on the nature of the influence of culture on the overall effectiveness of the enterprise can be defined "positive" and "negative" culture of enterprise. Positive culture promotes efficiency of the enterprise or its development. It allows employees to combine into one team to achieve strategic objectives, helps increase productivity, allows the use of moral incentives because the main production is based on human aspirations: to achieve excellence in some case (achievement motivation) to influence others (orientation and power) to receive recognition. The emergence of a strong corporate sector in Ukraine, which represented mainly by joint-stock companies, led the reorganization of their corporate governance, transforming it into the modern principles of strategic management. At the same time domestic practices need to transition to new management paradigm has not taken long. Most corporations in Ukraine only comes to understanding what is called strategy, identifying it exclusively with the environment. Under the present conditions of management in corporations used some elements of strategic management, managers concentrate their attention on solving current problems and development strategy is replaced by survival tactics. Let us recall that the strategic management - the process of adoption and implementation of strategic decisions, a central component of which is a strategic choice, based on a comparison of own resources of enterprises with opportunities and threats external environment in which it operates. In the contemporary economy strategic choice should be based on a constant external strategic analysis and internal analysis of material and moral factors of strategic activities. The most important moral strategic factors of a large building enterprise culture is specific state enterprises. Inside PR - is controlled by the activities of corporate culture based on what ideas, opinions, fundamental values that are separated by team members. Solved problem: the main-line information about mood, needs, trends in campaign organization and the target information of the internal environment of the company. Corporate Services internally (internal) PR in Ukraine has little demand - their share of the total booking agencies is no more than 10%. And awareness of positive internal PR, according to experts, occurs in most domestic companies with a negative experience - when there are conflicts related to wages, social programs, transfers, change management or promotion, management reshuffle and the like

857

The main task of the internal PR - elimination of the vacuum of information between senior management and employees. Areas of PR-structures can be different. In any case, does not follow, however, produce on account of one of the main objectives - to create an atmosphere in which employees of the corporation employs more impact. Bank of America, for example, used some ideas aimed at improving staff satisfaction in the bank. Features corporate PR Helps employees realize their mission in the community. Keeps staff informed of recent events in the life of the company. Helps coordinate the work of various departments of a company. Provides opportunity to study leadership and timely to meet the needs of employees or prevent. Helps create a harmonious environment in the community. Enhance staff loyalty and contributes to a team (corporate) spirit in the company. PR - a purposeful activity. Partially PR does not exist, one or two more by writing articles, conducting several events - you do not close the gap in corporate culture. Inside PR should also always be present: its formation began when the head of the founder took the idea to establish a company and does not end as long as a company itself. Objective prerequisite link between PR and organizational culture is that communication in the organization of action is cultural. Regarding communication, as a factor of organizational culture, one can conclude that no such communication components, as legends, customs, rituals, cultural and corporate events, artifacts and technology, organizational culture is not able to grow within the organization. Similarly, it can not be formed, stored and transmitted without elements of social interaction such as modeling, simulation, instruction, correction, stories about the past, rumors of a confrontation, surveillance, etc., what is actually based process and communication. Factors that influence the corporate culture: societal culture, mentality; effective business culture; professional culture; competitive environment; national legislation; New organization concept PR; PR-unit potential (participation in strategic decision-making, knowledge, professionalism, sex workers and structure); fashion. The nature of communication depends on PR, which is determined by senior management. This model is chosen taking into account the conceptual understanding of PR function in the organization, the potential of PRdepartment of culture and organization. Corporate culture affects PR ideological base and value structure, which in turn affects all decisions in the organization, including the choice of PR and schema that defines the purpose of PR. Influence decisions in the Communications PR-specialists can keep better when members of senior management. If they do not belong to the leadership team, the function of PR-practitioners quickly reduced to the implementation of decisions taken by the leadership than to their development. Corporate culture also produces effects on PR: managers had higher impact on corporate culture, which, in turn, affects who the key PR-managers entered into the dominant coalition. Finally, PR can also affect the corporate culture. In particular, internal communication affects the corporate culture and, in turn, falls under its influence. For outdoor areas, then PR-specialists and senior management are aware of existing social surrounding subculture to exercise effective choice of communication strategies to interact with key community groups. In summary, it can be concluded: corporate culture and models and ways of ruling defines PR societal (broadly) a culture of society. Typical instruments of corporate culture: Development and promotion for both the content and spirit of the Declaration on the mission of the organization. Formation of team spirit based on the relevant "commandments". Improving corporate information. a tradition, creation myths, legends, rituals. Optimize management style and leadership. Developing a business relationship etiquette. Improve models of motivation and incentive workers. The rise of corporate culture style. Enhancing partnership. Improving understanding of the modern concept of quality culture.

858

Under Ukrainian machine-building enterprises, in particular - leading engineering company is proved, the algorithm of actions when using the internal PR could be next.

2. ANALYSIS OF THE SITUATION

Simple planning. This planning procedures related to the achievement of goals, while achieving their success depends on existing skills and abilities and how effectively they are used. The main part of this phase - the depth of understanding, staging areas such as: "Where are we now?", "Where are we not fully understand the situation? Even before the development of PR-programs to specify the initial situation. What the public thinks? This is similar to the famous passage of military rule - "intelligence before the fight. If our hypotheses or assumptions based on intuition or instinct, we can make big mistakes, PR-programs and then with `are become vain. No sense spending money on something only to get "good publicity" and collect press cuttings: a seeming confusion and PR, which deservedly exposed sharp criticism from experts. To this was not advisable to conduct a communication audit is to examine the situation inside and outside the organization. Classic PR-situation illustrates a table below, where we see what problems are usually faced PR-practice. Their goal - to transform the four types of negative relationships in the four positive. Table 1: PR-transformation process Negative situation Ill Preconception Indifference Ignoring Feeling Approval Interest Knowledge Positive situation

Finally understanding provides knowledge, and therefore the essence of PR is very understanding. Sometimes it can even be connected with things or phenomena that people do not like or with whom they disagree. The purpose of PR - not to make others think we are great. That understanding and are the central axis around which revolves PR.

3. SETTING GOALS
The range of likely PR-action may be sufficiently broad and sometimes unexpected, but in any case among them should be given priority. Here are examples of the most common PR-company objectives: change the picture of the company in connection with the change of appearance; attract more candidates for professionally trained in the workplace; tell the little-known history of the company and thus improve its chances of success; make a company known and recognized in new markets; clarify the technical staff, users or customers about your product; strengthen the position of the company is at risk of takeover by another business structure; create a new identity; support the project sponsorship; make known research the company. For other commercial or non-profit organizations may be offered a completely other purposes, each of which requires developed a program of action.

4. CERTAIN CATEGORIES OF PUBLIC

Community - a group of people inside the organization or outside it, with whom the organization interacts in some way. PR-activities are not aimed at the general public. PR-action aimed at carefully selected from broad layers of the public group. Moreover, it means that much of this activity is directed to these different groups differently. In other words, there is, for example, broadcast messages aimed at the mass market as a whole, through the media, as often happens in advertising. Public relations is used more selectively and to transfer only certain types of messages. If the public really various, some part of it be ignored, while some other audience can simultaneously go through various media, such as daily newspapers and television. Specific audiences, which will be directed, say, a television action may be its own employees, suppliers, investors, distributors, consumers and individuals that

859

influence public opinion. There are situations where effective to send special messages to specific categories of the public.

4. CHOICE OF MEDIA AND METHODS OF WORKING WITH THEM

For example, the type of media - press, reception work with it - invite journalists to the organization. PR-projects typically use broader set of media, the advertising campaign. While the campaign can focus only, for example, printed media, PR-company may set and other facilities, including its own specially created for the private means of disseminating information, such as internal corporate publications, films, slides or video. Assessing the situation, having a short list of the most important and practically most needed tasks by selecting groups of the public, then you should choose the most appropriate media. For example: Press: national and regional newspapers, free newspapers, consumer, custom, market, technical and professional journals, reference books, yearbooks. Radio: local, regional, international. Television: regional stations, international. Trade: Special Exhibition PR-, PR-support exhibits at professional and general demonstrations, foreign trade fairs, etc. Printed Matter: educational literature, information, exclusive character of all types and trial literature for staff. Books based on sponsorship. This publication or connected with the direction of the organization, or sponsored by companies producing tools (examples: cook book given food manufacturers, road maps and guides are issued to manufacturers of fuel, tires, sports journalism issue publications sponsored by the manufacturer of this product). Direct delivery of mail: it is being used for promotional purposes, may be involved and to reach PR-purposes. Spoken language: PR is linked not only with the media, it can be distributed efficiently and in personal communication (even face-to-face), when people talk in the office by phone or in a production shop, and so on. Sponsorship: used to support artists, athletes, expeditions, scholarships to universities and institutions, support charitable societies, etc. In fact, in all cases the elements of sponsorship, PR, because this is a benevolent attitude towards the sponsor. Internally, corporate publications: newsletters, magazines, newspapers, distributed among employees, shareholders, distributors, users, consumers or individuals that influence public opinion. Corporate identity and brand organization. It may take many forms depending on the nature of organization. For example, airlines put on their planes characteristic marks that stand out clearly, especially ordering the crew to a special form, put their symbols on everything that a potential or actual passenger can see. This schedule, tickets, labels on luggage, in points, bus at the airport, bags of spices and even paper napkins.

5. BUDGET PLANNING
PR-specialist engaged in project planning should consider which media can be best used to achieve the target set in view of budget constraints. In consideration our budget planning model is under five point, but quite possibly would be to start the work on determining the total amount you will spend. PR - this type of activity that requires intensive labour and expense is the most expensive business hours. Other major expenditures - printing internally branded publications and a video. However, the cost of creating videos can be attributed to several budgets, such as project when construction works are taken from the very beginning to their full completion. In addition, the completed video can show a few years ago, future budgets should include items that include the cost of their distribution, support in good condition and training, if necessary, to continue, the need to engage until the initial costs are economically justified.

6. ANALYSIS OF RESULTS
Methods of assessment should be determined at the stage of planning. During the program, and it is advisable to do work and verify suitability of selected methods of evaluation. Since the program specified tasks that are `targets on which you can compare the received results, it is useful to do even if the targets defined in qualitative rather than quantitative form, such as providing positive related media.

860

REFERENCES
[1] . : / // . 2008. 7. . 23 [2] : : [] / [.. , .. , ., , ., ]. . : , 2006. 376 . [3] ( ) : [] / [.. , .. , .. .]; . .. . : .. 2007. 210 . [4] . / // . 2008. 4. . 1723.

861

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

CONTROLING PERFORMACES OF THE COMPANY

Ljiljana Peci
IHP Prva petoletka Trstenik, SERBIA, e-mail: ljpecic72@gmail.com and High Mechanical Technicak School,Trstenik, SERBIA, e-mail: ljpecic72@gmail.com

Summary: The business quality no longer relies nor on the financial control nor on the traditional advantage of lower production costs. The value of business quality is based on the power of intellect. There is a high competitive economy, which is based on knowledge. And that means it is necessary to embed learning in the company and to measure its level. Key words: measurement, performance measurement criteria, the quality of the company's ability.

1. INTRODUCTION
Measuring business performance has become a need of time. Guided by the wish to achieve the best possible business results, managers of the companies, at the end of the last millennium, began to try, more and more to measure every aspect of each element, each function of business and quantitatively express. Measuring performances of the company,as a whole, its organizational components and measuring the performance of individual employees on their jobs, today is considered as a precondition for successful business management. It is no coincidence that even in 1998. year at Cambridge Univercity in V. Britain held the first international conference on performance measurement in companies (Meyer 1998).. Measuring performance is gradually developing as a special area of management, similar to the organization, operational management or managerial accounting. Measuring performances has emphasized interdisciplinary character. To be able to measure something, you must know that what you have to measure, and hence, the measurement of performance the company needs a good knowledge of finance, but for measurement employees it is necessary to use human resources knowledge. As any measurement involves the collection of information and it is connected with the information system, knowledge of information technology is requirement for building a good system for performance measurement. The complexity of modern business environment is the main factor that motivated managers to devote more attention for measuring the impact of certain components on the environment on the performance of their companies. However, if the complexity of the operation was the factor that motivated the development of performance measurement, then surely information technology is a factor that enables a "revolution of measurement". The development of modern information system provides collection the information needed to measure performance, on time and manner that allows effective measurement.

2. FEATURES OF CLASSIC PERFORMANCE MEASURMENT SYSTEM

The first classic performance measurement system is based on financial criteria obtained from accounting system. As such, it is considered outdated and needs to be completed. Today's traditional enterprise performance measurement systems is very little different from the first system created in the early period of creation of joint stock companies. The main objective of the classical system of measuring the success of the company was addressing equity issues in cost control. With the stock problem are facing all business owners who do not know how to ensure that the managers who run their companies make decisions and act in accordance with the interests of the company, not their personal interests. In the early trading company that was more pronounced since the managers were actually captains of ships to ocean seas. It was supposed, that it should be build a

862

system that disables managers to spend company's funds for their personal use in conditions when it does not have modern means of communication. Classic performance measurement systems of companies have committed to all the specifics in which they occurred, and it is clear why they are focused primarily on cost. However, it is certain that the current business conditions are somewhat different from those that existed prior to twenty or more years. Classical measurement systems that were in force during that time, have these very significant drawbacks: a) orientation to the past and ignoring the future. Classic al performance measurement systems highlight what is happening, not what will happen yet. They show what the performances of the company were and not what will be. Financial performances measures enterprises have no great power in forecasting business results. It often does not reflect on the transaction until it isn't too late to react. b) The orientation on the short-term and neglection the long-term results. The longest period in the accounting system of measurement is usually one year. In a market valuation of companies,in the capital market, thah is even less. Great number of experts pointed out the dangers of short-time horizon in evaluating the success of the company. It is enough just to compare the list of the 100 best companies, the famous Fortune magazine, in the period of last 10 years. A great number of companies has completely disappeared from the list, but and from the market, for ten years. Guided by the need to achieve short-term gains, managers of companies are often forced to go to the moves that will provide it, but on the cost of development or even survival of companies in the long term. c) the orientation of the internal standards and neglecting external. Classic performance measurement systems are mainly focused on internal standards and criteria. With the help of them, it can not be learned how to partners are evaluating performances of the company. It is not even clear successfulness of the companies in terms of social environment and its impact on society, environment and so on. Successful business can have such external costs due to environmental pollution that is better for society to give up. It is required a system for measuring success which is going to balance internal and external sources of information. d) orientation to quantitative (objective) measures and the neglection for qualitative (subjective) criteria. Performance measurement system based on financial indicators naturally emphasizes quantitative indicators and qualitative ignore. The aspects of business operations that can difficultly or noway quantify are ignored and their impact on business performance is simply not taken into account. For example, the intellectual resources of knowledge and motivation of employees and their impact on the performance of the company are ignored, and these are factors which, in today's era of IT, are becoming critical for success of the company. e) orientation to the effects of the process and ignoring the quality of the process. Classic performance measurement system is oriented on the "result" while the structure is in the background. It is possible that in some point in business processes are created values and are build enterprise capabilities that will give future effects. Also is it possible, that in some period financial effects are collecting, but without producing quality this can not be seen by the classic system of performance measurement. The conclusion is that the traditional performance measurement systems, based on financial indicators and came from the accounting system or the capital markets, are unilateral and therefore unacceptable in modern conditions. Companies are requiring balanced performance measurement systems that will take into account both, past and future performance, both, internally and externally, as well as qualitative and quantitative, both short-and long-term and those that will reflect the capacity to create values and the very size of the created value. If it is concluded from the last said that the financial indicators of company performance are no longer required, then that is simply not acceptable. Financial performance indicators of the company are necessary but insufficient. They are necessary for several reasons. Company's ability to create value in business processes is more important than the effects of these processes, but it only makes sense if, at least, in the long run, result in a financial effect. The company, which works well still needs to produce economically justifiable results. It is, therefore, essential that the ability to create value is manifested in the positive financial results. Another reason, why the financial indicators of performance, are required, is a deeper and more complex. Each corporate strategy is based on certain assumptions about the cause-effect relationship between certain factors of business success. Financial performance indicators are verifiering strategy and the assumptions, on which it is based. The lack of financial impact upon the operational improvements made to the process,produce doubt about the strategy and assumptions on which it is built. Therefore, the financial indicators are required in the assessment of the company - their missing cause begining of the review process and changing strategy which is critical for its adaptation, and ultimately for its survival and development.

3. MULTICRITERIA PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT

It is obvious that in the current economic conditions doing business, most appropriate are multicriteria methods for measuring the performances of companies.They approaches the problem from multiple perspectives. The most important perspective that should definitely be included are:

863

a) the consumers perspective - the market performance of companies and in relation to consumers, b) The prespective of internal processes - performance management company in the efficiency of internal business processing, c) Innovation and learning perspective - the perspective of innovation and getting a new knowledge, and d) Financial perspective - financial result of the company. In each of the outstanding perspectives, management selects goals that they wish to achieve and measures which are going to be used to control the realization of these goals. Goals in each assumption is derived from the vision and strategy. Goals and standards are periodically reviewing and if necessary changing. Then, the continuous monitoring of their own goals through the identified criteria is following. The essence of all this is that the company is successfull only if all the targets in the prospects of observing are achieved simultaneously. 3.1. The consumers perspective The consumers perspective match the consumer perspective on the issue: "If we are going to achieve our vision, how to look and work from the perspective of consumers." Almost every company directs its mission on customer and his needs. In many companies you can see the type of mission: "Our mission is to provide the best quality products (services) for the best price for our customers." A small number of companies, however, its success measures by how successfully meet the needs of consumers. It is indicative that the consumer satisfaction is massivly accepted as the key to the success of the company, and that is almost no companies in which the system of performance measurement is formalized way to measure that satisfaction. Certainly, the reason for lies in fact that measuring customer satisfaction is relatively complex and expensive process. But, more important reason lies elsewhere. A small number of companies is succesfull in translating the mission and vision in everyday decisions and behaviors. The company vows to consumers. ("Buyer First"), but then, its employees and managers behave in a way that speaks tha consumers are their the last official concern. The result is that the mission remains a dead letter on a paper. Output lies in recognition that the interests of consumers generally appear in the 4 fields and they should seek the goals and standards of performance the company within this perspective; Leading the time which is needed to deliver existing products from the moment when the order arrived to the moment when he is in the hands of consumers. For new products the leading time is time for the development and introduction of new products to market; The quality as a level of the product defect in the market; Service and service delivery in terms of time and a place which consumers seek and in quality which is needed; Price which is lower than competitive and justify the costs on all grounds. 3.2. The perspective of internal processes Perspective of internal process provides an answer to the question "To achieve our vision, in what must we be the best?" In other words, the company should elect those business processes which are considered to be able to achieve competitive advantage in and to define the manner in which company is going to achieve competitive advantage. Internal process perspective requires that the company is not viewed as a hierarchical structure of formal organizational units, manifested in the organizational scheme, but as a network of business processes that transforms inputs into outputs. The company creates competitive advantage by making some of the business processes performed better (faster, cheaper, better) than its competitors and so they added more value to consumers from their competition. The perspective of internal processes requires from management to identify the processes in which competitive advantage will be builded and then within them placed the objectives and measures for their improvement. A set of knowledge, skills and abilities that are necessary to build a competitive advantage for the company in the choiced processes is called a core competences. The objectives and measures in the internal perspective are regarding on time, quality, process efficiency (cost), reliability of the process and so on. For the selection of targets and measures in this perspective it should be taken into account that they are in the process in which employees can have a significant impact because employees are the only sources for improving processes. The second condition is that information systems can provide reliable informations about improving processes 3.3. Innovation and learning perspective Innovation and learning perspective answers the question: "To achieve our vision, what and how we must innovate and learn?" Adding value to consumers and gain competitive advantage on that basis, is possible only

864

through the process of innovation and learning. The value of the company in a changing environment depends on its ability to continuously improve existing products and services and to bring them to the market. The objectives and measures in the perspective of innovation and learning should focus on: first, building the ability to continuously improve existing products, services and processes, and second, building the ability to continuously introduce new products, services and processes. In other words, goals and measures in this perspective should identify what will be, how much and for what time improved in the products, services and processes. 3.4. Financial perspective Financial perspective answers the question: "In order to achieve our vision, what kind of financial results must we achieve from the perspective of shareholders?" The financial perspective provides the satisfaction of important shareholders. It has been said that the financial perspective is necessary, but insufficient for evaluating performances of the company. Most companies in their vision and mission,put the realization interests of shareholders in the place of the most important goals of the company. But, as with the other perspectives, only few companies succeded to turn the interests of shareholders in particular, the operational objectives and criteria by which to monitor their implementation . Typically, objectives and measures of financial perspective should be chosen in a way that will provide: survival of the company (for this purpose the most commonly used indicator for the company's success is cash flow) the success of the company (for this purpose, the most often used indicators are such as: revenue from sales or net profit) company development (for this purpose,several indicators are used such as: market share or revenue of involved capital). Balanced Scorecord system (BSC) is the most important method that supports multi-criteriafor measuring performances of the company. Its very important feature is the hierarchical ordering. Hierarchical are not arranged levels in the organization, but the components and elements of treats are. Originating point of the BSC is the vision of the company and all starts from that. The company should have a vision that is not only formalized through an appropriate statement of management, but also known to most employees. Beyond this, strategy is important. Vision is usually written as something in the sense: "To meet the needs of customers, to achieve the highest quality with the lowest prices" and so on. The strategy should show how the management thinks to achieve the vision. After identifying a vision and strategy, the objectives of the company are defining. At this stage, BSC brings innovation. It requires that the company's vision and strategy are are conducted into goals, but in several views simultaneously. It is typicaly to concretize the company's vision and strategy through financial goals. However, only defining goals is not enough. Their realization or not realization depends on certain factors called critical success factors and performance generators. These are factors which, if they are met, allows the company to achieve set of goals. Their identification is not easy at all and for that purpose it is required a good knowledge of business operations in the area to which he belongs. When the goals and critical success factors are identified ,in order come strategic actions and initiatives which are used to affect on performance generator, so that they provide satisfaction goals. When it is detected what should be affect on to achieve the objectives, then it should be said how to act. At this stage of the BSC, company management adopt concrete action plan of actions on the key success factors that will be used to realize goals, strategies and visions. Last but not least important step is identifying criteria and setting control points of the criteria for achieving each identified goal and its initiatives. One must find a way how to measure achievement of each goal set in each perspective. It is very easy with the objectives of the financial perspective. It is clear that net profit will be a measure of profitability, cash flow a measure for liquidity. Problems arise when the goals which should be measured are such as: customer satisfaction, initiative and work morale of employees, knowledge of employees and so on. So far, this very much important critical success factors for enterprises are not simply taken into consideration just because it was difficult to measure. BSC is now forcing management to find ways to do so.

4. CONCLUSION
As a conclusion for this review, the results which multicriteria methods carry out oposite to traditional methods of performance measurement company, are going to be summarized. Advantages of multicriteria methods are obvious and they are reflected in two areas: the purpose of measuring the performance and characteristics of their contents.

865

The basic contribution multicriteria methods is that they are directing measuring pe4formances toward vision and strategy. The purpose of performance measurement is no longer to find a culprit for the success or failure of companies, but to direct business towards achieving the vision and strategy. They provide translation of the vision and strategy into a system of concrete goals and measures that enables that their implementation is systematically and regularly monitored and measured. Furthermore, they measure not only the present value of the company's assets but also its ability to create value in the future. They are made to direct staff to those components of the business that are critical for the realization of the goals and strategies. Thus, these performance measurement systems grows their role and become really strategy systems respectively a part of a system of strategic management. Another important advantage that multicriteria methods of performance measurement company give, derives from the characteristics of the methods themselves. These characteristics are balance and transparency. The criteria for evaluation are balanced between long term and short-term, external and internal, quantitative and qualitative, financial and nonfinancial, past and future, and so on. In addition, multi-criteria methods respect transparency and reality. Number of measures that assesses the performance of companies is reduced to a reasonable number (usually 15 to 20). It can not be all that has change. Choiceing about 4 to 5 standards in every perspective, the company gets the system from 15 to 20 balanced indicators which are taken from the implementation of the vision and strategy. Moreover, managers did not need.

REFERENCES
[1] Firgo, M., The Balanced Ssorecord - and winning Performance Measurement System, Strategic Finance, January 2000. [2] Joksimovic, N., Financial Management, FON, Belgrade, 1998. [3] Meyer, M., Measuring and Managing Performance, Performance Management, Canbrialge, 1998. [4] Milicevic, V., economics business, FON, Belgrade, 2009. [5] Paunovic, B., economics business, Faculty of Economics, Belgrade, 2009.

866

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MANAGING AND CORPORATION MANAGEMENT

Ljiljana Peci
High Technical Mechanical School, Trstenik, SERBIA, e-mail: ljpecic72@gmail.com
Summary: Management is continious process which makes the corporation change itselfe and direct itselfe to a purpose of existance. And that purpose must be efective and eficiently reached. Defined in that manner, management is taken as specific tehnique which allows it to effective and efficient lead company and that is carring out in three phases: planning, organizing and controling. While carring out all these phases, some decisions are made from the board of directors. In the contemporary company that tim makes proffesionals and they are called managers. Their engagement in the company is realizing through three levels of management: strategic, tactical and operative. On the first hand , there is a different need for imlementation different knowledges from planning, organizing and controling, and tehnical, human and conceptual expertizam, on the other hand. Key words: management, phases of continuous process, planning, organizing, control, professional knowledge, hierarhical level.

1. INTRODUCTION Management is a continuous process that starts and directs business operations for achieving the purpose of its existence. The result of a management process is control decision and its implementation in business. The results of companie's operations are certain products and services that borne the needs of citizens as consumers, the economy and society, which is the basis for achieving get. In recent times, management as a kind of social technology that enables effectiveness and efficiency of enterprises. Viewed as a process, management has its phases: planning, organizing and controling operations. By planning you are is directing business, using organizing the company is training to effectively implement planning decisions and control establishes results achieved in business based on the planning process. Management is a dynamic process, because the conditions are changing in the company and in the economy, and it is necessary to adapt the behavior to the changeable business conditions. Managing returns efficiency of operations of the company by directing it to the achievement of acceptable targets.Management is a prerequisite for the survival, growth and enterprise development. It is not exhausted only by making management decisions for the implementation of the enterprise jobs . It assumes responsibility of management body for the efficient and effective use of factors of doing business. Decision-making in the modern enterprise is not a matter of individual but a group. Entrepreneur, as individual decisions maker in the entrepreneurial enterprise is changed to with managers as collective management body. Private property owners directly manage or through professional managers (managers) who manage business activities of modern enterprise. While managers in joint-stock companies are choosen by their own shareholders, in the state property they are selected by the competent national authorities. Character of property significantly affect the waythat mananagement make business. The role of managers is carried out not only from the property (in cases where the owners and Managers united in the same figures), but primarily from the "monopoly of knowledge" and"monopoly information. 2. MANAGEMENT EFFECTIVENESS AND EFFICIENCY OF COMPANY'S OPERATIONS Management is an element of activation. If you do not control the factors of business,the result is confusion (2, p. 4.). The task of management is to do what is desirable, first possible and then actual, which is why it is target

867

iented. And that goal is - to create customers, and, by accepting the marketing concept of operations, to make company be oriented to meeting the needs of the market in products and services. In meeting the goal of existence, or business purposes, it is important to make a clear distinction between effectiveness and efficiency of enterprises. It is believed that efficiency means that the company should always aim for a better way to currently do. Measure the effects of putting the relationship and costs incurred to achieve the effects. A effektiveness means that the company should always work the real thing. It is measured through the realization of profit in the market of products and services requirements demand. The efficiency is the transformation process. It is expressed with a function of output per unit of input. Measures which are used to indicate the efficiency of the transformation are: output per employee, the level of capacity utilization, cost per unit of product turnover ratio of financial assets and etc.. Since the company has to address the right things and to be effective (to do things the right way), you need to be as efficient as effective. The efficiency includes characteristics of the output and efficiency in its creation. The scientific literature the efficiency is treated as internal and effectiveness as external companie's problem. (2, p. 5). Namely, it is considered that the efficiency is a result of changes in the company, while effectiveness is a result of changes which affects the compan's relations with the environment in which it operates it's business activities. Effectiveness indicates how company meets customer market needs and efficiency in the way in which, therefore, use the factors of business. During the business process, goal achievement can be high and a low, but usage of resources or factors of business can be good and bad. A company can be effective but inefficient, but effective ineffective, inefficient and ineffective, or both, effectively and efficiently. The company is successfully if it is effective in achieving the goals and efficient in the use of resources and output operations.

3. STRATEGIC, TACTICAL AND OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT

When company manages the operations, it should take into account that company is as an open system, double related to the environment: obtain necessary inputs and make the delivery of the resulting output value,(2 pp. 7). There are two basic flow of activities: 1) logistics subsystem that deals with the conversion of inputs on output and 2) management subsystem, which deals with the direction and control of usiness. For transformative process of problem the inputs (human and physical, and financial and information factors business). Outputs are: products, services and ideas that are directed towards the market. The information which are used from logistic subsystems, are collected differently from those required for business management. In today's business environment, it is necessary to make a clear distinction between two main management parts in the company: strategic management and operational management (2, p. 7.). Business run under the strategic management should involve directing the company to acquire advantages over the competition. In that way, guidance should be alltogether: customer's structure, product range, production capacity, sales volume, quality, service and everything which ensure improvement in the prestige market. The ultimate goal of strategic management is to provide that enterprise's behavior is above average and possibly among the best in the competition. Subject of operational management in the company is a concrete way and quality of output in the transformation of company's inputs. The company should better use its own resources and its expertise in realization of current tasks for the realization of successful business in the market. In practical terms above, strategic management takes care how companies determine the total task which should be done, so the company can be to successful in business and operating management is to perform specific tasks in the best possible quality within the deadline, the necessary structure and with the less cost. But between the strategic and operational management in the company in exercising is no direct connection. It is another means of exercise but do not directly relate. For this reason, between them, as well as a link, there is tactical control appearing (5, pp. 24). Its strategic goal is to make decisions made on the highest levels of management in the company comprehensive and clear to the operational level management. This provides a comprehensive and effective exercise of the desired common objectives in the companies. Strategic enterprise management is the responsibility of specific organs and body owners (Meeting of shareholders), the management (board of directors) and the primary or general management (Board of Directors) companies. Tactical management is the responsibility of middle management (executives and service sectors) and operational management, operational management (executives offices, departments and working groups) in accordance with established levels of responsibility.

4. PHASES OF MANAGEMENT
Corporate governance is a continuous process that is analytically divided into planning, organizing, and controling (2, p. 15.). Planning, organizing and controlling are the phases of management and are different from

868

group activities (business functions) that are performed in the business structure companies. This difference exists because in the company exist: planning, organizing, and marketing controling , product development, manufacturing, commercial operations, finance, human resources jobs and other jobs and that means that they are managed individually just like a enterprise is managed in a whole. For that reason, it is said that planning, organizing and controlling are phases of management process aldo they are three separate scientific and technical disciplines and that means three separate professional work in the company. For their professional conduct is necessary quality knowledge and appropriate concepts and methodology underlying. The studying such concepts and methodologies is now commonly achieved in the study of governance and management. Planning, organizing and controling in the company are primarily performing by the appropriate management authorities. However, at medium and especially large companies, these activities can be undertaken and organizational units (departments, agencies, offices, groups, etc..) for planning, organizing and controling operations. Such organizational units, are not of executive assistants, but recommended, because they help administrative chain of command in carrying out their duties in domain of company's management. 5. MANAGEMENT AND MANAGERS IN THE ENTERPRISE Definition that the management is capability for performing tasks through people, is rooted in the understanding of Taylor, which suggests that the business is based on the operations management and jobs performance. This means that in the company, people can be shared on those who set tasks and those who perform provided tasks. Privately owned enterprises are managed by the owners directly or executives-managers as Professional management. Selection of managers for the management of joint-stock companies made Shareholders in public companies the appropriate authorities. This means that the character of ownership in the companies significantly affect the way they are managed. However, the role of managers in the company is not made only by the property, but primarily from the "monopoly of " knowledge and "monopoly" of information. In order to successfully perform their function, in the enterprise, managers must have three types of expertise. These skills are: technical, personnel and conceptual (4, p. 13.). Technical expertise is related with the ability to use the resources, technology and specialized knowledge related to methods, processes and procedures for performing the actual execution of work. Personnel competence is the ability to effectively resolve issues in the field of personnel in enterprises and their mutual relations. Conceptual competence is the ability to see organizational environment which is governed as a whole and to solve problems in favor of its integrity. Hence the technical expertise of professional conduct means actual knowledge of work activities. Personnel expertise means the ability for managers to work with staff in two senses: 1) as the member of working group (governing body, the managerial team or direct perpetrator of concrete task) and 2) as the leader who manages to do tasks through others. Conceptual expertise is the ability of viewing the company and its components as organizational units, knowledge of the roles, contents and manners of functioning of such units and ways of implementing interrelation in them and knowing ways how these parts fit into their immediate and wider environment. In order to be a successful manager, person must possess all three qualifications. Most of the companies in their development in terms of managing, cross through three strategic characteristic (2, pp. 19). In the first stage, one person dominates and performs several working roles. It is a general type manager and he, as an individual, is sufficient as long as the problems which the company faces are not under his ability in providing efficiency and effectiveness business. In the second stage, with the size increasing, the company needs, a team of managers for successfully conducting business. In the third stage, when the company becomes big, there are organizational units that have appropriate behavior autonomy in implementation of total business. These are dependently independent companies in a complex company where there is a need for managers to manage the whole enterprise and its constituent autonomous parts. Thus, as the company moves through each stage of its development, the requirements are changing according to its management. Some specific needs for the managers of general type are appearing, needs for the functional managers, and for the managers for closely specialized type. At the highest level of development, managers in the company are divided into: low, middle and top level and all of them should have appropriate technical, staff and conceptual skills for successfully exercised theirwork. In addition, the needs for knowledge of planning, organizing and control operations, as stages of management process, are different on the hierarch management levels (2,pp.19). Knowledge of planning is very important for managers at the highest level, since the planning decisions about: the objectives, policies, programs, strategies and plans are made at the the highest level. In contrast, the managers on the lowest level, who mostly perform well detailed routine tasks of managing, spent a lot of time devoted to control rather than planning and organization. Midle-level managers have an equal need for knowledge of all three phases of management,but within specific functional areas.

869

A similar situation is with the knowledge of expertise (2, p. 21). Conceptual skills is the most important for the highest level of management. He has the greatest need for reviewing the company as a whole, as the individual parts fit into a whole and the company as a whole fits into the social environment.Bottom management has the highest level of need for technical expertise because they are performing controling staff who are performing specific tasks. Mid-level management must have the technical expertise which is necessary for enabling them to communicate with associates (managers) and for understanding their problems. Even top managers must have some technical expertise, specially when technology is important for the company (production companies). All three levels of management must have the staff expertised for dealing with performing tasks through others.

6. CONCLUSION
Corporate governance is a continuous process of initiating and directing its business activities for achieving the desired results of operations. This is a permanent activity because for the company exists to satisfy their own needs, the needs of citizens as consumers, the economy and society that have a permanent character. Management is a prerequisite for the survival of growth and enterprise development. Its role is to integrate, coordinates and directs the activities of sub-companies and puts them in a rational relationship to the middle in which it conducts its business. The overall result is achieved through managing the performance of activities of planning, organizing and controling and actions that occur together in a continuous manner. Performing the activity of planning, organizing and controling, in fact,has to be understood as the way how by them is managing with marketing, product development, manufacturing, human resources, finance and other business functions take. In other words, the efficiently and effectively carrying out the process of transformation in the company assumes that the business functions: marketing, product development and uasluga, prizvodnjom, finance, human resources and others are managed by: planning, organizing and controling. Company, as an open adaptive control system, has three hierarchical levels: strategic, tactical and operational level. Strategic management establishes relations between company and the environment in order to achieve the desired objectives of the company. It is the ultimate management. Tactical level links strategic and operational levels of management. The operational level deals with the practical implementation requests of strategic level which tactical level is translated into operational purposes. In order to successfully manage the company,it is necessery to be conducted by appropriate professional team. Members of this team are called managers. Their tasks are: economic performance management company, managing managers, managing workers and management organization.

REFERENCES [1] Jovanovic, P., Management, YUPMA, Belgrade, 2009 2) Milisavljevic, M., Todorovic J.: Planning and
Policy Development Company, Contemporary Administration, Belgrade, 1995.

[2] Nikolic S.: Organization of Enterprise, Education, Ni, 2000. [3] M. Petkovic Janicijevic N., Miliki B.: Organization, Faculty of Economics, Belgrade, 2009. [4] Z. Radosavljevic.: Contemporary Management, Invention, Belgrade, 1994. [5] Radosavljevi' ., Tomic R.: Management of a modern business, company tatitu [6] copyrights and patents, Belgrade, 2004. [7] Vuenovi V., Lekovic B.: Management, elind, Belgrade, 1998.

870

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

REAL SECTOR IN SERBIA BETWEEN TRANSITION AND CRISIS

Union University of Belgrade, Faculty of Industrial Management, Kruevac, SERBIA, e-mail: drarad@nadlanu.com 2 Union University of Belgrade, Faculty of Entrepreneurial Business, Belgrade, SERBIA 3 Univeristy of Novi Sad, Technical Faculty Mihajlo Pupin Zrenjanin, SERBIA 4 National Employment Service, Belgrade, SERBIA
1

Dragan Radovi1, Jugoslav Anii 2, Zvonko Sajfert3, Branka Radovi4

Summary: At the moment, Serbia is in a deep economic crisis, which is not only the consequence of a global financial crisis, but it is, primarily, the result of economic policy that is conducted in the previous period. Instead of a gradual adaptation and inclusion of economy in market flows with maximum preservation of production capacities, the creators of economic policy in the transition period have accepted the concept of growth, which is based on overheated demand and export, large public and private consumption, which resulted in growing external and internal imbalances. Implementation of privatization process, in which the model of privatization by sale dominates, the unfinished privatization and restructuring of large public enterprises and infrastructure activities, lack of post-privatization restructuring and corporative entrepreneurship have disabled the establishing of efficient structure of real sector, and also, they have prevented the development of industry as a key generator of economic growth. Main economic indicators point to the inefficiency and slow down of economic reforms in Serbia that has a negative effect on the competitiveness of economy, which significantly lags not only behind the economies of EU countries to whom we aspire but behind the region as well. The aim of this paper is point out to the main causes of the current position of real sector in Serbia, compared with the region and wider environment, as well as to the possible appropriate measures of facing the crisis, which should be taken in order to open the way for as faster and better recovery and growth of Serbian economy. Key words: real sector, competitiveness, development policy, economic crisis.

1. INTRODUCTION
The economic policy of Serbia in transition period was based on excessive public and personal consumption, over valuated exchange rate, growth of external indebtedness and inefficient privatization, which resulted in negative alteration of economic structure of our country. In the period 2001-2008, the realized GDP growth rates were relatively high, but with insufficient development of industrial sector: the highest growth was achieved by service activities, closely related with large and economically unjustified import, while the development of the real sector was completely absent. As a result, there were imbalances produced, both internal, associated with the relationship between consumption and production and savings and investment, as well as external, which have the most illustratively refracted about foreign trade and balance of payments balance. The entire transition period is characterized by the absence of developmental economic policy, which should be based on restrictive fiscal policy that limits public consumption and thus creates the bigger space for private investments, on the loose monetary policy manifested in low interest rates for financing the enterprises, which want to invest, on the creation of a favorable investment climate and market liberalization realized as the abolition of monopoly structures that will lead to the improvement of the quality of products and services and reduction of their costs. The economic system of Serbia is overburdened with the structural discrepancies, backward technology, high production costs, inefficiency, and low level of investments and small export, which has a special significance in terms of economic crisis. For a long time, the production of Serbian enterprises is characterized by technological obsolescence and incompatibility with international standards [2]. Rapid economic growth, which is necessary for Serbia, primarily requires big investments in order to accelerate the economic growth and reduce the gap to

871

the developed world economies. It is very important that Serbia, as a country in transition, understands and uses all the positive and avoids so many negative effects of globalization, as a process that is dominant and that will further be developed, because it is well-known that globalization is favored by large world companies and that it is not always in the function of economic growth and development of all the regions in the world. In that sense, the intention of the paper is to determine the basic causes of the decline of economic activity is Serbia in transition period, which has made even worse the relative position of our country, measured by parameters of competitiveness in international framework, and to indicate the possible direction of development in the future. The most important questions that require answers are: To which extent was the existing state influenced by economic policy conducted in transition period, and to what extent it was influenced by internal factors in economic enterprise?, How did the worlds economic crisis deepen and sharpen all the negative sides of our economic structure?, Which is the easiest and the fastest way out of this situation?, What kind of reforms does Serbia need to achieve again the high economic growth that was based on healthy foundations? Which are the personnel decisions on which the future development strategy needs to be based?

2. MACROECONOMIC POLICY IN TRANSITIONAL PERIOD

In the reconstruction and economic development of developed European countries and newly-industrialized countries, the state has played a major role that was especially reflected through: Protection of domestic industry by the measures of economic policy, Planning the industrial development and influence on guiding the investments through a large number of incentive measures, Investing in human capital education of staff, Assisting the functioning of large systems energy, transport, communications, Encouraging scientific and technological researches, providing the scientific and technological infrastructure and the selection of import technology, Conducting developmental, macro-economical, financial and foreign trade policy by the measures of regulating the investment activity, price control and fiscal encouragements, Prevention of monopoly and oligopoly market structures, Introduction of regulatory mechanisms for the investments control, credit allocation, prices and also, through public enterprises, the interventions in the area of production. However, the results of macro-economic policy in transition period are far from satisfactory. During the transition, due to restrictive credit-monetary and fiscal policy and unrealistic exchange rate, in particular sectors the production volume was reduced to the extent that they were in danger to be completely shut down. Some economic activities disappear, and they are, slowly and in a small volume, replaced by the new ones through the development of sectors in small and mid-sized enterprises and through foreign direct investments. The following question appears: Is there a long-term strategy of the development of our economy and on which is it based? In the absence of the long-term development strategy, restructuring of our economy is done in compliance with the criteria of world market and interests of big capital multi-national corporations. It is known that the globalization is a process that leads to opening national economies by the deletion the economic borders and national markets with the aim of their merging into a unique world market, but that is also the process that leads to the state of further divergence between the rich and the poor. Was the previous economic interest of Serbia to expose the economy in such as state to a direct competition of highly developed market economies? In such terms of competition, it came to the failure of some sectors of economy, whose products cannot be realized in a foreign market due to the low competitiveness (low productivity, obsolete technology and high production costs). The sectors that survive are those in which the big capital finds its interest through the privatization and direct investments. Do the survival of these sectors and the failure of those where the big capital doesnt have its interest fit into the interests of economy as a whole? Is it, for example, an interest to put out the production in metals sector, or to try to restore both this one and other traditional sectors? The privatization goals from the beginning of transition have become non-transparent over the time and instead of being the tool in hands of privatization participant, they have become a tool in hands of various stakeholder coalitions, which had and realized their visions of transformation of ownership and managerial structures. A certain number of persons who owned the capital were allowed to buy the enterprises far below the real price, and the closeness of those persons with political elites has provided for them that nobody asks for the origin of that capital. The state has shown big indifference to the privatization of small and mid-sized enterprises and let them to the mercy of todays rich people and political elite. Particularly negative is the fact that buyers of production enterprises had no obligation to resume the basic activity of the enterprise, but they have, by purchasing those enterprises, created a huge surplus of labor and significantly influenced on the increase of unemployment rate, which will be a burning issue of our economy for a long time. The same happens with the

872

privatization of trade networks (food, textile, shoes...), in which there were not only the workers of those enterprises that lost their jobs, but all the employees in the companies of their suppliers throughout Serbia. In contrast to Serbia, the developed European countries and newly-industrialized countries were taking into account the logic of market laws, but, at the same time, the rules of the game in the market were directly influenced by the states that have obeyed those rules in the situation when they were a participant in the economy. The states have eliminated the observed deficiencies of the market, such as monopoly positions, overvalued exchange rate, underestimated capital, labor market rigidity and such. In addition, they have intervened when the market was not providing optimal allocation of resources; they have encouraged the export, research and development, labor training and such. Many solutions, which were proved in post-war experiences of reconstruction and development of market economy of West Europe and newly-industrialized countries, can be adapted and applied according to our developmental needs. Model of development of the open economies that are freely integrated into world economy, by the model of the World Bank and International Monetary Fund, is not the only nor the most successful model, and in the example of Serbian (and some other in the recent past) economy , it has given negative results.

3. THE RESULTS OF PRIVATIZATION IN TRANSITION PERIOD

After ten years of transition of the Serbian economy, we can conclude that the results are rather modest, and also, in many segments, they are among the lowest ones in Europe. In that way, GDP per capita in Serbia is 4,500 Euros, which is four times less than Slovenia, and over six times less than the average GDP EU-15, which is 29,200 Euros. Serbia is in a group of countries with the lowest standards in Europe: net salary in Serbia in 2009 was around 400 Euros in average, so the purchasing power of our population is three times lower than the average in EU. The total external debt of Serbia in the end of 2009 (according to the National Bank of Serbia) is 22, 8 billion Euros, of which 10,9 billion refers to the external debt of enterprises. All of this is followed by a very high unemployment rate, which, according to the international definition (population between 15-64 years), is 16.9%. Market liberalization, which was the basis of economic policy of the Serbian Government, was premature and undeveloped, especially after a decade of isolation and sanctions, as well as physical destruction of big production capacities during the bombing. Our economy was not prepared to deal with much stronger market economy of the developed world, and not even the environment, particularly having in mind the global character of contemporary environment. Global economic and financial crisis has only deepened and released to the surface all the failures of economic policy in transitional period, so that in 2009, the economy and especially the industry fell into recession, which has resulted in the decline of GDP by 3%. However, the roots of crisis in our economy do not have much to do with the roots of global economic crisis, and therefore, the measures to mitigate and overcome the crisis in our country need to be different and adapted to our economic situation. Table 1: Main macroeconomic indicators DESCRIPTION 2009 GDP (in millions of dinars-constant prices 2002) 1.311.865 GDP growth rate -3,0 Inflation rate 10,4 Export (in millions of Euros) 5.962 Import (in millions of Euros) 11.157 Foreign trade deficit (in millions of Euros) 5.195 Number of employees (in thousands) 1.857 Gross income (in dinars) 44.147 Net income (in dinars) 31.733 Ratio of the euro in relation to dinar 95,89 Source: Bureau of Statistics, National Bank of Serbia 2008 1.352.418 5,5 6,8 7.428 15.494 8.066 1.990 45.674 32.746 88,6

The fall of GDP in 2009 is the most evident in processing industry and construction, and the largest stake of GDP still belongs to the sectors which have no exchange transport, warehousing, communications and activities related to the real estate, renting and business activities. The average growth rate of Serbian economy in the period 2001-2008 was 5.4%, and service sector has largely contributed to the growth of GDP from 55.7% in 2001 to 64.2% in 2008. Structure of the gross value added of Serbian economy is significantly different than the structure of economies of the neighboring countries, because in our country, the participation of other sectors is much larger in relation to the participation of industrial sector in GDP.

873

GDP growth in this period was based on the growth of domestic demand, growth of foreign trade and fiscal deficit, inflow of the foreign capital and high external indebtedness. Much less attention is dedicated to the measures that encourage the innovation and productivity of the real sector, growth of export and investments and improvement of the overall competitiveness of our economy, especially industry. This kind of concept limits the development of domestic real sector and it is not sustainable for a long time because it is based on the inflow of foreign means of payment in terms of a very low export. Table 2 Grow of processing industry 2001-2008

S no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Country Polland Bulgaria Slovakia Romania Hungary Croatia Serbia

Growth in % 84 76 61 41 55 40 16

The results in Table 2 indicate one of the major causes of the lagging of the overall economic growth of our country in transition period, and that is a neglected industrial development, especially the processing sector of this industry, which is the main lever of industrial and economic development of the majority of economically developed countries, as well as the majority of countries from our region. Source: Institute for Development, 2009. Negative tendencies of the development of Serbian economy have resulted in reduced volume of activities, so, in 2009, there was a decline of the total revenues in relation to the previous year by 7.3%, while the decline of the expenditures was somewhat lower and it amounted 6.4%. Table 3: Results of the companies operations in millions of dinars DESCRIPTION 2009 2008 ______________________________________ Amount Number of Amount Number of companies companies 278.217 373.949 51.114 31.260 300.026 343.533 54.960 28.165

1. 2.

Net profit Net loss

Negative net financial result 95.732 43.507 Source: Agency for Business Registers, The announcement of the results of economy operations in Serbia, achieved in 2009 Table 3 shows that the companies in Serbia in 2009 have expressed a negative net financial result on the total level, in the amount of 95,732 million of dinars, which is by 120.00% higher in relation to the previous year, with the fact that 31,260 companies have operated at a loss. In addition, the companies have achieved a positive business result (business revenues are higher than business expenditures) on the total level in 2009, but the business profit wouldnt be sufficient to support the burden of servicing the existing debts, and thus, due to high expenditures of interests and negative foreign exchange differences, the financial loss had a decisive impact on the expressed net financial result. High interest rates and negative exchange rate differences are the problem of Serbian economy throughout the entire transition period, and unfortunately, there was almost no progress in that field, regardless of the statements of authorities in Serbia who claim that we have a stable and profitable banking sector.

874

Table 4: Structure of the total revenue and expenditure of the companies in millions of dinars 2009 2008 Amount Share (%) Amount Share (%) Total revenue 6.225.006 100.0 6.711.821 100,0 Total expenditure 6.300.184 100.0 6.728.318 100,0 1. Business revenues 5.792.326 93,0 6.208.914 92,5 2. Business expenditures 5.605.842 89,0 6.015.453 89,4 I Business profit 186.484 193.461 1. Financial revenues 197.295 3,2 244.361 3,6 2. Financial expenditures 414.160 6,6 476.788 7,1 II Financial loss 216.865 232.427 1. Other revenues 235.385 3,8 258.546 3,9 2. Other expenditures 280.182 4,4 236.077 3,5 III Other profit/loss -44.797 22.469 Source: Agency for Business Registers, The announcement of the results of economy operations in Serbia, achieved in 2009 In the structure of total resources in 2009, the capital has a share of 42.4%, while short-term and long-term liabilities have a share of 38.7%, i.e. 17.6%, which means that the relation between own and borrowed sources of financing is extremely unfavorable, and that relation is worse in comparison with the previous year. The share of own capital in total sources of financing is reduced from 39.7% in 2008 to 36.7% in 2009, which indicates a deterioration of financial structure of the companies. Total liabilities of the companies in 2009 were increased by 9.3% in relation to the previous year, more precisely, the long-term liabilities by 13.3% and short-term by 7.2%, which has resulted in the increase of indebtedness of the companies, so that one dinar of borrowed capital is covered by merely 0.64 dinars of own capital (in 2008 this ratio was 0.71). Despite the difficult access to the sources of financing, the total loans in 2009 were increased by 16.3% in relation to 2008, so that the loans have increased their share by 24.7% (23.2% in 2008) in the structure of total finances. Particularly negative circumstance is that, due to the lack of long-term sources of financing, the companies were forced to redirect to the use of short-term (more expensive) loans so that, according to the maturity, the structure of loans was deteriorated, which is also shown by the information that long-term and short-term loans have equally participated in total loans (50,3 % : 49,7%). In such an economic environment, the real sector has recorded a decrease in the rate of return on total assets and own capital, while the general liquidity ratio is 0.97, which demonstrates that for servicing of the short-term liabilities, the companies need to provide new loans, which leads to further accumulation of liabilities and generation of the insolvency growth. Table 5 Sources of funds for companies on 31.12.2009. in 000 dinars DESCRIPTION Amount Share (%) Capital 4.024.159.599 42,40 Long-term provisions 72.439.681 0,76 Long-term liabilities 1.667.552.481 17,60 Short-term liabilities 3.669.677.413 38,70 Deferred tax liabilities 50.978.785 0,54 Total 9.484.807.959 100,00 Source: Agency for Business Registers, The announcement of the results of economy operations in Serbia, achieved in 2009 The privatization process has brought a large number of industrial enterprises into an unenviable position. Although in the period 2001-2009, the privatization has provided revenues in the amount of 2.88 billion euros, these funds were not properly directed to investments, to the crediting of developmental and export projects of industry and the restructuring of the carriers of industrial growth in this period. There was no significant improvement of the business environment nor there were any fundamental reforms carried out, which would amortize and mitigate the negative consequences of the transitional period. Basic structural problems of the real sector from the beginning of transition period are also present today, some of them are deepened, such as the dominance of traditional industrial production, high share of dirty industries, low level of technical and technological equipment, low level of competitiveness and insufficient export orientation. DESCRIPTION

875

3. ECONOMIC POLICY DURING THE CRISIS

Economic policy in the previous transition period has brought Serbian economy to one of the biggest problems, and that is chronic insolvency: in the end of 2009, there were recorded 66,438 enterprises, entrepreneurs and other legal entities whose had their accounts blocked, i.e. the ones that are not able to perform business operations, with the total blockade amount over 300 billions of dinars. Compared with the information about insolvency on 13.01.2009. (56.158 enterprises, entrepreneurs and other legal entities unable to perform business operations), the trend of increasing number of the ones unable for business operations, which indicates the difficulties in business that come from the conditions in which the business activity is performed and insufficiently simulative business environment. Such extreme and widespread business inability influences the entire economic activity, ability of economic entities to settle the contractual obligations, obligations to the state concerning the taxes, to the creditors, banks on the basis of return on the loans approved, as well as the complete business activity of those who have the potential for growth under the condition that they realize the value created for the market. The causes of insolvency in Serbian economy are numerous, starting with those that are the consequence of an inappropriate privatization model in this period to the subjective factors in the enterprises. Many negative sides of our business environment became visible, from the inherited unfavorable economic structure from the past, obsolete business habits and methods of work to the widespread corruption in the system, embodied in a number of new owners and founders of the enterprise with a dubious origin of capital and lack of managerial knowledge. The act of change of ownership is not always a guarantee of more efficient operations, so that a large number of privatized enterprises achieve rather poor results in comparison to the period before privatization. Domestic physical and legal entities, as new owners who have obtained the capital mostly through privatization in the shadow of business transactions, need to accept the economic laws and profit rates that are several times lower than those from the period of sanctions, hyperinflation or war environment. All that has influenced that the business problems are solved in the capital market, through bank loans from domestic and foreign sources, without paying attention to the relation of own capital and assets to the borrowed sources, as well as without taking the maturity of indebtedness into account. Contrary to the above, in the background there were very important tasks for strengthening the competitiveness of domestic economy such as the development of management, introduction and implementation of the quality system and innovative processes, realized as the improvement of products, services and processes in the enterprise. In this period, many enterprises are struggling for survival in the market and do not have resources for investing in improvement and development of products and services: the existing capacities for supporting the enterprises in developing and testing new products or improving the existing ones should be identified and a program for supporting the development and implementing the innovations needs to be created. Competent state institutions should prepare a legal framework for the development of the Republic as innovation society by which the formation and work of innovation centers will be regulated, as well as the formation and work of business and technology incubators and science-technology parks, transfer of knowledge and results of scientific and developmental researches to the enterprises in order to develop the innovative internationally competitive products and use and protect the intellectual property. General insolvency is also contributed by the state, on the basis of delays in meeting the obligations in the transfer of funds to budget users, by which the damage chain is created due to the delays in meeting the contractual obligations to suppliers and producers. These delays affect the entire significant sectors such as construction, which has a great influence on the development of many other activities. On the other hand, the monopolies created in retail network for food traffic, and thanks to their position dictate the deadlines for payment that the small producers are forced to accept in the absence of other possibilities for placement of their products. Crediting the economy in this period is characterized by high interest rates, much higher than those in developed countries and even those in region, which is a consequence of the policy of banking sector in our country. Loans to the economy have amounted to 8.82 billion of Euros in the end of 2009, and they have increased by 6.00 billion (index 3.13 ) in comparison with 2003, but the growth of loans to the economy was smaller than the growth of loans to the population: in the end of 2009 it was 4.4 billion of dinars, and 2003 it was 0.4 billion of dinars (index 11.00), which indicates the orientation of banking sector to the larger crediting the population due to the smaller risk of credit loans. Sector of small enterprises has special problems of getting loans, due to the inability of adequate assurance of funds. In addition, due to the increased risk of crediting the economy, our commercial banks are increasingly buying the securities issued by National Bank of Serbia, which reduces the credit potential for crediting the economic development. For adequate crediting of our real sector, it is necessary to establish a development bank, capable of long-term lending, as well as smaller financial institutions for crediting small enterprises and entrepreneurs. In Serbia, we have the fluctuating exchange rate that is formed in interbank and foreign exchange market, but the requirement of entrepreneurs is that the National Bank of Serbia can use the instruments at its disposal to the

876

maximum, so that the oscillations of dinar would be as smaller on the daily basis and that the financial blows that cost the economy and citizens so much could be reduced. Having in mind the previous experiences, it is completely logical that the entrepreneurs know at least one of the predictable frameworks of the movement of the exchange rate in the following period, in order to avoid negative consequences of its abrupt changes. As a reminder, in the fourth quarter of 2008, the exchange rate has increased from the ratio 1EUR=76.73 dinars on the 1st October 2008 to 91.63 dinars on the 04th December 2008, which is an increase of about 20%, and which had a direct impact on expressing the loss or profit of many companies in 2008, with all the repercussions that such results cause. According to that, we should have in mind that the exporters who use repromaterial from domestic sources are favored by high exchange rate and weakening of dinar, while the situation with exporters is reverse, as well as with the enterprises that make their product of imported materials and sell it in domestic market. Of course, the biggest part of population favors the strong dinar, because their salaries are in dinars, regardless of the exchange rate fluctuations. Besides the insolvency, the economy is also burdened with indebtedness, both to domestic and to foreign lenders and creditors, so that in total foreign debt of the Republic of Serbia, in the end of 2009, the enterprises participate with about 50%, with the fact that liabilities exceed the capital value 1.3 times, and 1.5 times the value of current assets. In such a situation, large number of legal entities was stricken by the new Law on Bankruptcy, according to which all the entities that are blocked for more than three years will be the ones on whom the provisions of the automatic start of bankruptcy procedure will be applied: automatic bankruptcy is applied from 31st March 2010 for 10,980 legal entities with the debt of 100.6 billions of dinars.

4. MEASURES OF ECONOMIC POLICY AND DIRECTIONS OF FURTHER DEVELOPMENT

In December of 2008, the Government has adopted a document Economic crisis and its influence on Serbian economy, with the framework program of measures for mitigation of the effects of economic crisis, which are restrictive for one part (reduction of consumption) and for another, they are encouraging (in order to avoid recession). The Governments Plan for economic stability of Serbia (adopted in April 22009) has the following priorities: Cheaper state administration (reduction of the number of employees in state administration at all levels, frozen pensions and salaries in administration); Stimulus package for economy (subsidized loans for economy, consumer loans to citizens for purchasing domestic products, loans for investments and liquidity); Social responsibility and protection of the citizens standard (payment of contributions for pension and health insurance of the employees, connecting the years of service, financial assistance for the disadvantaged , preventing further abuses in privatization process); Active measures of employment (support to the employment of 10,000 young trainees, public works program, favorable loans for the sector of small and mid-sized enterprises); Capital investments in infrastructure. In the May 2009, Serbia has signed a stand-by arrangement with IMF and, in that way, it evaded the crash of financial market and unforeseeable negative consequences for the real sector. In that way, the time was bought for the execution of extremely necessary transformations in the society, so that it could be possible to build economic and social system of the country on the real basis. This implies the restructuring of the entire public sector and public administration in order to create more efficient and cheaper state apparatus, to reduce ubiquitous bribery and corruption and the reduction of ballast on economys back. The adequate judicial reform, building a stable and strong legal infrastructure is a necessary condition for the creation of a positive business environment in the country, without which there is no serious arrival of foreign investors to our market. Unfortunately, those processes are now very slow and they are more of a cosmetic than essential nature, which can lead Serbia into a more unfavorable position than the todays, because the state is intensively borrowing and it is on the verge of highly indebted countries. The growth of Serbian economy after economic crisis, observed in medium term, will be slow, which is extremely unfavorable for our country because of low GDP and high unemployment. For that reason, it is crucial for Serbia to accelerate its integration into Europe and to provide the inflow of foreign direct investment in this way, with which it could realize the acceptable economic growth, as well as to provide a stimulating economic environment for export and substitution of import by domestic reforms. In addition, big fiscal defict and public debt represent a serious obstacle to the future economic growth, so it is necessary to have a firm political agreement on necessary reforms of public consumption in medium term and the movement of public expenditures and revenues in the several following years.

877

What is also disturbing is the non-existence of a clear strategy for exiting the crises: decisions and measures of the government are made under duress and ad-hoc, and not by consensus with vision and long-term effect. Government measures are mostly made post-festum, there is no proactive action in order to make timely moves by which the negative consequences of economic crisis are avoided. Competent ministries in our Government (Ministry of Finance, Ministry of Economy) as well as the National Bank of Serbia, often give completely opposite opinions of the key ways to exit the crisis, such as the issues of tax reform, fiscal relief of the economy, foreign exchange rate, ways to increase demand etc, and due to all this, the real sector suffers the biggest negative consequences. In addition, the Government is the main generator of inflation tensions through the measures of excise policy, as well as the increase of prices (electricity, gas, utilities, PTT) that are within its jurisdiction. As in the previous years in Serbia the most investments were in the fields of banking, telecommunications and real estates, i.e. service activities, the orientation is necessary in order to attract those who want to produce, since Serbia has to be export-oriented country and service activities, no matter how profitable, do not make goods for export. The attention should be directed to economic sectors that have a special strategic significance thanks to their ability of adding new value to the natural resources, contribution to the higher foreign inflow, impact on the increase of employment, encouraging the regional development and creation of the conditions so that our country could use the opportunities that come with the progress of information and communication technologies. In our country, there are four sectors identified that have the biggest economic potential and those are the following: processing of agricultural products, industrial production, tourism and e-business.

6. CONCLUSIONS
Serbian economy is affected by global economic crisis much more than it was expected, having in mind the assessments and official statements of the creators of economic policy. Accumulated and systemic unsolved problems, which date decades back, under the additional pressure of the influence of global economic crisis, most seriously endanger the activities in the real sector, especially in three most significant sectors that represent the real part of economy: agriculture, industry and construction. The concept of ownership problems and liberalization in 2001 has additionally deteriorated the chances for a rapid and efficient economic recovery and further development. Ownership changes have led to the collapse of many enterprises, loss of large number of workplaces and redistribution of the social wealth in favor of a small number of well-collected individuals and interest groups. In the privatization process, the attention wasnt paid to the fact that the effects of the process of ownership changes should primarily ensure the survival of the enterprise and then its restructuring and market adaptation. The crisis of the society has strongly shaken the economic system and the chances for a rapid recovery of economy. The consequences of the global economic crisis have significantly deteriorated the economic conditions, but also they certainly have intensified the already existing profound disruptions in Serbian society and economy. The specified indicators in this period point out to the fact that the problems were not seriously approached to by the implementation of the adopted concept of reforms from 2001. Unfavorable effects of accumulated difficulties and postponing of the solution are expressed through the significant weakening of all essential economic indicators: (GDP per capita, inflation rate, export, employment, earnings etc). Inconsistency of measures in realization of the recovery strategy has influenced the operations of the economy, development of the society, standard of citizens, employment etc. Premature and overstated activities in liberalization and deregularization of the processes that took place in the market, similar to the models implemented in other states, have excluded one important fact: Serbia didnt have and it still hasnt the established institutions that would monitor the changes and provide the protection of social interest, as well as interests of new owners and employees. Failed reform of state and institutions, accepted models of financing by the international institutions, such as IMF, which have located the curbing and maintenance of low inflation in the focus of Government activities and neglected economic growth and development, increase of employment and decrease of alarming unemployment, reduction of public consumption and preservation of financial stability, have the most directly contributed to the deepening of social and economic crisis. The exit should be not be looked for in excessive borrowing, but primarily through increasing the efficiency of economy, changes in institutions, regulation of general and business environment, regulation of everything that is not regulated and deregulation of all the solutions that contribute to slowing down the tasks development and higher efficiency of enterprise. Serbia needs to turn to its own resources, to their larger exploitation, improvement of activities in the real sector, reindustrialization, and investments in production and service capacities that have their chance, first of all, in the international market. Rationalization and reduction of public consumption, smaller dependence of international financial institutions is the key to changes that lead to a better exploitation of the resources available. Insufficient activity in the enterprises is mostly conditioned by the regulation of general and business environment and it is one of the key factors for a successful economic recovery and managing the difficulties in economic operations.

878

Main tasks of economic and development policy in the following period in Serbia are macroeconomic and market stability, sustainable economic growth based on the recovery and development of the real sector, primarily agriculture and industrial production, export increase, reduction of import, increase of employment, reduction of foreign debt and negative foreign trade balance. Insufficient engagement of the labor and a slow inclusion into the world of work indicates the lack of motivation for work, lack of good and well-paid jobs, and the problem of grey economy. These difficulties are the most directly affecting the weakest sector of the enterprises, small and medium enterprises. The state, which is investor in many cases, has the methods to contribute the strengthening of the economic activities and economic development. Unfortunately, the practice shows the opposite! Not meeting the contractual obligations, in jobs where it is the investor, the most directly causes insolvency and collapse of a large number of enterprises that depend on budget funds and also the loss of workplaces or motivation for the work that is not paying off. By development policy, it is necessary to stimulate the investment activity, facilitate the use of the means encouraging for investments in enterprises that deal with production and export of the products of a higher level of processing, services in cooperation with foreign partners, create preconditions for cost reduction at least in strategic sectors that will contribute to a stable and dynamic economic growth and achievement of goals of the economic and developmental policy of the country. Investments in infrastructure can be encouraging for the entire investment activities, primarily foreign direct investments and also, opening new workplaces. Institutional changes should reduce unnecessary and expensive administration, to make the process simpler, cheaper and more independent from state regulation in terms of issuing the consents, permits and complicated procedures of monitoring. Deep economic and social crises are largely the products of the existing political relations, which put in the first place the individual and particular interests, which has led to the promotion of deviant social phenomena such as bribe and corruption, while moral values and responsibilities are neglected, and we are facing a deep crisis of institutions, moral, culture, education, media, family... in order to repair the general crisis, we need a strategy of changes on the level of state, based on the national consensus with clearly determined guidelines of further economic and political way of Serbia. Without that, Serbia will be among the last ones to exist the economic crisis, with a threat that social crisis spreads even more and that it lasts for unacceptably long time. Because of everything that was mentioned, it is economically unacceptable for Serbia to borrow in order to satisfy the needs of extremely high budget consumption, which cannot be compensated by real sources, to direct the largest part of the debt to interventions in foreign market or filling the budget, with no effects to the development of economy, and to leave the bill for such policy to todays and future generations. Public debt management strategy is imposed as inevitable and urgent need in order to avoid the consequences, which have already appeared in some too indebted countries (Greece etc). The success of future development largely depends on the cessation of the negative selection of staff (by party affiliation) because the measures that contribute to the exit from economic crisis can be realized only by the experts who are not interested in politics, and it cannot be performed by some work groups, which are, in fact, informal centers of decisions in society and economy, which have largely contributed to inefficient changes and inviolability of the current situation.

REFERENCES
[1] Vlada Republike Srbije, 2008. : Memorandum o budetu, ekonomskoj i fiskalnoj politici za 2009. godinu sa projekcijama za 2010. i 2011. godinu, Beograd, 2008. [2] Radovi D. Radovi B.: Orijentacija ka proizvodnji paradigma promena u realnom sektoru Srbije, DEB Ekonomski vidici, Godina XV Broj 2. str: 191-206 [3] Anii J. ekerevac Z.: Ekonomska politika u tranzicionom periodu efekti na razvoj realnog sektora, DEB Ekonomski vidici, jun 2010, Godina XV Broj 2. str: 207-219 [4] Zaki Z., Rikalovi G., Stojanovi : Ruralni razvoj u fokusu nove industrijalizacije, DEB Ekonomski vidici, jun 2010, Godina XV Broj 2. str: 133-145 [5] Kovaevi M.: Dimenzije i uzroci dramatinog stanja realnog sektora privrede Srbije, DEB Ekonomski vidici, jun 2010, Godina XV Broj 2. str: 113-132, [6] Republika Srbija, Agencija za privredne registre: saoptenje o rezltatima poslovanja privrede u Republici Srbiji ostvarenim u 2009. godini, Beograd, jul 2010. [7] Narodna banka Srbije (2009), Analiza duga Republike Srbije, jun 2010. [8] Vlada Republike Srbije: Nacionalna strategija razvoja Srbije 2006-2012., Beograd, 2005. [9] Statistiki bilten NBS, jun, 2010. Beograd, [10] www.emportal.rs [11] www.economist.com [12] www.nspm.rs

879

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ANALYSIS OF DYNAMICS OF FOREIGN INVESTMENTS TO UKRAINE

National Technical University of Ukraine Kiev Polytechnic Institute, Kiev, UKRAINE, e-mail: natasha1978@ukr.net 2 University of Banking of the National bank of Ukraine, Kiev, UKRAINE, e-mail: gerasimchuk@kpi.ua
1

N. Skorobogatova1, S. Andros2

Summary: Meaningfulness of investment processes is analyzed for steady development of country economy. The positive and negative sides of bringing in of foreign capital are selected as a sourcing investment. The dynamics of foreign investments is presented in a country for 2000-2009. The factors of investment attractiveness of country are structured. Problems limiting bringing in of foreign investments to Ukraine are grounded. The main measures carried out for period of independence of the state are selected, with the purpose of integration in the world economic association and improvements of investment climate in a country. The ways of perfection of investment climate are offered in Ukraine. Key words: innovations, investments, investing, financing.

1. INTRODUCTION
Research of problems of investing of economy always was in a spotlight economic science. This situation is predefined by that investments are direct-coupled with all industries of economic activity, determining the process of economic welfare and development of society on the whole. In modern terms they are a major backerup steady development of economy of country, structural changes in the national economy, technical progress, increase of high-quality economic performance indicators on mykro- and macrolevels. Activation of investment process is one of key mechanisms of socio-economic transformations. Foreign investments are a fundamental factor for the decision of problem of lack of financial means of domestic investors with the purpose of providing of requirements of national economy and his innovative development. At the effective use of investments the state can not only compensate the lack of internal investment resources but also promote effectiveness of process of production, competitiveness of products due to the use of the newest technologies and progressive experience of management of other countries of world. Exactly bringing in of foreign investments is instrumental in going of the state into world markets, to adjusting of connections with world leaders, to the findpath overcoming of crisis in a country [1, p. 455]. Thus, without the increase of volume of foreign investments to Ukraine a national economy will not be able to improve the position and successfully to enter in the modern world economic system. Therefore research of the modern state of the foreign investing in the economy of Ukraine acquires the special actuality. Foreign investors spare considerable attention to the estimation of investment climate in the process of acceptance of strategic decisions. In economic literature by the problem of estimation of investment climate and investment attractiveness of the state, to determination of ways of their improvement such scientists get busy as: I. Blank, S. Gutkevych, V. Gerasimchuk, G. Melnik, O. Nosova, P. Fisher, O. Yakovlev and many other [2 - 8].

2. RAISING OF TASK
The analysis of dynamics of volumes and directions of foreign investments is a research purpose to Ukraine, determination of existent problems of the foreign investing and search of possible ways of their decision. For achievement of this purpose the following problems are set:

880

- to analyze an investment climate in a country; - to explore the dynamics of volumes and change in the structure of foreign investments to Ukraine with the purpose of exposure of features of this process and determination of main obstacles; - to analyze possible measures with the purpose of activation of the foreign investing; - to expose the main problems of the foreign investing to Ukraine by the discovery of factors of negative influence on the process of the foreign investing in a national economy and to offer the possible ways of their decision.

3. METHODOLOGY
Methodological basis of scientific search was made by the following methods: mathematical statistics - at the analysis of dynamics of volumes and structure of foreign investments; walkthrough - at determination of existent problems of process of the foreign investing in a country; scientific generalization and systematization - at determination and groupment of factors influencing on the volumes of investments in a country and regions. Research results, conclusions and recommendations are grounded by the use of complex approach.

4. RESEARCH RESULTS
Investment resources to which take all types of economic resources are a sourcing any projects, investments attracted with a purpose in the objects of investing. Distinguish such forms of investment resources: financial, material, non-material, labours, informative, enterprise talent. Taking into account said, it is expedient to select the financial and unfinancial sources of forming of investment resources. In the process of research attention is concentrated on the study of financial sources, which the monies resources used for forming of these sources in the process of investing are understood under. On results the analysis of financial sources of forming of investment resources in Ukraine, namely, domestic and foreign, next conformity to the law was set (picture 1). Other sourcing Credits of banks and other loans Mean of population on individual building Mean of population on building of own apartments Mean of foreign investors

Personal funds of enterprises and organizations Mean of local budgets Mean of the state budget Picture 1: Loud speaker of volumes and structure of sourcing investments in the fixed assets (from data of the Statutory broker of statistics of Ukraine) The personal funds of enterprises are the main source of investment resources. Investing with the use of facilities of state, local budgets, monies facilities of population and foreign investors during 2000 - 2008 remained stable, was not revealed substantial tendencies to growth, and made insignificant part in the general structure of investments. During the same period there was a tendency to activation of the use of bank credits and different loans, that is confirmed by gradual gain in their weight at actually the same insignificant diminishing part own

881

resources. Consequently, about 60% capital investments in Ukraine are carried out due to the own resources of enterprises, here greater part from them is made by an income and depreciation decrees. It should be noted that an investment attractiveness acts important part in the processes of the intergovernmental moving of capital. By virtue of considerable territorial unevenness of division of economic factors, countries and regions come forward competitors in the fight for free resources. An investment climate is an associate factor as aggregate of political, legal, economic, organizational and social terms determining an attractiveness and expedience of investing of the certain economic system. One of pre-conditions of stable economic development of country and its regions is forming and support of favorable investment image in the person of potential investors. In spite of positive tendency of volumes of investing in the fixed assets, as marked on fig.1, today, however there is the lack of internal investment resources, which is conditioned, foremost, by the protracted period of slump of domestic production, that resulted in insufficiency of own resources of enterprises for the update and modernization of main funds. From other side, the sharp falling of level of profits of population of Ukraine is reason of insufficiency of economies of household and realization of lines and portfolio investments. In addition, capitalization of the Ukrainian banking system is insufficient, that limits possibilities for realization of scales investment projects. Since 2001, the clean year-on-year increase of foreign capital made (table 1) [9]: Table 1: Loud speaker of clean year-on-year increase of foreign investments to Ukraine Years Clean increase of annual foreign investments to Ukraine, milliard $ 2001 0,68 2002 0,92 2003 1,32 2004 2,25 2005 7,84 2006 4,73 2007 7,93 2008 6,18

General volume of lines of the foreign investments inlaid in the economy of Ukraine, on October, 1 2009 year made $ 38591,6 million. This on 8,3% anymore volume of investments on beginning 2009 and calculating on one man makes $ 837,5 [9]. The stream of foreign investments to the internal market of Ukraine was multiplied to 2008. Marked it was predefined by such factors, as aspiration to gain a foothold at the perspective market of sale of Ukraine, aspiration to get an income on long-term basis, desire to get access to comparatively to the cheap sources of raw material and resources with the purpose of increase of competitiveness of own products and to aspiration to use relatively cheap skilled labour force as important factor of decline of unit cost [6].

Volumes of investments, by an increasing result from the beginning of investing Picture 2: Loud speaker of volumes of lines of foreign investments to Ukraine During 2009 investments to Ukraine acted from 125 countries of world. From data of the Statutory broker of statistics of Ukraine in ten of main investors on which is an almost 81% general volume of direct investments, enter: Cyprus are $ 8201,7 millions, Germany - $ 6580,8 millions, Netherlands - $ 3814,2 millions, Austria - $ 2564,8 millions, United Kingdom - $ 2348,5 millions, Russian Federation - $ 2061,5 millions, France - $ 1589,6 millions, United States of America - $ 1381,5 millions, Virgin islands, Britannic islands - $1340,5 millions and Sweden - $ 1256,4 millions (picture 3).

882

France

Russian Federation

United Kingdom

Austria

Netherlands

Germany

Cyprus

Picture 3: Distributing of direct investments to Ukraine on main countries-investors (%, to the general volume) On the enterprises of industry concentrated $8873,4 millions, (23% general volume of direct investments to Ukraine), including processing are $ 7618,6 millions and extractive are $ 1102,9 millions. Among industries of processing industry in production of food products, drinks and tobaccos wares $ 1836,0 millions of direct investments is borne, in metallurgical production and production of the finished metallic products are $ 1387,4 millions, chemical and petrochemical industry are $ 1181,1 millions, machine building are $1067,5 millions, production of other non-metal mineral goods are $ 793,0 millions. Foreign capital augmentation in 2009 it was observed on enterprises which carried out financial activity, - on $951,4 millions, trade, repair of cars, domestic wares, articles of the personal consumption - on $394,8 millions, operations with the real estate, lease, engineering and grant of services to the businessmen - on $318,0 millions, and also on the enterprises of industry on $ 817,7 millions, including processing - on $759,8 millions. Among industries of processing industry attractive for foreign investors there are chemical and petrochemical industry (the volume of investments grew on $231,0 millions) and production of food products, drinks and tobaccos wares (the volume of investments grew on $150,1 millions). $8106,1 millions (21,0%) of direct investments is accumulated in financial institutions, on the enterprises of trade, repair of cars, domestic wares and articles of the personal consumption are $ 4081,7 millions (10,6%), in organizations which carry out the operations with the real estate, lease, engineering and grant of services to the businessmen are $ 3931,9 millions (10,2%). 18,4 thousands of enterprises of Ukraine reported about the presence of lines of foreign investments. General volume of lines of foreign investments on October, 1 2009 made $ 44929,3 millions. However during 2009 - 2010 diminishing of influx of foreign investments is expected in once or twice from a world crisis: most foreign companies will be shortened by the plans of expansion to the new markets and absorption of competitors. In January - September 2009 in the economy of Ukraine by foreign investors $ 3948,3 millions is inlaid The USA of direct investments, that makes 46,3% volumes of the proper period of previous year. In particular, $ 3125,4 million (79,1% general volume) acted from the countries of ES, from the countries of SNG $ 398,0 millions (10,1%), from other countries of world are $ 424,9 millions (10,8%). At the same time the capital of nonresidents diminished on $ 845,4 millions. On the whole increase of the combined volume of foreign capital in the economy of country, taking into account his overvalue, losses and exchange rate difference are $ 2972,1 millions. It makes an approximately 36,8% level of the proper period of previous year [9]. As evaluated by both internal and foreign economic subjects, an investment climate in Ukraine remains unfavorable. Among main reasons which stipulate an unfavorable investment climate in Ukraine and restrain economic development, numerous domestic and foreign researches traditionally mark instability of the Ukrainian legislation, lack of development of market infrastructure, in particular fund market, strong tax pressure, bureaucratize and corruption in local and central authorities [5]. However impossible it is to mark not the presence of competitive edges of our country. From position of modern and potential development status of the state it is possible to consider following (table. 2):

883

Table 2: Factors of investment attractiveness of Ukraine Factors of investment attractiveness Description

Advantageous geopolitical placing A country has an output to the Black sea pool; Europe is located on crossing of transporting ways is Asia, North is South High level of naturally-resource material well-being On the amount of the found out supplies of manganeses ores Ukraine is second in the world and first - among the countries of the CIS; to the supplies of coal, iron-stone, second kaolin, potassiums salts, clay raw material a country is well-to-do on 100-200 years The average monthly ettlings in Ukraine is considerably below than in foreign countries Annual capacity of the Ukrainian user market by governmental estimation are $ 32,122 milliards.

Cheap labour force is skilled Capacious user market

It should be noted that the resulted competitive edges are conditioned, unfortunately, by not achievements of domestic economy, but potential possibilities given from nature. In addition, the presence of cheap labour force testifies rather to attitude of the state and employers toward the hired workers. Aspiration is investigation of such conduct to departure of intellectual and scientific potential of our country. A capacious user market is satisfied with the bad quality products of foreign countries that in same queue, is negatively reflected on domestic commodity producers which from prices factors can not compete with foreign commodity producers. In modern terms, attaining steady economic development is possible only, carrying out the structural changes in the industrial complex of Ukraine. Taking into account that investments come forward the effective lever of realization of structural alteration of economy, decision of social and economic problems, the improvement of investment climate, activation of investment activity, accumulation of investment resources and their concentration, is the key tasks of state administration on priorities directions of development of economy. An investment climate directly influences on the basic indexes of socio-economic development of country. A positive investment climate is instrumental in the decision of social problems, provides the high level of employment of population, allows to renew production conduct modernization and increase of main funds of enterprises, inculcate the newest technologies. Consequently, presently stabilizing of investment climate is the major task for Ukraine. As evaluated by European Business of Association [10] in the third quarter 2009. The index of Investment Attractiveness of Ukraine remained almost at that level with an insignificant tendency to the decline: 2,56 on a 5-ball scale comparatively from 2,64 in the second quarter 2009. During 2009 an index demonstrates the fades. After the fall-off in September 2008 and achievement of the lowest marks in October 2008 and January 2009. An index gradually grows to 2,6 in April and remains almost without the changes to September 2009. For the estimation of investment climate it was used 5-ball scale, where 1 is the lowest estimation and 5 is the greatest. There is the tendency of insignificant growth of break between the estimations of previous periods and estimation of expectations in relation to next periods that testifies to some optimism anticipation investors. In spite of insignificant revival of investment activity, on the whole, an investment climate remains unfavorable because of influencing of the following factors: - proceeding political and legislative instability, absence of reliable guarantees of defense from the changes of legislation for foreign investors; - uncertainty of foreign investors in the subsequent collaboration during an economic crisis; - absence of clear state strategy in relation to bringing in of investments; - considerable tax and administrative pressure; - instability of work of the financial system of the state; - insignificant volumes of fund market; - inflation rates remain at more high level, by what in the countries of Western Europe and the USA; - low purchasing power of considerable part of population, which diminishes marketability at the internal market of the products made with participation of foreign capital; - high level of corrupted and bureaucratize in public authorities; - low level of development of infrastructure; - unevenness of the foreign investing in the regions of country. Since acquisition of independence Ukraine passed the responsible stages on a way to integration in outer economic space and improvement of investment attractiveness of country [11]: - on March, 1 1998. purchased force Agreement about partnership and collaboration from ES; - ES and the USA gave to Ukraine status of country with a market economy;

884

- the intergovernmental agreements are signed in relation to the assistance and mutual defense of investments with 70 countries of world; - 60 international treaties are concluded at avoidance of double taxation practically with the entire countries of the CIS, Europe, by many countries of Asia, North and South America and a few countries of Africa; - on May, 16 2008. Ukraine purchased status of member of HONEYCOMBS. The entry of Ukraine in SOT gives a positive signal for activation of collaboration between Ukraine and ES in all directions, including in an investment sphere; - on the state on October 2009. greater part of negotiations is conducted between Ukraine and European Association of Free Trade (EFTA) in relation to signing of Agreement about Free Trade (Agreement Trade Free); - for today negotiations proceed in relation to the general power system and entry of Ukraine in European Power Association (Association Energy European) [12]; - collaboration with International Monetary Fund and World Bank, by European Bank of Reconstruction and Development, by the European Investment bank; - acceptance of row of laws in relation to the improvement of legal environment of the foreign investing, in particular Laws of Ukraine On defense of foreign investments in Ukraine, About the mode of the foreign investing, removal of discrimination in taxation of the subjects of entrepreneurial activity, created with the use of property and facilities of domestic origin; - with the purpose of realization of public innovative policy at Cabinet Ukraine Advice of investors is created, State Agency of Ukraine works on Investments and Innovations [11]. However even after all efforts directed on the improvement of investment climate, bringing in of foreign investments in a national economy, support and strengthening of connections with foreign countries, it is yet necessary to carry out the great number of measures for optimizations of investment potential of country, which foresees the decision of problems of bringing in of foreign investments to Ukraine. With the purpose of improvement of investment climate in Ukraine and activation of the foreign investing we consider expedient introduction such the measures: - achievement of national consent between different tasks forces, by political parties on an occasion the decision of national problems of output of Ukraine from an economic crisis and political instability; - smoothing of economic indicators and fight against inflation; - development of the grounded state strategy of bringing in of foreign investments clear; - development and introduction of effective mechanism of grant of taxes deductions to the foreign investors which carry out long-term investments with the purpose of their increase; - introduction of mechanism of insurance of risks of the foreign investing; - creation of responsible institutes through question of mobilization of investment resources in the effective investment projects of priorities industries of economy; - achievement of the even distributing of volumes of foreign investments through this country by the increase of investment potential of regions not attractive for foreign investors now; - assistance to fund market related to the operations with long-term securities development: by actions, by the obligations, by investment shares and others like that; - providing of stability of legislation in the field of investing and taxation; - reform of the tax system in relation to diminishing of amount of taxes and diminishing of some rates of taxes; - providing of the self-weighted policy of government and NBU in a money-and-credit sphere; - activation of measures on forming of positive image of Ukraine. Introduction of the considered ways of increase of level of investment attractiveness of the state will result in a foreign cash inflow and successful development of national economy.

5. CONCLUSION
It is set as a result of the conducted research, that by basic sourcing investments the personal funds of enterprises come forward in the fixed assets. However on condition of their insufficiency along from other domestic sources foreign investments are used. During the last years by main countries were investors Cyprus, Germany, Netherlands and other. Main attractive for foreign investors is chemical and petrochemical industry, production of food products, drinks and tobaccos wares. During 2000-2009 the tendency of growth of volumes of bringing in of foreign capital is traced in the economy of country. Ukraine did certain steps on the way of entrance to outer economic space: purchased membership in SOT, partnership with European Union; the agreements are signed in relation to the assistance and mutual defense of investments with 70 countries of world, and also agreement at avoidance of double taxation. Among the obstacles of activation of investment activity in Ukraine selected following: instability of domestic legislation, lack of development of market and bank infrastructure, surplus tax pressure, bureaucratize and corruption in the organs of power et al. With the purpose of decision of

885

above-mentioned of problems questions the row of measures is offered in relation to activation of investment activity in Ukraine: achievement of social and political co-ordination at state level; development of state strategy of bringing in of foreign investments; the even division of volumes of investments is through this country by the increase of investment potential of the depressed regions. At development of strategy of bringing in of foreign investments it is necessary to define optimum correlation of volumes of domestic and foreign capital that is the article of further scientific researches.

REFERENCES
[1] Investing: Textbook / O.. Kyrychenko, S.. Erohin. - K. : Knowledge, 2009. - 573 p. ISBN 978-966-346-6156. [2] Blank I. . Basis investment management. - K: Nika-center. Elga -N, 2001. - 511 p. [3] Gutkevych P. . Investment attractiveness of agrarian sector of economy. - K.: Europ.Univ., 2003. - 251 p. [4] Melnik M. Principles construction of investment models of regional development // The Regional economy. 2005. - 1. - P. 187-195. [5] Gerasimchuk V. Balkan vector in strategy of innovative development of Ukraine in the conditions of globalization. // Proceedings of 1st International Conference Law, Economy and Management in Modern Ambience - LEMiMA 2009, Sokobanja, Serbia, 25-27. September 2009. Edited by ivota Radosavljevi. Novi Sad: University of Business Academy. Faculty for Education of the Executives, 2009, pp. 224-230. ISBN 978-86-87333-08-6. [6] Nosova O. The Investment climate in Ukraine: main directions of improvement of // are Strategic priorities. 2008. - 1(6) - P. 59-65. [7] Fysher P. To convert Russia into an attractive market for the foreign investors of // Questions of economy. 2002. - 2. - P. 83-100. [8] Yakovlev . Power potential of Ukraine. Investment research. - Kiev-Moscow: The fund Free Europe, 2007. - 116 p. [9] State Committee of Statistics of Ukraine. To the investment of foreign economic activity in January - October, 2009 [Electronic resource]. 13.11.2009. Mode of access: <http://www.ukrstat.gov.ua/express/expr2009/1109/235.zip>. [10] European Business Association (EBA). EBA Index of Investment Attractiveness (5th wave) [Electronic resource]. - Mode of access: http://www.eba.com.ua/files/documents/index05_results_eng.ppt. [11] State Agency of Ukraine from Investments and Innovations. Investment activity: Investment climate [Electronic resource]. - 03.08.2009. - Mode of access: <http://www.in.gov.ua/index.php?get=212>. [12] The internet is a newspaper ForUm. News: President held meeting on Foreign Investments [Electronic resource]. - 21.10.2009. - Mode of access: <http://forua.wordpress.com/2009/10/21/president-held-meetingon-foreign-investments/>.

886

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

LEGAL FRAMEWORK FOR REFORM ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE AND MARKETS railway liberalization
Bratislav Stankovic
University of Novi Pazar, Novi Pazar, SERBIA, E-mail: stankovic.brat@sbb.rs

Summary: The principle of freedom of traffic, one of the economic principles on which the foundations of freedom of international business operations, shall include freedom to transport goods and other items internationals trade from one country to another. Freedom of transport is a necessary condition of freedom of trade. Freedom of transport means and the principle of free land crossings. In addition to the internationalization of the main land roads, afford the liberalization of transport markets. The subject of this paper is the legal framework for the reform of organizational structure and the liberalization of the transport market in the case of railway transport. The paper, after the introductory part of the relevant legal sources, the central part addressed the question of restructuring the railway sector, and liberalization of markets, through consideration of fundamental solutions of European and national legislation, with critical review and point out the need for harmonization of some solutions in the domestic legislation. Key words: organizational restructuring of the railway sector, market liberalization, harmonization of regulations.

1. INTRODUCTION
International commercial law and commercial business is based on certain economic principles of international character. There are just three of freedom, namely trade, transport and transfer money. The principle of freedom of trade, as a basic principle of international trade, depends on the freedom of traffic. This is because as the international business operations distancion nature and economic effect is achieved by efficient transport of goods and other subjects of international trade from one country to another. Freedom of transport means and the principle of free land crossings. As the state under international law have guaranteed the sovereignty and integrity of the land area, and land space is not internationalized. However, a number of international conventions regulating international road and rail transport. In addition to the internationalization of the main land roads, afford the liberalization of transport markets, which, in turn, primarily subject regulation Community law. Specifically, the rules in the field of railway transport international origin are contained in the European Union community law, usually in the form of directives, decisions and regulations, which together make up the European rail regulation. Particularly important area of regulation of the European railway regulation may, subject to conditions, grouped as follows: 1) The organization of the railway sector and the liberalization of the railway market, including transEuropean transport network, 2) safety and interoperability of railway transport, which includes social norms, 3) Environmental protection and transport hazardous substances, and 4) additional parts of railway regulations relating to combined transport, the obligation of public transport, public procurement and Statistics in railway traffic. The issue of restructuring the railway sector and the liberalization of the railway market is subject to directives from the three packages. Reform the organizational structure of European railways and liberalization of the railway market is regulated by Directive 91/440 (as amended directives 2001/12 and 2004/51), Directive 95/18 (as amended directives 2001/13 and 2004/49) and Directive 2001 / 14 (as amended by Directive 2004/49 and Decision 2002/735). These guidelines were published in the Official Journal of the European Union, L 75 of 15.3.2001. and L 164 of 30.4.2004.year. Changes and amendments to the Law on Railway ("Official Gazette RS, no. 18/2005), through its compliance

887

with the directives 91/440, 95/18, 2001/14, and 2004/49, involve a redefinition of the institutional and organizational structure of railway sector in Serbia. Thus, analysis of directives 2004/49 and 2001/14 from the standpoint of education of independent bodies and their functions in the railway transport in our country, we can conclude that the provisions of the Directive stipulates the formation of five agencies including: the regulatory body, safety, accident investigation authority, the authority the collection and use of infrastructure capacity for the grant of authority. In fact, the last two mentioned bodies are required only in cases where the infrastructure manager is not independent of the railway company that is. railway operators.

2. STARTING-LEGAL FRAMEWORK DIRECTIVE 91/440 ON THE DEVELOPMENT OF RAILWAY UNION AND ITS AMENDMENT
2.1. Main content Directive 91/440 on the development of railways, amended directives 2001/12 and 2004/51, defines some basic questions like: self-management of railway enterprises, separation of infrastructure and transportation, improving financial position of the railroad company, the fee for the use of and access to infrastructure . According to Directive 91/440, the independent management of rail carriers include rules under which the railway companies to adapt their activities to the needs of the market and manage the activities that are within the competence of their governing bodies. This in order to ensure effective and appropriate services with the lowest cost possible to the required quality of service. The specified independent railway companies includes independent status in terms of governance, administration and internal control over The administrative economic and accounting matters. Consequently, independent position assumed with the funds and separate accounts of railway companies from the state. The second important question concerns the separation of infrastructure and transport. Directive 91/440 prescribes the obligation to the member account of the separation of infrastructure and transport. In addition, the prohibition provided for the transfer of assistance or subsidies from one to another account. Directive 91/440 requires that a separate infrastructure management from railway companies in two ways and so that infrastructure is either (1) managed independently of the railway company through a special sector within the same company or infrastructure (2) controlled by a separate entity. Also, it is important to point out that Directive 2001/12 on market access introduced the separation of passenger and goods traffic. When the first word on the liberalization of the railway market, the question of improving financial position of railway carrier. At first glance, one might conclude that this is a question-and-shut. However, in practice the comparative situation nowadays different. Directive 91/440 requires Member States to establish appropriate mechanisms to help reduce the indebtedness of railway companies are state owned or state managed to a level that will not interfere with the recovery of financial management and to improve their financial position. Financial assistance to member states to eliminate debt is approved in accordance with the provisions of the Treaty establishing the EC. The fee for use of infrastructure is also a particularly important issue. In this sense of obligation is the DFA member states make provisions for determining fees, charged by the infrastructure manager of the railway carrier. The above important questions, crucial impact on access to railway infrastructure. Railway companies should, under equal conditions, authorize access to infrastructure in other Member States for the purpose of international combined transport of goods. To 1 January .2007. The railway company shall, under equal conditions, be granted access to the infrastructure in all Member States to carry out all types of freight transport on railways. The regulatory body, according to Directive 2001/12, controls and enforcement of rules on access to infrastructure. This directive introduces an independent body for the interrogation of railway accidents. 1.2. The need for harmonization With regard to the need of harmonization should be noted that the Law on Railways and the Decision on the establishment of companies to manage public railway infrastructure and the performance of public transport in the railway transport largely in line with the provisions of Directive 91/440. The law provides for separation of the railway companies and railway infrastructure managers, as well as access to railway infrastructure, on equal terms to all interested rail transport operators. However, it is clear delineation of infrastructure managers and railway companies as independent business entities as provided for in Directive 91/440. In addition, organizational and institutional separation of railway infrastructure management and public transport passengers and goods is not necessary at the beginning of the reorganization of public enterprises. However, it is necessary to prevent overflow of funds between these two activities. On the other hand, a prerequisite for market opening and use of railway infrastructure is the implementation of the financial consolidation of public enter prices. Decision on establishment of companies to manage public railway infrastructure and the performance of public transport in the railway transport is envisaged that the government will make the financial consolidation of PE "Serbian Railways" in accordance with the program that should be adopted until the beginning of the company.

888

When Serbia to become EU member states then financial support for the railway company may be granted in accordance with the provisions of the founding treaties and specific directives or decisions.

3. MARKET-ACCESS LICENSING AND CERTIFICATION

With regard to market access, as a rule, thought the licensing and certification. The issue of access to the railway market in particular is dedicated to Directive 2001/12, which are the subject of further amendments to Directive 91/440. This directive provides for the independence of control infrastructure, separating the accounts of passenger and goods traffic, making the regulatory body for inquiry. In addition to Directive 2001/12, is of great importance for the access market is Directive 95/18 on licensing of railway undertakings, as amended by Directives 2001/13 and 2004/49. 2.1. The basic content of the Directive 95/18 on licensing of railway carrier, as amended directives 2001/13 and 2004/49 Directive 95/18, as amended, establishes the conditions for equitable and non-discriminatory licensing of railway enterprises. It does this through identifying the necessary capacity for a railway company. Directive 95/18, or more precisely, Directive 2001/13 provides that Member States shall be appointed body with authority for licensing and enforcement of obligations under this Directive. This authority can not exercise and transportation services is independent from the authorities or companies involved in transport activities. Directive establishes four requirements for a license. The first concerns the good reputation, by which is meant that the applicant was not convicted for a serious offense or against whom bankruptcy proceedings was conducted. Second, the requirements relating to financial capability have been met, provided that the applicant can prove, by submitting at least the details listed in Section I of Annex of Directive 95/18, that the candidate be prepared to meet current and future obligations for the next 12 months. Third, the requirements relating to professional competence are met, if candidate has or will have a management that has knowledge and / or experience necessary to perform safe and reliable operational control and supervision over the performance of types of activities specified in the license. Fourth, the ability to cover claims means that the railway companies are adequately insured in accordance with national and international regulations for the fulfillment of legal obligations in the event of extraordinary events, especially with passengers, baggage, goods, mail and third parties. The license is valid until the railway company meets the obligations prescribed by this Directive. However, the license must be revised at the end of five years. Besides that, the authority responsible for issuing licenses, may, after investigation, to suspend or cancel a license. 3.2. The need for harmonization According to the Railway Department for railways is indicated, but are yet to her education as an independent regulatory body. Directorate of licenses and certificates to carriers and controls infrastructure. Thus, this transport directorate issued a license applicant who meets the requirements in respect of financial, Technical, professional capacity and which has the appropriate insurance policy and is not in bankruptcy proceedings. On this occasion, we can conclude that the statutory criteria are only apparently similar conditions of Directive 95/18. Thus, the Law on Railways attributed not a good reputation as a condition for issuing the license.

4. USE OF RAILWAY INFRASTRUCTURE

Directive 95/19/ES for the first time provide guidance to member states on how to regulate the award of infrastructure facilities. This issue is of particular practical importance because it is the sine qua non for the presence of other carriers, in addition to the national rail carrier, the network infrastructure, which is realized market liberalization. The subject of this directive is the allocation of infrastructure capacity, or the conditions, rules and the competent authority for the allocation of capacity. The opening of the railway market created the need for more comprehensive regulation of infrastructure capacity allocation. To this end, Directive 95/19 was completely replaced by Directive 2001/14. 3.1. The basic content of the Directive 2001/14 on the allocation of railway infrastructure capacity and charge fees for use of railway infrastructure, as amended by decision 2002/735 and Directive 2004/49 The main issues in the content of Directive 2001/14 the allocation of routes, fees for use of infrastructure, regulatory, and security issues. Directive 2001/14, relating to compensation for use of infrastructure, establishes rules for (1) non-discriminatory and efficient payment system fee for access and (2) the optimal use of infrastructure. This directive provides the infrastructure to manage publish and regularly update the Statement on the network with certain information, including conditions for access and the principles of charging fees. Framework for the collection of fees shall be established with respect to the independence of control infrastructure. Fees should be equal and non-discriminatory, and consistent with Chapter II of Directive 2001/14, which provides the

889

regulatory authority. Fees for use of infrastructure should be determined on the basis of cost that is directly a result of performing the transport service. In order to cover all costs of infrastructure control directive allows you to establish control margin, if the market can submit their introduction Furthermore, Directive 2001/14 provides analysis of capacity and plan to increase capacity. Under this directive, member states must establish an independent regulatory body for such appeals when companies invest a complaint against the decision control infrastructure. The decision is subject to regulatory authority to judicial review. 3.2. The need for harmonization Regulatory functions of the Directorate of Railways should be harmonized with the provisions of Directive 95/18 on licensing of railway undertakings and Directive 2001/14 on the allocation of railway infrastructure capacity and establishing fees for use of railway infrastructure and safety certification, as amended, which oblige member states to form an independent regulatory body responsible for licensing of railway companies (Directive 95/18) to provide compensation for the use of certain infrastructure of the control infrastructure are in accordance with Chapter II of Directive 2001/14, equal and non-discriminatory, and deciding on the complaint against the decision of the steering wheel infrastructure The regulatory functions, in addition to the regulatory powers of licensing authority, decision-making by objection and ensuring that fees for use of infrastructure are in line with Chapter II, equal and non-discriminatory, including capacity allocation and payment of fees for infrastructure such jurisdiction control infrastructure. However, in the case of an integrated railway company the capacity allocation and payment of fees, must be governed by the special authority. Our regulations are largely in line with the provisions of Directive 2001/14. The law prescribes the allocation of railway infrastructure and the principles of charging fees for use of infrastructure. However, the Act does not provide the right railway companies to set minimum access and tracks access to service facilities set out in Annex II of Directive 2001/14, and that may require the control infrastructure to provide additional services listed in Annex II of Directive 2001/14, which control is not obligated to provide. Complaints are submitted to an independent regulatory body instead of the Directorate of Railways. How the Law on Railways is not provided the obligation to ensure that the benefits of infrastructure are in accordance with Chapter II of Directive 2001/14, there is a need to introduce such an obligation to the Directorate of Railways. In addition, you should specify that the decision of the Directorate for Railways subject to judicial review, instead of the current Law on the Ministry of Railways planned appeal. In this respect our laws should be amended to include the contents of the Directive 2001/14. However, currently the PE "Serbian Railways" at the same time the infrastructure manager and railway operator. As long as so, or if there is no need to separate the institutional separation of regulatory functions that relate to decision making in relation to charging fees for use of infrastructure and access to the market allocation of routes, according to Directive 2001/14, there is a need for two independent bodies, the first for payment of fees for infrastructure and other facilities for the award in order to achieve non-discriminatory and fair decisionmaking competition. An alternative to this solution is to separate control of the railway infrastructure operator. In this case, the infrastructure manager shall decide on the payment of benefits and grants for infrastructure facilities, ie. adopted a schedule for the railways, with the Directorate of Railways, as a regulatory body, checking whether the benefits of fair and non-discriminatory and the appellate body for railway operators. According to the railway, PE "Serbian Railways" will make a schedule that is. given capacity, to which the Government gives approval. This solution is not compatible with the organization of the appellate authority, and rule that the production schedule within the competence of managers of infrastructure. Furthermore, it is important to rule according to which in the case that the management of infrastructure remains, together with the function of railway operators, special authorities required to collect fees for infrastructure and for the allocation of capacity. It is obvious that the demands for independence are identical for both bodies, which can be combined into one, and that authority for the collection and allocation of infrastructure capacity. And at the Directorate of Railways alternative verifies that the benefits of fair and non-discriminatory and at the same time the appellate body for railway operators. Analysis of Directive 2004/49 and 2001/14 from the standpoint of education of independent bodies and their functions in the railway transport Serbia shows the need for harmonization of railway legislation. In fact, comparative analysis of the provisions of the Railway and the institutional organizational structure of the railway system in Serbia and organizational and institutional aspects of security features to Directive 2004/49 and regulatory functions, including compensation for the infrastructure and capacity allocation according to Directive 2001/14, it can be concluded that there is a need for amendments to some provisions of the Railway to be on line with Directive 2001/14 and 2004/49. Also, it is important to emphasize that the Directive 2001/14 of practical importance in organizations (1) transportation sector, (2) regulatory functions, and (3) the development of Serbian Railways.

5. REGULATIONS ON STATE SUBSIDIES AND COMPETITION

In addition to these regulations, to reform the organizational structure and the liberalization of markets are important rail and regulations on state subsidies and competition. These are four regulations, such as: Regulation

890

1191/69 on public services, Regulation 1 / 2003 on Competition, Regulation 1192/69 on the normalization of accounts of railway companies and Regulation 2236/95 on financial assistance for the development of transEuropean networks. 4.1. Regulation 1191/69 on public services The main content of Regulation 1191/69, sets the framework for the concept of public service. The concept of public services in the area of transport, means that member states can enter into contracts with public transport companies for city traffic, suburban and regional passenger transport services. Contracts for public transport are based on the conditions laid down this Regulation, if it is necessary to ensure adequate transport services in certain areas or for certain groups. When transportation company performing duties in addition to public transport, perform other activities, then the public transport must take place as a separate sector, with special accounts for the obligations of public transport. On the basis of Regulation 1191/69, the contract for public transport include, among other things, service, cost of services, income from transportation, validity of contracts and penalties in case of default of the contract. Regulations of the Republic of Serbia and the European Union include the concept of public transport. The need for coordination of the public companies and their activities of common interest with Regulation 1191/69 on actions by Member States concerning the obligations of the concept of public service in transport by rail, road and inland waterways as amended by regulation 3572/90 and 1893 / 91 (principles of contract) and Regulation 1107/70 on government subsidies for transport, especially for companies that pay for infrastructure and development and research in the field of new transport technologies, covering at least the subject matter and content of contracts and organizations carriers. Regulation 1191/69 limits the conclusion of the contract on public transport in urban, suburban and regional passenger transport services. However, performing the duties of public transport under the Railway may refer to remote public transport passengers. As the basic elements of the contract on public transport are contained in the provisions of Regulation 1191/69, therefore the minister can not decide on a case by case basis, the content of the contract. In our country, the Railways Act requires separate accounts for the obligations of public transport, but not provided for the obligation to carry out specific public transport sectors. Regulation 1191/69 and 1107/70 on public transport and subsidies were abolished Regulation 1370/2007 on public passenger services in the railway and road transport, which entered into force on 3 December 2009. year. Regulation 1370/2007 regulates, first, the purpose and scope of its application, then the contract on public transport, or principle, the duration of the assignment of this contract, social and provision of quality, and finally, the entry into force of these regulations the transitional period in its application. Under this regulation, under the contract of public transport means legally binding. Act confirming the agreement between the competent authorities and operators in the field of public transport. Awarding the contract on public transport is based on certain principles, so that the two principles in particular envisaged and that, first, the principle of public service to the public tender for the underground passenger railway, bus and tram, and others, the principle of direct assignment of cases and under the conditions provided Regulation 1370/2007. 4.2. Treaty establishing the EC. The issue of state subsidies and competition, in addition to these regulations, deals with the Treaty establishing the EC. It regulates the provisions of Article 73 Paragraph 2 and 3, state subsidies and competition, through principled ban on state subsidies, with special reference of allowable subsidies. More important than that is that in Article 73 The Treaty establishing a specific allowable are two types of subsidies: (1) coordination of transportation and (2) The obligation to perform public services. 4.3. Regulation 1 / 2003 on application of regulations on competition The main content of Regulation 1 / 2003 was determined in order to ensure the effective enforcement of rules on competition from unauthorized Article 81 and 82 Agreement on the Establishment. The concept of unfair competition is defined to include contractual actions and abuse of dominant positions, which are such that they can affect the economic exchange between Member States and aimed at the prevention, disruption or distortion of competition in the common market. On the basis of Regulation 1 / 2003, the Commission is authorized to: (1) its own initiative or upon request, conduct an investigation in a particular sector of the economy or to particular types of different sectors of the agreement if circumstances suggest that competition may be restricted or violated the common market, and (2 ) determines a periodic penalty. In this respect the provisions of the fine is determined by, first, the maximum penalty for violating the rules of competition in the amount of 10% of total company revenue in the previous financial year. Then, provided for a fine up to 5% of average daily income in the preceding business year per day if the company does not end the violation, or do not agree with the decision. In addition, the Commission may order a fine for a company that does not exceed 1% of total revenue in the previous financial year if the company filed false or false information or has declined a request for information. Based on the above we can say that the basic principles on competition contained in the Agreement on the Establishment and Regulation 1 / 2003 in compliance with the legislation of Serbia. 4.4. Regulation 1192/69 on general rules for normalization of accounts of railway companies Regulation 1192/69 on general rules for normalization of accounts of railway companies was changed and supplemented several times, and that regulations br.319/73, 119/79, 119 / 85, 319 / 90, 119 / 94 and 120/2003. The main objective of these regulations is to provide equality of all forms of traffic through the abolition of the financial burdens or benefits, which is caused by unequal treatment of different forms of transport.

891

Determining the financial burdens or benefits for the rail companies can be caused by any provisions of laws, regulations or state acts or comparison with their position if operating under the same conditions as other transport companies. When normalizing the accounts in accordance with the regulations, financial assistance granted railroad companies in accordance with Regulation 1107/79 to cover the additional costs of infrastructure should be taken into account. However, our regulations do not contain similar or corresponding provisions under these rules in Regulation 1192/69. 4.5. Regulation 2236/95, as amended by Regulation 807/2004 on the approval of the Community financial assistance in the field of trans-European networks Regulation 2236/95, as amended by Regulation 807/2004, provides general rules for granting Community financial assistance in the field of trans-European networks. More specifically, this regulation establishes the procedure for granting Community assistance for the project of general interest in the Trans-European Network for Transport, Energy and Communications. This means that financial support may be granted for co-funding research related to projects, which include research, preparation of feasibility and assessment, and other measures of technical support for this research under the guidance of Article 155 of the Treaty of Amsterdam (1998). It is important that the rule under which the Community contribution shall not exceed 50% of the total costs of research. Serbian law does not contain a similar, or corresponding provisions to those in Regulation 2236/95.

6. CONCLUSION
The legal regulation of railway transport, in addition to traditional international conventions, the European railway relevant regulations national railway legislation, and to primarily Law on Railways. European Railway regulations governing, among others, the field organization of the railway sector and the liberalization of the railway market. The key rules for the regulation of this field is contained in the directives of the European Union and the Law on Railways. Reform the organizational structure of European railways and liberalization of the railway market is regulated by Directive 91/440 (as amended directives 2001/12 and 2004/51), Directive 95/18 (as amended directives 2001/13 and 2004/49) and Directive 2001 / 14 (as amended by Directive 2004/49 and Decision 2002/735). These guidelines were published in the Official Journal of the European Union, L 75 of 15.3.2001. and L 164 of 30.4.2004. year. Changes and amendments to the Law on Railway ("Official Gazette RS, no. 18/2005), through its compliance with the directives 91/440, 95/18, 2001/14, and 2004/49, involve a redefinition of the institutional and organizational structure of railway sector in Serbia. The concept of liberalized markets in the field of railway transport means and access to the market with the licensing and certification, the use of railway infrastructure, as well as state subsidies and competition. The Law on Railway 2005th The first time created the legal preconditions for the liberalization of the railway market. However, in Serbia, due to the absence of experience in the liberalization of the railway market, and not just because of that, we can say that the situation in this area undefined. Namely, the legislature knows our rail carriers access to railway infrastructure, the basis of equality, which is made liberalization of the railway market. This concept is not followed by adequate legislation that would regulate the status of more carriers, access to market and use of railway infrastructure, which in turn is followed by lack of regulations on state subsidies and competition, they actually discourage potential operators in the use of railway infrastructure.

892

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MODELS OF LIFE INSURANCE

1 2

Jelena Stankovi1, Vesna Jankovi-Mili2, Milivoje Peii3

Faculty of Economics, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: jelena.stankovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs e-mail: vesna.jankovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs, 3 e-mail: milivoje.pesic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs

Summary: Mathematical models have been used in insurance for a long time. When a model is introduced, one usually proceeds by stages. The first step is statistical analysis to find out how well the model approximates the situation in real life, which one wants to analyse. If it does, the second step is to examine the implications of the model, to see if any of these are in obvious contradiction with observations. If the result of this examination is satisfactory, the third step is usually a If the model passes this second examination, the next and final step may be to estimate the parameters of the model, and use it in practice, i.e. to make decisions in the real world. Keywords: Life Incurance, Matematical Modeling, Quantitative Approaches.

1. INTRODUCTION
The advantage of working with a model is that it gives an overall purpose to the collection and analysis of data. A good model should tell us which data we need, and why. A general model for decision making in illsurance companies must necessarily be complicated, and it cannot be built in one day. We have to approach the goal gradually, proceeding from simple to slightly more complicated models. Most actuaries work in life insurance, actuarial consultancy, investment, or general insurance, although all are expected to have a good knowledge of investment strategy. Life insurance companies provide pensions, life insurance and other financial services to enable customers to safeguard their long-term financial security. In actuarial consultancy companies, actuaries advise organizations on all aspects of employee benefits, in particular in setting up, calculating contributions and developing investment strategies to meet payments in pension schemes. Investment actuaries may specialize in managing funds, monitoring performance and advising on investment decisions. They may work for or advise investment banks, stockbrokers, or the investment and/or personnel departments of large companies. General insurance is perhaps the fastest growing area for actuaries, and it includes health insurance, personal insurance (such as home and motor insurance), life insurance, as well as large commercial risks and employer liability.

2. STATISTICAL SKILLS FOR THE LIFE INSURANCE ACTUARY

Mathematical modeling in life incurance connsider some decision making and statistical approaches, as a essential tool for determinating sutable models. There are many great quantitative approaches, that give a base for mathematical modeling in life incurance, such as [1]: Decision theory, Loss distibution, Risk models, Ruin theory, Bayesian approach, Linear programming, Different concepts of rating, etc.

893

2.1. Decision Theory An actuary will often be called upon to either give advice on, or actually make, decisions in the face of uncertainty. The action or strategy which the decision maker ultimately takes will of course depend on the criterion adopted for making a decision. In any given situation there may be several possible criteria to consider. Some situations may be viewed as games (with an intelligent and competitive opponent like a competing insurance company), while in others the opponent may be viewed as a non-competitive opponent which we term nature (like the future state of the economy which will have an effect on whether or not a new insurance product will be affordable or acceptable to the public). Familiarity with the basics of both decision and game theory will undoubtedly help in both understanding how people make decisions and why. A good understanding of zero-sum and variable-sum games can be useful, along with the concepts of minimax, pure and mixed strategies. The general area of decision making under risk, using both the minimax and Bayes criterion situations where one tries to cope with the unknown state of (a noncompetitive) nature is also important [5]. In some of these situations, the degree of uncertainty in nature might be reduced by experimentation or the collection of additional sample information (although this may often be done at a cost). Finally the concept of utility as an alternative value system to a strictly monetary one is crucial to the running of a successful business, whatever it may be. 2.2. Loss Distributions Insurance is a data-driven industry, and life insurance companies employ large numbers of analysts to understand claims data. No one likes to lose, and an actuary in particular needs to model both the frequency and size of losses and claims. Techniques in exploratory data analysis such as histograms, quantile plots, and summary statistics including sample estimates of skewness and kurtosis can be very useful tools in obtaining a feeling for the typical claim size. Relatively large claims, which may be infrequent, are of particular concern and hence the need to find and use distributions with relatively fat tails like the Pareto, Weibull and lognormal distributions. Although the empirical distribution function can be a useful tool in understanding claims data, there is often a natural desire to fit a probability distribution with reasonably tractable mathematical properties to claims data [6]. The claims actuary will also want to consider the impact of deductibles, reinsurance arrangements and inflation on that part of a claim which will be handled by the base insurance company. This involves a good understanding of conditional probabilities and distributions. 2.3. Risk Models The life incurance, as well as the general insurance actuary, needs to have an understanding of various models for the risk consisting of the total or aggregate amount of claims S payable by a company over a fixed period of time. Such models will inform the company and enable it to make decisions on amongst other things: expected profits, premium loadings, reserves necessary to ensure (with high probability) profitability, and the impact of reinsurance and deductibles. In life incurance, thera are also some specific risks, such as halthy risks. In the collective risk model for S, one uses the random variable N to indicate the number of claims made, and write [4]: S= X1 + ... + XN,, (1)

where Xi represents the amount of the ith claim which is actually made in the time period being considered. In the collective risk model for aggregated claims, S has what is called a compound distribution. Another common model for the aggregate claims S is the individual risk model: S = Y1 + ... + Yn. (2)

Here n is the number of policies (in some cases this may coincide with the number of policyholders) in the portfolio under consideration, and Yi is the random variable representing the claim amount arising from the ith policy (or policyholder). Since in a short period of time normally only a small proportion of policies give rise to claims, most of the terms Yi will be equal to 0 [4]. This is called the individual risk model for S since there is a term in the sum for each individual policy or policyholder. The actuary is required to have a good understanding of the statistical properties of both of these models for aggregated claims, in particular how they might be approximated and in some cases recursively calculated, as well as how they are effected by frequency and severity of claims. Furthermore it is important to know how various deductibles and reinsurance arrangements (proportional, excess of loss, and stop loss) affect claims payable.

894

2.4. Ruin Theory If one lets U(t) represent the net value of a portfolio of risks or policies at time t, then the actuary is certainly interested in studying the possible behaviour of U(t) over time. In a technical sense one may say that ruin occurs if at some point t in the future, the net value of the portfolio becomes negative. The probability of this event is often called the probability of ruin, and it is often used as a measure of security. In life incurance that is specific category usually called probalility of excidant. U(t) will take into account relatively predictable quantities such as initial reserves U and premium income up to time t, but it also must take account of (claim) payments which are more variable and random in nature, and of course much harder to predict [3]. Hence the need to study and understand stochastic models of the so called surplus process {U(t)}t, which represents the surplus or net value of a portfolio of policies over time. In most cases it is not possible to give an explicit expression for the probability of ruin of a surplus process, however a classic inequality provides a useful upper bound, and the so-called adjustment coefficient provides a useful surrogate measure of security for such a process. Simulation can be a useful tool in estimating the probability of ruin, and in many complex cases is the only real way of getting a grasp on the probability of ruin. It is important for the actuary to investigate how the probability of ruin in a surplus process (in both finite and infinite time) is affected by factors such as the premium rate, initial reserves U, the typical claim X, the claim arrival rate (t), and various levels and types of reinsurance. 2.5. The Bayesian Approach to Statistics and Credibility Theory Credibility theory in life insurance is essentially a form of experience-rating, which attempts to use the data in hand as well as the experience of others in determining rates and premiums. Often an actuary has to estimate expected future claim numbers and/or total aggregate claims for a portfolio of policies on the basis of rather limited sample or current information x, but where other collateral information is also at hand. Let us assume there is crucial parameter of interest, which for example may be the annual claim rate or a related expected aggregate claims total. Often there is other collateral or prior information from business or portfolios of a similar nature, which might be useful in estimating . Let us denote by s an estimate of basedon the sample information x, and by c an estimate of based on the available collateral information. In the situation where is a mean, s might be the sample mean of x and c some prior estimate (say 0) of this mean [3]. Clearly the Bayesian framework for statistics comes into play in the combination of these sources of information. Surely the value of Z should both be an increasing function of the amount of sample information acquired over time, and it should take account of the relative values of the sample and collateral information available. A credibility estimate of is a linear combination of the sample estimator s and the collateral estimate c of the form: Z s +(1-Z) c (3)

where Z is the credibility we put on the sample estimator s. This general expression is often called the credibility premium formula. Traditionally there has been an emphasis on only using estimates s which are linear in the observations in the credibility premium formula, and although such estimates have considerable appeal there is no theoretical reason why other sample estimates cannot be used. 2.6. Generalized Linear Models Modelling relationships between various observations (responses) and variables is the essence of most statistical research and analysis. Constructing interpretable models for connecting (or linking) such responses to variables (which may be of a nominal, ordinal or interval (continuous) nature) can often give one much added insight into the complexity of the relationship that may often be hidden in a huge amount of data. Letting Y be an observation where Y is a member of the exponential family of distributions, the general insurance actuary must have an understanding of the relationship between i =E(Yi) and other explanatory variables xi1, xi2, ... xip through a linear predictor i [5]: i = 1xi1+ 2xi2 + ...+ p xip, (4)

where g(i) = i. Are the numbers of automobile claims made by a driver related to age, education, gender, type of vehicle, engine size and daily usage? In what way is the size of an employer liability claim related to the personal characteristics of the employee (age, gender, salary) and the working environment (safety standards, hours of work, promotional prospects)? We might want to study how the number of claims made by an insured individual

895

depends on various explanatory variables or predictors, or how the number of accidents at an intersection depends on weather, traffic intensity, hour of the day, or day of the week. One might consider a logit model if we are interested in modelling how the probability of an individual developing a critical illness or having a car accident is related to age, gender and various other health or risk factors. Logistic regression may be used to identify variables that are predictive of how long a customer stays with a company. In mortality studies, the initial rate of mortality qx at age x has been modelled by logistic regression. It is clear that generalized linear models are now a fundamental tool in the arsenal of a general insurance actuary. 2.7. Concepts of Rating In life insurance, claims due to physical damage (injuries in a vehicle or building) or theft are often reported and settled reasonably quickly. However in other areas of life insurance, there may be considerable delay between the time of a claim inducing event and the determination of the actual amount the company will have to pay in settlement. When an incident leading to a claim occurs, it may not be reported for some time. In employer liability insurance, the exposure of an employee to a dangerous or toxic substance may not be discovered for a considerable amount of time. In the case of an accident the incident may be quickly reported, but it may be a considerable amount of time before it is determined actually who is liable and to what extent. Clearly an insurance company needs to know on a regular basis how much it should be setting aside in reserves in order to handle claims arising from incidents that have already occurred, but for which it does not yet know the full extent of its liability. Claims arising from incidents which have already occurred but which have not been reported to the insurer are termed IBNR (incurred but not reported) claims. Claims which have been reported but for which a final settlement has not been determined are called Outstanding. Claims reserving is a challenging exercise in general insurance, and one should never underestimate the knowledge and intuition that an experienced claims adjuster uses in establishing reserves and estimating ultimate losses [2]. However mathematical models and techniques can also be very useful, and give the added advantage of laying a basis for simulation. One of the most frequently used techniques for estimating reserves is the chain ladder method. In this method one looks at how claims arising from different origin years have developed over subsequent years, and then use relevant ratios to predict how future claims from these years will evolve. The question of how to deal with past and future inflation in estimating reserves must be considered. The average cost per claim method is a popular tool which takes account of the numbers of claims reported. All of these techniques are quite deterministic in nature, but one may also consider statistical models which would allow one to evaluate fitness, variability and basic assumptions better. No Claim Discount (NCD) systems (sometimes also called Bonus-Malus systems) are experience-rating systems which are commonly used in motor insurance. NCD schemes represent an attempt to categorize policyholders into relatively homogeneous risk groups who pay premiums relative to their claims experience. Those who have made few claims in recent years are rewarded with discounts on their initial premium, and hence are enticed to stay with the company. Depending on the rules in the scheme, new policyholders may be required to pay the full premium initially and then will obtain discounts in the future as a result of claim free years [2]. The general insurance actuary modelling an NCD scheme would frequently use Markov chain methods to investigate how premiums and movements take place over time.

3. CONCLUSION
The life insurance actuary needs to know the essentials of decision and game theory to compete in the market of general insurance. An understanding of probability and statistical distributions is necessary to absorb and evaluate risk and ruin when balancing claims, reserves and premiums. In introducing and developing new products, credibility theory and Bayesian statistics play a role in evaluating sample and collateral information. Markov chains are important in predicting the success of rating methods, including NCD systems. Generalized Linear models are essential tools in finding risk factors for premiums calculations. Time series methods are used in various ways to predict trends, and simulation methods are crucial to understanding the many models considered for anything from new products to revisions in rating schemes.

REFERENCES
[1] Boland, P. J.: Statistical Methods in Insurance and Actuarial Science. New York: Taylor & Frances Inc., 2007, pp. 345, ISBN 154886951. [2] Buhlmann, H. and Gisler, A.: A Course in Credibility Theory and its Applications. New York: Springer, 2005, pp. 360, ISBN 3-540-25753-5.

896

[3] Dickson, D. C. : Insurance Risk and Ruin, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, International Series on Actuarial Science, 2005, pp. 229, ISBN 0 521 84640 4. [4] Herzog, T. N.: Introduction to Credibility Theory, Winsted, CT: ACTEX Publications, 1999, pp. 271, ISBN 1-56698-347-6. [5] Hossack, I. B., Pollard, J. H., and Zehnwirth, B.: Introductory Statistics with Applications in General Insurance (2nd edition). Cambridge University Press, 1999, pp. 296 , ISBN-10 052165534X. [6] Klugman, S. A., Panjer, H. H. and Willmot, G. E.: Loss Models: From Data to Decisions. New York: Wiley, Series in Probability and Statistics, pp 254, ISBN 04122625.

897

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

QUANTITATIVE METHODS FOR MEASURING OPERATIONAL RISK

Jelena Stankovi1, Obrad Todorovi2, Milivoje Pei3
2

Faculty of Economics, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: jelena.stankovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs e-mail: obrad.todorovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs, 3e-mail: milivoje.pesic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs

Summary: Orational risk managemant is higly importante activity in managemant process of banks and other financiial institutions. In this paper are presented the essential elements of the framework it is used in assessment of operational risk managemant practices in the bankes, as well as different approaches to quantification of operational risk. Quantification of operational risk is very important and it has a vital role in assesing the prefered level of risk in an institution. Keywords:Operational Risk Managemant, Retail Banking, Quantitative Methods.

1. INTRODUCTION
Operational risk has historically been defined as all other risk, different then market, credit and liquidity risk. However, the Basel Committee for Banking Supervision has narrowed this definition whitin International Convergence of Capital Maesurement and Capital Standards, A Revised Framework (Basel II) to: The risk of loss resulting from the inadequate or failed internal processes, people or systems or from the external events. This definition includes legal risk, but excludes strategic and reputational risk [5]. Basel II, among many other things, require banks and other financial institution to establish an operational risk framework and compute en explicit charge for operationalrisk once it is adopted. The principal chalenges faced when attempting to describe operational risk are it's latent character, the absence of data, and the rarity of highimpact events.. While for the market risk, plenty of data are publicly available, and for credit risk, sufficient data are available in banks internally, there are very few data available on operational risk. That's why is necessarily to determinate all types of errors that causes an operational risk.

2. OPERATIONAL RISK DETERMINATION

One issue about operational risk that has evolved is the difficulty in distinguishing what is in fact operational risk and what is not. Definitions do not always help in this, as for instance the Basel II definition does not refer to the reputational loss possibility of a risk event happening. Also, there is no possibility of precise determinatin what is the risk implication of an error. Errors occur in virtually any type of process, the risk is therefore more complex than simply recognising an error. Operational risk is very diverse and is massively about perception and reality, something that is not always one and the same thing. A loss happening is not always a disaster. It may be undesirable and it will affect the profit/loss figures but it is not necessarily a threat to the business. For example, if the maden error during same trading action, causes the damige that is equivalent of 1 per cent of the profit made in the same action, is it risk for the business. As a firm knows traders make errors, they put in place adequate controls and procedures to ensure that the number, type and value of those errors is recorded and known. However, if there is a failure in controls and procedures that are supposed to validate the trades and the resulting profit/losses then there is the significant risk for the business of the enterprise, bank, or other financial institutions. What we can see is that trading errors, recognised as part of the business of the firm, can be a nonissue or equally a massive operational risk source.That is why is necessary to determinate the operations risk element of operational risk.

898

According to Basel II, there are seven categories of operational risk [3]. Each of tham is caused by certan faliures. The categories of operational risk, as well as the dectription of actions that causes it is given in Table 1. Table 1: Operational risk clasification Type of operational risk Execution, delivery and process managemant Desctription Data entry errors, collateral managemant failures, incomplete legal documentation, unapproved access given to client accounts, non-client counterparty faliure of performance, vendor disputes Workers compensation claims, violation of employee helth and safety rules, organised labour activities, discrimination claims and general liability Fiduciary breaches, misuse of confidential customer information, improper tarading activities on the bank's account, money londering and sale of unauthorised products Terrorism, vandalism, earthquake, fires and floods Hardware and software failures, telecomunication problems, utility outages Intentional misraporting of positions, employee theft, insider trading on an employee's personal account Roberry, forgery, cheque kiting and demage from computer hacking

Enployment practices and workplace safety

Client, products and business practices

Damage to physical assets Business disruption and system failures Internal fraud

External fraud

Since, the biggest part of bank business in Serbia is in retail banking, special attention will be given to determinition of specific kinds of errors that causes operational risk in retail banking.

3. MANAGING OPERATIONAL RISK IN RETAIL BANKING

In retail banking there are many potential operational risk scenarios and many of these are operations-related. The structure of retail banking today is very much a mix of branch style banking where there is direct personal contact, telephone banking and e-banking. Paper is still in evidence in many aspects of this type of banking service and this can be true even when we are looking at telephone and e-banking. In the area of business banking for small and medium-size enterprises, it is common to find a mix of automated and manual services. In operational terms, the risks most likely to occur are within the processing and the customer contact areas. Failures in procedures will be the probable root cause of risk events and yet many banks operate on a basis of fairly autonomous yet very much interlinked structures, where there may be both unique and common procedures in operation. Typical situations that causes operational risk in retail banking are[6]: Confidentiality of client data Payment processes Compliance failure Reliance on services and products from other areas of the bank Change management Controls failure Inefficient processes Relationship dangers Fraud (internal and external). In retail banking like all organizations, operations risks can be looked at in a number of ways [4]: (i) Catastrophic risks clearly there are events that have occurred that can be described as catastrophic, which have been attributable in whole or in part to operational failures.

899

(ii) Generic risks - credit card frauds and regulatory review of the sales process, where there is little or no ability for an organization to mitigate against all risks as they may not have total or sufficient control over the situation. (iii) Unique risks then there is the operations risk that is created internally by the bank. This would cover headline areas like resource levels, skill sets and even the operational structure itself including management. (iv) Creeping risk an example might be problems with fees and charges that originate in one area of the bank but manifest themselves in another, usually with greater severity, that is a client is debited the wrong charges that could lead to compensation and also a regulatory situation. In any organization there is some degree of operational risk managemant simply because employees do their tasks correctly. Without active management and leadership, however, that organization is both vulnerable if task performance levels deteriorate and is missing the benefits that active operational risk managemant can bring. Operational risk managemant is system that does not just happen, it has to be nurtured and developed. It also has to be meaningful, focused and above all deliver value to the bank. Too much operational risk managemant and it will be expensive for the business, difficult to implement and will result in few, if any, benefits for the bank, too little As in every case of risk management, the structure of the organization is a key consideration and the risk management structure needs to complement it. In most retail banks there are several business units. Each will have unique risks and common risks. It is crucial that the operations risk is apparent within a business unit and across business units. Consider the somewhat simplistic and hypothetical structure below. Although not necessarily a structure that one might be totally familiar with, it nevertheless serves its purpose in showing how the business units are interoperable in risk terms and also silo based in risk terms. It is important to say that in Figure 1 risk management sits above the business areas, in no way should the assumption be made that the business reports to operational risk managemant . However, what a successful operational risk managemant structure will deliver is to create a risk-awareness culture across the business areas and to act as a conduit for identification, monitoring and control of risks related to a business unit and across business units [6].

Retail bank board

Operational Risk Managemant

Branch network Main and branch offices Customer services & sales/ marketing

Service development Banking services Lending Savings products

Technology and system support Central accounting and recordkeeping systems Payment systems e-banking

Business resources HR Internal audit Compliance Premises Security

Figure 1: Structure of operational risk management

900

4. APPROACHES FOR MESURING OPERATIONAL RISK

The modeling of operational risk comprisis two important aspekts: (i) the frequency with which operational losses occure, and (ii) the size (money amount) of the loss suffered in the case of an event. Of course, both quantities are stochastic. One therefore is interested in deteminating their probability density functions. Many operational risk can be insured. Data collection therefore is an important focus of operational risk controlling. When loss data are collected, that is initial data base for different kind of quantitive approaches for managing operational risk and calculation of capital requirements for operational risk. There are tree approaches for the calculation of regulatory capital for operational risk [5]: (i) The Basicasic Indicator Appraoch (BIA) (ii) The Standardised Approach (TSA),as well as the Alternate Standardised Appraoch (ASA) (iii) The Advanced Mesurement Approach (AMA). 4.1. The Basic Indicator Appraoch The Basic Indicator Appraoch is designed for smaller and less sophisticated banks, as it is relativly easy to implement and does not require banks to satisfy any entry level criteria. It was designed with the expectation that it would give rise to a higher capital charge than the alternative approaches in orther to encourage banks to develop their risk managemant practices and prodress to using the more sophisticated methodologies. The capital charge is calculated as a percentage of gross income. Although there is no requirement for orhanisations to adopt this approach, it is expected that organisations adopt a quqlitive framework to manage their operational risk. Although Europeans regulators allow some institutions to qualify for using basic indicator approach, it offers little benefit over a flat capital charge. Hence, the USA regulators have the most part disqualified this approach, along with The Standard approach, and their only requierement is that the larger institutions should put Advanced Mesurement Approach programmes in place (other US banks are coverd by US regulations and are not sugject of the Basel II framework at this point of time, though US regulators do require banks to have operational risk frameworks in place). 4.2. The Standardised Approach The Standardised Approach (TSA) is design for major banks and also as a transition stage for banks intending to adopt AMA in the future. The capital charge is simulary to BIA, a function of gross income, but gross income is calculated at a more granular level, for eight business lines, with a multiplier depending upon the business line. Given the simplistic way of calculating capital charge, this approach use qualitative elements and zhe mechanisms put in the place to colect loss data. Under the Alternate Standardised Approach (ASA), the operational risk capital charge is calculated in the same way as under the standardised approach, exept the case of retail and comercial banking. Banks, with the approval of the national regulator, can use loans and advances as the exposure indicator insted od grooss income, as it was practice using TSA [2]. The concession is intended for banks operating in markets with very high margins, where gross income will be much higher than for the banks in other countries. Application of this approach is subject to the discretion of national regulators. The is a danger that banks may allowed to adopt this approach in some countries, but not in others, with clear thresholds not being set. It is not exeptable that the bank use this metodology purely to obtain the benefit of a lower capital charge. 4.3. The Advanced Mesurement Approach The two simplest approaches, BIA and the TSA define the operational risk capital of a bank as a fraction of its gross income. The Advanced Mesurement Approach (AMA) allows banks to develop their own model for assessing the regulatory capital that covers their yearly operational risk exposure within a confidence interval of 99.9% (henceforth this exposure is called operational value at risk, or OpVaR) [1]. To comply with regulatory requirements, a sound AMA framework combines four sources of information [1]: (i) Internal operational risk loss data (ii) Relevant external operational risk loss data (iii) Scenario analysis of expert opinion (iv) Bank-specific business environment and internal control factors The relative weight of each source and the way to combine them together are up to the banks; Basel II does not provide a regulatory model.

901

The Basel Committee released its consultative paper on operational risk in 2001. Since then, banks have started designing and developing their own internal model to measure their exposure to operational risk just as they began implementing consistent and comprehensive operational risk loss data collection processes. The application of AMA is in principle open to any proprietary model, but methodologies have converged over the years and standards have appeared. The result is that most AMA models can now be classified into two categories [2]: (i) Loss distribution approaches (ii) Scenario-based approaches The qualitative requirements are olso more exacting then those for TSA, but not greatly so. As such, it is favorable for banks to adopt the AMA.

5. CONCLUSION
Essential to a successful operational risk managemant and mesurement system is the framework within which it operates. There are five que elements to a successful framework: (i) Clear responsibillity at board level, including establishing thr risk policy and appetite (in board terms); (ii) Independent risk raporting function within the overall risk managemant framework; (iii) Responsibillity for managing the risk at a business line level; (iv) A corporate culture fostering the identification and raporting of operational losses; and (v) Where appropriate a robust modelling programe, including data capture. Of all these, the fourth is the least tangible and is probably the most difficult to achive, but it has perheps the most profound impact upon an institution. Indeed, it is essential to the fostering of successful managemant, and fundamental to the sucessful use of majority, if not all, of the managemant tools.

REFERENCES
[1] Chapelle, A. ; Crama, Y, ; Hbner, G. & Peters, J.P. : Practical methods for measuring and managing operational risk in the financial sector: A clinical study, Journal of Banking & Finance, Volume 32, Issue 6, June 2008, pp. 1049-1061. ISSN 0378-4266 [2] Cornalba, C. & Giudici, P.: Statistical models for operational risk management Physica A: Statistical Mechanics and its Applications, Volume 338, Issues 1-2, 1 July 2004, pp. 166-172. ISSN 0378-4371 [3] Gregoriou, G.: Operational Risk toward Basel III - Best Practices and Issues in Modeling, Management, and egulation, New Jersey: Wiley, 2009, pp 479. ISBN 978-0-470-39014-6 [4] Hull, J.: Risk Managemant and Financial Institutions, New Jersey: Preantice Hall, 2007., pp. 500. ISBN 013-239790-0 [5] International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards, A revised Framework, Basel Commette for Banking Supervision, Bank of International Settlements, Basel, 2004., Avaible on Web site: www.bis.org [6] Jarrow, R.: Operational risk, Journal of Banking & Finance, Volume 32, Issue 6, June 2008, pp. 870-879. ISSN 0378-4266

902

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

THE SIGNIFICANCE OF DETERMINATION OF ECONOMIC CAPITAL FOR RISK MANAGEMANT IN BANKS AND OTHER FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
2

Faculty of Economics, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: jelena.stankovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs e-mail: obrad.todorovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs, 3 e-mail: jovica.stankovic@eknfak.ni.ac.rs

Jelena Stankovi1, Obrad Todorovi2, Jovica Stankovi3

Summary: The Value at Risk methodology applies to measure economic capital. The latter differs from regulatory capital or from available capital in that it measures actual risks. Regulatory capital uses forfeits falling short of measuring actual risks. Economic capital necessitates the Value at Risk methodology, with the modelling of loss distribution, with all related complexities. The Earnings at Risk concept is an alternative and simpler route to capital than Value at Risk. For this reason, it is useful to detail the technique and to contrast the relative merits of Earnings at Risk versus VaR. Keywords: Economic Capital, Value at Risk, Regulatory Capital, Loss Distribution.

1. INTRODUCTION
The new capital adequacy rules by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, widely known as Basel II, is a set of regulatory standards targeting not only a sound capital ratio for credit risk, market risk and operational risk, but also a host of subjects relating to good governance. As is the case in engineering and in the physical sciences, the setting of standards is most important because it brings both: A reduction in the variability of results, and The localization of reasons of existing variations. These two aftermaths see to it that standardization and regulation lead to an enlargement of the field of activity, rather than to a constrained perspective as it is often intuitively felt. They also bring to attention the need for a sound foundation for economic capital allocation. Apart from the capital requirements, which must be met, an able solution rests on three pillars [8]: 1 Corporate strategy. Capital allocation should not be done on general income basis. It should follow strategic decisions, prognosticate business opportunities and promote chosen lines of activity, using income from channels with less future (cash flows). 2 Risk management. The amount of current and future exposure is vital input to all strategic decisions and therefore to capital allocation. Regulatory and economic capital must assure financial staying power. 3 Advanced information technology. Top-tier information technology provides the infrastructure which would allow factual allocation of financial resources. Experimentation, simulation and reliable documentation are musts. A similar statement is valid about testing strategic plans, risk control policies and procedures, as well as technology and models used to help senior management to do a better job. Basel II brings into perspective the critical question of what should be settled and what should be tested in the process of regulation, standardization, and management control. Key elemant of that process is determination of economic capital.

903

2. VALUE AT RISK
Value at Risk (VaR) provides the measure of economic capital defined as an upper bound of future potential losses. Once defined at the bank-wide level, the capital allocation system assigns capital, or a risk measure after diversification effect, to any subset of the banks portfolio, which allows risk-adjusted performances to be defined, using both capital allocation and transfer pricing systems. The VaR is a potential loss. Potential losses can theoretically extend to the value of the entire portfolio, although everyone would agree that this is an exceptional event, with near-zero probability. To resolve this issue, the VaR is the maximum loss at a preset confidence level. The confidence level is the probability that the loss exceeds this upper bound. Determining the VaR requires modelling the distribution of values at some future time point, in order to define various loss percentiles, each one corresponding to a confidence level. VaR applies to all risks. Market risk is an adverse deviation of value during a certain liquidation period. Credit risk materializes through defaults of migrations across risk classes. Defaults trigger losses. Migrations trigger risk-adjusted value changes. VaR for credit risk is an adverse deviation of value, due to credit risk losses or migrations, at a preset confidence level. VaR applies as long as we can build up a distribution of future values of transactions or of losses. The VaR methodology serves to define risk-based capital, or economic capital. Economic capital, or risk-based capital, is the capital required to absorb potential unexpected losses at the preset confidence level. The confidence level reflects the risk appetite of the bank. By definition, it is also the probability that the loss exceeds the capital, triggering bank insolvency. Hence, the confidence level is equivalent to the default probability of the bank [7]. The VaR concept shines for three major reasons: it provides a complete view of portfolio risk; it measures economic capital; it assigns fungible values to risks. Unlike intuition would suggest, the average loss is not sufficient to define portfolio risk because portfolio losses vary randomly around this average. Because VaR captures the downside risk, it is the basis for measuring economic capital, the ultimate safety cushion for absorbing losses. Finally, instead of capturing risks through multiple qualitative indicators (sensitivities, ratings, watch lists, excess limits...), VaR assigns a money value to risk. Valuation makes all risks fungible, whatever the sources of uncertainty. By contrast, classical indicators do not add up as money values do. Earnings at Risk (EaR) is a simple and practical version of VaR. EaR measures, at preset confidence levels, the potential adverse deviations of earnings. EaR is not VaR, but shares the same underlying concept, and has the benefit of being relatively easy to measure. Although similar to VaR, EaR does not relate the adverse deviations of earnings to the underlying risks because EaR aggregates the effects of all risks. By contrast, VaR requires linking losses to each risk. Relating risk measures to the sources of risk is a prerequisite for risk management, because the latter aims at controlling risk ex ante, rather than after its materialization into losses. VaR models the value of risk and relates it to the instrumental variables, allowing ex ante control of risk using such parameters as sensitivities to market risk, exposure limits, concentration for credit risk, etc. VaR has many benefits when compared to traditional measures of risk. It assigns a value to risk, it is synthetic and it is fungible. In addition, the VaR methodology serves to define economic capital [2]. The progress is significant over other measures. The latter differs from regulatory capital or from available capital in that it measures actual risks. Regulatory capital uses forfeits falling short of measuring actual risks. Economic capital necessitates the VaR methodology, with the modelling of loss distribution, with all related complexities. The EaR concept is an alternative and simpler route to capital than VaR. For this reason, it is useful to detail the technique and to contrast the relative merits of EaR versus VaR. 2.1. Regulatory Capital The simplest way to define the required capital is to use regulatory capital. This is a common practice in the absence of any simple and convincing measure of capital. In addition, the regulatory capital is a requirement. At first sight, there seems to be no need to be more accurate than the regulators. However, regulatory capital has many limitations, even after the enhancements proposed by the Basel II. Using regulatory capital as a surrogate for economic capital generates important distortions because of the divergence between the real risks and the forfeited risks of regulatory capital. According to Basel II regularory capital (RC) is calculatet as [6]:

RC =

Total Assets 8 100

(1)

For regulation purposes, credit risk is dependent on outstanding balances (book exposures) and on risk weights. Such forfeits are less risk-sensitive than economic measures. In addition, standardized regulatory approaches measure risk over a portfolio by a simple addition of individual risks for credit risk. This ignores the diversification effect and results in the same measure of risk for widely diversified portfolios and for highly concentrated portfolios. Basic indicator in this field is Capital Adequacy Racio (CA), which is calculate as [6]:

904

CA =

C RWA

(2)

where is: C Capital RWA Risk Weighted Assets The shortcomings of forfeit measures have implications for the entire risk management system. What follows applies to credit risk, since market models are allowed. Visibility on actual risks remains limited. Credit risk limits remain based on book exposures since regulatory capital depends on these. The target performance also uses forfeit measures of capital. The allocation of this capital across business units does not depend on their true risks. Any risk-based policy for measuring risk-adjusted performances, or for risk-based pricing, suffers from such distortions.

Figure : Risk influance to the assets Figure 1. illustrates the qualitative gap between traditional risk measures and RWA. It describes the various indicators of risk serving various purposes for measuring or monitoring risks. Such indicators or quantified measures are not fungible, and it is not possible to convert them, except for market instrument sensitivities, into potential losses. By contrast, VaR synthesizes all of them and represents a loss, or a risk value. Because VaR is synthetic, it is not a replacement for such specific measures, but it summarizes them.

3. DETERMINATION OF ECONOMIC CAPITAL

There are several types of potential losses: Expected Loss (EL); Unexpected Loss (UL); exceptional losses [3]. The unexpected loss is the upper bound of loss not exceeded in more than a limited given fraction of all outcomes. Such potential loss is also a loss percentile defined with the preset confidence level. Since the confidence level might take various values, it is necessary to be able to define all of them. Hence, modelling the unexpected loss requires modelling the loss distribution of the bank portfolio, which provides the frequencies of all various possible values of losses. Obtaining such loss distributions is the major challenge of risk models. VaR is the unexpected loss set by the confidence level. The exceptional loss, or extreme loss, is the loss in excess of unexpected loss. It ranges from the unexpected loss, as a lower bound, up to the entire portfolio value, but values within this upper range have extremely low probability of occurrence. 3.1. Expected Losses The expected loss serves for credit risk. Market risk considers only deviations of values as losses, and ignores expected profit and loss gains for being conservative. Expected loss represents a statistical loss over a portfolio of a large number of loans. The law oflarge numbers says that losses will sometimes be high or low. Intuition suggests that they revert to some long-term average[1]. This is the foundation for economic provisioning and expected loss risk management. Intuition suggests that provisioning the expected loss should be enough to absorb losses. This might be true in the long-term. By definition, statistical losses average losses over a number

905

of periods and yearly losses presumably tend to revert to some long-term mean. The intuition is misleading, however, because it ignores the transitory periods when losses exceed a long-term average. Lower than longterm average loss in good years could compensate, in theory, higher losses in bad years. There is no guarantee that losses will revert quickly to some long-run average. Deviations might last longer than expected. Therefore, economic provisioning will result in transitory excess losses over the long-term average. Unless there is capital to absorb such excesses, it cannot ensure bank solvency. The first loss above average would trigger default. However, the choice of reference period for calculating the average loss counts. Starting in good years, we might have an optimistic reference value for expected loss and vice versa. Regulators insist on measuring through the cycle to average these effects. This is a sound recommendation, so that economic provisions, if implemented, do not underestimate average losses in bad years because they refer to loss observed during the expansion phase of the economic cycle. Statistical losses are more a portfolio concept rather than an individual transaction concept. For one single transaction, the customer may default or not. However, for a single exposure, the real loss is never equal to the average. On the other hand, for a portfolio, the expected loss is the mean of the distribution of losses. It makes sense to charge to each transaction this average, because each one should contribute to the overall required provision. The more diversified a portfolio is, the lower is the loss volatility and the closer losses tend to be to the average value [5]. However, this does not allow us to ignore the unexpected loss. One purpose of VaR models is to specify precisely both dimensions of risk, average level and chances/magnitudes of deviations from this average. Focusing on only one does not provide the risk profile of a portfolio. In fact, characterizing this profile requires the entire loss distribution to see how likely are large losses of various magnitudes. The EL, as a long-term average, is a loss value that we will face it sooner or later. Therefore, it makes sense to deduct the EL from revenues, since it represents an overall averaged charge. If there were no random deviations around this average, there would be no need to add capital to economic provisions [1]. This rationale implies that capital should be in excess of expected loss under economic provisioning. 3.1. Unexpected Losses Unexpected losses are potential losses in excess of the expected value. The VaR approach defines potential losses as loss percentiles at given confidence levels. The loss percentile is the upper bound of loss not exceeded in more than a given fraction of all possible cases, this fraction being the confidence level. It is L(), where is the one-tailed1 probability of exceeding L() [4]. For example, L(1%) = 100 means that the loss exceeds the value of 100 in no more than 1% of cases (one out of 100 possible scenarios, or two to three days within a year). The purpose of VaR models is to provide the loss distribution, or the probability of each loss value, to derive all loss percentiles for various confidence levels. The unexpected loss is the excess of the loss percentiles over the expected loss, L() EL. Economic capital is equal to unexpected loss measured as a loss percentile in excess of expected loss, under economic provisioning (Figure 2.).

Figure 2: Loss distributions and economic capital The two major ingredients for defining expected and unexpected losses are the loss distribution and the confidence level. The confidence level results from a management choice reflecting the risk appetite, or the tolerance for risk, of the management and the banks policy with respect to its credit standing. Modelling loss

906

distributions raises major technical challenges because the focus is on extreme deviations rather than on the central tendency. Since downside risk characterizes VaR and economic capital, loss volatility and the underlying loss distribution are critical.

4. CONCLUSION
All these forms of capital, both regulatorz and economic, are there to help the credit institution face expected losses. In terms of good business practice, the way to bet is that neither expected risks nor unexpected risks are instantaneous. Like business cycles and economic downturns, an entitys downs take years to develop and correct. What the supervisors require is that within the medium to longer term the board must not only assure compliance to regulatory capital, but also have enough additional reserves to cover the banks business channels of exposure. Regulatory capital and economic capital are two concepts key in managing a banks business activities and in prudential regulation. They are also closely linked to one another. Adequate regulatory capital cushions individual credit institutions against expected losses, and it contributes towards the stability of the banking system as a whole. Moreover: The amount of available capital limits the extent of risk being assumed through operations, and A banks risk position determines the level of capital it needs from both an economic and a regulatory perspective. At the same time, however, regulatory capital and economic capital requirements are different in several ways. Regulatory capital requirements are minimum requirements imposed on credit institutions by the banking supervisory authorities. A banks economic capital represents equity and other financial resources, which the credit institution itself deems necessary in the light of prudent risk management. As cannot be repeated too often, regulatory capital corresponds to expected losses which are of higher frequency but are less in terms of impact, case by case, than unexpected losses. Economic, or internal, capital allocated to cover unexpected losses can extend all the way to extreme events.

REFERENCES
[1] Belmont, D.: Value Added Risk Management in Financial Institutions: Leveraging Basel II & Risk Adjusted Performance Measurement , Singapore: Wiley, 2004, pp. 313. ISBN 0470-821159 [2] Bluhm, C. .; Overback, L & Wagner, C: An Introduction to Credit Risk Modeling, New York: Chapman & Hall/Crc Financial Mathematics Series, 2002, pp. 292, ISBN 1-58488-326-X [3] Bonin, J.P. ; Hasan, I. & Wachtel, P.: Bank erformance, efficiency and ownership in transition countries, Journal of Banking and Finance, Volume 29, Issue 1 SPEC. ISS.( 2005) , pp 31-53. ISSN 0378-4266 [4] Chorafas, D.: Economic Capital Allocation with Basel II - Cost, benefit and implementation procedures, Oxford, UK: Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, 2004, pp. 403, ISBN 0 7506 6182 8 [5] Hull, J.: Risk Managemant and Financial Institutions, New Jersey: Preantice Hall, 2007., pp. 500. ISBN 013-239790-0 [6] International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards, A revised Framework, Basel Commette for Banking Supervision, Bank of International Settlements, Basel, 2004., Avaible on Web site: www.bis.org [7] Margaritis, D. & Psillaki, M.: Capital structure, equty ownership and firm performance, Journal of Banking and Finance, Volume 3 (2010), pp 621-632. ISSN 0378-4266 [8] Matten, C.: Managing bank Capital: Capital Allocation and Performance Masuremant, 2nd edn. Chichester, UK: Wiley, 2000, pp 337. ISBN 0-471-85196-5.

907

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MONITORING OF INDUSTRIAL POLLUTANTS IN COMPLEX PROCESS SYSTEM

Sonja Stefanov1, Mirjana Vojinovic Miloradov2, Slobodan Sokolovic2, imon Bancov3
Panevo, Serbia, e-mail: stefanov.sonja@gmail.com University of Novi Sad, Faculty of tecnical science, Novi Sad, SERBIA 3 Provincial Secretariat for Environmental Protection and Sustainable Development, Novi Sad, SERBIA
2 1

Summary: Data on the preliminary industrial monitoring of pollutants` integral control and pollution prevention in Oil and Petrochemical Industry are presented. Industrial monitoring as integral control has the function of pollution prevention. In this research the following steps were taken: we analysed the measuring results of sulphur dioxide (SO2), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), nitrogen oxide (NOx), ammonia (NH3), ozone (O3), benzene-toluene-xylene (BTX) and total hydrocarbon (THC). Discussion of results indicates places of pollution sources and where we could take steps in order to reduce the pollution. Key words: emission, industrial monitoring, integral control, pollution.

1. INTRODUCTION
The aim is to provide information on the release of polluting materials and/or performance of control technologies. It provides information on the nature of pollutants emissions and/or the performance of purification plant. Industrial monitoring of emissions from the industry is performed, in accordance with appropriate, defined and amended programme for taking samples. It is also in accordance with the accepted measuring protocols (standards, analythical and evaluation methods). Industrial monitoring regimes for integrated control and pollution prevention (IPPC) may comprise the following: Emission of exhaust gases and flying substances Flow of waste water via the sewer system in and from water purification plants to the recipient Solid waste deposits on depots Storing solid and liquid waste, including the organic waste, in burn-in chambers Industrial treatment of raw materials (such as traces of polluting materials) and conditions in plants (treatment temperature, pressure and flow) Diffusive release into the air, water and soil Recipients of emissions such as air, grass, surface soil and underground waters Expenditure of raw materials and energy Sources and levels of noise and vibrations Sources of smells Conditions in the plant Performance and maintenance of monitoring equipment There are special requests for industrial monitoring in the following situations: Complexity and sensitivity of measuring technics and the rise of prices Accpetance of EMAS and ISO 14000 by the foreign industry Implementation of IPPC The polluter pays principle is applied, especially in the case of regulatory regime that does not reimburse manufacturers for monitoring

908

Manufacturers willingly perform the monitoring or there is an obligation of performance Conditions of performing Self-monitoring Confidence in the quality of results (QA/QC) - Application of the standardised measuring methods, where possible (sampling and analysis) - Certified instruments - Trained personnel - Accredited laboratories Bases of industrial monitoring in Europe: - Council Directive 96/61/EC of 24 September 1996 IPPC Directive - Directive on the limit values from Articles 18 (2) and 20 of IPPC Directive (Annex II IPPC) - (EC) Regulation No 761/2001 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 19 March 2001, governing EMAS - IPPC Reference document on the General Principles of Monitoring, November 2002 - BREF's prepared by the European IPPC Bureau - EIPPCB Monitoring Methods The methods can be divided in two basic categories: non-continuous continuous Non-continuous Monitoring The main form is periodical monitoring at regular intervals, in order to include a defined part of the production process or representative time intervals (hourly, daily, monthly, etc.) It may include composite samples taken at selected intervals. Sample analysis is cumulative at a specified period. Data from the instruments are read at regular intervals during the production process. Monitoring periods are determined in advance (in the permit or by the law) and they have to include the entire process Each parameter can be analysed in the waste water or waste gas sample, where the analyses of gas depends on the equipment for collecting such as the filters, impingers, scrubbers, absorbents, etc. Continuous Monitoring Continuous measuring series provide the data in high-resolution time (e.g. constant data collection from the instant feedback instruments) Data are frequently available in real time (from electronic monitors) and are useful for process control Continuous measuring may be more expensive compared to the non-continuous one, depending on the frequency of periodical measurings Continuous monitoring of air primarily refers to SO2, NOx, CO, and particles Continuous monitoring of waste water is frequently limited to the flow, pH, electrical conductivity and temperature, as well as to some specific ion fluorides, sulphides, nitrates and cyanides. The other relevant parameters such as the biological consumption of oxygen, chemical consumption of oxygen, nitrogen, phosphates, oils and grease, detergents, heavy metals, pesticides etc, are measured periodically and analysed in laboratory Monitoring Frequency Refers to the time between individual measurings or groups of measuring Varies in different situations (from once a year to continuous 24-hour on-line measuring) Examples of monitoring frequency (the Dutch law on determining the fees for discharging waste waters): Category 1 (small amount): monitoring is not required Category 2 (medium amount): 4 10 mixed, 8 24 hours of individual samples (depends on the production cycle) Category 3 (high amount): 1 4 representative composite samples in a week (per season) Category 4 (season pollutants): continuous monitoring or maximum 12 proportional weekly average values (per season). Monitoring parameters and testing methods are presented in a BREF document "General Principles of Monitoring". The relevant EC Directives specify the monitoring methods and standards such as EN-CEN and

909

ISO standards for particular priority parameters. Parameters that for the greatest part of industrial emissions and discharges have to be observed are listed in the BREF documents. Environmental Laws in Serbia are: Law on Integrated Environmental Pollution Prevention and Control (IPPC) published in the Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia, No. 135/04 (the law is in accordance with Council Directive 96/61/EC); Regulation of monitoring and air quality demands, official gazette of the Republic of Serbia, No. 11/2010. (defines these new ways of monitoring) the law of Air Protection, Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia, No. 36/09. and the Law on Environment Protection, Official Gazette of the Republic of Serbia, No. 36/09

2. METHODS
With the passive sampling method, eight measuring campaigns were conducted: Campaign 1 (11.08.2005 - 26.08.2005) Campaign 2 (31.08.2005 - 15.09.2005) Campaign 3 (20.10.2005 - 04.11.2005) Campaign 4 (09.11. 2005 - 23.11.2005) Campaign 5 (17.01.2006. 31.01.2006) Campaign 6 (03.02. 2006. 18.02.2006) Campaign 7 (20.04. 2006. 04.05.2006) Campaign 8 (03.02.2006. 18.02.2006) The measured quantities have graphically been presented per inorganic components (sulphur dioxide SO2, nitrogen dioxide NO2, total nitrogen oxides NOx, ground-level ozone O3, ammonia NH3) and per organic components (benzene, toluene, xylene and total hydrocarbons). There are 35 measuring places and these present the town and industry effect zones (Fertilizer plant, Petrochemical plant and Oil Plant). Impact zone of the Fertilizer plant presents measuring places under number (10-19). Impact zone of the Petrochemical plant presents measuring places under numbers (19-22). Impact zone of the Oil Plant presents measuring places under numbers (22-35). The results are a preliminary indicators of air quality, performed by the passive sampling method as a continual monitoring which lasted 15 days. Amounts provided have been contrasted with the boundary amounts of pollutants in EU and Serbia. Detection of Meteo conditions is important for geographical locating of potential pollution sources. The results did not consider the emissions, but the quality of air measured by passive samplers situated 2m above the ground. Observed zones, where passive samplers are located (measuring points), are in the vicinity of the factory (see picture 1). Increased amount of pollutants in the zone proves that the closest installation is the cause for measured amounts.

3. RESULTS
Figure 1. shows that the greatest concentration of sulphur dioxide S02 is in campaign 5, then in campaign 4, and the lowest in campaign 1. Figure 2. shows that the greatest concentration for nitrogen dioxide is in campaigns 7 and 3, but a trend of constantly highest measured values of nitrogen dioxide in certain measuring places (7, 13, 21) can be noticed. The lowest values were measured in campaign 8. Figure 3. shows that the highest measured values of the total nitrogen oxides NOx are in campaign 3, and the lowest in campaign 1. Figure 4. shows that the highest measured values of the ground-level ozone O3 are in campaign 8, and the lowest in campaign 4. Figure 5. shows that the highest measured values of ammonia NH3 are in all campaigns in measuring places 21 and 23. The greatest value is in campaign 1, and the lowest in campaign 8. Figure 6. The highest values of the total hydrocarbons are constantly present at the measuring spots 31 to 35. Results do not show emissions from chimneys. This is the preliminary analysis of air pollution. So far, yearly emission measuring has been performed at the above mentioned location. That was individual discontinuous measuring that lasted an hour (one emission measuring from every spotted emitter), which is of no use for these analyses because they did not use continual emission measuring as with imission measuring.

4. DISCUSSION
Based on the presented results, it can be concluded that the greatest values of organic pollutants (benzene, xylene and toluene, as well as the total hydrocarbons) have been measured in the Industrial zone, more precisely in the Oil Refinery, in all of the campaigns. There is also a high release of organic pollutants from the Oil Refinery into the channel that is in the vicinity of the waste waters and the Fertilizer plant.

910

We conclude that the highest concentration of all the organic pollutants has been measured in the effect zone of Oil plant and at the point where waste materials are released into the channel, which is located between the Fertilizer plant and the Petrochemical plant. The greatest concentration of inorganic industrial pollutants (SO2, NH3, O3, NOx and NO2) are in all the campaigns in the impact zone of the Fertilizer plant ammonia, all nitrogen oxides, and sulphur dioxide is the highest in all industry zones. The effect of seasons on the measured values had been considered and it was concluded that the highest values of the measured organic pollutants (benzene) were in January (winter). The highest measured values for ammonia are in August(summer). Passive samplers analysed the urban region as well (1 to 20), and showed that increased results of NOx are in the industrial region. Therefore, we can conclude that the industry is accountable for the increased amount of pollutants. Vehicles for the transport of goods and finished products from the industry to the main road and vice versa, have only one suitable road that goes through the residential area. The greatest number of emitters and toxic substances released from the oil, chemical and petrochemical industry is situated in one spot and represents the worst air pollution source not only in the area but in the whole country as well. On the basis of preliminary results given, we can see that boiler rooms, traffic and industry are equally responsible for the increased amount of inorganic pollutants. As far as organic pollutants are concerned (benzene, toluene and total hydrocarbons), it is evident that they are released from the industry plants. These results have initiated the reconstruction of facility transfusion, which represent the highest emitters of inorganic pollutants.

5. CONCLUSION
Passive sampling method shows that increased concentrations of benzene-toluene-xylene in both campaigns can be found in the impact zone of Oil Refinery plant. This leads to the conclusion that Oil Refinery plant is the source of pollution and adequate technical-technological measures should be taken in order to reduce the pollution. The highest concentration of ammonia has been measured in the impact zone of the Fertilizer plant, but the other nitrogen oxides have been measured in all the impact zones of the industry and city. Technical-technological measures for reducing organic and inorganic pollutants have been specified in industry action plans. After analysing emitters, i.e. the places that generate organic and inorganic pollutants, activity plan is prepared. The plan specifies reconstruction of the tanks and pump stations, covering the facilities that emit the greatest quantities of organic and inorganic pollutants. In some cases the plan provides and predicts the introduction of a new technology that reduces emission, i.e. pollution. Monitoring of organic and inorganic pollutants presents an important preventive measure that provides important information for detecting the places that are at greatest risk. Results of monitoring show the quality of air, after which a plan for emission montoring is being made. On the basis of preliminary testing of air quality, we propose a plan for emission monitoring. On the basis of emission monitoring plan, we make a recovery plan which is in accordance with IPPC directive Preliminary reports on air quality and data from the installation project help create an integral pollution cadaster, which represents the basis for creating the emitters recovery plans that are in accordance with IPPC directive. Pollution reduction and integral control can be accomplished and an adequate technical-technological measures can be included in an appropriate action plan.

REFERENCES
[1] General Environmental Guidelines & Petrochemicals Manufacturing in Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook, July 1998 [2] http://eippcb.jrc.es/. [3] Strategic impact assessment for south industrial area Pancevo, Gestor, mart 2005 ,, Integrated pollution prevention and control in petrochemical industry, [4] S.Stefanov, M.Vojinovi Miloradov, Internation Symposium on Danube Basin and Sustainable Development Environment, Tourism, Legal Framework, Novi Sad, Serbia and Montenegro, 2005. [5] S.Stefanov, M.Vojinovic Miloradov, S. Sokolovic,V.Bogdanovic, Integrated pollution prevention and control in oil-petrochemical industry in Pancevo, XII Symposium on Analytical and Environmental Problems, Szeged, Hungary, 2005 [6] www.eea.eu.in [7] Best Available Techniques Draft Reference for Large Volume Organic Chemical Industry

911

[8] IPPC Reference Document on the General Principles of Monitoring; 2003 [9] Brza procena izvora zagaenja vazduha, vode i zemljita; WHO Offset Publication No. 62, Geneva, 1982 [10] Industrial Air Pollution Management System (IAPMS) in Panevo, Final technical report, 2006, Annex 1, Passive Sampler [11] LEAP Report, 2004[12] Framework Directive 96/62/EC. [13] First Daughter Directive 99/30/EC. [14] Second Daughter Directive 2000/69/EC. [15] Third Daughter Directive 2002/3/EC. [16] Fourth Daughter Directive 2004/107/EC. [17] Guidance on Assessment under the EU Air Quality Directives. [18] Guidance Report on Preliminary Assessment under EC Air Quality Directives. [19] De Saeger et al.,1991,1995. [20] G. Bertoni, R. Tappa and I. Allegrini, Ann. Chim. (Rome), 2000, 90, 249263. G. Bertoni, R. Tappa and I. Allegrini, Chromatographia, 2001, 54, 653657. [21] Costabile, F., Bertoni, G., Desantis, F., Wang, F., Hong, W., Liu, F., Allegrini, I., 2006. A preliminary assessment of major air pollutants in the city of Suzhou, China. Atmospheric Environment 40 (33), 63806395. [22] Analyst Dispositivo per il campionamento diffusionale di Benzene e composti organic volatili -Guida pratica per limpiego dei campionatori passivi di lungo periodo. [23] Practical giude to use the: analyst. Samplers for NO2, NOx, SO2, HONO, HNO3, O3 and NH3. [24] Criteria for EUROAIRNET. The EEA Air Quality Monitoring and Information Network. [25] Council Decision 2001/752/EC.

Picture 1: Measuring places from 31 to 35

912

Figure 1: Graphic presentation of sulphur dioxide SO2

Figure 2: Graphic presentation of nitrogen dioxide NO2

Figure 3: Graphic presentation of the total nitrogen oxides NOx

913

Figure 4: Graphic presentation of ozone O3

Figure 5: Graphic presentation of ammonia NH3

914

Figure 6: Graphic presentation of benzene

Figure 7: Graphic presentation of xylene

915

Figure 8: Graphic presentation of the total hydrocarbons

Figure 9: Graphic presentation of toluene

916

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

THE BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE CONTROL AND REDUCTION OF POLLUTION IN POLYOLEPHINIC COMPLEXES
Sonja Stefanov1, Mirjana Vojinovic Miloradov2, Slobodan Sokolovic2 , imon Bancov3
Panevo, Serbia, e-mail: stefanov.sonja@gmail.com University of Novi Sad, Faculty of tecnical science, Novi Sad, SERBIA 3 Provincial Secretariat for Environmental Protection and Sustainable Development, Novi Sad, SERBIA
2 1

Summary: The best available techniques in polyolephinic complexes, in accordance with the European Union` s IPPC directives, demonstrate technologies that can meet stringent ecological requirements. Environmental law for pollution prevention and reduction prevents the import of old and dirty technologies in polyolephinic complexes and offers new technologies that can satisfy ecological requirements. In the thesis, presented are the requirements of emissions released in air and the consumption of energy fluids in polyolephinic complexes with detailed schemes of new technologies for the production of different polyolephins. Key words: environmental, pollution, prevention.

1. GENERAL PROCESSES AND TECHNIQUES APPLIED IN THE PRODUCTION OF POLYMERS

The production of polymers follows the scheme given in Figure 1 with monomers, comonomers, catalysts, solvents as well as energy and water on the input side and the produst, off-gases, waste water and wastes on the output side. Table 1: Product-proces matrix for polymers PP PVC PET PS x x x x (x) x x x x

Suspension Bulk Emulsion Gas phase Solution

PE X X X X

PA x

2. BAT ASSOCIATES EMISSION AND CONSUMPTION LEVELS Taking into account the generic and specific BAT, the following emission and consumption level are associated with BAT (see the following table): In the above displayed table, accurately defined is the amount of released pollutants per ton of produce. The table 2 defines the amount of released pollutants in the existing or new polyolephinic plants Boundary values for VOC have been defined- easily vapourable components, dust, COD, suspended solids, the necessary Direct Energy and the amount of hazardous waste. Three Member States wanted a split view recorded against the BAT AEL for VCM emissions to air in the production of PVC. The BAT AEL these Member States proposed are shown in the table. The national for their split view is given as follows: The upper value of the range applies to the small production sites. The wide range of the BAT AEL does not belong to different BAT performance but to different produst mix manufacturing. Any BAT AEL in this range is related to plants applying BAT throughout their processes.

917

Figure 1. VOC (g/t) LDPE New: 700-1100 Existing: 1100-2100 2000 Dust(g/t) 17 Table 2: COD (g/t) Suspended solids(g/t) 19-30 Direct Energy (GJ/t) Tube: 2.88-3.24* Autoclave: 3.24-3.60 4.50 Hazardous waste(kg/t) 1.8-3.0

LDPE copolymers HDPE

20

5.0

New: 56 17 New: 3.1 300-500 2.05 Existing: Existing: 500-1800 2.05-2.52 LLDPE New: 11 39 New: 0.8 200-500 2.08 Existing: Existing: 500-700 2.08-2.45 GPPS 85 20 30 10 1.08 0.5 HIPS 85 20 30 10 1.48 0.5 EPS 450-700 30 1.80 3.0 S-PVC VCM: 10-40 50-480 10** 0.01-0.055 18-45 Splitview: 18-72 E-PVC 100-500 50-200 50-480 10** 0.025-0.075 Splitview: 160-700 UP 40-100 5-30 2-3.50 7 ESBR 170-370 150-200 *Excludes a potential positive credit of 0 to 0.72 GJ/t for low pressure steam (depending on export possibilities for low pressure steam) New and existing refers to new or existing installations **Alternatively, 1-12 g/t AOX are achieved for PVC production sites or combined sites with PVC production S to air (kg/t) 12-20 SO42- to water (kg/t) 200-300 COD (g/t) 3000-5000 Zn to water (g/t) 10-50 Direct Energy(GJ/t) 20-30 Hazardous waste(kg/t) 0.2-2.0

Viscose staple fibres

918

3. APPLIED PROCESSES AND TECHNIQUES IN THE PRODUCTION OF POLYOLEFINS Alternative processes

Figure 2: Flow diagram showing LDPE production Table 3: Technical parameters of LDPE LDPE LDPE Tubular reactor Autoclave reactor Inner diameter pipe: Volume: 25-100 mm 250-1500 liters L/D ~ 10000 - 50000 Operating pressure 200-350 MPa 100-250 MPa Operating temperature 140-3400C 180-3000C Initiators Oxygen and/or Organic peroxides Organic peroxides 0.2 -1 g/kg PE 0.2-0.5 g/kg PE Conversion to polymer Up to 36% Up to 20% Current maximum plant capacity 300000 t/yr 200000 t/yr Production type Reactor type Mechanical dimension

High density polyethylene Proces type Suspension Reactor type STR Loop Table 4: Process overview HDPE Number of Diluent Catalyst reactors Single C5-B8 Ziegler Cascade C5-B8 Ziegler Single C5-B8 Ziegler Single Isobutane Philips Single Isobutane Ziegler Cascade Isobutane Ziegler Single Isobutane Metallocene Single Isobutane Ziegler Single Isobutane Philips Cascade Isobutane Ziegler Cascade Propane Ziegler C6-c9 HDPE Type 1 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes HDPE Type 2 No Yes No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No

Gas phase Combined suspension/gas phase Solution

FBR Loop/FBR STR

919

Figure 3: Flow diagram of an HDPE STR

Figure 4: Flow diagram of an HDPE loop

Figure 5: Flow diagram showing the HDPE gas phase process

920

Figure 6: Flow diagram showing the HDPE suspension/gas phase process Reactor type Reactor volume Polymerisation pressure Polymerisation temperature Suspending agent Catalyst/cocatalyst Max.plant capasity Table 5: Technical parameters of HDPE Fluidised bed Stirred tank 200-400 m3 15-100 m3 0.7-2 MPa 0.5-1MPa 80-1050 C 70-900 C None Organometallic compound, Aluminiun alkyl 450 kt/yr C5-C8 hydrocarbons Organometallic compound, Aluminiun alkyl 320 kt/yr Loop 15-100 m3 3-6.5 MPa 80-1100 C Isobutane, hexane, propane Organometallic compound, Aluminiun alkyl 350 kt/yr

Figure 7: Flow diagram showing the LLDPE solution process Process Reactor temperature Reactor pressure Polymer content in reactor Residence time in reactor Solvent Comonomer Catalyst Max capacity Polypropylene Table 6: Technical parameters of LLDPE Gas phase Solution 80-1050 C >1000 C 0.7-2 MPa 2-20 MPa Not applicable 10-30wt% 1-3 hours 5-30 minutes C5-C7 hydrocarbons C6-C9 hydrocarbons Butane-1, hexane-1 Propylene, decene-1 Ziegler or metallocene Ziegler or metallocene 450 kt/yr 300kt/yr

921

a) loop reactors, b) primmy cyclone, c) copclymer fluidesed bed, d) secondary and copolymer cyclone, e) deactivation, f) purging

Figure 8: Flow diagram of the Spheripol polypropylene process

a) primary fluidized bed, b) copolymer fluidized bed, c) compressors, d) coolers, e-f) discharge cyclones, g) purge

Figure 9: Flow diagram of the polypropylene fluidized bed gas phase process

a) primary reactor, b) copolymeriser, c) compressors, d) condensers, e) liquid pump, f) filters, g) primery cyclone, h) deactivation/purge

Figure 10: Flow diagram of the polypropylene vertical reactor gas phase process

922

a) horiyontal reactor, b) fluidized bed deactivation, c) compressor, d) condenser, e) hold/separator tank

Figure 11: Flow diagram of the polypropylene horizontal reactor gas phase process Current emission and consumption levels

Figure 12: Interpretation scheme for emission and consumption data in this section Table 7: Emission and consumption data of LDPE plants Average 4th LDPE European Average top 50% Average 3th quartile quartile Benchmark 1999 average Monomer 1018 1005 1018 1044 consumption1 Direct energy 1075 720 1225 1650 consumption2 Primary enegy 2600 2070 2750 3500 consumption3 Water 2.9 1.7 2.8 5.2 consumption4 Dust emission5 31 17 29 61 VOC emission6 2400 1270 2570 4530 COD emission7 62 19 60 150 Inert emission 1.1 0.5 1 2.2 Hazardous waste 4.6 1.8 5 9.8 1. Monomer consumption in kilograms per tonne of product (kg/t) 2. Direct energy in kWh per tonne of product (kWh/t). Direct energy is the energy consumption as delivered 3. Priamry energy in kWh per tonne of product (kWh/t). Primary energy is energy calculated back to fossil fuel. For the primary energy calculation the following efficiencies were used electricity 40% and steam 90%. The large difference between direct energy consumption and primery energy

923

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

consumtion is due to the hight share of electrical energy in LDPE processes Water consumption in m3 per tonne of product (m3/t) Dust to air emissions in grams per tonne of product (g/t). Dust includes all dust as reported by the participants VOC to air emission in grams per tonne of product (g/t). VOC includes all hydrocarbon and other organic compounds including fugitive emissions COD to water emissions in grams per tonne of product (g/t). Inert waste (to lend fill) in kilograms per tonne of product (kg/t) Hazardous waste (to treatment or incineration) in kilograms per tonne of product(kg/t)

Table 8: Emission and consumption data of HDPE plants Average 4th LDPE European Average top 50% Average 3th quartile quartile Benchmark 1999 average Monomer 1027 1008 1024 1066 consumption1 Direct energy 1075 720 1225 1650 consumption2 Primary enegy 2600 2070 2750 3500 consumption3 Water 2.9 1.7 2.8 5.2 consumption4 Dust emission5 31 17 29 61 VOC emission6 2400 1270 2570 4530 COD emission7 62 19 60 150 Inert emission 1.1 0.5 1 2.2 Hazardous waste 4.6 1.8 5 9.8 1. Monomer consumption in kilograms per tonne of product (kg/t) 2. Direct energy in kWh per tonne of product (kWh/t). Direct energy is the energy consumption as delivered 3. Primary energy in kWh per tonne of product (kWh/t). Primary energy is energy calculated back to fossil fuel. For the primary energy calculation the following efficiencies were used electricity 40% and steam 90%. 4. Water consumption in m3 per tonne of product (m3/t) 5. Dust to air emissions in grams per tonne of product (g/t). Dust includes all dust as reported by the participants. Dust emission mainly from drying powder prior to extrusion. 6. VOC to air emission in grams per tonne of product (g/t). VOC includes all hydrocarbon and other organic compounds including fugitive emissions 7. COD to water emissions in grams per tonne of product (g/t). 8. Inert waste (to lendfill) in kilograms per tonne of product (kg/t) 9. Hazardous waste (to treatment or incineration) in kilograms per tonne of product(kg/t) Additionally, the following data are reported by a Member State (Tabel dole) Table 9: Emission data of HDPE plants in Germany Unit Emission g/tonne 640-670 g/tonne 16-30 kg/tonne 5

VOC Dust Waste

924

Table 10: Emission and consumption data of LLDPE plants LLDPE European Average top 50% Average 3th Average 4th Benchmark 1999 average quartile quartile Monomer consumption1 1026 1015 1031 1043 Direct energy 680 580 655 890 consumption2 Primery energy 1150 810 1250 1720 consumption3 Water consumption4 1.8 1.1 1.9 3.3 Dust emission5 27 11 28 58 VOC emission6 730 180-500 970 1580 COD emission7 68 39 69 125 Inert waste8 1.3 1.1 1.3 1.7 Hazardous waste9 2.7 0.8 2.2 6.9 1. Monomer consumption in kilograms per tonne of product (kg/t) 2. Direct energy in kWh per tonne of product (kWh/t). Direct energy is the energy consumption as delivered 3. Primary energy in kWh per tonne of product (kWh/t). Primary energy is energy calculated back to fossil fuel. For the primary energy calculation the following efficiencies were used electricity 40% and steam 90%. 4. Water consumption in m3 per tonne of product (m3/t) 5. Dust to air emissions in grams per tonne of product (g/t). Dust includes all dust as reported by the participants. Dust emission mainly from drying powder prior to extrusion. 6. VOC to air emission in grams per tonne of product (g/t). VOC includes all hydrocarbon and other organic compounds including fugitive emissions 7. COD to water emissions in grams per tonne of product (g/t). 8. Inert waste (to lendfill) in kilograms per tonne of product (kg/t) 9. Hazardous waste (to treatment or incineration) in kilograms per tonne of product(kg/t) Tables 11: Econimic parameters of polyethylene production LDPE LLDPE LLDPE HDPE HDPE Tubular Gas phase Solution Gas phase Slurry loop None Butene-1 Butene-1 Butene-1 Butene-1 Peroxide ZiegleZiegleZiegleZiegle-Natta Natta Natta Natta 300 200 250 200 200 141 105-114 154 90-97 108 603 36 20 659 17 17 693 55 748 600 36 28 664 21 22 707 77 784 603 30 22 655 20 19 694 59 753 600 30 30 660 21 21 702 68 770

Product Technology Comonomer Catalist/Initiator

HDPE Slurry vessel Butene-1 Ziegle-Natta 200 121-138 600 30 28 658 23 24 705 81 786

Capasity(kt/year) Total plant capital (USD million) Production cost (USD/t) Monomer+ 597 Comonomer Other raw materials 18 Utilities 25 Variable cost Direct cost Alocated cost Total Cash cost Deprecision Total production cost 640 17 17 674 59 733

925

4. CONCLUSION
Technological schemes for new plants and reconstructed existing plants were presented in the thesis. Furthermore, it analysed and presented the expenses, the method for choosing a technology, capacity and detailed presentation of the pollutant being released in the water, air and soil. Law that defines the mentioned parameters in Serbia has been in force since 2004. It guides us on the way to buying new plants or reconstructing the existing ones that are obliged to satisfy rigorous ecological requirements. The control of these requirements is being regulated by the Ministry of Environment and Spatial Planning, its inspectors and licences that are obligatory for all polyolephin plants.

REFERENCES
[1] S.Stefanov, Comparative analysis of the monitoring for the assessment of risk in the complex process system, Masters thesis, 2004 University of Novi Sad, Faculty of Technical Science [2] S.Stefanov, The estimate of chemical accident hazard in the process of high density polyethylene production, Expert's Study, University of Novi Sad, Faculty of Technical Science, 2003 [3] Integrated Pollution Prevention and Control, draft Reference Document on Best Available in the Production of Polymers, final draft July 2006 [4] S.Stefanov, M.Vojinovic Miloradov, S.Sokolovic, S.Bancov, MONITORING OF INDUSTRIAL POLLUTANTS IN OIL AND PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRY, Proceedings of the Romanian Academy, Volume 11, issue 2-3, May-December 2009 [5] S.Stefanov, M.Vojinovic Miloradov, S.Sokolovic, S.Bancov, Modelling of inorganic pollutants NO2 and SO2 in complex process systems, Eko-DUNP2010,page 419-427, 2010, Novi Pazar, Serbia

926

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ONE ALGORITHM OF IMPLEMENTATION PROCESS OF THE INVESTMENT BUILDING PROJECT

Technical Faculty, aak, SERBIA, e-mail: serifiveis@yahoo.com 2 Technical Faculty, aak, SERBIA, e-mail: srecko@tfc.kg.ac.rs 3 SaTCIP Ltd, Vrnjaka Banja, SERBIA, e-mail: dasicp@yahoo.com
1

Veis erifi 1; Sreko uri 2, Predrag Dai 3

Summary: The new Law on Planning and Building formulates the possibility of forming the algorithm of project implementation process. The provisions of this law provide the algorithms of methodology and project implementation procedure in investment building, i.e. the plant for use and disposal of solid communal waste in this particular case, from the investors intention to the handing over the facility [8]. Planning is a very complex activity, by which it is attempted to turn one uncertainty (future) into an acceptable risk on the basis of certainty (known past and present). It means that the risk and uncertainty of the future cannot be eliminated, but they can be reduced by planning to a probability that can be successfully controlled and implemented. Such a delicate human activity cannot be left to strongly rooted methods, such as: approximate, command, deadline, political and such, but to modern methods and techniques of operational investigations, in accordance with scientific and technological progress and with the support of modern computer systems and corresponding software support [7]. Keywords: algorithm, investment building, construction organization.

1. INTRODUCTION
Appropriate standards and norms in investment building are necessary for enabling easy and rapid formation of the real image of the quantity of resources (materials, labor, machines, assets, space and time) necessary for the implementation of an investment project, based on which the cost of project implementation will be determined [8]. Then, there is a question: How to achieve the best production results? Many famous researchers in different fields of production processes tried to answer this question by recording and analyzing individual and collective work operations. The following question needed an answer: Which order of operations, body and hand movements, which body position, order of materials, tools and machines are necessary to perform a task with the lowest possible consumption of energy of the workers, machines and material and also, for the shortest period? When the optimal relations of production factors are determined for one group of works, it is accepted and prescribed as a rule, i.e. norm. Experienced craftsmen have passed their knowledge to their students apprentices during the construction. Thus, a trained student (apprentice) could know as much as the master from whom he studied the craft did, i.e. the acquired knowledge of the student depended on the knowledge of his master. However, the same level of knowledge transfer to all the participants of the investment building of facilities is ensured by establishing the norms and standards in investment building.

2. MODERN INVESTMENT PROJECTING

Modern investment projecting is characterized by the process approach to business, which requires a previous defining of a general process structure of investment building.

927

Process protocol can be defined as a way in which the processes included in projecting and performing construction works are regulated in order to enable the efficient, effective and economic projecting and performing of works. Algorithm of the project implementation process is formulated by the application of the new Law on Planning and Building. On the basis of provisions of this law, it is possible to form an appropriate algorithm of methodology and procedure of the project implementation in investment building of the plant for use and disposal of solid communal waste, from the investors intention to build the facility to handing over the built facility (Figure 1.) [8]. In order to establish an appropriate process protocol, as well as the appropriate information technology protocol, whose activity zones are in the elementary stages of the project, it is necessary to draft an algorithm of project implementation process by reducing the number of project activities, so that it could be shown as information in the introductory part. Simplified algorithm of the project implementation process of the plant for use and disposal of solid communal waste, according to the new Law on Planning and Building, consists of 12 collective activities [4, 5, 6, 8]: 1. Notification of options for building: Notification on options or limitations for building on some particular land. 2. Designing the investors needs: Starting Project Task, Urban, technical and other conditions for building, Project of previous works, Previous works. 3. General project: Project task for general project, Drafting of a general project, Expert control of technical documentation for the facilities of importance for the Republic, Report of the audit committee on completed expert control. 4. Previous feasibility study: Drafting of the previous feasibility study as well as the feasibility study that includes the general project. 5. Preliminary project: Project task for preliminary project, Drafting of a preliminary project, Report of the audit committee on completed expert control. 6. Feasibility study: Drafting of the feasibility study that includes the preliminary project as well, Investors decision on investing (building). 7. Approval for the construction: Application for obtaining the approval for construction, Verification of compliance of preliminary project and other documentation submitted with the conditions for constructing the facility, obtaining the approval for construction. 8. Main project: Project task for the main project, Drafting of the main project, Technical control of the main project. 9. Performance project: Project task for performance project, Drafting of a performance project, Technical control of performance project. 10. Construction of the facility: Assignment of works, Providing professional supervision over the construction of the facility, Decision on the construction manager, Bringing the contractors to the site, Informing the municipal government about the beginning of works, Project of preparatory works, Preparatory works, Preparation for building, Building the facility, Informing the investor about the completion of works. 11. Handing over of the facility: Project of built condition, Application for obtaining use permit, Handing over of the facility, Registration of property rights to the object. 12. Use and maintenance of the facility: Using the built facility, Investment and current maintenance of the facility, Regular, special and specialized examinations of the facility.

3. THE SIGNIFICANCE OF THE CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION

Modern investment production demonstrates that it is productive, rational and economical. Guarantee of the success is supported by modern production capacities, high-quality technical documentation, good equipment and well-developed project of construction organization. The main objective is that the production develops with minimum delays and interruptions, and that requires the previous observation and anticipation of all the circumstances and conditions under which the construction will take place and it also requires the adequate solutions for possible problems and obstacles [1, 3, 8]. It is inconceivable that the construction begins without technical documentation, so that the begining of construction should not take place without previously developed project of construction organization where the optimal solution, which is linked to the construction of facility for use and disposal of solid communal waste, will be adopted. It is realistic to expect that the most favorable construction costs and the most optimal deadline for the construction of facility will be obtained by this requirement. Detailed examination of technical, economic and all other factors significant for the construction ensure the most optimal deadline for constructing the facility [1, 2, 3, 8].

928

4. DRAFTING OF THE CONSTRUCTION ORGANIZATION PROJECT

Drafting of the construction organization project of the facility for use and disposal of solid communal waste is a complex task that can be solved in many ways. We will mention one of the most optimal for our conditions, i.e. the above-mentioned methodology includes a certain number of steps by which we can obtain a complete organization project [4, 5, 6, 8]. The most important steps are: 1) Study of investment and technical documentation, 2) Study of execution conditions, 3) Division of works according to the types and phases, 4) Study of bottlenecks and labor fronts, 5) External transport solution, 6) Studying the conditions of material supply (material and energy resources), 7) Solution of previous works, 8) Development of the pre-measures of previous works, 9) Studying the methods and technology of works (the main and final), 10) Determining the mechanization of technological process, 11) Calculating the cost of machine work (working hour of the machine), 12) Studying the needs concerning the labor, 13) Studying the needs concerning the material (material and energy resources), 14) Determining the earnings of the labor, 15) Development of the dynamics of the works execution and deadline for construction, 16) Development of a dynamic labor plan, 17) Development of a dynamic plan of needs concerning material and energy resources, 18) Development of a dynamic plan of needs in mechanization, 19) Development of a dynamic plan of financial assets investing, 20) Projecting temporary roads, 21) Development of the pre-measures of temporary roads, 22) Projecting of a temporary workers settlement, 23) Development of the pre-measures of workers settlement, 24) Projection of production capacities for the needs of construction site (economic site), 25) Development of the pre-measures of production capacities, 26) Development of a construction site organization scheme, 27) Development of construction site management scheme, 28) Calculation (analysis) of the cost of preparatory and main works, 29) Optimization of the construction deadline and 30) Development of the precalculation of all the works: previous, preparatory, main and final. Figure 2 shows a block diagram of the methodology of developing the construction organization project.

Figure 1: Possible algorithm of methodology and procedure of project implementation in investment building [8]

929

PRE-MEASURE

CLIMATIC AND METEOR. CONDIT .

SCHEME OF CONSTR. SITE

MANAGEMENT SCHEME

ECONOMIC CONSTR. SITE

PRE-MEASURE

TEMPORARY SETTLEMENT

PRE-MEASURE

TEMPORARY ROADS

INVESTMENT AND TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

DYNAMICS-FINANC. ASSETS

BOTTLENECKS AND FRONTS

HYDROLOGIC CONDITIONS

DYNAMICS-MECHANIZATION

DYNAMICS-LABOR

CONSTRUCTION DEADLINE

DYNAMICS-WORK EXECUTION

GEOLOGY AND GEOMECHANICS

DIVISION OF WORKS AND PHAS.

HOURLY WAGES

CALCULATION-MATERIAL

CALCULATION-LABOUR

WORKING HOUR OF MACHIN.

CHANIZ.-CH. PROC.

STUD. METH. AND ECHN.

LOCATION, POGRAPHY

PRE-MEAS. OF PREV. WORKS

SOLUTION OF PREV. WORKS

UNIT OF MATERIAL PRICE

MATERIAL SUPPLY

SOLUTION OF EXT. TRANSP.

Figure 2: Block diagram of the development of construction site organization project [8]

930

ECHNICAL REPORT

DYNAMICS-MATERIALS

PRECALCULATION - PREVIOUS, PREPARAT. AND MAIN WORKS

TECHNICAL AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS

PRE-MEASURE OF WORKS

PRICE ANALYSIS

FOUNDATIONS

PTIMIZATION

FACILITIES OF CONST. SITE DIRECTORATE

- OFFICE FOR THE INVESTORS OFFICE FOR CONTRACTORS LABORATORY FOR CONCRETE TESTING LABORATORY FOR GEOMECHANICS - BUILDINGS FOR BACHELOR ACCOMMODATION - BUILDINGS FOR FAMILY ACCOM. - RESTAURANTS - PUBLIC BATH - LAUNDRY - SCHOOL - KINDERGARTEN - POST OFFICE - INTERNET CAFFE - CANTEENS - PUBLIC HALL, COMMON HALL - HOSPITALS AND DISPENSARIES - SPORT HALLS AND FIELDS - CRAFT WORKSHOPS - SHOPS AND SUPERMARKETS WARDROBES ROOMS FOR HEATING SHOWERS, BATHROOMS LAVATORIES DRYER DINNING ROOM BULANTS WC CLOSED WITH HEATING CLOSED WITHOUT HEATING EAVES, HALF-CLOSED LANDFILLS, OPENED

RESIDENTIAL AND SOCIAL FACILITIES FACILITIES OF ACCOMMODATI ON AND PRODUCTION CAPACITIES WITHIN PREPARATORY WORKS ON CONSTRUCTION SITE FACILITY FOR USE AND DISPOSAL OF COMMUNAL WASTE

SANITARY AND HEALTH FACILITIES

WAREHOUSE FACILITIES, DEPO PLACES

FACILITIES OF PRODUCTION CAPACITIES

SECTIONS GARAGES TRANSFORMER STATIONS COMPRESSOR STATIONS PUMPING STATIONS BOILER ROOMS PARKING FOR MACHINES SECTIONS

CONCRETE FACTORY ASPHALT BASE SECTION FOR HOGGING SEPARATION FACTORY OF APARTMENTS AND SECTION FOR PREFABRICATED ELEMENTS SECTION FOR REINFORCING SECTION FOR CHIPPING MECHANIZATION SECTION CARPENTERS WORKSHOP SERVICE WORKSHOP CONSTRUCTION SITE AND SETTLEMENT LIGHTING

Figure 3: Schematic overview of accommodation and production capacities on construction site and workers settlement from the group of preparatory works [8]

5. PREPARATORY WORKS
After the steps for static and dynamic planning are taken, we move on to the assessment of preparatory works scope and projecting the facilities of preparatory works. In order to provide rapid and rational performance of the main works, we need high-quality and timely execution of preparatory works. The scope of preparatory works,

931

by the types, mostly depends on the local conditions and quantity of main works, local conditions may have a decisive impact. All the works, within preparatory works, can roughly be divided into: works related to the construction of temporary roads; production capacities for the needs of construction and accommodations capacities for workers. The scope of preparatory works depends on the location where the works are executed (the largest is at the construction sites out of populated areas, and the smallest in populated areas) and on the scope of main works (the largest is in case of facilities with a large scope of main works, such as: concrete and fill dams, and the smallest in case of facilities with a small scope). In such cases, the cost of preparatory works can be up to 35% of the value of main works. Schematic overview of the facilities of accommodation and production capacities on construction site and temporary workers settlement of the plants for use and disposal of solid communal waste is given in Figure 3 [8].

6. CONCLUSION
Process protocol of the implementation of an investment building project of the plant for use and disposal of solid communal waste in modern investment projecting is characterized by a process approach to business, which requires a pre-definition of the general process structure of investment building. It can be defined as a method where the processes, which are included in projection and execution of construction works, are regulated for the sake of an efficient, effective and economic projection and execution of works [8]. In practice, the fact that planning the implementation of investment projects is traditionally linked to the talent, skill and long experience of individuals, who have obtained the reputation of experts for the implementation of investment projects, is not encouraging, because memories of some similar, recently or long ago, well implemented projects, even if it was done by experts, are not always a good visa for the future. In the focus of modern project management is not the quantity of construction, but the construction Just in time, which is characterized by the construction that is not implemented before or after the agreed deadline, but just in time, and it also implies the construction with minimal costs and construction with no defects concerning quality [8].

REFERENCES
[1] Zakon o planiranju i izgradnji objekata ("Slubeni glasnik RS", br. 44/95, 24/96, 16/97, 43/01, 47/2003, 89/2009). [2] Zakon o stratekoj proceni uticaja na ivotnu sredinu (Slubeni glasnik RS, broj 135/04). [3] Pravilnik o sadrini i nainu izrade tehnike dokumentacije za objekte visokogradnje (Broj 110-0000047/2007-01, U Beogradu, 24. januara 2008. godine). [4] Pravilnik o metodologiji i proceduri realizacije projekata za izgradnju objekata za koje odobrenje za izgradnju izdaje ministarstvo nadleno za poslove graevinarstva, odnosno autonomna pokrajina ("Slubeni glasnik RS", br. 59/2006). [5] Pravilnik o nainu i postupku vrenja strunog nadzora u toku graenja objekta (Sl. glasnik RS, br. 105/2003). [6] Pravilnik o sadrini i nainu voenja knjige inspekcije i graevinskog dnevnika (Sl. glasnik RS, br. 105/2003). [7] erifi, V.; uri, S.; ulji, V.: Neophodna logistika podrka za investicionu gradnju postrojenja za korienje i deponovanje vrstog komunalnog otpada. VIII Konferencija odravanja KOD-2010. sa meunarodnim ueem Odravanje u odrivom razvoju, Jun 2010, Ulcinj, Crna Gora. [8] erifi, V.: Logistika podrka u investicionoj gradnji sa posebnim osvrtom na upravljanje vrstim komunalnim otpadom. Magistarski rad, 2010. Tehniki fakultet aak.

932

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ALGORITHM OF THE PROCESS OF DECISION-MAKING, DEVELOPMENT AND CONTROL OF TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION IN INVESTMENT BUILDING
1 2

Veis erifi 1, Predrag Dai 2, Sreko uri 3

Technical Faculty, aak, SERBIA, e-mail: serifiveis@yahoo.com SaTCIP Ltd, Vrnjaka Banja, SERBIA, e-mail: dasicp@yahoo.com 3 Technical Faculty aak, SERBIA, e-mail: srecko@tfc.kg.ac.rs

Summary: The objective of projects evaluation is to provide a high-quality information database for making investment decisions, altogether with other aspects of evaluation. Modern investment decisions are based on the selection of the best option among more available or possible, from the investment idea, pre-investment studies and investment documentation. Algorithm of the process of drafting and controlling technical documentation is a sequence and logical series of phases and the control of technical documentation for issuance of building permit, because it is the easiest way to present it in the form of a corresponding algorithm and text that concisely provides an overview of an entire process, i.e. clearly enough explains certain parts of the algorithm of drafting process and controlling technical documentation for issuing building permit. Keywords: algorithm, decision, control, technical documentation, investment building.

1. INTRODUCTION
Investment projects are financial expenditures and they also require other resources for obtaining future effects in the form of future income, cost reduction, social effects and such, and it is also necessary to perform their evaluation. The task of evaluating investment project is to identify the necessary financial expenditures and other resources for the realization of the project, and also to determine the expected future effects, necessary financial expenditures and other investment resources by applying a series of methods [7]. Evaluation of the investment projects is twofold: Economic evaluation from investors stand and Social and non-economic evaluation. The objective of evaluating investment projects is to provide a high-quality information database for making investment decisions, altogether with other aspects of evaluation. The base of economic evaluation and determination of profitability of investment projects by the investors, represents: Future product sales, Amount of investments and Amount of production expenditures after the release of new investment projects in the production. Criteria and methods of economic evaluation, from investors stand, are divided into: Static (classical) and Dynamic. Static (classical) criteria and methods for determining the profitability of investments do not pay attention to the time factor, which is their biggest disadvantage. Dynamic criteria and methods solve the time issue with discount technique. Of the statistic criteria and methods for profitability evaluation, we need to emphasize: Capital coefficient, Marginal capital coefficient, Time of investment return, Method of average profit,

933

 Methods of the biggest gain, and Method of putting the effects and costs in a ratio. Of dynamic criteria and methods, the following are present: Internal profitability rate, Net present value, Equal annual amounts of maintenance costs and investment exploitation, Equal annual income amounts, Net future value and Annuitet method. Dynamic static methods using the discount, the time factor is included in the deadline for repaying the investments and average gain method, by which these two static methods are turned into dynamic methods of evaluating the profitability of investments. The rule is that we should not rely to only one criterion when it comes to economic evaluation of investment projects. There are two types of investment projects [7]: Investment projects that are technically compatible with each other (so that they could be realized at the same time) and Investment projects that are technically incompatible with each other (for the technical reasons, they cannot be realized at the same time). The most important social and non-economic criteria for the evaluation of investment projects include the impacts on: Employment, Countrys balance of payments, Strengthening the competitiveness of an investment object in the world market, Level of use of production capacities, Environment, Development of other activities and Military-strategic independence, defensive power of the country etc. Investment projects represent the realization of the development policy of enterprise or investor. In its essence, the investment projects formulate particular actions of the executors in order to realize the developmental objectives of enterprise or investor [7]. Designing also has to include both the risks and mistakes that arise from the uncertainty of the future. They can be divided in three categories: 1) Risk measured by the coefficient of probability, 2) Risk that cannot be measured by coefficient of probability, it depends on particular events (scientific and technical progress) and 3) Risk due to errors in calculations and predictions during the preparation of investment project. In designing, the analysis and evaluation of previous development and reproductive capability of investor is very important, with the aim of determining whether it is possible to return the invested resources and strengthen the position.

2. METHODS OF MAKING INVESTMENT DECISIONS

There are several methods are used in making investment decisions [7]: Critical point method (production volume that covers the costs of business operations), Decision tree model (selection of the best alternative) and Efficiency model (return time is shorter than exploitation time of production facility). Modern investment decisions are based on the selection of the best option among more that are available or possible, from investment idea, pre-investment studies and investment documentation. Figure 2 shows one possible option of the algorithm of the process of investment decision, with the help of computer and facilities for use and disposal of solid communal waste. Possible options of investment project can be classified into four categories: 1) Alternative technologies, 2) Alternative periods for completing the investment project, 3) Alternative sizes of production capacity and 4) Alternative locations of the production facility. After selecting the particular technology, it is necessary to make a decision on the choice of equipment, which follows the detailed analysis of equipment market (domestic and foreign). The analysis points out to the following factors: Reputation of equipment manufacturer,

934

 Equipment delivery deadlines, Quality of equipment, Possibilities for obtaining the commodity loans, Price of equipment and Maintenance of equipment and such. Selection of equipment is done based on competition or tender (accepted offer).

3. FINANCIAL EFFECTS AND SUPERVISION

Necessary investment funds (financial dimension) in investment building consist of the funds: 1) For the preparation of investment-building, 2) For performing investment-building and 3) For the preparation of exploitation of investment project. Necessary investment time (time dimension) consists of the time: 1) For investment preparation, 2) For investment-building and 3) For the preparation of exploitation of investment project. Construction of production project can be divided into the following phases: Preparing the location, Preparatory work on construction site, Construction work, Equipment installation, Selection of contractors and Contracting the work. The aim of supervision is for the construction of investment facility to be realized in due time following the technical documentation and paying attention to quality. If there appears a necessity of removing the effects of particular factors, which might endanger the deadlines and amount of investments, the supervision assumes the responsibility in leading the process of solving the emerging situation. When the construction of investment facilities for use and disposal of solid communal waste is completed, the final calculation is done. After obtaining the occupancy permit, the handing over and final calculation of the facility is done, because without a permit, there is no test or regular production allowed in the facility. Putting the production facilities for use and disposal of solid communal waste into operation is done through three phases: [7]: 1) Checking the individual equipment, built in and installed in production facility, 2) Examination of individual lines and facilities as a whole and 3) Putting the facility into operation in production conditions (projected conditions). In addition to above-mentioned conditions, the development of policy and strategy of production facilitys performance in the market also precedes.

4. ALGORTHM OF THE DEVELOPMENT AND CONTROL OF TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

Building permit is issued on the bases of the development and control of technical documentation and it includes: general project, design project and main project, and it consists of a series of methodologies and procedures for the development and control of those projects and the corresponding feasibility studies. Main project, as the final phase of technical documentation for obtaining the building permit for all types of facilities is subjected to technical control in order to determine whether the main project was done in accordance with law, relevant regulations, standards, norms, conditions and ethics of the profession, so that based on a project that is done in that way, a building permit could be issued [1, 4, 5, 6, 7]. It was determined that general and design projects, but only those significant for the republic, are subjected to expert control of the Audit Commission [1, 4, 5, 6, 7]. Since 9th May 1996, there exists Expert Control or Audit Commission, formed with the aim to help the investor to, prior to the development of the main project, make the decision whether to continue with investing in further realization of investment or to withdraw from the investing in technically and technologically unfeasible and socially or economically unjustifiable realization of construction [5, 6]. Algorithm of the process of developing and controlling the technical documentation is a sequence and logical series of phases and control of technical documentation for issuing building permits, which is presented in Figure 2, because it is the easiest way to present it in the form of an appropriate algorithm and text that provides a

935

concise review of the entire process, i.e. clearly explains particular parts of algorithm of the development and control of technical documentation for issuing building permit. After obtaining building permit, the investor can start the construction of facility [1, 4, 7]. If the facilities are of significance for the republic, building permit is issued by relevant ministries for construction, transport and communications. For the facilities that are not specified in the Law for Facilities Construction, the building permit is issued by the municipality, i.e. the town. Building permit is issued for the entire facility, or for the part of facility that is technical or functional unit. For preparatory works of a larger scope or the works whose execution lasts longer, a special building permit may be issued [1, 4, 5, 6, 7].

INVESTOR

INFORM. FROM ENVIRONMENT

COMPUTER

INITIATIVE FORMATION, TASKS DEFINITION PREPARING INFORMATION FOR INVESTMENT DECISIONS-MAKING, SELECTION OF ALTERNATIVES REVIEW OF THE RESULTS OBTAINED, PREVIOUS SELECTION, AUDIT CONCRETIZATION OF INFORMATION FOR INVESTMENT DECISION-MAKING (CALCULATIONS, NALYSES) RESULTS ANALYSIS, MODEL ANALYSIS, PREVIOUS MODEL, AUDIT CALCULATIONS OF COSTS, INCOMES, AMORTIZATION ETC BY THE ALTERNATIVES RESULTS ANALYSIS, ALTERNATIVE SELECTION, EXAMINATION OF NEW CIRCUMSTANCES PLANNING AND PROGRAMMING OF INVESTMENT (PROJECT ANALYSIS, PROJECT) RESULTS ANALYSIS, PROGRAMMING MODEL CONTROL

SIMULATION OF INVESTMENT DECISION-MAKING (RESULTS CONTROL, ALTERNATIVES, PROBABILITIES)

RESULTS CONTROL, SIMULATION MODEL AUDIT

INVESTMENT DECISION

Figure 1: One possible version of algorithm of the investment decision process [7] Without building permit, the construct of facility or a part of facility can begin only: Due to the occurrence or during natural disasters or other unpredicted events because of prevention, mitigation or elimination of the consequences and If it is built during war or imminent danger of war. The requirement for issuance of building permit is submitted in written form and it should contain: Name of the investor,

936

 Mark of the facility with basic information, Mark of the location, Data of pre-calculated value of the facility, Name of the contractor, if the assignment of construction is made Numbered list of items. If it is about the construction is stages or phases, the requirement also needs to have the information about planned phases of construction and final deadline for completing the work. In addition to the requirement for issuing the building permit, the investor should also submit [1, 2, 3, 4, 7]: 1) Main project (three copies) with urban planning consent, permit and report on completed technical control of the main project, 2) Proof of the ownership or right to use, 3) Proof of regulated relations with organization that regulates the construction land, concerning fee payment, 4) Report of Audit Control on completed control of design project and main project (if there were any objections to the design project), 5) In addition to the above-mentioned items, the approvals, opinions and other evidences should be submitted: Approval of the relevant organ of sanitary inspection, Certificate of compliance with the Law on Fire Protection, Confirmation of the authorized organization that technical documentation is in compliance with the terms of safety at work, Approval of compliance of the technical documentation with water supply conditions, Approval of authorized person or organization that technical documentation was prepared in accordance with the given electro-energetic conditions, Approval of the Ministry of Transport and Communications for the site of facility from the aspect of air traffic safety, Certificate of the competent institution or agency for the protection of monuments of culture on the compliance of documentation with the terms of cultural property protection (protected area), Approval for detailed analysis of the influence of facilities on the environment, Approval of the Ministry of Defense concerning the location and necessary adjustments, Approval of the compliance of technical documentation with traffic conditions, Approval of the authorities for urban greenery and urban cleaning, Approval of the authorities for water supply and sanitation by the port, PTT approval, Proof of contributions paid for construction of shelters or proof of exemption for construction and maintenance of the shelter, Proof of compensation paid or exemption from payment for converting the arable land into the land for other purposes and Administrative fee of 10% of the pre-calculated value of the facility. If the contractor deviates from technical documentation, on the basis of which the building permit is issued, the investor is obligated to obtain the building permit in a new procedure with the new requirement.

5. CONCLUSION
Investment projects are financial expenditures and also, they involve other resources necessary for achieving the future effects in the form of income, reduction of costs, social effects and such, and it is necessary to perform their evaluation, as well. The task of evaluating the investment project is to identify the necessary financial costs and other resources necessary for the realization of the project, to determine the expected future effects and necessary financial costs and other resources by the application of a series of methods. The objective of evaluating the investment projects is to provide the high-quality information database for making investment decisions, altogether with the other aspects of evaluation. Technical control is performed by the company or agency that owns the Act on the fulfillment of conditions necessary for the preparation of technical documentation (license), made in accordance with the Law on Planning and Construction and Regulations on the data content, manner and procedure of determining the fulfillment of conditions for the preparation of technical documentation and construction of facilities. For developing the main projects of the facilities that are of significance for the republic, in the license it needs to be stated that the company or agency fulfills the conditions for developing all the parts of technical documentation, for all or particular types of facilities for which the building license is issued by the competent ministry. After the technical control is completed, a final report is made, and the approval is confirmed on the front pages of all three copies of the main project and the stamp that says project accepted is put.

937

Development of technical documentation and construction are assigned through public bidding, collecting the offers or direct negotiation. The investor independently decides on the best contractor, which he will entrust with the construction of investment facility, he informs all the participants in public bidding and afterwards signs a legal contract.

REFERENCES
[1] Zakon o planiranju i izgradnji objekata ("Slubeni glasnik RS", br. 44/95, 24/96, 16/97, 43/01, 47/2003, 89/2009). [2] Zakon o graevinskom zemljitu ("Slubeni glasnik RS", br. 44/95 i 16/97). [3] Zakon o posebnim uslovima za izdavanje graevinske, odnosno upotrebne dozvole za odreene objekte ("Slubeni glasnik RS", broj 16/97). [4] Pravilnik o sadrini i nainu izdavanja graevinske dozvole ("Slubeni glasnik RS", br. 4/2010 i 26/2010). [5] Pravilnik o sadrini i nainu izrade tehnike dokumentacije za objekte visokogradnje (Broj 110-0000047/2007-01, U Beogradu, 24. januara 2008. godine). [6] Pravilnik o sadrini, nainu izrade, nainu vrenja strune kontrole urbanistikog plana, kao i uslovima i nainu staljanja plana ua javni uvid (Sl. glasnik RS, br. 12/2004). [7] erifi, V.: Logistika podrka u investicionoj gradnji sa posebnim osvrtom na upravljanje vrstim komunalnim otpadom. Magistarski rad, 2010. Tehniki fakultet aak.

938

NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITIES OR LIMITATIONS FOR BUILDING ON CONSTRUCTION LAND STARTING PROJECT TASK URBAN-TECHNICAL AND OTHER TERMS FOR BUILDING NO FACILITY FOR COMMUNAL WASTE YES PROJECT OF PREVIOUS WORKS

EXPERT CONTROL OF TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

AUDIT COMISSION REPORT ON EXPERT CONTROL

PREVIOUS WORKS ADDITIONAL PREVIOUS WORKS

PROJECT TASK FOR GENERAL PROJECT GENERAL PROJECT AND PREVIOUS FEAS. ST.

PROJECT TASK FOR DESIGN PROJECT

NO
NECESSARY ADDITIONAL PREVIOUS WORK

DESIGN PROJECT AND FEASIBILITY STUDY

PROJECT TASK FOR ADDIT. PREVIOUS WORK

DECISION ON INVESTING (CONSTRUCTING) NO

ACQUIRING CONSTRUCTION LAND URBAN PERMIT

YES

PROJECT TASK FOR MAIN PROJECT

THE END OF DEVELOPING TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION FOR ISSUING THE BUILDING PERMIT FOR THE FACILITIES FOR USE AND DISPOSAL OF SOLID COMMUNAL WASTE

URBAN PERMIT
PROJECT TASK FOR MAIN PROJECT DEVELOPMENT OF MAIN PROJECT TECHNICAL CONTROL OF THE MAIN PROJECT CHECKING COMPLIANCE WITH CIRCUMSTANCES

YES
A.. GAVE OBJECTIONS TO MAIN P.

NO
URBAN APPROVAL

BUILDING PERMIT

Figure 2:Algorithm of the process of developing and control of technical documentation for issuing the building permit for the facility for solid communal waste[7]

939

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DESIGN BASED ON THE PROBABILISTIC APPROACH

Dragoljub evi1, PhD, Ivan Beker2, PhD, Aleksandar Mari3, PhD
Faculty of Technical Sciences, Novi Sad, SERBIA,e-mail: sevic@uns.ac.rs Faculty of Technical Sciences, Novi Sad, SERBIA, e-mail: beker@uns.ac.rs 3 Faculty of Business & Industrial Management, Kruevac, SERBIA, e-mail: alekmaric@gmail.com
2 1

Summary: Example of the probabilistic approach to beam design was used to demonstrate that this sort of approach is much closer to reality. Situations in reality in which the variability of the construction parameters is equal to zero, which is assumed by classic approach, are very rare. In addition, it becomes obvious that the consequences of non-considering the reliability are huge economic losses and a slow-down of the technological progress in many important areas. Keywords: reliability, designe, probabilistic approach.

1. INTRODUTCION
The ever increasing complexity of resources and systems and the ever greater costs of their development, production and exploitation, focuses on reliability as an important factor of quality and availability. This is significant not only to professional, dedicated appliances and systems, on whose functioning large technicaltechnological units depend on, but for the work of ordinary home appliances, traffic resources, equipment and appliances of the widest application. It is very important that everything that serves man works without or with as few malfunctions as possible, reliable, keeping the appliances and systems out of function as less as possible, their availability for utilization as high as possible over their life-time. That is why raising the reliability of appliances and whole systems is an imperative for all participants in the process of development and production: constructors, technologists, immediate manufacturers, control. This applies not only to products as a whole but also to certain integral parts, subassemblies and assemblies, but to all elements that participate in the integration of the appliance. Improving the parameters of each of them, base materials and construction characteristics, contributes the overall reliability of resources and systems. Every components and assemblies probability to work without a malfunction influences the end reliability of the system as a whole many times over.

2. PROBLEMS AND OVERCOMING THEM

Base values used for designing are stochastic in nature, meaning that they are not determined by unique value but can range in whole spectrum of values. This has encouraged designers to approach designing from a new aspect using statistics and probability theories. In this way classic methods appear just as special cases of methods based on principles of probability. This approach is far closer to reality, because situations in which the variability of construction parameters is equal to zero are very rare, as it is always assumed in the classic approach. If we observe any physical system, we can see that almost any measurable parameter tends to vary in a haphazard way. This is noticeable with a huge class of parameters, including such different things as, the height of individuals in a certain group of people, the strength of a material, the surface of a cross-section, heat conductivity, etc. The result of measuring such parameters is values: x1, x2, x3, ..., xn-1, xn. When those values are presented in the coordinate system, with value of each measurement on the apscis and the frequency of the measurement on the ordinate, we get the empirical distribution of the before mentioned variable. This variable is called the accidental variable, and the resulting empirical distribution can usually be approximated by one of the known distribution such as the normal, log-normal, gamma, beta, Weibills, etc. In

940

this fashion, many of the technical parameters can be realistically shown with the help of medium value and standard deviation (measure of dissipation on the middle value) if this regards the normal distribution, which is by far the most represented in practice. In the classical approach to designing the safety degree is of central importance. The safety degree can be defined in many ways, such as that this is a relation between the critical load and the real work load, or that it is a relation of minimal material strength to maximal load, etc. However in these definitions the variability is completely disregarded, but it is significant because for the same value of safety degree - variable reliability values can result. To understand this, we must consider the concept of failure probability. When the division of the work load and division of the critical load for some mechanical element are known, reliability can be determined from the condition that can be represented in many ways: K>R, K/R>1, K-R>0 and K/R-1>0, and the form that is most fitting is used because of the mathematical apparatus that will be applied with this criteria.

Figure 1: Division of the work load (s) and the division of the critical load (S) [1] The marked surface determines the probability of failure, meaning that the size of failure probability is a function of an overlap between the division of the work load and the division of the critical load. The bigger the overlap, the higher the probability of failure.

3. ASSUMPTIONS
When considering the reliability in construction process of machine elements, as in every other method of construction, certain assumptions must be made. In this process of construction the next assumptions are taken [2]: work load is independent in relation to critical load, work loads, critical loads and geometrical measures are normally distributed random variables or can be approximated in an appropriate way through normally distributed random variable values, changes in geometry of cross-section are symmetrical in relation to the neutral axis, level of requested probability is specified.

4. EXAMPLE OF BEAM DESIGNE BASED ON PROBABILISTIC APPROACH

This case of profile burdened by flexion force is subject to the theory of elasticity. Appropriately the calculation itself will be somewhat different to the previous ones. The calculation of all other profiles burdened with the flexion force will be done in the same manner.

941

1
t

h = nb
h

2 3
b
t

t = mb

Known values: R, M , S M , i , S , h = n, t = m i b b Middle values of overturning moment of insertion and middle values of resistance moment for profile parts 1, 2 and 3 are: c=e d
I t13 = 2 13 t 4 = 2 13 m 4 b 4 Wt13 = 2 13 t 3 = 2 13 m 3 b 3

(1) (2)

I t2 = 2 t 4 = 2 m 4 b 4 Wt 2 = 2 t 3 = 2 m 3 b 3

Where and are Sen Venans coefficients. In this case specifically 13 and 13 are found based on the relation of
b 1 = t m

a 2 and 2 on relation of

h n = t m.

The middle value of total overturning moment is the sum of individual ones and it is:
I t = I t13 + I t2 = 2 13 m 4 b 4 + 2 m 4 b 4 = (2 31 + 2 ) m 4 b 4

(3)

The middle values of maximal tangent tensions for profile parts 1, 2 and 3 are:
max 13 = 2
2 13 m 4 b 4 2 13 M M I t13 2M = = 4 4 I t Wt13 (2 13 + 2 )m b 2 13 m 3 b 3 13 (2 13 + 2 )m 3 b 3

c=e d
max 2 =

(4) (5)

m4 b 4 2 M M I t 23 M = = 2 4 4 I t Wt 23 (2 13 + 2 ) m b 2 m 3 b 3 2 (2 13 + 2 ) m 3 b 3

The total middle value of maximal tangent tension is the sum of individual ones and it is:
max = max 13 + max 2 =

(2 13 2 + 2 13 ) M 13 2 (2 13 + 2 ) m 3 b 3

= B

M b3

(6)

Where:
B= 2 13 2 + 2 13 = const 13 2 (2 13 + 2 ) m 3

(7)

The standard deviation will be shaped as:

B b 3 3 B M b 2 2 2 S = 6 b6 (0.02 M ) + 0.02 b b By arranging this we get the final form of the standard deviation:
2 2

(8)

942

S =

0.02 10 B M b3

(9)

And now using the standardized random variable, we determine the wanted dimension of the intersection.
i
BM b3 10 B M b3
2

z=

0.02 (0.02 i )2 +

(10)

Arranging this we get:

b 6 0.02 2 z 2 1 i2 + b 3 (2 B M i ) + B 2 M 2 10 0.02 2 1 = 0

(11)

Where, by further arrangement, we get the middle value of the dimension:

B M 1 + 0.02 z 11 10 0.02 2 z 2 b = 0.02 2 z 2 1 i

1 3

(12)

Finally, the wanted dimension results from the equation:

b = b 0.06 b

(13)

Where the coefficient 0.06 results from already determined condition S b = 0.02 b , which states that the size of the tolerance is T = 0.12 b . Example: Known values:
R = 0.999 M = 2000 daNm

z = 3.09

Solution:
1 1

b = 4.09 B 3 0.245 B 3 mm
1

i = 35.3 daN
n = 2,

mm m = 0.9, q = 0.7

b1 = 4.335 B 3 mm ili b2 = 3.845 B mm ili

1
1 3

R = 0.999 R = 0.001

b = 4.335 B 3 mm is adopted, that is, the first larger available dimension.

5. CONCLUSION
The classic approach to construction, based on the degree of certainty, does not consider the probability of the elements failure, and the fact that the often the construction parameters are random variables. The usage of safety degree is justified only if its value is based on significant experience with similar parts, while in this work it is shown that experiential data (like different coefficients) have had no role, which tells us that this method of construction is fully a scientific method. Therefore, the classic approach to construction is not a satisfactory solution from the reliability point of view.

REFERENCES
[1] Ivanovi, G.; Stanivukovi, D.; Beker, I.: Pouzdanost tehnikih sistema, FTN izdavatvo, Novi Sad, 2010. [2] Vujanovi, N.: Teorija pouzdanosti tehnikih sistema, Vojnoizdavaki i novinski centar, Beograd, 1990. [3] Stanivukovi, D.; Ivanovi, G.: Pouzdanost tehnikih sistema zbirka reenih zadataka, Mainski fakultet, Beograd, 1987.

943

[4] Grupa autora: Inenjersko mainski prirunik, Zavod za udbenike i nastavna sredstva, Beograd, 1992. [5] Mandi, J.: Otpornost materijala, Nauna knjiga, Beograd, 1987. [6] Mandi, J.; Tati, N.: Zbirka reenih zadataka iz otpornosti materijala, Nauna knjiga, Beograd, 1969. [7] Rakovi, D.: Otpornost materijala, Nauna knjiga, Beograd, 1987. [8] Rakovi, D.: Mehanika I Statika, Nauna knjiga, Beograd, 1968. [9] Srdi, V.: Zbirka reenih zadataka iz otpornosti materijala, Via tehnika kola, Novi Sad, 1983.

944

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

Senida Tahirbegovi, Elma Terhani
State University of Novi Pazar, Novi Pazar, SERBIA, e-mail: ekrem.89@live.com

Summary: The lack of conscious about significance of conservation phisycal and social environment.Improper behaviour to natural resources,the lack of money,and the general social climate tha last decade of the 20 th century has caused brought about a general devastation resources of water,air and land.The developed countries of European union search for the solution of global problems in the scope of starvation of physical and environment problems and reducing of influence on climate changes brought about intensive industrial development.World has began to search a new sources of more consumption,to reduce uncontrolled use od fossil petrols and to increase energy efficiency of production capacities that use that fossils.Energetics and starvation of environment according on their cause-consequence linkage,together with an economy and social component,established a new philosophy of contemporary civilization expressed in apprehension of Maintainable development Consumption of natural resources rise dramatically every year as the human population rises increases and standards of living rise.From 1950. to 2000. the world population more than doubled to 6 billion people,with nearly 80 percent living in developing,or poorer,nations.On global level a number of most developed country in the world being invest a huge amount of money which aim is to produce a high technology which aim is the permanent reduce of air,water,soil,pollution.Many international organization such as International monetary fond,World Bank,European bank for reconstruction and development,European investment bank invest in projects for starvation of physical and social environment in Eastern contries as well. Key words: International monetary fond, European bank for development and reconstruction, World Bank, European investment Bank, Maintainable development, Fossil petrols, Chemical emergency management. Industrial development.

1. INTRODUCTION
Lack of awareness of the importance of preserving the environment, irresponsible behavior towards natural resources, shortage of money and the general social climate the last decades of the twentieth century caused general devastation of water, air and soil. Developed countries of the European Union are looking for a solution to the alarming problem of global environmental protection and reducing the impact of climate change, which caused an intense and growing new industry development. The world has started to seek new sources of energy for increasing consumption, to reduce the uncontrolled use of fossil fuels and increase energy efficiency of production facilities that use these fuels. Energy and environmental protection, in view of their cause-effect relationship, along with the economy and the social component established a new philosophy of modern civilization, exemplified in the concept of "SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT". Consumption of natural resources is increasing dramatically every year while the human population and living standards increase. The world population has more than doubled to 6.7 billion, with almost 80% living in developed and poor countries. At the global level, many countries invest a large sum of money in the implementation of important projects in order to create high technology, aimed at permanently reducing air pollution, water, land, food and water. Many important international organizations such as the International Monetary Fund, World Bank, European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, European Investment Bank, European Union funding of projects in South East Europe have a strategic role in solving this important problem. High technology have crucial role in the world of contemporary businesses.As the consequence of that technology can influence not only on human labour but on protection of environment protection issues. Technology is one of the things that separate humans from animals and it has increasingly shaped out world. From earliest times, people have applied their purposes-from the wheel to the computer. Some now laud

945

technology as the foundation of prosperity,and believe that few constraints should be put on its development. Other condemn it as the cause of massive environmental damage and call for strict controls.Technology has both helped bring the wealth to much of the world,and been the instrument of much one harm done to the planet and its life.

Figure 1: The physical treatment of waste

2. ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS
All you discard as waste was taken from nature, but it is not returned because technological processes lead to a state matter that is not complementary to nature and it will not degrade for hundreds and even thousands of years. A large number of types of waste can significantly pollute and contaminate the water flows and soil, and thus impair the environment for long periods. Integrated waste management using LCA life cycle analysis attempts to offer the most benign options for waste management. For mixed MSW Municipal Solid Waste a number of broad studies have indicated that waste adminimisation, then source separation and collection followed by reuse and recycling of the non-organic fraction and energy and compost/fertilizer production of the organic waste fraction via anaerobic digestion to be the favoured path. Non-metallic waste resources are not destroyed as with incineration, and can be reused/ recycled in a future resource depleted society. Accidents in the chemical industry, such as those that took place in Seveso (1976.) and Bhopal (1984.), may kill or injure thousands of people, cause serious health hazards and irreversible environmental damage. The aim of this paper is to examine the ever-increasing risk of similar accidents becoming a frequent ocurrence in the socalled industrializing countries. Using figures from some of the worst chemical accidents in the last decades, data on the Bhopal disaster, and Brazil's social and institutional characteristics, we put forward the hypothesis that present social, political and economic structures in industrializing countries make these countries much more vulnerable to such accidents and create the type of setting whereif and when these accidents occurthey will have even more catastrophic consequences. The authors argue that only the transformation of local structures, and stronger technical cooperation between international organizations, industrialized and industrializing countries could reduce this vulnerability. The most important characteristic of major chemical accidents, from a societal perspective, is their tendency to produce off-site effects. The extent and severity of the accident may significantly affect the population and the environment of the adjacent areas. Following an accident event, effort should be made to limit such effects. Management decisions should be based on rational and quantitative information based on the site specific circumstances and the possible consequences. To produce such information we have developed an operational centre for managing large-scale industrial accidents. Its architecture involves an integrated framework of geographical information system (GIS) and RDBMS technology systems equipped with interactive communication capabilities. The operational centre was developed for Windows 98 platforms, for the region of Thriasion Pedion of West Attica, where the concentration of industrial activity and storage of toxic chemical is immense within areas of high population density. An appropriate case study is given in order to illuminate the use and necessity of the operational centre. Of all the environmental disaster events that humans are capable of causing, nuclear disasters have the greatest damage potential. The radiation release associated with a nuclear disaster poses significant acute and chronic

946

risks in the immediate environs and chronic risk over a wide geographic area. Radioactive contamination, which typically becomes airborne, is long-lived, with half-lives guaranteeing contamination for hundreds of years. Radioactive emissions of particular concern include strontium-90 and cesium-137, both having thirty-year-plus half-lives, and iodine-131, having a short half-life of eight days but known to cause thyroid cancer. In addition to being highly radioactive, cesium-137 is mistaken for potassium by living organisms. This means that it is passed on up the food chain and bioaccumulated by that process. Strontium-90 mimics the properties of calcium and is deposited in bones where it may either cause cancer or damage bone marrow cells.

Figure 2: Examples of serious industrial accidents

3. ENVIRONMENTAL TECHNOLOGY IN PROTECTION

Environmental technology or green technology is very important for environment protection issues.that imply the environmental science to conserve natural environment and resources and to curb the negative impacts of human involvement.Environmental technology involve the next scopes: - Recycling - Water purification - Air purification - Sewage treatment - Enviromental remediation - Solid waste management - Renewable energy Biological diversity throughout the world is being threatened by human activity: species are being driven to the edge of extinction; biological communities are being degraded, fragmented, and destroyed; and the genetic variation within species is being lost as populations are reduced in size and lost. Conservation biology is a multidisciplinary science that has developed in response to this biodiversity crisis. Conservation biology has three goals: - to investigate and describe the diversity of the living world; - to understand the effects of human activities on species, communities, and ecosystems; - to develop practical interdisciplinary approaches to protecting and restoring biological diversity. Biological communities can be harmed when exotic species are transported by people to a new place deliberately or accidentally. In many areas of the world introduced sheep, cattle, pigs, and goats have driven native plants to extinction; introduced invasive grasses, agricultural weeds, and ornamental plants have escaped into the surrounding landscapes, replacing the native species. Sorting and recycling allows the recovery of raw materials, which can be later used to manufacture new products.Consumers are asked to sort their waste using different refuse binds. That facilitates the work of the sorting centre staff. Two types of waste are accepted at the sorting centre. Household waste: packaging (glass, plastic, aluminium, cardboard and steel) as well as newpapers and magazines

947

Figure 3. Sorting and recycling waste Recycling involve processing used materials into new product to prevent waste of potentially useful materials,reduce consumption of fresh material,reduce energy usage,reduce air pollution,and water pollution.Recycling is the key component of modern waste reduction.Recycling material include many kinds of glass,paper,metal,plastic,textile and electronics.Although similar in effect composting or other reuse of biodegradable waste-such as food or garden waste is not tipically considered recycling.Material to be recycled are either brought to a collection center or picked from the curbside,then sorted,cleaned,and reprocessed into new materials bound for manufacturing.In strict sense recycling of material would produce a fresh supply of same material. Critics dispute the net economic and environmental benefits and recycling over the its costs,and suggests that proponents of recycling often make matters worse and suffer from confirmation bias.Specifically,critics argue that costs and energy used in collection and transportation detract from the costs and energy saved in the production process. Multihazardous waste is waste that contains any combination of chemical, radioactive, or biological hazards. The combinations of these hazards are illustrated in figure Although many of the principles discussed for chemically hazardous waste earlier in this

Figure 4: Multihazardous waste: a-chemical-radioactive waste, b- chemical-biological waste, cradioactive biological waste, d- chemical-radioactive biological waste

948

According to a 2007 World Health Organization report, 1,1 bilion people lack access to an improved drinking water supply,88 % of 4 billion annual cases of diarrheal desease are attributed to unsafe water and inadequate sanitation and higyene,and 1.8 million people die from diarrhea desease each year. The WHO estimates that 94 % of these diarrheal cases are preventable through modifications to the environment,including access to the safe water.Simple techniques for treating water at home,such as hlorination,filters and solar disinfection and storing it in safe containers could save a huge number of lives each year.Reducing deaths from waterborne deseases is a major public health goal in developing countries. Water purification presenting process of removing undesirable chemicals, materials and biological contaminants from raw water.The goal is to produce water fit for specific purpose. Most water is purified for human consumption(Drinking water) but water purification may also be designed for a variety other purposes,including meeting the requirements of medical,pharmacology and industrial applications.In general the metods used include physical processes such as filtration and sedimentation,biological processes such as slow sand filters or activated sludge.chemical processes such as flocculation and hlorination and the use of electromagnetic radiation such as ultraviolet light. Purification process of water may reduce the concentration of particulate matter including suspended particles,parasites,bacteria,algae,viruses,fungi and a range of dissolved and particulate material derived from the surfaces that water may have made contact with after failing as rain. Standards for drinking water quality are tipically set by governments or by international standards.These standards will tipically set a minimum or maximum concentration of contaminants for the use that is to be made for of the water It is not possible to tell whether water is of an appropriate quality by visual examination.Simple procedures such as boiling or the use of a household activated carbon filter are not sufficient for treating all the possible contaminants that may be present for water from unknown source.Even natural spring water-consedered safe for all practical purposes in the 1880s must now be tested before determining what kind of treatment,if any,is needed.Chemical analyses,while expensive,is the only way to obtain information necessary for deciding on appropriate metod of purification.

Figure 5: Increasing the risk of cancer challenger Air purication presents devices which use which removes contaminants from the air.These devices are commonly marketed as being beneficial to allergy suffers and asthmatics,at reducing or eliminating second-hand tobacco smoke.Commercial grade air purifiers are manufactured as either small stand-alone units that can be affixed to an air handler unit or to an HVAC unit found in the medical,industrial and commercial industries. Dust,pollen,pet dander,mold spores and dust mite feces can act as allergens in sensitive people.Smoke particles and volatile organic compounds can pose a risk to a health.Exposure to various components increases likelihood of experiencing symptoms of sick building sindrom.Additionally,with the advancement in technology air purifiers becoming increasingly capable to capturing a greater number of bacteria,virus and DNA damaging particulates.Air purifiers are used to reduce the concentrations of airborne contaminants and though very useful for people who suffer from allergies and asthma,technological,and scientific studies are finding that poor air quality is more contributing factor of some forms of cancer,respiratory illnesses,and other pulmonary infections and illnesses.They also reduce the need for the frequent room and area cleaning.

949

Other aspects of air cleaners are:hazardous gaseous by-products,noise level,frequency of filter replacement,electrical consumption,and visual appeal.Ozone production is typical for air ionizing purifiers.Although high concentration of ozone is dangerous,most ionizer produce low amounts. Sewage treatment is the process of removing contaminants from wastewater and household sewage.It include physical,chemical,and biological processes to remove physical,chemical and biological contaminants.Its objective is to produce a waste stream and a solid waste or sludge suitable for discharge or reuse back into environment.This material is often inadvertently contaminated with many toxic organic and inorganic compounds.Sewage is created by residential,institutional and commercial and establishments and includes household waste liquid from toilets baths,showers.kitchens,sinks and so forth that is disposed of via sewers.In many areas,sewage also include liquid waste from industry and commerce The separation and draining of household waste into graywater and blackwater is becoming more common in the developed world,with greywater being permitted to be used for watering plants or recycled for flushing toilets.Most sewage also includes some surface water from roofs or hard-standing areas and may include stormwater runoff Sewage systems capable of handling stormwater are known as combined systems or combined sewers.Such systems are usually avoided since they complicate and thereby reduce efficiency of sewage treatment plants owing to their seasonality.The variability in flow also leads to often larger than necessary,and subsequently more expensive.treatment facilities.In addition,heavy storms that contribute more than the treatment plant can handle may overwhelm the sewage treatment system,causing a spill or overflow. As the rainfall travels over roofs,and the ground,it may pick up various contaminants including soil particles and other sediment,heavy metals,organic compounds,animal waste and oil and grease. Environmental remediation is the removal of pollutants or contaminants for the general protection of the environment.This is accomplished by various chemical,biological and bulk movement methods,in conjuction with environmental monitoring. Remediation technologies are many and varied but an be categorized into ex-situ and in-situ methods.Ex-situ methods involve excavation of effected soils and subsequent treatment at the treatment at surface,in situ method seek to treat the contamination without removing the soils. The more traditional remediation approach consists primarily of soil excavation and disposal to landfill dig and dump and groundwater pump and treat.In situ technologies include Solidification and Stabilization and have been used extensively in USA. Pump and treat involves pumping out contamined groundwater with use of submersible or vacuum pump,allowing the extracted ground water to be purified slowly proceeding through a series of vessels that contain material designed to absorb the contaminants from the groundwater.For petroleum-contamined sites this material is usually activated carbon in granular form.Chemical reagents such as flocculants followed by sand filters may also be used to decrease the contamination of ground water.Air stripping is a method that can be effective for volatile pollutants. Soldification and Stabilization work has reasonably good track but also a set off serious defeciencies related to durability of solutions and potential longterm effects.In addition H2O emission due to the use of cement are also becoming major obstacle to its wide spread use in solidification and stabilization projects.

Figure 6: Two cooling towers at the Three Mile Island nuclear plant

950

Soldification involves the addition of reagents to a contaminated material to impart physical/dimensional stability to contain contaminants in a solid product and reduce the access by external agents. Stabilization involves the addition of reagents to a contamined material to produce more chemically stable constituents Solid waste management is the collection,transport,recycling or disposal,and monitoring waste materials.Waste management is also carried out to recover resources from it.Waste management can involve solid,liquid,gaseous or radioactive substances,with different methods and fields of expertise for each.Waste management practices differ for developed and developed nations,for urban and rural areas,and for residential and industrial producers.Management for non-hazardous residential and institutional waste in metropolitan areas is usually the responsibility of the generator. Renewable energy in environment is energy that comes from natural resources such as sunlight,wind,rain,tides and geothermal heat which are renewable.In 2008 about 18% global final energy consumption came from renewables,with 13 % tha comes from traditional biomass,which is mainly used for heating and 3.2 % from hydroelectricity.New renewables accounted for another 2.7% and are growing rapidly. The share of renewables in electricity generations is around 18% with 15% of global electricity coming from hydroelectricity and 3% from renewables. While many renewable energy projects are large-scale,renewable technologies are also suited to rural and remote areas,when energy is often crucial in human development.Globally,an estimated 3 million household get the power from small solar PV systems.Micro-hydro systems configured into village-scale or county scale minigrids serve many areas.More than 30 milions households get lightning and cooking from biogas made in household-scale digesters Climate changes concerns,coupled with high oil prices,pick oil,and increasing government support,are driving increasing renewable energy legislation,incentive and commercialization.New govermnet spending,regulation and policies helped industry weather 2009 economic crisis better than many other sectors. Energy conservation include efforts made reduce energy consumption.Energy conservation can be achieved through efficient energy use,in conjunction with decreased energy consumption or reduced consumption from conventional energy sources. Energy conservations can results in financial capital,environmental quality,national security,personal security and human comfort.Indivuduals and organization that are direc consumers choose to conserve energy to reduce energy costs and promote economic security.Industrial and commercial users can increase energy efficiency to maximize profit. Table 1: Selected average individual risks of death

4. CONCLUSION
The possibilities for environment protection increase by betterment of production. New technologies for treating and producers finding out a new ways of conserving and improving new possibilities by applying new production methods in recycling materials.It is necessary that constructions,producers and expert monitoring the conditions and processes in work and and environment area, because they will affect on efficiency,rationality,economy specific measures,approaches of monitoring, protection and removing the pollution of consequences. By starting of increasing requests one of more countries in surround,a number of enterprises and agencies their business strategies accommodate the need of contemporary society for protections of environment issues.The assessment of investment is giving on assessment necessary equipment and assets,which will be installed in appropriate facilities. This assessment are included construction site on complex for separation and recycling.

951

Upon optimization of protection,it is important have in mind a few basic principals and respect some basic ecological criterias. Hazardous and danger substances should remove on the begging of process,because the rest of product,purpose for depot stops to treat as the waste. Waste management practices differ for developed and developing nations, for urban and rural areas, and for residential and industrial producers. Management for non-hazardous residential and institutional waste in metropolitan areas is usually the responsibility of local government authorities, while management for nonhazardous commercial and industrial waste is usually the responsibility of the generator. "Mixed Waste" is a subset of multihazardous waste. Waste with multiple type hazards including two or more of the following: radioactive, infectious agent(s), or hazardous chemical(s). One type of multihazardous waste is Mixed Waste: Waste that contains both a chemical component regulated by the EPA as a hazardous waste and radioactive material regulated by the NRC.

REFERENCES
[1] Mansell, R. When, U. (editors): Knowledge Societies: Information Technology for Sustainable Development. Oxford (UK): Oxford University Press, 1998. [2] Ili M.; Stevanovi-arapina, H., Jovovi, A., Fei, R., Tanaskovi, M., Jovanovi, S., Petkovi, G., Strateki okvir za politiku upravljanja otpadom, Regionalni centar za ivotnu sredinu za Centralnu i Istonu Evropu, Beograd, 2002. [3] Bioanin R., Obradovi M., Hyrlova J. Multicriteria optimizationof ekclogical-safety in transport of dangerous cargo, VIII Simpozijum SAVREMENE TEHNOLOGIJE I PRIVREDNI RAZVOJ, 23-24. oktobar 2009. Leskovac. [4] Mari A., Arsovski S., Mastilovi J.: Contribution to the improvement of products quality in baking industry, International Journal for Quality Research, Vol.3, No.3, 2009. Center for Quality - University of Podgorica Montenegro. [5] Bioanin R., pijunovi K., Dobrii-evrljakovi N. U lavirintu rizinog drutva i puta ka znanju, uz praenje trendova u zatiti ivotne sredine, XXXIII Simpozijum o operacionim istraivanjima SYM-OP-IS 206. 03-06. oktobar 2006. Banja Koviljaa. [6] Mari A., orevi Lj.: Amplification of energetic efectivness in process of loaf production, Poveanje energetske efikasnosti u procesu proizvodnje hleba, Proceedings of 2rd International ConferenceRESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT IN MECHANICAL INDUSTRY- RaDMI 2002, volume 3, Vrnjaka Banja Yugoslavia, 01. 04. september 2002. [7] Bioanin R. Protection of the human enviroment in case chemical accident, II regional Simposium "CHEMISTRY AND THE ENVIRONMENT" 18-22.june 2003. Kruevac. [8] Stajkovac J., Jordovi B., Amidi B. Ekoloki menadment u sistemu kvaliteta, XXXIII Simpozijum o operacionim istraivanjima-SYM-OP-IS 206. 03-06. oktobar 2006., Banja Koviljaa. [9] Poul Buch Jensen Introduction to the ISO 14000 Family of Environmental Management Standards [10] Jensen P. B. Introduction to the ISO 14000 Family of Environmental Management Standards [11] Pei V, Jankovi P. ISO 9001 and ISO 1400 for Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises. Savez poljoprivrednih inenjera i tehniara Srbije, Beograd, 2008. [12] Mirsada Badi, Rade Bioanin, Energetska efikasnost i eko-bezbednost, KOD- 2010, 23-26. jun 2010, Ulcinj. [13] Grupa autora: Enciklopedija (ivotna sredina i odrivi razvoj), Zavod za udzbenike i nastavna sredstva Beograd, Beograd 2003.

952

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT AND LIFE CYCLE ASSESMENT

Liliana Topliceanu
University Vasile Alecsandri of Bacau, ROMANIA, e-mail: lili@ub.ro

Summary: The environment is one of the pillars of sustainable development and environmental management is a priority in terms of pronounced degradation of the landscape and of visible and observed climate change. In time, many environmental management methods were created and one of them is the LCA. The paper analyzes the place and role of this method compared with other existing methods and shows the results of using them in a particular case. The use of LCA provides analysis of economic development strategies and permit their correction so that human activity and mainly, industrial production, to become environment friendly. Keywords: environment, sustainable development, life cycle assessment.

1. INTRODUCTION
In a simple yet frequently used form, by sustainable development we understand a development that will permit the satisfying of all the current needs of the population, to be suited for the current needs of humanity, without compromising the possibility of their fulfillment by the following generation. It must be noted that although in specialty books there are more than 33 definitions of the term, which cover one or more economical, social or environmental aspects, this definition, is the most common one. These are the guidelines how to prepare a paper for the proceedings of the 10th International Conference RaDMI 2010. They are written in the format that is being described. Please follow these instructions.

2. EVOLUTION OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT CONCEPT AND POLITICS

The international community has come together for the first time in 1972 at The Stockholm Conference Concerning Human Environment, to debate the problem of global environment and that of development necessities. This was considered the starting point for the first international framework for treating the environment problems. The Conference has admitted that the problems related to the environment of the industrialized countries, like habitats degradation, the toxicity and acid rains, do not really represent important problems for all the countries, meaning that the development strategies do not fulfill the needs and priorities of the poorer countries and communities. The Conference was dominated mainly by the problems of the environment and that lead to increasing the public awareness in this matter. The notion of sustainable development, by that we mean a coherent look on the problems of the environment, appeared in the 80s. The first materialization of this can be found in the World Conservation Strategy (International Union of the Conservation of Nature IUCN 1980) emphasis being on the ecological part and less on the economical, technical or social parts. Based on this a proposal was made to take into account, while elaborating development policies, three priorities: a) maintaining the ecological processes, b) sustainable resource development, c) maintaining the bio-diversity; The reformulation of the sustainable development concept is the work of The International Commission of Development and Environment (also known as The Commission of Brundtland) in 1987. Sustainable

953

development can be seen in The Brundtland Commissions report Our common future as an appeal for the reinstatement of policies that admit the need for economical development and look to accomplish this, but in a way so that the vulnerable people will not be endangered and without exhausting the base of resources or their viability. That is why a new attitude on economical development is needed, one in which the quality of the economical development is more important than its quantity. The Brundtland Commission has identified two base concepts of the sustainable development policy: a) the necessity of satisfying the basic needs of the people in a way so that they may enjoy safety and dignity; b) the possibility of limitless development, as a result of the technical and technological potential, of the social organization and of the impact on the environmental resources. In June 1992, in Rio de Janeiro the United Nations Conference concerning Environment and Development was held, at which 115 world leaders gathered. On this occasion, on an international level, the need to integrate economic development and environment protection, in the objective of sustainable development, was officially recognized and the importance of the international right of the environment, as a codification and promoting mechanism of sustainable development, was stated. The summit of Rio brought environment protection and development problems on the public stage. With Agenda 21 and The Declaration of Rio, an accord has been agreed on concerning two mandatory conventions: the Convention concerning the biological diversity an the Convention concerning climate changes. The summit of Rio has generated such series of positive reactions, including the starting of many initiatives for the implementation of Agenda 21 at a local level and of reorienting the environment protection policy, in the same year, in many states national commissions for sustainable development and sustainable development strategies have been created. Despite these positive consequences, the global objective of Agenda 21, which made an appeal for a radical change of the existent dominating conventional values and of the institutional processes, could not be attained. The evaluation of the progress realized five years after the Conference of Rio (New York, 1997), has shown that there are a series of deficiencies, especially concerning social equity and poverty. As a result, an appeal was made to empower and implement more firmly the international accords and conventions concerning the environment and development. The United Nations Summit concerning Sustainable Development, that took place at Johannesburg from 26th of August to 6th of September 2002, brought together 104 world leaders and had these results: The Declaration of Johannesburg concerning sustainable development; The implementation plan of the world Summit concerning sustainable development. The Summit of Johannesburg has reassured sustainable development as a central element of the international agenda and encouraged the world to continue applying the measures for fighting against poverty and for environmental protection. The concept of sustainable energy has been better understood, especially through emphasizing on the important connections between poverty, environment and utilization of the natural resources. 2.1 The dimensions of sustainable development In the context of increasing population and of national resources consumption, sustainable development is a development method that aims for a balance between economic growth, life quality and environment preservation on a medium and long term, without increasing the consumption of natural resources above the support capabilities of the Earth. The essential characteristics of sustainable development are: Equity; Long term approach, Systematic thinking. Sustainable development aims at eliminating the inequity in the access to resources, for the poor or marginalized communities, and for the following generations, trying to assure for each nation the opportunity to develop according to each ones social and cultural values, without denying other nations or the following generations the same right. Equity implies a just distribution of the costs and the profits of the development between the rich and the poor, and between the generations and between the nations. Long term approach means taking into account the needs of the following generations and creations of equitable development scenarios, which have as a basis the limited natural resources of the planet. Systematic thinking requires an understanding of the complex interactions between the planets subsystems, of the propagation effects between the local and the global and of the multiple interdependences between environment, economy and society. The rules that tie the ecological and economic concepts in the sustainable development context are:

954

1. The exploitation rate of the renewable resources must be equal to that of their regeneration; 2. The waste generation rate must not be higher than the absorbing ability of the ecosystem in which the waste is deposited; 3. The non-renewable resources must be exploited in a sustainable way, meaning that their consumption rate must not exceed the rate at which they are substituted by renewable resources. The central objective of the social part of the sustainable development is the just distribution of opportunities between the generations. A high level of employment and quality jobs represent the link between the economic and social part of the sustainable development, and it may be quantified by PIB as primary macro-economic indicator, but also by the measure of the populations health regarded as a long term pool of spare labor force. The achievement of sustainable development is based on three parts, between which are a tight interdependency and a permanent informational and material flux. The three parts are: social, economical, environment. Only a good balance between these three parties can ensure a sustainable development.

3. LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT

Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is a tool for the systematic evaluation of the environmental aspects of a product or service system through all stages of its life cycle, from cradle to grave [1]. LCA provides an adequate instrument for environmental decision support. Life cycle assessment has proven to be a valuable tool to document the environmental considerations that need to be part of decision-making towards sustainability [5]. A reliable LCA performance is crucial to achieve a life-cycle economy. The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) has standardized this framework within the ISO 14040. There are several methods of environment management and LCA position among them is indicated in Fig. 1 [4]. Product
Product performances Exposure to hazards Energy, raw materials, emissions

Life cycle analysis Risk analysis Consumer needs Risk assessment Life cycle assessment Local impact Global impact Inventory

Consumer satisfaction

IMPACTUL ASUPRA MEDIULUI

Figure 1: The place of LCA among management methods. It can be seen in Figure 1 that the risk assessment relates to product safety, relative to the user and the environment in terms of local impact, while the life cycle assessment is an integrated process which is why its results are more general. However, the two methods are completed in some cases, for example is essential to assess the impact of short-term emission of toxic gases than their long term effect. By definition [5], LCA is a technique, which assists in assessing the environmental aspects and potential impacts associated with a product, by: Compiling an inventory of relevant inputs and outputs of a product system; Evaluating the potential environmental impacts associated with the selected inputs and outputs; Interpreting the results of the inventory analysis and impact assessment phases in relation to the objectives of the study. [ISO, 1997].

955

3.1 Data quality requirements Reliability of results from LCA studies strongly depends on the extent to which data quality requirements are met [3]. Data must take into account the following parameters: Time-related coverage: age of data and period of time available for data collection. Geographical coverage: geographical area where data should be collected in order to fulfill the goal of the study. Technology coverage: technology mix. Data precision: variability of data values. Completeness: percentage of data retrieved in comparison to the previously expected. Representativeness: degree to which data reflect the studied scenario. Consistency: uniformity in the methodology application to the study. Reproducibility: extent to which results can be reproduced by independent practitioners.[ISO, 1998] LCAs study the environmental aspects and potential impacts throughout a products life from raw material acquisition through production, use and disposal. The general categories of environmental impacts needing consideration include resource use, human health and ecological consequences [ISO, 1997]. The results obtained after applying LCA, highlight all these categories of impact that can be presented as graphs or tables. The method is successfully applied to products from simple, basic, to most complicate. Currently there are over 37 software tools (from America to Europe) that can be used for applying this environmental management method. Figure 2 presents a graphic visualization of results.

Figure 2: Visualization by components of the environment and human health impacts, Example was done using SimaPro software with the help of Eco-indicator 99 method. Figure allows clear view of production steps (in the example shown is about a fitting) which have intervened to reduce the environmental impact per unit. In this example we chose an ensemble made by three components [2]. It can be note the high consumption of fossil fuels for each item. Representation from Figure 2 let us to view the effect of entire ensemble (presented in three different colors for every item), in terms of environmental impact and human health. In this case the technological processes have not been analyzed. So, before putting into production, it can optimize the good and adopt the most economical and environment friendly fabrication method.

956

Figure 3: The visualization of ensemble impacts Before making a product it should be adopted the methods for reuse / recycling of components, or for the whole ensemble, if it possible. From our point of view, these presentations illustrates very suggestive strengths and weaknesses of any production lines, of any product or service offered.

Figure 4: Table presentation of products In the view of experts, the tabular presentation is very useful, indicating components, materials, raw materials and energy consumption (Fig. 4). Decision considering the type and quality of materials used is a very delicate process that can be taken by the product designer only. Because of this reason, LCA must be simulated in the design phase. Subsequent corrections applied can not change the profitability and environmental impact of the product that in 30% rate.

957

The life cycle tree of analyzed product, made by the Eco-Indicator 99 method, highlights not only the components but the reused/ recycling of subcomponents (Fig. 5).

Figure 5: Life cycle tree As it can see from previous graphical visualization, the transport and distribution of products has a major impact on the environment. We estimate that in the future the large use of bio-fuels or electric transportation can significantly reduce this impact. Regarding the recycling and reuse is necessary to increase the proportion to reduce their environmental impact.

4. CONCLUSION
The concept of sustainable development was a progressive evolution from the eighties, completing its size and content. The evolution towards sustainable development can not be done in the absence of environmental protection, stringent requirements of recent years. Over time, several methods of analysis and assessment of environmental impacts of economic activity have developed and LCA is one of the most comprehensive, most complete and most illustrative. It should be used carefully to establish the limits of analyzed domain and to introduce all the elements and resources necessary to produce the product or service. It recommends its use before creating a new product to simulate its effects over the environment and human health and to choose the most environmentally friendly version, in terms of material and energy resources.

REFERENCES
[1] Curran, M. A. Environmental life-cycle assessment. ISBN 0-07-015063-X, New York, McGraw-Hill, 1996; [2] Topliceanu, L. Analyze of the Life Cycle for a Pneumatic Connector. 1411-1412, Proceedings of the 19th International DAAAM Symposium; ISBN 978-3-901509-68-1, ISSN 1726-9679, Vienna, Austria 2008; [3] Vigon, B. W., Jensen, A. A. Life cycle assessment: data quality and database practitioner survey. Journal of Cleaner Production, 3, 135141, 1995; [4] White, P. R., M. Franke, and P. Hindle. Integrated Solid Waste Management - A Life Cycle Inventory. Blackie Academic and Professional, Glasgow. 1995; [5] Society of Environmental Toxicology and Chemistry. Guidelines for Life Cycle Assessment: A conceptual framework for life cycle impact assessment. Pensacola, USA: SETAC, 1993.

958

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MODELING THE PROCEDURE FOR THE CONTROL OF MONITORING AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS (ISO 9001:2000)
Sinka Toovi-Spahali, Vitomir Mrgud, Saa Kovaevi
IN TRADE FARM Ltd, Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, e-mail: sinka@intrade.co.ba Republic Administration for Inspection Activities, Republic of Srpska, Banja Luka, Bosnia and Herzegovina, e-mail: mrgud.v@teol.net Communications Regulatory Agency (CRA) of Bosnia-Herzegovina, Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, e-mail: skovacevic@rak.ba

Summary: The aim of this paper is to assist and facilitate the creation of the Procedure for the control of monitoring and measuring instruments (ISO 9001:2000)''. Primary goals of this procedure are: systemic determination of the activities in storing, usage, calibration, verification and keeping of the instruments for monitoring and measuring, and then ensuring that the monitoring and measuring instruments are under controlled conditions, that their calibration and verification are performed, that they are used in good condition, and in the end, ensuring that the instruments will be removed from service after the determination of malfunction. This procedure is applied to: the instruments that are periodically verified within the company, the instruments that are periodically verified by outside (external) authorized organizations and the instruments that are not subject to verification. In the process of monitoring and measuring instruments control, it is necessary to clearly and unequivocally define the responsibilities and authorizations linked to the process. Keywords: ISO 9001:2000, Control, Monitoring, Measurement, Verification, Calibration.

1. INTRODUCTION
Primary objectives of the procedure for the control of monitoring and measuring instruments (ISO 9001:2000) are the following [3]: a) Systemic determination of the activities in storing, usage, calibration, verification and keeping the instruments for monitoring and measurement; b) Ensuring that the instruments for monitoring and measurement are under controlled conditions, that their calibration and verification is performed, and that they are used in good condition; c) Ensuring that the instruments will be removed from service after the determination of malfunction. Procedure for the control of monitoring and measuring instruments (ISO 9001:2000) is applied to the following instruments for monitoring and measurement [3]: a) Instruments that are periodically verified within the company, b) Instruments that are periodically verified by outside (external) authorized organizations, c) Instruments that are not subject to verification. The procedure for control of monitoring and measuring instruments (ISO 9001:2000) needs to be linked to other documents of QMS (Quality Management System), particularly the following: EN ISO 9000:2000 Quality Management Systems Fundamentals and vocabulary, EN ISO 9001:2000 Quality Management Systems Requirements, Standard EN ISO 9000:2000 Quality assurance requirements for measuring equipment and Record Control Procedure. . The following definitions will be used in this paper [2]: Verification confirmation, by providing objective evidences that specified requirements have been met; Measurement control system a set of interrelated and interactive elements necessary for achieving measuring confirmation and continuous control of the measurement process;

959

 Measuring confirmation a set of operations required in order to ensure that the measuring equipment is in compliance with the requirements for its intended use; Measuring equipment measuring instrument, software, measurement standard, reference materials or additional devices or its combination for the realization of the measurement process; Transmission ability to droit de suite history, application or location of what is being considered.

2. PROCEDURE STEPS
2.1. Identification of the instruments for monitoring and measurement Identification of monitoring and measuring instruments represents the first step necessary to take. For each group of the instruments, it is necessary to create a document entitled Register of monitoring and measuring instruments [1], Figure 1.

Instruments that are periodically verified within the company Instruments that are periodically verified by outside (external) authorized organizations Instruments that are not subject to verification Cardboard of measuring instrument no.

S. no.

Name

Signature

Figure 1: Sample document form Register of monitoring and measuring instruments Responsibility for sorting monitoring and measuring instruments in some of the groups belongs to the leader of organizational unit in which the particular instrument is used. List of instruments for calibration of the monitoring and measuring instruments should be in the document entitled Register of instruments for calibration of monitoring and measuring instruments (Figure 2), which represents an official document of the Quality Management System (QMS) ISO 9001:2000 of a company, and it is filled in by the executives of organizational units in which the instruments are used [1]. S. no. Name Inventory number Cardboard of measuring instrument no. Signature

Figure 2: Sample document form Register of instruments for calibration of monitoring and measurement instruments Instruments from this register need to be confirmed by an authorized institution/organization, according to the standards that are droit de suite by the international standards prescribed for a particular area [2]. 2.2 Calibration (measuring) and verification of monitoring and measurement instruments

960

Calibration, i.e. measuring, and verification of monitoring and measuring instruments can be performed by host (own) company and by the external authorized institution/organization [1]. Calibration and verification by host (own) company implies the following steps [1]: a) For the implementation of calibration in host company, it is necessary: o To make the instruments available, ensuring the undisturbed process of measurement and control, o To provide assistance in handling, o To provide the space and conditions for work. Responsibility for meeting the above listed requirements belongs to the leaders of organizational units [2]. b) The service/staff that performs calibration has to meet the following requirements: o To have the appropriate equipment, certified by the authorized institution; o That the staff that performs calibration owns necessary knowledge, skills and that it is authorized for performing these tasks. Authorization for performing these tasks is assigned by companys director, as the person responsible; o To provide the necessary conditions for the implementation of measuring (calibration), such as air, dust, humidity, etc; o To have the developed methods for measuring/checking/calibration; o To keep record, i.e. to create records of calibration. c) Calibration of measuring instruments goes on in the following way: o Visual examination, o Preparation of instruments, o Functional check, o Setting (measuring), if necessary, o Writing down the results before and after setting (measuring), on the document entitled Test sheet (Figure 3) [5]. The document Test sheet is kept in accordance with the Procedure for records control [4], Number: Date: Name of the instrument: Type: Manufacturer: Factory number: Inventory number: Measurement name: Measuring range: Declared class of accuracy: Period of certification: Documentation:

Tools:

Data before measuring

Default Read Ideal value Deviation Default

Data after measuring

Read Ideal value Deviation

Max. error Instrument's accuracy

Max. error Instrument's accuracy

961

NOTE:

Instrument is: In order For finishing Out of order Fixed

In accuracy class Out of accuracy class For repair Expenditure

It is valid until:

Measured by: Enter the first and second name Figure 3: Sample document form Test sheet

Approved by: Enter the first and second name

o Setting the appropriate mark (verified, for destruction, repair, accepted), o Filling in the document Cardboard of measuring instrument (Figure 4), and it is kept in accordance with the Procedure for records control [4]. Number: Date: Name of the instrument: Type: Manufacturer: Factory number: Inventory number: Owner-user: Date of purchase: Date of initial verification: Recommended verification period: Place of measuring verification: DATA FOR MEASURING VERIFICATION Documentation: Tools:

Characteristics:

REGISTER OF MEASURING VERIFICATIONS AND REPAIRS MEASURING VERIFICATION REPAIR S. no. Date Number of the ''Test sheet of measuring instrument Metrological laboratory Signature Date Signature

NOTE:

Figure 4: Sample document form Cardboard of measuring instrument

962

d) If it is determined, prior to or during the review, that some unit of monitoring and measuring instrument is: o Damaged, o Subjected to improper handling or operation mode, o Showing any defect in work, o Out of the periodic time of checking, o Having a damaged seal or any other type of insurance against unauthorized settings, The person who has discovered the discrepancy should inform the leader of organizational unit in which the discrepancy was discovered. Such instruments are marked with a sign FOR REPAIR and they are withdrawn from use, until the discrepancy is removed. If the instrument cannot be repaired, it is marked with a sign TO DESTROY. Responsibility for these activities belongs to the leader of organizational unit in which the discrepancy was discovered. e) Monitoring and measuring instruments that are not subject to periodic verification, if checked, are marked with a sign ACCEPTED in case they are in order, or with a sign TO DESTROY or FOR REPAIR, in case they are out of order. Verification of monitoring and measuring instruments by the external authorized institution/organization includes the following steps: a) Monitoring and measuring instruments, which are periodically verified by the external authorized institution, are applied for the verification in written form, at least the defined number of days before the deadline for re-verification (usually seven days). The instruments can be verified in the host company or they can be submitted to the external authorized organization/institution for verification. The records of measurements that were done in host company are submitted with the instruments [6]; b) After the verification, the authorized institution/organization should submit the confirmation/certificate that the instrument is [7]: o Confirmed, in which case the instrument is marked with a sign VERIFIED, o Not confirmed, in which case the instrument is marked with a sign FOR REPAIR or TO DESTROY. 2.3 Keeping the monitoring and measurement instruments When storing, handling and maintaining, monitoring and measurement instruments are kept and protected from damages, disarrangements and weakening of characteristics. The responsibility for keeping belongs to the each user of these instruments.

3. CONCLUSION
One of the required procedures of the Quality Management System (QMS) ISO 9001:2000 is also the Procedure for monitoring and measuring instruments control. As the constituent elements of the procedure, there are the following chapters: purpose of the procedure; application area of the procedure; links between the procedure and other documents; definitions, marks, symbols, abbreviations used in the procedure; applied activities; responsibilities and authorities; a list of employees who can access the document. In the procedure of monitoring and measuring instruments control, it is necessary, as in all other procedures of QMS, to clearly and unequivocally define the responsibilities and authorizations linked for the process. In relation to that, the leaders of organizational units, in which monitoring and measuring instruments are used, are responsible and authorized for the preparation of document Register of monitoring and measuring instruments. The leaders of organizational units in which the calibration instruments are used are responsible and authorized for the preparation of the document Register of instruments for calibration of monitoring and measuring instruments. The leaders of organizational units in which monitoring and measuring instruments are used are authorized for providing the conditions for the implementation of calibration and verification of monitoring and measuring instruments within a company. Director of the company, as a person responsible, assigns the authorization to the service/staff/individuals for performing the calibration. Then, the authorized staff of the company or external organization, if it is implementing the calibration, is responsible for performing the calibration of monitoring and measuring instruments. The authorized employees who directly handle monitoring and measuring instruments are also responsible for identification of malfunctioning of monitoring and measuring instruments, while the authorized leaders of organizational units in which the monitoring and measurement instruments are used are responsible for marking the monitoring and measuring instruments that are out of order. In the end, the authorized direct users of the instruments are also responsible for keeping monitoring and measurement instruments. When prescribed and documented, Procedure for control of monitoring and measuring

963

instruments represents a constituent element of Quality Management System (QMS) and all the employees, including top management, are obliged to apply it and act according to it. Each non-application or partial application entails a real risk of losing the certificate of quality system ISO 9001:2000.

REFRENCES
[1] Technical Committee ISO/TC 176 & Subcommittee SC 2 in collaboration with CEN Management Centre, (CMC): EN ISO 9001:2000 Quality management systems - Requirements. Approved by European Committee for Standardization (CEN) as a European Standard EN ISO 9001:2000, the third edition, 2000. [2] Technical Committee BAS/TC 3: BAS EN ISO 9001:2001. The standard BAS EN ISO 9001:2001 is a translation of the European Standard EN ISO 9001:2000 English version and has the status of a Bosnia and Herzegovina, Approved by director of BASMP (Ref. doc. OS-075/01), the second edition, December 2001. [3] Standard EN ISO 9000:2000 Zahtev za osiguranje kvaliteta merne opreme. [4] Turudi, L. & Kovaevi, S.: Procedure for control of records BST-PR-4.2.4/02. Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, BS telecom d.o.o., November 2005. [5] Turudi, L. & Kovaevi, S.: Manual for creation, distribution and revision of QMS procedures and manuals BST-UP-4.2.3/01. Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, BS telecom d.o.o., November 2005. [6] Turudi, L. & Kovaevi, S.: Procedure for control of documents BST-PR-4.2.3/01. Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, BS telecom d.o.o., July 2006. [7] Turudi, L. & Kovaevi, S.: Manual for format, content and identification of QMS procedures and manuals BST-UP-4.2.3/02. Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina, BS telecom d.o.o., November 2005.

964

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

INFLUENCE OF THE DENAVIT-HARTENBERG PARAMETERS ON ROBOT POSITIONING ACCURACY

M. Toth-Tascau1, K. Menyhardt2
Politehnica University of Timisoara, Timisoara, ROMANIA, 1e-mail: mirela@cmpicsu.upt.ro 2 e-mail: karoly_m@cmpicsu.upt.ro

Summary: This paper presents a systematic approach for estimating the positioning errors of an industrial robot and corresponding corrections applied in joints in order to improve the robot accuracy. The effect of geometric parameters choice on robot calibration is examined. The literature on the subject is reviewed, and the various possible choices for geometrical modeling are examined. The study is concerned on the influence of the link length variations upon the positioning accuracy. A theoretical robot structure was employed as an experimental system in order to evaluate the efficacy of the approach. Keywords: Robot, trajectory, positioning errors, accuracy.

1. INTRODUCTION
The positioning and orientation accuracy of industrial robots varies by manufacturer, robot type and robot age. The errors between the actual situation and the desired situation can be estimated and measured. Using kinematic calibration, these errors can be reduced to less than one millimeter in most cases. The robot calibration normally consists of three steps: modeling, measuring and error compensation [3]. The most important parameters related to robot calibration are: accuracy, repeatability and resolution. Each of these depends of the various aspects. The objectives of the robot performance assessment are [2]: identifying of the main sources of errors which perturb the accuracy of the robot end effector; deciding if the robot or the work-cell must be calibrated; computing the expected improvement in accuracy by calibration. The performance of the robot is assessed by making mathematical models of the characteristics of the error sources in each of its sub systems such as the joint, the robot links or its gripper. The robot performance is strongly influenced by many different factors that include, but are not limited to: robot geometry as result of modeling and manufacturing process (manufacturing tolerances), joint compliance, and elasticity of each link caused by the effects of gravity, payload and inertia, friction, temperature, loading, etc. Taking into account all these effects of errors on the positioning, the accuracy of the end-effector can be evaluated. Once the error budget has been established and the error magnitudes estimated, various statistical methods may be used to evaluate their effects when they work in combination. High accuracy is really difficult to accomplish. Thus calibration will play an increasingly important role in automation systems of the future, employing robots and off-line programming systems.

2. DENAVIT-HARTENBERG PARAMETERS AS ERROR SOURCE

In order to describe the robot actions, several attached frames are used (figure 1). The errors between the actual situation and the desired situation have to be estimated and compensated. The position and orientation of the robot end effector are functions of relative positioning of each robot link. Thus, a robot kinematic structure is often described mathematically using a representation of the position and orientation of each link relative to the

965

previous one. In order to obtain the relationships between joint coordinates and operational coordinates, DenavitHartenberg convention can be used.

Figure 1: Standard reference frames The relative situation of a robot link with respect to the previous is described by the transformation matrix
i 1T = f ( , l , , d ) which depends on four geometrical parameters: link length l , link twist , distance i i i i i i i

d i and angle i [4].

The matrix 0G n describing the position and orientation of the robot end effector is obtained by multiplying the transfer matrices i 1T i describing the relative situations of the robot links:
0G = 0T 1T Ki 1T iT n 1T n 1 2 i i +1 K n

(1)

The studied case is concerned only with positioning of the robot end effector. The theoretical positional components are px, py, and pz from 0G n matrix. Let be E(x E , y E , z E ) the point describing the desired end effector position (E point generates the robot
r r r trajectory), and E r x , y , z the point describing the real end effector position (figure 2). The position E E E vector of this point with respect to the fixed reference frame 0, is:

0 P = 0G n P E n E

(2)

where:
0P = 0x E E

0y

0z

T 1 ; n PE = n x E

ny

nz

(3)

Taking into account a certain robot having n degrees of freedom, the total number of D-H parameters is 4n: n parameters represent the joint variables and 3n parameters define the robot geometry. Taking into account the DH elementary variations, the positioning errors are also due to the elementary variations of these 4n parameters:
r = + d i i i

lr i = l i + dl i
r = + d i i i r = d + dd di i i

(4)

Thus, with respect to the fixed reference frame 0, the real position of point E can be calculated using the following equation:

966

0 r

P = 0G r n P r
E n

(5)

where:
0 Pr = 0 xr
E

0 yr

0 zr

1 ; n P r = n x r E E

n yr

n zr

(6)

Figure 2: Theoretical and actual positions of the robot

The position vector of the real point E with respect to the fixed reference frame 0 is obtained from:
0 r

G = 0T r 1T r Ki 1T r iT r Kn 1T r
n 1 2 i i +1 n

(7)

where
i 1T r = f r , l r , r , d r = f ( + d , l + dl , + d , d + dd ) i i i i i i i i
i

(8)

The positioning error results:

0 dP = 0 P r 0 P E E E

(9)

where 0 dPE is the matrix of position errors of point E:

0 dP = 0 dx E E

0 dy

0 dz

(10)

and:
0 dx = 0 x r 0 x E E E 0 0 r 0 dy E = y E y E 0 0 dz E = 0 z r E zE

(11)

The positioning error is obtained as the norm of the individual position errors for each axis:

967

2 2 2 e p = dx E + dy E + dz E

(12)

Robot manufacturing inevitably introduces some position and orientation errors. These errors occur even in the zero robot position [1]. The main effect on the robot accuracy comes from the length of the robot links, thus the study is concerned on the influence of the link length variations upon the positioning accuracy. Taking into account the situation errors, the relationship between the desired situation and the real one is [4]:
G r = G + dG

(13)

where
dG = 0 G

(14)

and
0 - 0 z 0 y 0 0 - 0 x 0 = z 0 - 0 y 0 x 0 0 0
0 dx

0 dy 0 dz 0

(15)

represents the differential operator. The vector of elementary displacements with respect to the fixed reference frame is
0 D = [ 0 dx 0 dy 0 dz 0 x 0 y 0 T z]

(16)

In order to compensate these errors, the robot differential model has to be solved.
Gn

D = J r Dq

(17)

where

D represents the vector of elementary displacements with respect to the reference frame attached to the last link of the robot; Jr represents the robot Jacobean; Dq represents the vector of elementary displacements in joint. The corrections that must be applied in joints are obtained from Dq vector:
D q = ( J r )1G n D

Gn

(18)

In the same manner can be studied the influence of each D-H parameter and any composition of them.

3. CASE STUDY
Taking into account the influence of the geometrical parameters involved in the geometric model of the robot, we studied the precision of trajectory generation of the KUKA 200 robot. Based on the presented algorithm, the correction of the positioning errors was performed [5]. Using the robot geometrical model, and imposing the initial and final positions of the robot characteristic point, the theoretical and real trajectories were obtained (figure 3). It can be observed that the real trajectory is affected by the errors due to the geometrical parameters.

968

Figure 3: Theoretical and real trajectories of the end effector of the KUKA 200 robot
By calculating the elementary displacements of the robot joints Dq the errors of the robot trajectory can be compensated so that the actual final position coincides with the theoretical one, imposed by the robot task (figure 4) [5].

Figure 4: Errors compensation and superposing of the actual and theoretical final position
In order to simulate the robot motion, the program Roboworks was used [5]. For a better visualization of the trajectory errors, there are represented two superposed robots: one robot executes the theoretical motion, and the second one executes the actual motion. This type of representation is useful to visualize in real time the differences between the actual and theoretical trajectory (figure 5).

Figure 5: Visualization of the actual and theoretical trajectories in real time

969

The obtained elementary displacements in joints could be used as corrections in order to compensate the evaluated errors.

3. CONCLUSION
Based on the current research and similar studies on different robot architectures, a model could be compiled which can predict easily and efficiently the corrections that must be applied to robot arm in real-time. These corrections of positioning can be applied in many cases where there is no sufficient processing power for complex mathematical operations. The study can be extended for all the four D-H parameters and any robot architecture. The algorithm proposed by this study can also be applied in the design phase of a robot to estimate possible errors in robot end effector positioning.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors wish to acknowledge the cooperation and contribution of M. Galos and G. Ganea in developing of the program used to exemplify the presented algorithm.

REFERENCES
[1] Sivayoganathan, K,; Al-Dabass, D.: Simulation and robot calibration, Available on Web site: http://ducati.doc.ntu.ac.uk/uksim/papers/zobel/Siva.doc, UKSIM'99, Conference Proceedings of the UK Simulation Society, St Catharine's College, Cambridge, 7-9, 1999, pp.19-22. [2] Didot, F.; Spanoudakis, P.; Geuens, F.; Bossche, J. Van Den: Performance Assessment and Calibration Strategies for Space Robots, Preparing for the Future, Vol. 4 No 4 December 1994, pp.20-21. [3] Conrad, K.L.; Shiakolas, P.S.; Yih, T.C.: Robotic calibration issues: Accuracy, repeatability and calibration, Proceedings of the 8th Mediterranean Conference on Control & Automation (MED 2000), Rio, Patras, Greece, 17-19 July 2000. [4] Toth-Tascau, M.; Dreucean, M.: Elemente de robotica, Editura Politehnica Timisoara, 2008. [5] Galos, M.; Ganea, G.: Corectia erorilor. Student Project, Dynamics of Industrial Robots, 2007.

970

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENTS INVESTMENT CLIMATE IN SERBIA

Dragana Trnavac
Faculty of educating lawyers and economists for managing in the economy Kruevac, SERBIA, e-mail: dragana.trnavac@fpsp.edu.rs

Summary The main objective of all investments is profit. The most important subgoals, whose basis is, again, achieving maximum capital fertilization, are the following: tendency for winning new markets, lower labor cost, providing the sources of regular supply etc. In an effort to answer the question why, how and when the FDI will occur, the OLI theory may serve. According to that theory, the motive for starting FDI occurs when three important rules are fulfilled: firstly, when there are ownership advantages due to the possession specific intangible property (ownership advantages-O),secondly, when the benefits of own production, i.e. internationalization are larger than the benefits of the sale of licenses (internalization-I ), and thirdly, when there are advantages of location (location-L). Key words: foreign direct investments (FDI), investment climate.

1. INTRODUCTION
One of the main features of world economy in the last three decades is the increased volume of foreign investments. The capital has moved in various forms, from foreign direct investments to traditional borrowing on international financial market. FDI represent the main form of investing the private capital of developed countries in the developing ones. The term foreign direct investment refers to such a form of investment, in which the investor obtains a right of ownership, control and management of the company in which the funds were invested in order to accomplish some long-term economic interest. Through this type of investment, the foreign investor obtains an active relation in the work and operations of the company, in which the funds were invested. FDI occur according to the IMF statistical conventions when the residents of one country became the owners of 10 or more percent of some enterprise in another country.

2. FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENTS IN THE WORLD

In the third consecutive year of growth, the foreign direct investments in the world have increased by 34% and almost reached the record in 2001, when there was a record of 1.4 billion of USD of foreign direct investments. Such a growth can only partially be attributed to the decline of dollar. Analyses show that investors primarily reacted to economic expansion in many parts of the world, as well as to the growing liberalization of regulations concerning the entry of foreign investors, as well as to foreign trade liberalization, since FDI, as a rule, look for suitable locations not only for the production, but for the export of their products and services as well. In addition, the termination of recession in USA, which includes almost 15% of the total foreign direct investments in the world, can probably be considered the most important factor of the strong growth of foreign direct investments. Record growth (56%) is registered in transition countries, which have strengthened themselves at approximately 5% of total foreign direct investments. The biggest inflow is recorded in Russia (94,6%) and Kazakhstan (275,5%). It is worth the attention of registering that Romania has, with 8.6 billion dollars, almost approached India (9.5 billion dollars), and that the new members of EU Hungary, Poland and Czech Republic, with an inflow of about 22-28 billion dollars annually, still represent an extremely attractive economic location for many foreign investors.

971

Figure 1. Foreign direct investments in the world, 19802006

3. FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENTS IN SOUTH-EASTERN EUROPE

A growing gap between the attractiveness of the South-Eastern European countries for foreign investors is immediately noticed. The four leading countries Bulgaria, Romania, Croatia and Serbia significantly surpass the investments that come to Macedonia, Albania, Bosnia and Herzegovina and Montenegro. In contrast, observed per capita, Bulgaria and Romania attract twice as more investors than Albania and former Yugoslav republics. 3.1 Foreign direct investments in Serbia Due to the chosen privatization method (sale of companies through tenders and auctions), Serbia goes through transition with a growing inflow of foreign direct investments. Influx of investments in Serbia is significantly growing after 2005, thanks to the arrival of Telenor, Mobilkom, Philip Morris, Ball Packaging, and other arrivals...

Figure 2: Foreign direct investments in SE Europe, 2000-2007 As shown in the following figure, the most investments have come in the sectors of telecommunications, banking, cement, oil, tobacco industry...

972

Figure 3: Foreign direct investments in Serbia 2000-2007 Apart from selling domestic companies in privatization process, the greenfield investments are becoming more widespread, which are, by the definition, more difficult to attract into a country until the economic environment that implies lower investment risk and greater business transparency is created. Although no form of foreign direct investments is inferior to others, greenfield investments have one advantage that is less noticeable in other forms these investments have the greatest impact on the growth of employment... The influx of foreign direct investments per capita is still very low twice as lower than in Croatia and several times lower than in Romania, Poland, Czech Republic or Hungary.

4. BENEFITS AND RISKS OF FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENTS

There is a huge range of potential effects of foreign investments. The effects are mostly positive and mutual, and the key evidence for that is in their very dynamic growth over the last decades. Had they caused more harm than benefit, this trend would most certainly be reversed. However, all the countries that participate in this process record a significant economic growth, which greatly increases the interest for continuation of such tendencies. One of the key benefits of FDI for the countries in transition certainly is in the fact that these countries record chronic shortages of: Own capital, Managerial knowledge (management), Modern technologies, Export channels. In addition, they do not have domestic savings from which they could self-finance their own development. As an alternative to the arrival of FDI, there are loans commercial ones or the loans of international financial institutions. However, with a huge indebtedness that usually follows the beginning of transition, this option is not probable either because rarely anyone is willing to give a loan to an over-indebted country. However, instead of loans, the foreign investors bring the capital, knowledge, export channels and new business structure, which they hold on to even in case when they are not obliged to do that by (often bad) immutable domestic laws. To illustrate this, nobody has even suspected that all the foreign investors in Serbia will timely and according to the agreement pay all the agreed severances, which probably would not be the case with domestic investors who have spent nearly two decades in the environment of non-payment, which will be changed (and it still isnt) when the law on bankruptcy begins to be applied automatically.

5. NEGATIVE CONSEQUENCES
The most common negative consequences include the following events: Foreign investors usually cause the growth of balance of payments deficit, at least in the first phase of their work, until the activation of export channels, which then reduce the balance of payments deficit and eventually realize the surplus (the example of US Steel, Slovenian companies in Serbia etc) The growth of unemployment due to layoffs Extrusion of domestic investments The creation of local monopolies Outdated technology Environmental pollution.

973

5.1. Advantages and disadvantages of our market Some of the identified weaknesses of Serbia among the investors are poor telecommunications, transport and logistics infrastructure, lack of transparency, political stability and quality of life, corruption and bureaucracy. On the other hand, the investors are attracted by low cost of labor, flexibility of regulations on labor and possibility of productivity growth. According to the research, the membership of one country in the EU represents a powerful driving force for attracting the investments, since 86% of investors have agreed with it. Head of the European Commission to Serbia, Josep Lloveras has said that foreign direct investments are also important for Serbias European integration because it can support the pressures of competition from European market only if it achieves a high level of investments, mostly in private sector. He has pointed out that, after the entry into force of SAA, the investors will know which rules they need to obey in Serbia and those will be the same rules that they already have in their countries. Head of OSCE Mission to Serbia, Hans Ola Urstad has said that the main issues to be resolved are the establishment of political stability, meeting the European standards and improving the image of Serbia. According to his words, without a strong, predictable and incorrupt judiciary, Serbia will not be attractive to the investors. Minister of Economy and Regional Development, Mlaan Dinki pointed out that political instability in Serbia will be resolved in the following days by formation of proEuropean government, whose biggest task will be the balance between economic growth and social responsibility. He has also said that the new government will attract the investors by tax breaks and incentives, so that in 2009 and 2010 it is expected for foreign direct investments to reach 12 billion dollars.

6. CONSCLUSION
From the phase of theoretical interpretation of positive effects of FDI, the most transition economies have found themselves in the phase when foreign capital has actually entered the economy and become dominant in particular sectors, greatly encouraging the processes of modernization. Therefore, the local companies were faced with severe competition in foreign ownership. However, what the most transition economies record in the aspect of work and operations of the foreign-owned companies is reduced to the following: local companies that are purchased by foreign owner operate good under his administration, large number of local companies records the access to new knowledge, technology, markets, financial sources, thanks to the foreign partner, foreign-owned companies invest more, realize greater levels of productivity and encourage the export more than local companies. On the other hand, opponents explain such business results by the fact that foreign partner purchases only the best and the most successful local companies. However, the examples of good companies that were protected from foreign sale confirm that many of them do not achieve the results comparable to those achieved by the foreign-owned companies. The problem of local rivals is also related to the fact that the companies are not sufficiently experienced and that they are overburdened with the problem of capital lack, so that it is very difficult for them to face the big guys who are ready to operate at a loss in short-term, so that they could provide new market shares in long-term. The attempt to avoid foreign rivals, either by trade barriers or by prohibiting the investments in certain sectors, has never lasted for long and it always resulted in stagnation instead of development. Road to Europe for transition economies and their companies survival is closely related to the fact whether the scientists have acquired new technological knowledge, provided educated labor and made necessary contacts with suppliers through their foreign partners. The countries of Central and Eastern Europe are Yugoslav most direct competitors in the field of attracting foreign capital, so that the knowledge and monitoring of their previous experiences in this domain are of a great significance for adequate setting of investment framework in local conditions.

REFERENCES
[1] Kurtovi Safet; Upravljanje investicijama;Uzice, Graficar,Beograd 2007. [2] Bubanja-Vidas,M; ,,Metode i determinante stranih direktnih investicija, Institut ekonomskih nauka,Beograd 1998. [3] Mishkin S.Frederic, ,,Monetarna ekonomija. Bankarstvo i finansiska trita , Datastatus,Beograd 2006. [4] Kapor, P. (2000) Institucionalni okviri za strana ulaganja u Jugoslaviju, u zborniku Kako privuci strain capital u privredu Jugoslavije,IEN, Beograd, strana 45-53. [5] Milan Vojnovic; ,,Transnacionalne korporacije ; Beograd, 1977. [6] uri M. Dragana, Uvod u finansijski menadment, Institut ekonomskih nauka, Beograd, 1999.

974

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENT IN QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Jaromra Vaov1, Marta Kuerov2
Faculty of Materials Science and Technology in Trnava, Slovak University of Technology, Trnava, SLOVAK REPUBLIC, e-mail: jaromira.vanova@stuba.sk, 1 E-mail: marta.kucerova@stuba.sk 2
Summary: Continuous improvement is an important factor by which competitiveness is influenced in whole enterprises. The article is focused on improvements in the field of quality management. In research project VEGA No. 1/0229/08 Perspectives of quality management development in coherence with requirements of Slovak republic market we deal with eight quality management principles in praxis. Principle of continuous improvement is one of the quality management principles. Following our research we investigated some differences in its use in various industry sectors in Slovakia. Keywords: quality management, improvement, methods for improvement.

1. INTRODUCTION
Each enterprise with a quality management system is responsible for application of continuous quality improvement through enhancement of processes and activities in whole production cycle. As a quality improvement are understood all activities which lead to a new level of performance regarding employees, processes, products and management. Principle of continuous improvement is one of the quality management principles. Following our research we investigated some differences in its use in various industry sectors in Slovakia. Within first part of our research project we detected some important aspects that will be the objectives of our research issues in future. Continuous improvement is an important factor by which competitiveness is influenced in whole enterprises. Therefore it is a necessary to find out possibilities for quality improvement of processes as a prevention and use more proactive approach, not only solve problems. [3]

2. IMPROVEMENT OF PROCESSES
Improvement of processes is continual analyzing, searching, realizing steps to improve and achieve higher performance of processes. All activities in the company we can divide in the two groups: maintenance and improvement. Activities which is use for maintenance are used in the present for achieve current performance. Improvement activities are focused on upgrade current performance. [4] Maintenance and improvement activities are connected. We must retain performance on the current level we also have to find new ways, new technologies and more effective machines etc. In the modern companies works have in the job description both of these activities. The balance of this to parts has to reflected hierarchy of the company. Top managers have to use their time for improvement activities. On the other hand we can expected, that workers use their working time for maintenance activities. The external environment is changing and also the company is still in change process and company processes have to improve as well.

975

2.1. Applying of continual improvement of quality management basis in the Slovak business practice Project VEGA Perspectives of quality management development in coherence with requirements of Slovak republic market considers research and analysis of actual situation in theoretical knowledge about quality management and assumed trends of theory development according with demand and needs of market. One of most important areas of the quality management is continuous improvement. It is continuous process show organization improves its performance of manufacturing and non- manufacturing processes, it is important part how to achieve competitiveness and it should be a goal of each organization. [3] In the first phase of the project has been realized research through questionnaire about actual situation in applying principles of quality management in enterprises and comparison how are fulfilled some requirements in several industry sectors in Slovakia. Questionnaire has been filled by 124 Slovak enterprises, which can be organized in 3 main industry groups: 35 % automotive industry, 35% machine industry, 30% other industry. First part of questionnaire identifies which activities in enterprise are focused on continuous quality improvement, how enterprises understand continuous quality improvement in praxis and some differences in enterprises. One of the questions was: What does it mean the continuous improvement for this enterprise? (How do you understand continuous quality improvement in your enterprise) Results are represented in figure No. 1. 52% of organization answered that continuous quality improvement means improvement of competitiveness and better position on market for organization. Only 15 % of respondents answered that continuous quality improvement means better effectiveness of quality management system and only 10 % of respondents answered that continuous quality improvement means cost reduction for variance in production. We didnt find out significant differences in results for enterprises of automotive industry, machine industry or other industry.

What does it mean the continuous improvement for this enterprise?

10% 3%

2% 5%

10% 3% 15%

52%

1. Improvement of competitivness and better position on market 2. Enhacement of quality management system effectivness 3. Systematic detect of w eak side in processes 4. Improvement in capality of processes 5. Better parameters of products 6. Improvemnet of skills and know ldege of employees 7. Low er cost for bad quality production 8. Without answ er

Figure 1: Results of research about the quality improvement in praxis Other important question in our questionnaire was about forms of improvement used in enterprises. From results of research it is evident that, there are some differences in application of forms or methods for quality improvement in praxis. Results are represented in figure No. 2 . We can see that 40% of firms in machine industry and in segment other industry use Kaizen, but only 29 % of automotive industry. In automotive industry is most used Global 8D Process, almost by 35 % of respondents and less used Six sigma.

976

Forms of quality improvement used in praxis (in %)

4040 37 29 25 23 35

16 10 4 0 4 1 0 3 2 1212 8 6 11 3 4 12 9 5

14 10 6 8 3 8

er in g

ba l8 D

gm a

tio n

W V

K ai ze

R ee ng in e

Si x

total

automotive industry

machine industry

ko

m bi na

Si

lo

other industry

Figure 2: Results about forms of quality improvement used in praxis Other question in our questionnaire was: Are realized some projects focused on proactive improvement in enterprise? From answers of respondents we suppose that this approach is not applied in Slovak industry enterprises enough, because 77% of respondents answered that these projects are not realized yet or they dont know. Most of activities for improvement have character of correction or preventive actions. One of the reasons of this research results could be that a term proactive improvement is not enough known in Slovak enterprises.
Education/training of employees about procedures,methods and tools of quality improvement (in %)
43 37 35 34 23 18 16 18 16 16 17 7 5 0
rtm en t ag er es n

17 16 6 9 11 2 10

14 6 9 3 2 3 7

m pl oy ee s.

te ch ni ci a

pl oy e

an

at

al le m

tra in ed

de pa

al ity

of e

ca te d/

of Q

pl oz ee s

ed u

all enterprises

em

automotive industry

machien industry

ot he r

no t

gr ou ps

other industry

Figure 3: Results about training of employees about procedures, methods and tools of quality improvement

977

w ith

qu

ou t

an s

we rs

al l

ot he

Reasons of this situation are insufficient knowledge and proficiency of employees in area of progressive methods for improvement. Most of respondents answered that about methods, procedures and tools for quality improvement are educated / trained all employees, but also in many organizations are educated only some chosen employees.(figure No. 3). Are employees systematically educated / trained about procedures, methods and tools for quality improvement? In automotive industry 43% of respondents answered that they are systematically educated/ trained all employees. We supposed that reasons could be strict requirements from technical specification ISO/TS16949 Quality management systems [1] - Particular requirements for the application of ISO 9001:2000 for automotive production and relevant service part organizations, which is valid also in area of continuous improvement for enterprises of automotive industry. This specification for automotive industry is enhanced in sphere of activities such as permanent improvement of proceses, improvement of production process, problem solving, emphasis on failure prevention, influence of corrective activities etc.

3. CONCLUSION
Continuous improvement should be seen as main aim of any organization. In this regard, it is necessary to develop creative work environment for employees and to decide on ways of improvement by using internal and external audits. There is no single model for how to use and tie each other different types of improvement activities. Each company adjusts its own improvement system to concrete specific conditions. Positive effects of quality improvement are reflected especcialy in profit of enterprise. Techniques of quality improvement should be implemented in all organisation structures of enterprise. The paper is a part of research project VEGA No. 1/0229/08 Perspectives of quality management development in coherence with requirements of Slovak republic market.

REFERENCES
[1] ISO TS 16949 Quality management systems - Particular requirements for the application of ISO 9001:2000 for automotive production and relevant service part organizations [2] STN EN ISO 9004:2000 Quality management systems Guidelines for performance improvements. STN, Bratislava, 2001 [3] Paulov, I., Mkva, M.: Princpy komplexnho manarstva kvality a ich aplikcia na Slovensku. Principles of total quality management and their application in Slovakia. In: Kvalita. - ISSN 1335-9231. - Ro. 15, . 1 (2007), s. 39-44 [4] http://www.ipaslovakia.sk/slovnik/view.aspx?id_s=170

978

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ECOLOGICAL MANAGEMENT IN THE FUNCTION OF IMPROVING THE ENVIRONMENT

Rade Varagi1, Mirsada Badi2 , Rade Bioanin2, Milica Varagi3 Center for Strategic Research for National Safety of Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA 2 The State University of Novi Pazar, Novi Pazar, SERBIA, e-mail: rbiocanin@np.ac.rs 3 Grading company Poega, Pozega, SERBIA, e-mail: gring@ptt.rs
1

Summary: Developing the skills for perceiving the environment is reduced to developing intellectual possibilities of the pupils and proper assessment of vulnerability. Microenvironment, family, collective, organization, institution and etc. all contribute to the proper creation of ecological value system. It takes only a more versatile and scientific look at the value system of the young, and their needs and ways of looking at the problems of endangering the environment, so that they could be engaged in its protection and improvement. Environment, eco-education and sustainable development management cannot be observed separately, but an integral approach that is the foundation of every kind of development is necessary. Modern management system is based on permanent business process advancement along with application of Quality Management System and Environmental Management System in accordance with Sustainable development. Changes in knowledge dynamic during the time bring to faster and faster changes and development of different concepts is scientifictechnological progress. The main addition of this paper is in the phase of identification of aspects through process approach, where a completely new method is initialized of influences. This is I, the most important phase of definition of current stage in implementation of standards JUS ISO 14000. The aim of this paper is to oversee safety conditions and way of transmitting pollutions from eventual polluted work environment into life environment and to suggest optimal measures for eco-safety improvement, according to legal regulative and international recommendations. In this paper indicated on global impacts of tourism towards the environment, and shown dependence economic success from environmental quality. The tasks of ecological management are provide conservation and maintenance of environment with planning and coordination of actions realization. Key words: Environment, Pollutions, Ecological management, Eco-safety, Sustainable Development.

1. INTRODUCTION
The arsenal of the worlds most urgent problems includes the pollution of both the working and living environment, the wearing out of natural resources, demographic boom, urban chaos, enormous disharmony in the production and distribution of goods and services, etc. Environmental sustainability implies the preservation of natural treasure, before all. It is necessary to have in mind that the level of renewable materials consumption, both water and energy resources, does not exceed the framework in which the natural systems can compensate for all that has been exploited, so that the level of non-(renewable) recourses consumption does not exceed the allowed framework. Ecology is very hard to classify as other, more precise sciences, like mathematics or biology. In the beginning of 20th century, the scientists from various disciplines have been gradually facing the problems whose solution required a synthesis of responses from two, or even three different sciences. Prior to that, chemists have exclusively dealt with chemistry, biologists with biology, and physicists with physics. In the early 60s, famous American biologist, Rachel Carson, has written a revolutionary book The Silent Spring. The central theme of this book was a fierce critique of the DDT pesticide use, which has caused various mutations in numerous flora and fauna. This book has a large number of copies sold and it has woken up the environmental awareness, consequently. In short, ecology was born in the 20th century, although it can be said that ecological approach to problems has existed far before that.

979

Environment, eco-education and sustainable development management cannot be observed separately, but an integral approach that is the foundation of every kind of development is necessary. Environmental management becomes a significant priority of almost every destination (state, region, local self-government, business system). Principles of sustainable development are accepted on a global level (UN), European Union (EU) and national level. They need to be implemented at all the levels, from global, through national, to local. Countries from the region have adopted almost all the duties from documents that refer to sustainable development, and they have particularly ratificated i.e. signed the relevant conventions (Kyoto, Aarhus, Espoo, Helsinki and many others). On the other hand, modern challenges, risks and threats, which are transactional and transterritorial by their nature, they demand a global response from international and national community, which represents the contribution to European fighting spirit and preservation of peace. The mission of ecological paradigm implies the establishment of harmony between man and nature through the radical changes in the current value system and transformation of anthropocentric awareness and ethics into ecocentric forms and content of the teacher plans and programs at all the levels of education. Traditional concept of development, focused on the production of material goods and external exploitation of natural resources, has come to its very end. Stimulating it further is absurd, since the benefits of it become smaller and the consequences of the degradation of nature grow bigger. The environment is the area in which life goes on, in which a man works and lives and satisfies his needs. In order to realize the concept of sustainable community, i.e. to secure the future and prevent the planetary catastrophe, which is the product of risk society, it is necessary to perform a deep transformation of all the fields that constitute the foundation of the social pattern of today. We are the witnesses of growing environmental changes caused by human activity. All of that reflects adversely on people, on their health, as well as the health of animals and plants. Environmental protection increasingly preoccupies our and world public. Knowledge and awareness of natural resources imposes many questions concerning the possibility of survival of the human species that becomes larger in number. The boundaries of growth become increasingly evident in irretrievable degradation of water, mineral resources, fertile soil, clean air and enormous creation of hazardous waste. For a long time, man is not the hero of unequal contest with elementary natural phenomena. We need to be familiar with all the adversities, and to fight them, within the framework of eco-safety.

Figure 1: The Eko-Energy Pyramid

2. THE REQUIREMENTS OF ECOLOGICAL MANAGEMENT

Natural areas encompass a wide range of environments and support a rich diversity of flora and fauna. From its tidal marshes of the coast to its boreal forests of the mountains, Virginia has been described as an ecological crossroads of national significance. Virginia's Department of Conservation and Recreation (DCR) acquires, dedicates and manages natural areas of statewide significance. The Natural Area Preserve System focuses on preserving lands so that rare natural communities and species may flourish. In addition, DCR advises other levels of government and private owners about managing natural areas. Following acquisition, DCR faces the even greater challenge of natural area stewardship. Stewardship is the long-term management of land to maintain its natural resources and inherent natural beauty. DCR stewardship is a combination of property and ecological

980

management. On any natural area preserve, one may find staff and volunteers searching for rare plants, posting boundary signs, repairing trails or studying hydrology. Ecological management slowly but surely becomes a profession and it is a very significant factor of each business system, where they see their better position in the market. Competitive companies are trying to organize eco-management as better as possible, because they know that consumers expect a better relationship towards ecology. Ecological management is focused on maintaining and enhancing the natural values of land to conserve biological diversity. Land protection alone, however, does little to preserve the character of a natural area if impacts such as the introduction of invasive alien plants, or hydrologic disturbances are not also addressed. With continuing alteration of the land by human activity, many ecosystems have become fragmented or reduced to isolated islands surrounded by agricultural fields or developed areas. Ecological management is the key to successful stewardship and can be sub- divided into five general catagories: conservation planning, restoration, prescribed management, research and monitoring. Sustainable development is not only a material assumption of business systems and todays generation survival, but an ethical issue of defending civilization honor in terms of global, regional and national pollution of work and living environment. In fact, the sustainable development implies the balance between the consumption of resources and the ability of natural systems to satisfy the needs of todays and future generations. In other words, the sustainable development represents the development that does not lead to deterioration and exhaustion of natural resources, which makes the development possible and admissible. Such a growth is conditioned and followed by the development of eco-awareness about the need for preservation and improvement of the environment that contributes to the sustainable economic development. National Security Strategy, as a comprehensive and sustainable program in contemporary conditions should provide the unique basis for engaging the intellectual, spiritual and material potentials of a community, with the cooperation and successful functioning of foreign and domestic policies and the security from all the forms of armed and unarmed threatening. The one who is not able to predict the problems and changes on the global, regional and domestic level effectively, in the physiognomy of modern conflicts, will not be able to grade the security system successfully. Ecological education has a duty to create awareness, primarily with the young people, about the necessity of a healthy, ecologically clean environment, which is appropriate and worthy of men, about the necessity of preserving the ecological balance in mans environment and about the dangers that arise from the violation of that balance. Ecological awareness is not spontaneously created, by itself, but in the process of communication and education. Acquiring knowledge on the environmental protection is the most direct factor of formation and development of ecological awareness, i.e. there is no ecological awareness without ecological education. Sources of air pollution are numerous and they can be natural (volcanic eruptions, forest fires, storms, floods, earthquakes) and manmade (destructions in wars, NHB crashes, terrorism). More important man-made sources of air pollution are: motor vehicles, industry, power plants, heating, waste materials combustion, etc. Many factors affect the life of man and their behaviour in the environment. They are either permanent or occasional, they are dynamic and their number is not finite. Man adapts and through his activity contributes to the encouragement of those who create a desirable environment and act positively, and thwarts those who act negatively. Particularly important factor of social assumptions for successful development of ecological awareness and culture is the existence of an adequate system of education for the protection from ecological disturbances. It is not treated merely as the field that refers to the component of a completely educated personality, but it is realized through educational fields. Environmental protection has become a case study at a small number of faculties, as an interdisciplinary seminar or social ecology. Socialization theory of personality is based on the needs of qualities, which enable the ecological action in living environment. Those qualities are information, knowledge, attitudes towards the environment, a willingness for engaging, helping the others, etc. Ecological awareness is manifested as knowledge of values, the factors that represent a threat and ways to protect from it. In addition, it also includes mans conviction that he is affected by that threat and that he needs to take care of his living environment and act appropriately, in accordance with his knowledge and habits. Teacher-professor appears as an important factor in the realization of objectives and tasks of ecological education: he selects the content of curriculum, evaluates ecological aspects of the curriculum, organizes and manages the process of learning, forms attitudes and habits of the students, organizes and carries out extracurricular activities, writes scientific papers and directly influences the personality of the pupil or student by his actions and authority.

981

Figure 2: Sources of environmental pollution Press, television, radio and other means of mass media are engaged in the field of informing and activating the young in environmental protection. In that way, the informal ecological education is achieved. Ecological education is very significant in learning about these processes and preventive action, which is oftenly the subject of discussion at numerous international conferences. The necessity of determining international and interdisciplinary program of ecological education is indicated at those conferences. In that sense, the UN Conference on the Human Environment, held in Stockholm 1972, is of a particular significance. At this conference, the state of the environment on the global level has been problematized for the first time, predictions and requirements for establishing particular programs, to which all the OUN members should adhere to, have been presented. The fact that means of mass media are spreading educational information about the need for protection and improvement of the environment in order to provide the development of a man in every aspect is also very significant.

Figure 3: Sustainable development

3. ENDANGERED SUSTAINLABLE DEVELOPMENT

Organisations are increasingly under pressure from environmental regulation, decreasing margins and shortages of certain resources. Combined with the growing sustainability awareness of customers these are important drivers for companies to reduce the environmental impacts of their operations. As a result the importance of environmental management has significantly increased. Environmental management has become an integrative part of business management because it ensures regulatory compliance and efficient management of energy, water and other resources. Another challenge in environmental management is the increasing complexity: performance indicator systems as well as the data acquisition and evaluation process with all its linked workflows are covering more and more business areas.

982

Humanity is, as it appears, motionless concerning this issue. All the people seem to believe that it is not their problem, but the problem of somebody else. People, we need to understand that we are all together in this and that we need to fight with all the powers to stop the destruction of our blue planet! Somebody can be very influential in this struggle, somebody less influential, but each struggle is positive and it is important that it can help in any way. Let us start from something essential, let us stop making wild dumps of every stream, throwing garbage everywhere, and let us stop the uncontrolled deforestation and destruction of green areas. For thousands of years, man and nature harmoniously developed and prospered together. The nature helped the man to survive, offered him its treasure the resources and was rather generous to him. The balance existed for centuries. Due to a great and rapid progress of the science and technology, in the race for progress and profit, the man has forgotten the nature and he has been taking away from her much more than he gave back for decades, and does it with such a pace that is impossible for the nature to cope with. For the last years, it has been reminding us of it through various phenomenon such as greenhouse gases, continuous reduction of ozone layer, uncontrolled deforestation, and pollution of water, soil and climate changes. Those are only a few of the numerous problems with which nature is faced in its struggle with mans insatiable desire for profit. It is obvious that many countries of the world, as well as many organizations, tried to stop and reduce the degradation of nature and environment by adopting various draconian punishments a long time ago. The effect of those punishments is not enough and hence they have they have stated educating the population and adopting legal regulations with draconian punishments for those who degrade and pollute the environment. Sustainable development. Until now, it has not represented a definition that would satisfy all the tastes, but it is important to agree on the basic assumptions of sustainable development. Sustainable development aims to create a better world, balancing the social, economic and environmental factors. Protection and improvement of human environment represents a significant global problem of modern humanity. Its solving is closely related to the other global problems of our civilization, such as: rational and complex use of natural resources, maintaining active demographic policy and development and improvement of international cooperation in the field of scientific researches and use of the achievements of scientific-technical revolution. Solving of these problems has demonstrated that they require a scientific approach, which requires their sociological consideration and identification of their issuing in particular societies. Because of these findings, a special sociology-social ecology has also been developed and, in almost every country, in one way or another, a series of social and public actions are aimed at identification and solving ecological problems. As it is well known, life on planet Earth is possible due to the existence of natural greenhouse gases, primarily water vapor (H2O), carbon dioxide (CO2) and gases such as methane (CH4), nitric oxide (H2O) and tropospheric ozone (O3), allowing the solar energy to penetrate to the ground and fall on it as light, but afterwards to remain in the atmosphere as infrared heat. The absence of greenhouse gases would lower the temperature of our planet for about 33C. Contemporary challenges, risks and threats, which are transterritorial by their nature, require a global response from the international and national community, which represents a contribution to European security and preservation of life on planet Earth. Table 1: General representation of the pollutants

4.

Industry Metal Chemical Food Textile Construction Oil processing

Typical pollutants CO, CO2, NOx, SO2 , paints, varnishes, heavy metals and dust. CO, CO2, NOx, SO2, H2S, hydrocarbons, fumes, solvents and dust. CO, CO2, NOx, SO2, H2S, NH4 and dust. CO, CO2, NOx, SO2 , paints, heavy metals and dust. CO, CO2, NOx, SO2 , paints, varnishes, heavy metals, hydrocarbons and dust. CO, CO2, NOx, SO2, hydrocarbons.

ELEMENTS OF ECO-EDUCATION
Mission of ecological paradigm implies establishing the harmony between human being and nature through the radical changes in the current value system and transformation of anthropocentric awareness and ethics into ecocentric forms and content of teacher plans and programs at all the levels of education. Traditional concept of development, focused on the production of material goods and external exploitation of natural resources, has come to its very end. Stimulating it further is absurd, since the benefits of it become smaller and the consequences of the degradation of nature grow bigger. The environment is the area in which life goes on, in which a man works and lives and

983

satisfies his needs. In order to realize the concept of sustainable community, i.e. to secure the future and prevent the planetary catastrophe, which is the product of risk society, it is necessary to perform a deep transformation of all the fields that constitute the foundation of the social pattern of today. Recognizing the real need of the men for the achievements of environmental prognostic, opens a serious issue of innovating the existing teacher plans and programs, in the sense of introducing ecological contents as independent cases, i.e. modules inserted in the programs of particular subjects. Ambivalent nature of a man is a constant source of ecological indiscipline, and hence the ecological education should start from pre-school activities and be completed by graduating, with constant improvement, leaving free space and open possibilities for the application of ecological achievements. The feeling for introducing ecological criteria when making decisions is created through timely and organized ecological education. Ecological education has a duty to create awareness, primarily with the young people, about the necessity of a healthy, ecologically clean environment, which is appropriate and worthy of men, about the necessity of preserving the ecological balance in mans environment and about the dangers that arise from the violation of that balance. In the countries of the region, the monitoring is conducted in order to obtain reliable and high-quality information on the current state and pollution of the environment, which would serve to: - define protection measures, - identify the pollutant, - make adequate and timely decisions, - establish information system, - react in case of accidents, - inform the public. Ecological management is the science and professional practice of managing biological resources and conserving biodiversity. - Does the ivory trade ban help or threaten the conservation of elephants? - How should pasture woodland be grazed to maintain the diversity of its plant community? - Will better catchment management halt the decline of Scottish salmon stocks? - When does the exploitation of biological resources provide incentives for their conservation? - Do irrigation dams improve the livelihoods of the rural poor, or threaten them by destroying natural aquatic resources upon which many depend for their protein supply? These are just some of the questions ecological managers have to address. Tackling such questions requires thorough knowledge of ecological principles as well as the institutional and economic dimensions of resource management, and practical tools for analyzing management problems and evaluating possible solutions. The option aims to provide students with the knowledge and skills to become effective ecological managers. The option is global in scope, covering ecological management in developed and less developed countries, but focuses on addressing management problems at a local and regional scale. This reflects the premise that solutions to eological management problems must be tailored to local ecological, institutional and socioeconomic conditions. From the aspect of environmental protection, it is necessary to answer the question of which factors contribute to the creation of ecologically responsible personality, as well as how much and when they do it. How the individual sees the contribution of particular factors in the realization of objectives and tasks, which are set as requirements and needs for preserving healthy living environment, is very important. The factors of ecological education can be external (environmental) and internal (personality factors). The factors that are linked to the achievement in ecological education and creation of ecological awareness and culture are particularly interesting. They include the family, preschool institution, school, extracurricular forms of leisure activities, peers etc. Family is an important factor in education of the young, which is characterized by the following: more complex, more intensive, deeper relationships between the members and more intimate relationships (trust and free expression of feelings and thoughts). It creates the awareness of the relationship of individuals to the environment and its values and to the protection of natural and urban space. Generally, the family acts positively in terms of ecological values of its members. The crucial method of action is personal example, in which case the children learn spontaneously. Along with the family, peer group is also a significant factor of the social awareness of the young. In some cases, it has a greater influence than the family and school. They have identical views in evaluation of the social position of the generation and the identical attitude towards the values and protection of the environment. School is a fundamental factor of education. With determined programs, it provides the greatest possibilities in learning process and in creating awareness with the pupils. It provides significant possibilities for acquiring particular knowledge, developing particular habits, for development of ecological awareness, by establishing a caring and responsible attitude towards the nature and its values. Teacher is allowed to gather and concretize the content of curriculums. They ensure for the students to be informed about the relationship between man and environment, in an unobtrusive manner.

984

Figure 4: Elements of sustainable development management From the aspect of methodology, contemporary ecological education on relevant concepts is represented by concrete and obvious examples. Methods of solving the eco-problems have deep roots in natural, technical and medical sciences. Accordingly, environmental protection is a multidisciplinary science, which is the most efficiently educated by the methods of processing and program instructions in modern didactical practice. Many factors affect the life of man and their behaviour in the environment. They are either permanent or occasional, they are dynamic and their number is not finite. Man adapts and through his activity contributes to the encouragement of those who create a desirable environment and act positively, and thwarts those who act negatively. Developing the skills for perceiving the environment is reduced to developing intellectual possibilities of the pupils and proper assessment of vulnerability. Process of education has to be a permanent feature in the formation of ecological value orientation of the pupils and students. Microenvironment, family, collective, organization, institution etc, also contribute to the proper creation of ecological value system. However, the ecological education of the young starts within the family and in preschool education, the school becomes irreplaceable for this purpose. It only takes a more comprehensible and scientific look at the value system of the young, and also at their needs and attitudes towards the problems of endangering the environment, in order to engage them in the process of protecting and improving it. Socialization theory of personality is based on the needs of qualities, which enable the ecological action in living environment. Those qualities are information, knowledge, attitudes towards the environment, a willingness for engaging, helping the others, etc. Ecological awareness is manifested as knowledge of values, the factors that represent a threat and ways to protect from it. In addition, it also includes mans conviction that he is affected by that threat and that he needs to take care of his living environment and act appropriately, in accordance with his knowledge and habits. Current ecological situation has demonstrated that knowledge in the field of ecology is not at the required level. That knowledge does not mean much by itself, but it has an enormous educational potential. Right to environmental protection is one natural and inalienable right, typical for man and other living beings. That right is linked to life, health and integrity of the man, to its biological and spiritual survival and development. Without this right, we can freely say that all the other rights are reduced to nothing. To provide a healthy environment is a precondition for his biological survival and development. On the basis of ecological legislation, there were numerous formal and informal organizations developed, whose activity needed to be legally regulated responsibilities, rights and obligations had to be established, which is the imperative for coordinated work of both national and international entities in environmental protection. Formal organizations include all the institutions, councils, associations, committees and agencies that are formed at the national, regional and international level, while informal organizing is expressed in the field of ecological movements that are linked at national and international level in order to pressure the authorities by using various forms of political pressure (protests, demonstrations and propaganda), and all that with the aim of taking the ecological measures to protect the Green planet.

985

Figure 5: Licence holder monitoring environment

5. THE CONCEPT OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Monitoring is a multi-faceted tool used by natural area stewards to assess the ecological condition of an area. It is used to document the trends of natural communities and rare species. It can also help determine if the natural processes essential to their continued existence are occurring. Monitoring is not limited to assessing only the condition of plant and animal species. Air, water, land, and pollution are other components of the environment that must be monitored for effective resource management. Monitoring activities also inform natural area stewards if management activities have been successful in fulfilling their goals. Information obtained through monitoring can be used to further refine and enhance current management practices. Ecological education is devised in such a manner that it can practically be divided into two levels. Firstly, noninstitutional, which is acquired in the family as a primary social group and through mass media, and secondly institutional, which is linked to the education system of society, ranging from preschool, through elementary and secondary school, to higher and University education. Ecological education starts in the family, and within it the personality is educated for acquiring and adopting elementary ecological awareness. Mass communications, primarily television, radio, film, Internet, press, journals, books, exhibitions and publications have a significant role of a microwave bomb in the creation of ecological awareness and realization of informal, non-institutional ecological education. Television shows Living with the Nature, Green Oasis, Man and his Environment, Borrowed Planet, Green Ring and others have caused a notable interest with a large number of citizens. Such and similar TV shows should be larger in number, so that the citizens, primarily the young people, could acquire and improve their ecological awareness in a relatively easy way, and thus contribute to preservation and development of their eco-system. Table 2: Lessons Learned: Linear Themes Initial Context Existing Capacity Timing & Readiness Political Will Partnerships Environmental Values Potential Catalysts Coordination Inciting Issues Articulated Planning Needs Multistakeholder Dialogue Vision for Sustainability Potential Outcomes Ecological Monitoring Volunteers & Champions Adaptive Management Political Influence Measurement of Indicators Broader Outcomes Knowledge Sosial Networks Improved Governance Demand-driven Science Sustainabillity Models

986

As it was mentioned before, the objective of eco-education is that the man preserves and improves the working and living environment, so that it could become a constituent part of his life, work and survival. In this situation, the review of issues concerning international and national law, as existential ones for human survival and development, is necessary. There are particular tasks that result from this objective, and their systematization is shown in the following sequence: - eco-education is a new segment of the system, which increasingly acquires the right of citizenship; - acquisition of habits and knowledge about the necessity of preservation and protection of the environment is achieved by institutional and non-institutional eco-education; - eco-education starts in the circle of the family, peers, from preschool, through elementary and secondary school, to University education; - through the reform of education system, eco-education needs to be systematized, in accordance with the needs of EU and the world; - legal system has an international dimension in the environmental protection, and they have to be linked in the framework of international character; - numerous organizations and institutions that influence the authorities, by political pressures and propaganda, to take the necessary measures for eco-protection have developed themselves on the basis of sociological, economic and legal system of protection; - economic transitional laws (Law on Enterprises, Law on Foreign Investment) do not regulate sufficiently the obligations and responsibilities of the participants in economic growth in terms of environmental protection (technology transfer). - the significance of ecology in the EU and the world, in the field of environmental protection, has to be taken seriously; - National Security Strategy, as a comprehensive program, should provide the unique basis for the engagement of intellectual and all other potential of a community. However, we cannot be satisfied with the way of implementing the internationally accepted obligations and especially not with the tardiness of their implementation in economic practice. There is more than one reason for this. The most important reason is the education system, which is not appropriately adapted, i.e. poor ecoeducation of the pupils, students and stuff in the field of ecological management. Through the concept of ecological management, we come to the necessary symbiosis of key categories and criteria according to the 3E concept (energetics, economy and ecology), because they are all turned to developmental objectives of humanity in terms of limited natural resources.

Picture 6: A Human Health Adaptive Management Model

6. CONCLUSIONS
All the EU countries have adopted the principles of sustainable development as their strategic commitment in the system of eco-security. A significant part of legislation, especially in the field of environmental protection, refers to the implementation by the principles of sustainable development, health and the quality of life. Approaching the EU membership represents a national priority, which will require enormous legal, institutional and economic investments. Transposition and implementation of EU legislation in all sectors, especially in the field of

987

environmental protection, require not only the investments, but also the training of staff and professional cooperation with institutions. High-quality information transfer from the field of protection has to be provided, in order for the particular measures and activities to be appropriate. Relevant publications should be presented and available at national and international conferences. Competent institutions and scientific staff have to provide the information flow, corresponding literature and the transfer of knowledge concerning this problematics. If the scientific staff, who create and make the basis for development and sustainable development of civilization, does not seriously and responsibly take take the risks that are apocalyptically looming over this world and if they do not seriously warn the ones who realize the development, then the civilization will find itself before its disappearance very soon. Starting with its objectives in the sphere of creating ecological awareness, as the basis for regulating the relationship towards the nature, education should contribute to the affirmation and making the preservation and improvement of human environment a significant category in the value system of modern society. Ecological education and establishment of the way of thinking begins in the earliest youth, and hence the educational organizations have a very important role at all the levels of knowledge acquisition (preschool, elementary, secondary and tertiary education). High-quality information transfer from the field of protection has to be provided, so that the particular measures and activities become appropriate. Relevant publications should be presented and available at national and international conferences. Competent institutions and scientific staff have to provide the information flow, the corresponding literature and the transfer of knowledge concerning this problematics.

REFERENCES
[1] Allen, D. T.: Applications of life-cycle assessment. In: Environmental Life-Cycle Assessment. Edited by M. A. Curran. New York (USA): McGraw-Hill, 1996. [2] Blackburn, D., Holster, G. Hutchinson encyclopedia of modern technology. Oxford, 1987. [3] Tietenberg, T. Environmental and natural resource economics. Reading, MA, itd: Addison-Wesley, 2000. [4] Bioanin R., Djuki V. Strateki menadment u odbrani i zatiti od NHB udesa, IX Medjunarodna konferencija " SymOrg 2004", 06-10. 06. 2004. Zlatibor. [5] Amidi B., Bioanin R. Nuklearni udesi i zatita, Nacionalna nauna konferencija sa meunarodnim ueem "ETRAN-2005", 05-10. jun 2005. Budva. [6] European School of Radiological Protection, Course book on Training Course onRadiation Protection in Medicine, Berlin, Germany, 1995. [7] Perovi M. Menadment - informatika - kvalitet , CIM Centar - Kragujevac, 1998. [8] Bioanin R., Obradovi M., Hyrlova J. Multicriteria optimizationof ekclogical-safety in transport of dangerous cargo, VIII Simpozijum SAVREMENE TEHNOLOGIJE I PRIVREDNI RAZVOJ, 23-24. oktobar 2009. Leskovac. [9] Poul Buch Jensen Introduction to the ISO 14000 Family of Environmental Management Standards [10] Demuth H., Beale M., Neural Network Toolbox - ForUse with Matlab, The MathWorks, 2000. [11] Kosti A. Inenjering zatite ivotne sredine, UNIVERZITET U BEOGRADU, 2007. [12] Stajkovac J., Jordovi B., Amidi B. Ekoloki menadment u sistemu kvaliteta, XXXIII Simpozijum o operacionim istraivanjima-SYM-OP-IS 2006. 03-06. oktobar 2006. Banja Koviljaa. [13] Holden A.: Managing the environmental impacts of tourism, Parson Education Ltd., 2006.,Harlow, Engleska [14] Bioanin R., Mihajlovi M. Ekoloka bezbjednost u postmodernom ambijentu i odluivanje u vanrednimm situacijama, II KONGRES EKOLOGIJA, ZDRAVLJE, RAD, SPORT, 26-27. 06. 2009. Banja Luka. [15] Bioanin R. Energetska efikasnost i ivotna sredina u meunarodnoj ekonomskoj konstelaciji, Centar za strateka istraivanja nacionalne bezbednosti, Beograd, 2009. [16] Bioanin R., Aleksi S. Quantification of influences on environment and threat to qualiy of life, International Simposium ENERGETIC EFFICIENCY-2008, 27-29. 11. 2008. Vrnjaka Banja. [17] Badi M. Koncept 3E efikasnosti u meunarodnoj konstelaciji odrivog razvoja, Nauni skup ENERGETSKE TEHNOLOGIJE - 2010, 20-22.maja 2010. Vranjaka Banja. [18] Bioanin R. Quantification of influences on environment in quality system exellence, VIII Balkan Conference on Operational research (BALCOR-2007), 14-17. September 2007. Belgrade-Zlatibor. [19] Poul Buch Jensen Introduction to the ISO 14000 Family of Environmental Management Standards [20] ISO 14004:2004., Environmental management systems General guidelines on principles systems and support techniques, ISO 2004. [21] Kozomara R. , Sari L., Deronji M. Bioanin R. Communication competence in the system of quality the educational of environment, 1st International Conference SCIENCE AND HIGHER EDUCATION IN FUNCTION OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT - SED 2008, 17 - 19. September 2008. Uice, Serbia.

988

[22] Jovanovi P., Dubonji R., Pokrajac S. Industrijski menadment,. Fakultet organizacionih nauka Univerziteta u Beogradu, Beograd,1988. [23] Presentation: Ecological Monitoring and Assessment Network (EMAN), 2009. [24] Book reviews IMPOUNDED RIVERS. Perspectives for ecologicalmanagement by G.E.Petts; published 1984 by John Wiley,Baffins Lane, Chichester, P019 1UD, UK; 326 pp.

989

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

QUALITY MANAGEMENT WITH SPECIAL ATTENTION TO STANDARDS-ISO 9001 AND ISO 14000
Aleksandra Vidovi
Pan-European University Apeiron, Banja Luka, BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA, E-mail: aleksandra.v@apeiron-uni.eu

Summary: The overall quality of business organization is kind of a company whose main goal is user satisfaction with the achievement of quality in all areas of activity of the organization, which are accompanied by duly executed processes and eliminating the appearance of mistake. Impact on standards in daily activities is often invisible. We all believe that the product that we bought to match the quality, it will be in compliance with all rules and standards, which means that it will meet the presumptive criteria of security, reliability, efficiency, and respond to, but given the price. This paper is based on quality management and review of the standards ISO 9001 and ISO 14000. Keywords: Standards, ISO standards, ISO 9001, ISO 14000, Environmental Protection.

1. INTRODUCTION
ISO - International Organization for Standardization is the world federation of national institutions for standardization. Work on the preparation of international standards is carried out through ISO technical committees. Each member of ISO, when has interest in subject one of the technical committee, is entitled to delegate representatives to that committee. Interest in maintaining and improving environmental quality and protection of human health is growing and so organizations of all sizes are increasingly devoting attention to potential environmental impacts of its activities, products and services. System of Environmental Management (Environmental Management System - EMS) business model moves the organization toward sustainable development. System approach to management allows: a) compliance with laws and regulations in the field of environmental protection b) demands of stakeholders c) competitive advantage and opportunity getting into new markets d) reducing costs and risks in the environment, as well as other benefits. Organization and management often believe that the costs of environmental protection are important to business organizations. ISO 14000 is a series of international standards for environmental management tj.za environmental management system. This is the first series of standards that allows organizations from around the world to work to protect the environment and measure their performance based on internationally accepted criteria19.

2. QUALITY MANAGEMENT STANDARDS ISO 9001 SERIES

Success in the implementation of TQM in the company caused by the existence of eight basic elements: ethics, integrity, trust, training, teamwork, leadership, recognition and communication. The first version of ISO 9000 series of standards issued in 1987 and partially changed 1994. Besides the parties involved in the classic quality systems (ISO 9000), this method requires continuous involvement and continuous education of all stakeholders of the process. Central activity is the quality in the broadest sense, as a basic strategy. ISO 9001 is an internationally recognized standard that provides guidelines for establishing, improving and maintaining effective management systems in an organization. Increased production and better utilization of production capacity and other economic resources and on that basis, the increase of GDP of the country is one of the most important and largest issues of our economic policy, and

990

business policies of each company. In order to achieve this, it is necessary, above all, significant involvement of the Serbian economy into international economic flows, through increasing the volume of foreign trade, especially by increasing the volume of exports of goods, services and technologies. This, however, is not easy to accomplish and achieve, because the world market may just go with quality products and services and modern technology, made by international or regional standards and technical norms or standards and norms highly developed countries. Moreover, the foreign buyer does not require a quality product and service, but also a serious manufacturer that was verified in the market and has been certified by international quality system standards ISO 9001. The world is very dynamic and rapid process of construction and acceptance of international standards of quality, which quality has become one of the most important factor in world trade. The number of issued certificates of quality system ISO 9001 and ISO 14000 reaches about 200 thousand, and soon is expected to be the largest volume of world trade conducted between the certified companies. The regulations state, the potential member states must introduce into their legislation, the different forms of the intensity of commitment to their implementation. These regulations include: 1) The provisions, 2) of the Directive, 3) Decision and 4) Recommendations and opinions. Provisions, all potential members have to apply directly and unchanged rather than national laws, so it does not need their introduction appear to give the national legal system. Directives are considered binding on member states and require them to include in national legislation, since they are directly applicable. Decisions are considered legally binding for the institutions to which they pertain, because the way they solve specific and concrete issue. Recommendations and opinions are not legal texts that are considered binding because it is through them only provide guidance given to institutions and member states Requests are something that must be met if we want to get a certificate. The recommendations relate to what they should do in order to meet ISO 9001 requirements, and the suggestions are related to what could be made to fit within the scope of the ISO 9001 standard. There are five basic groups of requirements and guidelines, as follows: 1. System requirements and guidelines 2. Control requirements and guidelines 3. Requirements and Guidelines for insurance resources 4. Requirements and guidelines for the implementation of the product 5. Requirements and guidelines for improvement, measurement and analysis

3. ENVIRONMENT
All procedures in the natural surroundings are undesirable in nature. Affect the environment, according to the accepted goals of development, technical and economic criteria of exhaustion of resources and limit pollution, and environmental and sanitary criteria on the parameters nature of permitted changes can be considered positive and negative. Differs to: 1. 1st Environment - natural environment (the entire area of the planet) 2. 2nd Living environment - the environment (part of the environment where one lives) 3. 3rd Working environment - working environment (part of the environment-workplace, indoor or outdoor space).

4. QUALITY MANAGEMENT AND ISO 14000 SERIES OF STANDARDS

For the development of environmental management is also important initiative of the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC - International Chamber of Commerce). This chamber was still 1974. The published code of environmental protection in nine points, ICC was founded in 1986 and established the Office of the Commission for the Environment, and the early nineties and the World Council of Industry for the environment with about 90 organizations from 21 countries, and in 1995 formed the World Business Council for Sustainable Development. In addition to the standard ISO 9000, for the development of ISO 14000 series of standards served the English standard BS 7750 based on this standard 1994 year. Made a proposal to ISO 14001 standards witch are used since 1996. In our country, was released in 1997. JUS ISO 14001 as ISO 14000 standards are international standards and today applied throughout the world.

991

Environment is the environment in which the organization works, including air, water, land, natural resources, flora, fauna, humans and their mutual relationships (ISO 14001). The quality of the environment affect the way we use materials, products and energy, and manufacturing processes, products of services that come from these processes. Due to the lack of effective control of these influences leads to loss of natural resources, loss of plant and animal species and habitats, degradation of air quality, water and land. The consequences of such environmental pollution are most pronounced in the most developed industrial regions of the world, such as the U.S., Western Europe, and in recent decades in many Asian and Latin American countries. Table 1: ISO 14000 series includes the following standards and standards proposals 14001:2004 EMS Specifications with directives for use 14002 14004 14010 14011 14012 14013/15 14020 14021 14022 14023 14024 14031 14032 14040 14041 14042 14043 14049 14050 14061 EMS Directives about special doers which operate on small and middle company EMS, Basic directives about principles, systems and assistant techniques Directives for the ecologic audit. Basic principles of the ecologic audit Directives for the ecologic audit-Audit procedure PART 1:- Audit of system of management protection of lively centre Directives for the ecologic audit-qualification criteria for ecologic audit. Directives for the ecologic audit-Audit Programs, revision and evaluation The ecologic mark/labels and declaration-Basic principles Ecologic marks and declaration-Ecologic marking-Only declaration ecologic claims/rights-terms definitions Ecologic marks and declarations-Ecologic claim/rights-self declaration of ecologic claims-symbols The ecologic marking-self declaration of ecologic claims/rightsmethodologies of testing and verification Ecologic marks and declaration-Ecologic marking Tip1-Leading principles and procedure Evaluation of ecologic effect (performances)-Directive Technical account Type III-Ecologic management-Evaluations of ecologic effect-Studies of case which illustrate usage of ISO 14031 Evaluation of life cycle-Principles and framework activities Evaluation of life cycle Analysis of equipment of life cycle Evaluation of life cycle of Evaluations of influences Evaluation of life cycle-Interpretations Technical account Type III-Ecologic management-Evaluations of life cycleExamples uses ISO 14041 Terminology and definitions of ecologic management Technical account Type III-Directive for the help forestry organizations in use the ISO 14001 and ISOS 14004

The main objective of quality assurance standards ISO 9000 is to satisfy customer's demands, the efficiency of business processes and continuous improvement. The aim of ISO 14001 standards are just that and more, because under ''customers'' requirements include legal and other statutory requirements. This standard of ''continuous improvement'' becomes an internal goal of the organization. This means that organizations with certified quality system according to ISO 9000 standards, the system can be used as the basis for the development of environmental management and the introduction of standards ISO 14001. Establishing a quality system to ISO 9001 organization puts its processes under control to achieve the specified requirements for a product or service, but not placed under the control of discharges of various types of emissions to air, discharges into water, solid waste, consumption of natural resources and the like that does not contain requirements related to the impacts of production processes on the environment, but is subject to standard ISO 14001.

992

5. THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

It is based on the following elements: 1. Making a strategic position, 2. Defining the vision and policies of environmental protection, 3. Development plan policy implementation / development opportunities and support mechanisms, 4. Implementation of policies, 5. Monitoring and measuring performance, 6. Review and improvement of EMS. As with quality management system and this system has Demingov PDCA-circle (plan-do-check-act). Plan is the planning phase of EMS, the phase of the DO element implementation and operation, the CHECK phase element of internal checks and corrective measures and phase of ACT (forward) is an element of review and improvement of EMS. ISO 14001, ISO 9001 and use some basic systems such as: - Policy Management - Training - Control of documents and records - Operations control Internal review - Statistical techniques - Corrective and preventive measures Although the established system of quality is not a prerequisite for the establishment of EMS, perceived to be an organization that has been certified ISO 9001 should put much more effort and time to implement ISO certification 14001.Uspostavljanjem and EMS organizations realize the benefits of several types, such as increase profits, operational benefits, marketing benefits and social benefits.

6. CONCLUSION
14 000 series standards have an important role in international agreements and negotiations of GATT, NAFTA, WTO, where it seeks to establish links between trade and environmental protection. If you look at the overall situation, we will see that few companies have certified the EMS. This will be a major problem for export to the European Union and beyond. In addition there is a possibility that the international financial institutions like the IMF, the World Bank and the EU development funds for the lending or investing require evidence of commitment to environmental protection and introduced standard ISO 14001.

REFERENCES
[1] uki Veljko, Fundamentals of Environmental Protection, Pan-European university Apeiron, Banja Luka, 2007 [2] Hodoli Janko, Sklenarova Marina, Economic performance of management system [3] Niin Nevenka, Quality Management, Pan-European university Apeiron, Banja Luka, 2007 [4] Pei Vladan, ISO standards in the eco-system security, and scientific-technical conference with international eco-dump Risks and eco-security in the post-modern environment participation 2010, Novi Pazar, Serbia [5] kori Andrea, Environmental Management ISO 14000, Available at: www:fly.srk.fer.hr/~sevo/fer/ergonomija/zahtjevi_i_smjernice

993

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

IMPROVEMENT OF INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

Iliya S. Zhelezarov
Technical University of Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: izhel@tugab.bg

Summary: The present paper deals with the opportunities for improving one of the most frequently applied integrated management systems, namely these ones based on the requirements of the following standards: ISO 9001:2008 Quality management systems, ISO 14001:2004 Environmental management systems and OHSAS 18001:2007 Occupational health and safety management. Keywords: integrated management system, improvement, quality, environment, safety under occupation

1. INTRODUCTION
Application of the known PDCA quality management cycle (Fig.1) not only in the standards about quality management systems from the series of ISO 9000:2000 and more particularly the actual version with requirements ISO 9001:2008, but into practice in all standards about management systems (i.e.: ISO 14001:2004 Environmental management systems, OHSAS 18001:2007 Occupational health and safety management, ISO/IEC 27001:2005 Information security management systems, ISO/IEC 20000-1:2005 Service management, etc.) affords an opportunity to be developed, implemented and to function effectively integrated management systems, which fulfil the requirements of two, three or more standards simultaneously [1].

Act Act
How will it improve next time? ?

Plan Plan
What must it do? ? How does do? ? it

Check Do Do Check It is done this one, Do the things happen in

which was planned. conformity with the plan? , ?

Figure 1: PDCA management cycle

994

2. IMPROVEMENT OF INTEGRATED MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

The most frequently application into practice finds the integrated systems, which fulfil the requirements of standards about quality management (ISO 9001), environment management (ISO 14001) as well management of health and safety under occupation (OHSAS 18001). The standards are developed in a way providing a possibility to be minimized the number of used documents (for example, the procedures about management of documents, management of reserves, internal audits, correcting actions, preventive actions, etc. are common to different standards). In Fig.2 an integrated system for management of quality, environment and safety under occupation is presented schematically.

Figure 2: Integrated system for management of quality, environment and safety under occupation The approach for improving the integrated system, as it is suggested in the PDCA cycle and in the standards with requirements (ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001), includes the utilization of correcting and preventive actions. The correcting actions about improvement in order to be realized efficaciously and effectively, it is advisable statistical methods to be applied. From the other point of view, the processes and the documentation of integrated system have to be optimized preliminarily. In Fig.3 the conformance matrix with the requirements of three standards is presented [6]. The documentation of integrated system includes the following documents which fulfil the requirements of three standards: Manual of integrated management system; Politics about quality, environment, health and safety under occupation; Documented procedures required by the standards ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001: - management of documents; - management of reserves; - internal audits; - correcting actions; - preventive actions; - training, awareness, competence, etc. Documented procedures fulfilling the requirements of ISO 9001:2008 standards, linked by interrelations with customers, projection and development, purchase, production, measuring means, non-conformable products, etc. [4]; Documented procedures fulfilling the requirements of ISO 14001:2004 standard, connected with identification and assessment of the environment aspects, legal and other requirements about the environment, readiness for extraordinary situations and reaction, operative management, monitoring of the environment, etc. [5]; Documented procedures fulfilling the requirements of OHSAS 18001:2007 standard, connected with identification of dangers, risk assessment and determination of measures, requirements of normative acts and other requirements with regard to the health and safety under occupation, readiness for extraordinary situations and capability for reaction, operative management of the processes and the activities, investigation of incidents, monitoring of the effectiveness, etc. [6].

995

Section 1. 2. 3. 4.

OHSAS 18001:2007 Introduction Scope of application References Terms and definitions Elements of systems for health and safe conditions of labour General requirements Politics about health and safe conditions of labour Planning Planning of the identification of dangers and mastery of risks Legal and other requirements Objectives Programme for health and safe conditions of labour Introduction and functioning Structure and responsibility Training, awareness and competence Consultation and communication

Section 1. 2. 3. 4.

EN ISO 14001:2004 Introduction Scope of application Reference Definitions Requirements of environment management system General requirements Politics about environment Planning Aspects of the environment

Section 0. 1. 2. 3. 4.

EN ISO 9001:2008 Introduction Object and scope of application Reference Terms and definitions Quality management system

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.3.1

4.1. 4.2. 4.2. 4.3.1

4.1. 5.1. 5.4. 7.2.1

General requirements Politics about quality. Improvement Planning Determination of the requirements about product Quality objectives Planning of quality management system Formation of product Management responsibility Competence, awareness and training Internal exchange of information and exchange of information with the customers Requirements towards the documentation Management of documents Formation of product Management of nonconformable product Measurement, analysis and improvement Observation and measurement (Satisfaction of the customer); Observation and measurement of processes and products; Analysis of data Management of nonconformable product. Correcting actions. Preventive actions. Management of records Internal audit Management review

4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.4. 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3

4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.4. 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3

Legal and other requirements General and concrete objectives Programme(s) for environment management Implementation and functioning Structure and responsibility Training, awareness and competence Exchange of information

7.2.1 5.4.1 5.4.2 7. 5. 8.2.2 5.2. 7.2.3

4.4.4

Documentation

4.4.4

4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7

Management of documents and data Operative management Extraordinary situations and capability for reaction Verification and correcting action Measurement and monitoring of the effectiveness

4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7

Documentation of environment management system Management of documents Operative management Readiness about extraordinary situations and capability for reaction Verification and correcting action Monitoring and measurement

4.2.

4.2.3 7. 8.3.

4.5. 4.5.1

4.5. 4.5.1

8. 7.6.

8.2.

4.5.2

Accidents, incidents, correcting and preventive actions Records and management of records Audit Management review

4.5.2

Non-conformity, correcting action and preventive action

8.3. 8.5.2 8.5.3 4.2.4 8.2.2 5.6.

4.5.3 4.5.4 4.6.

4.5.3 4.5.4 4.6.

Records Audit of environment management system Management review

Figure 3: Conformance matrix with the requirements of standards ISO 9001:2008, ISO 14001:2004 and OHSAS 18001:2007 In Fig.4 the most frequently used statistical methods and techniques for registration, systematization and analysis of data are presented, which are applied about improvement of integrated management system at the time of realization of product life cycle [2, 3].

996

Inquiring of the customer about their satisfaction Just in time Quality circles Statistical sample control Self-control Quality audits Management of the measuring means Check sheet Pareto diagram Cause-and-effect diagram Analysis of reliability and 6

Benchmarking Inquiring the customers about their requirements QFD and house of quality Planning of the experiment FMEA (D) Projecting of the tolerances

Marketing Supply, , Assembly and Service Design and Development

FMEA (P) Poka-Yoke Cause-and-effect diagram Quality circles

Control

Planning of the Processes

Evaluation of suppliers Statistical accepting control (according to quantitative and alternative sign) Just in time

Histogram Check sheet Pareto diagram Cause-and-effect diagram Process flow diagram Scatter plot Control chart and precontrol Capability of processes Cp and machines Cm Neural network

Production (Realizing of ( the Product) )

Purchasing

Figure 4: Statistical methods about impovement of integrated management system By applying the various types of statistical methods, a possibility is assured for the organization management to manage and to improve the processes owing to objective data as well as in case of necessity to undertake concrete correcting actions about improvement of the integrated management system.

3. CONCLUSION
For effective functioning of integrated management system corresponding with the requirements of standards ISO 9001, ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001, it is necessary correcting and preventive actions about improvement of the system to be applied which are based on objective data registered, systematized and analyzed by means of up-to-date statistical methods.

REFERENCES
[1] Ivanov, I. N., I. S. Zhelezarov: Quality management (Part II) Basic instruments and statistical methods for quality management, University publishing house V.Aprilov, Gabrovo, 1999, p.202 (in Bulgarian). [2] Zhelezarov, I. S.: Building elements of system for measuring and managing the quality of training, 30.HIPNEF 2006, Vrnjacka Banja, Serbia and Montenegro, 2006, pp.489-494. [3] Zhelezarova, D., G. Rakovska, S. Petrov: Realizing and assessing the quality of internship program about students in university career center, 7th International Conference RaDMI 2007, 16-20 September 2007, Belgrade, Serbia, pp.531-538. [4] ISO 9001: Quality management systems Requirements, ISO, Geneva, 2008, p.27. [5] ISO 14001: Environmental management systems Requirements with guidance for use, ISO, Geneva, 2004, p.23. [6] OHSAS 18001: Occupational health and safety management Requirements, BSI, London, 2007, p.26.

997

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

THE ECONOMIC JUSTIFICATION OF SUBSTITUTION OF CONVENTIONAL METHOD OF LUBRICATION WITH SYSTEMS FOR AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION
1

Aleksandar Aonja1, Danilo Miki2

NS-Termomontaa, 18 Stevana Mokranjca street, Novi Sad, SERBIA, e-mail: aleksandar.asonja@gmail.com 2 Tehnical school, 3 Vuka Karadjia street, Gornji Milanovac, SERBIA, e-mail: vtsm@nadlanu.com

Summary: The task of every well-organized function in the maintenance of lubrication, which is to achieve lower costs to workers in the maintenance and lubricants and spare parts. The conventional (manual) lubrications of tribomechanical system components are still present, despite the great efforts and poor ergonomic conditions for acting of lubrication, but in recent years is much more marked appreciable progress of improving lubrication by introducing of automatic lubrication systems in almost all industries throughout the world. Inadequate lubrication are now the most common reasons for early termination tribomechanical components, which can certainly cause further damage to the machines themselves. Much of the damage can be avoided by choosing an appropriate method of automatic lubrication systems, choosing the appropriate dosage and method of lubricants for specific conditions of exploitation. The aim of this study was to indicate the justification of applying automatic lubrication system tribomechanical components from an economic points of view. Keywords: the economic justification, the conventional method of lubrication, the automatic lubrication systems, the lubricant.

1. INTRODUCTION
The development of tribology and its application in machine elements and systems in general, began in early 70's of last century with a suddenly increase in exploitation mode machines. The development of technical progress required an increase strength, speed and load, to maximize the productivity of labor. Mechanical systems and components are working in sharper models of labor. At this stage, and time distance, began with attention to the causes of failure, and sometimes to the sudden shortening of their projected labor resources [5]. The nature of tribology processes is natural and inevitable is that mechanical elements hackney out during operation. In some cases, the problem of increasing resistance to abrasion was solved by selecting the higher hardness of steel. For a long time steel is considered, by analogy, resistance to hackney out, and was later replaced by lubricant materials, thus reducing hackney out and tear problems long solved by selecting the appropriate lubricant. From the aspect of improving lubrication in recent years more and more emphasis is on the constant increase in materials and lubricants performance. The lubrication can be defined as a procedure by which introduces a layer of lubricant to reduce friction and detrition of materials between the two surfaces, which are in relative motion [7]. This process includes the following activities: the permanently cleaning of lubricants, the checking the amount of lubricants, refilling lubricants if is necesarry, replacement of lubricants, and others. In general, for lubricating rolling bearing there are used lubricants in the following scale: grease (oil + condenser) in 90 %, Fig. 1, oil (mineral, synthetic and vegetable) at 9 % and other lubricants to 1 % (MoS2 graffiti, sliding lacquer, silver, etc.).

999

Figure 1: The percentage show the spent lubricant for lubrication of roller bearings [2] The period behind us, marked by various cases of failure components of hydraulic system due to the use of poor quality oils. The reason for this was to some extent and economic nature, with a variety of compensation the company resorted to taking oil and lubricants: no certificates, and untrusted manufacturers and counterfeiters, not knowing that it can make the millions of losings. That they had used improperly oil, they find out after laboratory tests carried out, in which they were forced because of rapid successive failures of hydraulic components in which they used the same oil. The working accuracy, high capacity and well-being are very important features for successful operation of any machine. Primary specialty machines in the industry perform benefits that characterized work in harsh conditions. At the same time, the demands that are placed before them in terms of reliability are very high, prompting some producers of lubricants on the market today to offer a wide range of innovative, reliable and environmentally sustainable solutions lubrication. Choosing the proper lubricant, in the first place, depends on load, speed, temperature, and conditions in the work environment. The appropriate lubricant with the right lubrication system ensures consistency and dispensing lubricants are best for a particular use. The demission of machines will be avoided and the cost of system maintenance will be drastically reduced.

2. THE SYSTEMS FOR AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION

On the market, today, can be find a large number of automatic lubrication systems in one or more points in almost all industries throughout the world. Customer requirements of this equipment are mainly concentrated on the quality of management, reliability, maximum productivity in the most difficult conditions, because the slightest error can cause delays in the machinery and the high cost of repairs. The main feature of this systems is the lubricant and on the places hard to reach, and with hermetically sealing of the lubricant points prevents the pollution caused by dust, moisture and other contaminants, ensuring that adequate sealing lubricant between rough surfaces and engine components. And all this in order to increase the service life of tribomechanical components and to reduce maintenance costs. Frequent delays in production caused by inadequate lubrication can be largely prevented by applying some of the units for the automatic lubrication system. The lubrication systems constantly and reliable dosing appropriate lubricant and quantity to the required system components. At the same time, it protects against corrosion and external contamination, and with the selection of proper lubricants extend service life of machinery and equipment. Lifetime lubricated components, which will be extended and maintenance costs reduced. On systems such as fans, motors, pumps, compressors, blowers conveyors and other hard to reach places, these systems ensure continuous, without maintenance, longtime lubrication for the period from 1 to 24 months. The most common are now in: steel making, mining, energy, petrochemical industry, automobile industry, food industry and so on. [6]. The fact that 1 g of excess oil or grease which is spill out, as a result of improper lubrication or incompetence, can pollute the water sank, indicating only to the environmental aspect of the seriousness of the process of lubrication. Properly designed lubrication systems can greatly contribute to reduce these losses and preserve our environment and economic resources. In Fig. 2 was shown the economic aspect of an automatic lubrication savings compared to manual, for the period of lubrication of about ~ 1 year for 100 lubrication points. Savings lubrication for the specified period ranging up to 25 %, which means that the investment cost of installing such systems can be compensated through annual maintenance [9].

1000

Figure 2 The automatic lubrication savings compared to manual on an annual basis points to 100 lubrication points The compared amounts of lubricant distributed over time at manual and automatic lubrication are shown in Fig. 3. Dashed lines in Fig. 3 represent the amount of lubricant that is distributed over time by automatic lubrication, and a full line represent amount of lubricants of manual entries. The vertical lines in Fig. 3 represent the moments when the lubricant manually entered in the slot. The vertical and slantwise lines together show the trend of movement lubricants that are entered by manual lubrication.

Figure 3 The comparison of the lubricant distribution over time of automatic with manual lubrication Characteristically for this type of lubrication, which can be seen from Fig. 3, the lubrication exclusively related to the subjective assessment of lubrication doer. In addition to its signal that lubrication is carried out in the sufficiently rate, is penetrating lubricant (grease) in certain areas. In difference to this kind of dosage lubricants, automatic lubrication systems are set up at any time of dosing a constant quantity of lubricant, so that the losses in the process of lubrication insignificant [6, 7].

3. THE MATERIALS AND WORK METHODS

In several examples, with determinate number of lubrication place, a simple calculation will show the economic validity of automatic lubrication system compared to conventional manual lubricant. In details will be given possible advantages of this form of lubrication, in which they will be compared and analyzed two ways of lubrication in the following examples: the lubrication of 60 lubricating points at an altitude of more than 3m and the lubrication of 80 lubricating points, on the belt conveyor bearings.

1001

An example of delay due to inadequate lubrication with the stated cost of production will prove on replace of roller bearings located at a stone crusher.

4. THE RESEARCH RESULTS OF ECONOMIC VALIDITY OF APPLICATION OF AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION

The automatic lubrication systems meet the highest standards, both in terms of safety and health at work of employees and in terms of environmental protection. The advantages of automatic lubrication systems to the manual are: a constant dose over time a certain amount of fresh lubricant, the reduction of maintenance costs of machinery and mechanisms, the efficient and safe work of machines and mechanisms avoidness of sudden delay and cancellation, the increase of the safety of all employees in the maintenance, savings in time and energy and so on. The requirements of customers of such equipment are concentrated mainly on the quality of management, reliability and maximum productivity in the most difficult working conditions, because the slightest error can cause delays of machines and mechanisms and the high cost of repairs. With these systems, lubrication is achieved by significantly reducing wear of rotating elements that are in direct contact. They lubricate even the areas hard to reach and prevents pollution caused by dust, moisture and other contaminants. Thus providing a lubricant between the sealing surfaces which are in relative motion between each other [4, 8]. Delays in production caused by improper lubrication can largely be prevented by applying some of the units of automatic lubrication systems [5]. 4.1 The economic aspect of lubrication of lubricating points at an altitude For the purpose of performing manual lubrication on 60 lubricating points, which are located at an altitude of more than 3 meters, lubrication should be performed every 2 weeks. Two workers are need to perform this lubrication and they will be perform lubrication each day 2 to 4 hours. This means that the total time required for the lubrication of the year amounted 8 h x 26 days=208 h/year. It should be noted that this is the effective working time, this time in the case of more precise calculations should be added to the preliminary final time for a break and others required time. In contrast to manual lubrication, for example, using "Perma CLASSIC" units for automatic lubrication to 60 lubricating points, it is necessary to replace the oiler only once in 12 months. Two workers on the replacement of these units should be work 4 h/year, relatively, a total of 8 h/year, etc. Fig. 4. The advantages of automatic lubrication in the case of lubrication of 60 lubricating points which are located at an altitude higher than 3 m in relation to manual lubrication are the savings in time for the lubrication performance of 96 % per annual, relatively, savings of about 200 h/year, etc. Fig. 4. The risk of injury of lubrication doer at lubrication performance at an altitudes higher than 3 m, with an automatic lubrication (replacement cartridge alignment) for this case would amount to 3.85 %. 4.2. The economic aspects of lubrication belt conveyors The principle of work of individual machines and mechanisms that are lubricated is such that there are high at an altitude and in hard to reach places. The performance of lubrication at an altitude has a high risk of injury of lubrication doer, and the fact is that in practice all of these points lubricated with minor precautions. For example, the lubrication of bearings conveyor belt is very dangerous! There is a substantial risk of a fall of workers who perform lubrication! Automatic lubrication can significantly affect the reduction of workplace injuries of employees who perform lubrication and up to 90 % [9]. For the purpose of performing manual lubrication at 80 lubricating points on the bearings of belt conveyers should be performed lubrication every week, which still means 52 times per year relatively, in 4 minutes for each lubricating point. Total spent time required to hand lubricant amounted to in this case 277 h/year, etc. Fig. 4. In contrast to manual lubrication, for example, with the use of "Perma" CLASSIC" units for automatic lubrication on 80 lubricating points which are on the bearings of belt conveyers, it is necessary every 3 months (or 4 times a year) to replace the cartridges. Time required to replace these units is about 4 minutes for each lubricating point, while the total time spent to replace these units amounted to 21 h/year, etc. Fig. 4.

1002

Figure 4 Examples of the economic justification of automatic lubrication compared to manual The advantages of automatic lubrication for bearing lubrication case of belt conveyors to 80 lubricating points in relation to manual lubrication are the savings in time for the lubrication performance of over 92 % per annual relatively, savings of about 256 h/year, etc. Fig. 4. In this case, the delays and costs of belt conveyers will be avoid only for lubrication of 256 h x 40 /h =10,240 / year. The risk of injury lubrication doer on performance lubrication of bearings on belt conveyors, with automatic lubrication (replacement cartridge alignment) for this case would amount to 1.92 %. 4.3. The economic aspects of the replacement bearings to the crusher An example of the economic aspect will be shown on the example of changing the bearings (spherical roller bearing, D=340 mm, n=1.000 o/min) at the stone crushers. Strong vibrations, a considerable presence of dust with ambient temperature variations, lack of lubricant for permanent congestion of supply lubricants etc. affect the appearance of constant delay (58 h delay +1.500 fixed costs). In this case, the total minimum cost of downtime amounting to (5 h x 375 t/h x 10 /h) =18,750 to that value should be added and less money in circulation to 1,500 . An alternative to avoid all this would be a choice of "STAR Permian SF05 lubricant" for roller bearings, while four would be used with LC-lubricator unit M120, with the period of discharge, 2 x 1 month and 2 x 3 month.

5. CONCLUSION
The use of automated lubrication systems for more lubricating points on examples of roller bearings and other tribomechanical pair, can reduce the risk of accidents at work of employees from 9698 %, while significantly reducing the appearance of: waste materials, create dust, noise creation, etc. In the more studied examples of effective working hours spent to perform an automatic lubrication and comparing them with manual lubrication, it was concluded that they can make substantial savings in time required to perform an automatic lubrication for 9296 %, which indicates that the maintenance workers in these moments we can engage in other more necessary areas.

6. REFERENCES
[1] Adamovi, .: Tribologija i podmazivanje, Tehniki fakultet "Mihajlo Pupin", Zrenjanin, 2006. [2] Aonja, A.: Automatska podmazivanja kotrljajnih leajeva, "Tehnika Dijagnostika", Drutvo za energetsku efikasnost Bosne i Hercegovine, Vol.1, No.3-4, 31-37, Banja Luka, 2009. [3] Aonja, A.: Oteenje kotrljajnih leaja na poljoprivrednim mainama, Traktori i pogonske maine, Jugoslovensko drutvo za pogonske maine traktore i odravanje, Vol.10, No.4, 120-125, Novi Sad, 2005.

1003

[4] Aonja, A., Adamovi, .: Dijagnostika stanja vratila primenom metode konanih elemenata, asopis "Menadment znanja", Drutvo za tehniku dijagnostiku Srbije, Vol.5, No.1-2, 53-59, Smederevo, 2010. [5] Aonja, A., Adamovi, .: The Economic Justification Of The Automatic Lubrication Using, 9th International research/expert conference Trends in the development of machinery and Associated Technology, TMT10-116, Mediterranean Cruise, 2010. [6] Aonja, A., Adamovi .: Odravanje kotrljajnih leajeva, Duga knjiga, Sremski Karlovci, 2010. [7] Aonja, A., Gligori, R.: Examination of Renown Motor Oil in Exploatation at Agricultural Tractors of 60 kW power, PSU-UNS International Conference on Engineering and Environment-ICCE-200T, Paper No.T3-1.6, pp.1-4, Novi Sad, 2005. [8] Aonja, A., Gligori, R., Kruni, V.: Tendencije razvoja kotrljajnih leajeva na poljoprivrednim mainama, asopis "Tehnika Dijagnostika", Drutvo za energetsku efikasnost Bosne i Hercegovine, Vol.1, No.1-2, 5 10, Banja Luka, 2009. [9] Gavaerts, R.: The World of Automatic Lubrication PERMA, 2009. [10] www.bionetdoo.com

1004

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DETERMINING THE STRENGTH OF OPENING OF CARDBOARD BOXES

1

Nadja Arabadzhieva 1, Nikolai Petrishki 2, Nikolai Shopov1

University of food technologies, Plovdiv , BULGARIA, e-mail: bumbalova_79@abv.bg 2 Technical University - Plovdiv, "Tzanko Dustabanov" , Plovdiv , BULGARIA

Summary: The present work illustrates an analysis of the problems connected with the cardboard boxes opening. In order to solve those issues, it is necessary to define correctly the opening forces and the factors that influence them. New methods of approaching and experimental equipment have been developed for that purpose. With their help it is possible to determine the strength of opening through simulation of different package defects, to define different working regimes of the technical equipment that produces the packages, the packaging equipment that uses them and the conditions of opening. Keywords: carton packaging, strength of opening, carton erection.

1. INTRODUCTION
In most of the cases the cardboard boxes opening by the supplying devices of the packaging machines causes problems. These issues could be provoked by incorrect functioning of the elements of the packaging machine, defects of the boxes that appeared at different stages of their production, transportation or preservation. To solve those problems it is necessary to be acknowledged with the process of box opening. An essential element of that process is the information on the actual force of opening as well as the factors that characterize it. The problems with the opening of folded cardboard boxes are due to certain defects of the packages that are caused by the packaging machines. One of the defects is the impossibility to open the boxes by the packaging equipment. That defect is due to either not enough depth of the corrugated lines or to bigger thickness and hardness of the cardboard. Another problem of the box supply is wedging of the case in the cartridge supplying device that is due to deformation of the case because of diversion from its acceptable dimensions, moisture or improper preservation and transportation. Due to inappropriate conservation of the cardboard boxes in storage we observe the so called warping, that is a reason for the difficult or impossible opening of the folded boxes by the packaging machines. Boxes moistening often leads to decrease of their solidity; it is followed by a transformation of the strength of their opening. During the opening cycle, the first point of interaction between the box surface and the packaging machine appears between the vacuum clutches and the upper part of the box surface. Certain authors study the machinematerial interaction already at the time of design and production of the packaging equipment [10]. The complex of non-linear properties of the packaging material is presented by parametric models. A software model has been created that presents the behavior of an unfolded box during its opening, considering the material properties, package design and machine system. Numerous authors [3,4] investigate the rigidity (hardness)of the box folding panels and their interaction with the package during folding. They calculate the moment of strength originating from the cardboard folding and define the force that is necessary to fold the cardboard boxes. The analytical model is developed and compared with the analysis numerical results with the help of ultimate elements. Description of the non-linear deformation of the cardboard box is accomplished, which contributes the modeling during the experimental study. In the literature [11] it is presented a method for folding the cardboard boxes by usage of fixations. It is also produced an algorithm for planning the movement that generates all operations (positions) during packages folding by its modeling as a multi-degree free robot-manipulator with curved down joints end and branching links. In [2] it is analyzed the mechanical behavior of packages put to static loading. The study uses non-linear analysis with

1005

finite elements that calculates material plasticity and big structural travels. The middle segment of a package is more rigid compare to the upper and lower segments, which explains the reason for the initially low rigidness of the package. Package material resistance to dislocation corrugated cardboard in different structural directions is described in [7], and its behavior to static loading in [9], where the finite elements method is used and the typical material loadings are simulated. It is developed a model based on finite elements [12], by which is explored the behavior of the package during the packaging operations. The model is applied to solve the problem with the boxes crushing during the box supply to the packaging machines. It is considered that the vacuum suction causes bending. In connection with that the exertion is experimentally measured. The created model successfully foresees the way of deformation of the cardboard package during its folding and the box increasing sizes in process of production. The model can be applied to investigation of the effects provoked by a change in the materials properties, package type or machine adjustments. Frequently used method for package testing, including such made of cardboard and corrugated cardboard, is the finite elements method. It allows creation of models and conditions for simulation of real loadings. As a result we receive information on the package behavior during exploitation storage, transportation, filling-up, etc. Similar resolutions connected with optimization of cardboard packages structure and their geometrical characteristics are described in studies [1, 5, 6, 8].

2. THEORY
The theoretical analysis studies the model (cardboard box case) as a four-section mechanism; see the kinematic diagram on fig.1. The operating section is section 1 and it is interesting to see the movement of the middle point of section 2 (the place of fixture of the vacuum gripper when opening the folded box by the supplying mechanism of the packaging machine). The presentation of a folded box, the process of its opening to the forming of a package with four-section mechanism and its working is comparatively simple. This type of mechanisms has been well-studied; it makes possible the creation of a model which characteristics for certain initial conditions can be explored. These can be geometrical sizes, time of opening, speed, acceleration, powers, etc.

a b Figure1: Mechanism of cardboard box opening: a kinematic diagram; b sequence of positions during the motion, performed at the box opening With the help of a proper software it is analyzed the position of the sections, speed, accelerations and the angle of power transition to the structure group.

1006

3. RESULTS AND ANALYSIS

Fig. 2 shows the function of the middle point position of section 2 that will be used to calculate the diversion of the applied point of the power necessary to open the package. Kinematic parameters of the point: function of the speed and function of the acceleration are presented in fig. 3 and 4.

Figure 2: Position function

Figure 3: Velocity function

Figure 4: Acceleration function

1007

Fig.5 shows the move of the angle of force transition depending on the position of section 1. The new values of the angle of force transition will be used in the force analysis of the proposed measure unit construction.

Figure 5: Transfer angle of the force With regard to executed inquiries of literature sources, analytical and numerical analyses of the processes of folded cardboard boxes opening, it is developed a construction of equipment for experimental definition of the opening force. That equipment gives the opportunity to simulate different conditions that accompany the process. We can study opening forces of different structure design of the package, moisture, deformation, etc.

6 7 8 5 9

4 working motion 3 2

1
Figure 6: Measure unit for determination of the opening force on the paperboard case

Description of the structure of the measure unit: The measure unit for determination of the opening force of cardboard boxes presented on fig. 6 includes the following basic elements: 1 leg to adjust the level; 2 measure unit arms; 3 electrical motor; 4 system for transforming rotation motion to linear actuator; 5 measuring equipment for force determination; 6 flexible element connecting the cardboard box with the force-measuring element; 7 cardboard box; 8 stand to attach the box; 9 system to determine the degree of deformation of the cardboard box. Description of the measure unit work: The tested box 7 is put on the surface of stand 8 by double-face scotch. In advance and depending on the needs of the study, the curve of the base surface is set. It can be convex or concave. It is also possible to set a complex curve convexity and concavity [13]. The setting of a concrete curve degree becomes possible with the help of

1008

system 9, the basis of which is a screw twosome. The flexible element 6 connects the box with the hook of the measuring system. Stand 8 is attached to the arms 2 by a linear motion module. Thus, stand 8 along with system 9 and the tested box 7 can move up and down, following precisely-determined trajectory. The motion is accomplished by a motor and a screw twosome. During rotor motion the linear module completes rectilinear movement. The pace of the linear module is determined by the dimensions of the box. The working motion of the measuring unit is downwards, i.e. the tested box opens when the stand goes down where the opening is a result of the immobility of the upper part of the box, secured by the flexible coupling in vertical position. The upper box wall, connected to the flexible bond, moves relaying in horizontal and vertical position. The motion is explained on fig.1a. In consequence of the tension effort of the flexible element, the force is transmitted to the measuring element 5. There is a system with display for direct reading of the force that generates at every moment as well as a system for force calculation depending on its motion and graphics draw up. This happens through a registration device (fig. 7). A diagram of the registration part of the measuring unit for determination of cardboard box opening force is seen on fig. 7. By that registration part the signal transmitted from the transformer force electrical signal amplifies to the necessary level, then it is measured and reported. The registration part consists of the following hardware and software modules: Hardware modules: PC configuration with Microsoft Windows XP; National Instruments (NI) data acquisition devices NI USB-6251 Software part: NI-DAQmxTM 8.9.5 driver software; Data Acquisition Toolbox 2.10 (MATLAB R2007b) for transition of measurements data from NI USB-6251 to PC; The information accumulation and the succeeding processing are accomplished by developed program modules in MATLAB R2007b program environment. NI USB-6251

USB

Tensometric scales

Figure 7: Registration section of the equipment

4. CONCLUSION
It is proposed and realized a construction of equipment to measure the opening force of folded boxes where the registration section presents the computer results for subsequent statistic processing. The accomplished kinematic analysis of the construction has determined that section 2 does relaying motion only that advantages the reading of the applied point of package opening force. It has been determined a linear dependence between the shifting of the angle of force transition in the structure group and the position of the initial section 1.

REFERENCES
[1] Arabadjieva N., S. Stefanov. Studding the differentiation of packaging paperboard. Proceedings of 76th scientific conference for young scientists, graduates and students, 12-13 .IV. 2010 art III. iev NUFT 2010. p. 82. [2] Beldie L., G. Sandberg L.: Paperboard packages exposed to static loads-finite element modeling and experiments, Journal Packaging Technology and Science, Issue 4, Volume 14, 2001, pp. 171-178. [3] Cannella F., Dai J. S.: Crease stiffness and panel compliance of carton folds and their integration in modeling. Part C: Journal of Mechanical Engineering Science, , Volume 220, Number 6/2006, pp. 847855. ISSN 0954-4062. [4] Dai J. S., and Cannella F.: Stiffness Characteristics of Carton Folds for Packaging. Journal of Mechanical Design, Issue 2, Vol. 130, 2008, (7 pages).

1009

[5] Gospodinov D., Hadjiiski W., S. Stefanov.: Analysis of stress state of corrugated board in the finite element method. Proceedings of 76th scientific conference for young scientists, graduates and students, 12-13 .IV. 2010 art III. iev NUFT 2010. p. 82. [6] Gospodinov D., Hadzhiyski V.: Using of contemporary methods for enginery analyze for optimization of corrugated paperboard packages. International scientific conference Food Science, Engineering and Technologies 2009 University of Food Technologies - Plovdiv, 23-24..2009, Scientific Works, Volume LVI, Issue 2, pp. 319-324. ISSN 0477-0250. [7] Hadzhiyski V., Stefanov St., Gospodinov D., Arabadzhieva N.: Study of stability of corrugated cardboard. Proceedings of University of Ruse Angel Kanchev- 2009, Volume 48, book 9, 2009, pp. 190-194.ISSN 1311-3321. [8] Hadzhiyski V., Stefanov St., Gospodinov D.: Stress analysis of the corrugated paperboard. International scientific conference Unitech Gabrovo 2009 20-21novembre 2009, pp. 75-78. ISSN 1313-230X. [9] Hadzhiyski V., Stefanov St.: Research the static loading of secondary packing from a corrugated cardboard. International scientific conference Unitech Gabrovo 200821-22..2008, pp. 58-61. ISSN 1313-230X. [10] Hicks B. J., Berry C., Mullineux G., McPherson C. J. and Medland A. J.: An energy-based approach for modeling the behavior of packaging material during processing. Journal of Mechanical Engineering, Issue Volume 218, Number 1/2004 , pp. 105-118. ISSN 0954-4062. [11] Lin L. , Jorge H. R.: Analysis and modeling of wicking through carton liquid packaging, Journal Analytica Chimica Acta, 552 (2005), pp. 218225. [12] Sirkett D. M., Hicks B. J., Berry C., Mullineux G., Medland A. J.: Finite element simulation of folding carton erection failure. Part C: Journal of Mechanical Engineering Science, Issue Volume 221, Number 7/2007 . pp. 753-767. ISSN 0954-4062 [13] Stefanov St., Arabadzhieva N.: Some trouble opening cartons of packaging machines. Plenary and invitation paper. In: 9th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry RaDMI 2009, Vrnjaka Banja, Serbia. September 2009. Proceedings Volume 2, Edited by Predrag Dai. pp. 1239-1243. ISBN 978-86-6075-008-4.

1010

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ANTIBACTERIAL RESISTANCE INVESTIGATION OF EMULSIONS USED FOR FORGING PRESS

Anatoly P. Avdeenko, Svetlana A. Konovalova, Evgeniy A. Avdeenko
Donbas State Engineering Academy (DSEA), Kramatorsk, UKRAINE, e-mail: chimist@dgma.donetsk.ua

Summary: The emulsions for the hydraulic systems of forging complexes with high antibacterial resistance and long operation life have been developed. It has been offered the emulsions on basis of emulsol SP-3 with antimicrobic additives: oxybenzoic acid, vasine or thymol. To increase the efficiency of antimicrobic additives it is necessary to add these additives in every six months and to aerate emulsion by air in every 3 months. Keywords: forging complexes, antibacterial resistance of emulsion, antimicrobic additives, oxybenzoic acid, vasine or thymol.

1. INTRODUCTION
Procedure analysis of unique forging presses has shown the lubricoolant on a basis of emulsol SP-3 works in adverse conditions. Lubricoolant temperature in forging processes is a little higher, than in industrial premises, reaches 50-55 oC and reduces in pump-and-accumulator stations a little. Such working conditions promote rapid proliferation of microorganisms in emulsion medium. But the operating life of emulsion in enclosed space should be not less than eighteen months. It should be noted the water, used at factories for emulsion preparation, has often higher hardness. For water softening it is usually used a soda, that also leads to water pollution by various ions. Among impurities there are carbonates and hydrocarbonates of calcium and magnesium, various sulphates and chlorides, ions of alkaline metals, iron, manganese etc. Increase of concentration of the minerals dissolved in a water leads to rapid proliferation of microorganisms and to equipment corrosion. Therefore it is necessary to carry out the water deionization, consisting of full or partial removal of ionic impurities from water, that is first and exclusively important stage of water preparation at plant.

2. EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION
We studied an influence of water hardness and ions of alkaline metals on emulsion rot. In laboratory we prepared the water with concentration of 2 + and Mg2 + salts 24 mgeqv/l. After follow-up dilution we received water with smaller content of ions 5 mgeqv/l. Hard water was partially softened with soda to 5 mgeqv/l. The obtained data are resulted in table 1. Table 1: Influence of ionic impurities on antibacterial resistance of emulsion Concentration of ionic impurities (mgeqv/l) 24 18 12 5 Antibacterial resistance of emulsion (days) 12 16 28 60 of emulsion 7,8 7,6 7,3 7,1 * Reduction of ionic impurities was obtained by softening of hard water with soda. 5* 10 9,2

Thus, for reduction of microbiological emulsion destruction the decrease of water hardness is necessary operation. However the use of chemical methods for this purpose is not possible. It is known that microbiological emulsion destruction has significant influence on operating life. The lubricoolants are affected

1011

approximately with 12 kinds of bacteria. The greatest danger is conditioned by sulphate-regenerating bacteria. Result of life activity of these bacteria is emulsion decomposition it is appeared a characteristic smell of hydrogen sulfide and of medium is reduced. Destructive action of microorganisms is the complex phenomenon depending on many factors. The life activity of bacteria grows at temperature rise and emulsion pollution during long work. Reproduction intensity of bacteria depends on medium . At , equal 7-9, development of bacteria proceeds especially intensively. At 9,6 and above the bacteria practically do not reproduce. As antimicrobic additives for lubricoolant it can be used alkylphenols, diatomic phenols, aromatic oxyacids, furacilinum, hexachlorophene, vasine, formacid 10, formacid 12, formalin and others. Our researches have shown that derivatives of alkylphenols have good bactericidal properties. The stability of emulsion with concentration of alkylphenols up to 0,01 % is more than 100 days. However it is necessary to notice these derivatives are poorly dissolved in water and so it is very hard to add these additives into the work emulsion. At the beginning it was necessary to prepare the alcoholic solutions of these components, and then to enter that in emulsion. The data about an influence of various modifiers on bactericidal stability of emulsion are cited in table 2. Table 2: Influence of various modifiers on bactericidal stability of emulsion on the basis of emulsol SP-3 Operating life of Work temperature*, Antimicrobic additives Concentration, mas. % emulsion before rotting (days) 10 37 Isopropylphenol 0,005 30 37 Ionol 0,005 25 37 Oxybenzoic acid 0,01 90 37 Oxybenzoic acid 0,1 37 > 120 Furacilinum 0,2 72 37 Hexachlorophene 0,1 85 37 0,8 37 > 120 Formacid 10 0,05 60 37 Formacid 12 0,07 65 37 Formalin 0,1 40 37 Thymol 0,05 37 > 120 * Work temperature 37 was used for acceleration of bacteria growth. How you can see from table 2 the hexachlorophene is quite appropriate but this compound is very toxicity and therefore it is not widely used at plants. Taking into account various factors, namely, low toxicity, good solubility, availability and effective bactericidal stability, we have chosen next additives: oxybenzoic acid, vasine and thymol. However, to increase the efficiency of these additives it is necessary to carry out emulsion aeration with air or ozone once in 3 months. Aeration with ozone gives more considerable effect, than aeration with air, however it is required the considerable investments. It is necessary to note also the antimicrobic additives should be additionally entered in work emulsion once in every six months in quantity 0,1 from initial concentration.

3. CONCLUSION
In result of this investigation we can recommend the emulsion on basis of emulsol SP-3 with antimicrobic additives: oxybenzoic acid, vasine or thymol as a working liquid for forging complexes. These emulsions work in the course of year without rotting. For prolongation of operation life of emulsion it is recommended to carry out aeration by air with 90-day periodicity and to add the antimicrobic additive with 6month periodicity.

1012

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

PROCESSABILITY INVESTIGATION OF SALTS OF ACID ALKYLPHOSPHATES ON BASIS OF FATTY ALCOHOLS

Anatoly P. Avdeenko, Svetlana A. Konovalova, Evgeniy A. Avdeenko
Donbas State Engineering Academy (DSEA), Kramatorsk, UKRAINE, e-mail: chimist@dgma.donetsk.ua

Summary: The sodium salts of acid alkylphosphates on a basis of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10-C20) which showed earlier good tribological properties were tested for toxicity and biological decomposition. Toxicity tests showed low-toxicity of this product. Biological decomposition tests permitted to define maximum-permissible concentration of additive in waste waters. The operational life of lubricoolant suitability on the basis of this product is 17 days at 15 oC. Keywords: additives for lubricoolants, Na-salts of acid alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10-C20), toxicity tests, low-toxic industrial compounds, biological disintegration tests, biologically soft surface-active substance.

1. INTRODUCTION
Earlier we investigated tribological properties of salts of acid alkylphosphates on the basis of higher fatty primary (PFA) and secondary (SFA) alcohols of various industrial fractions, their Na-salts (organophosphorus soaps) and triethanolammonium salts. The acid alkylphosphates of primary and secondary fatty alcohols are a mixtures of mono-(I) - and di(II)alkylphosphates of these alcohols: OH RO RO P + P OH OH RO O O I II The salts of these alkylphosphates are, accordingly, a mixtures of salts of mono-(III) and di-(IV)alkylphosphates: RO O-M P O-M , RO P + O-M RO O O III IV R alkyl radical of primary or secondary fatty alcohols of various fractions; M ion Na+ or triethanolammonium-ion (HOCH2CH2)3NH+. Mono- and dialkylphosphates can be obtained in several ways. The interaction of higher alcohols with oxide of phosphorus (V) is the most simple, cheap and convenient method for industrial application:
3ROH + P2O5 (RO)2 POH + RO P(OH)2 , O I

where

O II where ROH higher primary or secondary fatty alcohol.

The salts (for example, Na-salt) of mono- and dialkylphosphates are obtained by saponification under the scheme:

1013

I + II + 3NaOH

RO P O

ONa ONa III

RO RO P O ONa + 3H2O

IV This method of production was published earlier [1]. The salts of acid alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols have the good anticorrosive [2] and antiwear properties [2,3] and are used as additives for lubricoolant on a basis of sulfofrezol and emulsol ET-2.

2. TOXICITY TESTS
For preliminary toxicity analysis of pure secondary fatty alcohols (fractions C10-C20) the experiments were carried out on white rats, mice, porpoises and rabbits in consideration of possible ways of product entering to a human body (skin, gastrointestinal tract). In table 1 there are shown medium-lethal doses of alkylphosphates as well as of synthetic fatty acids (fractions C10-C16) and neonols for comparison. 1 able 1: Medium-lethal doses of some products Introduction LD50 Animal method rats intraperitoneal 0,5 rats intragastric single mice intraperitoneal 0,625 rats rats mice rats rats rats intraperitoneal intragastric intraperitoneal intraperitoneal intraperitoneal intragastric 2,4 no death 1,2 1,46 0,125 2,9 Standard error 0,097 0,15 0,21 12 g/kg 0,14 0,216 0,017 0,38 Confidence interval 0,2890,711 1012 g/kg 0,310,94 0,972,83 0,921,48 1,0071,913 0,0870,162 2,13,7

Product name Acid alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10-C20) Synthetic fatty acids (fractions C10-C16) Neonol 12-20-2,5 Neonol 10-20-12

2 3 4

How you can see from table data the alkylphosphates are nontoxic products at single dosing in a stomach, because they are obviously inactivated in a stomach. At intraperitoneal introduction their toxicity is a little higher, although alkylphosphates are nontoxic products by K.K. Sidorov's classification (1973). On a basis of character of toxic action (absolutely deadly doses) the alkylphosphates can be referred to the products influencing on nervous system (the depressed, laboured breathing, sunken sides, a short-term paralysis of posterior extremities etc.). Ander single-acting of a pure product on a mucous membrane of rabbit eyes it is observed persistent burn (11 days). Ander action of 0,5 and 5 % water solution on a mucous membrane of rabbit eyes it is observed the insignificant hyperaemia of a mucous membrane of eyelids (until 1 days). Long influence of a pure product on a porpoises skin leads to contact dermatitis (hyperaemia, infiltration, a thickening of a skin fold). In similar conditions of experience 0,5 and 5 % water solutions of a product did not cause a skin irritation. On the basis of these experiences the alkylphosphates can be referred to the class of low-toxic industrial compounds. In the use conditions for lubricoolant the alkylphosphates are not dangerous. Similar toxicological tests were carried out for preliminary toxicity analysis of sodium salts of alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10C20). Product toxicity at injecting to white rats and mice through peritoneum and to white rats through stomach is represented in table 2. Table 2: Toxicity of Na-salts of acid alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10C20). LD%, g/kg Introduction Animal method LD0 LD16 LD50 LD84 LD95 LD100 Rats intraperitoneal 1,175 1,425 1,8 2,125 2,35 2,375 Rats intragastric 4,8 5,65 7,9 8,25 9,0 9,2 Mice intraperitoneal 0,95 1,15 1,455 1,655 1,85 1,9

1014

The clinical presentation of an intoxication of experimental animals was characterized by oppression, aggression, the orientation loss, the complicated breath, lateral position, hollow sides. At single ingress to rabbit eye (2 drops) it was observed in 10 minutes a hyperaemia of mucous membrane of eyelid, blisters on mucous membranes, in 30 minutes the inferior eyelid drooped, in 24 hours it was observed hyperaemia, intensive epiphora. In sixth days the eye was norm. At long-term product action on the intact skin the symptoms of irritation were not observed. On the basis of toxicity parameters, analysis of an intoxication of laboratory animals, the product (sodium salts of alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10C20)) can be referred to low-toxic group of industrial products (S.D. Zaugolnikov, 1970). These investigations showed the triethanolammonium salts of alkylphosphates can be also referred to low-toxic group of industrial products.

3. BIOLOGICAL DISINTEGRATION TESTS

In addition to toxicological tests the toxicology laboratory studied a biochemical disintegration of sodium salts of acid alkylphosphates on a basis of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10C20). The determination of extent of biochemical disintegration of substances which are dumped as a waste in sewage is the extremely actual in connection with a problem of environmental protection. Biochemical disintegration tests of sodium salts of acid alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10 C20) were carried out during 2,5 months by a technique of Academy of Municipal services with adaptation of microorganisms to biochemical oxidation of the sample. In the absence of a technique of direct detection of sodium salts of alkylphosphates in water the degree of biochemical disintegration was defined under the residual of intermediate products of sample disintegration in the outgoing treated water (on a basis of difference of values of chemical oxygen demand (COD)). Results of studies in aerotanks are resulted in table 3. able 3: The extents of biochemical disintegration of Na-salts of alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10C20). Concentration COD of treated Differen Nitrogen of Nitrogen of Sludge index, mg/l of sample in water, mg 2/l ce of nitrates, mg/l ammonium, mg/l initial water, check experime COD, check experime check experime check experime mg/l mg 2/l value ntal value ntal value ntal value ntal 0 40,0 40,0 9,21 9,11 0,33 0,40 61 62 10 39,6 39,6 0 9,68 8,70 0,61 0,57 58 57 30 40,0 47,6 7,6 9,31 9,68 0,55 0,51 63 78 60 39,2 54,8 15,6 8,35 7,28 0,41 0,24 51 81 80 40,0 56,7 16,7 9,08 4,05 0,33 1,39 56 87 100 41,2 60,4 19,2 9,33 1,29 0,36 18,75 59 132 At initial concentration of 20-30 mg/l experimental aerotank, as well as control, worked stably. Oxidation of ammonium nitrogen to nitrates proceeded normally. During this period there was no difference in crushing index of experimental and control aerotanks. Active sludge consisted of large compact flakes and was various in content of sentinel microorganisms. Normal work of experimental aerotank was promoted by absence of foam on a surface of an aerated liquid (there was no carrying out of active sludge on aerotank walls that indirectly testifies to high degree of biochemical disintegration of the sample and fast adaptation of microorganisms). High degree of biodisintegration is proved by very high accretion of active sludge considerably exceeding control (at concentration of 60 mg/l the sludge accretion in experimental aerotank was 0,375 g/lper day, but in control 0,230 g/lper day). If at initial concentration of 30 mg/l the difference in COD of treated water in experimental and control aerotanks was still insignificant (7,6 mg 2/l) at the higher concentrations this index was changed first of all. At initial concentration of 100 mg/l the difference in COD already was 19, 2 mg 2/l. Toxic influence of suboxided products of sample disintegration on nitrification appeared only at concentration above 70 mg/l the content of nitrates sharply was reduced from 8,10 to 1,29 mg/l. Suppression of bacteria-nitrifier activity led to sharp accumulation of ammonium nitrogen in the treated water to 18,75 mg/l at initial concentration of the sample of 100 mg/l. In aerotank there appeared foam up to 1-2 sm. Accretion of active sludge was sharply decreased. Adverse influence of high concentration of the sample was showed in strong crushing of flakes of active crushing to small assemblages and even to individual bacteria. The sentinel microorganisms disappeared completely; the sludge became dead. The sedimentation of active sludge worsened (sludge index grown up to 132 mg/g) and its carry-over from sedimentation basin increased.

1015

Thus, full inhibition of nitrification, the increase of COD of the treated water and full biodegradation of active sludge testified to full infringement of sewage treatment. Tests were stopped. Thus it has been established, the Na-salts of alkylphosphates of secondary fatty alcohols (fractions C10C20) with initial concentration of 20-30 mg/l have not influence on biochemical processes of sewage treatment in aerotanks. The tested sample of an additive with initial concentration up to 60 mg/l is not toxic for water microorganisms and has not influence on nitrification in I and II phases. The estimated MPC of the tested sample in sewage water incoming for biochemical treatment in aerotank is 30 mg/l (limiting index the growth of COD of the treated water). Sodium alkylphosphates obtained on a basis of secondary fatty alcohols (fractions C10-C20) can be referred to a class biological soft SAS.

4. OTHER OPERATIONAL PROPERTIES

On the basis of analysis of biochemical disintegration of sodium salts of acid alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols (fractions C10-C20) and of results of technological tests we found these salts were the most acceptable additives for lubricoolants on a water basis. We offered the following way of utilization of lubricoolant solution. The used lubricoolant is poured out in special tank, where it settles an oil part of emulsol ET-2. A water part of used lubricoolant is pumped into other tank so that the oil layer is separated. A water part of used lubricoolant is diluted with water to concentration of alkylphosphate salts of 30 mg/l. At use of 3% solution of Na-salts of alkylphosphates as lubricoolant it is necessary to add 100 parts of water on 1 part of used lubricoolant so that the concentration of an additive is not higher than 30 mg/l. This diluted solution can be come to treatment facilities without adverse influence on biochemical processes of sewage treatment. Trial tests for antiwear properties of new lubricoolant compositions showed these properties sharply worsened with the appearance of a smell of liquid rotting. Thus we easy established the operational life of new lubricoolant compositions which depended on an environment temperature. The operational life was found to end when a smell of liquid rotting was appeared. We found that at an environment temperature of 15 oC the operational life of lubricoolant is 17 days, at 20 oC 13 days, at 25 oC 9 days.

5. CONCLUSIONS
In the result of investigation of basic operational properties of lubricoolants with salts of acid alkylphosphates of higher fatty alcohols these lubricoolants can be recommend for industrial application.

REFERENCES
[1] Avdeenko, A.P.: Creation of lubricating fluid and technological mediums for drilling deep apertures, cutting heatproof intractable materials. Realization of chip breaking // Deposited SNTL of Ukraine 08.07.94. 1298-Uk94; Bibliography AUISITI RAS. 1994. 10 (275), b/d 259. [2] Avdeenko, A.P., Voloshin, V.F., Skripets, V.I., Semenyakova, L.V.: Antikorrosive properties of acid alkylphosphates of fatty alcohols and their salts. Journal Questions of chemistry and chemical technology. Pub. by Kharkov University. No 55 (1979). pp. 12-15. [3] Avdeenko, A.P.: The investigation of tribological behavior of acid alkylphosphate salts on basis of Fatty alkohols. The creation of new lubricating fluid for drilling of the deer wells. In: Proceedings of 2th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industy - RaDMI 2002, Vrnjaka Banja, Yugoslavia, 02-04. September 2002. Edited by Predrag Dai. Trstenik: High Technical Mechanical School, 2002, Vol. 1, pp. 500-505.

1016

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ANALYSIS AND ASSESSMENT OPTIMAL PARAMETERS OF LEPOSAVIC PIPELINE

efik M. Bajmak
University of Pristina - Faculty of Technical Sciences, Pristina, SERBIA, e-mail: bajmak@yahoo.com
Summary: On the basis of projections of the number of apartments, in Leposavic the 2010th The live stnovnika 5000. Postoei systems heated mostly from individual furnaces. Joint systems are small and serve mainly administrative and manufacturing facility. Analysis showed that the total installed thermal capacity of about 13MW boiler. This paper is an analysis and determination of optimal parameters Branched heat (the optimum flow rate and optimum specific pressure drop). This paper presents excerpts from Study on the heating of the city Leposavic, No. 243007A, approved by the Ministry of Science and Environmental Protection. Key words: analysis, speed, pressure drop speciifni

1. CHOOSE A PIPELINE LAYING

Type of heat (overhead or underground) is selected taking into account local technical and economic conditions. In the residential regions of the cities, in accordance with the requirements of architecture is applied as a rule laying underground heat network. Only in exceptional circumstances, in particular the difficult soil conditions (permanently frozen soil, which is the melting rash or swampy section), in residential regions is applied overhead passing. In order to secure the work of staff and reliability of heat supply, does not allow the taking heat in the channels with pipelines for oxygen, gas, compressed air pressure above 16bara , flammable and toxic liquids and gases, as well as sewerage pipes and sewer atmosphere .. In the design of underground heat, in order to decrease the initial investment should choose the minimum number of chambers, placing them only at the points where fittings and accessories that require serving (valve placement, kompezatora, drainage). Depth of taking heat from the channel to cover the surface usually is 0,5 1,0m . In order to facilitate the discharge and drainage to take the heat from the slope. The minimum slope of heat is 0.002. The direction of the slope is not important. In even-numbered networks, the minimum slope is 0.002 in the direction of flow of steam and 0.01 in the opposite direction during the steam [1,2,3,4,8]. For protection from heat penetration of condensate from the pipeline for condensate, steam line broken when not working, set after the steam condensate return valve. In general, heat pipeline consists of three basic makings: 1. pipeline, through which heat is transported transmitter; 2. isolation, provided for the protection of external surfaces of steel pipelines against corrosion and heat pipeline in the whole of the heat losses; 3. supporting structure, which receives the weight of heat and other forces that appear in his work; Modern heating to meet the following basic requirements: 9 reliable strength and tightness of piping and fittings which is set on them with the expected pressure and temperature transmitters of heat in the exploitation conditions; 9 high and stable thermal and electrical resistance in the exploitation conditions, low air permeability and low water absorption of isolation; 9 the ability to create all the basic elements of the heat in the factory, to the limits set by the transport possibilities, folding heat on the route, the ready-made elements;

1017

the possibility of heavy machinery, construction and assembly; possibility of light repairs, ie. can cause rapid failure detection and injuries, their removal and elimination of their consequences by performing repairs in the specified time; For urban complex, the most widely used method of taking the heat is underground . Most heat is taken in impassable channels or channel anger. Most often been applied pipe heating system before insulation pipe.

9 9

2. THE CHOICE OF THE ROUTE

Thermal network is a system of inter-section of piping through which the heat transmission of heat (steam or hot water) is transported from heat to heat consumers. Pri route selection should be guided first of all conditions of heat supply reliability, harmless work of staff, fast removal of possible errors and havarije. The selected route alignment thermal route network, with respect to the norms of the distance from the installation and communications, applied to the geodesic distance image with kotama axis alignment of the existing buildings or other structures. By thermal route network is made on the extension profile that involve the planned and existing ground level elevation, groundwater elevation, existing and planned communications and other underground installations that are cut from the heat, indicating coordinates[1,2,4].

3. DETERMINATION OF THE OPTIMAL RATE OF FLUID IN THE SYSTEM OF CENTRALIYED HEAT SUPPLY
The system of centralized heat supply is a complex device consisting of a center for the production of thermal energy (heating, TPP), along similar consumer and various consumer heat distributed at different distances from one another and network in which the heat carrier heat pumps with delivery to the consumer and returned again to the center. When designing the system of centralized heat supply (SCHS), should adopt such an optimal speed of the holder of power in the pipeline, in which the costs of the project Tsis (eura god .) are minimal[3,4]. SCHS costs consist of the following charges: 9 Reed generator of thermal energy TGT ; 9 9 9 9 Cost of pumping stations TPS ; Costs of the main pipeline; Costs konzumatora energy (heating, sanitary hot water, air conditioning, etc.) Other costs

TKE ;

TOT ;
(1)

TSIS = TGT + TPS + TMC + TKE + TOST

Because costs ie. hold them constant. Based on this, the cost of the system are:

TGT , TKE , TOT do not depend on fluid velocity (energy carrier), they can omit the calculation,
(2)

TSIS = CON + TPS + TMC

3.1 Cost of Pumping Stations (investment and exploitation) are present term [3]:
IN EK TPS = rPS TPS + TPS =

TPS = 0,1354 10
3

0 , 25

Q l PS cW W

0 , 375

[C PS (1 + )(1 + m)rPS + Z PS Cee (1 + )] W 2,375 (3)

3.2 Cost of pipeline network (investment and exploitation) are present term[3]:
IN EK TMC = rMR TMC + TMC

1018

 1,275a3 Qi0,5 Li 1,129a 2 TMC = rMR a1Li + + 0,5 0,5 c w w w Wi (c w w w )

sr + 11,34 w t ok

Qi Li + Wi

0, 5 (1 + 1 )KLi nTV 2 IZ + 1,158Qi 0,5 CTE (c w w wWi )

(4)

Change of expression (6.3) and (6.4) in the expression (6.1), and after arranging to have the cost of equivalent expression [3,4]:

TSIS = CON + A1 Li + A2 A3 Li + ( A2 A7 Li + A4 Li ) Q QL + A5 Li i i + A6 Li W Wi w
0, 375

(t wWi )0,5

Qi0,5 Li

+
(5)

Wi 2,375

In other words, the cost of the meter is equal to the expression:

TSIS =

TSIS Qi0,5 Li = CON + A1 + A2 A3 + ( A2 A7 + A4 ) + Li (t wWi )0,5

0 , 375

Q QL + A5 i i + A6 W Wi w

(6)

Wi 2,375

From the conditions TSIS W = 0 have to be the optimum speed is the intersection of function Y1 and Y2 :

Q Qi0,5 Li 2 ,875 Y1 = A W B = A0W 2,875 B0 i 0 ,5 w w Qi Li C Y2 = C = 00,5 0,5 wWi WI

0 , 375

(7)

Y1 = A0W 2,875 B0 Y2 = C0 WI0,5

2 2

From the conditions TSIS W

> 0 , we have that:

Qi 2,875 A w

0 , 375

W 1,875 + 0,5B

Qi Li 1 >0 w W 1,5

(8)

which is obvious. For the appropriate fluid and the respective coefficient in the function of temperature differences and heat capacities in Figure 1 given the dependence function (7). The intersection of these two functions we find the optimal rate of fluid flow WOP . In which are marked with[3,4]:

A = 2,375 * 0,1354 10

[rPS C PS (1 + m ) + Z PU C EE ](1 + )

0 , 25

w c w

0 , 375

Li

PU

(9)

1019

B=

(CW W )0,5
1,275rMR a3 Cw w

0,5

[1,129 rmr a2 + 11,34( sr tok )(1 + )nTV KCTE ]

C=

A0 = 2,375 * 0,1354 10
3

[rPS C PS (1 + m) + Z PU C EE ](1 + )
w (1 + ) C w
0 , 375

0 , 25

w c w

0 , 375

Li Q PU w

0 , 375

= 2,375 * 0,1354 *10 = b1 (b2 + Z PU C EE )

B0 =

0 , 25

Li Q PU w

0 , 375

[rPS C PS (1 + m) + Z PU C EE ] =
Q ]

(CW W )

0,5

0 ,5

[1,129rmr a 2 + 11,34( sr t ok )(1 + )nTV KCTE

0,5 i 0,5 w

Li

C0 =

1,275rMR a 3 Cw w

Q L
i

Figure 1: The optimal rate of fluid flow Electricity prices 0,35 0,3 0,25 0,2 0,15 0,1 Cee(/KWh) Optimal speed 1,9 2,1 2,2 2,4 2,6 3,0 W (m / s)

0,05 3,6

The terms of the city Leposavic performed the analysis of optimal rate of fluid flow in branches of G1 and G2 and the results of the analysis are shown in Figure 1

4. DETERMINATION OF OPTIMUM SPECIFIC PRESSURE DROP IN PIPELINE SYSTEMS OF CENTRALIZED HETA SUPPLY (SCHS)
For certain water temperature in the divorce and return, SCHS with increasing pressure drop reduces the investment and loss of heat through the insulation, since it reduces the diameter of the pipeline. However, when it increases consumption of electricity for pumps. To determine the optimal pressure drop, it is necessary to find the minimum function, which is composed of costs for building the network pumping stations, power consumption and heat loss of plant SCHS. Based on this, the total cost of the system can be expressed in the form of the equation[3,7]:

TSIS = CON + TPS + TMC

(10)

4.1 Pumping station costs (investment and exploitation) in the function of specific pressure drop, we present in the form of the equation:

TPS = 10 3

PS

(1 + )Li Ri [rPS (1 + m )C PS

+ Z PS C EE ]

(11)

1020

4.2 Cost hate pipeline (investment and exploitation) are present in the following format[3,7]:

TMC = a Li + b Li d i + c Li d i2
Taking into account that:

(12)

QGO

G2 = nQmax ; Rl = 0,812 5 ; = 0,11 d d

0 , 25

0 , 38 G2 0,19 G 0, 25 Rl = B 5, 25 ; B = 0,0893 ; d = B . d (R )0,19

(13)

If we take the assumption that the specific resistance along the main highway constant heat calculated with the adopted R0 and t 0 and compared with variant-specific resistance Ri which is temperature difference t i and then:

4.500.000,00

M 0 = Li d oi = M i = Li d i =
(14)

( R0 0

B 0,19

G )
0 ,19

0 , 38 0i

4.000.000,00

G (R )
0 ,19 i i

B 0,19

0 , 38 i

3.500.000,00

3.000.000,00

2.500.000,00 Y1 Y2

0,05 0,1 0,15 0,2 0,25 0,3 0,35

R0 0 Mi = M0 R i i
,

0 ,19

G G

0 , 38 i

R0 0 = M0 0 , 38 R Li i i 0 Li
(15)

0 ,19

2.000.000,00

L (t ) L (t )
i 0 i i

0 , 38

0 , 38

1.500.000,00

As in all sections t 0 is:

= const and also t i = const it

0 ,19

1.000.000,00

500.000,00

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

R0 0 Mi = M0 R i i
The product

(t 0 )0,38 (t i )0,38

R0 0 = M 0t R i i

0,19

-500.000,00 W(m/s)

(16)

M ' = M di
i

can be expressed as:

2

' 2 M0 = M 0 d 0i = M 0

L ; M
i

' i

= M i d i = M i2

L
t 0 t i

' (M i M 0 ) (17) = M0

(17)

After arranging the terms (12) we have to have specific network costs equal to the expression:

Timr =

a Li nQmax

bM 0 + nQmax

t 0 t i

0 , 38

R0 0 R i i

0 ,19

' cM 0 + nQmax

0 , 76

R0 0 R i i

0 , 38

(18)

The third group of parameters that affect the resistance of heating pipelines are the ones the size of the figure in the expression for heat loss. With increasing resistance to reduce the heat losses in the other same conditions. Heat losses can be expressed as follows:

Q gub = 10,74 10 6 (t sr t 0 )(1 + )KnTV Li d si

1

(19)

1021

Size

L d
i 1

si

= M us can be written to E.P.ubinu of the form:

n n

M us =

L i d si = L i d i + 0,15 L i
1 1 1

t 0 = M0 t i

0 , 38

R0 0 R i i

0 ,19

+ 0,15 L i
1

(20)

If expression (19) with

M us share will be heat loss by 1m 2 suspended material characteristics, ie:

Q1 =

Qgub M us

= 10,74 10 6 (t sr t 0 )(1 + )KnTV

Heat losses are reduced 1GJ to be:

q gub =

Q1 M us nQmax

Specific costs are reduced due to loss of heat transported to 1GJ can be written in the form of:

Tgub =

Q1 M us CTEN nQmax

Therefore, the total expenses that affect the resistance in the network are reduced to be written in the form of:

1GJ transported heat, can

T UK = TPS + TMC = 10 3 + rmr a Li nQmax

PS
t 0 t i

Rl (1 + )
0 , 38

1 Qmax n

[rPS (1 + m )C PS + Z PS C EE ] +
' cM 0 + rmr nQmax

bM 0 + rmr nQmax

R0 0 R i i

0 ,19

t 0 t i

0 , 76

R0 0 R i i

0 , 38

(21)

0 , 38 Q1CTEN t 0 R0 0 M 0 + nQmax t i Ri i

n + 0 , 15 L i 1

If we adopt will mean:

A1 = 10 3

1+

PS Qmax n

a L [rPS (1 + m )C PS + Z PS C EE ] ; A2 = rmr i Qmax n

0, 76

bM 0 t 0 A3 = rmr Qmax n t i t 0 A6 = M 0 t i
0 , 38

0 , 38

R0 0 i
0 ,19

0 ,19

' cM 0 t 0 ; A4 = rmr t Q n max i

R0 0 i

0, 38

A5 =

Q1 CTEN ; Qmax n
(22)

R0 0 i

A7 = 0,15 Li

After the change of the mean we have that:

1022

TUK = A1 Rl + A2 +

1 R
0 ,19 l

( A3 + A5 A6 ) +

A4 + A5 A7 Rl0,38

(23)

From the conditions TUK Rl = 0 we have that:

A1 0,19

A 1 4 ( A3 + A5 A6 ) 0,38 A = 0 ; A1 Rl1,19 0,19 ( A3 + A5 A6 ) 0,38 0,419 = 0 ; 1,19 1, 38 Rl Rl Rl

A1 Rl1,19 = 0,19 ( A3 + A5 A6 ) + 0,38

A4 A 1,19 ; 5,263 A1 Rl = ( A3 + A5 A6 ) + 2 0,4 ; 0 ,19 Rl Rl 19

The intersection of the functions found optimum specific pressure drop:

Y1 = 5,263 A1 Rl1,19

(24)

Y2 = A3 + A5 A6 + 2

A4 Rl0,19

(25)

The terms of the city Leposavic izvreene the analysis of optimum specific pressure drop for branch G1 and G2 and the results of the analysis are shown in Figure 2

5. CONCLUSION
The optimum flow velocity and specific pressure drop depends on the number of variables. With the increasing cost of electricity optimum flow velocity of water drops. With the increasing cost of electricity optimum specific pressure drop is smanuje. With increasing temperature difference of pre-specified optimal water pressure drop increases. On the basis of expression (7) and (9) can see the influence of factors on the optimal value of velocity of hot water in the heat and the falling value of specific pressure.

REFERENCES
[1] Generalni urbanistiki plan LEPSAVI 2010, JP. Direkcija za urbanizam izgradnju Kragujevca, Kragujevac, ktbar 1994.gd [2] J.J.Sklv: Tplifikacija i tpltne mree, IRGraevinska knjiga Begrad 1985; [3] Martin.B.Termtehniar,Nauna knjiga , Begrad 1987 [4] efik B. Tplifikacini sistemi, Skripta, Pritina ,1987 [5] aspisi, KGH, Energija, Elektrprivreda,itd [6] Internet stranice [7] Studija tplifikaciji Bajne Bate, inrnet verzija [8] Prstrni plan energetike i ptimalna struktura energije S Pritina d 2010.gdine, ENERGPRJEKTBEGRAD , INKS-PRITINA, 1984
12.000.000 10.000.000 0,4 8.000.000 6.000.000 4.000.000 2.000.000 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,1 0,05

9.000.000 8.000.000 7.000.000 6.000.000 5.000.000 4.000.000 3.000.000 2.000.000 1.000.000 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,1 0,05

1023

1
7.000.000 6.000.000 5.000.000 4.000.000 3.000.000 2.000.000 1.000.000 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
0 100 200 300 400 6.000.000

0,4 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,1 0,05

5.000.000 0,4 4.000.000 0,3 0,2 3.000.000 0,15 0,1 2.000.000 0,05

1.000.000

500

600

3
5.000.000 4.500.000 4.000.000 3.500.000 3.000.000 2.500.000 2.000.000 1.500.000 1.000.000 500.000 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 0,4 0,3 0,2

0,15 0,1 0,05

Redni broj 1 2 3 4 5

Tsr,C 60 80 100 120

5 Electricity prices, / KWh 0,4 0,3 0,2 0,15 0,10 0,05 Optimal specific Rop pressure drop (Pa / m) 60 75 100 130 180 280 65 80 90 115 160 270 70 90 130 160 220 380 80 100 150 170 240 400

Figure 2. Optimum specific pressure drop for t = 600 C ,80C ,1000 C ,1200 C ,1400 C

1024

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ANALYSIS DISTRICT COOLING . DEFINING THE TERM COEFFICIENT REMOTE REFRIGERATION (COEFFICIENT DISTRICT COOLING)
efik M. Bajmak
University of Pristina - Faculty of Technical Sciences, Pristina, SERBIA, e-mail: bajmak@yahoo.com

Summary.Depending on the external natural climate conditions, the heat balance of the facility may have different character. Creation comfort microclimate conditions within the room I connected with compensation of losses of heat (Heating buildings) in the winter conditions and the elimination of heat gains in summer (air conditioning or cooling facilities). Depending on the specific latitude and climate, dominant it can be shown only heating or cooling-air-conditioning rooms. The issue of thermal regime of the building in the summer was worked out with high scientific approach. The issue of centralized cooling (district cooling) with cold water or cooling the issue of centralized energy supply (district cooling) , not elaborate on such a level, as a matter of centralized hot water supply or as a matter of district heating. The paper will appear questions explanations of methodology and district cooling coefficient hladifikacije ie. district cooling coefficient Key words: analysis, district cooling, coefficient, turbo compressor, absorption machine

1. REVIEW OF ELECTION SEED DISTRICT COOLING

Cooling is done solely by refrigeration plant compact structure, called a short cooling units and cooling machines. Numerous types of refrigeration machines, from the smallest to the largest capacities, are designed specifically for air conditioning technology. The increasing use of air conditioning technology in recent years has led up to the fact that for large building complexes such as hospitals, universities, shopping centers, etc.. incorporating a central cooling plant for remote supply of cold water [1,2,10]. This is economically possible only under certain preconditions, such as in the case of district heating. As with heating, cooling plants by remote means the supply of smaller or larger number of consumers from a central cooling plant. In recent years, made a large number of these facilities for universities, office buildings, retail centers, airports, clinics and other groups of buildings in which there is a need for cooling rooms, laboratories, facilities for measuring and testing machines, etc.. [1,3,10]. While in many chemical plants to ammonia refrigerant circulates in the consumer network and remote isparavaima low temperature, to supply plant air is used only cold water from water distribution temparturom about as cold carrier [1,3,10] that through the pipe lines leading to consumers. Minimum cooling capacity is considered to be approximately 3 to 4 MW. Schematic of a remote rashladnaog plants can be seen in figure 1. There is no doubt that major construction works for the supply of cold in relation to an individual facility provides many advantages, like district heating. For example, saving space, minimal maintenance costs, better efficiency, the absence of difficulties with transportation of heat and all. Despite the design of such facilities must accurately consider the problem of economy. In technical terms when it should take into account the number of aspects in particular: the position of the central cooling plant in the area of supply, location of cooling towers, the possibility of stages of construction, the choice of drive power, connected the use of heat, electricity and to achieve low temperature, energy and maintenance costs, height of the tariff. From the total amount of investment and drive economic costs of getting the best solution, if imponderabilije(factors), such as environmental protection, noise etc.. justify greater investment. In the normal case raises the more turborashladnih machine so that machines can not exclude the partial optreenju. If electricity prices are favorable, it is recommended to use electric-powered turbochargers, or using

1025

steam turbines. As the refrigerant comes into account the R 134a, and for very large cooling capacity over 10MW per unit, is used in R22. Condenser cooling is done by using cooling towers or, if possible, the river water. Usual absorption plants are connected to heating plant. Taken from the same network as the heating steam or heating water heat more, much higher if the outdoor temperature and solar radiation has a greater influence on the cooling load. For the cooling capacity of 1KWh need approximately 1.5 kWh of heat. Powered absorption refrigeration plant, usually in the form of refrigeration units with steam cooling material Libr, cost is only when the heating heat supplied at reasonable prices. As the limit ratio applies:

CEE (Euro KWh ) = 7 9 [1,2,4,5,10]. CTE (Euro KWh )

Favorable combination of a turbocharger according to the scheme in figure 2.

1- turbo cooling machine, 2-evaporator, 3-condenser, 4-pumps for cooling water, 5-cooling tower, 6-pump for cold water, 7distribution line, 8-back line, 9 - Consumer cooling energy (buildings)

Figure 1: Schematic cooling plant with turbocharger

1-absorption refrigeration machine, 2- refrigerant turbo compressor , 3-cooling towers, 4-fresh pair, 5-steam turbine, 6distribution line, 7 - back line, 8-cooling water pump, 9-for cold water pump, 10-condensate to the boiler

Figure 2: Schematic circuit in conjunction with the launch of turbochargers using steam turbines and the absorption machine in the system

1026

Figure 3. 10]. shows the schematic of getting a combination of low temperature and remote heat: steam turbine powered turbo compressor, steam boiler is supplied as well as remote thermal network, and condenser steam and condenser cooling facilities are connected to the cooling tower. It is often used, and district heating from exhaust steam.

1-boiler, 2-turbine, 3-pipeline, 4- water pipe cold water ; 5-station, 6-cooling tower, 7-steam condenser

Figure 3: Central cooling plant with steam turbines, turbo compressors Temperature distribution of water is 4 5 C , and temperature return water is 12 15 C . You must choose the greater the difference, in order to reduce the amount of circulating water, or sections of pipe would be great.
0 0

Costs are lowest when the difference about 9 K , for example. 4 C 4 in the water distribution and 13 C in a return water. Isolation is usually potrbna for distribution lines, and often does izolacije. Usually is that there are two separate networks for district heating and district cooling. Under certain conditions in the southern regions is possible only one network, which takes heated water in winter and in summer the cold water. Large capacity remote condensing refrigeration plant requires the use of cooling towers. Sizing is done in proportion to the average temperature in wet thermometer, so for example in Central Europe t f = 16 17 C .
0

When cooling for 5 K can be achieved optimum cooling water temperature distribution of water from the

24 0 C . Case by a wet thermometer temperature rise of 210 C , then cooling tower cooling water supplied from 0 the 27 C .
Economical refrigeration plant that produces power largely depends on the time of use of its installed capacity and the time of his work at full load. The main heat source needs to work with as balanced as possible and long periods of time with full load. Covering the peak load that occurs during the few days he was in terms of investment from cheaper energy generator cooling.

2. SYSTEMS DISTRICT COOLING

2.1 Development of ideas To answer the question where ideas for district cooling might make the best compared with the heating system. Therefore, development of district cooling for air conditioning residential, social and business facilities, according to the analogy with the heating system can follow the three simple steps (figure 4) [1,3,7,10].: 1. an individual, decentralized electricity systems prosecution in any room of the building (split bands and the like); 2. prosecution of a central system of electricity for the entire building or several rooms in the building or group of buildings (with compressor coolers water cooling systems and valves convectors in the premises); 3. central heat supply systems for the prosecution of the entire building or several rooms in building or group of buildings (with the absorption of water coolers and cooling convector valves per premises);

1027

1-power plants, 2-cooling tower, 3 - electric compression air conditioners located in the premises of (split-systems, etc., 4electric line, 5 - heat exchanger located in the premises (valves convectors ) and the like; 6 - electrical compression cooling device, 7 - cold water 7/12C, 8 - heat exchanger located in the premises (valves convectors) and the like; 9 - absorption cooling device, 10 - water-heating system hot water 95 / 55C

Figure 4: The development of the idea of individual district cooling to the central system 2.2 What is district cooling? What are the district cooling, can be explained by two views: 9 depending on the cooling energy 9 depending on the size or izvdebe system. Explanation of the district heating system according to the source of energy for refrigeration cooling gear heat (cold water) for end consumers (buildings or premises in them) usually serve professionals in the field of thermal engineering. For them, the district cooling systems in which they are the one place using the existing district heating system delivers heat energy is then just before the consumer into a refrigeration or those in which one of the cooling energy supplied to consumers with additional sastva distribution of cold water, generally parallel with the existing distribution systems in remote grejanja.Na so companies engaged in the production of heat and power offers a great opportunity for the utilization of excess heat which is coming up especially during the warm months, which is particularly appropriate in countries where the need for heated and cooled relatively evenly distributed throughout the year. On the other hand, explaining the composition of district cooling, according to their size, and performance is mainly used by experts in the field of refrigeration. For them, the composition of district cooling in which the distribution of heat transmission (cold water) once a building is not limited, but is it from one or more sources of energy supply more cooling of buildings, the whole village and so on. Therefore, it should be noted that this view is prevalent in countries or areas where the need for cooling (air conditioning), there is much of the year, while the need for heating or negligible over there. Of course, the exact composition of the district cooling entries can be derived by combining the two positions. Therefore, we can say that these are bands that are cooling energy from one or more sources of more or less branched divorce leads to consumers or that of the thermal energy from heating the composition or other sources used for the conversion of refrigeration energy directly to consumers . 2.3 Advantages and Disadvantages Several of the major advantages of district cooling system in relation to the by now usual source of cooling energy solutions for the composition of the air conditioning in buildings such as commercial and residential buildings, shopping centers, hotels, hospitals, manufacturing plants and the like[1,2,4,5,9,10]..

1028

1) Large refrigeration plants commonly have higher efficiency than manja.Na example, the usual split bands generally have a cooling effect and the ratio of primary energy consumption, the socalled COP = 2 . , while in large refrigeration systems, which use compression refrigeration devices that relationship is COP = 6 ; 2) In the same composition can be used several different sources of cooling energy. For example, absorbing devices that operate using thermal energy from the composition of district heating is used to cover the base load, and compression devices to electrical energy for reduced coverage or peak loads; 3) It is possible to exploit and cheaper, alternative sources of energy such as refrigeration, for example, cold sea or lake water or waste heat from industrial plants, power plants or incineration of solid public waste ; 4) In countries brojenim the peak daily energy consumption matches the composition of the air conditioning work and if you use multiple sources to drive the cooling composition (ie, electric and thermal energy), it is possible to significantly reduce spending, as a rule expensive electricity; 5) Because of the simultaneity factor ,or concomitant use if there are more consumers can reduce the overall capacity of the plant and thereby increase its pouzadnost, especially when using the appropriate heat accumulators; 6) A large number of building owners or publishers of residential and commercial property in them does not want to think about building power supply, provision of utility services, nor the maintenance of the structure, but it wants to convey to third parties, and specialized companies. It is in fact lie great opportunities for companies that are engaged in the production of thermal energy, which have the necessary resources (personnel, knowledge, equipment, etc.). Certainly, when we are talking about the benefits of sastva district cooling, we should mention some of their shortcomings. In the first place are much larger initial, ie. investment costs required to build such composition and before any consumers connected to the system (by contrast, the cost of installation of split system is very charged immediately after the unit is plugged in). This is mainly related to the construction of infrastructure or the installation absorption cooling unit. On the other hand, there are obstacles and considering the opinions of consumers, but also experts who believe that the supply of energy (heat or cooling) should be an individual, and that users should be the primary source of supply (electricity, gas, fuel oil, etc.), which he then can be used as they want and when they want. However, experience from Denmark, Finland, large parts of Sweden and Germany and Austria show that the district heating system over many years become a generally accepted part of urban infrastructure that consumers increasingly demand and would like might suppose sastvae and remote cooling.

3. BASIC PRINCIPLES DISTRICT COOLING

When speaking about the principles of remote sonovnim cooling, actually refers to the performance of the cooling source of energy that heat the gear is taught, ie. cold water. At the same time a source of cooling energy can usually be: 9 Compression refrigeration; 9 Absorption cooling device; 9 Direct, that is, from the immediate environment; 9 A combination of two or more ways; Compression cooling devices are now common in most refrigeration systems used in air-conditioning (For example, in split systems, compact window air conditioners, water coolers, etc.) And refrigeration (in refrigerator, home refrigerators, etc.). Suitable working medijm them is in a closed circle: evaporatorcompressor-capacitor-expansion valve-evaporator, as shown in figure 5. [1,2,6,8,9,10].

1029

Figure 5: Schematic diagram action compressor cooling system in the district cooling system As a working fluid (refrigerant) is commonly used various ugljovodenici, halogenated hydrocarbons (also known as Freon) and their compounds, ammonia and so on. To increase the energy level of cooling fluid (ie, increasing pressure and temperature) is mechanical energy, which is achieved acting compressor, while the cooling heat energy appropriate gear (ie cold water) taught in the evaporator, that would be more accurate to say, since it takes away the heat. The compressor cooling systems used for cooling water district cooling system is most often used two versions of compressors: screw (eng.screw) and turbo compressors. For their operation can be used electricity (eg obtained kogeneracijskim processes in the plant) or mechanical energy (for example, using gas or steam turbines in the plant intslirane). The main difference of the two compressors is performed in the size and usability. Systems with screw compressors is mainly appear to 5MW in size and the cooling effect, while the systems, turbochargers much higher (from 1 up to 30-50mW) and have a much higher efficiency. Absorption cooling systems are generally different from the compressor in that it is to increase the energy level of the working fluid (ie, increase of pressure and temperature) do not use mechanical, but thermal energy obtained from appropriate sources. As the working fluid when it uses lithium bromide solution (for the other performances: ammonia or other fluids) in water, and as a source of heat can be used a primary carrier of heat (hot water or steam from a proper heat) or a burner in which the direct combustion appropriate fuel (eg gas, fuel oil, waste, biomass, etc.). Direct cooling energy sources are just a natural media with an average tempeartura low enough throughout the year to as, for example, sea, lake or groundwater. For example, water tempearture as a source of energy for refrigeration cooling system used in remote Stoholmo (from the Baltic Sea) in Sweden.

5. GUIDELINES FOR DEVELOPMENT DISTRICT COOLING

The development of district cooling, is associated with the problem of water supply and transport of cold water in the distance as the holder of cooling energy. Typically, large work station cooling water cooled condensers. Large cooling water consumption is especially pronounced at the absorption refrigeration plant and ejector cooling systems, which can be very negative to demonstrate their use in the district cooling system. One of the ways to solve these problems is to create a complex scheme of supplying hot and cold water, where the return water supply system in combination with more kratnim using water at different temperature levels. Widely used in remote cooling for air conditioning, is related to the formation of the capacity of powerful and economical engine cooling tube dissolution and cold water supply.

6. CALCULATION OF LOAD COOLING

District cooling in the summer basically provide cold water air conditioning systems of buildings and other facilities where refrigeration is required. What is more accurately determined cooling load, it will be less and less difference between the established cooling load of the required cooling load. This provides stability, security and

1030

economical operation of the system. This allows to avoid the contingent reserve equipment installed capacity, shorten the difficulties in assembling and invested capital reduce costs and system performance. [1,2,10]. To estimate the size of the cooling load of urban environment it is necessary to determine for each object the size of each cooling load. In accordance with [2] the value of cooling load of special facilities for unsteady regime change heat with the environment during the day changes sinusoidno and describes the equation:
ob ob. sr ob ob Qhl = Qhl + A Qhl cos(2 T ) Z Z Qhl . max

( )

))

(1)

Usually cooling load of air conditioning facilities in urban areas is determined by adding arithmetic projketnih size of individual energy cooling of buildings. This method does not provide the necessary accuracy of calculation, so that maximum cooling energy needs of all facilities not performing at the same time during the day. The exact value of the required cooling energy can be determined by summing the daily chart the changes necessary energy cooling of buildings. For example, two objects, orientation east west north and south is shown in Figure 6. The picture can be seen, the actual maximum total cooling energy is less than the arithmetic sum of the maximum energy cooling the building. Working together multiple sources of energy needed for heating in winter and cooling mode in summer in district heating and district cooling is the way to achieve cost-effective facilities and a safe and efficient supply consumer areas (consumer) to the energy needed for heating, so the energy required for cooling or air conditioning. Max needs for these two types of energy occur rarely, because the extremely low and extremely high temperatures occur rarely. Therefore, the total heat and cooling load divided into primary and peak. The average amount of heating and cooling energy consumer lodge during a heating season, or the cooling season, characterized by the heat load duration diagram (winter-heating season mode) or cooling load (summer mode - ie the cooling season. Air conditioning), as shown in Figure 7. [1,2,10].

3500
ob Qh , max

3000
ob AQh
ob , s j ob ,i z Qh + Qh , sr , sr

heat capacitybuilding ,W

2500

ob ,i z h ,max

F1 F2

2000
ob ,i z Qh ,max

F3
ob ,i z AQh

F4 F5
ob ,i z h , sr

1500

Q
1000

F6

AQ
500

ob , s j h

ob , s j Qh , sr

0 0 5 10 15 taim of dhe day, h 20 25 30

Figure 6: During the day change individual and total cooling load of buildings of different orientations

1031

1 2 Figure 7: Chart duration of heat stress (1) and cooling loads (2) One of the main characteristics that define the justification for the use of district heating or cooling is the size of the remote hour heating coefficient, ie. district heating and district size coefficient hour cooling, ie. hladifikacije (coefficient district cooling). From the duration of the cooling load chart, as shown in Figure 7 depending on the duration of high temperatures, the field (a) provides the primary source of cooling energy, and the field (b) from the peak cooling energy sources. Hour remote cooling coefficient (coefficient district cooling) is the relationship Between the primary and the total capacity (maximum) capacity:

h , x = Qos Qmax

(2)

Annual district cooling coefficient (coefficient district cooling) is the relationship Between the amount of cooling energy from primary sources give away during the year and the total amount of cooling energy.
os uk g , x = Qg ,h Q g ,h

(3)

Hour working relationship, the relationship between cooling capacity and peak primary energy sources:
x x h , x = Qvr Qos = 1 Qh , x 1

(4)

Annual labor ratio, the ratio between the amount of cooling energy from the peak give away sources and primary sources in the year:
vr os g ,x = Qg , x Q g , x = 1 Qh , x 1

(5)

7. CONCLUSION
In many production plants using cold water to achieve a variety of technological processes and how you expressed. Consumers are cold water for air conditioning systems designed to maintain normal microclimate conditions in the facility. Unlike the system centralizvovanog snbdevanja heat for heating and the like, ie snbdevanje cooling energy. cold water as a rule so far achieved, ie how the individual. each system has served its own cooling station. The advantage of such cooling energy supply system is that the system is not a huge distribution network. In addition, installation and exploitation of a minor. Also, individual system had serious shortcomings, such as the: 9 possession of a large number of small cooling machine cooling capacity and hence less effective; 9 number of personnel involved in the exploitation; 9 considerable investment funds; 9 load elktro system;

1032

increased the total power provided by compared with the real needs (power of the individual cooling stations; 9 are selected by the maximum cooling power needed for each object in particular); 9 requires a larger amount rezrvne and duplicate equipment; The aforementioned disadvantages of reducing the energy and economic efficiency of air conditioning. For a broader and more effective use of air conditioning systems of residential buildings and proizvodnjih stvaruju the centralized systems of energy supply that is cooling. cold water. Comparison with individual plants supply cooling energy district cooling has many advantages: 9 lower specific investment costs for equipment per KW of installed cooling power; 9 lower the floor surface cooling station by KW cooling capacity; 9 the lower the required installed power due neistovremene maximum cooling energy needs for air conditioning systems of various objects; 9 reduces the need for spare parts; 9 possibility of qualitative and quantitative regulation; 9 a high degree of remote cooling coefficient; 9 reduced the number of personnel servicing facility, etc..; The basic lack of district cooling is: 9 loss of energy in the network of cooling pipes of cold water; 9 requires the isolation of the pipeline; 9 impossibility of simultaneous supply of air conditioning systems and manufacturing plants that have the need for lower temperatures; For ostavrenje cost remote cooling is very important to correctly determine the cooling load of buildings.In the design district cooling system (cold water supply system) is necessary to dispose of the following data: 9 the distance between objects and dimensions of buildings; 9 Total peak load; 9 coefficient jednovremenosti peak load and medium load coefficient; 9 type of facility applied for air conditioning uobjektima; To reduce the investment and exploitation costs in the district cooling system is applied sverishodno higher temperature drop of water. For example, using the water temperature falls to 10 C instead of 7 C , characteristic of a decentralized system omoguuije reduce water consumption for the 33% . Investment costs of pipelines for transport of cold water is about 28% of the cost [6]. The reduction in water consumption and thereby reduce the diameter of the pipeline can be save in investment funds. The analysis found that compared with the decentralized system, remote (centralized) system for investment costs by 25% cheaper. If the value of the cooling station is about the value of the whole system, provided savings in the pipeline is reached in the forefront, due to the reduction of installed capacity using a centralized system (district) water supply, and the second, due to lower specific cost of refrigeration machinery, refrigeration per unit of energy produced. For example, 25 units of decentralized air conditioning system with its own cooling plants with total installed power of 23,000 (KW), taking into account the coefficient jednovremenosti, we can supply area with the cooling system of the five machines, the total installed sang for the preparation of cold water 17 600 (KW). Ekspaltacioni the remote cooling costs are reduced by 20%.
0 0

8. SIGNS
ob )- amplitude of daily changes load cooling, KW A(Qhl ob Qhl

- amount of heat for cooling of individual buildings, KW - hour cooling load primary sources, KW - hour peak load cooling sources, KW - annual cooling load of basic resources, KW

x Qos

Q
Q

x vr os g,x

vr -annual peak load cooling sources, KW Qg ,x Z - time during the day, h ob Z Qhl ,max - time of maximum cooling load, h

1033

REFERENCES
[1] Sokolov,E.J.:Teplifikacija I teplovije seti, Energoizdat, str.360.Moskva, 1982 [2] Bogosovskij,V.N.:Teplovoj reim zdanija, M. Strojizdat,1979 [3] Tihonov,B.S.:Centralizovannoe teplohladosnabenie gorodskogo hazjajstva, str.187.Moskva,1968 [4] Klojan .L.T.: Puti umanjenija letnih nagrzok ohladenija zdanijaPromilenosti Armenii 1968, No 11. [5] Gosling T.: The district cooling idea the bulding services, Engineer, the Jornaol of the IHVE, vol.41.1974.god [6] Krum .D., Robertc.B.: Kondicionirovanie vozdha I ventilacija zdanija , (pre.s anfl. Pod red.E.E.Karpisa) M.Strojizdat,1980, 399c [7] Refrig and Air conditioning ,128 vob.74 [8] Refrig and Air conditioning 1971 vob.74, No 879 [9] Andre.F.Misenar: Grejanje I hlaenje zraenjme (prevod sa francskog ) Graevinska knjiga, Beograd , 1966 [10] Recknagel, Sprenger, Schramek,eprkovi:Grejanje i klimatizacija,Interklima, Vrnjaka Banja,2002.

1034

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DETERMINING THE OPTIMAL TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE OF CENTRALIZED HOT WATER HEAT SUPPLY OF LEPOSAVIC
efik M. Bajmak
University of Pristina - Faculty of Technical Sciences, Pristina, SERBIA, e-mail: bajmak@yahoo.com

Summary: On the basis of projections of the number of apartments, in Leposavic the 2010th The 5,000 inhabitants live.. The existing heating systems for the most part are from individual furnaces. Joint systems are small and serve mainly administrative and production facilities. Analysis showed that the total installed thermal capacity of about 13MW boiler. This paper presents a selection of heat carrier, the possibility of transport of heat hot water, there is a view of determining the optimal temperature difference of hot water in the system of centralized heat supply, depending on water temperature distribution of the spent fuel, the impact of dispositions and dimensions of heat to the optimum temperature, optimum temperature dependence of consumed electricity, district heating effect of temperature on the heat losses and the effect of temperature district heating in total expenditures. This paper presents excerpts from &quot;Study on the heating of the city Leposavic, No. 243007A, approved by the Ministry of Science and Environmental Protection. Keywords: optimal temperature, district heating, hot water.

1. SELECTION OF HEAT CARRIR AND HEAT SUPPLY SYSTEM

Selection of heat carrier and heat supply system is determined by the technical and economic considerations, and depends mainly on the character and type of heat source heat load. It is recommended that the maximum simplification of the supply heat. The system is simpler, it is less expensive and more reliable in operation The simplest solution gives the application of a single carrier of heat for all types of thermal loads. If the heat load settlement consists of heating, ventilation and hot water consumption, the heating is applied usually double pipe system with water. In cases where other than heating, ventilation and hot water consumption in the village there is a technological burden, which requires a higher heat potential in the rational use of heating systems trocevnih with water. One of the starting line of the system is used to cover the burden of high potential. When choosing a system of heat supply and heat carrier parameters count all the technical and economic indicators for all elements of the system: sources, networks, consumers. Energy is more suitable than water vapor. Great importance is proper selection of parameters heat carrier. When the supply of heat from the boiler, the rational is, as a rule, choose a high heat carrier parameters, permitted under the terms of the heat transport techniques in the network of its use in consumers. Increase heat carrier parameters leads to a reduction in diameter of heat network and reducing the cost of pumping (of water).When heating, it is necessary to include the influence of heat carrier parameters of thermal plant in Economics . In all of the hot water is used in a much larger number of cases and for longer distances almost exclusively. Today in the world of money used to transport heat up. Less often in larger distances. On the basis of experiences with us in the world for heating cities to adopt hot water as heat carrier [1,2,3,4,8].

2. ABLE TRANSPORT HEAT HOT WATER

In this way the transport of heat commonly used double pipe system, and the possible use and a pipe system. Using a pipe system is possible in the case of low temperature level, when it comes to the use of waste heat from thermal processes, or for the transportation of sanitary hot water (SHW) to the consumer.

1035

The main elements are taken into account when considering the thermal power to be transported from source to heat consumer area. Another important element is the type and composition of the technical unit for the production of electricity and heat. The third element consists of investments in pipelines and pumping stations, where it should be borne in mind the ways of taking the pipeline. Based on these three makings and other influential sizes such as [2,3,4,6]: 9 price of electricity; 9 temperature return water heating system (DHS); 9 water temperature in the discharge DHS ; 9 working time of the year; 9 depreciation period; 9 maintenance; selects the optimum diameter of the primary heating network (when it is mentioning influential parameters vary, if you can not be taken as not changing). The most important effect of them has a water temperature in the discharge of heating (DHS, and for her to find the optimal value. Increasing the temperature of water in the discharge (DH), to reduce investment costs in case of transfer of the same thermal power (the return temperature is in these considerations to a selected constant DHS . However, with increasing water temperature in the discharge reduces the production of electric power with combined proizvodnje.Isto so, with increasing water temperature in the discharge DG growing losses toplote.Moe conclude that for larger distances correspond to higher initial temperature of water in terms of reducing investment, but the reverse effect on the cost of electricity generation. To determine the optimal temperature difference-refund discharge, and the optimal initial temperature, to make analysis for DHS and electric energy system taking into account the possible unit for combined production. In this we should bear in mind the yearly load diagram and the possible optimal values of the degree of district heating. Hydraulic analysis of conditions in the system can be defined by the required pump power and pump power substations. Then, for different variants can be calculated the total cost of transport of heat, where they take into account the investment costs of pipelines and pump stations, pumping costs, the cost of heat loss and save fuel compared to the reference variant, as well as lack of electric power. 2.1. The holder of heat According to the network in which circulates, and holds the heat is called the primary or secondary. The primary carrier of the heat is also known under the name of the holder of heat at a distance. It is mostly water, which circulates mainly in the closed circle; money, mainly saturated. The secondary heat carrier is one that is used by consumers: the water that circulates in a closed circle for space heating, air heating, ventilation and air conditioning rooms, steam for space heating, for industrial and technological processes for sterilization in hospitals, for cooking and washing and so on. The primary carrier of the heat is transported from the source of heat (power plants) to consumers primarily for the purpose of heating, so it is understandable that the particular interest of its temperature-soil and return, and then the pressure. You have to treat only the basic elements that cause drainage and return temperature of primary heat holders.Certainly that was the first between the basic elements of the right computational temperature of secondary heat carrier. You never should lose sight of the problem of combined production of heat and electricity, which is always closely related to the proper selection of spreadsheet proraunskog temperature and pressure of the primary heat holders. Based on studies made in relation to supply heat, in terms of choice of primary carrier of heat derived the following conclusions: 9 hot water is generally a better carrier of heat from water vapor; 9 water vapor as the primary carrier of the heat out of the question only in exceptional cases, such as, for example. requirements of technological processes of some industries and the like. In such cases the heat source should be located as close to the center of consumption, and if possible even better combined transport of heat by using hot water and steam; 9 9 optimum temperature of hot water as the primary heat holders are under 150
0 0 0

C;
0

zone of maximum temperature of hot water as the primary heat carrier is between 150

C and

180 C , ie. computational maximum hot water temperature is 150 C .; In addition to everything that was said regarding the temperature of boiling water, that is. that should in principle seek election as lower temperatures if the consumers for their process does not require a higher temperature. You
1036

need to say more and that the maximum calculated temperatures (between 150 C and 180 C ) all parts of the network exposed to heat not only relatively high temperatures and pressures higher than 5(bara ) , in order to prevent water evaporation. Fittings, regulators and others. must be able to withstand a high temperature and high pressure, and are expensive and the longer distances razvoenje difficult to develop. In addition, the price of heat increases with the temperature of hot water, so the same amount of heat from 180 C more expensive than a 150 C , even when the heating is done in stages. This somewhat removes the lack of time as to these temperatures for only a few days ( peak load ) [2,3,5,4]. The selection of the most affected by the way temparture connecting individual household installation of heat distribution network. Just connect your home network to the distribution network DH can come into consideration only when the highest (computational) hot water temperature does not exceed 120 0 C do 130 0 C , that is. when the temperature of hot water when operating mainly under 1.[2,3,4,5].
0 0

100 0 C , you can see the pictures

optimal distribution of water Top(C) temperature Top(C)

200 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30

40 70 110 150 180

outdoor temperature project Tsp(C) Tsp(C) Figure 1: The optimum temperature drain hot water at the temperature of external air At higher temperatures of hot water it is impossible to directly connect a home network to the network central heating, radiator, because neither of cast steel or wrought, can not withstand the pressures that correspond to these temperatures .Stoga need to set heat exchangers heating network and home network (primary and secondary networks). The selection of the highest calculated temperature of boiling water, to a large extent affected by heat loss or decrease in temperature as a result of heat loss.

3. DETRMINING THE OPTIMAL TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE OF HOT WATER IN THE SYSTEM OF CENTRALIYED SUPPLY HEAT
Determination of optimum temperature of hot water when heating is of great importance in modern heating technology. On the derived heat of the world and our country adopted the temperature of hot water are moving in the range of 110 C 200 C , which means that the heat capacity can change over three times, in other nepromenjenih conditions. For proper selection of temperature in the heat it is necessary to determine all the influential factors and find a mutual relationship between njih. By pure strict technical parameters that affect the optimal temperature is necessary to take into account the cost of these factors, it depends on them optimum temperature of the system of centralized supply thermal energy. Disposition of heat network and its size affect the optimal temperature. Also the fuel consumption for a heat in combined heat and power consumption for post-pumping hot water are the elements that determine the optimum temperature. Finally, the heat losses in the network will certainly influence the choice of heating temperature During the optimization of temperature differences and return water discharge can be ignored costs transmitting station, as they are about the same order of magnitude for the same thermal power. The group of operating costs can be list:
0 0

1037

costs for transport carrier heat-pumping; cost of loss of heat; costs of electricity generation combined method compared to the variant with the lowest temperature discharge; Given the limited possibilities of lowering the temperature in the return pipeline, effectively increasing the temperature difference is achieved by raising the temperature in the suction line, which reduces the production of electricity, with combined production. It can be taken that the temperature differences depend on pumping stations and district heating networks. Pumping costs, loss of heat, the investment in pumping stations and networks are also changing depending on the pressure drop and temperature difference of water. So the total costs come in the form of an equation that depends on two variables[4]:

9 9 9

TUK = f (p, TV )
Minimum function

(1)

TSIS = TGT + TPS + TMC + TKE + TOST

(2) could be found if the first found a good value for 1 (or 2), and the conditions:

(2)

f (popt , TV ) ( TV )

(3)

To determine the difference . As the cost of electricity is not possible with sufficient accuracy method variant test. 3.1. Temperature dependence of the spent fuel

mathematically TV expressed by virtually projecting the optimal temperature difference is determined by the

At the individual and region boiler house and heating fuel consumption does not change with increasing temperature in transmission. That is why the boiler hous and heating plant justified to go with the higher temperatures until the problem changes thickness and type of pipe fittings due to the high pressures and temperatures. Thus the total annual fuel consumption can be considered that does not depend on temperature differences, ie. be the regarded as a constant[4]. Total heat production during the year can be expressed in the following manner:

QGOD = QOS , K + QVR, K

Fuel consumption analogous expression (4) in the plant will be

(4)

BGOD = BOS,K + BVR,K

Fuel consumption

(5)

BOS,K and BVR, K can be further expressed in the form of:

(6)

BOS , K = bOS QOS , K ; BVR, K = bVR QVR, K

Specific consumption of fuel in the boilers is calculated by the expression:

bKO = bOS = bVR =

Where:

1 H dVK MR

(kg

KJ )

(7)

VK -peak efficiency boilers

MR -efficiency heat networks

1038

3.2. The influence of dispositions and dimensions of heat to the optimum temperature Come out for the construction of any shares, reduced the heat transferred during the year can be expressed by equation:

TMR =

rMR a Li
i =1

nmax Qmax

rMR b d i Li
i =1

nmax Qmax

rMR c d i2 Li nmax Qmax

(8)

Sum

d L
i =1 i

= M -called material characteristics of the network.

From the expression (8) can be seen to determine the network costs, it is necessary to know the characteristic M material. Material properties depend on the diameter of the section, and depends on the resistance network. Since M depends on the resistance network, to determine the cost of taking someone to arbitrary the material characteristics. In this way we get a variant networks[3,4].

R0 and adopt

the temperature of the TV , 0 .With these values is performed hydrodynamic calculation network, and receives Material properties depend on the temperature difference TV . If it is determined in a temperature difference TV , 0 , then the expenditure on a temperaturskoj difference, amount to an expression analogous to (8):

TMR =

rMR a Li
i =1

nmax Qmax

0 ,38 rMR bM 0 TV ,0 0 , 38 TV nmax Qmax

0 , 76 rMR cM 0 TV ,0 0 , 76 TV nmax Qmax

(9)

3.3 Optimum temperature dependence of the electrical energy consumed By changing the temperature changes in heat flow with constant heat flux brought. This change affects the consumption of electricity for pumps. The costs for the consumed electricity for pumps enrgiju reduced the heat transferred during the year can be expressed by equation [3,4]:

TEEN = 10 3

Rl (1 + ) L Z PU C EEN V PU cV TV nmax

(10)

3.4 The influence of temperature district heating in the heat losses Heat losses depend on the insulation system, and it is in such cases usually unknown. Based on the experience usually takes the coefficient of heat K = 0,80 1,2 W m 2 K . Total heat losses during the year can be written in the form of equation [3,4]:

sr QGUT = 11,34 10 6 TV t OK (1 + 1 ) K nG d ci Li = Q1 M US 1

(11)

Size

d
1

ci

Li = M US -called suspended material characteristics, and it is the E.P.ubinu be written in the form:
m 1 m 1

M US = d ci Li = M i + 0,15 Li
Or, in the form:

(12)

1039

M US

= M 0 TV 1 TV 0

0 , 38

R0 VO R1 V 1

0 ,19

+ 0,15 Li
1

(13)

In case the heat losses are known with a suspended material characteristic M US 1 and high temperature hot water
SR1 SR TV , for some other conditions, ie. TV

and

M US of the second heat losses will be:

(14)

QGUT

SR M US TV tOK = QGU 1 SR1 M US1 TV tOK

( (

) )

With this in mind, the expenditures for the losses of heat in the heat equation can be expressed:

TTGU = qTGU CTEN = CTEN

Q1 M US Qmax n

(15)

3.5 The influence of temperature on the total district heating costs Total annual costs, given the derived expressions can be written in the following format:

TUK = TGOR + TMR + TPU + TTGU = CON + + 10 3 Rl (1 + )LZ PU C EEN QM + CTEN 1 US V PU cV TV n max Qmax n

rMR S1 Li
1

n max Qmax

0 , 38 rMR S 2 M 0 TV ,0 0 , 38 TV n max Qmax

0 , 76 rMR S 3 M 0 TV ,0 0 , 76 TV n max Qmax

(16)

When combined simultaneous production of electricity and thermal energy leads to fuel savings compared to other systems providing electricity and thermal energy. It was here using the heat of condensation to heat hot water. But not enough heat of condensation to heat water, but are set so. boilers for maximum peak load of the network or the hand takes steam from the higher pritiska. Costs fuel growth with a growth increase of water temperature in the feeder when it comes to heating plants[3,5,4,7]. The expression (16) gives the relationship between temperature district heating and the total expenditure for heating. From the given expression can be seen that the temperature district heating can not explicitly express the dependence of other parameters. The first member of (15), which represents the costs of the thermal network is reduced with increasing differences temparturske feeder and drain water heating pipelines. With the increase in afferent temparture water inevitably increases the water pressure in the network, to avoid isparavnja. After a certain pressure is necessary to change the thickness and type of pipe fittings in the pipeline if it wants to continue to increase the temperature in the feeder lines. In this case there is a price increases pipe networks with time and depreciation. Heat losses in the network are presented rear section expressions (15), and they grow with the increase of temperature per unit area. Istovremnao reduce the surface pipeline with increasing temperature at a constant amount of heat transferred, so that he can not tell in advance whether they grow or decline, and with what intensity. From the general expression (15) can not also determine the impact of a number of parameters in temperature district heating. Therefore, we will conduct further analysis on the example of the town of Leposavic . From the general expression (15) can not also determine the impact of a number of parameters in temperature district heating. Therefore, we will conduct further analysis on the example of the town of Leposavic . Now, on the basis of equation (17) can calculate the annual consumption of fuels (coal, fuel oil, gas) to produce heat. It is:

BGOD = BOS,K + BVR,K = bOS QOS, K + bVRQVR,K

(17)

1040

bOS = bVR =

1 H d OS MR 1 H dVK MR

1 = 0,000105 = 1,05 10 4 (kg KJ ) 12500 0,8 0,95 1 = 0,0000275 = 2,75 10 5 (kg KJ ) 42500 0,8 0,95

(18)

(19)

Taking into account valuable to the bottom of the Kosovo lignite thermal power and fuel oil H d ,UG

= 12500(KJ kg ) , H d ,MA = 42500(KJ kg )

and the values of previous coefficients, then

expression (17) has the following form:

BGOD = BOS,K + BVR,K = 0,000105 QOS, K + 0,0000275 QVR,K

(20)

Based on the overall analysis of the conditions of the town of Leposavic in Figure 2 shown in the diagram according to the optimal temperature of the total cost.

800000

Total costs Tto (Eura) Tuk(Eura)

700000 600000 500000 400000 300000 200000 100000 0 0 50 100 150 Temperature diference 0,05 0,1 0,15 0,2 0,3 0,4

Figure 2: Dependence of the optimal temperature difference of the total annual cost

4. CONCLUSION
Based on previous analysis can be determined as follows: 9 the city boiler (heating), which is not produced Electricity is justified to go with the higher temperature in the drainage water heating pipelines. Just to go to the temperature of a problem until the changes of thickness and type of pipe fittings as a result of pressure and temperature; 9 heat losses in the network of little change observed in a wide interval and grow relatively slowly with increasing water temperature in the feeder; 9 Optimum temperature district heating decreases with increasing the energy cost of electricity. Somewhere from 90 C to 140 C optimal temperature takes the stabilizing flow; 9 The terms of the city Leposavic we can safely adopt a system 135/75 C;

REFERENCES
[1] Generalni urbanistiki plan LEPSAVI 2010, JP. Direkcija za urbanizam izgradnju Kragujevca, Kragujevac, ktbar 1994.gd [2] J.J.Sklv: Tplifikacija i tpltne mree, IRGraevinska knjiga Begrad 1985; [3] Martin.B.Termtehniar,Nauna knjiga , Begrad 1987

1041

[4] efik B. Tplifikacini sistemi, Skripta, Pritina ,1987 [5] aspisi, KGH, Energija, Elektrprivreda,itd [6] Internet stranice [7] Studija tplifikaciji Bajne Bate, inrnet verzija [8] Prstrni plan energetike i ptimalna struktura energije S Pritina d 2010.gdine, ENERGPRJEKTBEGRAD , INKS-PRITINA, 1984.godine

1042

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ECOLOGICAL ASPECTS DISTRICT HEATING SYSTEM IN LEPOSAVIC

efik M. Bajmak
University of Pristina - Faculty of Technical Sciences, Pristina, SERBIA, e-mail: bajmak@yahoo.com

Summary: On the basis of projections of the number of apartments, in Leposavic the 2010th The 5,000 inhabitants live. Existing systems are mostly heated from individual furnaces. Joint systems are small and serve mainly administrative and manufacturing facility. Analysis showed that the total installed thermal house capacity of about 13MW boiler. This work was carried out calculation of fuel consumption, estimate emissions from chimneys, flue gas volumes, estimate amounts of sulfur dioxide content at the exit of the chimney, the calculation of nitrogen oxide content at the exit of the chimney, the total content of SO2 and NO2 of the chimney, fly ash and the calculation of soot exit from the chimney and the chimney height calculation required. This paper presents excerpts from Study on the heating of the city Leposavic, No. 243007A, approved by the Ministry of Science and Environmental Protection. Key words: emission, sulfur dioxide, nitrogen, ash, chimney height

1.THE INFLUENCE OF DISTRICT HEATING ON THE ENVIRONMENT

District heating system piping in Leposavic are laid in the ground. Substations are placed in rooms or buildings shafts, so that these parts of the district heating system does not affect the environment. The district heating system is hot water temperatures up to, whose prominence in the environment does not come up with lasting consequences. By highlighting can occur in case of accidents, which rarely dogaa. The most greater influence on the environment with heating, especially products of combustion [1,2,8].

2. CALCULATION OF FUEL CONSUMPTION FOR THE HEATING SEASON TO DIN 2967

Consumption of fuel per hour at full boiler plant is calculated by the expression [3,4]:

Bh =
Where :

3600 Qn GSIS H d

(1)

Bh -consumption of fuel per hour at boiler plant , kg / h Qn -production capacity , KW

GSIS -overall efficiency of heating systems,

H d -lower thermal power fuel, KJ kg
Fuel consumption for the heating season:

BGS = bn B
Where:

(2)

BGS - Fuel consumption for the heating season kg / sezoni

1043

bn =
Where :

f h f nGS SD t max

(3)

bn - number of hours full drive of the season: h / sezoni fh - time factors of heat, f - other factors influence nGS - hours of heating during the heating days, h SD = 2848 - number of degree-days for Leposavi in literturi does not exist, and has taken data for
Kosovska Mitrovica

t max = tU t S - maximum temperature difference, 0 C

tU = 20 0 C
- temperature space heating C - outdoor temperature project Leposavi
0

t S = 18

The solid fuel boiler, in Leposavic, commonly used fuel is coal from the mine Pljevlja and the analysis done for this coal, the Kosovo lignite and crude oil. The complete analysis of fuel consumption is shown in Figure 1[1,2,3,4].

Figure 1: The dynamics of fuel consumption

3. CALCULATION OF EMISSIONS THE CHIMNEY

Combustion of fossil fuels, depending on the chemical composition and the way we get smoke combustion gases in which there are: carbon dioxide, water vapor, sulfur oxides , nitrogen oxides, soot and fly pepa. Baseline data for the calculation of emissions from stacks are built boiler parameters and fundamental analysis of the fuel. In this analysis heed to products of combustion in the flue gases that pollute the human environment in particular: 9 Oxides of sulfur 9 Oxides of nitrogen 9 Fly ash and soot 3.1 Elementary analysis of fuel

1044

The data of elementary analysis for Kosovo lignite, Ibarski brown coal , Pljevlja lignite and crude oil are shown in table T1. [1,2,3,4,8]: Fuel type Kosovo lignite Ibarski brown coal Pljevlja lignite Oil fuel C % 37,00 60,22 29,38 84,10 able T1. Elementary analysis of fuel H S N O % % % % 3,00 1,00 0,60 17,90 4,50 3,72 4,46 2,28 0,22 11,19 13,00 0,20 0,40 2,0 W % 21,00 6,18 46,00 0,10 A % 19,50 20,92 10,93 0,20 Hd KJ/kg 13035 24137 10006 41500

3.2. The amount of flue gaosva [3,4] Theoretical amount of air for combustion:

V 0 = 0,0880(C + 0,375S s ) + 0,265H 0,03330

The amount of gas three atoms

(4)

VRO 2 = 1,866

C + 0,375 S s 100

(5)

The amount of nitrogen :

V N = 0,79V 0 + 0,8

N 100

(6)

Theoretical amount water vapor:

0 VH = 0,11H + 0,0124W + 0,0161V 0 2O

(7)

Excess air at the end of the boiler manufacturer provides boiler and it usually ranges from = 1,4 2,5 The amount of water vapor in the wet combustion products at the end of the boiler
0 V H 2O = V H + 0,0161( 1)V 0 2O

(8)

The total amount of wet combustion products

V = VRO2 + V H 2O + ( 1)V 0
boilers t ga

(9)

Flue gas temperature at the exit from the boiler manufacturer provides boiler and it is usually for hot water

= 180 0 C .

Fuel consumption in the boiler room when working with normal production is shown in figure 1. Volume flow of combustion products is:

V ' = VB

(10)

The amount or volume flow of flue gases is reduced to the condition that the government at the end of the chimney is:

V =V'

273 + t g 273

(11)

1045

4. CALCULATION OF THE AMOUNT CONTENT OF SULFUR DIOXIDE AT THE EXIT OF THE CHIMNEY
The amount of sulfur dioxide content at the exit of the chimney is calculated by the expression:
' " SO SO S 2 = 20 B 1 1 2 100 100 100

GSO2

(12)

Where : B -amount of fuel burn in one hour: kg h

S -contents combustible sulfur in fuel,% ' SO - rate of sulfur dioxide that is retained in the fly ash, 2
'' SO
2

- rate of sulfur dioxide that is retained in the particle separator

The small boiler rooms in Leposavic, no steam particles, and the equation changes:

G SO2

S 1 SO2 = 2B 100 100

'

(13)

5. CALCULATION OF THE CONTENT OF NITROGEN OXIDES AT THE EXIT OF THE CHIMNEY

During the combustion of fuel in the boiler, resulting nitrogen oxides, primarily oxidation of nitrogen from the air, directly in the combustion zone. The most intensive occurrence of nitrogen oxides in the zone of highest temperature in the furnace. The amount of oxides of nitrogen most affected by temperature in the combustion zone, the concentration of oxygen (excess air ratio) and time to keep the reactant in the zone of high temperatures. With the increase of excess air in the furnace, increasing opportunities formation of nitrogen oxides[1,2,3,4,8]. For practical calculations and measurements of quantities of nitrogen oxides are converted to nitrogen dioxide. Calculation of amounts of nitrogen oxides in the combustion products is performed according to the amount of nitrogen oxides that result from fuel combustion conditional:

G NO2 =

K B H d 8,2 10 5 Qn B H d = H US H US

(14)

Where : K - coefficient which includes the creation of nitrogen oxides in a combustion pounds of conditional fuel capacity calculated for the furnaces, g kg

Qn - capacity furnaces, KW
B - amount of fuel that burns for one hour, kg h H d - lower thermal power fuel KJ kg

H US = 29310 - lower thermal power of conditional fuel KJ kg

6. THE TOTAL CONTENT SO2 AND NO2 THE CHIMNEY
Concentration of SO2 and NO2 in the ground-floor layer of air is proportional to the amount of gases that come through the chimney into the atmosphere, and nitrogen oxide can be reduced to sulfur oxide, equivalent to the level of toxicity in relation [3,4]::

1046

G
MDK SO2
Where:

G SO2 MDK SO2

G NO2 MDK NO2

(15)

G -total amount of the chimney, g

G NO2 -amount from the chimney, g s

GSO2 -amount SO2 from the chimney, g s MDK SO2 -maximum allowable concentration SO2 which is, 0,5 mg m 3

MDK NO2 -maximum allowable concentration NO2 which is; 0,085 mg m 3

)
(16)

The total amount of oxides of sulfur and nitrogen from the chimney, according to the above, one can calculate the sulfur oxide:

G = G

SO2

MDK SO2 MDK NO2

G NO2 = G SO2 + 5,88G NO2

7. CALCULATION OF FLY ASH AND SOOT FROM THE CHIMNEY AT THE EXIT

q A q u + 4 G p = B 1 c 1 4 100 100 100 100

Where:

(17)

G p -content of fly ash and soot in the flue gases at the exit of the chimney,
B - the amount of fuel that burns for one hour, kg h

c -degree of separation or cyclone filter kg h u -of the ash that comes from the flue gases
8. CALCULATING THE REQUIRED CHIMNEY HEIGHT
Required chimney height is determined by the condition that the size of the largest concentrations

q 4 -heat loss due to incomplete combustion, A -ash content in fuel,%

Cm of any

pollutants in the ground-floor layer of air must not be higher than the mean daily maximum allowable concentration of MDK that the main pollutants from the boilers is[3,4]: 9 9 Flay ash and soot Sulfur dioxide

0,5 mg m 3

0,5 mg m 3 9 Nitrous Oxide 0,085 mg m

In the presence of the same pollutants from various sources of pollution (other chimneys, for example) there is a concentration C f , so in this case that condition is met:

( )

C m MDK C f
Where:

(18)

C f = C fSO2 + 5,88C fNO2

Minimum chimney height is calculated from the form:

1047

H=

AG F MDK C F

1 V T

(19)

Where : H -Chimney height above the ground, m A -Coefficient, which depends on the meterolokih terms and conditions which include vertical and horizontal scattering pollutants G -The amount of pollutants, emissions from the chimney into the atmosphere, g s

F - Coefficient which takes into account the rate of deposition of particles,

C f -Existing pollution from other sources of pollution, mg m 3

V -Volume of gas coming from the chimney of the flue gas temperature, m 3 s
T -Difference tempartura gas at the exit of the chimney and outside air temperature of medium, K The coefficient A is taken to our conditions that the 120. The coefficient F is adopted the following recommendations: When the chimney height calculation when the main criterion SO2 is adopted F = 1,0 ; The chimney height calculation is the main criterion when soot and ashes, adopt the following: 9 F = 2,0 -the degree of separation equipment for purification of greater than 90%,
9 9 In this way it gets called. First; value of chimney height. In order to get the final value of the height of the chimney, it is necessary to repeat the calculation by replacing the values obtained H , (respectively H 1 ) in the following terms:

F = 2,5 -the degree of separation equipment for purification of greater than 75%, F = 3,0 -the degree of separation equipment for processing less than 75%,

H 2 = H1
Where:

m1n1 1

(20)

H1 -size obtained in the first calculation, m1 , n1 -coefficients which include conditions exit gases from the chimney.
Ratios

and

n are calculated by the following forms:

1 0,67 + 0,1 f + 0,343 f
2 10 w0 D m s2K 2 H T

m=
Where:

(21)

f =
Where:

(22)

D -diameter of the light output of chimneys, m

w0 -, flue gas velocity in the exit of the chimney, m s

Recommended flue gas velocity at the exit of the chimney are: 9 20 25( m s ) -height of the chimney of 120m 9 20 30( m s ) -height of the chimney of 150m Flue gas velocity can be calculated from the form:

w0 = 1,27V D 2
Where : D - exit hole diameter chimney, m The coefficient n depends on the parameter

(23)

Vm , is calculated by the form:

(24)

V T H For Vm 0,3 adopt for n = 3 Vm = 0,65 3

1048

For For

0,3 < Vm 2 is calculated from the expression n = 3

(Vm 0,3)(4,36 Vm )

(25),

Vm > 0,3 adopt for n = 1

If the difference obtained values H 1 and H 2 is significant, is the accurate calculation. Furthermore, following sizes for the m 2 and n 2 are determined by the value H 2 , and H 3 are determined by the size of the form:

H3 = H2

m2 n2 m1 n1

(26)

The overall analysis of the Kosovo lignite, Pljevlja coal and crude oil is shown in the table T2.

9. CONCLUSION
Based on the analysis revealed that the total content of SO2 and NO2 and pepa in granicama. Chimney height allowed for these facilities fuel oil fired boiler units is 64 (m).

REFERENCE
[1] Generalni urbanistiki plan LEPSAVI 2010, JP. Direkcija za urbanizam izgradnju Kragujevca, Kragujevac, ktbar 1994.gd [2] J.J.Sklv: Tplifikacija i tpltne mree, IRGraevinska knjiga Begrad 1985; [3] Martin.B.Termtehniar,Nauna knjiga , Begrad 1987 [4] efik B. Tplifikacini sistemi, Skripta, Pritina ,1987 [5] aspisi, KGH, Energija, Elektrprivreda,itd [6] Internet stranice [7] Studija tplifikaciji Bajne Bate, inrnet verzija [8] Prstrni plan energetike i ptimalna struktura energije S Pritina d 2010.gdine, ENERGPRJEKTBEGRAD , INKS-PRITINA, 198

Table 2 Elemntarna analysis of fuel Kosovo lignite Oil fuel Pljevlja lignite The amount of flue gsova Kosovo lignite Oil fuel Pljevlja lignite

Carbon C(%) 37 84,1 29,38 Vo m3/kg 4,05 10,88 3,16

Hydrogen H(%) 3 13 2,28 V(RO2) m3/kg 0,70 1,58 0,55

Sulfur Ss(%) 1 2 0,22 V(N2) m3/kg 3,35 8,60 2,59

Nitrogen oxygen N+O(%) 18,5 0,6 11,19 V(H2O) m3/kg 0,66 1,61 0,87

Humidity W(%) 21 0,1 46 V(VP) m3/kg 6,42 16,79 5,38

Ash A(%) 19,5 0,2 10,93 Tg C 150,00 150,00 150,00

Excess air ALFA 2,25 2,25 2,25 B kg/s 4,40 1,15 5,73

Thermal power fuel Hd(KJ/kg) 13035 41500 10006 V' m3/s 28,20 19,31 30,78 V m3/s 43,69 29,92 47,70

V(H2O) m3/kg 0,74 1,83 0,94

Calculation of sulfur B dioxide at the exit of the chimney t/h Kosovo lignite 15,82 Oil fuel 4,14 Pljevlja lignite 20,61 Calculation of nitrogen B oxide at the exit of the chimney t/h

ETA(SO2)' 0,10 0,10 0,10 Hd KJ/kg

ETA(SO2)

G(SO2) g/s 79,11 41,41 22,67 G(NO2) g/s

0,00 0,00 0,00 Hus K KJ/kg

1049

Kosovo lignite 15,82 13035 29310 3,05 21,49 Oil fuel 4,14 41500 29310 3,05 17,91 Pljevlja lignite 20,61 10006 29310 3,05 21,49 Ukupan iznos SO2 i G(SO2) G(NO2) MDK(SO2) MDK(NO2) NO2 iz dimnjaka g/s g/s mg/m3 mg/m3 Kosovo lignite 79,11 21,49 0,50 0,09 Oil fuel 41,41 17,91 0,50 0,09 Pljevlja lignite 22,67 21,49 0,50 0,09 The amount of fly ALFA pepeela and soot B ETAc ETA4 A q4 u from the chimney t/h Kosovo lignite 15,82 70,00 2,00 19,50 2,00 0,30 Oil fuel 4,14 70,00 2,00 0,20 2,00 0,30 Pljevlja lignite 20,61 70,00 2,00 10,93 2,00 0,30 Calculating the A G F Cf CON1 V required chimney height g/s mg/m3 m3/s Kosovo lignite 120 205,50 1,00 0,25 98639,00 43,69 Oil fuel 120 146,74 1,00 0,25 70435,04 29,92 Pljevlja lignite 120 149,06 1,00 0,25 71549,79 47,70 Check the required D V W f1 Vm1 m1 height chimney m m3/s m/s m/s2K Kosovo lignite 1,5 43,69 24,66 1,27 2,75 0,87 Oil fuel 1,5 29,92 16,89 0,73 2,51 0,94 Pljevlja lignite 1,5 47,70 26,92 2,15 3,01 0,80 Check the required D V W f1 Vm1 m1 height chimney m m3/s m/s m/s2K Kosovo lignite 1,5 43,69 24,66 1,46 2,82 0,85 Oil fuel 1,5 29,92 16,89 0,78 2,54 0,93 Pljevlja lignite 1,5 47,70 26,92 2,69 3,12 0,77

SUMA(G) g/s 205,50 146,74 149,06 Gp g/s 163,49 23,21 169,71 DT K 130,00 130,00 130,00 n1 1,00 1,00 1,00 n1 1,00 1,00 1,00

CON2

m 0,06 74,36 0,06 66,93 0,05 62,42 H2 DELTA m 69,32 -7,27 64,93 -3,08 55,72 -12,03 H2 DELTA m 68,56 1,10 64,66 0,42 54,59 2,01

1050

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

A COMPARATIVE SYNTHESIS OF N-(SUBSTITUTED PHENYL)-OISOBUTYL THIOCARBAMATES

Danijela V. Brkovi,1 Milutin M. Milosavljevi,2 Aleksandar D. Marinkovi1
1

Faculty of Technology and Metallurgy, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA 2 Economics Institute Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: vidahem@yahoo.com

Summary: A synthesis of N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates from diisobutyl dixanthogenate and substituted anilines in presence of sodium hypochlorite was accomplished on the laboratory level, and was applied on a semi-industrial scale. The results obtained by the use of the oxidative methods were compared with those obtained by reaction of sodium isobutyl xanthogenacetate and substituted anlines. All reaction products are fully characterized by the use of FTIR, 1H and 13 C NMR, and MS spectrometric methods, and purity was determined by gas chromatographic method. Keywords: N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates, diisobutyl dixanthogenate, sodium hypochlorite, sodium isobutyl xanthogenacetate, synthesis, substituted anilines

1. INTRODUCTION
Synthesis and properties of N-alkyl and N,N-dialkyl-O-alkyl thiocarbamates have been of interest for many years because of their structural characteristics, such as the direct connection of thiocarbonyl group to nitrogen, which contributes to their significant biological activity [1,2]. Wide application of these selective collectors in flotation of copper and zinc ores is well known [2]. They are also fungicidal [3], bactericidal [4], herbicidal [5], pesticidal [6], and pharmaceuticaly active compounds [7]. A general method for their preparation is the reaction of dithiocarbonic acid-O,S-diesters in aqueous or alcoholic solution with primary or secondary amines, and reaction of monothiocarbonic acid-O-ester-chloride with the corresponding amines [8]. Thiocarbonic esters are obtained reacting in a single stage reaction of an alkaline xanthogenate, an amine, and an oxidizer [9]. Also, a synthesis of thiocarbamates from thiol and isocyanates under catalyst- and solvent-free conditions was performed [10]. Besides other procedures known in literature [11-15], alkyl thiocarbamates could be obtained by reaction of sodium or potassium alkyl xanthates in aqueous solution with primary or secondary aliphatic amines and elementary sulfur [16]. Thiocarbamates can also be prepared by reaction of xanthogenates and amines in the presence of nickel(II) sulfate heptahydrate as catalyst [17]. Also, thioncarbamates can be prepared by oxidative treatment of isobutyl dixanthogenate with substituted anilines in presence of sodium hypochlorite (Eq. 1) [18], and by reaction between sodium-isobutyl xantogen acetate (Na-i-BuXAc) and arylamines (Eq. 2) [19]:
S S iBu-O S S O-iBu NH 2 S NaOCl

2
iBu-O N H X

2S

NaCl + H2O

(1)

NH 2 S

S HSCH 2COONa

(2)

iBu-O

SCH2COONa X

iBu-O

N H

where X is: 4-CH3 (1); H (2); 4-Cl (3) and 3-Cl (4).

1051

2. EXPERIMENTAL PART
Method 1 Optimal reaction condition for synthesis of N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates using sodium hypochlorite In a three-necked flask (250 cm3), equipped with magnetic stirrer, dropping funnel, condenser and a thermometer, 100 cm3 of water and 22.8 g (0.075 mol) of 98% diisobutyl dixanthogenate were added. During one hour, 14.1 g (0.15 mol) of 99% aniline solution in 40 cm3 ethanol is added with a vigorous stirring, on that way an increase of temperature to 30 oC occur. After that period, 20.5 g (0.075 mol) of sodium-hypochlorite (130 g of active chlorine/1000 cm3) is added drop wise. The temperature of reaction mixture gradually rose to 45 o C during course of reaction of one hour and half, after which the reaction is completed. In the course of reaction sulphur particles precipitate in the quantity almost corresponding stoichiometrically to the reaction yield. The reaction mixture was filtered on Bchner funnel, the precipitated sulphur is separated as filtration cake from an aqueous emulsion phase of N-phenyl O-ethyl thiocarbamate. The product is separated from the aqueous phase by two ethereal extractions, organic phase was dried with sodium sulphate and ether was distilled at atmospheric pressure. Pure product was obtained by fractional vacuum distillation at 108 oC/(2000 Pa). N-phenyl O-isobutyl thiocarbamate 16.15 g is obtained, representing the yield of 86.8% (GC purity 97.6%). All other N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates were synthesized in an analogous manner to above procedure, using the appropriate amines quantity, and results of the synthesis are given in Table 1. Method 2 Synthesis of sodium chloroaceate Chloroacetic acid 95.0 g (1.0 mol) was slowly added to a reaction flask previously filled with 200 cm3 of water. The mixture was gently mixed. During the dissolution of chloroacetic acid, the temperature decreased from 14 o C to 5 oC. Once the chloroacetic acid was completely dissolved, 53.0 g (0.5 mol) sodium carbonate was added, under continuous stirring of the reactants. Carbon dioxide was evolved during the reaction. Solution is mixed until crystals appear, and volume is reduced to 1/3 of initial solution. The mixture is cooled and filtered following by drying to constant weight. Synthesis of sodium isobutyl xanthogenacetate A solution of potassium isobutyl xanthogenate 20,44 g (0.1 mol) of 92,0 % in 40 ml of water has been added in a three necked flask equipped with a addition funnel, condenser and thermometer. A solution of chloroacetic acid 9.5 g (0.1 mol) in 25 ml of water was added from addition funnel for a period of 10 min, and the reaction mixture was left for further 50 min at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, into reaction mixture was added appropriate volume of 0.1 mol/dm3 HCl, at constant temperature (10 oC), to reach pH 6. Ether was added to the reaction mixture at high stirring speed for extraction of isobutyl xanthogenacetic acid. After separation of water layer, organic layer was washed three times with distilled water following by evaporation of ether. Reaction yield was 80%. Purity of the waxy product have been determined potentiometrically (97.5 %). Synthesis of N-(4-substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates In a three-necked flask (100 cm3), equipped with a magnetic stirrer, addition funnel, condenser and thermometer, ethanol solution of 0.025 mol of appropriate arylamine was added from the addition funnel in period of 10 min in the water solution of sodium isobutyl xanthogenacetate (0.05 mol), providing mixing of the reaction mixture for three hours at 60 oC. Thereafter, the reaction mixture was allowed to stand overnight and, after evaporation of the solvent, fine crystals, which appear after cooling, were filtered. The product was washed with distilled water and dried on the air. Reaction product was firstly vacuum distilled, except nitro and acetyl substituted compounds, followed by crystallization from ethanol. Pure N-(4-substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates had satisfactory elemental analysis, and MS, 1H and 13C NMR data are as follows: N-(4-methylphenyl) O-isbuty thiocarbamate: m.p. 83-4 oC; m/z = 207.11 (M+); 1H NMR /ppm: 0.97 (6H, s, CH(CH3)2), 1.49 (1H, s, CH(CH3)2), 2.38 (3H, s, PhCH3), 3.38 (2H, d, OCH2CH), 6.66 (1H, bs, NH), 6.33-6.92 (4H, m, Ph); 13C NMR, /ppm: 19.4, 21.6, 29.2, 78.2, 126.7, 129.5, 125.6, 138.9. N-phenyl O-isobutyl thiocarbamate: m.p. 74 oC (lit.[20] m.p. 75 oC); m/z = 193.09 (M+); 1H NMR /ppm: 0.91 (6H, s, CH(CH3)2), 1.46 (1H, s, CH(CH3)2), 3.31 (2H, d, OCH2CH), 6.48 (1H, bs, NH), 6.63-7.28 (5H, m, Ph); 13 C NMR, /ppm: 19.8, 29.6, 79.2, 121.7, 126.5, 129.2. N-(4-chlorophenyl) O-isobutyl thiocarbamate: m.p. oC; m/z = 227.05 (M+) (100%), m/z = 229.08 (M+2)+ (36.4%); 1H NMR /ppm: 0.94 (6H, s, CH(CH3)2), 1.54 (1H, s, CH(CH3)2), 3.28 (2H, d, OCH2CH), 6.54 (1H, bs, NH), 6.57-7.19 (4H, m, Ph); 13C NMR, /ppm: 19.6, 28.5, 77.4, 129.7, 131.5, 134.5, 136.7. N-(3-chlorophenyl) O-isobutyl thiocarbamate: m.p. 75-7 oC (lit. [21] m.p. 78 oC) ; m/z = 227.02 (M+) (100%), m/z = 229.03 (M+2)+ (36.6%); 1H NMR /ppm: 0.87 (6H, s, CH(CH3)2), 1.39 (1H, s, CH(CH3)2), 3.48 (2H, d,

1052

OCH2CH), 6.35 (1H, bs, NH), 6.31-7.18 (4H, m, Ph); 13C NMR, /ppm: 19.7, 28.2, 78.2, 124.7, 126.6, 128.2, 130.7, 135.6, 139.5. The IR spectra are obtained by recording of the reaction product in the form of film using IR spectrophotometer FTIR Bomem MB. 1H NMR spectra are recorded in CDCl3 as solvent with TMS internal standard at Varian EM 390 spectrometer. The MS data were obtained using mass spectrometer Varian star 3400 CX. The gaschromatographic analysis is performed at Varian 3400 gas chromatograph, equipped with capillary column DB-1.

3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

In the presented work, a synthesis of eight N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates was performed, starting from disiobutyl dixanthogenate nd substituted anilines in presence of sodium hypochlorite. Study of the reaction mechanism [19] indicates that amine exerts nucleophilic attack on the S-S bond, assisted by present oxidative species, causing probably heterolytic cleavage of that bond. On that way O-isobutyl thiocarbamic acid substituted anilinium salt (intermediary product) and elementary sulfur, as well as N-(substituted phenyl) Oisobutyl thiocarbamate, are produced. In addition, oxidative species in reaction media oxidize intermediary product to starting diisobutyl dixanthogenate. Moreover, the results of the oxidative synthesis has been compared with result of N-(substituted phenyl)-Oisobutyl thiocarbamates synthesis from sodium O-isobutyl xanthogenacetate and substituted anilines, and results are presented in Table 1. Table 1: Yields and purities of N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates obtained according to methods 1 and 2 Method 1 Method 2 No. Compound Yield (%) GCa (%) Yield (%) GC (%) iBuOC(S)NH(PhCH3) 66.0 97.0 68.0 97.5 1 iBuOC(S)NHPh 62.8 97.6 60.2 97.8 2 iBuOC(S)NH(Ph-4-Cl) 58.9 98.0 60.1 98.3 3 iBuOC(S)NH(Ph-3-Cl) 59.4 98.4 61.2 98.0 4 a GC purity Based on the results presented in Table 1, could be observed that satisfactory yields and purities of the N(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates were achieved according to optimal methods 1 and 2. Better results were obtained using sodium hypochlorite, also offering possibilities for synthesis of N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates having strong electron-accepting substituent. Product yields are highly dependent on the electronic effect of the substituent. Somewhat lower yields were achieved in synthesis of electron-acceptor substituted compounds, in both series, and lower yields were achieved according to the Method 1. It clearly shows different influences of electronic substituent effect present at 4substituted anilines on product yield. of having substituent of different electronic properties. Electron-donor substituted anilines are more power nucleophile and opposite is true for electron-acceptor substituted anilines. The structure of amines has low influence on the nucleophilic reactive ability of amines, and further kinetic studies could provide more information about reaction mechanism and reaction rate determining step. Satisfactory reaction yields obtained by method 1 and simple work-up on synthesis of N-(substituted phenyl)-Oisobutyl thiocarbamates allowed implementation of optimized laboratory technology on semi-industrial level. Techno-economical aspects of implemented innovative method 1 indicate extraordinary economic benefit. It was confirmed that reaction product was not present in water, while concentration of reaction waste material was determined to be under maximum contamination limit.

4. CONCLUSION
Presented work describes the optimal synthesis of N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates from potassium isobutyl xanthate and amine in presence of oxidant sodium hypochlorite. A high conversion of starting materials into products was achieved using sodium hypochlorite (58.9% to 66.0%), and the lower was obtained performing synthesis from isobutyl xanthogen acetate (60.1% to 68.0%). The method 1, using sodium hypochlorite oxidant, has been developed at laboratory and applied at semi-industrial level. Techno-economic aspect of the innovative method 1 is extraordinary, while in spite of high yield, method 2 do not offer comparable alternatives to the method 1. In conclusion, the present innovative method provides a powerful and versatile method for the preparation of N-(substituted phenyl)-O-isobutyl thiocarbamates. This method has several unique merits, namely, simple operation, mild reaction conditions, avoids hazardous organic solvents,

1053

uses moderately toxic and inexpensive reagents, also has short reaction times, and high product yields. This new environmentally benign process represents a suitable option to existing methods, and significant contribution to protection of human environment.

REFERENCES
[1] A.B. Glazsrin, A.N. Denisov, V.P. Talzi, B.P. Savin, Tiokarbamaty: Promyishlennost po proizvodstvu mineral'nyih udobrenii, seriz, Himicheskie sredstva zaoitmi rastenii, Nauchno-isledovatelskii institut Tehniko-ekonomicheskii isledovanii, Moskva, 1988. [2] W. Walter, K.D. Bode: Synthesis of thiocarbamates, Angewandte Chemie, Vol. 79, No. 7, (1967), pp. 281293. ISSN 0044-8249. [3] V.P. Savin, V.P. Talzi, N.O. Bek: Org Hbv, Vol 20, (1984) 1842 [4] M.H. Chisholm, M.W. Extine: Reactions of transition metal-nitrogen bonds. 3. Early transition metal N,N-dimethylcarbamates. Preparation, properties, and carbon dioxide exchange reactions Journal of the American Chemical Society, Vol 99, (1977) pp. 782. ISSN 0002-7863. [5] A. EmilioEmilio: S-benzyl-N,N-disec-butylthiocarbamate and its use as a rice field herbicide and a rice growth stimulant, US 3930838, (1976). [6] J.K. Rinehart: S-naphthyl N-alkylthiolcarbamates, US 4059609, (1977). [7] D. Rubin: Method and compositions for inhibiting tumor cell metabolism, US 5240914, (1993) [8] H. Millauer, G. Edelmann: Process for the preparation of thiocarbamic acid O-esters, US 3963768, (1976) [9] G. Calcagno: Preparation of thion- and thiol-carbamic esters, US 4298524, (1981) [10] B. Movassagh, M. Soleiman-Beigi: Synthesis of thiocarbamates from thiols and isocyanates under catalystand solvent-free conditions, Monatshefte fuer Chemie, Vol. 139, (2008) pp. 137-140. ISSN: 0026-9247. [11] V.J. Hall, G. Siasios, E.R.T. Tiekink: Triorganophosphinegold(I) carbonimidothioates. Australian Journal of Chemistry, Vol. 46 (1993) pp. 561-570. ISSN: 0004-9425. [12] M.M. Milosavljevi, A.D. Marinkovi, S. Djordjevi: Himicheskaya promyshlenost' Vol. 60, (2006) pp. 27. [13] M.M. Milosavljevi, A.D. Marinkovi, B. Cekovi, S. Razi: Vaprosy hemii i hemicheskoi tehnologii Vol 6, (2005) pp. 69. [14] F. Karrer: Phenoxy-phenoxy-alkyl-thionocarbamate compounds, US 4060629, (1977). [15] P. Reich, D. Martin; Cyanic acid esters. IV. Molecule spectroscopic investigations of cyanic acid esters. Chemische Berichte. Vol. 98, No. 7, (1965) pp. 2063-9. ISSN:0009-2940. [16] W. Walter, K.D. Bode; Oxidation products of thiocarboxylic acid amides. XV. Oxidation of thiocarbamic acid O-aryl esters to ortho-substituted aryloxyiminomethanesulfenic acids. Justus Liebigs Annalen der Chemie, Vol 698, (1966) pp. 122-30. ISSN:0075-4617. [17] F.A. Bolth, R.D. Crozier: Dialkyl thionocarbamate method, US 3907854, (1975). [18] M.M. Milosavljevi, M. Sovrli, A.D. Marinkovi, D.D. Milenkovi: A synthesis of N-alkyl and N,Ndialkyl O-ethyl thiocarbamates from diethyl dixanthogenate using different oxidants, Monatshefte fuer Chemie, Vol. 141, (2010) pp. 749-755. ISSN:0026-9247. [19] R.E. Sayre: Reaction of arylamines with diethyl thionothiodiformate. Journal of the American Chemical Society, Vol. 74, (1952) pp. 3647-9. ISSN: 0002-7863.. [20] Z. Csuros, Magyar Chemiai Folyoirat, Vol. 50, (1944) pp. 66-81. [21] J. Myska, Organic herbicides. IV. O-Esters of 3-chlorophenylthiocarbamic acid, Collection of Czechoslovak Chemical Communications. Vol 33, No. 12, (1968) pp. 4416-18.

1054

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ORGANOPLASTICS BASED ON POLYAMIDES. PROPERTIES AND APPLICATION IN INDUSTRY

1

A.I. Burya1, E.V. Tkachenko2, V.I. Kolesnikov3, A.P. Sychev

Dniepropetrovsk State Agrarian University, Dnepetrovsk, UKRAINE, e-mail: ol.burya@gmail.com 2 Sevastopol National University of Nuclear Energy and Industry, Sevastopol, UKRAINE 3 Rostov State University of Transport Communication, Rostov, RUSSIA

Summary: The properties of organoplastics (OP) based on aliphatic (PA-6) and aromatic (phenilon -1) polyamides are presented. The examples of applying the elaborated materials in engineering, metallurgy, chemical industry as details of mobile joints for replacing the analogues made from bronze, compressed wood and polymer materials are given. Key words: organoplastics, polyamide-6, phenilon -1, Arimid-, properties, application.

1. INTRODUCTION
The increased requirements to modern construction materials (weight decrease, increase of heat and wearresistance, mechanical properties) conditioned the expanse of application areas of polymer construction materials (PCM) in various fields of industry. These requirements are met by means of synthesizing new polymer materials or modifying the existent ones. Modification of polymer materials is reached due to technology improvement, copolymerization and development of OP, which allows to apply them even in knots operating in particularly rough exploitation conditions. OP which are based on polyamides reinforced with organic fibres deserve particular attention. These materials [1, 2] are characterized by excellent combination of physico-mechanical, thermophysical and tribological properties (see table 1), which offers the challenge to apply them for producing the mobile joints details for various machines and mechanisms. Table 1: Properties of organoplastics reinforced with Arimid- fibre Binder Properties Polyamide-6 Phenilon -1 1.71 1.80 Specific heat, kJ/kg 0.38 0.35 Coefficient of heat conductivity, W/m 2.16 1.52 Coefficient of temperature conductivity, m 2/ 10-7 Brinell hardness, P 28.9 Impact strength, / 2 25.6 Compressive yield stress, P 146* 280 **Coefficient of friction 0.57 0.23 ** Coefficient of linear wear, 10-8 0.36 0.52 * Compression strength, P **The tribologival properties were defined for OP based on PA-6 at PV = 0.4 Pm/sec, phenilon -1 at PV = 0.9 Pm/sec Issuing from the mentioned above, the present work was aimed at investigating OP application in various fields of industry.

1055

2. AGRICULTURAL MACHINES
Combine harvesters. One of the major directions of the Ukrainian agrarian policy lies in increasing the production and productivity of agricultural machines. Short terms of crop harvesting, as well as harsh combine-harvesters exploitation conditions, require developing the machines possessing especially high reliability, those capable of harvesting within the set terms with minimum failure.Thus, according to the National program approved by the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine in 1993, a domestic combine-harvester (CHS) was created. Today Slavutich CHS is a high-efficiency productive combine-harvester which has comprised the maximum of the most modern engineering solutions. However, the combine-harvesters construction has its drawbacks which it obtained from the prototype models and which were not further developed. Application of polymer materials for producing CHS details allows to solve some important tasks, namely: to introduce the non-waste production technology; to increase the resourse limit of the constructions operation [3]. Harversters screw conveyer eyelet. The friction knot of a finger mechanism includes a polymer eyelet (fig. 1) which directs the finger movement fixed in the harversters screw conveyer nests by means of linings.

Figure 1: General view of experimental eyelets installed within the finger mechanism of the combine-harvester screw conveyer at CHS - 9-1 Slavutich Within this construction, a complex intertransition of the finger directing the polymer element is replaced with two simple ones: progressive motion of the finger into the eyelet hole and rotation motion of the eyelet between the linings. The eyelet used to be one of the construction drawbacks for some period of time, such construction materials as PA-6, iron-based powder alloys did not provide for the sufficient operation period. For example, the operation period of an eyelet from PA-6 makes a quarter of the planned resource for CHS [4]. That is why a solution came to implement an eyelet from OP based on polyamide-6 reinforced with Arimid fibre (30 mass %) into a finger mechanism of CHS Don-1500B". At the first stage there were held the development tests of the eyelets: the serial ones produced from PA-6 (Ukraine) and carbon plastic based on PA-6 (Belarus) and the experimental ones made from OP. The testing program presupposed holding a preliminary micromeasuring of all the eyelets every 100 hours of operation for those being tested, and the final micromeasuring after 600 hours of operation. The analysis of experimental data showed that the eyelets from PA6 and carbon plastic possess worse wearresistance than that of the experimental details by 2.6 and 2 times correspondently. As the eyelets from OP showed better results, the next stage of investigation included their field test at Kostenko farm, Pavlograd district, Dniepropetrovsk region. The eyelets were installed at combine-harvester Don 1500, inv. 41471, and underwent testing of harvesting early grain crops from June 15, 2007 to October 30, 2009. Experimental details were exploited at the environs temperature within the range of +15+39 and the relative air humidity of 1585 %. The nonfailure operating time of the combine-harvester with the experimental details made 721 hectares of early grain crops and hectares of sunflower. The technical expertise of the experimental eyelets (micromeasuring was performed by means of a sliding caliper SC-1-125-0,1-2 99344) which was held by the specialists of DSAU and Kostenko farm ststed the following: in the process of investigations the eyelets showed high reliability of operation; did not show failure or breaks; there was no criticism on the test results. The wear of experimental eyelets made 0.6 0.7 mm, while the wear of the serial ones made 1.3 1.6 mm. According to the results of the technical expertise, the solution came to remain the experimental eyelets due to impossibility of maximum permissible wear (2.0 mm) for further tests aimed at defining their limit operation resource.

1056

1 metal gasket; 2 half bearings from OP; 3 metal shells; 4 metal body; 5 basement (plate); 6 key nose

Figure 2: The demountable construction of the friction knot of the key straw- shaker Key straw-shaker bearing. CHS has been one of the problematic knots of combine-harvesters for many years. Today there exist two typical design solutions: a demountable sliding bearing and a fixed construction based on a ball bearing. Most foreign manufacturers prefer the first ones due to their easy replacement. A drawback of this construction is its little operation time. This problem is more obvious in Ukraine where the seasonal combineharvesters operation makes up to 1000 hectares. In such exploitation conditions the sliding bearings require replacement every season. One bearing of this kind costs about 22 25 USD for Dominator 108 combineharvester. Such a combine-harvester has 10 supports set on it. The supports based on sliding bearings fit up combine-harvesters of Ukrainian and Russian production, their operation period makes 3 to 5 seasons. However, in case of failure, the ball bearing replacement at the strawshaker shaft is a labor-consuming process taking 1.5 2 working shifts. For such breakage, Don 1500B combine-harvester can fall short of 60 tons of crops per day. The problem can be solved at the account of applying the demountable support equipped with the sliding bearing from phenilon-1 reinforced with Arimid-T fibre (fig. 2). Application of bearings from OP allowed to significantly increase the supports operation period and its reliability. In this case, the bearings operate in the conditions of dry friction. This supports construction allows to perform maintenance works in field conditions. A special metal frame is constructively unitized with the support arm of mounts of serial construction, which allows to implement the demountable bearings without changing the mounting places in serially manufactured combine harvesters. The field tests of the experimental bearings set on CHS Don-1500 which were held at Kostenko farm have showed that during harvesting the early grain crops and sunflower from June 14, 2007 to October 30, 2009 their wear made 0.4 0.6 mm (1.11 1.33 for the serial ones), that is 2.2 3.6 times as little as the serial ones. Straw-packer. The bearings from phenilon reinforced with Arimid fibres were tested in friction knots of Niva bench combine harvester operating at the open-air ground of PU Rostsel'mash. The sliding bearings from this OP were installed at the straw-packer shaft instead of the serial ones made from compressed beech. Loading the straw-feeder rakes was held with the help of springs 3 springs per each rake. The second end of the rake was used to mount the springs on the fixed rod parallel to the straw-feeder axis. The springs were mounted on the straw-feeder fingers at the distance of 50 mm from the finger end. The overall maximum power developed by the three springs made 20 kg. 5% of chernozem soil sifted through the screen of 0.1 mm was added into the bearings lubrication (solid oil -13). The results of measuring the experimental bearings before testing after 100 and 320 moto-hours held according to the scheme at fig. 3b are cited in table 2.
h3

h1

h4

h2

a
Figure 3: Schemes of loading () and measuring (b) of sliding bearings from organoplastics

1057

They have been stated to be advantageous over the serial ones from the compressed beech in their durability and can be recommended for manufacture implementation. Table 2: Influence of operation time on the bearing thickness Thickness, mm h1 7.2 7.2 7.1 7.15 7.1 7.15 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.1 7.1 7.1 6.95 6.85 6.9 6.85 7.0 6.9 h2 7.2 7.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.0 7.1 6.9 7.15 6.9 7.0 7.1 6.85 6.9 6.8 7.0 7.1 6.8 h3 7.2 7.1 7.0 7.2 7.1 7.25 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.1 7.1 7.0 7.0 6.9 6.75 6.95 6.8 7.0 h4 7.2 7.1 7.2 7.1 7.0 7.15 7.1 7.1 7.0 7.1 7.0 6.9 7.0 6.9 6.8 7.0 7.1 6.75 Operation time before testing, moto-hours

Bearing number 1 2 1

100

320

The analysis of the obtained data shows that for 100 moto-hours of the combine-bench operation the average wear of the experimental bearings makes 0.1 mm, for 320 moto-hours it makes 0.23 mm, while the wear of serial bearings for 58-88 moto-hours makes 1.3 mm, i.. 6 times as much as for experimental ones for 320 moto-hours. On the basis of the obtained results we can conclude that the bearings from phenilon reinforced with Arimid fibres are advantageous over the serial ones made from the compressed beech and may be recommended for implementation into the manufacture. Beetroot harversters are aimed at separate harvesting of sugar beet roots in the major and irrigation areas of beet-growing. BM-6B, MBM-6 haulm gatherers cut the tops, then the root-hatherers of RKS-6 modification excavate the roots, clear them from ground and plant remains and load into the transport operating nearby. Compared to the serial machines there are made some changes into the construction of the driving automatic device along rows.

Figure 4: Driving automatic device along rows

1058

Driving automatic device along rows (fig. 4) is a hydromechanical device aimed at automatic directing the excavating parts of the machine along the axis of the harvested rows of the beetroot. The basic line for the automatic devices controlling mechanisms are the rows of the beetroot with the cut top. The driving automatic device is equipped with two skid templet tools 1 mounted on parallelogram load carriers 2 connected by means of swinging arms 7, rodding 3 with the sliding valve finger of the controlled wheels. All the knots of the driving automatic device are mounted on frame 4 which is bonded to the machine frame. The results of micromeasuring the experimental details held according to the scheme (fig. 5) are cited in table 3.

II

II

5
I

Figure 5: The scheme of micromeasuring the bearings of the driving automatic device Needle bearings 343/20 GOST 4060-60 are a condition of the normal operation of the driving automatic device. During the machine operation the driving automatic device is often observed to be jammed as a result of dirt and moisture ingress into the needle bearings. In order to lubricate these bearings only the transmission oil (nigrol) TU 33.101.529-75 may be used. Applying other lubricants results in the automatic devices jamming. Taking this into consideration, there came a proposal to replace needle bearings with polymer ones from OP based on polyamides. The experimental bearings for field testing were sent to Dniepropetrovsk Combine Plant (DCP) and Borkovsky Service-Transportation Enterprise (STE), Poltava region. Bearings from OP, unlike the serial ones, worked in the conditions of dry friction. During the machines exploitation period there was no failure in the work of driving automatic devices equipped with OP bearings. On the basis of field testing DCP and STE were recommended to start serial production of the sliding bearings of the driving automatic devices along rows. Their implementation allows to improve the wear-resistance and operation time of the knot by 2-3 times and to decrease the expenses on the aggregates technical maintenance.

3. PASSENGER TRANSPORTATION
Failure-free and stable operation of passenger transportation depends on the technical state of every single machine. The machine reliability during operation is conditioned by both high technical level of production and its maintenance. Today in Ukraine the culture of production in automobile engineering has reached the level when the application of conventional metals and their alloys is no longer expedient in the newly developed machines and mechanisms (especially in friction knots), because their exploitation does not meet the requirements to passenger transportation which has to be reliable and safe. In the construction of Ukrainian-made trolleybuses whose production started in 1994 (fig. 6), a lot of bearing supports and mobile joints contained bronze details (for instance, bushings of pivot and wheel chock expansion cams). The exploitation of these machines has become expensive lately, because the bronze scarcity which has grown in Ukrainian market and the drop in national currency rate has resulted in the immediate increase of its price. Due to this, the question arose on searching the material made mostly from PCM, capable to replace bronze details and still not causing the goods durability.

Figure 6: SMP trolleybus -2 of Ukrainian production

1059

Table 3:results of economic tests of organoplastic bearings of driving automatic devices of detail Detail material Phenilon -1 +15% Arimid- PA-6 +30% Arimid - PA-6 +30% Arimid - Phenilon -1 +15% Arimid - PA-6 +30% Arimid - Phenilon -1 +15% Arimid - Phenilon -1 +15% Arimid - PA-6 +30% Arimid - Phenilon -1 +15% Arimid - PA-6 +30% Arimid - Place of measuring - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 - 1-1 2-2 Dimensions, mm Before testing 20.03 20.04 20.04 20.04 20.05 20.04 20.03 20.03 20.05 20.05 20.07 20.07 20.08 20.09 20.06 20.05 20.08 20.07 20.07 20.07 20.08 20.08 20.08 20.08 20.04 20.03 20.03 20.03 20.05 20.06 20.07 20.07 20.09 20.08 20.06 20.05 20.09 20.10 20.08 20.07 After testing 20.21 20.16 20.17 20.18 20.23 20.25 20.20 20.21 20.23 20.20 20.26 20.22 20.22 20.22 20.20 20.19 20.24 20.25 20.26 20.22 20.16 20.18 20.17 20.17 20.16 20.16 20.20 20.19 20.25 20.37 20.21 20.21 20.19 20.21 20.17 20.18 20.32 20.33 20.23 20.27 Wear, mm 0.18 0.12 0.13 0.14 0.18 0.21 0.17 0.18 0.18 0.15 0.19 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.14 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.08 0.10 0.09 0.09 0.12 0.13 0.17 0.16 0.20 0.31 0.14 0.14 0.10 0.13 0.11 0.13 0.23 0.23 0.15 0.20 Average wear, mm

5052

0.14

5054

0.19

5055

0.17

5059

0.14

5062

0.18

5065

0.09

5073

0.14

5075

0.20

5081

0.12

5083

0.20

PCM aimed at producing the details of mobile joints of trolleybuses must meet the following requirements: - the technology and schedule of technical maintenance (TM) and servicing the brake systems of back axles and pivots of front axles of trolleybuses must remain unchanged or become simpler, and the operation period of PCM details must be the same or bigger than that of the bronze details; - the bushing from PCM must be cheaper and easier compliable to mechanical treatment. Taking this to consideration, in order to improve the operation period and the reliability of the friction knots of trolleybuses, an inexpensive OP was chosen, possessing good physico-mechanical properties, based on PA-6 reinforced with Arimid- fibre. Bushings of wheel chock expansion cams. Today in Ukraine most widely used trolleybuses brands are those of ZIU-9 -9 (Russia) and SMP -2 (Southern Machine-building Plant, Ukraine). The brake equipment of back axles of these trolleybuses brands is the simplex system brake with inner wheel chocks. Bushings from bronze of BrAG -9-4 grade are installed at the shaft of the wheel chock expansion cams (fig. 7). The detail operates in the environ of plastic lubrication according to the sliding friction scheme shaft-bushing. A solution was accepted to produce the pilot lot of details based on phenilon containing 15 mass % of Arimid-.

1060

1-bearing, 2-shaft, 3-of the expansion cam, 4-wheel chock

Figure 7: Back wheel brake Production testing was held at the trolleybuses of municipal communal enterprise Dniepropetrovsk electric transportation in the trolleybus depot 1. The experimental details were set on trolleybuses ZIU-9 (Russia) and SMP -2 (Ukraine), which were exploited in the conditions of the mild climate at flat-bottomed land. After 4500 km of running the knots were demounted and examined. As a result it has been stated that only the run-in has occurred within the friction zone shaft-bushing. There were no defects or construction drawbacks that could be seen during exploitation. The run of trolleybuses equipped with experimental details made from 28179 to 31298 km. By the day of the experimental details technical condition check the gaps in the joints have been insignificant and have fallen within the permissible limits. Due to the technical validity of the bushings of wheel chock expansion cams from OP reinforced with Arimid-T fibres they were left for further testing. Bushings of the front-axle pivot. The operation conditions of the pivot bushing are defined by impact loads, intermittent reciprocating rotary movements within the environs of plastic lubrication with the presence of much dirt, water, abrasive elements. The trolleybuses pivot bushings were conventionally produced from bronze, mainly of BrAG- 9-4 grade.

1-bushing, 2-top swivel bushing, 3-swivel

Figure 8: The front axle of coda trolleybus: bottom swivel The front axle of a trolleybus is a complex knot (fig. 8), and the pivot bushings replacement is quite a labourconsuming process that requires the trolleybus stop for a long period of time. Besides, decreasing the service quality (for example, untimely pivot lubrication) leads to quick failure of bronze bushings. According to technical requirements, the pivot bushing must be exploited with plastic lubrication (for example, fatty solid oil -3). Running this detail without lubrication is not permissible. Otherwise, there is almost immediate plastic deformation of a bronze detail. Experimental details from OP based on PA-6 containing 30 mass % of Arimid- were mounted on -9 (Russia) and SMP -2 (Ukraine) trolleybuses that have been run in the conditions of the mild climate at flatbottomed land since June 2, 2005. According to the test report dated 26.01.2006, the run of the trolleybuses equipped with the experimental details made from 28179 to 31298 km for the mentioned period. By the day of the trolleybuses front axles technical condition check the gaps in the pivots have been insignificant and have fallen within the permissible limits (i.e. less than 0.3 mm).

1061

4. CHEMICAL INDUSTRY
The most widely spread type of drive in modern engineering is the toothed drive, due to high reliability of operation and satisfying strict stability of the average gear ratio. Toothed drives where the polymer materials are used are of low weight and operate quietly, possessing damping capacity. In this connection, there have been held the investigations on the possibility to apply OP based on thermally resistant polyamide phenilon -1 for producing conical gears of twisting frames used in the production of chemical fibres. Production testing of conical gears installed at twisting frames was held at PU "Himvolokno"(Engels, Russia). The gears were run at the following conditions: rotation frequency of 1400 rot/min, electric motor power of 7.5 kW. The lifetime of experimental gears before failure has been stated to make 5040-5760 hours for those made from organoplastic, and 120-500 hours for the serial ones made from bronze.

5. CONCLUSIONS
Thus, the analysis of the results of applying the details from OP within the knots and constructions of machines and mechanisms allows to conclude the following: application of OP allows to increase the operation time, to decrease the expenses on maintenance and servicing certain friction knots, to expand the spectrum of the mobile joints details made from polymer materials.

REFERENCES
[1] Burya A.I., Tkachenko E.V., Burmistr M.V., Yaremko Yu.A. Investigation of thermophysical properties of organoplastics based on phenilon reinforced with polyimide fibres // Matters of chemistry and chemical technology. 2008. - 6. - p. 43-46. [2] Burya A.I., Tkachenko E.V. Elaboration, properties and application of organoplastics based on phenilon reinforced with polyimide fibres // Materials of the 28th International conference Composition materials in industry (Slavpolikom). - Yalta, Crimea.- 2008. - p. 579-580. [3] Abramov L.M., Kreidlin L.M., Klimchuk Yu.F. The status and prospects of applying and producing plastic details of tractors and agricultural machines // Materials of the Scientific and Technical seminal Application of polymer materials in agricultural machines. Rostov-on-Don.- 1980.- part . p. 4-7. [4] Burya A.I. Application of polymer materials in the constructions of crop combine-harvesters // Bulletin of Ternopol State Technical University. - 1998.- Vol. 3.- p. 12-24.

1062

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

QUALITY ASSURANCE FOR THE MEDICAL ACT BY MODULAR REMOTE INTENSIVE CARE TELEMEDICINE SYSTEM
Andrei M. Cracuin1, Mircea F. Dreucean2, Teodora G. Ioanovici3
1

Politehnica University of Timisoara, Mechanical Engineering Faculty, Timisoara, ROMANIA, e-mail: andrei.craciun@mec.upt.ro, 2e-mail: mircea.dreucean@mec.upt.ro, 3 e-mail: teodora.ioanovici@mec.upt.ro

Summary: An ICU (intensive care unit) integrated system will be described in this article which can be applied at large scale with medium costs and high benefits. The following solution is ideal for emerging countries and even developed countries in order to share specific knowledge and best practices. Following a holistic perspective of clinical consult / treatment process, as well as the interactions between a multidisciplinary care team, the proposed model tries to cover the whole healing process with a telemedicine system that allows the patient to improve the self-care and to be remotely followed-up by healthcare professionals. Keywords: intensive care unit, telemedicine, ICU remote monitoring, healthcare.

1. INTRODUCTION
If telemedicine is simply regarded as the delivery of medicine at a distance, then this technique has been available since the invention of the telegraph and the telephone in the second half of the 19th century. However, the real technical drivers have been telecommunications and information technologies and their convergence as we entered the 21st century, where digital communications has been a major force in this development. [1] The quality of healthcare is an important parameter by which to gauge any society's progress. Indeed it has a prominent effect on the quality of life in any population. Most developed countries have healthcare systems that provide excellent healthcare to the great majority of their population pretty effectively, though not always cost efficiently. When deciding whether to allocate resources to develop telemedicine technologies and adopt telemedicine programs, policy makers often compare marginal benefit and marginal cost for the implementation of such systems. The expected benefit from telemedicine programs compared to current systems versus the resources needed to bring about these benefits is often not in favour of telemedicine. However, underdeveloped countries have limited or no access to a good-quality healthcare system. Fortunately, however, technologies that were initially developed for use in fields other than healthcare can now be used in telemedicine. For example, video-conferencing and tele-presence solutions developed for business can just as easily be used in tele-consultations. In order to ensure proper care for the critically ill patients extensive resources are required, especially trained personnel, and well-defined procedures to ensure that all tasks are performed accordingly and without delay. The desire to insure permanent intensive management for patients confronted with a significant shortfall of available intensivists led to the establishment of remote ICU care programs in 1999. The past several years have seen a dramatic increase in the number of health systems adopting this care model. These health systems have augmented our understanding of both the ability of this new care model to improve clinical outcomes and the clinical processes that are required to accomplish program quality goals. Health systems have begun to expand the range of activities of the remote care team, exploiting the potential of this new operational and technology platform to supplement scarce personnel and achieve increases in both clinical effectiveness and provider efficiency. [2] Historically speaking, Grundy et al reported for the first time in the 1980s on the use of telemedicine for intermittent, consultative support of remote facilities lacking physicians with expertise in this new field [3].

1063

Despite the belief that such telemedicine services would indeed be of value to the patients (and providers) in the remote site, the project was not successful. Almost 15 years later, in a 16 week 1997 study, Rosenfeld et al reported on the use of telemedicine to provide round-the-clock intensivist oversight [4] and further demonstrated significant reduction in mortality and length of stay (LOS). In 2000, Sentara Healthcare, working with VISICU, Inc, implemented the first continuous, multisite telemedicine program. First of its kind, this was not a research study but a self sustaining program that was an integral part of Sentaras ICU care delivery model. Telemedicine is expected to grow by an average of 10% a year across Europe to 2020, or double the rise in total healthcare spending [5]. As the report predicts, chronic illnesses such as heart complaints, asthma and diabetes are particularly appropriate for telemedicine use. This technology is basically beneficial for all populace residing nearby isolated communities as well as remote regions wherein there are less medical experts or clinics to supervise health of individuals. Through the different areas of telemedicine lots of health issues can be reported, diagnosed, and treated. With store and forward telemedicine it is possible to store all data, medical history, bio signals, medical images and everything and transmit the data for assessment. With remote monitoring telemedicine technique it is possible for the medical experts to check and monitor the patients with a multitude of technical devices. Some very specific health issues can be resolved with the help of this method. The evolution of intensive care programs has had a positive impact on hospital and patient morbidity during the last decade. As it has been noticed critically ill patients cared for by physicians trained in the field of critical care medicine (intensivists), have lower mortality rates than those cared for by other types of physicians. [3] However, considering the fact that the growing number of critically ill patients has outpaced the number of available specialist physicians worldwide [4] the evolution of telemedicine in the critical care field has proved to be a necessary step. The main hospitals and universities could promote the wider distribution and development of telemedicine within Romania, which in turn would bring benefits to the Romanian people, 46% of whom living in rural areas [9].

2. INTEGRATED CARE UNIT (ICU) FRAMEWORK

The evolution of remote care programs has paralleled that of ICU care in general. The initial concern was on duplicating the continuous monitoring/oversight included in the dedicated intensivist care model. The first efforts concentrated on creating the necessary technological components, finding the best staffing mix and work flows, and ensuring the quality of the service provided by the remote team. As the importance of practice standardization was recognized and of the processes necessary to ensure their routine, the remote care programs have developed as well. The remote care team is considered to be an integral part of the overall critical care program in most sites. [2] The goal of the proposed system is to provide a 24hours a day / 7days a week oversight of all ICU patients, with de purpose of ensuring the highest level of care possible. For the operationalisation of the project, we are proposing the solution adopted in more than 30 remote ICU care programs in USA [2]. For efficiency, this team has various responsibilities that include diagnose, screen, monitor or treat patients. Specific tasks - continuous monitoring of the progress of each patient, with the purpose to improve the patient safety and asses patient's condition - establishing therapies as necessary, in order to offer best care solutions - identify emerging problems and initiate appropriate countermeasures - facilitate the communication among care team members - re-evaluates prior diagnoses and care plans at appropriate intervals in accordance with expected patient outcomes - prioritizes clinical problems accurately and in a timely manner - complies with best practices and other care directives of the monitored ICUs in response to performance improvement initiatives For a quality environment system, robust processes must be developed to ensure the consistent execution of all key tasks at all sites across the health care system. There must be an active coordination an oversight of clinical activities by competent physicians and nurse managers. A program like this cannot achieve desired quality goals and be sustained over time if the holistic coordination is poor or does not exist. The proposed model requires effective clinical information technology tools. A well designed high-quality information system improves the accessibility and data presentation

1064

3. SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The implementation of any telemedicine active system should be done by choosing a suitable architecture that considers a lot of criteria. Some of the most important criteria are exemplified in table 1. Table 1: Criteria for choosing a suitable architecture: Defining of the purpose for which a telemonitoring system introduction is needed; Choosing of the configuration for the transport network, depending on the communications system features from the targeted region; The methodology for gathering and interpreting of the alerts issued from the telemonitorised patients; Monitoring date acquisition: sequential, a few times on a day according with the scheduling made by the doctor or continuous; Database specific design, in order to ensure future development possibility Authentication and user control in order to ensure specific needs and protection of the system

In order to ensure an optimal environment for its purpose, the model proposed by Breslow[2] has been optimized for our specific needs. The remote ICU system combines different technologies, from audio-video monitoring to data store (Table 2). Some of the features are present in VISICU model. - Audio-video equipment allows the monitoring of patients and medical equipments, two way video capability, without the option to record video / audio stream for follow-up - Bedside monitor data VISICU implemented system uses bedside monitors that can be accessed only by the onsite care team - The clinical data facility has the same purposes as the proposed module and it uses a proprietary remote system (VISICU CIS) through standard HL7 interfaces. The proposed system will use open source standards and software, for the best compatibility with further development - X-rays and other studies feature are integrated in the film and document viewing device - Physician category levels there are three levels of access. In addition the proposed modular system has the possibility of designing new levels of access Using the features considered vital, this paper describes a modular system that can be implemented on a new infrastructure as well as an existing one, with the purpose to optimize the costs. Table 2: General system components - Clinical data management system CSD - Film and document viewing device (picture viewer / archiver; communication systems - instant messaging and videoconference - and secure protocols for data transfer; scanner) FDVD - Audio and video equipment AV - Remote monitor access device RS - General / Critical alerting systems AS, BMD - Local and wide area networks access - Educational demo practice module EDPM

Figure 1: system modules As presented in figure 1, the entire system is interconnected, but modular. Depending on budget, this system permits a partial implementation as well as a further development beyond the proposed constructive solution, without extensive modifications in order to ensure compatibility. For security reasons, the system has three

1065

predefined access levels, similar to Breslow model [2] but it has also a specific feature that permits the system administrator(s) to define new custom access levels. In order to ensure an effective system, the first prerequisites are the program directors with strong managerial skills, a physician and nurse program director cooperating and supervising the remote ICUs. Some of their most important responsibilities are to hire qualified personnel, to insure the quality of the services provided, to cooperate with the ICUs, to help the ICUs quality initiatives and last but not least, to interface with the senior health system leadership in order to prevent any program issues. These directors supervise one or more remote ICUs and are in direct relation with the local medical director a nurse director. The former are directly responsible for the ICU and each coordinates a local staff team, on site physician team and on site nurse team. 3.1. Clinical data management system (CDS) The clinical data system (CDS) is designed to overcome the limitations of classic hospital patient paper-record files, which is used in Romania in more than 95% of public hospitals. There are a few pilot programs that have been tested in order to create a national health database, but none got positive testing. Access to all relevant patient data, including laboratory test results, medications lists, progress notes and other type of documentation is required by the remote care team. This information is provided by a software system that contains detailed information of each patient. This electronic application can import data from the actual hospital database (e.g. laboratory test results, medication orders, and treatment files) and from intensive care devices (bedside monitors, ventilators, automated care providers - such as Automatic Medication Dispensers -). Another base function of the clinical data system is the possibility of nurses and medical specialist to establish and track care plans, charting patient data based on the information gathered to generate progress notes. The goal of this application is to maximize the efficiency of the care team, and to manage advance reporting tools, in order to ensure a competent and complete patient record. CDS ensures the classification of electronic medical records. Once classified, the information is stored and can be retrieved in an efficient mode, when needed. The software creates an index of data available, speeding up the process of retrieving the information. For costs optimizations and in order to ensure best compatibility for further development, the patient database of the system is realized using MYSQL, a free secure open source relational database management system. This system is suited for intranet / internet web-based applications and provides a fast and secure database environment, completely configurable. MYSQL understands structured query language (SQL), the most common database language in use. 3.2. Audio-video equipment (AV) Audio-video equipment allows remote care providers to examine patients as well as medical equipment (ventilators, infusion pumps, read local bedside monitors that cannot automatically transfer digital data over internet) an also interact with the present personnel. This module can be installed on a mobile robotic carrier as on InTouch Health RP-6 robot, an elegant solution that has high-quality AV built in. Another possibility, depending on budget, is to install high-resolution cameras and speakers in every patients room. The entire examination can be recorded on remote hard disks, if the patient / physician desire it, for follow-up. The system can be activated onsite by local care team and remotely by the specialists, who also controls camera location and magnification. The high quality resolution camera allows the remote care providers and physicians to observe breathing patterns and also to zoom in order to read infusion pump settings. There is also a two-way video capability, allowing the patient and onsite personnel to interact visually with the off-site clinicians. 3.3. Film and document viewing device (FDVD) This system module integrates a picture viewer (for the scanned patient records / laboratory test results) along with an advanced document viewer that has the ability to create customized views and statistics, using the electronic patient records. The records can be scanned in (for old paper-records) via an integrated scanning equipment, copied via LAN / WIFI or from magnetic data disks / USB flash. Another important part of the module is the clinical decision support system, an interactive program that is designed to assist physicians in order to determine diagnosis, analysis and other aspects, using patient data. The software can also be programmed to literally make decisions, and offers the clinician access to local and even web knowledge resources, based on diagnosis or specific clinical facts. An integrated communication support is also implemented, with an instant messaging and even videoconferencing tools. Using the communication features, specialist from all over the world can assist the physician in diagnose and even examine a patients condition.

1066

3.4. Bedside monitor data (BMD) The bedside monitor data equipment contains a set of viewers commercially available, which do not allow remote alarm parameters setting, but can transmit hearth rate, blood pressure and other data to remote monitor team. There are equipments that allow remote setup but in order to keep the system costs to a medium level we have chosen the un-remote management equipment. 3.5. Alerting systems (AS) The system can transfer vital medical data from the remote location to the remote care team. Data can include blood pressure, oxygen saturation, glucose, patient weight, medication reminders. These alerts use a complex rules engine which evaluates the bedside monitors, laboratory test results and other specific data in order to alert if situations requiring the care team's attention appear. 3.6. Reporting system (RS) In order to ensure the quality of care provided to patients and also to ensure compliance with shared and demonstrated best practices, the system provides to onsite care team and remote monitoring team detailed information about patients course and about ICU performance. This system also is used to standardize care protocols and procedures across the entire remote sites. The reporting system can also provide charts and specific reports about performance goals. 3.7. Educational demo practice module (EDPM) In order to create a competent and reliable remote care team, the system was equipped with a demo practice module. Students and other interns can monitor and evaluate the whole monitoring process. This training method is an opportunity not present in the formal education system courses, but provides an excellent tool in preparing the future specialists, and ensures the continuity and development of the project. There is plenty of developing possibilities, as the whole system is a modular one, components can be added and removed ass needed. 3.8 Network connectivity Telemedicine equipments must be linked together on high-acuity networks, both local and wide area networks. These networks must ensure seamless transmissions of clinical data, and support a high quality audio-video connection between de local and remote destination, so adequate bandwidth is essential. Also, all transmitted data must be secured, encrypted, to protect patients medical data. Other security measures can be activated, in order to ensure the best protection that the system requires. The system can be implemented as a standalone site, but it is recommended to create a cluster for the servers (at least two remote locations for the system). For the best compliance in videoconferencing and examinations, the system has the possibility to transport media info via ISDN, ADSL, LAN, WAN. It can also be connected to Internet and it can be made part of a VPN (Virtual Private Network), depending of the remote team care unit. Connection to GSM mobile networks will be possible, but it requires a contract with mobile GSM providers and a set of protocols that will not be implemented by default. Table 3: Network standards & protocols available Local Area Network (LAN) or Internet, ADSL, & Intranet and Wide Area Network VPN (WAN) G.711, G.722, G.722.1, Audio: G.723.1, G.728, G.729, AAC-LC, AAC-LD Video: H.264, H.263, H.261 Data: H.239 Control: H.225, H.245, H.460 G.723.1, G.728 H.264, Video: H.263, H.261 Data: H.239 H.225, Control: H.245, H.460 Audio:

Integrated Digital Services Network (ISDN) G.711, G.722, G.722.1, Audio: G.728, AACLC, AAC-LD H.264, H.263, Video: H.261 Data: H.239 H.221, H.231, Control: H.242, H.243

Mobile networks (optional) G.722.2 (AMRAudio: WB), G.723.1 Video: MPEG-4, H.223 Control: A/B, H.245

1067

4. CONCLUSION
Being a modular system, it can be implemented as a whole, or it can be personalized for specific needs. The remote ICU care system is designed to fit a medium budget facility, ideal for remote monitoring emergency units (hospitals or mobile interventions units), medication provider and even an ideal educational resource for interns and specialists. It can be used as a collaborative unit for dozens / hundred of remote locations, providing an interconnected system that contains specialized emergency knowledge database, an interconnected service for specialists all over the world. Based on a model tested in over 30 locations in USA in the last 10 years by VISICU INC [2], it has been optimized for medium costs, offering the option of services personalization, ideal for emerging countries and even developed countries with a good health system that can assist remote locations all over the world with their experts. As far as the connectivity goes, the system is designed to be an efficient resource through several connectivity solutions locally (dedicated) by LAN, WAN or VPN standards, with secure two-way communications. It also has internet secure protocols installed, so it can become a great collaborative resource for students, interns and specialists all over the world with the EDPM module, designed for best practices sharing and much more, providing the best interaction experience between authorized users on all levels. The security of the system has modern protocols and access levels defined, and permits the system administrator(s) to define new access levels as needed from demo monitoring of all resources to full control over remote site equipment. In order to protect patients private data, access to all medical record history is provided only for the physician. Secure accounts and passwords are provided for each physician and locale care team member with restricted level access to specific task. In order to increase the security information such as IP address, login time and other relevant data will be logged. A distinct file is created for every account which contains relevant user data and settings that can be modified only by administrators. As the system is very complex, large quantities of data will be gathered. If the physical hard disk free space becomes an issue, automated messages are sent to the administrators and a special security protocol activates regarding the reading/writing/updating system database: users below a predefined access level will get only reading access to medical data, without being able to update database. Being a complex system which connects a lot of interdisciplinary fields we also proposed a management system for global and local site coordination similar. Audit features are implemented in the software modules to facilitate report overview and evaluate specific goals. In order to insure an effective system the first prerequisites are the program directors with strong managerial skills, a physician and nurse program coordinator cooperating and supervising the remote ICUs. Some of their most important responsibilities are to hire qualified personnel, to insure the quality of the services provided, to cooperate with the ICUs, to help the ICUs quality initiatives and last but not least, to interface with the senior health system leadership in order to prevent any program issues. These coordinators supervise the remote ICUs and are in direct relation with the local medical / nurse coordinator (directly responsible for the ICU and each coordinates a local staff team, on site physician team and on site nurse team).

Figure 2: coordinator chart This system has a very efficient management scheme in order to prevent uneven distribution load on the physicians and to ensure that every area has the attention of personnel with diverse medical expertise. The locations are divided into different regions and each of those has a direct responsible physician with access to patient information only from that area. However the experts have to be carefully selected in order to cover the

1068

needs of each region. Also the number of inhabitants of a certain area should determine how many physicians are in each group. In order to provide a competent follow-up for the proposed module, best practice guides all over the world will be monitored and indexed with the purpose of sharing the knowledge and get a better understanding of different care models.

AKNOWLEDGEMENT
This work was partially supported by the strategic grant POSDRU 2009 project ID 50783 of the Ministry of Labor, Family and Social Protection, Romania, co-financed by the European Social Fund Investing in People.

REFERENCES
[1] A.C. Norris: Essentials of telemedicine and telecare, John Wiley & Sons Ltd. [2] Michael J. Breslow MD, FCCM: Remote ICU care programs: Current status, Elsevier Journal of Critical Care, 2007 [3] Grundy BL, Jones PK, Lovitt A.: Telemedicine in critical care: problems in design, implementation, and assessment. Crit Care Med 1982; 10: 471- 5. [4] Rosenfeld BA, Dorman T, Breslow MJ, et al. Intensive care unit telemedicine: alternate paradigm for providing continuous intensivist care. Crit Care Med 2000;28:3925- 31. [5] John Zarocostas: Use of telemedicine will double in next decade, report predicts, BMJ 2010; 340:c1634, published 23 March 2010 [6] Adaptation by Ioana Georgescu, National Council of the Medical Order, Paris, France: Telemedicine [7] Medica Academica, E-health: Reinventing the system, 2010 published on http://medicaacademica.com/2009/10/e-health-reinventarea-sistemului Accessed: 28.05.2010 [8] Oana Antonescu, Telemedicina de urgen, ajutor pentru spitalele mici, news article 6.10.2009 on www.adevarul.ro [9] Lucian Panait, Charles R Doarn, Adrian Saftoiu, Calin Popovici, Vlad Valeanu and Ronald C Merrell, A review of telemedicine in Romania, Journal of Telemedicine and Telecare [10] Video Conferencing Standards and Terminology, available at c21video.com/standards, Accesed on 19.08.2010 [11] Mehmet Kuntalp, Orkun Akar: A simple and low-cost Internet-based teleconsultation system that could effectively solve the health care access problems in underserved areas of developing countries, Computer Methods and Programs in Biomedicine (2004) 75, 117126.

1069

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

VERIFICATION OF THE APPROACH TO PREDICTING FATIGUE LIFE OF NOTCHED SPECIMENS OF MAGNESIUM ALLOYS BASED ON TYPES AM50 AND AE42
Biliana D. Dimova
Technical University of Sofia, Sofia, BULGARIA, e-mail: bdimova@tu-sofia.bg
Summary: Experimental and analytical analyses were carried out to prove the accuracy of the approach for predicting fatigue life of notched specimens made from magnesium alloys. An experimental verification has been performed on specimens for two types of magnesium alloys AM50 and AE42 subjected to cyclic tension/compression. The approach is based on cyclic plastic strain energy density and effective stress concentration factor and takes into account the dynamics of the fatigue process, including the number of cycles to failure and total hysteresis energy. The effective stress concentration factor Kf that plays a very important role in assessing the fatigue strength of structures is determined analytically. The results based on the energy of dissipation approach demonstrate good correlation with the experimental data for the investigated type of Mg-alloys. Keywords: fatigue, fatigue life prediction, hysteresis energy, notches, Mg-alloys.

1. INTRODUCTION
Modern production conditions make it necessary to increase the reliability and durability of structures while reducing their specific amount of metal consumption per structure and shortening the duration of the designing stage. The use of the light metal magnesium and its alloys as construction material with its technological properties good for engineering practice, in comparison with the imposed so far metals and alloys, is indicative of the development of a technology in compliance with the new social, economic and environmental aspects. Theoretically, it is possible to reduce the weight of the details made of aluminium up to 33 % by using various kinds of magnesium alloys. A reliable method for determining the durability of parts and reducing the duration of the design and development phase would lead to a reduction of the risk of non-operation of the finished products. The data presented in this paper come from investigations of two different magnesium alloys 50, 42. These alloys are now becoming more and more common in production. The excellent strength, processibility and better recycling possibility especially in comparison to plastic materials make magnesium competitive with aluminium, steel and plastics materials. The two alloys are more recent developments, and each one of them has its particular characteristics: 50 is highly ductile, and 42 possesses good heat and creep resistance. The use of the light magnesium alloys as engineering materials increases with the advancement of technology. Further knowledge of the behavior of the new materials and their influence on the behavior of structure will help to extend the area of their application and to assure an efficient design of components under cycling loading. Verification of the approach for approximate drawing of fatigue curves of the investigated magnesium alloys in specimens with different stress concentration factors Kt has been proposed, using the dissipated energy as a damage parameter. The stress concentration factor Kf is determined analytically and experimentally for the investigated magnesium alloys [1, 6, 9]. Material constant also has been proposed depending on the type of alloy, as these are estimated stress concentration factors Kf for different alloys. Check of the adequacy of the approaches and procedures proposed in the presented work has been made. Analysis and comparisons presented here are based on the mechanism of fatigue and experimental results.

1070

2. APPROACH FOR PREDICTING THE FATIGUE LIFE OF NOTCHED SPECIMENS MADE OF MG-ALLOYS
The onset of fatigue failure during cyclic loads is manifested by a gradual accumulation of damages, whose quantitative assessment will be based on the dissipated energy [6, 8, 9]. In this context it can be expected that failure under variable stress will take place after the boundary value of the total dissipated energy is reached. 2.1. Theory Grounded in the method developed for predicting durability is the experimentally observed fact that the total dissipated energy until the time of failure for Mg alloys is a function of the number of cycles until failure D = f ( N Bi ) , this function being nonlinear [6, 15, 16] and described well using exponential equation type
A D = N B .10 B

(1)

where D is the total energy until failure, NB are the number of cycles until failure and and are coefficients to be found. Using (1) the result for the predicted number of cycles for each stress level (i) is
lg N Bi( prediction ) = B 1 + .lg Di 1 A A 1

(2)

The methodology for determining the total dissipated energy D in case of variable load for magnesium alloy AZ91 and prediction of the durability NBi (prediction) is explained in detail in [5, 6, 7, 9]. The experiments confirm the validity of the proposed methodology for drawing the boundary curve for AZ91 [9, 15] and the investigated magnesium alloys AM50 and AE42 and the possibility of reasonably accurate prediction by it see fig.1.
50

AE42 - BOUNDARY CURVE

45 40

AM50 -BOUNDARY CURVE

35 30 D ] [GJ/m
3

m odificated curves

25 20 15 10 5 0 0 50 000 100 000 150 000 200 000 NB 250 000 300 000 350 000 400 000

experim ental curves

Figure 1: Relationship between total dissipated energy D and durability NB for the magnesium alloys AM50 and AE42. Durability prediction for a material under single step load [6, 7, 9]. Another essential element of the approach for predicting the durability considering the stress concentration is the effective coefficient of stress concentration Kf [6, 9, 11, 12]. After comparing the results for the effective coefficient of fatigue resulting from different expressions, with the experimentally determined effective coefficient [6, 9], in this work the analytical expression of Peterson from (3) has been chosen, by the model for the average stress and the effective coefficient of stress concentration is estimated by it.
K f(Ri) = 1 + K t(Ri) - 1 , a 1+ ( Ri )

(3)

1071

where Ri are the radii of curvature in the concentrator; Kt is the coefficient of stress concentration for the respective radius of curvature in the concentrator, obtained numerically by method of finite elements (FEM); is a material constant chosen according to [6, 11, 12], depending on the type of magnesium alloy. With the material constant for the tested alloys chosen in this way, a prediction for the Kf(Ri) was made, using the expression (3). 50 / AE 42 Used in this paper values for a AM 50 / AE42 and predicted K fAM are presented in table 1. By the help with (Ri ) predicted values of
50 / AE 42 lg K AM smooth
AM 50 / AE 42 N Bi ( prediction )

for each level of load i approximate fatigue curve for smooth specimens can be

50 / AE 42 built in accordance with (2). After approximation of the estimated points, we receive the constants m AM and smooth

appropriate to describe the fatigue curve for Mg-alloys AM50 and AE42. The received constants for

this paper are presented in table 1. Then, on the basis of expressions (2) and (3) the following equations for predicting the durability, taking into account stress concentration, can be derived.
lg N Bi( Ri )( prediction ) = lg K smooth msmooth lg ai( Ri ) msmooth lg f ( Ri ) lg ai( Ri ) = N Bi log K smooth log lg msmooth msmooth

(4)

f ( Ri )

(5)

During development of the approach for determining durability of AM50 and AE42 magnesium alloy the following assumption was made: The fatigue curves of group of magnesium alloys under the same environmental conditions may have the same slopes. 2.2. Experimental work To confirm the approach for predicting the durability for magnesium alloys AM50 and AE42 provided in section 2.1, considering the stress concentration, experimental, numerical and analytical studies were conducted. In order to construct a fatigue life curves and to define the durability in accordance with the presented approach [6, 7, 9], respectively three smooth specimens fig. 3 have been tested. The constraints and the external conditions for carrying out the experiments are the same as in [6, 7, 9, 15]. This has been done so as to make reliable summaries of all results obtained and their possible transfer to other magnesium alloys. Schematic illustration of the developed and the completed system to experimentally determination of the durability is shown on figure 2.
HYDROPULS TESTING MACHINE SCHENCK
dynamometer
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR
signals converter

fixed grip specimen

MEASUR EMENT

PROCESSOR

Notebook for exchange, recording and signal processing and data analysis
DIALOGUE PROCESSOR

MEASUREMEN T

rolling grip

PROCESSOR

CONTROL
PROCESSOR
INTERFACE INTERFACE

INTERFACE

PCMCIA GPIB
35.027

kN 1

hydraulic Digital amplifier HBM of MGCplus

Figure 2: Schematic illustration of experimental system developed for determining the durability To determine the fatigue life curves for different specimens of the two different materials 50, 42 experimental investigations were carried out by cyclic tension/compression of smooth specimens. A soft loading regime is followed, i.e. stress-controlled test. A sinusoidal signal with an asymmetry cycle coefficient R = 1 is used. The experiments have been carried out on a specialized experimental equiment, which is supplemented, modified and accommodated for the necessary tests. A uniaxial servo-hydraulic test machine SCHENCK with properly controlled signals has been implemented according to [2, 3, 4].

1072

The numerical calculations in order to obtain the coefficient of stress concentration Kt(Ri) for all tested specimens are performed on 3-dimensional cylindrical geometries with lateral notches with radiuses of 0,5 mm, 1 mm, 2,5 mm, 5 mm and 35 mm are the same as in [6, 7, 9, 15]. Ranging the notched radii it was tried to simulate the different notch effect of the fatigue strength as for the approximately smooth specimens as well for cracked specimens.

Figure 3: Cylindrical experimental specimens of the magnesium alloys AM50 and AE42 from left to the right: a smooth specimen, specimen with a concentrator Ri = 5 mm, a specimen with concentrator Ri = 1 mm, a specimen with a blunt concentrator Ri = 35 mm, a specimen with concentrator made on the blunt concentrator with radius Ri = 35 mm, respectively R(R35)i = 1 mm. To verify the presented approach were carried out steps detailed in [6, 9]. For the described five types of specimens with a concentrator and their approximate fatigue curves are predicted and built, presented in figure 4.

3. RESULTS
The results of the conducted experimental research under the presented procedure used to determine the total dissipated energy in the alternating stress for the magnesium alloy AM50 and AE42 are presented in this paper. The obtained results are used to confirm the possibility of predicting the durability and approximation of fatigue curves for these alloys on the bases of dissipated energy and taking into account stress concentration. According AM 50 / AE 42 to expressions (4) and (5) the number of cycles to failure N Bi ( Ri )( prediction ) for investigated notched specimens and their approximate fatigue curves are built and presented in figure fig. 4. Table 1: Constants determining the slope of the fatigue curve of smooth specimens and specimens with different types of concentrators, predicted effective coefficient of stress concentration Kf(Ri) and numerically estimated coefficient of stress concentration Kt(Ri) for all tested specimens. MATERIAL aAM50/AE42
material constant

AM50 aAM50 = 1,200 mprediction = 26,60 35 1,043 1,042 5(35) 1,212 1,171 logKprediction = 54,39 2,5(35) 1,423 1,286 1(35) 1,916 1,416 0,5(35) 2,522 1,448

AE42 aAE42 = 1,400 mprediction = 23,64 35 1,043 1,041 5(35) 1,212 1,166 logKprediction = 54,39 2,5(35) 1,423 1,271 1(35) 1,916 1,382 0,5(35) 2,522 1,401

smooth specimens Ri [mm]

notched specimens

Kt,FEM Kf, prediction

In alternating symmetrical load at five stress levels two forms of magnesium alloy AM50 and AE42 specimens AM 50 / AE 42 shown in fig.3 are tested. Thus the experimentally number of cycles to failure N Bi for these two specimens ( Ri ) types with different radius of curvature Ri = 35 mm and R(R35)i= 1 mm in the concentrator is found. The points AM 50 / AE 42 obtained experimentally (ai, NBi) are put in semi-logarithmic coordinate system a lg N B for the alloy (Ri ) and presented in fig.4.

1073

110

Fatigue life curves for AM50

110

42 Fatigue life curves for AE

TN = 5
100

TN = 5
100

smooth specimen

smooth specimen
90

90

[Pa]

predicted with the presented approach

80

R(R35)i= 35 mm

[Pa]
80

R(R35)i= 5 mm
70

predicted with the presented approach

70

R(R35)i= 35 mm

R(R35)i= 2,5 mm R(R35)i= 1 mm R(R35)i= 0,5 mm notched specimen Ri= 1 mm

R(R35)i= 5 mm
60

60

R(R35)i= 2,5 mm R(R35)i= 1 mm notched specimen Ri= 1 mm R(R35)i= 0,5 mm

1,00E +06 1,00E +07

50 1,00E +03

50
1,00E +04 1,00E +05 1,00E +06 1,00E +07

1,00E +03

1,00E +04

1,00E +05

Figure 4: Comparison of predicted fatigue curves of magnesium alloy AM50 and AE42 for five types of experimental specimens and experimentally derived durabilities for two types of specimens. Specimens are as follows: specimen with a blunt concentrator Ri = 35 mm, a specimen with concentrator made on the blunt concentrator with radius Ri = 35 mm, respectively, as follows R(R35)i= 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2.5 mm, 5 mm.

4. DISCUSSION
Table 1 presents calculated and estimated constants
50 / AE 42 m AM prediction

and

50 / AE 42 lg K AM prediction

determining the slope of the

fatigue curve for smooth specimens very important for the proposed approach. The results obtained of predicted 50 / AE 42 effective coefficients of stress concentration K fAM and numerically calculated coefficient of stress (Ri ) concentration
50 / AE 42 K tAM (Ri )

for various types of series of specimens are also tabulated and compared in table 1.

Fig. 4 for AM50 and Fig.5 for AE42 illustrate graphically a comparison between the predicted (for notched specimens with concentrator R(R35)i as follows: R(R35)i= 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2.5 mm, 5 mm, 35 mm) and real (for smooth and notched specimens with concentrator Ri as follows: Ri= 1 mm, R(R35)i= 35 mm R(R35)i= 1 mm) durability. A graphical comparison of the figure for the investigated AM50 and AE42 magnesium alloy shows that all predicted durabilities, respectively predicted approximate fatigue curves are located in the confidence Mg interval TN = 5 [10, 13, 14] for the respective classical fatigue curve and correlate well with the experimental durabilities. The presented on Fig. 4 for AM50 and Fig.5 for AE42 graphical comparisons show that all experimental Mg durabilities are located in the confidence interval of TN = 5 derived from the predicted approximate fatigue curve and correlate well with the estimated durabilities. Indicator of good prognosis is also the comparisons shown in these figures between the estimated fatigue curves for: 9 a smooth specimen Kt = 1 and those for a specimen with a blunt concentrator Ri = 35 mm Kt = 1,043. 9 a specimen with concentrator Ri = 1 mm and those for a specimen with concentrator made on the blunt concentrator with radius Ri = 35 mm, respectively, as follows R(R35)i= 0.5 mm, 1 mm, 2.5 mm, 5 mm. The specimens with blunt concentrator Ri = 35 mm have a coefficient of stress concentration Kt = 1,043 close to one (Kt = 1), and the expected fatigue curve is of similar but with less durability to that of the smooth specimen. The other notched specimens lay in a zone with smaller durability. The specimens with concentrator R(R35)i =1 mm with a coefficient of stress concentration Kt = 1,916, are comparable as a geometry with the specimens with a concentrator Ri= 1 mm, with a coefficient of stress concentration Kt = 2,197. It is expected that the predicted fatigue curve for R(R35)i = 1 mm lies in the zone with greater durability than that of the specimen with concentrator Ri =1 mm. Such a trend is observed for the rest of the notched specimens for both investigated Mg-alloys AM50 and AE42. It is observed also that even the predicted fatigue curve for notched specimens with concentrator R(R35)i = 0,5 mm lies in the zone with greater durability than that of the specimen with concentrator Ri =1 mm. This is due to the 50 AE 42 fact that the effective coefficients of stress concentration K fAM (R 35 ) i = 0 , 5 = 1,448 for AM50 and K f ( R 35 ) i = 0 , 5 = 1,401 for AE42 are with less value than the effective coefficient of stress concentration for notched specimens with 50 AE 42 concentrator Ri =1 mm K fAM Ri =1 = 1,544 for AM50 and K f Ri =1 = 1,499 for AE42. The results of the experiments confirm that durability based on dissipated energy at variable load can be determined accurately enough, taking into account the type of alloy and the stress concentration.

1074

5. CONCLUSION
The established approach for determining the durability of notched specimens based on the energy criterion allows us to construct fatigue life curves for different types of magnesium alloys. An advantage of this approach is that it is relatively quick, with good accuracy, provides additional information on the inelastic behavior of the material, and takes into account the effect of stress concentration. The assumption that the fatigue curves of group of magnesium alloys under the same environmental conditions may have the same slopes is precisely applicable to the investigated alloys. 50 / AE 42 50 / AE 42 Parameters of fatigue curves m AM and lg K AM for smooth specimens and effective coefficients of stress (Ri ) (Ri ) concentration
50 / AE 42 K fAM (Ri )

for various types of series of specimens, ranging in radius at the concentrator tip for the

two Mg-alloys AM50 and AE42 are predicted. The results obtained are used for verifying of approach for determining the fatigue durability via the dissipated energy. Drawing of the boundary curve - total dissipated energy - number of cycles to failure D - NBi (prediction) fig. 2 and AM 50 / AE 42 thus, the approximate drawing of the fatigue curve a N B based on the dissipated energy and smooth determination of the estimated coefficients for the respective magnesium alloy after step loading till fracture of 3 smooth specimens for investigated AM50 and AE42 magnesium alloys contributes to the fast and adequately accurate determination of durability for smooth and notched specimens. Predictive capability of the approach is with good agreement to the experimental results for the two types of magnesium alloys AM50 and AE42.

REFERENCES
[1] Atzori, B.; Lazzarin, P.; Tovo, R.: Evaluation of the Fatigue Strength of a Deep Drawing Steel, sterreichische Ingenieur- und Architekten- Zeitschrift, (IAZ), 137, No. 11 (1992), pp. 556-561. [2] Datenblatt: Magnesium- Druckguss Legierungen, Hydro Magnesium, Brussels, Belgium, June (2001). [3] DIN EN 10002-1: Metallische Werkstoffe- Zugversuch- Teil1: Prfverfahren bei Raumtemperatur, (2001). [4] DIN 50100: Werkstoffprfung; Dauerschwingversuch, Begriffe, Zeichen, Durchfhrung, Auswertung, Dauerschwingversuche nach DIN 50100 im Zug-, Druck-, Schwell- und Wechsellastbereich. [5] Dimova, B.: Characterisation of the fatigue strength of advanced magnesium alloys, Fifth International Congress Mechanical Engineering Technologies06 Varna, (2006), pp.19-23. [6] Dimova, B.: Fatigue life of magnesium alloys under variable loading taking into account stress concentration, Ph. D. -Dissertation, (2009), Sofia. [7] Dimova, B.; Vesselinov, K.: An energy-based approach to predicting fatigue life of magnesium alloys, 11th National Congress on Theoretical and Applied Mechanics, Borovetz, (2009), ISSN: 1313-9665. [8] Dimova, B.: Comparative analysis of the different approaches for assessment of fatigue endurance, 10th Jubil. National Congress of Theoretical and Applied Mechanics, Varna, (2005), pp. 151 156. [9] Dimova, B.; Tsonev V.: An approach for predicting fatigue life of notched specimens of AZ91 magnesium alloy, Machine Design 2010 - University of Novi Sad (faculty of Technical Sciences), Serbia, (2010), pp.349-354 [10] Haibach, E.: Betriebsfestigkeit Verfahren und Daten zur Bauteilberechnung, VDI-Verlag, Dsseldorf, 1989. [11] Neuber, H.: Kerbspannungslehre, Vienna: Springer-Verlag; (1987), Reprinted in translation as Theory of notch stresses, Berlin: Springer Publishers, (1958). [12] Peterson R.E.: Stress Concentration Factors, John Wiley & Sons, New York, (1974). [13] Sonsino, S. M.; Zenner, H.; Kotte K.L.: Einflugren auf die Betriebsfestigkeit von Magnesiumlegierungen, Teil 1: Mechanische Kennwerte, Mittel- und Kerbspannungsempfindlichkeit, Magnesium Bauteilfestigkeit, Fulda, DVM-Bericht 801, (2003), S. 75-86. [14] Sonsino, S. M.; Zenner, H.; Kotte K.L.: Einflugren auf die Betriebsfestigkeit von Magnesiumlegierungen, Teil 2: Lebensdauerabschtzung fr Probekrper aus Magnesium-Druckguss, Magnesium Bauteilfestigkeit, Fulda, DVM-Bericht 801, (2003), S. 89-108. [15] Tchankov, D.; Vesselinov, K.: Fatigue life prediction under random loading using total hysteresis energy, International Journal of Pressure Vessels and Piping, Vol.75, No. 3 (1998), pp. 955-960. [16] Vesselinov, K., Inelastic behaviour of materials and determining the durability till fatigue fracture, Sofia, (2002). [17] Vesselinov, K.; Dimova, B.: Experimental analysis of a method for fast durability estimation, 10th Jubil. National Congress of Theoretical and Applied Mechanics - Varna, (2005), pp. 407 411.

1075

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

APPLICATION OF RECYCLED RUBBER IN PRODUCTION OF INSULATION PANELS

Petar eki1, Dragan Temeljkovski1, Stojano Nusev2, Velimir Stefanovi1, Mirko Stoiljkovi1
1

Mechanical Engenering Faculty University of Ni, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: petardjekic@masfak.ni.ac.rs, e-mail: temelj@masfak.ni.ac.rs, e-mail: veljas@masfak.ni.ac.rs, e-mail: mirkos@masfak.ni.ac.rs 2 Technical Faculty of Bitola, Bitola, MACEDONIA, e-mail: stojance.nusev@uklo.edu.mk

Summary: Faced with the lack of waste storage space on one hand, and the limitation of natural resources on the other, it is necessary to search for a solution in recycling. One ton of auto tires takes up to around 6 m3 of space, and it is also known that an auto tire loses only around 15% in weight during a three-year exploitation stint, while the rest of it becomes waste. Through ambiental recycling, rubber granulates of various particle sizes are obtained, which can have different purposes depending on the particle size. By mixing the granulate of 0.5 to 5.0 mm in dimension and polyurethane adhesives in a special mixing mill, and by pressing them using adequate tools, insulation panels are produced. Such panels are used for floor insulation. They are very good sound and heat insulators, they can be used as roof and heat insulation in buildings. Mechanical properties (flammability, heat conductivity, and the heat conductivity coefficient) of granulates with 2 to 4 mm in particle size are examined in this paper. Key Words: Recycled rubber, properties, insulation panels.

1. INTRODUCTION
One of the major problems of the 21st century is the quantity of waste being stored and recycled. With the progressing technological development, the amount of waste threatening the living environment increases. Disposal of waste had for a long time been the main easiest and cheapest way of solving this problem until it reached enormous proportions. Having in mind the relevant quantity of old rubber for disposal, the incineration and, especially, recycling have held a dominant position in recent years, with a declining tendency towards land filling. Polymer materials, where rubber also belongs, make only cca 10% of total waste, but significant attention is drawn towards their recycling for various reasons. One of the reasons is that these are low density, yet high voluminosity, materials, thus their products take up a lot of space in landfills (e.g. 1 ton of automobile tires takes up to around 6 m3 of space). Since they are produced from oil, polymers also have a high energy value. Today, only 12% of tires is subjected to minimal treatment, such as baling, wire or side removal, or simple cutting, etc., while 76% of tires collected for recycling gets processed into three different categories of material: shred, granulate, and powder [1,2]. Recycling of waste tires into granulate i.e. powder demands substantial economic-engineering expenditures since many rubber products, as well as automobile tires, comprise multilayered materials (usually rubber, steel, textile, polyurethane, glass, and other components). The reapplication of these components almost always assumes a clean separation of each component according to its type. All of these aspects are currently limiting the usage of old recycled rubber in large industries and the material exploitation, therefore, only has an environmental function. Bearing in mind the on-going concern for the environment and ever-stricter ecological regulations, recycling will move towards conquering new technologies which will be more acceptable both economically and ecologically.

1076

The research in the area of rubber powder application represents an attempt at finding the best way to apply recycled rubber, that is, to discover an adequate ration of recycled rubber powder for desired properties of rubber products.

2. EXPERIMENT
Through ambient recycling of waste tires different particle sizes from 0.5 to 10 mm are obtained. Rubber powder has the widest application, but its production is also the most expensive, which is why other recycling factions have been used lately [2]. For the purposes of this paper, a single square panel 500x500x33 mm in dimensions was produced out of recycled rubber granulate, rubber granulate in further text, with particle size from 2 to 4 mm, shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: View of Research Samples One of the crucial characteristics of finished products used for building insulation from the standpoint of safety is fire-resistance. Therefore, the fire-resistance of samples according to ISO 11925-2 (1999) standard was examined in this paper. The burner was positioned under a 45 angle in relation to the sample, Figure 2.

Figure 2: Fire-Resistance Test The sample was subjected to the flame for 30 sec. The breaking strength was examined in accordance with DIN 53571 standard, where a type 3 specimen was used on a universal testing machine, with the locking grips movement speed of 300 mm/min. The view of the measuring post is shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Breaking Strength Test The maximum load before destruction was also examined. A square-shaped sample, 100x100x30 mm in dimensions, cut from a panel was subjected to a force on a universal testing machine until the sample was destroyed.

1077

Heat-resistance testing, i.e. heat conduction of panels, was carried out in the Accredited Laboratory within the laboratory plant for the examination of heat conduction in constructions and buildings, using a measuring method in accordance with JUS U.A9.054 and JUS U.F2.025. standard in a chamber with regulated temperature conditions in line with JUS U.J5.060. standard. [3-5]. The following measuring instruments and equipment were used in this testing: Thermal flux meter HFM-215 by Kyoto Electronics Manufacturing Co. Ltd, with TR2-C and TR6-C type sensors, which measure low heat flow (from 11,5 to 3500W/m2), but also the sample surface temperature (from -40 to 150oC) upon which they are mounted, Figure 4. They possess seriallyconnected type K-chromel-alumel thermocouples. One group of thermocouples is used for measuring thermal flux, while the other is used for measuring temperature. Silicon rubber is the material of sensors.

Figure 4: Thermal Flux Meter HFM-215 Supporting software by the same manufacturer DAQSTANDARD, which is used to collect the measured data and process them, i.e. convert the output stress signal emitted by the sensor into the appropriate thermal flux and temperature values. Type K-chromel-alumel thermocouples for the additional measurement of sample surface temperature. Calibrated thermometers with a stand, 2 pieces, for measuring air temperature in the chamber. Device for cooling air inside the cold chamber split system, size 12, that has the ability to under cool air inside the cold chamber up to 18oC. Device for heating air in the hot chamber calorifer heater 2 kW in power or a heating device of adequate power. The measurement of thermal flux was done in two chambers (hot and cold), base dimensions 1.98x2.01m, height 2.47m, Figures 5 and 6. The walls of the chambers were in the form of sandwich construction, made of sheet metal and Styrofoam, with 7cm in thickness. Both chambers had an exit door towards the auxiliary room. Door dimensions were 2.10x0.80m. The doors were made of glass with wooden frames, and were covered in Styrofoam during the experiment in order to reduce heat loss, that is, gain through them. The wall between the hot and cold chambers, where the examined sample was embedded, was 7cm in thickness and was also made of sheet metal and Styrofoam in a sandwich construction. Its dimensions were 1.98x2.47m. The floor was made of chipboard, while the ceiling was made of sheet metal and Styrofoam (sandwich construction), with a ceiling pocket for drainage. On the outer wall of the cold chamber, 2.15m from the floor, the inner unit of the split system was placed, while the calorifer heater was positioned in such a way, close to the outer wall of the hot chamber, on the floor, so as to avoid direct heat emission towards the examined sample. The calibrated thermometers that measured air temperature in the chambers were placed approximately in the middle of the chambers. Sensors for measuring thermal flux and sample surface temperature, as well as thermocouples was measuring sample surface temperature were attached to the examined sample [3, 4]. All the auxiliary apparatuses were placed in the auxiliary room, where the persons conducting the test were also situated.

1078

Figure 5: Facility Where the Measuring Chambers Were Installed

01 Hot Chamber, 02 Cold Chamber. Measuring Equipment and Accessories: 1 Heating Device (Calorifer Heater), 2 Cooling Device (Inner Unit of Split System), 3 Partition Wall with the Examined Sample, 4 Thermal Flux Meter Stand, 5 Thermal Flux Meter HFM-215, 6 Thermal Flux Meter Sensors and 7, 8 Thermometers for Measuring Air Temperature in the Cold and Hot Chambers with Stands

Figure 6: Room and Measuring Equipment Layout: Above Vertical Section, Below View from Above (Horizontal Section). Rooms: 00 Auxiliary Room, The examined sample, Figure 7, was embedded between two chambers of different temperatures (hot and cold) in the position to be applied in practice (horizontal, vertical, diagonal), and its heat flow resistance was obtained as the quotient of the mean temperature difference between the boundary sample surfaces and the appropriate value of heat flow density through the sample in the stationary state. Heat flow density was measured using a heat flow density meter thermal flux meter, whose sensors were attached to the surface of the examined sample. Since the sample surface temperature was also measured using the flux meter sensors in this case, thus it was necessary to position these sensors on both sides of the examined sample .

Figure 7: Sample in the Measuring Spot with Attached Sensors Special attention was paid not to expose the examined sample to emissions from the heating and/or cooling device, as well as not to allow the air flow speed to exceed 3-4m/s [3, 4].

1079

3. RESULTS
The flammability test showed that the sample was lit after being subjected to flames, and that it was extinguished 7 sec. after the removal of the burner. The measured breaking strength was 0.58 N/mm, while the destruction of the sample was caused by a 28.5 kN/mm (28,500 kg/mm) force. The first results processing phase related to the calculation of temperature differences between the warmer and cooler sample surfaces and heat flow resistance of the examined sample. The procedure was separately carried out for glass and window frame. Due to the volume of the database, it was most convenient to execute the first results processing phase directly in Microsoft Excel, furthermore, in the same sheet where the obtained database was. For each moment of time for which the data was gathered, the difference between the temperatures of the warmer and cooler examined sample surfaces was calculated: (1) =
t h

Where:

A difference of temperatures between the warmer and cooler sample surfaces, in oC, B temperature of warmer sample surface, in oC, C temperature of cooler sample surface, in oC. And the heat flow resistance of the examined sample:

R=
Where:

qk

(2)

R heat flow resistance of sample, in m2K/W, k coefficient of heat conduction through sample, in W/m2K. When there were many characteristic measuring points on each side of the sample, the mean temperature difference was calculated, obtained by surface-averaging: (3) 1 n

sr =

() i
i =1

And the mean value of thermal flux, also obtained by surface-averaging:

q sr =

1 m (qk ) j m j =1

(4)

where n is the number of temperature difference values being averaged, while m is the number of thermal flux measuring spots. The heat flow resistance of the examined sample was obtained using the relation: (5)

R=

sr

q sr

The obtained values of heat flow resistance for every 2 seconds were time-averaged. That way, the value of the heat flow resistance expressed by the sample material was obtained. For the examined sample, the obtained heat flow resistance values were: RS = 0,182 m2K/W. The second results processing phase was also carried out in Microsoft Excel. Taking the obtained heat flow resistance value, but also the heat flow resistance value due to heat transfer, Ri and Re, prescribed by JUS U.J5.600. standard, the value of the heat conduction coefficient was calculated for the examined sample: (6) 1

k=

Ri + R + Re

Ri was the heat flow resistance due to heat transfer from the inner side of the sample (a reciprocal value of the heat transfer coefficient between the sample and the air in the room where the sample was to be placed) which amounted to 0.13m2K/W, while Re was the heat flow resistance due to heat transfer from the outer side of the sample (a reciprocal value of the heat transfer coefficient between the sample and the outer air) which amounted to 0.04m2K/W. Thus obtained heat conduction coefficient values of the sample yield the heat conduction coefficient of the window.

1080

k=

k S FS + k O FO FP

For the examined sample, k is: k=0.173 W/m2K.

4. ANALYSIS AND DISCUSSION

Based on the flammability tests, it was determined that the material used for the production of panels belonged to the flammability class B2, and that it was also resistant to the presence of (cigarette) cinder making the starting of flames improbable. Tensile characteristics of the material (breaking strength and destruction force) were in line with standards, implying that the material would not be destroyed in adequate exploitation conditions. The heal conduction coefficient K showed that the material had good insulation characteristics, yet somewhat weaker in comparison with Styrofoam or similar insulation materials. The disadvantage was the heavy weight of the sample, whereat a panel of 500x500x33 in dimensions weighed 17.6 kg.

5. CONCLUSION
The experiment results show: The sample is self-extinguishable; therefore, it can be used for insulation from the standpoint of safety. The resistance to permanent static and dynamic loads is great, thus it can be used without the danger of being destroyed. Heat conduction is small, thus it can be used in insulation, yet its insulation properties are weaker than those of Styrofoam. The disadvantage lies in its heavy weight; therefore, it is more often used for floor insulation than wall insulation. The purpose of this paper is to instigate a greater application of recycled rubber and its wider use, all in the aim of reducing both the quantity of waste rubber and the product price.

REFERENCES
[1] Petar S. eki , Dragan Temeljkovski, Stojane Nusev, IZBOR OPTIMALNOG PROCESA RECIKLAE OTPADNIH PNEUMATIKA ,Istraivanja i projektovanja za privredu, vol 8, broj 2, str. 65-72, 2010 , [2] Sadhan K. De Avraam I. Isayev Klementina Khait, RUBBER RECYCLING, Taylor & Francis Group, 2005, [3] M. Stojiljkovi, V. Stefanovi, EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF OVERALL HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT OF WINDOWS, IX Triennial International SAUM Conference on Systems, Automatic Control and Measurements Ni, Serbia, November 22-23, 2007, [4] M. Stojiljkovi, V. Stefanovi, MERENJE KOEFICIJENTA PROLAZA TOPLOTE PROZORA, Projekat: NPEE 815-168A, Mainski fakultet Univerziteta u Niu, 2005, [5] http://kyoto-kem.com.

1081

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MODELING OF HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM TRUCK

1

Jelena R. Eri Obuina1, Vladan S. Obuina2

High technical engineering professional studies school, Trstenik, SERBIA, e-mail: jecaeric79@yahoo.com 2 Army of Serbia, Kraljevo, SERBIA, e-mail: obucina_vladan@yahoo.com

Summary: Product modeling is a concept for the presentation of engineering information required in the process of designing products and is the basis of this integration. Computer modeling allows you to create a computer model so that the research conducted on them instead of the physical model. Therefore, the product model is a basic element of the integration of computer-supported module production system. Automation of process for design product and technologys preliminary on base of computer applaing is appellation design produces with useing computer (CAD-Computer Aided Design) and design technology with useing computer (CAM-Computer Aided Manufacturing). Keywords: modeling, hydraulic servo steering gear.

1. INTRODUCTION
Security tasks set before the control systems of motor vehicles can be achieved in a number of different ways. On this basis we can conclude that today there are many different types of control systems used to achieve control of cargo vehicles. With the advent of technology, in order to facilitate human work in all areas, led to the application of an additional auxiliary power to operate - use servo steering gear. In heavy trucks and buses, this application is already a reality, for the production. Until recently, for medium heavy vehicles, installing hydraulic servo steering gear applied as special equipment on request, as well as for larger passenger vehicles. But now with these categories of vehicles built hydraulic servo steering gear serial. This is particularly and generally refers to the vehicles that drive in city traffic. Trucks have a control system which is designed depending on the required axle load, characterized by applying servo steering gear as additional auxiliary power. One such system is given in the following figure, modeled using the software package Solid Edge. Holding company "Prva Petoletka", is a manufacturer of hydraulic and pneumatic components and installation and as such is a leading industry in our country and the region. An integral part of the company's factory "Servoupravljai". As can be seen from the name of the main program is the production of hydraulic servo steering gear. Application of hydraulic servo steering gear in domestic motor vehicles first began to heavy goods vehicles and buses, then on medium heavy, with a tendency to use and easier commercial vehicles. All components that are installed in hydraulic servo steering gear, except for sealing elements, are produced in factories and plants delivered to the plant for final assembly and testing. In that 40-60% of the total time for the realization of the hydraulic assembly processes servo steering gear belongs. Recognizing this fact, and that is the result of mounting the finished product, it can be said that the installation of the main part of the production process. The main processes in the installation of the operation, installation and testing. Regardless of the mounting process is concerned, the goal is to get racionlnu and efficient installation, ready to work with other production processes, the demands of the market. In order to faster and better meeting the large and diverse demands coming from the market, it is necessary to achieve the target reduction of time associated with the birth of variation or completely new product. The time required for engineering activities in product design and technology, is the longest process in the creation of variation or completely new products and to a large extent can be reduced by introducing advanced information

1082

systems and technologies. These technologies, supported by CAD / CAA systems and suites for modeling Solid Edge, integrate and coordinate various stages of design, in engineering activities. Living and working space was a man filled with new risks for the creation and use of various forms of energy, using the achievements of science and technology. The development of motor transport has brought great changes in the life of man, because he's living conditions by creating new risks, which until then had not known. In its industrial products plant vehicles, trucks Zastava from Kragujevac and FAP from Priboj, have developed a wide range of freight cars, and they are common, as with some and in other types of vehicle hydraulic steering system makes servo steering gear PPT developed for different axle loads.

2. CONTROL SYSTEM FOR VEHICLES

Management system in motor vehicles has a fundamental duty to ensure the movement of vehicles in any direction. Management system is one of the major systems of motor vehicles of which the functionality and reliability of important safety depends on vehicle traffic. By bus and freight cars (especially the larger category) have found wide application management mechanisms with servo steering gear or more precisely servo-hydraulic controls. 2.1. Servo steering gear management system In the case when the resistance rounding wheels so large that the steering wheel - wheel vehicles have made too many great powers, and sometimes out beyond the driver in the control system are built or special intensification servo steering gear. With servo steering gear creates opportunities for very easy operation for which they have recently used the same not only to the cargo and working vehicles, but also the weight of larger passenger vehicles, and working capacity. In the latter case, especially at higher speeds of movement provides greater security management, and high performance and speed can be increased. It is very important to emphasize that with the servo steering gear be quite easy to keep the vehicle on the road and in the case at higher speeds when it comes to a sudden release of air from a tire, which in other cases very difficult. Introduction servo-motor a substantial increase in the degree of mechanization systems for the management. The main task is servo-motor signal amplification, which operates the driver steering wheel during his transfer to the controlled wheels. 2.2. Geometric modeling servo steering gear Automation of product is based on formalized knowledge and thoroughly tipical structures products. Engineering activities are carried out according to the functional requirements in relation to the restrictions. Restrictions are usually placed on an integrated view of product design and manufacturing. In fact, the commitment in research related to the formation of the general model of the product from which it is possible to generate specific models to support the simultaneous design of individual modules. In theoretical analysis, modeling is based on field research, such as generating cause - oriented product models, conceptual, preliminary and detailed design using primitives, modeling primitives at the level of components and prefabricated structures, integration of CA modules and generate specific models from general. The structure thus conceived models of products have appropriate incentives to design that are reflected in the following explanations: Each entity module (process, functions, ...) is the result of synthesis, modeling, computing, etc ..., each activity passes through various stages of finalization: concept (specification), a preliminary activity, detailing and final state, range of project activities determines the product, which defines the number of processes, functions, organs and components. Designer follows the strategy which leaves aside the detailed thinking about the process, function and execution system, but was forced to assembling products in the field do the complete specification, The designer can finalize gradual several times to pass each entity model of the product. Typically, the designer follows the strategy to the final completion of the process of installation. The advantages of such a set model of the structure of the product are the following: The flexible design approaches to "bottom up", "top down" concrete or abstract, To be open to progress in the activities of Developer. Solid Edge is a computer supported system for product design (CAD / CAA / CADD) developed on the basis of the so-called stream technology. The goal of applied technology to increase performance and software to provide interface with the corresponding maximum productivity and assessment of feasibility of investment in procurement.

1083

A unique range of tools Solid Edge is available and easy to use, and helps in gaining a favorable position in the market, shortening the time of design. Solid Edge improves the engineering design of parametric modeling tools and products based on the primitives. The starting form of the modeling in Solid Edge in the profile (sketch). Three-dimensional solid model structure is achieved by rotation profile around the axis or translation along a particular path that may not be straightforward. From these two basic ways of forming a three-dimensional models of products coming all the other complex commands. Modeling product representatives start creating contours that define the basic profile of a selected plane.

Figure 1: Define the basic profile of a selected plane

Using commands that we allow the formation of the model, we build our geometrical model. Further by using the commands of the software package, Hole, Draft, Round, we just want our first geometric shape representative assembly model management system.

Figure 2: Model of the housing As our case servo steering gear first element that makes the control system modeled, further process of modeling other building components that will later connect to the circuit. The most important representatives are given in the following pictures are evidence of the component-level modeling software package from a Solid Edge.

1084

Figure 3: Model of the clip

Figure 4: Subassembly of the clip support action

Figure 5: Model of the threaded spindle

1085

Figure 6: Model of the cover 2.3. Modelling of heavy vehicles driver Modeled using sub-assemblies, which are given in the previous description, the modeling of control system we need appropriate models and elements, as follows: - Model steering wheel - steering wheel cargo vehicles, - Hydraulic servo steering gear model, - Axis control model, - Model of the lever, - Model bond managers, - Wheel truck models. All of these models, modeling the previously described manner, the command structure for mounting assembly, linking the complex, as is shown in the following pictures.

Figure 7: Subassembly of model steering wheel - steering wheel cargo vehicles, hydraulic servo steering gear and axis control model

Figure 8: Subassembly of model steering wheel - steering wheel cargo vehicles, hydraulic servo steering gear, axis control model, model of the lever and bond managers model

1086

Figure 9: Model of truck driver With these pictures we can see that in a control system, all previously participating modeling elements that are only connected in one unit. 2.4. Hierarchical structure of the hydraulic servo steering gear In figure 10 given the hierarchical structure of the hydraulic servo steering gear, whose main subassemblies: I - housing subassemblies, II subassemblies clip and III - shaft segment subassemblies and components. Components: 3 - Cover, 5 - Sealing ring, 6 - Sealing ring, 7 - The cover housing, 8 - The cover housing, 9 screw shorter, 10 - bolt longer, 11 - lever, 12 - Nut, 13 - Rely washers, 14 - Cap.

Hydraulic servo steering gear

Housing subassemblies

14 3
Subassemblies clip II

5 7
Shaft segment subassemblies III

8 13 6

10

11

12
Figure 10: Hierarchical structure of the hydraulic servo steering gear

1087

3. CONCLUSION
Taking into account the concept of design of products CAD / CAA / CADD in the final work is shown in computer-supported design technologies work. It is also mounting data servo steering gear hierarchical structure and its hydraulic components that were previously modeled using the software package Solid Edge. The importance and purpose of hydraulic servo steering gear, and the whole control system of freight vehicles. One way of raising the quality of product and process technology is based on the application and development of CA technology and their integration to the concept of simultaneous engineering. Product modeling is a concept for presentation of engineering information required in the process of designing products and is the basis of this integration. Computer modeling allows you to create a computer model so that the research conducted on them instead of the physical model. Therefore, the product model is a basic element of the integration of computersupported module production system.

REFERENCES
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Minic M.: Sistems for controll lorry motor vehicle, Belgrade, Serbia, 1992., Eric J.: Final work, Faculty of mechanical engineering in Kraljevo, Serbia, 2004., Babic A.: Technology of assembly, Faculty of mechanical engineering in Kraljevo, Serbia, 2005., Obucina V.: Final work, Faculty of mechanical engineering in Kraljevo, Serbia, 2005., Rajamani R., Vehicle Dynamics and Control, University of Minnesota, USA, 2005., Meitinger Th., Breitfeld C., Simulation des dynamichen Verhaltens von Zahnstagen - Hydrolenkugen, 1998., J. W. Fitech, Motor Truck Engineering Handbook, SAE, Warendalle, USA, 1993. M. Demic, Analysis of Influence of Design Parametars on Steered Dynamics, 26 (1996.), pp. 343-379 PRODUCTION PROGRAMME - TECHNICAL DATA, PPT Trstenik, Serbia. Eric J.: Master work, Faculty of mechanical engineering in Kraljevo, Serbia, 2007.

1088

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SOLID-PHASE ZINC PLATING

Rashit Galin1, Yordanka Atanasova2, Hristo Hristov2, Petkov Galin 2, Sashko Fiskuchev3
2

Vika-Gal Ltd, RUSSIA, E-mail: vika-gal@chel.surnet.ru Technical University, Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: yordanka_atanasova@mail.bg, e-mail: hghristov5@gmail.com , e-mail: petkov@metalik-bcp.com 3 JITI- Rousse, BULGARIA, e-mail: fiskuchev@mail.bg

Summary: Zinc powder treated according to a specific technique has been used for zinc plating of steels 25 and 45. The diffusion layers obtained at 405 0 C are uniform and have a good adhesion with the metal base. This zinc plating technique can be employed for treating small-size workpieces with threads. Keywords: zinc plating, diffusion layer.

1. INTRODUCTION
In publications [1, 2] three methods of diffusion zinc plating were recognized: from vapour phase, gaseous and liquid. Zinc plating from vapour phase takes place in powdery mixtures consisting of zinc powder or zinc dust with the addition of zinc chloride or ammonium chloride or aggregates (aluminum oxides, chamot, quartz sand). This method can be employed in contact and non-contact ways. By the contact way the zinc vaporization takes place in reaction medium in immediate proximity to where the zinc powder contacts the surface being treated. By the non-contact technique at a certain distance from the surface being treated.

2. EXPOSITION
Nowadays the contact technique is the most widespread one in industry for diffusion zinc plating using additives to the mixture consisting of zinc powder and aggregates. There are disposable mixtures and reusable ones. The major disadvantage of vapour phase zinc plating is uneven zinc plating of products (in this case large-size workpieces or a great number of small-size workpieces) and also instability of the process (it is difficult to achieve high accuracy adjustment of the thickness of plating) seriously hampers the introduction of this type of coating. In our opinion the shortcomings of vapour zinc plating are closely related to the mechanism of forming the coating by this method of zinc plating and the complex control of manufacturing parameters for conducting the process. It is known [ 2 ] that coating by vapour zinc plating consists of the following main stages: 1. Vaporization of zinc from the surface of the powder particles. 2. Condensation of zinc vapours on the surface of the products 3. Reciprocal diffusion of zinc and the material of the product. In the general case vaporization rate and condensation are determined by the similar equations of HertzKnudsen: (1) Iv=v(Pe-P)/(2mkT), Where Iv is the vaporization rate, Pe is the pressure of saturated zinc vapours P is the pressure of zinc vapours in the system

1089

v is the vaporization coefficient (2) Ic=c(P-Pe)/(2mkT), where Ic is the condensation rate is the condensation coefficient . Saturated zinc vapour pressure rises with a rise in temperature following logarithmic dependency and, as a result vaporization rate increases with an increase in temperature. Vaporization takes place when zinc vapour pressure at the temperature of the process is lower than the saturated zinc vapour pressure at given temperature, and condensation occurs, on the contrary, when zinc vapour pressure is higher than saturated zinc vapour pressure at the temperature reached on the surface of the products. Temperature rise on the surface of the product impedes condensation process because for condensation it is necessary zinc vapour pressure to be higher than saturated zinc vapour pressure at this temperature. In this way the process can run steadily if temperature gradient between zinc powder and workpieces being treated could be kept as required. In this case the powder has higher temperature and intensive evaporation takes place, and temperature on the workpiece surface is lower and the real pressure of zinc vapour on the surface turns out to be higher than saturated vapour pressure for the temperature on the workpiece surface. As a result zinc vapours will condense intensively on the workpiece surface. However, it is impossible to keep temperature gradient in the course of the whole process of zinc plating by the contact method especially for zinc plating employing rotation. Relatively stable results from thermodiffusion zinc plating are obtained when the workpieces are coated statically completely embedded in powder. So in the process of heating workpieces, saturating powder is heated earlier and the created temperature gradient is steady enough resulting in stable thermodiffusion zinc coating. When rotation is involved in zinc plating and temperatures of powder and workpiece are the same, the only thermodynamic stimulus for transferring zinc in the form of vapour out of powder particles onto the workpiece surface is the difference in pressure of saturating zinc vapours above convex surface of powder particles and flat surface of workpieces. Obviously, in practice this is insufficient and as a result we see dark surface of zinc coated workpieces, i.e. zinc coating runs with insufficient supply of zinc on the surface of workpieces being treated. Considerable iron content on the surface of such coating accounts for this and the coating consists predominantly of G-phase. It is also necessary to note that saturated vapour pressure on concave surface is lower than saturated vapour pressure on flat surface at given temperature. Therefore, concaved surfaces are zinc coated more intensively. This fact renders zinc coating on fixtures with small threads difficult. Coefficient v coefficient of vaporization has a great significance for the stability of saturating capacity of mixtures. Data is available in publications that vaporization coefficient for real zinc surfaces depending on the state of the oxide film can take values from 10-6 to 1,0. Therefore it is better to adopt disposable saturating mixtures. Obviously, in these mixtures during single heating the surface of powder particles is completely covered with an impenetrable film of chemical compounds and as a result this powder is unsuitable for further uses. Firm VIKA-GALLtd manufactures saturating mixtures consisting of zinc powder, whose particles are covered with a thin zinc oxide coating [3].Vaporization coefficient for powder particle surface of the mixture is 0.001 of theoretically possible vaporization rate at zinc coating temperatures of 380-450. The porous structure of the oxide film and the considerable excess of the total surface of powder particles over the total surface of the workpieces being zinc coated, accounts for sufficient mass transfer of zinc by surface diffusion of zinc from the surface of powder particles when the workpiece surface contacts the powder. In this way high-quality coating is formed on the workpiece surface from - phase. High rate zinc coating of metal products occurs at low temperatures 380-400. In this way when using saturating mixtures manufactured by VIKA-GALLtd, the only mechanism of forming thermodiffusion zinc coating is zinc diffusion from particle surface onto workpiece surface and the process is controlled by a small number of parameters (temperature and duration of contact between workpieces and saturating medium). The elimination from the manufacturing process the processes of vaporization and condensation which are hard to control, allows substantial enhancement of production effectiveness of thermodiffusion zinc coating in powder by the contact method and wholly define this process as solid-phase zinc plating. [ 4 ]. To study the process of thermodiffusion zinc coating by vapour phase, an experiment was conducted to treat bands of Steel 3 in an airtight container shown in Fig.1..The air in the container had been pumped-out before up to residual pressure of 10-3 at and filled it up with argon with excess pressure of 0,050,1tm. Steel band 3mm thick, 30mm wide and 400mm long was placed in a container in a vertical position. The lower part of the band (at 40 mm) was covered in saturating mixture consisting of 10% Zn and 90% Al2O3. The container was put into a heated electric furnace with surface temperature of 650. After heating for an hour, the temperature in the container was distributed as shown in Fig, 1. Then heating under the set temperature conditions lasted 2 hours. Temperature was controlled in various zones along the height of the container by sliding thermocouples every 10-15 minutes.

1090

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Airtight container(air pumped out, filled with argon) Steel band Thermocouple Saturating mixture, T = 600C Intensive zinc coating zone No zinc coating (T = 450-550) Zinc coating zone ( = 400-430) Zone of insufficient zinc coating, zinc partially condenses in the form of powder ( = 360 - 390) 9. Condensate in the form of powder ( = 40-50)

Figure 1: Airtight container Study of coating thickness along the steel band using a magnetic thickness gauge and by metallographic methods has shown an unusual relation between coating thickness and temperature zones in the container. In the lower part of the band covered in the saturating mixture, the coating is within 180200mkm. In the zone of the band where it is 190 mm long at temperature from 550 to 450, there is no zinc coating. In the next zone, heated up to 430-400, coating thickness increases from 20 micrometers to 50 micrometers in the middle of the zone and then decreases up to 10 micrometers at the end . At the end of the band a zone of 50-60mm where temperature of heating is from 390 to 360, there is insufficient coating 510micrometers thick and zinc condensation in the form of powder. Intensive zinc condensation in the form of powder there was also on the roof of the container and in the upper parts inside on the container walls. The lack of zinc coating in temperature zone of 450550 can be explained in the following way: Equilibrium pressure of saturated zinc vapours is required for initiating condensation (without taking into account the necessary over-saturation) in the temperature range of 450550 changes by 0,341 to 4 mm of mercury column. Since there are cooler zones in the container where equilibrium pressure is considerably lower, vapour condensation takes place in zones of much lower temperatures, i.e. there is constant flow of zinc vapors from the zone of heating within 450550 , where zinc vapour pressure cannot reach equilibrium values. ble 1: Zinc coating conditions /temperature of specimens/ eating , eating, Heating Heating [min] up [min] up [min] up [min] up to 320 to 350 to 405 to 390 1 15 15 30 50 2 15 10 30 60 3 12 15 30 45 4 15 25 30 60

1091

ble 2:Zinc coating conditions / temperature of retort/ Cooling Heating Heating Heating time[min] time temperat time up to [min] up to ure [] [min] 340 440 1 530 15 30 50 2 530 10 30 60 3 530 15 30 45 4 520 25 30 60 Using the same powder for zinc coating, specimens of Steels 25 and 45 were treated in a rotating furnace in different operating conditions /Table 1, Table 2/. At low temperature of zinc coating, 320-350 the diffusion layer consists only of phase /solid solution of Zn in Fe/. After developing using 3% solution of HNO3 , the diffusion layer appears as a light, poorly developed zone /Fig.2/.

Figure 2: Microstructure of Steel 45 after zinc coating at 320 for 150 min. 200 At higher temperature of zinc coating, above phase, a narrow dark layer appears G-phase. Because of iron diffusion, its content in the phase reaches 21 28 %. In this way it appears to be a supplier of iron atoms for the layer which is forming above from phase /Fig.3/

Figure 3: Microstructure of Steel 45 after zinc coating at 405 for 150 min. 200 This phase has columnar structure and contains from 7,0 up to 11,5% of zinc. -phase can be seen above it containing only about 6% of iron. As a result of long years of studies in Firm VIKA-GAL new powdery media have been developed and methods for their synthesis for obtaining anticorrosion coatings of steels by means of contact diffusion zinc coating. As it has been noted above, a major problem for chemical heat treatment is zinc powder caking and its adhesion to the surfaces of workpieces being treated. To overcome this disadvantage, a method for zinc powder treatment has been developed, by which a thin nano-crystalline oxide layer of ZnO is formed on the particle surface. Since zinc particles have a diameter of 40-50 micrometers the size of zinc oxide grains is 50-100 nanometers (Patent RF 2170643 Modified zinc powder) . Because of the presence of a refractory oxide layer, powder does not cake and does not stick to the steel even at T=700 C, i.e., much higher than melting point of zinc (effect of non-reactivity). The porous structure of the oxide layer, evidence of which is the presence of nano-size particles of ZnO and nano-pores of 5-10 nanometers (data obtained by mercury pore-

1092

meter) ensures its high penetrability for zinc diffusion, i.e. it increases the velocity of feeding Zn atoms to the steel surface being saturated (Fig. 4).

Figure 4: Microstructure of the surface of powder particles with nano-crystalline structure and porosity of 0.16cm3 cm3 The properties of the powders obtained as well as the size uniformity of the particles allows zinc coating to be carried out without any activators and without adding any aggregates. This improves the environmental parameters of the process (volatile zinc oxides are not formed) and facilitates recycling/utilization of the used mixture. Moreover, because of the high diffusion penetrability of the oxide film, it became possible to make the process temperature lower than zinc melting point without substantial decrease in the growth rate of the diffusion layer. In this case only the contact solid-phase mechanism for feeding zinc atoms to the surface being saturated works. This makes process control easier and prevents emission of Zn vapours into environment. High-quality uniform coating is formed on the workpiece surface consisting mainly of -phase. The high rate zinc coating of metal products in powder in firm VIKA-GAL proceeds at low enough temperatures of T=380-400. Lower temperature of chemical heat treatment compared to conventional processes guarantees a decrease in thermal stresses in long-size products (pipes, beams) and workpieces with intricate shape and that prevents their distortion. Compared to vapour-phase zinc coating, solid-phase contact zinc coating allows time shortening chemical heat treatment by 1,5-2 times and powder consumption by 20-25% preserving the high quality of coating obtained. Since steel does not contact melted zinc particles, as it is during diffusion zinc coating in conventional powdery media at T>Tm(Zn), workpiece surfaces keep their initial roughness this is important, for example, for workpieces which are to be painted from the point of view of adhesion of varnish-and-paint coating. On the basis of results studying the structure and properties of thermodiffusion zinc coating, it has been found out that under certain operatingconditions for zinc coating, on the coating surface is formed a fine-dispersed zinc oxide film. It has been found that the presence of zinc oxide particles of 100200 nanometers on the coating surface ensures high adhesion strength of outer polymer or varnishand-paint layer. (Patent 2353707 Protective Coating of Metal Product Surfaces).It has been found out that the formation of fine-dispersed zinc oxide particles on the coating surface occurs in parallel with the formation of the coating itself due to the following chemical conveying reaction: Zn()+2 Zn()+ 2(). 3. CONCLUSION 1. Solid-phase zinc coating in powder containing especially treated zinc, at temperature of 320 350 allows a layer to be obtained on the surface of Steels 25 and 45, consisting only of solid solution of Zn in Fe.

1093

2. Zinc coating layers at 405, consist successively of - , G -, - and phase, as zinc coating in zinc bath. 3. The obtained layers are uniform and have good adhesion with the metal base. The proposed method of zinc coating is suitable for zinc coating of fixtures with small threads..

REFERENCES
[1]Proskurin E.V., N.S.Gorbunov. Diffusion Zinc Coatings. Moscow, Metallurgy, 1972, p.247 [2] Proskurin E.V., .D.Zholudev. Problems of Liquid Zinc Coating, MiTOM, No 4, 1988, pp. 74-76. [3] Voroshnin A.P., R.G.Galin. New Technology of Making Saturating Powdery Mixtures for Diffusion Zinc Coating. MiTOM, No 1, 1996, p.21. [4] Galin R.G. Composition Powder Based on Zn ZnO System Effective Raw Material for Thermodiffusion Zinc Coating, Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, No 9, 2004, pp. 51-52.

1094

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

EQUIPMENT FOR THERMODIFFUSION ZINC COATING. CAPACITIES AND PROSPECS

Rashit Galin1, Yordanka Atanasova2, Radoslav Savekov3, Sashko Fiskuchev4
VIKA-GAL Ltd, RUSSIA, e-mail: vika-gal@chel.surnet.ru TU, Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: yordanka_atanasova@mail.bg 3 Metalik BISIPI, Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: savekov@metalik-bsp.com 4 JITI, Rousse, BULGARIA, e-mail: fiskuchev@mail.bg
2 1

Summary: The paper presents a number of types of specific equipment for themodiffusion zinc coating of bands, wires, sheets, pipes, fixing elements which have been developed and introduced in machine building in the recent years. Solution for transporting the powder-like mixture environmentally friendly separation of workpieces from the saturation medium, etc. has been suggested. Keywords: thermodiffusion coating, equipment for coating, fixing elements, band.

1. INTRODUCTION
In recent decades definite interest has been displayed in thermodiffusion zinc coating in powdery media as an alternative to galvanizing and hot zinc plating since the proposed technology is environmentally friendly. However, the unavailability of specific constructional solutions to developing equipment for thermodiffusion coating in powdery media hampers the wide spread of this method in industry. Nowadays factories using thermodiffusion method of protective coating employ thermal equipment designed for conventional heat treatment of workpieces. Technological operations as: transportation of saturating medium (powder), separation of workpieces from powder are performed manually or by low-efficient or unsuitable mechanisms. As a result the workplaces become dusty and in this way the idea of environmentally friendly (dry) technology is discredited as an alternative to (wet) dip zinc plating.

2. EXPOSITION
For the last 20 years VIKA-GALLtd has developed and started manufacturing several types of specific equipment for zinc coating of metal products, long-sized parts, bands, wires and sheets by thermodiffusion method taking into account the need to convey powder and separate workpieces from powder without dust emissions at workplaces. equipment for thermodiffusion zinc coating of metal products and small parts has a number of construction variants, depending on the technical solution Figure 1 shows an installation for thermodifusion zinc coating of metal products and small parts which has cyclic operation (Patent 2130508). This installation consists of an electric furnace, cylindrical working chamber up to 1.5 m long, working chamber rotating drive and a mechanism for turning the working chamber in vertical position to load workpieces in it and in horizontal position for isothermal heating in the process of zinc coating. Zinc coating of metal products and small parts can be done by direct loading into the working chamber of metal products and saturating mixture in the form of powder or in especially designed tooling. Separation of workpieces from powder after zinc coating operation takes place either on a stand by blowing the zinc coated workpiece to remove the powder or by using a system of pneumatic transport. Pneumatic transport provides pumping-out of the removed powder into a discharging bin and cleaning the air after blowing the workpiece. The powder collected after zinc coating returns from the discharging bin back to be used for zinc coating of the next

1095

batch of workpieces. Depending on the overall dimension of the installation it is possible to perform uniform zinc coating on metal products and small workpieces of up to 200 kg per hour. Figure 2 shows an installation for thermodifusion zinc coating of metal products and small workpieces and the process is continuous. This installation consists of an electric furnace, airtight system for continuous loading of workpieces into the working chamber, a lock chamber, a working chamber for mixing and separating the powder and a mechanism for unloading the ready zinc coated workpieces. In this installation the saturating mixture is constantly heated and the used up mixture is compensated by adding the same amount. This zinc coating is very economical and profitable. Electric power consumption per 1kg of zinc coated product is 0.06 to 0.08 kiloWatts. The output of this installation depending on its overall dimension is up to 1 ton per hour. In JITI Rousse such installation has been in operation nonstop since December 2005 for manufacturing metal products. After thermodifusion zinc coating workpieces meet all requirements of customers from the European Union. Using the developed method of thermodifusion zinc coating, small workpieces for electric power engineering and especially for electric power lines have been manufactured. Metallographic studies of diffusion layers obtained under various operating conditions carried out at the Technical University of Gabrovo have shown that these layers cover both outer and inner surfaces, including threads, small and blind holes with uniform layers.

Figure 1: Installation for thermodifusion zinc coating of metal

products with cyclic operation

Figure 2: Installation for continuous thermodifusion zinc coating of metal products

1096

Equipment for thermoduffusion zinc coating of long-size parts (Patent 2156830) is shown in Figures 3-4. Equipment for thermodiffusion zinc coating for long-size parts developed so far can treat products which have a cross-section of up up to 500 mm and a length of up to 25- 30 m The output of the installation is up to 1,0-1,2 tons per hour. Equipment for thermodifusion zinc coating of longsize parts consists of: -loading and unloading lines for long-size parts in special cylindrical containers; -thermodifusion zinc coating line; -pneumatic transporter for loading and removing powder from containers.

Figure 3: Installation for thermodifusion zinc coating of long-size parts

Figure 4: Installation for thermodifusion zinc coating of long-size parts

1097

Figure 5: Installation for thermodifusion zinc coating of bands This equipment can be used for zinc coating both for long-size parts and for metal products depending on the necessary tooling used.

Figure 6:

Installation for zinc coating of couplings

Figure 5 shows equipment for thermodifusion zinc coating of bands, sheets and wires. Equipment for lock chamber and a system for winding and unwinding products. Drawing rate of zinc coated products depends on the thickness of parts and on the thickness of the coating being made. It is from 0.2 to 10 m per min. A large part of the equipment for thermodifusion zinc coating in powder media has been in operation in production conditions for over 5 years. Figure 6 shows Installation for zinc coating of couplings. The project for sites where thermodifusion zinc coating of long-size parts takes place were ecologically examined. Joint Bulgarian and Russian production for employing thermodifusion zinc coating in powder has been established in Bulgaria in the cities of Gabrovo -Gabene and Rousse.

1098

In the Firm Metalik BISIPI, Gabene, small-size precise castings manufactured by investment casting techniques are zinc coated. The prime manufacturing cost of solid-phase zinc coating is 0.25 EUR per kilogram of products.

REFERENCES
[1] [1]Proskurin E.V., N.S.Gorbunov. Diffusion Zinc Coatings. Moscow, Metallurgy, 1972, p.247 [2] [2] Proskurin E.V., .D.Zholudev. Problems of Liquid Zinc Coating, MiTOM, No 4, 1988, pp. 74-76. [3] [3] Voroshnin A.P., R.G.Galin. New Technology of Making Saturating Powdery Mixtures for Diffusion Zinc Coating. MiTOM, No 1, 1996, p.21. [4] [4] Galin R.G. Composition Powder Based on Zn ZnO System Effective Raw Material for Thermodiffusion Zinc Coating, Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, No 9, 2004, pp. 51-52.

1099

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MODELLING OF FOOD PRODUCT CUTTING

Viktor Guts1, Oleksiy Gubenia1, Stefan Stefanov2, Wilhelm Hadjiiski2
1

National university of food technologies, Kyiv, UKRAINE e-mail: gubena@meta.ua, e-mail: goots@ukr.net 2 University of food technologies, Plovdiv, BULGARIA, e-mail: stvstefanov@yahoo.com , e-mail: hawi@abv.bg

Summary: There are lead theoretical experimental researches on the basis of which is developed the simple in application technique for research of movement of an edge in a layer of a product. The mathematical model which adequately describes process is also developed. The technique is applied at research of bread cutting by results of which optimum cutting conditions are certain. Keywords: bread, bread cutting, optimum cutting.

1. INTRODUCTION
Cutting is a commonly used process for the preparation of raw materials for food production. Recently, many of the ready-to-use food products are subjected to cutting. This is related to their ease use and the willingness of the consumers. In some cases the quality of the finished food product depends from the quality of the cutting process. Cutting technology of the food products is complicated. This is due to the imperfection of the process cutting, the characteristics of physical and mechanical properties of raw materials and foodstuffs, the nature of the stresses and strains that occur during the cutting process in the product. An example is the bread. Before cutting it has to stand for 2 to 4 hours. In that time it lost some of its properties and especially the freshness. On standing it requires a lot of space, as well as additional equipment, which leads to additional energy losses. The fresh bread, in the process of cutting, deforms and frictions to the knife and sticks to the knife surface. The problems that arise in the process of cutting require the modern solutions, enabling to improve the quality of the finished product and reduce energy losses and will not need to wait. So far there are not enough theoretical developments and accumulated experimental data that adequately characterize the process of cutting. It is known that the process of cutting the elastic viscous products influences the speed of cutting. At high speeds of the blade is possible the reduction of the cutting forces. Moreover, reducing distortions of the product below the edge of the blade of the knife, it enhances the quality and productivity of the process. Surveys and studies done for the study of problems with the cutting of food products show that now doesnt exist the methodology for cutting force measurement. The purpose of this development is the creation of cutting process theory for elastic-viscous food products, methods for conducting experimental work to study the process and the development of specific experimental equipment for this purpose.

2. ANALYTICAL MODEL OF CUTTING PROCESS

We will discuss the mechanism of operation of the process of cutting. For this purpose it would be created a differential equation describing the movement of the knife blade in a layer of product. On the blade, which penetrates the product, acts the following resistance forces (Fig. 1): - inertia force, Fr cutting force, G - force of friction between the side of a knife and product Fad adhesion force (depending on

1100

structural and mechanical properties of the product). In a small adhesion strength of the product prevails friction force; and opposite in a sticky products predominant is adhesion force. Frictional force is determined by the formula [1]: dy G = C + k 1V = + k 1 , (1) dt

Figure 1: Scheme of the forces, which acts on the knife where coefficient which depends on the relative load on the product over side surface of the knife; V velocity slip between the product and the side surface of the knife; k1 - factor which takes into account the influence of sliding speed of the frictional force; displacement of the knife in the product; t time of the blade movement in the product. For the products that stick over the knife is necessary to take into account the power of the adhesion. It depends on the shape and surface condition of the blade, cutting speed, the area of the contact angle of cutting, structural and mechanical properties of the product and some other factors. The strength of adhesion is determined by a new methodology [2], or using literature data. We could write the adhesion power as a function of the adhesion strength Pad at normal separation mechanism of the blades from the surface of the product:
Fd = Pd S

(2)

where d adhesion strength, Pa; S contact surface, m2. Having in mind that separation is under an angle:
Fd = Pd S cos( + 0 )

(3)

where sharpening angle of the knife; 0 characteristic angle of separation could be both positive and negative. It shoud be noted that: 0<cos (+ 0) <1 => 0< (+ 0) <90 Value (+0) depends on the shape and direction of motion of the knife, angle of cutting. The inertia force: (4) where m mass of movable part from cutting mechanism brought to the knife; a knife acceleration when move in the product. Establishment of equilibrium equation:
m d 2 y(t) /dt 2 + Fr + Fad = 0 (5) Consider the most common cases and analyze the model (5) for various structural and mechanical properties of food. Recognising the strength of adhesion for linearly dependent on the quoted unit to cut surface of cut duration t [2]: Pad = b + at (6) where a and b experimentally defined coefficients receipt of equation (5). Having in mind the initial conditions t=0 => y=0, dy/dt = Voy :
t 2 ( 3 Fr + S cos( + 0 )( 3b + at )) . 6m Differentiating the equation 7, determine the speed of cutting: y( t ) = Voy t
2 dy 2Voy t 2 Fr t S cos( + 0 )( 2bt at ) . = dt 2m

= ma = m d 2 y(t) /dt 2 ,

(7)

(8)

1101

From the equation (8) define the cutting force:

m dy . 2t t dt The dependence of adhesion strength from reduced to unit area of the cut length of cut t can be nonlinear: Fr = m d 2 y( t ) dt
2

2Voy t S cos( + 0 )( 2bt at 2 )

(9)

+ Fr + Be bt S cos( + 0 ) = 0 .

(10)

Using a similar previous case activities, we find:

Fr = Voy m t BS cos( + 0 )( b bebt ) tb
2

dy m . dt t

(11)

During cutting of bread, when directly a model that describes the process is known:

Fr+G+ Fd+Pi=0
where Fr cutting force; G - friction force ; Pi inertia force; Fd - adhesion force , in the present case Fd= 0. Disclose the members of the equation and solve it:
Fr + ( C + k1 dy( t ) d 2 y( t ) )+ m =0, dt dt 2
k t 1

(12)

(13)

m e m ( Fr + C )t y( t ) = 1 + C2 , k1 k1 where 1 and 2 are constant. In the initial conditions t=0 => y=0 => dy / dt = Voy there is:
y( t ) = ( Fr + C + Voy K 1 ) m e
2 k1 k 1 t m

(14)

( Fr + C ) t k1

( Fr + C + Voy K 1 ) m
2 k1

(15)

Differentiating equation (15):

Fr + C dy( t ) ( Fr + C + Voy K 1 ) e . = 2 dt k1 k1 From the equation (16) the cutting force is defined: k1 dy( t ) m e ( C + Voy k1 ) + C dt ,

k 1 t m

(16)

k1 t

Fr =

e 1 where dy( t ) / dt - speed of the knife move. It is defined as the average speed between the beginning of the entry of the knife in the product and its outcome.

k1 t m

(17)

3. EXPERIMENTAL SYSTEM
Developed experimental set having a simple structure and reliable in operation, which allows to developed mathematical model to determine the cutting resistance. This is a pendulum, the face of the lever which is attached a knife (Fig. 2). The design allows widely vary the speed of the blade and to determine its value. The knife speed on the entrance or outcome of product is determined by the equation:

1102

(18) J where Qi the weight of different details from the leverage mechanism, r - distance from the center of gravity of this detail to the axis of pendulum; - angle from which place or which raises the pendulum (hammer); R length of the lever; J moment of inertia of the pendulum for all details. The obtained equations and developed methodology for analyze enable determining the power of cutting, depending on the speed of the moving blade in the material and other characteristics of the cutting process, to compare the properties of food products to make evaluations of their performance in cutting forces [1]. The results of mathematical and physical modeling are applied to determine rational regimes for food products cutting. For example, we will adduce the results of bread cutting (wheat, 0.5 kg).

V =R 2

Qi ri (1 cos ) ,

1 - lever; 2 - load; 3 knife holder; 4 -knife; 5 - scale; 6 - indicative arrow; 7 - ax; 8 - column; 9 - base; 10 working plot; 11 drive screw; 12 - fixative; 13 - product.

Figure 2: Scheme of the stand for studying of cutting process:

4. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Using formula (17) is determined the relative force of cutting (per unit length of the knife) for middle and cortex (Fig. 3 and 4).

Fr rel kN/m 1,7

Frrel kN/m 25
1 2

20 15 10 5 0 6 V, m/s
2

1,3 0,9 0,5 0,1 0 2 4

6 V, m/s

Figure 3: Influence of the knife speed over the relative cutting effort of the bread core when time for stay of bread, h: 1- 0; 2-6.

Figure 4: Influence of the knife speed over the relative cutting effort of the bread cortex when time for preliminary stay of the bread, h: 1-0; 3 from 6 to 48.

1103

The results are set out in range of knife speeds 1-8 m/s. By increasing the knife speed in the product the cutting force in soft part of the bread rises. At speeds around 5 m/s cutting force is maximum (extreme value for cutting force on the graph), with further increase in speed decreases. The biggest cutting force in the soft part of the bread - the bread cutting immediately after baking. Similar correlations were obtained for many food products (cheeses, meats, etc). This is explained as follows: cutting force consists of forces of destruction structural links in the product, forces of the deformation of the product, the force from friction of the knife surfaces. During the cutting process under the edge of the knife arise elastic and then plastic deformation. Plastic deformations, unlike elastic, are developed with a lower speed. At high speeds of deformations the limit stresses and destruction of the product are achieved without significant plastic deformation. However, part of deformation forces are reduced when cutting the product and the total cutting force is reduced. The cutting force of the bread crust is constantly growing with increasing of speed (Fig. 4). Destruction without plastic deformation in the cutting process is typical for the most of fragile products.

3. CONCLUSION
It was developed a theory on which base could be modeled a cutting process of food products with different mechanical properties. It was developed a methodology for experimental studies also, which verify developed theory for cutting of food products. For the purposes of experimental work was developed a specific experimental apparatus. It allows determining the cutting force, depending on the speed of cutting. Based on conducted experiments with various food products is defined an optimal construction of the knifes. The optimal structure and mechanical properties of food products, enabling a high quality cuts were defined. Based on achieved results is recommended bread cutting to be with speed of the knife higher 5 m/s. At the same time cutting force is reduced and plastic deformation in soft core part of the bread under cutting edge of blade, and the product is not deformed when cut. Feature of development and innovation are made analytical studies and mathematical models development. They make it possible to determine directly the cutting forces for food with different structural and mechanical properties. Application of the modeling results of the cutting process allows optimizing processes for many food products. In addition to defining rational modes of cutting through the developed methodology can be identified such indicators as the texture of the products where in combination with other indicators makes it possible to assess the quality of the product. This makes it possible to conduct analytical studies in the future and the accumulation of experimental data on the subject

REFERENCES
[1] Gubenia O. O. Usovershenstvovanie processa rezaniia hleba s uchetom vliianiia ego strukturnomehanicheskih svojstv. Dissertation. (2008), 21 s. [2] Guc V. S. Adgeziia pishtevh produktov v processah pakovki. Upakovka. 2 (2006), S. 39-41.ISSN [3] Zimon A. D. Adgeziia pishtevh mass. Agropromizdat, 1985, p. 272. ISBN

1104

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MORPHOLOGY OF WIDMANSTTTEN STRUCTURES OBTAINED IN HYPO-EUTECTOID STEELS

H.G. Hristov
Technical University of Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: hghristov5@gmail.com

Summary: Widmansttten structures in steels are obtained due to fast cooling, such as during casting or in the heated zones during welding. Hypo-eutectoid steels, which contain ferrite and pearlite equilibrium phases, are particularly sensitive to temperature gradients and austenite grain growth during heat treatment. Thus, a range of Widmansttten structures of various dispersion and morphology could be obtained by overcooling of steels from very high temperatures. The microstructural characteristic of Widmansttten ferrite is of critical importance for understanding of its morphological classification and grain growth patterns in hypo-eutectoid steels. Keywords: Widmansttten ferrite; metallography; transmission electron microscopy.

1. METHODS OF INVESTIGATION
Investigated steels and the relevant heat treatment involved: Steel 20 normalized at 1050C for 4 hrs and air cooled, Steel 10 automatically arc welded under a layer of flux and Steel 30L, delivered from Dinamo Ltd. Sevlievo (Bulgaria), obtained by precision casting. The microstructure of all steel variants has been examined by means of an optical microscope, Neophot 21. Specimens for matallographic analysis have been prepared by etching in 5% solution of nitric acid in ethanol. The crystallography and structural features of Widmansttten ferrite were investigated by means of transmission electron microscopy (TEM), using CM20 Philips microscope operated at 200kV. Thin foils were prepared by mechanical grinding to thickness of about 0.1 mm, than samples of 3 mm in diameter were punched out. Each sample was double-jet polished in Tenupol-5 equipment of Struers. The polishing conditions were as follows: 10% perchloric acid in ethanol, at 13C and 60V.

E C B

F D

A
a)

250 m
b)
a) Light microscopy, b) TEM micrograph

0,5 m

Figure 1: Microstructure of 30L steel

1105

2. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Steel 30L exhibited various structural features in the specimen cross-section (Fig. 1a). Close to the specimen surface, where the cooling rate were faster, dominated high dispersion of Widmansttten ferrite (arrow A). The central areas of sample contained pearlite, whereas former austenite grain boundaries appeared serrated and decorated with allotriomorphs of ferrite (arrow B). That kind of boundaries act as privileged places for the growth of secondary ferrite of Widmansttten type. The morphology of Widmansttten ferrite could not be classified unambiguously. Observations at higher magnification showed, that ferrite plates grew deeply into the grains along preferred crystallographic planes. On the one hand, they resemble thin ferrite allotriomorphs, as observed in the overcooled zones close to the specimen surface (Fig.1a, arrow C). On the other hand, in the middle cross-section zones, the Widmansttten plates exhibited triangular shape and sawteeth morfollogy, pointing to a slower cooling rate (arrow D). Metallographic observations confirmed, that secondary ferrite plates formed by the ferrite allotriomorphs had limited inward dissipation inside the grains. By large grain size of former austenite (e.g. above 100 m), much favorable conditions for the dispersion of intragranular Widmansttten ferrite plates inside the grains were identified (arrow E). Idiomorphs of ferrite were detected as well, as shown in Fig. 1a (arrow F). Fig. 1b shows electron micrograph of Steel 30L. Ferrite plates contained dislocation substructures characteristic for a deformed structure (see arrows), which is an indication of high residual internal stresses from a casting process. Steel 20 had a typical Widmansttten structure after normalization (Fig. 2a). The ferrite microstructure consisted of (A) allotriomorphs growing along the former austenite grain boundaries, (B) secondary plates obtained from the allotriomorphs and (C), a dense plates arrangement inside the grains. TEM results, e.g. Figs. 2b and 2c, revealed high dispersion of pearlite. It seems that the secondary ferrite grows in packages of parallel plates until the whole volume of former austenite grains is used for the process. Ferrite plates contain high dislocations density and are often separated by low-angle boundaries. Microstructure of Steel 10 was investigated after arc welding. The inhomogeneous distribution of Widmansttten ferrite and its rich morphology variations through the weld made it extremely difficult to separate definitely all structure ingredients (Fig. 3). However, we detected single allotriomorphs of ferrite (arrow A) and secondary ferrite plates (arrow B), whereas far from the melting spot, idiomorphic ferrite was present. TEM image in Fig. 3b shows elongated ferrite subgrains with high dislocation density. At high cooling rates, one could fine thin needle-like cementite plates, growing at ferrite grain boundaries.

B A

100 m

1 m

a)

b)

1106

0,5 m
c)
a) light microscopy, b) and, c) TEM micrographs.

Figure 2: Microstructure of Steel 20

3. CONCLUSIONS
Microstructure analysis of three hypo-eutectic steels allowed to following classification of the Widmansttten ferrite morphology into five variants: - allotriomorphs - plates - sawteeth-like - intragranular - idiomophic. Transmission electron microscopy delivered valuable information on the dislocation substructure and local phase boundaries in the specimens investigated. Further investigations would be performed to understand better the crystallographic relationships between the phases and especially, the orientation distributions in Widmansttten ferrite.

C B A

B
a)

100 m
b)

1m

a) light microscopy of a weld, b) TEM micrograph

Figure 3: Microstructure of Steel 10.

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The author thanks Dr Eng. A. Wasilkowska (University of Science and Technology, Krakow, Poland) for TEM analyses, as well as Prof. Dr J. Atanasova (Technical University of Gabrovo, Bulgaria) for the helpful discussions.

1107

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

STRAINS AND DISPLACEMENTS FROM THE STRUCTURE OF THE TOWER OF THE HOISTING INSTALLATION NEW SKIP OF PETRILA MINING PLANT
2

University of Petroani, Petroani, ROMANIA, e-mail: drituv@yahoo.com e-mail: iosif_dumi@yahoo.com, 3 e-mail: ridzim@yahoo.com, 4 e-mail: cbogdy@netlog.ro

V. Itu1, I. Dumitrescu2, M. C. Ridzi3, B. Z. Cozma4

Summary: The development in safe conditions of the extracting process continuously imposes the need of optimal functioning of the extracting installations as important links in the transport flow of the mineral substance and of the sterile for the transportation between the underground and the surface of personal, machines and different mining tools. In the paper there is presented an analysis of the behavior of the towers of the extracting installation with regards to strains and displacements of the resistance structure during the functioning of the extracting installations with pulleys as a wrapping organ for the cables. Keywords: strains, displacements, tower, installation, mine.

1. INTRODUCTION
The calculation the structure of the mining extracting towers is done taking into consideration all the unfavorable combinations practically possible of the different loads called groups of loads and are established taking into account in their form the compatibility of their acting simultaneously. The loads are classified into: permanent, short term - temporary, long term - temporary, and exceptional. The groups of loads with loads that can be introduced into groups of loads are the fundamental group of loads which contains permanent loads, long term loads, one or more short term loads and the special loads grouped from the fundamental group and one of the exceptional loads. In order to establish the state of strain and displacements from the structure of the tower due to the short term functioning loads transmitted through the extracting cables during an extracting cycle, it has been taken into study the tower of the extracting installation ,, New Skip Shaft from Petrila Mining Plant, which has the general and working data presented as follows.

2. THE INSTALLATION TAKEN INTO STUDY

The extracting installation that operates on the new skip well from Petrila Mining Plant, is destined [3] for the extraction from the underground of minerals. The extraction is done from the horizon -247,35 to the surface (the surface level is +638,5m; and the skip unloading level is +649,5m). The installation is (Figure 1) ballanced and has an extracting machine type MK 5x2 (Figure 2) equipped with two motors type P2S-1000-213-HUHLH/1998, of 1200 kW power and a nominal rpm of 54 rot/min (Figure 3). The cables are wrapped around a moving wheel of 5000 mm (Figure 4). The extracting cables with diameters of 46,5 mm and a mass (on a linear meter) of 8,049 kg/m are wrapped around the two extracting pulleys of 5000 mm with a mass (the pulley, the axel of the pulley and the bearing of the axel) of 5430 kg (Figure 5), laying on the tower at a height of 51 m (pulley axel The ballanced cables have a section of 135 20 mm and a mass (on a linear meter) of 9,062 kg. The extracting vessels are skips having a mass (own mass, plus D.L.C., plus D.E.C.

1108

Figure 1: Hoisting installation

Figure 2: Hoisting machine

Figure 3: The motor

Figure 4:. Wrapping organ

and suplimentary mass) of 21600 kg and the effective load is 7000-8000 kg/skip. Another main component of the extracting installation is the metallic tower (Figure 6) with a height until the pulley axel of 51 m. The structure of the tower is composed of the extracting pulley platform sustained by the leading component and the one abutment set up as a frustum pyramid The extracting machine lies on the ground (at a height of 7,5m to the 0 level of the well (well collar), sideways from the tower (well tower), at a distance (of the wheel axel), towards the vertical portion of the extracting cables which enter the well of 44m. The length of the cable chord (the distance between the tangent points of the cable to the deviating pulley from the tower and the wheel of the extracting machine, in the central position of the chord (perpendicular on the wheel axel)), is for the bottom

Figure 5: Extracting pulleys

Figure 6: Metallic tower

1109

branch Lci=58,55m, and Lcs=59,98m for the top branch. The incline angles of the cables chords are i = 480 43 37 for the bottom branch and s = 440 37 07, for the top branch [7].

3. DETERMINATION OF LOADS
For the determination of the loads (efforts) which act upon the installation taken into consideration it has been taken into study the case when one of the skips is descending (ascending) on one of the branches. On the calculation of loads it has been considered the fact that their variation is determined not only by the kinematics of the installation (kinematical parameters) but also by certain geometrical elements which define the position of the extracting machine towards the well geometrical elements regarding only the installations where the extracting machine lies on the ground.([1]). For this purpose it has been taken into analysis the case when the skip is descending on the top branch (case 1, the skip of the bottom branch is climbing and the top one is descending) and the case when the skip is descending on the bottom branch (case 2, the skip of the bottom branch is descending and the top one is climbing). The diagrams for the space, speed, and acceleration for the two cases taken into analysis are presented into Figure 7 case 1 and in Figure 8 case 2. The variations of acceleration and space have been used for the calculation of the loads applied to the tower. The determination of the loads acting upon the tower through the deviating pulleys has been done using the dAlembert principle (the kinetics-static method [1]) taking into consideration the static forces (the weight of the extracting cable, the cage the trolley the pulley and the load), the friction forces (multiple friction and aero-dynamic resistances which for installations with cages is approximated with a coefficient of k=0,2 from the useful load [2]) and the dynamic forces (which intervene only in the acceleration and deceleration periods, Figure 7 and Figure 8)).
950 855 760 Space [mm] 665 570 475 380 285 190 95 0 1 309 617 925 1233 1541 1849 2157 2465 2773 3081 3389 3697 4005 4313 4621 4929 5237 5545 5853 Time *1/16 [s] Space Speed Acceleration 9 7,5 6 4,5 3 1,5 0 -1,5 -3 -4,5 -6 Speed [m/s, Acceleration [m/s^2]
Speed [m/s, Acceleration [m/s^2]

Figure 7: Speed acceleration and space for case 1

950 855 760 Space [mm] 665 570 475 380 285 190 95 0 1 309 617 925 1233 1541 1849 2157 2465 2773 3081 3389 3697 4005 4313 4621 4929 5237 5545 5853 Time *1/16 [s] Space Speed Acceleration 9 7,5 6 4,5 3 1,5 0 -1,5 -3 -4,5 -6

Figure 8: Speed acceleration and space for case 2 The variation of the resultant forces from the bearings of the extracting pulleys for the two considered cases in the case of the application of the safety brake on the surpassing the max admitted speed is presented in Figure 9, for case 1, for the top and bottom pulley and Figure 10, for case 2, also for the top and bottom pulley.

1110

1150000 1050000 950000 Force [N] 850000 750000 650000 550000 450000 350000 1 313 625 937 1249 1561 1873 2185 2497 2809 3121 3433 3745 4057 4369 4681 4993 5305 5617 5929 Time *1/16 [s] R bottom R top

Figure 9: Reactions from the bearing of the top and bottom pulley when the top cage descends and the bottom one climbs, case 1
1100000 1000000 900000 Force [N] 800000 700000 600000 500000 400000 1 289 577 865 1153 1441 1729 2017 2305 2593 2881 3169 3457 3745 4033 4321 4609 4897 5185 5473 Time *1/16 [s] R bottom R top

Figure 10: Reactions from the bearing of the top and bottom pulley when the top cage climbs and the bottom one descends, case 2 The variation of the total resultants (reactions) the forces from the extracting pulleys for the two cases taken into consideration in the case of the appliance of the safety brake on the surpassing of the max speed is presented in Figure 11 case 1, loads when the top cage descends and the bottom one climbs and Figure 12, loads when the top cage climbs and the bottom one descends case 2, for both pulleys.
1492500 1487500 Force [N] 1482500 1477500 1472500 1467500 1462500 1 304 607 910 1213 1516 1819 2122 2425 2728 3031 3334 3637 3940 4243 4546 4849 5152 5455 5758 Time *1/16 [s] R=R bottom+R top, case 1

Figure 11: Total loads when the top cage descends and the bottom one climbs case 1
1492500 1487500 Force [N] 1482500 1477500 1472500 1467500 1462500 1 280 559 838 1117 1396 1675 1954 2233 2512 2791 3070 3349 3628 3907 4186 4465 4744 5023 5302 Time *1/16 [s] R=R bottom+R top, case 2

Figure 12: Total loads when the top cage climbs and the bottom one descends case 2

1111

4. STRAIN AND DISPLACEMENTS

Due to the complexity of the tower the most appropriate method of study is [1] that of the finite element. In order to annalyse the state of strain and displacements with the method of the finite element and the tower structure has been modulated the geometrical and mechanical characteristics have been established and introduced into the calculation software. In the cases taken into study the mass of the tower has been calculated with the help of the software. In Figures 11 and 12 there are presented the strains and displacements for case 1, and in Figures 13 and 14 for case 2.

Figure 13: Strain, case 1

Figure 14: Displacements, case 1

3. CONCLUSION
The calculation the structure of the mining extracting towers is done taking into consideration all the unfavorable combinations practically possible of the different loads called groups of loads. Following the classification and grouping of the loads transmitted to the extracting mining towers in the paper there are presented certain aspects concerning the establishing of the exceptional short term loads due to the extracting cycle in the case of the appliance of the safety brake which are transmitted to the structure skip and the wrapping organ of the extracting machine is moving wheel. The loads transmitted to the tower through the bearings of the extracting pulleys from the tower due to the efforts from the extracting cables have been considered in the case when the emergency brake is applied due to an overcome of the max speed allowed when the skip are climbing and descending on one of the two extracting branches. The variation of loads is due both for the cinematic parameters as well as for the geometric parameters of the extracting installation. As noticed from the variation of the total loads which act upon the tower during an extracting cycle in the case of

1112

Figure 15: Strain, case 2

Figure 16: Displacements, case 2

the appliance of the safety brake the maximum values are in case 1 of the cycle and in case 2 at the beginning of the cycle (Figure 11 and Figure 12). The maximum values of the loads determined are further used to determine the values of mechanical stress and strain from the elements of the structure of the metallic tower of the installation in order to verify its resistance. There have been determined and localized the max values of strain and displacements from the tower structure, in order to establish the measuring points, in order to verify through experimental measurements the values obtained through numerical calculation. Following these results there have been obtained information necessary in order to improve the maintenance of the extracting installations and to improve the existing system of repair and supply for this type of installations.

REFERENCES
[1] Itu, V., Ridzi, M.C., Strains and displacements in the elements of the metallic towers of the extracting installations due to the towers own weight, Mines Magasine , vol 170, nr. 8/2005, pag.25-31; [2] Magyari, A. Mining mechanical installations, Editura tehnic, Bucharest, 1990; [3] * * * Technical documentation, E. M. Petrila, 2009.

1113

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

AN ALTERNAIVE APPROACH OF BRUSHLESS MOTORS DESIGN

1

Dimitrina Koeva1, Svilen Rachev2

Technical University of Sofia, Faculty of Engineering&Pedagogy of Sliven, Sliven, BULGARIA, e-mail: dkoeva@abv.bg 2 Technical University of Gabrovo, Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: sratchev@scientist.com

Summary: Nowadays very often brushless DC Motors (BLDC) enter the composition of electric drive mechanisms and modules for fast-moving programmable and tracking systems, systems with angular stabilization, robots and manipulators actuating control systems are used. The main feature of BLDC is low and medium rated power and thus a matter of importance is compactness. The optimal selection of driving motor guarantees the correct, precise and high-productive operation of the separate manipulators and industrial robots as a whole. Keywords: BLDC, electric drive, robot, manipulator.

1. INTRODUCTION
Very often this kind of motors besides keeping of important quantities for manipulators operation mode (driving moment, displacement, rotational frequency control range, etc.) have to fit into definite space, i.e. to be with minimal weight and size. The usage of a new state-of-the-art materials (new types of electro-technical steel, rareearth permanent magnets) in production of these types of motors and optimal design are two main factors which cover the requirements for compactness and high energy indices at the same time. From the other hand a large number of the technical characteristics of motors used operating capacities, efficiency, mechanical behavior, dependence between current flowing and rotational moment have to be traced out in progress of design process with the purpose of optimal approach to every specific application requirements. This method of approach is relevant to preliminarily sizing of BLDC in accordance with so called base constructions with advisable sizing ratio. Among frequently occurred reasons for design of a new BLDC are specific requirements of the operation mode intended and limited space where it has to fit into. In cases of new motor design on the basis of the old one, the computer modeling and computer simulations are very useful because of the following reasons mainly: 1. Calculation and evaluation of several parameters and/or quantities alteration; 2. There is a possibility given for detailed electro-magnetic and mechanical analysis in order to optimize the motor construction without necessity of large number prototypes production and usage of test programs which are expensive and take a lot of time in most cases.

2. STATEMENT
The state-of-the-art computer methods are defined as fast-attained to the most appropriate prototype (model) without a necessity of multitude of iterations and subsequent test. Moreover the users of this type of motors becoming more precise according to their requirements they asking for tracing out of given parameter alteration during the simulation process even before production of the motor. At first sight mutually excluding requirements regarding energy efficiency, low noise and vibrations during operation, electro-magnetic compatibility and low price are supplemented to the rest ones concomitant design work and this fact makes it more complicated and important task.

1114

When implement these requirements designers of today oftentimes count on two compatible CAD software packages [4, 5]. One of them makes a selection of specific model topography and precise electro-magnetic calculations, another one determines mechanical loads and strains and thermal profile during operational process for preliminary specified critical points of construction. There is a possibility for data transfer between two software packages parameters, quantities, sizes. Specific example for jointly action of two popular software packages is given in [4]. SPEED makes the electromagnetic calculations while Motor-CAD - mechanical and thermal analysis. The approach in case of optimization of specific motor by mass, response time and low pulsations of the moment consists of the following steps: - Determination of specific motor configuration (topography) appropriate to particular application; - Using of standing methodology for calculation of the main geometric dimensions and electro-magnetic loads; - Creation of electro-magnetic model in SPEED medium with parameters determinate at surroundings temperature of 20; - Data transfer regarding stator geometry, stator winding configuration, losses, etc. from SPEED to Motor-CAD; - Determination of the temperature in so called critical points: winding, magnets, air gap and bearings; - Repetition of steps 35 until estimation of values needed (normally 3-4 steps); - If it is necessary optimize diameter and active length until achievement of preliminary value of admissible temperature assigned by the Motor-CAD thermal model. Figure 1 presents topography chosen while Figure 2 cross-section of the motor.

Figure 1: Topography chosen

Figure 2: Cross-section of the motor The main geometrical dimensions, groove dimensions, tooth zone dimensions, as well as magnetic field allocation are given by SPEED. Next step is introducing into Motor-CAD medium the curve M=f(t) gigving rotational moment alteration for operational cycle fixed. For five critical points: winding, magnets, rotor surface, stator surface and casing, the alteration of temperature is determining in case of load change and depending on surroundings temperature. Figure 3 and Figure 4 present temperature alteration during operational cycle respectively at initial value of the temperature 20 and 70.

1115

Figure 3: Temperature alteration during operational cycle at initial temperature value of 20.

Figure 4: Temperature alteration during operational cycle at initial temperature value of 70. By means of repeatedly repetition of steps 17 so called proved optimization of specific motor is achieved. The results from optimization obtained for this case are given in Table 1. Table 1: Results obtained Dimension Before optimization mm 110 mm cm3 kg 100 950 5,45

Parameters Diameter of the stator Active length of the stator Volume of the active parts Weight of the active parts

After optimization 105 67 580 3,75

Commonly the reduction of dimensions of BLDC is 39% while motor mass 31%. The specific power toward per unit of weight of active materials is 3,7 kW/kg. The above mentioned approach used for design of a new type of motor leads to precise results, possibility for graphical visualization of great number of quantities alteration, parameters and characteristics, but software packages needed are expensive and suppose a presence of specialists in the field of design. Of course, there is a wide variety when solve such problems. Oftentimes a cases occur when it is necessary to suggest variants for motor without using of expensive software. In that case with a purpose to preliminarily evaluation of motor behavior for specific application and limitation of expenses for prototype production and additional tests there is a need for development of sufficiently reliable simulation model. Then MATLAB with a graphical platform SIMULINK appears sufficiently adaptable and efficient while not so expensive simulation medium. Further down an example is proposed for combined investigation of motor. With a purpose of optimization the geometrical dimensions of its every construction detail the mechanical load of the separate assemblies and thermal condition are given by specialized engineering software SOLID WORKS while alteration of electrical quantities characterized motor operation by MATLAB/ SIMULINK. Figure 5 presents cross-section of the motor designed.

1116

Figure 5: Cross-section of the motor designed It has been established that BLDC should be investigated by means of two ways as synchronous motors or else as DC motors. The second way is preferred. The operation of BLDC considers as a operation of DC commutator motor, but equations are worked out by means of instantaneous values of quantities. There are some special features characterizing the operation of BLDC which have to take into consideration. Because of a small number of stator winding sections magneto-motive force changes at a leap. The inductivities of these sections are changeable they depend on the rotor angle of rotation, i.e. on its position. The magnetic flux changes under influence or armature reaction and variable magnetic conductivity. In addition the moment of rotation is pulsed as a result the rotational frequency is not a constant also, thus the induced electro-motive force is a complicated function. The present-day BLDC rotors are made from high coercive magnets (NeFeB, R-Co) which magnetic conductivities along longitudinal and transverse axes are not so different. This fact allows to assume that section inductivity is a constant during one commutation interval. With a purpose of equation simplification an assumption is made that electro-magnetic energy reserved in the separate sections becomes a naught when switch-off the relevant section. In fact, at real motor the magnetic energy concentrated in the sections could be influence vastly over the operation of electronic switchboard and this could be additionally investigated. On the basis of assumptions made the equations (1) could be worked out which describe the operation of BLDC in dependence of rotor angle or rotation f ():
d . f ( ) dt M = c M .I . f ( ) E = cE .

(1)

where:

E - induced electro-motive force into stator winding (.M.F.);

cE , cM - electrical and mechanical constant depending on motor data;

f ( ) - function for alteration law of E.M.F. depend on rotor angle of rotation;
d dt

- angular frequency of the rotor;

I - motor current. In accordance with [2] the system (1) could be presented as follows:
U = I .R + L. dI d + c E . f ( ). dt dt J d 2 c M .I . f ( ) M C + . 2 p dt
U - supply voltage, V; R - ohmic resistance of the

(2)

where:

armature winding, ; L - inductivity of the armature winding, H; J - moment of inertia, adjusted to the motor shaft, kg.m 2 ; M C - resisting moment, Nm ;

p - number of pole pairs of the motor.

1117

The system is workable for every particular motor for one commutating cycle of the electronic switchboard operation. By reason of this the system appears universal to a certain extent. It is necessary to take an expression about function f(). The possibilities are two E.M.F. with a cosine law of alteration depending on rotor position or search for such function f() which ensure optimal indices of BLDC as it is a task of optimal design next step and it is solving by means of numerical analysis. The system of equations (2) structural diagram represents in graphical medium SIMULINK is given on Figure 6.

60 u /L Ua Sum Fcn Fcn 2 u *R

1 s In te g ra to r

Cm *u M ux Fcn 3 M ux Fcn 4 Fcn 5 Fcn 6 u (1 )*u (2 ) u -M c u *p /J

1 s In te g ra to r1

Md i

1 s In te g ra to r2

f(u ) Fcn 1

|u | Abs

u + 0 .8 Fcn 7

u *Ce Fcn 8

M ux M u x2

u (1 )*u (2 ) Fcn 9

Figure 6: Structural diagram based on system of equations (2) The results obtained are given on Figure 7, Figure 8 and Figure 9 and they present the driving moment M alteration, stator winding current I, and motor angular speed in dependence of time t.
20

15

10 [Nm ] 5

Md

-5 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 tim e, [s ] 0.25 0.3 0.35

Figure 7: Driving moment M alteration in dependence of time t

1118

450 400 350 300 250 [rad/s ] 200 150 100 50 0 -50 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 tim e, [s ] 0.25 0.3 0.35

Figure 8: Stator winding current I in dependence of time t

140

120

100

80

[A ]

60

40 Ia 20

-2 0 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 t im e , [ s ] 0.25 0.3 0.35

Figure 9: Motor angular speed in dependence of time t

3. CONCLUSION
The variants treat are part of possible approaches in engineering practice for design of new motor. On the whole two variants arrive at a motor selection without producing of prototype and it feature indicates about cheapness. In addition software packages allow multi-variant constructions which lead to flexibility in case of motor selection for specific application. The difference between two approaches lies in price and accessibility of software packages used. Under second approach numerical investigations done by means of suggested simulation model are confirmed by data of motor designed with similar rated power. In addition SOLID WORKS and MATLAB/ SIMULINK are very well compatible with Windows OS and its applications.

REFERENCES
[1] Angelov, A. M.; Dimitrov, D. A.: Electrical Machines, Part 1, Tehnika, Sofia, 1976. (in Bulgarian). [2] Hendershot, J.R.; Miller, T.J.: Design of Brushless Permanent Magnet Motors, Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1994, pp 3-1/3-69, 12-1/12-19. [3] Chapman, S. J.: Electric Machinery Fundamentals, McGraw-Hill, N. Y., 1985. [4] Flew, A.: Practical Application of CAD in High Power Density Motor, UK Magnetic Society, CAD for Electromagnetic Devices, 2008. [5] Dorrel, D.G.; Station, D.A.; Hahout, J.; Hawkins, D.; McGilp, M.I.: Linked Electromagnetic and Thermal Modeling of a Permanent Magnet Motor, University of Glasgow, 2008.

1119

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

OSCILLATING SOLUTIONS OF LEGENDRES EQUATION AND LOCATION OF ZERO OSCILLATIONS

Milena Lekic, Stana Cvejic
Faculty of Natural Sciences and Mathematics, University in Kosovska Mitrovica, SERBIA,
Summary: We have not treated differential equations of special functions such as Legendres equation by method of iteration sequences, because their normal forms have singularities where iterations cannot be applied. Literature contains no special theorems on oscillating solutions in canonic interval between singular points applicable for equations with singularities. There are no theorems of the Sturms type, either. Whether such equation will have oscillating solutions depends on the sign of the coefficient, increasing range of the coefficient, mutual relation between the coefficients, intervals width, monotony or non-monotony of the coefficients, etc. This issue is quite complicated, because it is connected with all important questions of differential equations, such as: existence and uniqueness of solutions, analytic nature, existence of uncharacteristic interval and main value, oscillating theorems and approximate solving of the equations. In this work, the function ( x ) has been determined for Legendres equation pole of the first order in the point

(1,+ ) .

( x 2 1) y + x y + ( x) y = 0 , which on the semi-axis [0,+ ) has the x = 1 . For this function, the equation has oscillating solutions in sub-intervals [0,1) and

We have also located zero oscillations and tested what happens with zeros (fixed points of waves) when

x + .

Key words: Differential equations, special functions, singularities, poles, oscillating solutions, zeros of oscillations.

Let us have Legendres differential equation

( x 2 1) y + x y + ( x) y = 0

(1)

which has the pole of the first order in the point x = 1 . The point x = 1 is isolated by observing the equation separately in the sub-intervals 0,1) and (1,+ ) . In order to determine function ( x) , for which the equation (1) has oscillating solutions, we reduce the equation to canonic form by making substitution:

y=e

1 xdx 2 x 2 1

Z , Z = Z ( x)

(2)

Therefore, we obtain:
y = ( x 2 1)
1 4

(3)

If we substitute derivatives in the equation (1)

1 y = ( x 2 1) 4 2 xZ + ( x 2 1) 4 Z 4 5 1

1120

y =

1 1 1 5 2 ( x 1) 4 4 x 2 Z ( x 2 1) 4 Z ( x 2 1) 4 xZ ( x 2 1) 4 2 xZ + ( x 2 1) 4 Z 4 2 2 16

we obtain the equation:

(x

9 5 5 1 5 1 1 x 2 Z ( x 2 1) 4 Z ( x 2 1) 4 ( x 2 1) 4 xZ + ( x 2 1) 4 Z 4 2

1 2 x Z ( x 2 1) 4 + xZ ( x 2 1) 4 + ( x) ( x 2 1) 4 Z = 0, 2

i.e. the following equation:

5 2 1 1 x Z ( x 2 1) 4 Z ( x 2 1) 4 ( x 2 1) 4 xZ + ( x 2 1) 4 Z Zx 2 ( x 2 1) 4 + xZ ( x 2 1) 4 + 4 2 2 5 1 1 3 5 1

+ ( x) ( x 2 1)

1 4

Z = 0

By grouping members with

Z and Z , we obtain

1 5 1 5 3 5 1 1 ( x 2 1) 4 Z + x 2 ( x 2 1) 4 ( x 2 1) 4 x 2 ( x 2 1) 4 + ( x)( x 2 1) 4 Z = 0 2 2 4

If we multiply the last equation with ( x 1)

2

3 4

, we obtain the normal form of the equation:

1 1 5 Z + x 2 ( x 2 1) 2 ( x 2 1) 1 x 2 ( x 2 1) 2 + ( x)( x 2 1) 1 Z = 0 4 2 2
or
1 3 2 x ( x) 2 Z + 2 + 4 Z = 0 2 ( x 1) 2 x 1

(4)

Based on relation (4), it follows that the canonic form of the equation (1) keeps the singular point x = 1 , but now it is the pole of the second order. If we settle the coefficient of the equation (4), we obtain:
1 2 3 2 ( x) x 1 + x 2 4 Z + Z = 0 2 2 x 1

Let us now separate the intervals 0,1) and (1,+ ) . The equation (4) has oscillating solutions if: (1) (2)

1 2 3 2 ( x) x 1 + x 2 4 coefficient B ( x) = is positive, 2 2 x 1 B( x) is not too small, because in opposite case it cannot cause oscillations. For a definite interval,

it means that the function F ( x) = x

+

B ( x) has crossing points with the horizontals y = n ,

n = 0,1,2... However, for a infinite interval, it means that some condition of rising has been
fulfilled, i.e. either the integral

In the interval 0,1) , the coefficient B ( x ) is positive, i.e.

B( x)dx diverges or B( x) x , 0 < < 2.

0

1121

1 2 3 2 ( x) x 1 + x 2 4 >0 B ( x) = 2 2 x 1

if

1 2 3 2 ( x) x 1 + x > 0 2 4
From this, it follows that:

3 2 x > 1 x2 4

1 ) ( x) 2

Since the left side of the last non-equation is positive for every real x and the interval 0,1) , it follows that

1 x 2 > 0 , and because we observe

3 2 x 1 ( x) < 4 2 2 1 x

Since the right side is infinitely big when x 1 from the left, then the obtained non-equation is valid for every continuous and monotonous For such

( x) . Let function ( x)

monotonously and continuously rise and let

(0) >

( x) , the coefficient B( x)

1 . 2

is positive. The equation has oscillating solutions if the back-up function

( x) = x B ( x)
x2

has crossing points with horizontals y

= n , n = 0,1,2... This means that the equation:

1 3 ( x ) x 2 1 + x 2 = n 2 4 x 1
2

must have solutions. Since the function ( x) , as a rule, has zero in the point x=0 and sub-root value is positive and limited, while F(x) monotonously tends to infiniteness when x 1 0 , it follows that monotonous curve F(x) has infinite number of crossing points with horizontals y = n on interval 0,1) . Therefore, Legendress equation (1) has

oscillating solutions in the interval 0,1) , while zeros of oscillations are presented on the graph 1. and form monotonously rising sequence which tends toward one

Figure 1

1122

In the interval (1,+ ) , the coefficient B ( x) is also positive if:

1 2 3 2 ( x) x 1 + x > 0 2 4
So we obtain:

3 2 x 1 ( x) < 4 2 2 1 x
i.e.
3 2 x 1 4 x2 + 2 ( x) < + = 2 2 1 x 4 1 x2

)
( x) , i.e. the one which tends toward
1 when 4

Let us now observe the function F ( x ) for the least possible

x + . In this case, F ( x)

x x 1
2

3 , obviously owing to the break in the point x=1, has many 2

crossings of the function F(x) and parallels Since the function

( x) is continuously and monotonously rising in the interval [0,1) , let it monotonously rise
1 y = . Then the function ( x) can 4

y = n in the interval (1,1 + ) .

also for x > 1 , but in such a way that it always remains above the line

monotonously rise and tend towards some constant M, so for the back-up function F(x), the following is asymptotically valid:

F ( x)

x x2 1

Also, depending on M, definite number of crossings of the curve F(x) and horizontals

y = n is possible.

Figure 2

Generally, there remains the case when the function higher than linear function. Then the equation

( x) monotonously tends toward infiniteness, with speed F ( x) = n has infinitely many solutions, which means that,
1123

apart from zeros close to one, i.e. in the interval (1,1 + ) there is another sequence of zeros which tends toward infiniteness:

Figure 3 Therefore, the canonic equation (4) has four infinite sequences of oscillating points: the first near the point x=1, which is the pole of the second order, and the second one which tends toward infiniteness. The oscillating solutions of the equation (4) can be easily determined by the method of iteration sequences. They are generated sine and cosine with the base B(x):

Z 1 = cos B ( x ) x and Z 2 = sin B ( x ) x ,

where B(x) is interruptible coefficient with the interruption of the second order in the point x=1, i.e:
1 3 2 x 2 B( x) = 2 + 4 2 x 1 x2 1

( x)

Regarding the introduced substitution (3), the solutions of the Legendres equation are:
y1 =
4

1 x 1
2

cos B ( x ) x, sin B ( x ) x

(6)

y2 =
4

1 x2 1

( x) . We can define the following theorem on the solutions (6): Theorem. Legendres equation (1) in which the function ( x) on the semi-axis [0,+ ) is positive, continuous,
B(x), they depend on the function bigger than

Solutions (6) are oscillating and on the semi-axis 0,+ ) , they are also interruptible. Through the coefficient

1 and monotonously rises toward + with the speed higher than linear function, has 4

oscillating solutions with two sequences of zeros. The first sequence of zeros tends toward the point x=1, which is the pole of the second order, while the second sequence tends toward infiniteness. The amplitudes of the oscillations close to one rise, and then in infiniteness, they fall when B ( x) + .

1124

Figure 4 The similar theorems can be formulated for great number of differential equations of special functions, depending on need and mathematical and theoretical significance.

CONCLUSION
Up to now, we have not been solving differential equations of special functions (Besel, Oiler, Legendres equations etc) by applying iterations, because their normal forms have singular points where successive approximations, i.e. iterations cannot be applied. However, in simpler cases if singular point is : 0 < < + , then by its isolation through two intervals results will be still valid if there is limit value when 0 . In order to apply our oscillation theorems, we should also: 1. formulate canonic form of the given equation

[0, ) and ( + ,+ ) , we can with no difficulties return iterations in both. In this case, all our existing
2. check if this canonic form allows the application of our theorems which requires the following:
a) b) coefficient of the canonic equation B(x) should be positive
+

the integral enough.

B( x)dx should diverge, for which B( x) x , 0 < < 2 should be

0

REFERENCES
[1] Leki M., Sturmove teoreme kroz iteracije, Ph Dissertation, University in Kosovska Mitrovica, Serbia, 2007; [2] D. Dimitrovski, S. Cvejic, M.Lekic, M. Rajovic, V. Rajovic: 200 godina kvalitativne analize diferencijalnih jednacina. Monograph, University in Kosovska Mitrovica, 2008; [3] ., , , , 1990 [4] X F., O , M, , 1970 [5] ., , , , 1971; [6] .., , , , 1974.

1125

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

STATIONARY POINTS OF ANALYTIC PERIODIC FUNCTIONS

Milena Lekic, Stana Cvejic
Faculty of Natural Sciences and Mathematics, University in Kosovska Mitrovica, SERBIA e-mail: mvasiljevic@nadlanu.com
Summary: One of the most important classes of differential equations is surely the one with periodic solutions, because the periodic events are the most frequent. However, there are only a few works on periodic solutions in literature. That is why we have tried, and hopefully succeeded in this work, to determine some properties of periodic functions which are significant for determination of necessary and sufficient conditions for periodicity of the solutions of differential equations. In that sense we have shown that analytic function, which can always be developed into possible convergent sequence whose coefficients are Tayler like, is periodic if in the interval length of the period has at least one stationary point. We have also shown that if periodic function with the period

has stationary point in zero, it also has three stationary points on interval [0, ] . Furthermore, if ( x ) is periodic function in interval [a, b ] where b = a + , then it has at least two stationary points.
Also, we have shown that if analytic periodic function has one zero, then there is infinite number of zeros on the semi-axis

[0,+] . On the other side, if analytic periodic function has no zeros, its derivative function must have them.

Key words: Differential equation, periodicity, oscillatority, stationary points, amplitudes.

Let

( x)

be analytic function given in the form of exponential sequence:

( x) =
k =0

( k ) (0)
k!

xk

(1)

and let

be random real number different from zero. Let us mark the following function with

( x) :
(2)

( x) = ( x + ) ( x)

( x) is analytic function, it is also differentiable. It means that it has all derivatives, including the first derivative. In that case, Lagranges theorem on mean value in the interval [x, x + ] is applicable, based on
Since which the following is obtained:

( x + ) ( x) = ( )( x + x) = ( ) , x < < x + If is period of the function ( x) , then ( ) = 0 and since 0 , it follows that:
( ) = 0 , x < < x +
(3)

Theorem 1. The analytic function is periodic on segment x, x + if there is at least one interior stationary point , x < < x + , i.e. the point in which the first derivative is equal to zero. Based on the analysis we know that the previously stated condition is necessary, but it is not sufficient. Also, there is the question of number of stationary points. We ask ourselves if there is one or at least two stationary points within the interval length of the period .

1126

The number of stationary points depends on the length of interval. The function is periodic if it has at least one stationary point. Let us observe the analytic periodic function ( x) with the period on interval 0, . If (0) = 0 , then

( ) = 0 , because the derivative function ( x) is also periodic with the period , so ( x) = ( x + ) for every x, and even for x=0. Therefore, (0) = ( ) . Since ( x) is analytic function, it is differentiable and since it takes equal values at the ends of the interval [0, ] , it fulfills conditions of the Rolles theorem. Hence, there is a point , 0 < < , where ( ) = 0 is valid. Therefore, if analytic function with the period has stationary point in zero, then it has three stationary points in interval [0, ] .

Figure 1

Figure 2

Theorem 2. In the full interval 0, of one period, analytic periodic function has at least three stationary points, if there is one at the beginning. Now, we shall observe some interval of the full period a, b , with length b a = , where the end points

(a)

and

(b)

[ ]

are not stationary points of the function

( x) .

Since b = a + , then, based on the

(b) = (a + ) = (a) , i.e. the value of the function must repeat on each end of the period . Then, based on Rolles theorem, there is a point 1 , where a < 1 < b and (1 ) = 0 . Let 1 be abscissa of the maximum. Then it is ( x) > 0 left from the point 1 and ( x) < 0 right from 1 . The function ( x ) is analytic, so it is also continuously differentiable. Since it is also periodic, it cannot be continuously falling on interval (1 , b) . Whatsoever, from certain point of this interval it starts rising again, which means that there are points near which derivative function ( x ) changes sign. Also, since it is also uninterruptible as a derivative of the uninterruptible function, there is a point 2 where ( 2 ) = 0 .
definition of periodicity, we obtain

Figure 3

1127

Therefore, each value of the function ( x) repeats at least twice within one period. Thus, the function has at least two stationary points, although Rolles theorem allows for even more stationary points. This leads to Theorem 3. There are at least two stationary points of the interruptible differentiable and periodic function ( x) within one whole period in interval a, b , b = a + . The condition of the uninterruptible differentiability is here very important. If function ( x) is interruptible or uninterruptible, while derivative is interruptible, then it does not have to have stationary points. Example 1. Function y = x x is interruptible in complete values of the argument, periodic, not analytic and that is why it does not have stationary points.

[ ]

[]

Figure 4

Example 2. Function y = tgx is interruptible in points

, ,... and it is periodic with the period = . 2 2

Figure 5

Example 3. Function y = not two.

sin x is uninterruptible, periodic, but not analytic, because its derivative in zeros

0, ,2 ,... is infinite. Its period is = , but within the interval [0, ] there is only one stationary point, and

Figure 6

1128

Relations between zeros and stationary points of the periodic and analytic function This question is very important, but there is no simple answer to it. Based on continuity and analyticity, the following theorems are obvious. Theorem 4. If analytic periodic function has one zero, then it has infinite number of zeros on the semi-axis 0,+ . Theorem 5. If analytic periodic function has no zeros, then its derivative must have them. Based on the theorem 3, analytic and periodic function must have stationary point where ( ) = 0 . If

maximum is in

( + ) < 0 , all the way until the second stationary point , which is minimum and from which there is ( + ) > 0 . Owing to the analogy, i.e. the continuity of the first derivative, there is a point , < < , where ( ) = 0 . ,
then there is

Now, we are facing another very important question of zero function and zeros of the first derivative: whether zeros interlace, whether they are equidistant, whether amplitudes (minimum and maximum) also influence zeros, whether some classification of periodic functions is possible based on the relation between zero function and its derivatives. In order to prepare ourselves for solving previous important questions, let us observe a few illustrations: Example 4. The function ( x ) = sin x cos 2 x is difference of two analytic and periodic functions with periods 2 and , where 2 is a joint period. Zero functions are solutions of the equation

sin x cos 2 x = 0
i.e. of the equation

2 sin 2 x + sin x + 1 = 0
This leads to sin x =

1 and sin x = 1 , so there is: 2 3 5 x1 = , x 2 = = , x3 = . 6 6 6 2

Distances between successive zeros are:

x 2 x1 =

6 6 3 2 x3 x 2 = ( ) = 2 6 3

2 3

so the successive zeros are equidistant. For the given function, apart from zeros, the following points are also important:

(0) = 1 , ( ) = 2 , ( ) = 1 , ( 3 ) = 0 and (2 ) = 1
2
2

Zeros of the derivative, i.e. stationary points are solutions of the equation:

( x) = cos x + 2 sin 2 x = 0
i.e. of the equation

cos x (1 + 4 sin x ) = 0
from which there follows: (cos x )1 / 2 = 0 and (sin x ) 3 / 4 =

1 . Therefore 4

1129

x1 =

1 , 3 , x3 = + arcsin and x 4 = 2 arcsin 1 x2 = 4 2 2 4

and

3 3 ) = 5 < 0 , then ( ) = 2 and ( ) = 0 2 2 2 2 1 1 are maximums of the function ( x ) . Further, ( + arcsin ) = 1 is minimum of the function ( x ) , 4 8 1 1 1 because ( + arcsin ) = 4 2 > 0 . 4 4 4 3 is both zero function and zero of the first order which also makes it zero of the We notice that the point x = 2
Since

( x) = sin x + 4 cos 2 x , ( ) < 0

second order.

Figure 7

Since the function ( x) is neither even nor odd, then there is no other symmetry except the symmetry in relation to the vertical x = . It is important to state that the basic oscillation of the function

= max min
is not permanent, because function has two local maximums and one local minimum, which are also stationary points of the function. Therefore, if there is general periodicity apart from analyticity, but without general assumptions, such as only evenness or only oddness, then in general case there is no other symmetries, except the symmetry in relation to the vertical x = . This makes the problem of researching much more complicated.

CONCLUSION
Due to the big importance of zeros, especially of those equidistant ones (standing waves), then due to the importance of maintaining oscillation for the work of different machines and devices, and finally due to the importance of interlaced zeros and abscissas of extremes (Sturms theorems), it is of high importance to identify classes of periodic functions with more or less symmetries. These could be applied in construction of different devices and researches of oscillations. However, this is not an elementary problem and it is not elaborated in literature enough either.

1130

REFERENCES
[1] D. Dimitrovski, S. Cvejic, M.Lekic,: Periodicnost i oscilatornost, Monograph, University in Kosovska Mitrovica, Serbia 2010; [2] D. Dimitrovski, S. Cvejic, M.Lekic,: Periodicnost kvadratura, Monograph, University in Kosovska Mitrovica, Serbia 2010; [3] .. , , , 1959; [4] , .. , , , 1979 [5] D. Dimitrovski, S. Cvejic, M.Lekic, M. Rajovic, V. Rajovic: 200 godina kvalitativne analize diferencijalnih jednacina. Monograph, University in Kosovska Mitrovica, 2008.

1131

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MODELING OF SOME PROCESSES OF FILLING OF MINCE WITH ONE TYPE OF SPIRAL FEEDING MECHANISM
2

National University of Food Technologies, Kiev, UKRAINA University of food technologies, Plovdiv, BULGARIA, stvstefanov@yahoo.com

Igor Litovchenko1, Ivan Mihaylov2, Stefan Stefanov2

Summary: Created a three-dimensional model of power mechanism for submission of mince filling sausage using vacuum filling machine. Using a simulated model are ongoing at the time of product processes. The analysis of the simulation process makes it possible to study the process in depth. Based on the results can be made for establishing the optimal geometric characteristics and modes of supply mechanisms of this type. Keywords: modeling, simulation, mince filling, vacuum filling machine.

1. INTRODUCTION
The feeding mechanisms of the vacuum-filling machines are used in the meat processing industry for forced transportation and precise dosing of the filling mass to the pushing out mechanism of the technological equipment for realizing the filling process in the producing of sausage products from chopped meat. The quality characteristics of the prepared sausages depend on the technological operations, related to the preparation of the filling mass (grinding, mixturing, etc.) as well as the filling process in sausage cover. This forces more detailed and profound study upon the work of the vacuum-filling machines as whole and the mechanisms, which construct them (feeding, pushing out, clasping, etc.). The presence of stirring and the excessive increasing of the pressure upon the filling mass in the feeding hopper leads to sharply worsening of the work of the feeding mechanisms from technological point of view [4]. The reason for this is the pushing in air in different quantities in the filling mass. This influences on the oxidizationdeoxidization potential of the medium, and as well upon the increasing of the velocity of the enzyme, chemical and oxidization-deoxidization reactions. The consequences from the complex influence of these factors have physical character and to exert considerable influence on the transfer of filling mass in the time of further technological processing, or to have chemical character, which are the color making and aroma making. There are different constructive solutions for feeding mechanisms (with feeding spiral, with feeding screw, etc.)[4,6,7], which are used in meat processing and have different indicators in relation to productivity, technology in their producing and mostly in relation to the achieved indicators for quality of the produced meat products. The optimization of these mechanisms is related to study of the processes, passing in them in different regimes of work and their influence upon the quality characteristics of the sausage production. The purpose of the present work is to be simulated the processes in the feeding mechanism with feeding spiral and to be defined numerically the change of the velocity and the pressure in different kinematical parameters of operating the feeding mechanism.

2. COMPUTER MODEL
For the needs of the carried out research of the bearing of the product in different regimes of work of the feeding mechanism it is developed its three-dimensional computer model. Section of the model is shown on fig.1. In this model are included its basic elements hopper, taking the product, spiral which moves it to the formed in the

1132

bottom cylindrical opening and opposite spiral. The aim is to assist the right orientation of the filling mass and improving the process of its moving. As in the physical model, also in the computer model the opposite spiral can be disposed in the hopper on different positions, described on fig.2.

Figure 1: Section of the three dimensional model of the feeding mechanism

Figure 2: Positions of the opposite spiral in the feeding hopper

In [3] there are formulated criterions and restrictive conditions for improving the construction of developed feeding mechanism for vacuum-filling machines. It is examined the mutual location of the single elements and it is established their optimal position for maximal productivity point of view. The computer model is developed in graphic medium of the Solid Works system. For the need of the optimization of the regimes it is simulated also the movement of the working organs of the system in medium of Solid Works Motion. This gives the opportunity to be visualized the laws of moving of the spiral. It is made strength analysis of the spiral in Solid Works Simulation medium, which gives the opportunity to be determined its optimal geometric characteristics. The results from this analysis of the strength characteristics of the elements of the feeding mechanism on the method of end elements and determination of the safety coefficient are shown in [2].

3. COMPUTER SIMULATIONS
For study of the processes passing in the feeding mechanism at the time of its work, there are made computer simulations in medium of the program system Flow Vision. For the purposes of the simulations it is used the method of the end elements. The given model describes the flowing of viscose fluid on small numbers of Max (M < 0.3), small and big (turbulent) numbers of Reynolds. In this model are included the equations of Navie-Stoks and the energy. The model of turbulent incompresive fluid is based on the using turbulent viscosity t. The determination of t depends on the chosen model of turbulency. In the model are present the following equations: 1. Equation of Navie-Stoks V P 1 T (1) + (V V ) = + + V + ( V ) + S t t (2) V = 0 where the source S is equal to:

((

)(

))

R hyd S = 1 g+B+

(3)

At rotating co-ordinate system, the forse of rotating (Koriolis`s and centrifugal) looks like:

B = 2 V r

(4) (5)

The equation for the energy is:

Q h 1 + (Vh ) = + t h + t C p Prt

For the creating of the model it is used 3D (three-dimensional) net of end elements. There are used cubic end elements. The border conditions, for which the mathematical problem is solved are: hydraulically rough wall ofall end elements.

1133

Free entrance-exit. On the entrance and on the exit the build has zero overpressure (atmosphere pressure).

4. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

The object of this study is feeding mechanism with geometric and force characteristics, shown in [5]. There are carried out simulated studies of the processes, passing in the feeding mechanism on its independent work. This means that there are not included the other modules of the system for filling the sausages with filling mass. For the purposes of the simulative studies it is used filling mass with the following indexes, shown in Table 1: Table 1: Indexes of the filling mass Kind of sausage Density, , kg/m3 Viscosity, , Pa.s Teleshki 990 60 amchija 998 130 Veslec 1005 310 Servilat 1010 410 Ambarica 1022 420 Panagjurska lukanka 1026 440 There are studied the following indexes of the work regime of the feeding mechanism: 1. Distribution of the velocity vectors on the longitudinal section of the feeding mechanism. The velocity vectors are determined for three frequencies of rotating of the spiral 10 min-1, 60 min-1 and 120 min-1. 2. Distribution of the pressure in the longitudinal central section of the hopper of the feeding mechanism at frequency of rotating of the spiral 0 min-1, 60 min-1 and 120 min-1. 3. Velocity profile of the stream of filling mass on the exit of the feeding mechanism at frequency of rotating of the spiral 10 min-1, 60 min-1 and 120 min-1. There are represented the following graphic results from the simulation research: Fig. 3 and 4 Distribution of the velocity vectors of the stream at frequency of rotating of the spiral at 10 and 120 min-1, Fig. 5 and 6 Distribution of pressure of the filling mass on the longitudinal section of the hopper of the feeding mechanism at 10 and 120 min-1, Fig. 7 and 8 Velocity profile of the outgoing stream at frequency of rotating of the spiral at 10 and 120 min-1, Fig. 9 and 10 The variation of the pressure on the cylindrical part at frequency of rotating of the spiral 10 and 120 min-1, at maximum value of the pressure scale 1000 , Fig. 11 and 12 Diagram of the variation of the velocity on the cylindrical part at frequency of rotating of the spiral 10 and 120 min-1, at maximum value of the velocity scale 0,1 m/s, Fig. 13 and 14 The variation of the pressure on extension of the hopper at frequency of rotating the spiral 10 and 120 min-1, at maximum value of the scale of the pressure 1000 .

Figure 3: The velocity vectors of the stream at frequency of rotating of the spiral 10 min-1

Figure 4: The velocity vectors of the stream at frequency of rotating of the spiral 120 min-1

1134

Figure 5: Pressure of the filling mass on the longitudinal section of the hopper of the feeding mechanism at 10 min-1

Figure 6: Pressure of the filling mass on the longitudinal section of the hopper of the feeding mechanism at 120 min-1

Figure 7: Velocity profile of the outgoing stream at frequency of rotating of the spiral 10 min-1

Figure 8: Velocity profile of the product at the exit of the feeding mechanism at frequency of rotating 120 min-1

Figure 9: Diagram of the variation of the pressure on the cylindrical part at frequency of rotating of the spiral 10 min-1.

Figure 10: Diagram of the variation of the pressure on the cylindrical part at frequency of rotating of the spiral 120 min-1.

1135

Figure 11: Diagram of the variation of the velocity on the cylindrical part at frequency of rotating of the spiral 10 min-1.

Figure 12: Diagram of the variation of the velocity on the cylindrical part at frequency of rotating of the spiral 120 min-1

Figure 13: Diagram of the variation of the pressure on extension of the hopper at frequency of rotating the spiral 10 min-1.

Figure 14: Diagram of the variation of the pressure on extension of the hopper at frequency of rotating the spiral 120 min-1.

5. CONCLUSION
1. At frequency of rotating of the spiral 120 min-1 in the hopper arises considerable fall of the pressure and the velocity of moving of the filling mass. They are provoked from the passing of the spiral by the stopping the flow of moving static opposite spiral, disposed at the center of the hopper. 2. The biggest variations of the pressure are noticed at the places, where the windage between the spiral and the walls of the hopper is smallest. 3. With the increasing of the frequency of rotating of the spiral it grows up also the zone with increased pressure around it. More over a part of the opposite spiral, found out near the exit of the hopper (on the figure it is at right), arise undesired falls of the pressures at the exit section the cylindrical part of the hopper. 4. With increasing of the frequency of rotating of the spiral 12 times (from 10 min-1 t 120 min-1) the velocity of the filling mass the product at the exit grows up 6 times.

1136

REFERENCES
[1] Valkova-Jorgova ., Tehnologija na mesnite produkti, Akademichno izdatelstvo na UHT, Plovdiv, 2005. [2] ihaylov I., V. Hadjiiski, S. Stefanov, Jakosten naliz na rabotnite organi na zahranvasht mehanizam na vakuumpalnachna mashina, Mashinostroene i mashinoznanie, godina V, kniga 2, Izdatelstvo na TU Varna, 2010 [3] Mihaylov I., S. Stefanov, V. Hadjiiski, Usavarshenstvane na zahranvasht mehanizam na vakuum palnachna mashina, Mejdunarodna nauchna konferencija Uniteh09 Gabrovo, Sbornik dokladi, tom , Gabrovo, 2009 [4] Pionov I., Tehnologichno obzavejdane na mesnata i riboprerabotvashtata promishlenost, Plovdiv, 1980. [5] Janchev I., I. ihaylov, V. Hadjiiski, eoretichno opredeljane na njakoi tehniko-eksploatacionni parametri na podavasht mehanizam sas spirala, Nauchna konferencija s mejdunarodno uchastie Hranitelna nauka, tehnika I tehnologii 2009, N.. tom LV, Svitak 2, Akademichno izdatelstvo na UHT Plovdiv, 2009 [6] Hermsen Erwin, Die Vakuumbehandlung von Fleisch und Wurstwaren, Osnabruck, 1978. [7] Mihajlov I., S. Stefanov, I.M. Litovchenko, Modeliuvannia procesu podachi farshu, 76-a Naukova konferenciia molodih uchenih, aspirantiv i studentiv, Chastina , Kiv NUHT, 2010

1137

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCHES OF THE INNER MICRODEFORMATIONS IN THE ROLLING TRIBOSYSTEMS

Silviu Mcu, Constantin Gheorghies, Carmen Debeleac
University Dunrea de Jos, Galai, ROMANIA, e-mail: Silviu.Macuta@ugal.ro

Summary: During friction tests of case-hardening steels structural changes appear leading to reduce the durability of the rolling tribosystems. The superficial layer of tested samples has been subjected to X-ray analysis. The mosaic blocks, inner second order tensions and the dislocation density have maximum values at a depth of 0,2 mm where microdamages can appear. The influence of mechanical and thermal effects has been shown and discussed. Keywords : steel, tribo-element, superficial layer, structure, microdestruction.

1. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Case hardening steels are used increasingly often in the construction of ball bearings due to their superior performance during dynamic loading accompanied by shocks. During the solicitation-type of hertzian contact with a bearing, structural changes that can affect the sustainability of systems occur in the superficial layers of case hardening steels [1, 2]. The characterization of these changes allows a better understanding of the tribological behavior of case hardened steels.

2. TESTED MATERIALS AND WORKING METHOD

We have tested samples of steel 21MoMnCr12XS, to which we applied the thermochemical treatment of case hardening in gas phase followed by quenching in oil and an income. The hardness of the superficial layer obtained is 62 3HRC. The cylindrical ring-shaped specimens were tested on a testbed with a support of four wheels [3]. The diagram of the experimental device is presented in Figure 1. It gives a frequency of contacts of 16.000 min-1. The lubrication of the tribo-elements in contact is ensured by the mark oil T80EP2, at the average temperature of 52C. The loading is done using an elastic system (arc-disc); the contact pressures of 1900, 3300 and 4700 MPa were obtained and the number of stress cycles was 106. The surface layer of the rings tested was analyzed by X-ray diffraction (MoK) on DRON-3 installation. This allowed the determination of the average size of mosaic blocks, the level of internal micro-deformations of order two and the density of dislocations in the crystal network [4, 5]. The in-depth analysis of structural changes has been performed on the samples, after progressive electrolytic dissolution of the superficial layers.

3. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
Figure 2 shows the change in depth of the width of the diffraction ray (110) Fe. This quantity is inversely proportional to the average size of the mosaic blocks [6].

1138

Figure 1: Schematic representation of the apparatus employed in this work The analysis of the figure shows that variations in depth of the dimensions of mosaic blocks, according to the load, have the same speed. At a depth of approximately 0.2 mm, the blocks have a minimum size, which indicates that at this depth, there is a maximum stress that can give rise to the appearance of microcracks. The arrangement of curves observed can be explained by the preponderance of the thermal phenomena on the mechanical ones or vice versa. For a load of 1900 MPa, the mosaic blocks are systematically larger than in the case of unsolicited specimens. This can be explained by the development of heat in the superficial layer during the rolling process, which leads to reducing the density of dislocations of the network and expand the dimensions of the mosaic blocks.

Figure 2: Evolution in depth of the (110) Fe diffraction peak width At 3300 MPa, the mosaic blocks have smaller dimensions. We attribute this to the preponderance of the mechanical effect which led to the division of the blocks leading to the decrease of their size. At 4700 MPa, the thermal effect seems to become predominant, leading to a major expansion of the mosaic blocks. In Figure 3 we present the evolution in depth of the width of the diffraction ray (220) Fe, quantity which is directly proportional to the level of the internal micro-deformations of order two. It results from the figure that the evolution in depth of the internal micro-deformations is similar to the studied loading levels. At depths ranging between 0.1 - 0.2 mm, internal stresses of compression have a maximum value. This indicates the possibility of the apparition in this area of certain microdestruction at network level which may become incipient cracks. We may also note that the curves intersect, which can be explained by the preponderance, during the solicitation, of the mechanical effects on the thermal effects or vice versa.

1139

In Figure 4 we present the variation in depth for each load of the relationship between the intensity of the continuous background and the maximum diffraction peak for the ray (220). This quantity ((If / Imax)220) is directly proportional to the density of the network dislocations. The evolution of this quantity has approximately the same shape for all three loads. The curves show different maximus.

Fig. 3: Evolution in depth of the (220) Fe diffraction peak width

Fig. 4: Evolution in depth of the ratio (If / Imax)220 As and when the load decreases, the maximus move toward the surface of the material. The displacement of the curves do not follow the intensity of the applied load (3300 MPa, 1900 MPa then 4700 MPa). The distribution of the curves is also alternating, depending on the level of loading, which highlights the role of mechanical and thermal effects developed during the solicitation.

4. CONCLUSIONS
During testing of friction by bearing on carburizing steel treated, we observed significant structural changes in the superficial layers. These changes present, according to the load, similar speeds, but different intensities. The analysis of changes in depth of the size of mosaic blocks, of internal microdeformation of order two and of density of dislocations havw shown that at a depth of about 0.2 mm below the surface, these quantities take the maximum values and can become causes of incipient cracks.

1140

The observed changes are due to mechanical processes (that produce destruction of the network) and thermal processes (that produce the reorganization of the crystal network). Depending on the applied load, these two phenomena act simultaneously or separately in bearing.

REFERENCES
[1] Gheorghies C., Crudu I., Solea D., Studies on Tribomodel of Friction Process, Proc. of The 16th General Conference of the Condensed Matter Division, 1997, Aug. 24-28, Leuven, Belgium, p. 168. [2] Ripa M., Gheorghies C., Spanu C., Methodology for Rolling-Sliding Tribosystems Study. Proc. of The 3th International Conference of Tribology, Balkantrib 99, Sinaia, Romania, June 2-4, 1999, Vol. 1, p. 49-55. [3] Stefanescu I., Gheorghies C., Structural and Dimensional Instabilities in Rolling Bearing Steels, Proc. of The 9th International Metallurgy and Material Congress, June 11-15, 1997, Istambul, Turkey, p. 1445 - 1450. [4] Miege B., Barbarin P., Convert F., Application industrielle de la mesure de contraintes par diffractomtrie X, Rev. Franc. de Mc, 3, 1987, p. 187-195. [5] Gheorghies C., Des mthodes physiques de contrle non-destructif (en roumain), Porto-Franco Publisher House, Galati, 1999, p. 110. [6] Gheorghies C., et al., L'essai des matriaux (en roumain), Technical Publisher House, Bucharest, Romania, 1984. p. 648.

1141

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

PROGRAMMABLE TEACHING TOOL LEGO MINDSTORMS NXT IN TEACHING COMPUTER SCIENCE IN HIGH SCHOOL
1

Sneana Mijailovi1, Dragan Golubovi2

Gimnazija ,,Takovski ustanak, Gornji Milanovac, SERBIA, e-mail: snesskica@gmail.com 2 Tehniki fakultet, aak, SERBIA, e-mail: golubd@tfc.kg.ac.rs

Summary: In this paper are presented the results of the questionnaire and the experimental research among the students of the third grade in high schools in Gornji Milanovac, aak and Poega, about the suggestion of the implementation of the new teaching contents and modern teaching tools in teaching computer science and information technology. The emphasis is on the implementation of teaching contents about robotics in the curriculum of the high school based on common department, natural science and mathematics, then on using programmable teaching tool Lego Mindstorms NXT, and also on the results of its appliance in teaching this subject. Keywords: high school, third grade, robotics, Lego Mindstorms NXT.

1. INTRODUCTION
The appearance of computers on the marketplace, beginning from the middle of 20th century has influenced world to be completely changed. One can say that modern world has made into one global information society, which can not function without using modern information technology. Like any other system, which has changed very much because of the appearance and application of the personal computers, and educational system is now completely different from the earlier system that functioned without computers. The teaching contents, tools, methods, organization of teaching and much more has changed. The great changes has happened in teaching practice that is being modified and modernized every day using the information techology. In the latest twenty years, the subject Computers science and information technology has modified the most in comparison with the other teaching subjects. The changes are related to the teaching contents and teaching tools which are using. In primary and secondary education, the curriculums of this subject have been changed many times and adapted to the current happenings in the IT sector, but even thought they are outdated now and not suitable. Because the previous stated, the experimental evaluation of the acceptance of implementation the new teaching contents and tools in teaching the subject Computer science and information technology is given in this paper. This evaluation is the result of the questionnaire and experimental research, which has been done during the 2009/2010 school year, among the students of the third grade in high schools based on the natural science, mathematics, social sciences, foreign languages and common department. The paper is being loaded and the experiment done in this moment, because of the fact that there must be changes in the whole organization of the high schools in Serbia, so the results of this research might be a kind of the guideline for the future syllabuses of the subject Computer science and information technology in high schools in Serbia.

1142

2. THE SUGGESTION FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE NEW TEACHING CONTENTS AND TOOLS IN TEACHING COMPUTER SCIENCE AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN HIGH SCHOOL
The author, working as a teacher of computer science in high school, and the colleagues who teach the same subject, during the conversations, exchanging the teaching experiences on the specialized meetings and workshops, has come to the particular conclusions and made the new concept of teaching this subject, which would made the teaching more modern, and the knowledge more applied. That new concept suggests the implementation of the teaching contents about Web design, animations, robotics, mathematic programs and object-oriented programming, and also about the usage of the modern teaching tools, like interactive board, NetSupport School software, programmable teaching tool Lego Mindstorms NXT, elearning concept, ECDL tests and other available teaching tools. This research is done with 268 students of the third grade of the common department, department based on the natural and social science, based on mathematic and on the foreign languages in high schools in Gornji Milanovac, aak and Poega in Serbia, thereafter in Gimnazija ,,Takovski ustanak in Gornji Milanovac the experiment has done. The experiment lasted ten classes and included the appliance of the programmable teaching tool Lego Mindstorms NXT and evaluation the students achievements using it. The approval for doing the experiment is given by the Serbian Educational Department. [1] The aim of this research was to confirm that current curriculum of this subject and teaching tools used in high school teaching practice dont meet the needs and interests of the high school students, and also to evaluate the acceptance of new teaching contents implementation and using the new teaching tools, on the first place, programmable teaching tool Lego Mindstorms NXT. The authors hypothesis was that usage of this teaching tool in teaching programming would make the students achievement better and it would motivate students for doing researches in programming. When the research was done, very alarming, but expected results were showed up. The questionnaire that was done among the third grade students in high schools in aak, Poega and Gornji Milanovac showed that suggested teaching contents about animation, Web design, robotics, object-oriented programming, especially Java, are very attractive to the students. Above all, a very large number of students thinks that studying programming language Pascal doesnt have the purpose for their future education and work [2]. The fact that the large number of students said that they would like to study robotics and use the modern Lego robot, while studying programming, is the good indicator that these teaching contents should be the part of the modern curriculum of this subject. [3] In addition, there was done an experiment, using Lego Mindstorms NXT in teaching, so there would be more words about it in the next section of this paper.

3. USING PROGRAMMABLE TEACHING TOOL LEGO MINDSTORMS NXT IN TEACHING COMPUTER SCIENCE AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN GIMNAZIJA ,,TAKOVSKI USTANAK
3.1. Lego robots There is the large number of robots, used for educational purposes, but the most popular nowadays is LEGO MINDSTORMS NXT robot, which is presented in this paper. This modern type of robot, in very interesting way, introduces to the students, not only the contents about information technologies, but it enables appliance of knowledge from other areas, especially math and physics. Robotics, as a science, can be studied separately, but it can also be used in teaching other subjects in very effective and interesting way and it can help those teachers to easily transfer the knowledge to the students. For example, the assimilation of the knowledge of particular teaching subject by using robots and the knowledge of math, physics and other subjects is more effective than the classic way of introducing teaching contents to the students. LEGO MINDSTORMS educational package can offer different hardware and software solutions which can be used in curricular or extra-curricular activities and it enables students to learn how to create or program the multifunctional system models that automatically do the job as a human being. These powerful packages cover the teaching contents from physics (energy, force, speed, power), information technologies (programming and controlling input and output devices, using wireless connection, network data sharing), engineering (development and creating different projects, testing and verification of solutions) and mathematics (measure, using coordinate system, conversion and applied math). The relationships between subjects and the usage of the adopted knowledge are very important, so these goals could be reached using the teaching tools like these.

1143

Figure 1: The appearance of the LEGO MINDSTORMS robot Hypothesis about the positive effects of using this teaching tool on students motivation for studying and doing researches in the area of programming through the students` better achievements, was the start point for this experimental research. The organization of this experiment, its results, the analysis of the reached results and the acceptance of the research are presented in the next part. 3.2. The organization and doing the experiment The experiment was done in Gimnazija ,,Takovski ustanak in Gornji Milanovac, in April and May of 2009/2010 school year. The aimed group of students were the third grade students from the common department, exactly 100 students. There were an experimental and a control group of students. The students of the experimental group were doing the programming using programmable teaching tool Lego Mindstorms NXT for ten classes, but the students of the control group were doing the programming using Turbo Pascal program. Teaching contents which were studied, for both groups, were about creating complex programs using modules: functions and procedures. Those teaching contents were set in the curriculum for this subject in the third grade by The Serbian Educational Department. ) The experimental group The experimental groups of students were 23 students of the III2 class and 27 students of the III4 class. At beginning, they were introduced to the robotics and the structure of the Lego robot, and then to the Lego Mindstorms NXT 2.0 software for programming the robot, thereafter they were applying the knowledge about the sequential, selective, and repetitious programming structures, doing the examples which included the program modules. The number of the classes: 10 The classes organization: 0+2, making two groups from the class. The aims of the classes: Getting students to know to control the basic functions of the robot Appliance of the previous knowledge from the subject (programming language Pascal) using LegoMindstorms NXT robot The expected outcomes: Student knows to list and explain the main functions of Lego Mindstorms NXT robot Student knows to use the tools of the Lego Mindstorms NXT program for creating basic programs Student applies the knowledge of the programming language Pascal while doing the Lego Mindstorms NXT programming. Relationships inside the subject: Syllabus themes: the sequential, selective, and repetitious programming structures, modules, multimedia, computer communications. The number of these classes: 9 Relationships with other subjects: Mathematic, physics, English language, musical art. The number of these classes: 10 As an instrument for the evaluation of the students achievements, a written work was applied. It is planned in the syllabus and lasted two classes, consisted from the test and the practical task. [1] B) The control group The control groups of students were 23 students of the III1 class and 27 students of the III3 class and they studied about modules and how to create modules (functions and procedures) using programming language Pascal, in

1144

Turbo Pascal 1.5 program. As an instrument for the evaluation of the students achievements also was the written work. It is planned in the syllabus and lasted two classes, consisted from the test and the practical task. [1]

Figure 2: Lego robot, model called Alpha Rex

Figure 3: Programming Alpha Rex on the experimental classes 3.3 The results of the experiment In the next table there are the results of the test and the practice work of the experimental and control group (Table 1): Table 1: The achievements of the control and experimental group of students, expressed as average grades class III1 III2 III3 III4 2.04 3.38 1.68 3.13 Test practice work average 2.91 2.49 3.95 3.67 2.92 2.30 3.78 3.46

According to the results, showed in Table 1, it is evident that the experimental group of students has achieved the better results than the control group. The results are also shown graphically on the next page (figure 4 and figure 5).

1145

Figure 1: The results of the test and practice work of the experimental and control group of students showed graphically

Figure 2: The average results of the test and practice work of the experimental and control student group showed graphically From the figure 4, it is obvious that no matter if it is the control or experimental group of students, students have achieved the better results on the practice work part of the written work than on the test part, so it is the indicator that the practice appliance of the knowledge has enormous significance. It is also evident that the experimental group of students generally has achieved the better results. On the figure 5, the average grade of the students achievements in each class is presented and the experimental group of students has achieved the better results than the control group for 32.87%. To conclude, according to the results of this research, the students have achieved the better results in programming using the robot. 3.4 The acceptance of the research According to the results of the research, set hypothesis are reasonable. The students stated, in a very large number, that they are keen on studying suggested teaching contents and using suggested teaching tools. In addition, using Lego Mindstorms NXT robot in this experiment, the hypotesis about better students motivation for getting new knowledge and prediction about the better results in students achievements using it are confirmed. The atmosphere on the experimental classes was very stimulating and relaxing. Students showed the great interest, doing the tasks very efficently, showing the creativity and discovering different ways for solving the set tasks. Furhermore, having the conversations with teachers and using the other resources, students supplemented and deepened their knowledge from area of programming, and also was encouraged for the researching projects. Students was focused on weather the robot would do what they programmed it to do and experienced the whole teaching as a game, easily adopted the knowledge from this

1146

area. That means that students were focused on the outcomes of teaching what the modern teaching process is directed to achieve.

4. CONCLUSION
According to this realized research, this new concept of teaching computer science and information technology in high school has got the positive experimental evaluation, so the possibility of its implementation in the syllabuses of this subject for common department, department based on math and natural science, social science and foreign languages in high school should be considered, with accent on its forehand update. Relying on this positive experimental evaluation, the author suggests to the Serbian Educational Department, department for the higher education, to consider that possibility. The appliance of this new concept of teaching would advance the teaching practice of this subject, using modern teaching tools and teaching methods, and that would raise the students achievements at the higher level. The further researches in this area will go in direction of the Lego robot appliance in curriculum and noncurriculum activities for building the variety of projects, which would influence on students logic thinking and encouraged relationship between different teaching subjects, and also the scientific research work. Additionally, the wider researches in teaching practice of this subject would be related to appliance the interactive board, NetSupport School software and e-learning concept and analysis effects of its appliance.

REFERENCES
[1] Mijailovi, S.: The experimental evaluation of the acceptance of implementation the modern teaching tools in teaching computer science and information technology in high school, masters work, Technical faculty, aak, 2010. [2] Mijailovi, S.; Papi .: The new concept of teaching computer science and information technology in high school, Proceedings, the third International Conference ,,Technique and Informatics in Education TIO 2010, Technical faculty, aak, 2010., str. 653-659. [3] Mijailovi, S.; Golubovi, D.: Robotics in teaching computer science and information technology in high school, Proceedings, the third International Conference ,,Technique and Informatics in Education TIO 2010, Technical faculty, aak, 2010., 660-664. [4] http://mindstorms.lego.com [5] http://vizuelnoprogramiranje.spaces.live.com/ Educational material from the seminar Visual programming and the appliance programming the robots, approved by Serbian Educational Department cat. nb. 325/2008

1147

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

PRODUCTION OF ALGINATE/ZEOLITE ADSORBENT BY DIRECT EXTRUSION METHOD

Jelena Milenkovi1, Steva Levi2, Verica Manojlovi1, Nevenka Raji1, Branko Bugarski1, Mahmoud Suliman3, Marija Jemenica1, Viktor Nedovi2
Faculty of Technology and Metallurgy, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: vmanojlovic@tmf.bg.ac.rs 2 Faculty of Agriculture, University of Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: slevic@agrif.bg.ac.rs 3 Faculty of Biotechnology and Food Engineering, University Technion, Israel Institute of Technology, ISRAEL, e-mail: smahmod1000@gmail.com
1

Summary: Production of heavy metals adsorbent based on zeolit and calcium alginate was investigated. The adsorbent was prepared by encapsulation of zeolite in Ca-alginate. The adsorbent was prepared via direct extrusion process of alginate/zeolite mixture into the gelling solution. Additionally, copper adsorption by encapsulated and free zeolite was compared. Approximately 42% of the copper ions originally present in the solution were adsorbed onto encapsulated and free zeolite adsorbents. Keywords: alginate, zeolite, direct extrusion, cupper.

1. INTRODUCTION
Alginates are salts of alginic acid, which have been founded in brown algae and some bacteria. Alginate is present in the cell walls of brown algae as the calcium, magnesium and sodium salts of alginic acid. Sodium salt is soluble form of alginic acid, while calcium and magnesium are not soluble in water. Molecules of alginate are long chains that contain two different acidic components, which are usually identified by the abbreviation as M and G. The M component is composed of mannuronic acid, while G component is based on guluronic acid. Those two components are associated alternating into structure of alginate. The amount of M and G components in a chain of alginate can vary from one species of seaweed to another. Generally, alginates with a higher content of G will give a stronger gel. Usually, alginate has been used in a form of gel, which is relatively stable and easy to produce. The alginate gel formation in presence of divalent ions is one of the most significant features of this natural polymer. Regions of guluronate monomers in one alginate molecule can be linked to a similar region in another alginate molecule for example by means of calcium ions or other multivalent cations [1]. Alginate is a biopolymer with many applications in drug delivery systems, cell encapsulation, food industry, cosmetics. Alginate based gels, produced by different encapsulation techniques, have been studied for encapsulation of microorganisms or food ingredients [2-4]. Also, alginate based gels (loaded with different adsorbents or blank) have been studied intensively for adsorption of heavy metals [5, 6]. Usually, the most commonly used form of alginate gels are spheres or beads. The two most frequently used methods for alginate beads (or spheres) production are extrusion/dropping method and emulsion method [2]. However, in many cases, sphere production by extrusion or emulsion methods could be very difficult or impossible. The main problem in production of uniform spheres loaded with different core materials (cells, chemicals, etc.) could be significant changes in viscosity or surface tension of polymer/encapsulant mixtures, preventing a formation of regular spheres [7]. One of the solutions for this problem could be a direct extrusion of dispersion (mixture) of polymer and core material into gelling solution. This process cannot provide sphere production, but can be used for entrapping of high concentrated core material into worm-shape polymer matrix.

1148

According to our previous study, by this way it is possible to entrap solid aroma in calcium alginate gel in high amounts [8]. The process was based on direct extrusion of dispersion aroma/sodium alginate into the calciumchloride solution bath. During the extrusion process, needle was immersed into the gelling solution, providing satisfactory contact between polymers and gelling agent. By this technique, it was possible to achieve high loads of core material and process high-viscous solutions. The goal of this work was to investigate possibilities for zeolite entrapment in calcium alginate gel forms by direct extrusion of alginate/zeolite dispersion into the calcium chloride solution. Additionally, the obtained alginate gel forms were tested as an adsorbent for cupper ions adsorption.

2. EXPERIMENTAL PART
Zeolite material obtained from sedimentary Zlatokop deposit in Vranjska Banja (Serbia) was used in this study. In order to improve the tuff exchange capacity, zeolite was pretreated according to previously described procedure [9,10]. The sample of zeolite (1 g) was pretreated with 100 cm3 of 2 mol dm-3 solution of NaCl (p.a., Aldrich). The suspension was magnetically stirred for 24 h at 25 C. Finally, the sample (Na-CLI) was washed with distilled water and dried in an oven at 105 C. Alginate solutions (1,5% w/w) were prepared by dissolving sodium alginate (medium viscosity, Sigma) in distillated water. Alginate solutions were mixed with zeolite (20% w/w) on a magnetic mixer. Extrusion of alginate/zeolite dispersions was realized through a blunt stainless steel needle (14 gauge) using a syringe pump (Razel, Scientific Instruments, Stamford, CT). The needle was immersed in a collecting solution (0,015 g/ml calcium chloride) (See Figure 1). The flow rate of alginate/zeolite dispersion was 70 ml/h. After gelling period (60 minutes), samples were washed with distillated water, placed for several minutes on a filter paper (for surface water removing) and dried for 24 hours at a room temperature. Dried sorbent was crushed prior batch sorption experiments.

Figure 1: Encapsulation process extrusion of alginate/zeolite through the needle immersed in a gelling solution The metal salt (CuSO 4 x 5H2O) was dissolved in distilled water and stock solution of 400 ml/L of copper was prepared. Sample of 0,5 g adsorbent was contacted with 50mL of metal solution in 200mL Erlenmeyer flasks under shaking at 125 rpm, at 25 C for 24h. The adsorbent was then removed from the solution and metal concentration was determined. Also, the adsorption capacity of free zeolite was investigated. Complexometric titration, with some modification was used for measuring of copper concentration [11]. A volume of 10 ml of the sample was pipetted into a titration flask. The system was diluted with distillated water to 50 ml. Nine drops of a 0,1% aqueous solution of murexide were added and copper was titrated with EDTA (0,01 mol/L). The results of copper adsorption are expressed as percent of adsorbed Cu2+.

3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

The shape of gel forms encapsulating zeolite in calcium alginate are shown in Figures 2 and 3. It was shown that is possible to produce encapsulated forms with a high zeolite concentration. After drying process samples remained compact (See Figure 3.). Dried forms are suitable for crushing and production of pellets like forms (Figure 4).

1149

Figure 2: The product of direct extrusion of mixture alginate/zeolite after gelling process; 20% w/w of zeolite

Figure 3: The product of direct extrusion of mixture alginate/zolite after drying at room temperature for 24h According to our results presented in Figure 4, it is possible to entrap zeolite in calcium alginate gel by direct extrusion (immersed needle) of zeolite/sodium alginate dispersion into the calcium-chloride solution bath (See Figure 1). In this way it is possible to achieve high encapsulant loads and process high-viscous solutions. In comparison, this is difficult to achieve by dropping technique, especially when a high viscous polymer (high concentrated) solution is extruded [7].

Figure 4: Dried and crushed forms of the Caalginate/zeolite sorbent

1150

Dried pellets forms were used as a sorbent material for copper adsorption from aqueous solutions. The adsorption of copper by the novel sorbent material was compared to adsorption capacity of powdered zeolite and the results are shown in Table 1. The percent of adsorbed copper was 42,91% for native zeolite and 42,61% for the entrapped zeolite. It can be concluded that adsorbent based on the entrapped zeolite into calcium alginate matrix has similar adsorption capacity as free zeolite. However, encapsulated forms of zeolite have few advantageous compared to conventional zeolite. The main benefit of immobilized zeolite forms is a superior ease of handling compared to powered zeolite, especially in bioreactor processing which require uniform mixing conditions. In addition, the entrapped zeolite is prone to sedimentation and therefore can be easily removed from a bioreactor system. Table 1: Adsorbents properties Adsorbent type Adsorbent description Adsorbed copper [%] Zeolite in a form of Zeolite 42,91 powder Ca-alginate forms loaded Ca-alginate entrapping 42,61 with zeolite 20% w/w of zeolite Natural and activated (modified) zeolites have been frequently investigated for different metal ions adsorption processes. According to the literature, modification of natural zeolite can provide better adsorption characteristics [12]. The encapsulation of zeolite into polymer matrix is another approach to achieve improved adsorption properties [13]. This approach combines positive characteristics of both, zeolite and polymer in order to provide good adsorption characteristics and superior handling.

4. CONCLUSION
In this study alginate based particles loaded with zeolite were used as an adsorbent for copper removal from aqueous solutions. Particles were prepared successfully via direct extrusion of alginate/zeolite into the gelling solution. The study of adsorption capacity showed that the particles with zeolite showed satisfactory adsorption characteristics. Further adjustment and optimization of the system should be the next step in the development of the batch process for removal of metal ions. REFERENCES [1] Donati, I. & Paoletti, S.: Material properties of alginates. In: Alginates: biology and applications, Edited by H.A.B. Rehm, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, (2009), pp. 1-55. ISBN 978-3-540-92678-8. [2] Zuidam, J. N. & Heinrich, E.: Encapsulation of Aroma. In: Encapsulation technologies for active food ingredients and food processing, Edited by Zuidam, J.N. & Nedovic, A.V., Springer-Verlag, New York, (2009), pp. 127-160. ISBN 978-1-4419-1007-3. [3] Manojlovic, V.; Rajic, N.; Djonlagic, J.; Obradovic, B.; Nedovic, V. & Bugarski, B.: Application of electrostatic extrusion flavour encapsulation and controlled release. Sensors, Vol. 8 (2008), pp. 14881496. ISSN 1424-8220. [4] Nedovi, V. A.; Obradovi, B.; Leskoek-ukalovi, I.; Trifunovi, O.; Pei, R. & Bugarski, B.: Electrostatic generation of alginate microbeads loaded with brewing yeast. Process Biochemistry, Vol. 37, No. 1 (2001), pp. 1722. ISSN 1359-5113. [5] Abdel Hameed, M. S.: Continuous removal and recovery of lead by alginate beads, free and alginateimmobilized Chlorella vulgaris. African Journal of Biotechnology, Vol. 5, No.19 (2006), pp. 1819-1823. ISSN 1684-5315. [6] Papageorgiou, K. S.; Katsaros, K. F.; Kouvelos, P. E.; Nolan, W. J.; Le Deit, H. & Kanellopoulos, K. N.: Heavy metal sorption by calcium alginate beads from Laminaria digitata, Journal of Hazardous Materials ,Vol. 137 (2006), pp. 17651772. ISSN 0304-3894. [7] Prsse, U.; Bilancetti, L.; Buko, M.; Bugarski, B.; Bukowski, J.; Gemeiner, P.;Lewiska, D.; Manojlovic, V.; Massart, B.; Nastruzzi, C.; Nedovic, V.; Poncelet, D.; Siebenhaar, S.; Tobler, L.; Tosi, A.; Vikartovsk, A. &. Vorlop, K.D.: Chemical Papers, Vol. 62, No. 4 (2008), pp. 364374. ISSN 0366-6352. [8] Levic, S.; Manojlovic, V.; Raji, N.; Nedovi, V. & Bugarski, B.: Alginate carriers for aromatic compounds. In: Book of Full Papers of the 5th Central European Congress on Food, Bratislava, Slovakia, 19-22. May 2010. pp. 618-622. ISBN 978-80-89088-89.

1151

[9] Cerjan Stefanovi, .; Zabukovec Logar, N.; Margeta, K.; Novak Tuar, N.; Aron, I.; Maver, K.; Kova, J. & Kaui, V.: Structural investigation of Zn2+ sorption on clinoptilolite tuff from the Vranjska Banja deposit in Serbia. Microporous and Mesoporous Materrials, Vol.105 (2007), pp. 251-259. ISSN 13871811. [10] Godelitsas, A. & Armbruster, T.: HEU-type zeolites modified by transition elements and lead. Microporous and Mesoporous Materrials, Vol. 61 (2003), pp. 3-24. ISSN 1387-1811. [11] Mestek, O.; Suchnek, M. & Hrub, V.: Preparation and testing of standard solutions of cadmium, copper and lead. Accreditation and Quality Assurance, Vol. 4, (1999), pp. 307312. ISSN 0949-1775. [12] Oliveira, R. C. & Rubio, J.: Adsorption of ions onto treated natural zeolite. Materials Research, Vol.10, No.4 (2007), pp. 407-412. ISSN 1516-1439. [13] Dinu, V. M. & Dragan, S. E.: Evaluation of Cu2+, Co2+ and Ni2+ ions removal from aqueous solution using a novel chitosan/clinoptilolite composite: Kinetics and isotherms. Chemical Engineering Journal, Vol. 160, No. 1 (2010), pp. 157-163.ISSN1385-8947.

1152

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

COPPER ADSORPTION BY ALGINAT AND ALGINAT/ZEOLITE BEADS

Jelena Milenkovi1, Steva Levi2, Verica Manojlovi1, Nevenka Raji1, Mina Jovanovi1, Branko Bugarski1, Viktor Nedovi2
1

Faculty of Technology and Metallurgy, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: vmanojlovic@tmf.bg.ac.rs 2 Faculty of Agriculture, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA, e-mail: slevic@agrif.bg.ac.rs

Summary: This paper concerns copper adsorption by chemical adsorbents in a form of calcium alginate beads and calcium alginate beads loaded with 3% of zeolite. The preparations of beads were realized by dripping technique, using calcium chloride as gelling agent. The addition of zeolite improved adsorption capacity of calcium alginate bead. Also, the increase of the initial copper concentration showed influence on sorption capacity of beads. Keywords: adsorption, copper, kinetics, calcium alginate.

1. INTRODUCTION
Heavy metals pollution has become a serious problem in many countries. The main sources of heavy metals are wastewaters from industrial processes such as plastics manufacturing, mining and metallurgical processes. Numerous procedures and methods have been developed for heavy metals removal from wastewaters. However, many of these methods produce large quantity of waste products that require disposal. In the recent years, biosorption has been extensively studied for heavy metals removal. Bisorption of heavy metals can be defined as removal of metals from solutions by biological materials, such as microorganisms, natural polymers, waste biomass, and agricultural wastes [1]. Alginate is water-soluble linear polysaccharide extracted from brown algal. In those algal species, alginate in dry weight can be represented in significant percent 10-40%. The chemical structure of alginate is composed of alternating blocks of 1-4 linked -L-guluronic and -D-mannuronic acid fragments. Chemical composition of alginate is strong connected with algal species used for alginate extraction, especially mannuronic/guluronic ratio. The capability of this polysaccharide to form stable biodegradable gels in the presence of divalent cations has been known and studied extensively. The beads are the most commonly used form of alginate gel [2]. Alginate has been studied extensively for removal of heavy metals from wastewater. Also, alginate has been combined with other polymer materials, for example with polyvinyl alcohol in order to improve adsorption characteristics [1,3]. In order to improve adsorption characteristics of alginate beads, microorganisms (algae, bacteria, and yeasts) as well as inorganic compounds have been used as core material. Additionally, alginate has been used as wall material for immobilization of different [1, 4-6] Zeolites are naturally occurring hydrated aluminosilicate minerals, consisted of three-dimensional frameworks of SiO4 and AlO4 tetrahedra. Zeolites have a negative charge, and it is balanced by the exchangeable cation like a sodium, potassium, or calcium. This is significant properties of zeolite, because these cations are exchangeable with lead, cadmium, zinc, and manganese [7]. In recent years, zeolites have been studied as adsorption material for metal removal [8] Also, the natural zeolites can be modified in order to improve adsorption capacity [9,10]. Immobilization combined with different adsorbents (inorganic and biological) has the potential to provide a simple technology to remove and recover heavy metals from wastewater, and is suitable for reuse [4,6].

1153

The aim of this work is to study the copper adsorption capacity of alginate beads loaded with zeolite, in the form of wet calcium beads prepared via the dripping technique. The uptake of Cu2+ ions from aqueous solutions and adsorption kinetics were studied using batch experiments.

2. EXPERIMENTAL PART
Zeolite material obtained from sedimentary Zlatokop deposit in Vranjska Banja (Serbia) was used in the experiments. The particle size of the used samples was in the range 0,063-0,1 mm. The sample (1 g) was pretreated with 100 cm3 of 2 mol dm-3 solution of NaCl in order to improve the tuff exchange capacity. The suspension was magnetically stirred for 24 h at 25 C. The sample (Na-CLI) was then washed by distilled water and dried in the oven at 105 C [9,10]. Dripping technique was used for preparation of Ca-alginate and Ca-alginate/zeolite beads. Dispersion of zeolite in alginate solution was prepared by mixing of alginate solution (1,5 %w/w, medium viscosity, supplied from Sigma) and modified zeolite in weight ration 97:3 on a magnetic mixer. Ca-alginate and Ca-alginate/zeolite beads were prepared by extrusion of alginate solution (1,5% w/w) and alginate/zeolite dispersion through a stainless steel needle (16 gauge) using a syringe pump (Razel, Scientific Instruments, Stamford, CT). The distance between needle and collecting solution (0,015 g/ml calcium chloride) was 2,5 cm, while the flow rate of polymer solution was 70 ml/h. The beads were kept in CaCl2 solution for 45 min to complete gel forming; then, they were washed and stored in deionized water at 4C. Size, shape as well as density of beads were determined. Dimensions and shape of beads were evaluated by light microscope DMLS (Leica), camera DC 300(Leica), with software IM 1000 (Leica) for measuring, while density was calculated based on measuring of the samples weight and volume. The metal salt (CuSO4 x 5H2O) was dissolved in distilled water and stock solutions of two different concentrations of copper (100 and 200mg/L) were prepared. Samples of ~1.0 g wet alginate beads were contacted with 100 mL of metal solution in 200mL Erlenmeyer flask under shaking at 125 rpm, at 25 C. Samples were exposed to metal solutions for different contact time intervals (0, 0.3, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 and 24 hours). The beads were then removed from the solution and the concentration of copper was determined. Complexometric titration, with some modifications was used for detection of copper [11]. Volumes of 25 ml and 10 ml were taken from samples with the initial copper concentration of 100 and 200ml/L, respectively. They were pipetted into a titration flask. The system was diluted with distillated water to 50 ml. Nine drops of a 0,1% aqueous solution of murexide were added and copper was titrated with EDTA (0,01 mol/L). The kinetics of copper adsorption was investigated and results are expressed as amount of adsorbed Cu2+ (per gram of adsorbent) versus contact time.

3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

The mean bead diameter and density of Ca-alginate blank and loaded beads are shown in Table 1. Diameters of beads were found to be 2,590,23mm for alginate beads and 2,700,29mm for alginate/zeolite beads. The addition of relatively low amount of zeolite did not cause significant changes on beads shape, but it caused relatively small changes in beads diameter and density. The pictures of Ca-alginate blank and loaded beads are shown in Figures 1 and 2. The results of this study showed potential of dripping extrusion technique for production of alginate beads loaded with zeolite. The obtained beads have spherical shape and uniform dimensions. Table 1: Alginate and alginate/zeolite beads properties Adsorbent type Beads diameter sd*[ mm] Beads density sd*[kg/m3] Blank Ca-alginate beads 2,59 0,23 1039 1,0 Ca-alginate beads loaded with 2,70 0,29 1058 1,1 zeolite * Standard deviation

1154

Figure 1: Blank Ca-alginate beads

Figure 2: Ca-alginate beads loaded with zeolite The effect of contact time on the copper ions retention capacity of blank Ca-alginate beads and Ca-alginate beads loaded with zeolite are shown in Figures 3 and 4, respectively. The contact time was varied in range 0-24h, while the initial copper concentration was fixed at 100 ml/L and 200ml/L. As it can be seen, the time required to achieve the equilibrium state was about 24h, in both cases. The initial concentration of copper and the addition of zeolite showed to have significant influence on adsorption kinetics. The addition of zeolite caused the increase in amount of adsorbed copper ions. Also, with the higher initial copper concentration in the solution, more copper was adsorbed by beads at the end of the process.

6 5

qt(mg/g adsorbent)

4 3
Blank Ca-alginate beads Ca-alginate beads loaded with zeolite

2 1 0 0 5 10 15 20 25

Contact time [h]

Figure 3: Metal ions retention on blank Ca-alginate beads and Ca-alginate beads loaded with zeolite; the initial metal concentration is 100mg/L. The sorbents based on zeolite and polymer materials have been intensively studied. According to our results and previous reports [6], the addition of zeolite in those systems provided better adsorption characteristics. In general, polymer characteristics as well as type of metals ions have major influence on adsorption mechanism and adsorption kinetics. Alginate has shown a highly selective binding ability and the affinity towards different divalent ions. The affinity was found to increase in the order Mg 2+ <<Mn 2+ <Ca 2+ <Sr 2+ <Ba 2+ <Cu 2+ <Pb 2+

1155

[2]. Also, the affinity was found to be strongly dependent on alginate composition. For alginate affinity towards ions, the amount of G-blocks was found to be an important characteristic [2]. It ha been frequently reported that the affinity increased with the amount of G-blocks present in the polymer. During gelation process, G blocks participate in the gel formation together with Ca 2+ ions. Therefore, G units are less available to the metal ions, while the M blocks can interact with free metal ions from the surrounding solution. It can be concluded that alginates with higher M/G ratio have stronger adsorption capacity compared to alginate gels with the lower one [12].

qt(mg/g adsorbent)

Blank Ca-alginate beads Ca-alginate beads loaded with zeolite

1

0 0 5 10 15 20 25

Contact time [h]

Figure 4: Metal ions retention on blank Ca-alginate beads and Ca-alginate beads loaded with zeolite; initial metal concentration of 200mg/L.

4. CONCLUSION
The dripping technique was used successfully for zeolite entrapment into Ca-alginate matrix. This technique provided production of uniform beads in terms of shape and dimensions. The alginate beads (with or without zeolite) can be used effectively for removing copper from aqueous solutions. The addition of 3% zeolite caused increase in amount of adsorbed copper.

REFERENCES
[1] Wang, J. & Chen, C.: Biosorption for heavy metals removal and their future. Biotechnology Advances, Vol. 27, No.2 (2009), pp. 195-226. ISSN 0734-9750. [2] Donati, I. & Paoletti, S.: Material properties of alginates. In: Alginates: biology and applications, Edited by H.A.B. Rehm, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, (2009), pp. 1-55. ISBN 978-3-540-92678-8. [3] Kuczajowska-Zadrona, M.; E. Klimiuk, E. & Wojnowska-Bary, I.:Cyclical Cadmium Adsorption and desorption by activated sludge immobilized on alginate carriers. Polish Journal of Environmental Studies, Vol. 13, No. 2 (2004), pp. 161-169. ISSN 1230-1485. [4] Abdel Hameed, M. S.: Continuous removal and recovery of lead by alginate beads, free and alginateimmobilized Chlorella vulgaris. African Journal of Biotechnology, Vol. 5, No.19 (2006), pp. 1819-1823. ISSN 1684-5315. [5] Wang, J. & Chen, C.: Biosorption of heavy metals by Saccharomyces cerevisiae: A review. Biotechnology Advances, Vol. 24 (2006), pp. 427451. ISSN 0734-9750. [6] Dinu, V. M. & Dragan, S. E.: Evaluation of Cu2+, Co2+ and Ni2+ ions removal from aqueous solution using a novel chitosan/clinoptilolite composite: Kinetics and isotherms. Chemical Engineering Journal, Vol. 160, No. 1 (2010), pp.157-163.ISSN1385-8947. [7] Erdem, E.; Karapinar, N. & Donat, R.: The removal of heavy metal cations by natural zeolites. Journal of Colloid and Interface Science, Vol. 280, (2004), pp. 309314. ISSN 0021-9797.

1156

[8] Lameiras,S.; Quintelas, C. & Tavares, T.: Biosorption of Cr (VI) using a bacterial biofilm supported on granular activated carbon and on zeolite. Bioresource Technology, Vol. 99 (2008), pp. 801806. ISSN 0960-8524. [9] Cerjan Stefanovi, .; Zabukovec Logar, N.; Margeta, K.; Novak Tuar, N.; Aron, I.; Maver, K.; Kova, J. & Kaui, V.: Structural investigation of Zn2+ sorption on clinoptilolite tuff from the Vranjska Banja deposit in Serbia. Microporous and Mesoporous Materrials, Vol.105 (2007), pp. 251-259. ISSN 13871811. [10] Godelitsas, A. & Armbruster, T.: HEU-type zeolites modified by transition elements and lead. Microporous and Mesoporous Materrials, Vol. 61 (2003), pp. 3-24. ISSN 1387-1811. [11] Mestek, O.; Suchnek, M. & Hrub, V.: Preparation and testing of standard solutions of cadmium, copper and lead. Accreditation and Quality Assurance, Vol. 4, (1999), pp. 307312. ISSN 0949-1775. [12] Papageorgiou, K. S.; Katsaros, K. F.; Kouvelos, P. E.; Nolan, W. J.; Le Deit, H. & Kanellopoulos, Heavy metal sorption by calcium alginate beads from Laminaria digitata, Journal of Hazardous Materials ,Vol. 137 (2006), pp. 17651772. ISSN 0304-3894.K. N.:

1157

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DETERMINATION OF THE WATER QUALITY IN ACCORD WITH REGULATION OF WATER CLASSIFICATION

Smiljka S. Milisavljevi1, Milutin M. Milosavljevi1, Aleksandar D. Marinkovi2, Danijela V. Brkovi2
1

Faculty of Technical sciences, Kosovska Mitrovica, Serbia, e-mail: vidahem@yahoo.com 2 Faculty of Technology and Metallurgy, University of Belgrade, Belgrade, SERBIA

Summary: In this work the results of the monitoring of water quality of river Ibar on the teritory northern Kosovo and Metohija are presented. Quantities of suspended matters, COD, BOD, ammonia, soluble oxygen, detergents, phenols and fats and oils are determined and processed. Water samples are collected on five locations during summer and winter seasons. Determined results are compared with maximum allowed concentration (MAC) given by legislation. Keywords: Ibar, organic pollutant, MAC, COD, BOD, phenol, soluble oxygen, ammonia, fats, oils.

1. INTRODUCTION
Northern Kosovo is one reachest area of water resource. According to the data of hydrometerological institute Belgrade river Ibar, which flows through area of northern Kosovo, has a 21300 m3/s. Waste water from the cities and other populated area, as well industries is collected through sewage system into Ibar without purification. Sewage system cover around 80% of populated area on northern Kosovo and Metohija, while that percent in rural and suburban significantly is lower and around 40% [1]. Quality of water is additionaly spoiled y river Sitnica which collect efluents from TE Kosovo. The main goal fo this work was to follow physico-chemical parameters of water of river Ibar on five determined points in summer and winter season. Eight parameters was followed: suspended mattera, biollogical oxygen demand BOD, chemical oxygen demand COD, phenols, soluble oxygen, ammonia, detergents and overal fats and oils. On the basis of obtained results of observed parameters on water quality with respect of the period of determination was discussed, as well water classification was performed.

2. EXPERIMENTAL PART
Water samples are collected at five points: Dudin kr (1), Zvean (2), Balaban (3), Leposavi (4) and Leak (5), during 2010. year in summer and winter seasons. Samples are analyzed applying standard methods and results are presented graphically.

3. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

Enviromental Quality Standards (EQS) in area of water quality are defined by directive 2000/60/EC Water Framework Directive based on ISO 14000 standard [2]. Directive gives a framework for community work and determine strategy against water pollution. Series of standard ISO 14000 includes set of EU regulations as well many international agreement. The current legislation in the field of water pollution in the Republic of Serbia is regulated by the Law on Environmental Protection "Official Gazette of Republic Serbia" No. 135/04 and 36/09. Legal acts that further

1158

define this issue as: Regulation on hygienic water, Regulation on hazardous substances that must not be entered into the water, the Regulation on Water Classification and Regulation of categorizing waterway. Results of suspended matter monitoring in winter and summer periods are presented in Figure 1.

Figure 1: The concentration of suspended matter in the water of the river Ibar in the winter and summer Based on the results shown in Figure 1 could be noticed that the highest concentration of suspended matter in the winter at point 4, and in the summer at point 5. The lowest values of concentration of suspended matter in summer and winter is at point 1, while at all measuring points above this value during the summer. Also, as in Figure 1 can see, the concentration of suspended matter were above MAC for IInd class (Official Gazzete of SRS br. 5/68), and below for IIIrd class of water [3,4]. On the Figure 2 is presented results of BOD determination in river Ibar in winter and summer periods.

Figure 2: BOD determination of water in river Ibar in the winter and summer As can be seen from the results shown in Figure 2, BOD values are higher in winter than in summer, and the highest value at the measurement point 2 in both studied periods. The lowest values are obtained at points 5. In Figure 3 is presented results of the COD determination in the winter and summer periods. Based on the results shown in Figure 3 could be noticed that the highest COD values obtained from the point 3 in both periods of testing, while the lower values during the summer period on all measuring points, except the point 1 where the values are identical. The parameters BOD and COD are also above the MAC of IInd class of water and tend to the value of IIIrd class of water or higher, as it was given by EU Directive 2000/60. Environment quality standard (EQS) given in annex II of EU Directive 2000/60 are experessed as overall concentration in water samples [5,6]. In Figure 4 is presented results of the phenol content in the water of the river Ibar in the summer and winter at measuring points.

1159

Figure 3: COD determination of water in river Ibar in the winter and summer
0.12 0.1 0.08 mg/L 0.06 0.04 0.02 0 1 2 3 4 5
measuring point
MAC of phenol for IV class of water Phenol concentration in Summer period Phenol concentration in winter period MAC of phenol for III class of water

Figure 4: Phenol content in water of river Ibar in summer and winter As can be seen, based on the results shown in Figure 4, can be seen a lower concentration of phenol in the summer, with highest value at point 1, which is 0.06 mg/l. The same point, in the winter period, is determined to be 0.04 mg/l of phenol, which is the highest with respect to other measuring points in that period. This can be explained by reduced work of TE Kosovo B, which is main source of phenol pollution. Values are ranged around a limit for IIIrd class of water, but far less than IVth class, according to EU Directive 2000/60 [7]. In Figure 5 is presented results of the dissolved oxygen determination in the winter and summer at tested measuring points.

Figure 5: Concentration of soluble oxygen in river Ibar in winter and summer periods

1160

Based on the results shown in Figure 5 could be noticed that the highest values of concentration of dissolved oxygen was obtained at the point 5 in the winter period, 7.80 mg / l, and lowest at the point 3 also in winter period, 6.80 mg/l. In the summer period, a certain value of the concentration of dissolved oxygen are lower than MAC for the second class of water, and the points on a concentration close to MAC for the second class of water 5.80 mg / l, while the lowest value determined at the point 3. In Figure 6 is presented results of the ammonia concentration in the winter and summer at tested measuring points.

Figure 6: Concentration of ammonia i summer and winter periods in water of river Ibar Based on the results shown in Figure 6, could be observed that the highest values of ammonia concentration at point 1 in the summer period is 0.60 mg / l, which exceeds the MAC value for III and IV class water, while this value in the winter is below of that limit. The lowest values is determined at point 5 in the winter and it is under MAC value for I and II class of water. Monitored parameter of ammonia comncentration is a indicator of the fecal pollution, and have the values that correspond to III class of water insummer period which is given by the regulations of hazardous substances in the waters (Ofificial Gazette of SRS, No. 31/82). Monitoring of detergent concentration, in summer and winter period, in the water of the river Ibar at different measuring points are shown in Figure 7.

Figure 7: Concentration of detergents in water of river Ibar in summer and winter periods Based on the results shown in Figure 7 it is evident that the highest values of detergent concentration is determined at point 1 in the summer, and lowest at point 5 in the winter. Also, it was observed higher values of detergent concentration in summer period, while at 3, 4 and 5 determined values is close to detection limit. Based on the presented experimental results can be concluded on the basis of concentration of detergent in the water of the river Ibar correspond to II class of water (Official Gazette SFRJ, No. 42/98). Results of the determination of fats and oils concentration in the summer and winter in the water of the river Ibar at different measuring points are shown in figure 8.

1161

Figure 8: Concentration o oils and greases in summer and winter periods of water river Ibar Based on the results shown in Figure 8 could be observed that the concentration of fats and oils is higher in summer period at all measuring points, but significantly lower in winter period. Lowest value was found at point 1 in the winter period, 0.09 mg/l. In the summer period all values of fats and oils concentration are very close to each other at measuring points. Fats and oils concentration exceeds MAC value for IInd class of water (Official Gazette SFRJ, No. 42/98).

4. CONCLUSION
Based on the results of physical and chemical characteristics of water of the river Ibar, it can be concluded that there is a difference in the quality of treated water to the measuring points in the observed time intervals. Identified the increased concentration of suspended matter, BPK5, HPK, phenol, ammonia and fats and oils. Water before entering the river Ibar in Kosovska Mitrovica, belongs to IInd category (Regulation on water classification and categorization of watersourses , Official Gazette of the Republic Srpska br. 3/97, 3/98 i 29/00), and on the outcome from Kosovska Mitrovica it belong IIIrd class of water.

REFERENCES
[1] OSCE study, The roots of powerty in Kosovo, 2005, Pritina. [2] Directive 2008/105/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 December 2008 on environmental quality standards in the field of water policy, amending and subsequently repealing Council Directives 80/68/EEC, 86/280/EEC. [3] Pravilnik o higijenskoj ispravnosti vode, Sl. List SRJ br. 42/98. [4] Pravilnik o opasnim materijama u vodama, Sl. Glasnik SR Srbije br. 31/82. [5] Uredba o klasifikaciji voda, Sl. Glasnik SR Srbije br. 5/68. [6] Uredba o kategorizaciji vodotoka, Sl. Glasnik SR Srbije br. 5/68. [7] Uredba o klasifikaciji voda i kategorizaciji vodotoka, Sl. glasnik Republike Srpske br. 3/97, 3/98 i 29/00.

1162

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19 September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SUBSTITUTION OF CONVENTIONAL FUELS FOR HEATING WITH GEOTHERMAL ENERGY CONTRIBUTION TO CLEANER PRODUCTION
Svetomir Milojevic1, Dragana Radosavljevic1,Vladimir Pavicevic2 Miljana Markovic1
1

Faculty of technical sciences of University in Pritina, Kosovska Mitrovica, SERBIA 2 Technological-metallurgical Faculty of University in Belgrade, SERBIA

Summary: This paper is dealing with the preliminary economic results of substitution of conventional fuels (fuel oil, lignite) with geothermal energy from spa springs, as well as the impact on decreasing of CO2 and SO2 emission to the atmosphere and combustion of solid residues deposition for the locations: Ribarska spa, Selters spa, Novopazarska spa, Spa Banjska, Bujanovacka spa and Mataruska spa. Key words: geothermal energy, fuel oil, lignite, cleaner production.

1. INTRODUCTION:
The accelerated technological development over the past decades has lead to the enormous energy consumption in the world. The increasing number of inhabitants, wish for welfare and the imposed consumer mentality on one hand and the limited natural resources on the other, have become the constant concern of the mankind. As the development but also the excessive consumption driver, man has, by its actions, more than ever before started to significantly influence on climate changes. It is reflected through the emission of CO2, SO2, NOx, freon and other gases and a very fine dust, which, on the planetary level is leading towards the unrecorded climate changes: The greenhouse effect, global warming, iceberg meltdown, frequent occurrence of large cyclonic disturbances with devastating hurricanes, floods, droughts and fires throughout the world. That is why the prompt action for the purpose of decrease or at least retention at the present level of emission of all polluting matters in the world is a necessity. During the last decade The United Nations have begun training the inhabitants throughout the world for the purpose of decreasing the consumption and rational use of energy and material resources. The program of the United Nations Industrial Development Organization (UNIDO) has been developed, named "the cleaner production. The purpose is developing technology without polluting substances and with minimum energy and raw materials consumption. Conditions have been created for increasing usage of renewable energy sources. Direct solar energy (direct because all of the sources are renewable, but also of the conventional energy are simply just different forms of appearance of solar energy (, biomasses, biogas, wind energy, ebb and flow, wave energy, minor water flows (mini hydroelectric power stations) and geothermal energy.

2. GEOTHERMAL ENERGY
The geothermal energy implies the heat the Earth disposes of in the layers beneath its surface. Geothermal energy appears as the result of the natural radioactive elements breakdown (uranium, thorium, etc.) in the Earths crust, crystallization and polymorphological processes happening in the Earth's crust, the frictions due to the effect of gravity forces of the Sun and the Moon, exothermic reactions and other thermal effects (from the volcano activity, tectonic movements, phase transitions, etc.). There are four forms of geothermal energy: hydrothermal energy- the hot water and steam energy

1163

geopressure energy- the salt water energy with dominant quantity of the dissolved methane under high pressure petrothermal energy or the energy of hot dry mineral rocks thermal energy of magma The geothermal energy sources can be divided into: Low-temperature sources (T<90C), moderate-temperature sources (T = 90-150C) and high-temperature sources (T >150C). In nature, the geothermal energy most frequently occurs in the form of volcanoes, springs of warm water and geysers. Since the ancient times, the hydrothermal energy has been used for heating up of the rooms. In the last years it is used for heating up of the inhabited locations by the heat pumps. The basic division of the facilities for thermal waters usage can be performed according to: Thermal water pressure at the exit from the drill, the outlet temperature, mean of geothermal water application (direct and indirect), the type of the installation system (opened and closed) and the content of harmful admixtures.

1) drill-hole, 2) accumulation tank, 3) torch, 4) degassing tank, 5) degassing container, 6) compensation vessel, 7) electromagnetic regulating valve , 8) centrifugal pump, 9) vacuum pump, 10) the heat user (heating appliances), 11) capacitative level meter, 12) flow meter and 13) air filter

Figure 1: Schematic diagram of the installation for direct application of thermal water bursting under sufficient pressure from the drilling hole

1) drill-hole, 2) system for thermal water degassing, 3) pump and 4) heat exchanger

Figure 2: Schematic diagram of the installation for indirect application of thermal water (Source: D. Milosavljevic, 2009.) In contrast to the installation for direct application of thermal water, at the installation for indirect application of thermal water, the thermal water heat is transmitted to the secondary fluid (mainly water) in the heat exchanger. From the exchanger of heat, the heated, secondary water is lead towards the heaters, whereas the cooled thermal

1164

water is lead into the water stream or it is returned through the drilling hole into the subsoil layers till the bearings from which it is drawn out. The cooled secondary water from the heaters is brought back into the heat exchanger wherein it is reheated. Serbia is well-known as a region rich with thermal waters. The density of geothermal heat flow is the main parameter based on which the geothermal potential of some area is estimated. It represents the quantity of geothermal heat, which in the unit of time, through the unit surface, is coming from the Earth interior to its surface. The average value of density of geothermal heat flow for the continental part of Europe amounts to about 60 mW/m2. On the largest part of territory of Serbia the geothermal heat flow density amounts between 80-110 mW/m2. In the Pannonia basin, the central part of the southern Serbia and in the central Serbia the geothermal heat flow density amounts over 100 mW/m2.

Figure 3: Total power of geothermal sources in Serbia The usage of geothermal energy sources is a chance for significant promotion of the energetic efficacy in Serbia. The application of low-temperature geothermal waters (which are of the greatest number in Serbia) is especially interesting in agriculture, but also for heating of settlements and in industry. The substitution of conventional fuels with geothermal energy has a great techno-economic justification and an extraordinary environmental effect.

3. SUBSTITUTION OF FUEL OIL AND LIGNITE WITH GEOTHERMAL ENERGY

Regardless of the increasing usage of renewable sources, the greatest part of energy being used in the world is obtained by combustion. The process of fuel combustion is the basic source of poisonous matters emitted into the atmosphere, and thus the increase of energy consumption is followed by all the more expressive problems of protection of air from pollution. Besides the gaseous products of the combustion, the solid residues of the combustion process cannot be neglected either: ash, incompletely combusted coal and other impurities. These residues also appear as solid waste and as tiny particles of dust which in the atmosphere become the centers for condensation and generation of the aerosols, mostly of the very low pH value. These microscopic particles dispersed into gaseous phase, wind born, significantly expand the area of environment pollution. Besides the great toxicity, the combustion products alter the atmosphere characteristics also in the view of absorption and dissipation of sunlight and thus additionally influence on climate changes. As most frequently used conventional fuels, we have singled out the fuel oil and the lignite coal. The fuel oil characteristics: density ---------------------- 960 kg/m3 - viscosity -------------------- 35 cSt (mm2/s) at 100 oC - the sulphur content -------- 2 to 3 % mass (the average is about 2,5% mas) - the ash content ------------- 0,05 % mas

1165

- carbon residue ------------- 10,5% mas, - the lower heat value ---- -- about 41 MJ/kg - the ignition point ---------- over 80 oC (Source: Refinery Pancevo) The lignite characteristics: - the lignites are characterized by the preserved ligneous (woody) structure - are of pale brown or dirty yellow colour - the carbon content --------- 60 to 65 %, exceptionally to 70 % - the sulphur content ------ 1 to 5 % - heating value --------------- from 6 to 12,5 MJ/kg (Source: Kosovo diggings) The calculation of the required quantity of conventional fuels (fuel oil, lignite) for provision of available energy has been performed for the period of heating season of six months. The available heat flow for each locality and on the basis of the lower heating power of the fuel oil of 41MJ/kg and the medium low heating power of the lignite of 9,25 MJ/kg and the calculation of the substitution variant of these conventional fuels with geothermal energy has been done. By setting up of the energetic balances the obtained results are shown in Tables 1 and 2. Table 1: The review of available energy for heating in warm thermal springs of Serbia for the period of the annual heating season of 6 months compared to the fuel oil temperature polluting matters temperature available after fuel oil flow at the source residue location energy CO2 SO2 the usage of combustion ( t) of the source (kg s ) o (KJ ) (t ) (t ) C o (t ) (C )

( )
44 53 52 42 43 43

Ribarska spa Selters spa Novopazarska spa Spa Banjska Bujanovacka spa Mataruska spa Total

37 19 10 11 7 47 131

20 20 20 20 20 20 20

5,78.1010 4,08.1010 3,39.1010 1,58.1010 1,05.1010 7,04.1010 2,29.1011

1410,0 995,3 827,0 385,4 256,1 1717,4 5591,2

3470 2450 2035 949 630 4226 13760

70,53 49,8 41,4 19,3 12,82 85,91 279,76

148,04 104,52 86,83 40,47 26,9 180,3 578,07

45,3

Table 2: The review of available energy for heating in warm thermal springs of Serbia for the period of the annual heating season of 6 months compared to the lignite temperature polluting matters temperature available after lignite flow at the source residue location energy CO2 SO2 the usage of combustion ( ) t of the source (kg s ) o (t ) (KJ ) (t ) C o (t ) (C )

( )
44 53 52 42 43 43

Ribarska spa Selters spa Novopazarska spa Spa Banjska Bujanovacka spa Mataruska spa Total

37 19 10 11 7 47 131

20 20 20 20 20 20 20

5,78.1010 4,08.1010 3,39.1010 1,58.1010 1,05.1010 7,04.1010 2,29.1011

6249,2 4411,2 3665,2 1708,3 1135,2 7611,4 24780,6

13078 9233 7671 3576 2376 15930 51864

37,54 26,51 22,02 10,27 6,82 45,73 148,89

937,35 661,77 549,82 256,29 170,27 1141,76 3717,26

45,3

(Source: Milojevi, Martinovi, 1996.)

1166

The stated results show that significant savings in energy consumption are possible, which for the outcome would have multiple positive effects: Cost-effectiveness, energy sources savings, energetic efficacy and drastic decrease of environmental pollution, especially of the air because there are no combustion products. Substitution of conventional fuels for heating with geothermal energy would decrease the emission of polluting matters at the annual level for significant amounts stated in the tables for fuel oil and lignite.

4. CONCLUSION
By lignite substitution (the price is of about 25 /t) the saving is achieved of about 620.000, and by fuel oil (the price is about 420 /t) the saving is 2.350.000 annually. The complete substitution of the conventional fuels with geothermal energy for these locations drastically decreases the emission of the combustion products into the atmosphere. The most significant ecological effect is in decreasing the emission of SO2, and decrease of the emission of CO2 is the contribution to the less influence on the negative climatic changes, namely our obligation according to Kyoto protocol. Also, the significance of decrease of solid waste, namely ashes and soot can neither be neglected. Extremely important is also the possibility of drastic decrease of emission of poisonous, carcinogenic organic polluting matters originating from incomplete and inappropriate combustion of the conventional fuels, having the priceless value viewed from the most important aspect and that is certainly the health protection of the citizens (especially endangered categories - pregnant women, children, the old, the sick, the allergic, etc.)

REFERENCES
[1] Nacionalni program zatite ivotne sredine, Vlada Republike Srbije, Beograd, 2010. [2] M. Komatina., Mineral, thermal and thermomineral waters of Kraljevo Region, Ecologica, Special edition, 3, (1996), 50-56. [3] L. Jovanovi, Using potentiolity of mineral and thermal water in Serbia, Ecologica, 11 (2004), 41, 22-24 [4] S. Joksimovi Tjapkin, Procesi sagorevanja, Tehnoloko-metalurki fakultet, Univerzitet u Beogradu, Beograd, 1987., 47-56., 361-369. [5] Elaborat, Banja Banjska (Korienje geotermalnih voda) [6] S. Milojevi, D. Radosavljevi, S. Milisavljevi, Zamena konvencionalnog goriva sa geotermalnom energijom uticaj na ivotnu sredinu, I okrugli sto sa meunarodnim ueem Zatita ivotne sredine u industrijskim podrujima, Kosovska Mitrovica, 2009., 96-99. [7] D. Milosavljevi, diplomski rad Obnovljivi izvori energije, Prirodno-matematiki fakultet Univerziteta u Niu, Ni, 2009.

1167

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

MODELLING AND TESTING OF RESISTANCE PETALOID BOTTOM OF PET BOTTLES FOR CARBONATED DRINKS
Rumen Mitev1, Wilhelm Hadjiiski2, Stefan Stefanov2, Chavdar Sazdov2
2

Technical University, Sofia, BULGARIA University of food technologies, Plovdiv, BULGARIA, e-mail: stvstefanov@yahoo.com

Summary: The paper examined the process of modeling petaloid bottoms of PET bottles for carbonated beverages. On the basis of simulated loads is studied process of the bottom stability loss and based on that the whole bottle stability loss. As a criteria for the stability of the modified PET bottle was studied the displacement of the bottom surface. During the modeling and analysis were used graphics system for 3D modeling SolidWorks and the module for simulation of loads and analysis based on finite element method SolidWorks Simulation. Keywords: PET Bottles, modeling, simulation, stability, petaloid bottom, FEM .

1. INTRODUCTION
The loss of stability of PET bottles is due to external and internal factors. The external loads have different nature (mechanical - static and dynamic and thermal) based on which bottles lose stability and change their position. The internal factors are associated with various deformations that occur during storage, transport and handling, based on which the separate elements of the bottles change its shape. Internal factors are caused by residual stresses in the material and the ability of PET to crawl in a long period of time. Essential for the PET bottle stability are the shape and dimensional stability at the bottom. The huge impact on them causes fluids that are under pressure in the bottles such as beer and carbonated drinks. As a result of internal pressure, thermal loads, causing changes in terms of the form of linear and angular deformations, natural crawl of the material in its aging and loading, the elements from the bottom begin to change some of their dimensions and mutual position. Based on that the original condition of the bottom is changing, this in most cases causes a loss of stability. In this context, during modeling and manufacturing process of bottles bottoms for beer and carbonated drinks are used some typical surfaces, such as conical or spherical surface or wide spread petaloid surfaces. Typical for them is that they are formed by separate smaller surfaces which connecting their passes from one to another through transitions, whose geometric dimensions significantly affect the behavior of the bottom during the bottle usage. The deformations in PET bottles appear on the stage of their production. The typical for modern production concept "just in time" implies immediately after blowing the bottle to be filled with the product. Thus saves the expenses for machinery for unloading, sorting, storage, storage area and additional transport to the filing line of already stored bottles. Following the failure of the material to be calm and PET bottle to stabilize its dimensions, which usually takes about 72 hours, the processes of change taking place together with the product inside. Effect on dimensional stability in many cases has the need to fast decrease of temperature of the bottom, which accumulate enough heat as it is one of the thickest parts of the bottle and has the greatest material concentration. The last two findings show that the bottom is one element of the bottle, that has a resources to reduce overall weight. The distribution of the material at the bottom is a stochastic magnitude with high dispersion, which does not allow the high accuracy prediction of the the thickness of any one of many areas. The availability of the software used in the simulation of the blowing processes, makes it possible to obtain satisfactory results for the practice. Assuming that during blowing process the bottle wall thickness in any area is constant, then at a certain value the bottom dimensions stability could be examined.

1168

Petaloid bottom type is optimal in terms of stability and complexity of modeling and further mold production. However, during the filling and exploitation the deformation occurs at the bottom, which might be more than acceptable and to make the further use of the package impossible. In this connection it is necessary research to reduce this type of rejects. The factors affecting the deformations in the finished PET bottles could be classified in three main groups: Factors associated with characteristics of the material; Factors associated with technological regimes in the manufacture of preforms and bottles; Factors associated with the usage of the bottle. To the factors associated to characteristics of the material relates: - chemical composition of the used plastics; - structure of the polymer; - composition and type of the molecule; To the factors associated with technological regimes in the production relates: - the preform production regimes; - the bottle blowing regimes; - the achieved stage in the material orientation during the blowing of the bottle; - the achieved material distribution on the preform axis; - combinations of geometric elements defining the volumetric model of the bottle bottom. The factors, related to PET bottles exploitation are: - the temperatures of the environment and the product in the package during filling and storage; - the mechanical loads over PET bottle during handling, transport and storage.

2. TECHNICAL MODELING
This article studies the influence of geometric elements of the petaloid bottom over PET bottle stability, in case of internal pressure of 0,3 Mpa. As a criteria for the bottle stability assessment is used the displacement on the axis Y of points that forms bottom surface. The defined configurations of petaloid bottom hollows are observed. The influence of the hollow width, radial width and height of the feet is studied in [3]. Configuration defining the petaloid bottom hollows can be constructed by the function "Swept Cutting" - dragging a section on the guiding line. Company GloCon-GmbH Germany advised the guiding line to be an ellipse, where its radius ratio is equal to two. In US Patent 007083059B1 [5] the curve consists of two smaller radius and one with a value (0.8 1.2) from the bottle radius /fig.3/. It is evident from the experiments that the number of parameters affecting the surface displacement under certain loads is large. 2.1. PET bottle petaloid bottom model construction In [2] is measured wall thickness of the finished bottle. The distribution and in some key areas of the bottle is as follows: Upper arm 0.434 mm Place of label 0.330 mm Bottom 0.305 mm Place of infusion 2.892 mm. For the construction of the bottle model to study the influence of some key elements from the bottom and the deformations was used graphical environment of SolidWorks, Version 2010. In the model constructing was used also the following geometric data: the maximal diameter of the bottom - 85.0 mm. Configuration that defines the hollows of the petaloid bottom was built by the function "Swept Cutting", as the guiding line is an ellipse with its center lying on the bottle axis and a small radius of 21.25 mm (fig. 1).

Figure 1 Modeled bottle with variable wall thickness

1169

The study was conducted by the function "Design Study" on the module "Simulation". In it for the parameters varying in certain range, automatically the bottle shape is modeled and using the finite element method is calculated the defined criteria for optimality.

Figure 2 Configuration of guiding line bottom

Figure. 3 Configuaration of the section forming the

3. ANALYSIS OF THE RESULTS

Variables are modified in the range as follows: =[35, 50, 65] [mm]; R =[3, 4.25, 5.5] [mm]; b =[40, 50, 60] []. 33=27 /=3x3x3/ number of calculations in the system SolidWorks2010 - "Design Study" were conducted. In fig. 4 is presented the result for the dependence of the deformation from the two factors A and R.

Figure 4: Bottom displacement dependence from the variables A and R Regression analysis was conducted to determine the analytical relationship between the three investigated factors on the scale of the deformation/displacement. Table 1 presents the achieved correlation coefficients. The proposed statistical model has a correlation coefficient of 77.8%, which indicates a good match. Verification of the significance of the regression model coefficients showed that most significantly affects the second factor R, followed by a third factor b and the first A. It was detected marginally influences mixed assessment of the first and second factor AR when confidence probability 95%.

1170

Table 1. Correlation coefficients parameter value/estimate constant -36.8752 A 0,383895 R 11,4019 b 0,691722 A2 - 0,00199995 R2 - 0,908542 b2 - 0,00218426 AR 0,00427604 Rb - 0,0859027 Ab - 0,00364662 To determine the optimal mix of observed factors was used a method proposed by Dr. Taguchi [4]. The method is experimental-statistical and offers a systematic approach for design and analysis of the experiments. In that case the concept function of losses is applied, by which the quality parameters of the object are measured and quantitative assess of the ratio signal-noise (S/N) is given. In the criterion "less - better" assessment is calculated by formula (1)
n S / N = 10 log1 / n y 2 (i) i =1

(1)

y (i ) is measured value, n is number of tests for every combination of factors. Optimal level is the level with maximal ratio S / N .
where The purpose of this article is modeling of petaloid bottom for PET bottle with capacity 1L. The tasks to be solved are: 1. Modeling of bottle in an environment of SolidWorks; 2. Determination of the factors influencing the design of the bottom manageable and interfering; 3. Setting criterias for optimality - for a quantitative assessment of the current condition of the object in order to realize the optimization process; 4. Selecting an orthogonal grid for conducting experiments using the method of Dr. Taguchi and distribution of the factors in the hotspots; 5. Conducting the numerical experiments; 6. Determination of the ratio signal-noise, for each test and the optimum combination of the factors; 7. The factor significance determined by ANOVA test. The wall thickness of the finished bottle was chosen as an interfering factor. Levels for each factor are A = [35,50,65] [mm]; R = [3, 4.25,5.5] [mm]; b = [40,50,60] [degrees]. For wall thickness are adopted two values [0.29, 0.32] [mm]. Therefore, the degrees of freedom for each factor is 2 and in a total 6. As a criteria for optimality (Sensors=Displacement) is used displacement on the Y axis the minimal value of the maximal displacement in the bottom area. A standard network with size 1 mm and tolerance 0.2 mm is adopted, the load is 0,3 MPa, the number of elements is 517,295. The bottle is fixed for the support ring. Based on the methodology described in [4] for three factors with three levels and an interfering factor with two levels was chosen orthogonal network L9, which is 8>6 degrees of freedom and can be used for these parameters. Combinations of the parameters are presented in (Table 2). Table 2. Combination of the parameters to conduct the experiment R b A 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 3 4 2 1 3 5 2 2 1 6 2 3 2 7 3 1 2 8 3 2 3 9 3 3 1

1171

Achieved results are presented in Table 3. There are calculated the ratios S/N for every row from the Table 1. Table 3. Results from defining of ratio S/N S/N R b A y .10 1 [mm] [degrees] [mm] [db] [mm] 3 40 35 6.05812 -3.619 3 50 50 5.57855 -3.437 3 60 65 5.47952 -3.418 4.25 40 65 5.59783 -3.469 4.25 50 35 5.87287 -3.482 4.25 60 50 5.32663 -3.361 5.5 40 50 5.46663 -3.418 5.5 50 65 5.40002 -3.407 5.5 60 35 5.2588 -3.377

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

For each level of the factors is determined the average value of ratio S/N. The results are presented in table 4. level 1 2 3 Table 4 R -3.502726 -3.442532 -3.385826 b -3.462932 -3.427972 -3.440180 A -3.493279 -3.406079 -3.431726

The amendments of each parameter are graphically presented in fig. 5.

Figure 5: Graph of variation for each parameter The analysis of the results from the experimental research conducted via simulations in an environment of Cosmos Simulation shows that the optimal value of displacements are obtained in combination R3b2A2. To determine the factor of significance is used ANOVAN test. For this purpose, the groups are set from Table 1. For average value of measured magnitude using the software MatLab was calculated the function (2) pym = anovan(ym, {g1 g2 g3}); g1 = [1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3]; g2 = [1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3]; g3 = [1 2 3 3 1 2 2 3 1];

(2)

The result of the calculation is presented in Table. 5, which presents the achieved values via MatLab in a table form.

1172

Table 5: Analysis of variance

The determination of significance factor is made by using F-test. It searches for the maximum value of the correlation coefficient. It was found that this is a factor of 2, which in fact is the radius of the intersection of depression (R in fig. 3). The influence of the other two parameters is comparable. The maximum value of F-test, determining the significance factor is for a factor two - the radius of the intersection of depression. The influence of the other two parameters is comparable.

4. CONCLUSION
In this article is reviewed the process of modeling and testing the resistance of internal pressure of the petaloid bottom of PET bottles for carbonated drinks and beer. For the purpose of the research are selected three adjustable parameters, determining the configuration of the bottom hollows, where is possible in the final modeling process the specific values to be assigned. As a interfering factor is selected the wall thickness of PET bottle. It was developed a statistical model that presents the dependence of deformation from the considered factors. It is assessed the significant impact factors in a full factorial experiment type 33. By the method of Dr. Taguchi was designed and conducted experiment on nine attempts for each wall thickness. In FFE-type 33 the number of trials is 27 for each wall thickness. It was determined the optimal combination of the dimensions R3b2A2 and using ANOVA test the significancy factor - the radius of the intersection of the hollow.

REFERENCES
[1] Georgiev V. Et all. Optimizacionni metodi pri technologichna podgotovka na proizvodstvoto. Ex-Press, Gabrovo, 2009. [2] Stefanov. PET butilki vazmojnosti za namaljavane na tjahnata masa. Opakovki I pechat. N 4, 2008. [3] Bilal Demirel, Optimisation of petaloid base dimensions and process operating conditions to minimize environmetal stress cracking in injection stretch blow moulded PET bottles, dissertation for pHd Melbourne, Australia, 2008. [4] Ranjit Roy, A primer on the Taguchi metod, Van Reinhold, USA, 1990. [5] US Patent 007083059B1 Thermoplastic container with petaloid base, 01.08.2006.

1173

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

HIGH-FREQUENCY TRANSISTOR INVERTER FOR SOLDERING OF HARD-ALLOY PLATES

1

Nikolay Nenov 1, Petar Tomchev 2, Rayna Ivanova 3

Technical University of Gabrovo, Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: nenovtugabrovo@gmail.com 2 e-mail: tomchev@edasat.com, 3 e-mail: ivanova@tugab.bg

Summary: Hard-alloy circular saws are increasingly widely used and in some cases they are the only appropriate alternative. The main problem with their construction is the installation of the hard-alloy plates on the circular disk teeth. At this stage two ways of doing this are known mechanical attachment and soldering. The present paper discusses the method of soldering through induction heating using a transistor converter (inverter). Keywords: induction soldering, inductor, transistor, inverter.

1. INTRODUCTION
Mechanical attachment of the hard-alloy plate to the circular disk requires a rather complex structure of the tooth bed which can ensure the stable/sound attachment of the hard-alloy plate. Soldering requires a more complex technology associated with preheating between 650-800 depending on the type of solder used, besides in a very narrow area. This can be achieved by induction heating with a frequency range of hundreds of kilohertz and low-resistance inductors with small size (Fig.1).

Figure 1: Low-resistance inductor for induction soldering of hard-alloy plates Therefore, so far lamp generators have been mainly used for this purpose. Indisputable advantages of transistor inverters on the one hand and the continuous development and improvement of the element base for their realization (transistors, capacitors, ferrites, specialized management systems, etc.) on the other hand make necessary the development of new versions for different purposes.

1174

2. EXPOSITION
This paper presents a version of a transistor inverter designed for soldering of hard-alloy plates of circular saws. The characteristic features of the developed inverter are as follows: - Relatively high frequency - Relatively small consumption of power 3 kW - Low-resistance inductor with a small area of heating. The principal electric circuit of the inverter is shown in Fig.2

L 1 3 * 2 4 L r
Figure 2: Principal electric circuit of an inverter for soldering of hard-alloy plates The choice of operating frequency is between two conflicting requirements from a technological point of view it is better to work with a higher frequency, but at the same time the reliable operation of high efficiency transistors is more easily achieved at lower frequencies. After a thorough analysis frequency close to 250 kHz was chosen. For this still high for transistor inverters frequency most appropriate is the resonant inverter scheme. At power of 2.5 3 kW single-phase power supply appears to be appropriate, and after its rectification and filtration it gives about 300 V rectified voltage depending on the value of the filter capacitor. This relatively low supply DC voltage, the small power and the obligatory presence of a matching transformer conditioned by the low-resistance inductor requires in turn the circuit with a middle terminal of the transformer as the most effective solution for the particular application. A significant advantage of this circuit is the eliminated need for galvanic outcome of the management system, which greatly facilitates the drivers circuit at high frequencies. Another important advantage is also the good use of transistors in current (iD I0/2) as compared to the half-bridge circuits, which allows working with a smaller drifting current, and that means less input capacity CGS a parameter particularly important at high operating frequencies. The mode of operation of the resonant inverter with a middle terminal of the transformer is very well illustrated by the drain-source and gate-source voltages shown in Fig.3 and Fig.4.

BTp * 2 C 1

Figure 3: Gate-source voltage

Figure 4: Drain-source voltage

The figure shows that < 0.5 and the overlapping of the operation of the two transistors is not possible.

1175

It can be seen that the voltage UGS is a plateau 12.6 V which is absolutely enough to saturate the transistor. A higher voltage is not desirable because it would delay the shutting-off of the transistor and this would significantly increase the commutation losses at this frequency. On the other side, the UDS voltage shows that even with double U0 the maximum value does not exceed 520V, which is perfectly acceptable for the selected transistors. Figure 5 shows the complete match between the engaged state of the transistor and the presence of a gate pulse.

Figure 5: Drain-source voltage at unblocked transistor in the presence of gate pulse

3. CONCLUSION
The good sinewave form of the inductor voltage (Fig. 6) shows that the inductor operates at a frequency which is equal or very close to the resonant frequency of the load circle. As the circle is low-resistance (voltage effective value is 26V), the necessary power is guaranteed by the high current. The time necessary for soldering of a plate and depending on the diameter and thickness of the saw blade varies within 6 to 10 seconds.

Figure 6: Inductor voltage

REFERENCES
[1] Lappe, R., Conrad, H., Kronberg, M.: Leistungselektronik, VEB Verlang tehnik, Berlin, 1987. ISBN 3-34100308-8. [2] , ., , .: , . , 1988. ISBN 5-283-04409-2. [3] , ., , ., , .: , , 2002. ISBN 954-438-206-2. [4] ., ,: MOSFET IGBT , ., . 2003. ISBN 954-683-215-4.

1176

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

INDUCTION HEATING IN COOPERAGE

1

Nikolay Nenov 1, Petar Tomchev 2, Rayna Ivanova 3

Technical University of Gabrovo, Gabrovo, BULGARIA, e-mail: nenovtugabrovo@gmail.com 2 e-mail: tomchev@edasat.com, 3 e-mail: ivanova@tugab.bg

Summary: The application of induction heating in different production processes has been known for many years as well as the advantages and disadvantages of the method. However, on the background of the benefits of the method, its main weakness (the need for specialized professional equipment) appears to be a minor disadvantage. On this basis, there is an opportunity to look for newer and more original solutions as well as to search for new possibilities for application of induction heating. Keywords: cooperage, inductor, induction heating, converter.

1. INTRODUCTION
The application of induction heating in various production processes has been well-known for a long time. The advantages and disadvantages of this method are also known and they can be summarized as follows: a/ Advantages: - quick heating - heating in specific zones - inexpensiveness - ecological friendliness b/ Disadvantages: - need of specialized equipment and the related initial expenses. Against the backdrop of the advantages, however, this is only a minor disadvantage, which warrants the search for newer and more original schematic designs and technological solutions, as well as for new areas of application. In this regard, a non-traditional area of application of induction heating is the manufacturing of wooden containers known also as cooperage (Fig.1).

Figure 1: General form of a barrel The cooperage manufacturing process passes through several specific stages, one of the most important of which is the assembling of the staves (Fig.2).

1177

Figure 2: Assembling of the staves by a screw mechanism 1 stave 2 hoop 3 screw mechanism for bending of staves

2. EXPOSITION
As a rule, high or high operating frequency is used in induction heating, but with large parts or specific inductors mains power supply can also be used as a power source. This significantly reduces the cost of equipment and dramatically increases its reliability. Achieving the necessary technological effect is guaranteed by the properties of the low-carbon steel used and particularly by its linear expansion when heated. It is known that steel increases its volume when heated. In a tape body (the hoop) the change of its length when heated is considerably larger than the change of its transverse size. If the length of a tape body is l0 at an ambient temperature of t0, its length will be l1 after heating to t1. This extension can be determined by the formula:

= l0 (t1 - t0)

(1)

where: - coefficient of linear expansion - linear change The average value of for low-carbon steel is 11.9.10-6 -1. For example, if the length of the hoop is 1.8m, the ambient temperature - 22 and the maximum temperature of heating - 250, the change of the length will be: = 1.8.11.9.10-6(250 22) = 4.88.10-3m. This linear change is absolutely enough to achieve the necessary technological effect (Fig.3) Therefore, there is no need to heat the hoop to a higher temperature.

57,32

58,92
Figure 3: Real change of the diameter of a hoop, which is 1,8 in length at of heating 250 The relatively low temperature of heating (200 - 300 depending on the length of the hoop) facilitates considerably the use of an inductor with magnetic concentrator. This in turn increases the magnetic flux density at low operating frequencies in this case 50Hz. Thus, using mains power supply as a source, highly efficient induction heating (for the specific temperature range) can be achieved by means of low cost equipment with very high reliability. A prototype of such a device is shown in Fig.4.

1178

2 4 1

Figure 4: Inductor with frequency concentrator 50 Hz Where: 1 fixing sleeve 2 magnetic concentrator 3 coil 4 thermal insulation 5 - hoop The magnetic concentrator consists of packages of electrical steel (Fig.5) welded to the fixing sleeve.

Figure 5: Package of silicon steel The coil is wound in the window of the magnetic circuit. The power of the induction heater is determined by the mass of the heated part of the hoop and the set time. P= C.G(t1- t0)C/ T, W where: specific heat capacity of steel, J/kg.deg mass G mass, kg T time of heating, h The full power of the inductor is given by the formula: S = P/cos (3) (2)

For inductors with a magnetic circuit cos is relatively high (in this case it is approximately 0.5). The intersection of the magnetic circuit is selected from a table according to the power calculated by formula 3. The number of turns of the coil is given by the formula: W = U/4.44.B.f.S,W (4)

1179

where: U supply voltage( 230V,50Hz),V B magnetic induction, 1.5 f frequency ( 50Hz) S intersection of the magnetic circuit As with all inductors, the impedance has an active-inductive nature. The simplified electric circuit is shown in Fig. 6.

Ln rn
Figure 6: Principal electric circuit In order to improve the efficiency of the electricity used, classic capacitance compensation by parallel switched capacitor has been used (Fig.6). The mechanism of compensation and the calculation of can be illustrated by the vector diagram in Fig.7.

S
P

Figure 7: Vector diagram of the powers where: Q = S.sin, VA For the full compensation it is necessary to have QL = QC= U2.C.f, whence it follows that the value of C can be calculated by the formula C= S.sin/U2.f (5)

3. CONCLUSION
The developed induction heater working with an industrial frequency is low cost, has high reliability and has proven the necessary for this type of technology functional features. The developed model of induction heater has proven in practice the technological advantages of the method of treatment of hoops before forcing them. At a next stage an opportunity will be presented for a constructive solution for a universal with regard to the hoops diameter industrial-frequency induction heater.

REFERENCES
[1] . .: . I. . ., , 1976. [2] .., .: . ., ,1974. [3] ..: , ., ,1976. [4] , . .: . , 2006.

1180

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

EMPIRICAL PROCEEDURE FOR TYPE OF TRICONE BIT SELECTION ON OPEN PIT MINES
Radoje Pantovi1, Zvonko Damnjanovi1, Sasa Stojadinovi1, Sneana Ignjatovi2 , Miroslav Ignjatovic3
University of Belgrade -Technical Faculty in Bor, Bor, SERBIA, e-mail: pan@tf.bor.ac.rs 2 University of Belgrade - Mining and Geology Faculty, Belgrade, SERBIA 3 Mining and Metallurgy Institute Bor, Zeleni bulevar bb, 19210 Bor, SERBIA

Summary: This paper describes an empirical procedure for tricone drill bit with tungsten-carbide inserts selection, in the rotary drilling on the open-pit mines. The procedure was carried out on the example of Veliki Krivelj open pit mine (Serbia). Manufacturers and technical literature, for specific application requirements, recommend appropriate selection of drilling parameters and the type of bit. However, the presented empirical selection procedure, based on the drilling logs, represents a better approach for solving this issue. The procedure is based on calculating the total costs per meter of drilled blasthole (formula (2)) and finding the type of bit, which implementation provides a minimal costs. Processing the large volume of data, collected over 10 years, established statistical parameters of drill bits durability (in meters and hours), depreciation and operating costs of drilling for five most commonly used types of bit .The comparative analysis has identified the type of bit which provides the lowest total drilling costs. High rate of penetration is especially important comparative advantage of the drill bit, which can compensated the disadvantages, such as higher price and shorter durability of the bit. In addition, the methodology makes it possible to confirm or deny the validity of procurement of new types of drill bits, in accordance with the requirements set out in the formula (5). Keywords: tricone bit, drilling, rate of penetration, open-pit, cost.

1. INTRODUCTION
The copper ore from Veliki Krivelj open pit mine, located some 5 km north of Bor, is extracted since 1983. Reserves are estimated on 500 million tons of low-grade ore with the designed annual capacity of 12.6 million tons of crude cooper-ore and waste rock. Four basic rock categories can be recognized within the contour of the pit: - Hydrothermaly altered andesite and hornblende biotite andesite with about 60 % representation. - Auto-methasomatly altered quartz-diorte with about 20 % representation. - Dike shaped hornblende biotite andesite are waste rocks with about 10 % representation.. - Trailing rocks with about 10 % representation. Drilling and blasting requirements include 200 000 meters of drilling per year producing 15 million tons of blasted rock. Compressive strengths of the rocks are in the range from 80 MPa to over 130 MPa. A 250 mm blastholes are drilled in staggered geometry of 7X8 m and the hole length is 17 m, including subdrilling. Tricone drilling bits with tungsten-carbide inserts are used for drilling. The present drill fleet on Veliki Krivelj contains three Bucyrus-Erie (USA) 45-R drills. Drills are equipped with Allis Chalmers 12 L compressors with the capacity of 27.8 m3/min. The main power train for the drill, compressor and fan is DC motor with WardLenard converter group and working voltage of 6000 V. Basic elements of the drilling set are the drilling bits and the drilling pipes. Besides that the drilling string also contains stabilizers, vibration dumpers and adapters. Drilling pipes have the outer diameter of 198.7 mm and the length of 9.62 m, so two pipes are needed to drill a 17 m drillhole. Stabilizers are short, 1.2 m long drilling pipes with conical thread on each side, which are placed

1181

between the drilling bit and the drilling pipe. Six armoring steel tapes are welded to the outer side of the stabilizer in order to achieve the diameter identical to the drillhole diameter. Penetration rates range from less than 18 to up to 30 m per driller hour, with an average of 25. Average bit life ranges from less than 5000 to over 15000 m with an average of 10 000. Calculations based on the perennial monitoring gave the drilling efficiency of about 127 t/m.

2. BASIC CHARACTERISTICS OF TRICONE DRILLING BITS

Tricione drilling bits are They consist of several basic parts: - Three roller cones that hold the cutting structure with tungsten-carbide inserts, on their external surface, and the bearings in their interior, - The cutting structure consisting of Tungsten Carbide Insert, - Three lugs, each of which has the bearing journals which match up with the cone bearing bore, - Inner and outer roller bearing elements, and - Ball bearing elements. These basic parts are then assembled into bit thirds, and three thirds are then assembled into a tricone bit. The body of the tricone bit is cast steel construction which unites and carries all other elements and to take and transfer the pressure and the torque from the drilling pipes. Upper part of the body is conical thread enabling the firm connection with the drilling pipe. The air tubes are located inside the body providing the air or air-water mixture passage for drillhole flushing. Working elements of the bit are the cones, mounted on the bit lugs. The cones can rotate over the ball and roller bearings with roller bearings taking radial and ball bearings axial strains. Figure 1 shows the basic appearance of Varel tricone bit and the cross section of Secorc bit [8].

Figure 1: Tricone drill bits: general layout (a) and showing the basic components (b) 2.1 Drilling parameters The tricone bit drilling regieme considers the combination of axial force, bit RPM and the volume of air for cuttings flushing [1]. Axial force enables the penetrations of inserts into the rock, i.e. the disintegration of rock. It is selected upon the rock strength and the diameter and the type of the bit. At low axial forces the disintegration effect is small and the phenomenon of surface disintegration appears resulting in the shorter bit durability. With the increase of the axial force a volume disintegration of rock occurs with the proportional increase of the disintegrated rock leading to the increase in the drilling speed, decrease of vibrations and increase of the bit durability.

1182

Increase of the RPM up to certain value increases the number of impacts of inserts into the drillhole bottom per unit of time leading to increased drilling speed. However, further increase of the RPM decreases the contact time of inserts and rock so at some point the contact time is insufficient for rock disintegration resulting in lower drilling speed. Bit rotation speed is highly variable and can result in a wide range of drilling rates. As a result, determining the correct rotation speed in relation to rock strength is critical. Once the cuttings are created, they must be evacuated. If the cuttings are not removed from the hole, the bit will be eroded by the abrasiveness of the rock chips, and the inserts will quickly wear down and/or fall out, rendering the bit ineffective. In blasthole drilling, hole cleaning is done with compressed air. A large volume of compressed air is directed down through the drill pipe (also called the drill string) into the bit. The flow of compressed air is intentionally restricted at the tricone bit by the use of jet nozzles, in order to create back pressure and apressure drop through the bit. Thisback pressure forces air into the bearings of an air bearing bit, to keep the bearings cool and clean, and to prevent contamination from entering the bit. The goal of drill cuttings removal is to clean the bit surface and drilled hole. Incomplete material flushing increases energy consumption from both bit load and rotation power so as the drill bit advances, cuttings must be removed at the same rate. If the drill cuttings are not efficiently removed from the face, additional energy has to be expended to crush them further. The critical factor in obtaining the best hole flushing characteristics is a balance between annular area and compressor volume. The optimum range for cuttings velocity is between 25 and 35 m/s. As a general rule, the diameters of the pipe and hole should differ by around 25-75 mm. In addition, providing the maximum annular area is advantageous provided sufficient compressor air volume is available. Various axial forces were applied at drilling on Veliki Krivelj depending on the rock type. However, it can be seen from operational logs the mainly applied pressures were in the range of 3,7-8,56 MPa whilst the RPM-s were 60-80 min-1. Flushing air velocity of 26,2 m/s was determined upon the compressor capacity (27,8 m3/min), drilling pipe diameter (199 mm) and drilling bit diameter (250 mm). 2.2 Tricone bits damage and durability The characteristic of the tricone bits is their complex construction and high price. The bit price is considerable item in the overall drilling costs. Because of that, increased durability can result in considerable decrease of the total drilling costs. The main reasons for bit withdrawal from use are: - Body wear and insert fallout, - Lateral bit wear (lug and cone base wear) and - Cone jamming due to bearing wear. The bit withdrawal from operation should be considered premature if bearings failed with operational cone or if cone suffered excessive wear with operational bearings. It is necessary to provide balanced endurance of cones and their bearings. Cone jamming is characteristic and the most common type of bit failure. Lubrication is the best way to ensure durability of bearing and hence the bits. Lubricated bearings prevent dry friction regime, decrease abrasive wear and normalize operating temperature regime. In order to increase the bit durability, special polymer bearings containing 30 % of lubricant in their pores are produced (figure 2a). During the operation, polymer prevents dust to penetrate into the bearings and during rotation, the lubricant is gradually and uniformly released from the pores into the bearing Varels High Speed Motor Bearing (figure 2b) features free floating, silver plated, beryllium-copper bushings, thrust washer, and pilot pin caps, enabling the bit to withstand high bit weights and/or high rotary speeds common in today's most demanding applications [9].

a) b) Figure 2: Roller bearings with polymer (Dresser) (a) i Varels High Speed Motor Bearing (b)

1183

3. TYPE OF TRICONE BIT SELECTION UPON THE BIT RECORD LOGS

Tricione drilling bit must be in correspondence with the rock considering size, number and position of tungstencarbide inserts and axial pressure that bearings can withstand. The first step in bit selection is to determine the bit class from which the best results will be achieved. The compressive strength of rock (MPa) divided by 70 will provide a number c to be used within the four general classifications [3]. Each manufacturer of drilling bits can provide a general load range and insert configuration for their specific product range. As rock strength increases the insert profile decreases respectively. The final results will be a balance between bit type and load, which produces the best penetration at the lowest cost. The drilling operation logs on Veliki Krivelj open pit mine for the last ten years contain records of all important blasthole drilling data. The logs contain data on drills, axial force, RPM, amount and pressure of flush air, drilling times and setbacks, drillholes length mechanical problems etc. The results of efficiency monitoring of various types of drilling bits is the best base for optimal bit selection. Good bit records should include: manufacturer, size, type, equipment serial number, date on, date off, shift footage drilled, rock type, and actual drilling time on every bit. With this information, it is possible to accurately evaluate comparative performance of each used bit type. Save all dull bits for examination by the bit vendors. Failure modes can be determined and aid in selection of better performing products. Dull bits tell a story [5]. Drilling speed and durability are the criteria for reliable bit performance and efficiency valuation. Since this values have different units and they must be reduced to single unit, i.e. the only selection criterion, total drilling costs per 1m of drillhole. Selection methodology is based upon the calculation of the drilling costs and selection of the tricone bits which will provide minimal total drilling costs. Total Drilled Cost (CT) per meter of blasthole is defined by the equation [4]:

CT =

Cb + (Lh C h ) Lm

(/m)

(1)

Where: CT = total drilled cost (/m) Cb = cost of bit () Lh = bit life (h) Ch = drill machine total ownership and operating cost (/hr) Lm = life of bit (m) Rp = rate of penetration (m/h) Replacing : R p = Lm Lh gives:

CT =

Cb C h + Lm R p

(/m)

(2)

3.1 Drilling bits costs per 1m of blasthole ( C b Lm ) More than ten different types of tricone drill bits were used for 250 mm blasthole drilling on Veliki Krivelj open pit mine. Table 1 gives the statistical data on durability of five most commonly used drilling bits. The table is based on the data from the drilling logs for the period 1998-2009. Different types of bits from different manufacturers are indicated by the letters A, B, C, D, E. Of course, more than five bit types were in use but these other bits were not considered due to the insufficient amount of data for statistical analysis. Producer/ Bit Type A B C D E Table 1: Statistical data on tricone bits durability (m) Count Aritmetic mean Maximum Minimum Standard deviation 11 14255 6184 2273 10452 14 13736 5861 2464 9771 27 10916 4483 3110 7859 16 15149 5690 3529 9869 25 16622 6292 2690 10296

Data from Table 1 are shown graphically in Figure 3. Dril bits type A and B achieve the greatest length of the holes while the bits of type C the least.

1184

18000 16000 14000 12000 Bit Life (m) 10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0

Average Maximum Minimum St. deviation

C
Bit Type

Figure 3: Bit durability on the bit type dependence In table 3 given the data on durability - Lm (m) and prices of drill bits Cb (), and data on the costs of drill bits per meter which are calculate on the basis of these data. 3.2 Costs per meter of drill holes (
Ch R p

Hourly costs of drill operation are determined as the sum of the following costs: replacement parts, repair, labor, and materials, electricity or fuel and lubricants, operator and helper wages, overhead charges, taxes, insurance, cost of the drill string exclusive of the drill bit (drill pipe, stabilizers). Total amount of depreciation and insurance is about 180 000 . For the factor of mechanical availability of 0,75 and exploited availability of 0,85 effective working time of the drill is 5585 h annually. This gives fixed costs of: 180 000/5585 32 / h. Costs of labor on the drilling: drill operator 5 /h and assistant 3 /h, in total 8 /h. Material costs are determined upon experience and are: drilling pipes 4 /h, oil and lubricants 6,5 /h, electric power 13,5 /h, in total of 24 /h. all these give total drill operation costs of 64 /h. Drilling logs also gives data on effective bit use times. The sum of all times gives total durability of the bits expressed via total drill bit use time. The drilling speed is then simply determined upon the durability of drill bits given in meters of blasthole and total time of use according to expression: (3) R p = Lm Lh , (m/h) The statistical data on drilling speed are given in table 2. Table 2: Statistical data on tricone drilling bits drilling speed (m/h) Producer/ Bit Type Count Aritmetic mean Maximum Minimum Standard deviation A 11 27 21,5 2,2 23,8 B 14 33,7 22,5 3,1 27,2 C 27 31,3 19,3 2,8 24,3 D 16 27,2 19,6 2,5 22,7 E 25 31,9 21,4 3,5 25,6 Data from Table 2 are graphically shown in Figure 4. The highest average drilling speed achieved bit type B (27.2 m / h), while bit type D earn less drilling speed (22.7 m / h).

1185

40 35 30 25

Penetration rate (m/h)

Average
20 15 10 5 0

Maximum Minimum St. deviation

C
Bit Type

Figure 4: Rate of penetration on bit type dependence Based on previously established drilling costs of 64 / h and the average value of drilling speed (m / h) in Table 3 are given calculated values of operating drilling cost per meter - C h R p (/m). 3. 3 Total drilling costs per 1m of blasthole (CT ) Total cost per meter of drilling holes - CT ( / m) represent the sum of the drill bit cost (Cb / Lm) ) and drill machine cost (Ch / Rp ) and are listed in the last column of Table 3. Note that the bit cost per meter is low compared to the cost of operating the drill machine. Table 3: Total Drilling Cost (CT ) for five different bit types (producers) Producer/ Bit Type A B C D E Count 11 14 27 16 25 Lm (m) 10452 9771 7859 9869 10296 Cb () 3750 3905 3110 2945 3440 Cb / Lm (/m) 0,359 0,400 0,396 0,298 0,334 Rp (m/h) 23,8 27,2 24,3 22,7 25,6 Ch (/h) 64 64 64 64 64 Ch / Rp (/m) 2,689 2,353 2,634 2,819 2,500 CT (/m) 3,048 2,753 3,029 3,118 2,834

The data from the table 3 are also given graphically on the figure 5. It can be seen that the lowest total driled cost are achieved for type B bit application. This advantage of the B type bits is the result of maximal average drilling speed of 27,2 m/h, despite its highest price (3905 ) and lower footage than the type A, D and E bits. The analysis also showed that the increase in the drilling speed could supersede deficiencies of the bits such as price or lower durability. Conducted analysis gives the answer to a common question: What is the value of a bit? What determines how good a bit is? Ask around, and you will probably get one of these four answers to the question of value: low price, long service life, high penetration rate and low Total Drilling Cost. Most mine operators focus on bit price rather than Total Drilled Cost and miss opportunities to increase productivity. Considering that the cost of owning and operating a rotary drill rig is very high, bit performance needs to be judged on what the total drilling cost the drill is. The application of type B bit which can achieve the highest drilling speed gives the total drilling costs of 2,753 /m. Comparison to the first runnerup type D bit with total driled cost of 2,834 /m gives the difference of 0,081 /m (about 3 %) which, for annual drilling scale on Veliki Krivelj of 200 000 m of blastholes gives difference of at least 162 000 . That is bit value.

1186

Drill machine cost 3,500 3,000 Drilling costs (USD/m) 2,500 2,000 1,500 1,000 0,500 0,000

Drill bit cost

Total drilling cost

C
Bit Type

Figure 5: Costs on bit type dependence 3. 4 Evaluation of the new bit type upon comparative analysis In case new bit type application is planned the performance of bit types that achieved the lowest total driled cost during application in given conditions must be considered. The new bit type must achieve and provide the conditions regarding price, durability and drilling speed according to the described procedure. Tne new bit will be competitive only if it enables the achievement of lower total driled cost compared to the best bit in use. Consideration of the best bit in use (type I) and the new bit (type II) and their total driled cost results in the equation:

CT = CT =
I II

Cb Ch Cb C + I = II + hII I Lm Rp Lm Rp

II

(/m)

(4)

If

Lm >
II

Cb Cb Lm
I I

II

(m)
I

or

Ch Rp

Ch Rp
II

Rp >
II

Cb I Lm

Ch II C h Cb + I II Rp Lm

(m/h)

(5)

total driled cost of type II bit are lower compared to total driled cost of the bit in use (type I). In that case the application of the new bit type is economically justified.

4. CONCLUSION
Over the past 25 years blasthole drilling on Veliki Krivelj open pit mine was carried out using the Bucyrus-Erie 45-R drills and more than 10 different types of tricone drill bits with tungsten-carbide inserts. The aim of this research is to identify only the bits that provide the lowest total cost per meter of blasthole. In addition to the proper choice of drilling parameters (pulldown, flushing air velocity and amount of air for cleaning drill cuttings) drilling efficiency critically depends on the applied type of tricone drill bit. After collecting and processing statistical data on techno-economic indicators of application of the tricone bits on Veliki Krivelj open pit, made the calculation of drilling costs for the five most common types of bit. Comparing the results led to the bit, which provides the lowest total cost drilling. In concrete terms it is the type B drill bit This advantage of the B type bits is the result of maximal average drilling speed of 27,2 m/h, despite its highest price (3905 ) and lower footage than the type A, D and E bits. The analysis also showed that the increase in the drilling speed could supersede deficiencies of the bits such as price or lower durability.

1187

Drilling speed can significantly affect total drilled cost. A bit higher rate of penetration will reduce total drilled cost. In some drilling conditions, a low bit performance, even if free, will increase total costs drilled. At the annual drilling scale of 200 000 m on the Veliki Krivelj open pit, drill bit type B, in comparison to other bit applied, provides savings of at least 162 000. Without keeping track of performance will, there can be no way to measure one bit type against another and one supplier against their competition. Investing in good records can Pay Big Dividends. This confirms the above mentioned value of 162,000. Before purchase and application of a new type of tricone drill bit the performance of bit types that achieved the lowest TDC during application in given conditions must be considered. A new type of drill bit can be competitive if they meet the requirements in the terms of cost, durability and rate of penetration, according to formulas (5).

REFERENCES
[1] Baker, R.: Rotary drilling: do the twist. World Mining Equipmment, No. 2 (1986) , p 35-38. [2] Meyer, R.: Optimizing the Rotary Drill String, Available on Web site: http://emj.com/index.php/features/120-optimizing-the-rotary-drill-string.html [3] Pantovic, R.: Drilling Technology (in Serbian). Bor. Technical Faculty at Bor. 2008. p. 264. ISBN 978-8680987-55-2. [4] Thomas, W. R.: Total economics of drilling. World Mining Equipmment, No. 4 (1991), p. 34-35. [5] Thomas, W. R.: Every dull bits tells a story. Engineering and Mining Journal, No. 2 (1991), p. 35-37. [6] Thompson, D.: Modern Drilling and Blasting Technology at the Minntac Mine. In: Proceedings of Minnblast 99 Surface Blasting Conference, Duluth Minnesota, June 7-11, 1999, pp 77-96. [7] Workman L., Szumanski, M.: Which blast-hole rig? World Mining Equipmment, No. 3 (1997), p 23-27. [8] www.atlascopco.com/surface [9] www.varelintl.com

1188

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH CONCERNING STRUCTURAL AND HARDNESS STABYLITY OF 100Cr6 STEEL MACHINE PARTS
Popescu Mihaela1, Duma Sebastian Titus2, Locovei Cosmin3,
1

Politehnica University of Timioara, Faculty of Mechanics, ROMANIA, e-mail: mihaela.popescu@mec.upt.ro, 2 e-mail: sduma@eng.upt.ro, 3e-mail: clocovei@eng.upt.ro

Summary: It is known that the mechanisms and machine parts efficiency, precision and estimated life is influenced by the quality of materials used for the components (ball bearing, compling, calibers, etc.). Therefore, the use of materials providing well defined hardness and stability over the life time of the product is needed. The paper analyses the heat treatment applied to 100Cr6 steel so that a well precized hardness (in the range of 200-800 HV10) is obtained, as well as a satisfaction of the stability and uniformity requirements over the product life time. Keywords: 100Cr6 steel, hardness, structure, quenching, tempering, X-rays diffraction.

1. INTRODUCTION
Very many parts of the mechanisms must ensure a well mentioned and uniform hardness throughout the whole surface. The present work analyses the thermic treatment applied on 100Cr6 steel, meant to impose the hardness in the 200 800 HV10 domain and the uniformity of the properties on the whole part. Previous works, [3,5], have analysed materials that must comply with the restrictions former mentioned emphasizing the material 100Cr6 suplementary refined by electric remelting under slag followed by remelting with void arch, which can ensure a wide range of hardness. This work presents the influence of thermic treatments, the main treatment parameters on the structure, uniformity and durability of the hardness for this steel. The chemical composition of the samples which were used for experiments is presented in Table 1. C [%] 1,00 Table 1: The chemical composition of the samples material Mn [%] Si [%] Cr [%] P [%] S [%] 0,33 0,29 1,6 0,014 0,006 Ni [%] 0,12

At a normal temperature, analysing the diagram iron- crom- carbon, in relation to the alloy with 1%, the balance structure is made out of sorbitic font carbides. All the carbide particles are cementitic with different degrees of crom alloy. Also, in the domain of the austenization temperatures and depending on these, threr will co-exist different austenite and carbides. These differences reffer to quantity and chemical composition.

2. EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
The research have been made on samples with dimensions of 20x10 mm. Samples were tested by the globulization treatment ( primary thermic treatment). The result was a globular perlitic structure with the hardness of ~200 HB. The structure acquired after the primary thermic treatment is presented in Figure 1. (Scanning electron microscope X 8000)

1189

Figure 1: Globulizated samples To acquire a hardness of ~850HV the quenching treatment was applied on the samples. The parameters of the quenching thermic treatment were analyzed in work [5], where were experimented austenizing temperatures 800, 820, 840, 860, 880C and temperatures of the cooling environment of 25, 45, 65 C. The percentage of residue austenite was determined, and some aspects refering to quantity, shape, size and the distribution of carbides. The conclusion is that the optimum austenization temperature for the 100Cr6 steel considering the structure, size, dimension group repartition of the carbides, quantity of residual austenite and the acquired hardness is 840 C.
Cr3 C 2 (113) Fe3 C (200) Fe (C) 21

22 Cr3 C2

(220) Fe(C)

(230) Fe3 C

24 19

27 33 30

2 [ ] Figure 2: The diffractogram for the sample quenched at 840C and cooled in oil at 25C

1190

Cr3 C2 (112)Fe3 C 17

After quenching the samples were rectified filed and polished. Afterwards they were analyzed with x-rays diffraction with the DRON3 difractometer, owned by the SMS department (Politehnica Timisoara). The structures were observed with the help of optic and electron microscopy. Analyzing the diffraction curves and the structures of the samples it is observed that the structure after quenching is made out of unstructural martensite, uniformity distributed carbides (Fe3C, Cr3C2 ) and residue austenite. In the diffractogram for the sample quenched at 840C and cooled in oil at 25C the carbide peaks (Fe3C ; Cr3C2) are not obvious because the highest of the peaks are found at the same level with the peaks of the martensite. In Figure 2 a part of the diffraction is presented (between 2 = 17 and 2 = 34) where by eliminating the martensitic peaks carbide peaks are observed. (Fe3C, Cr3C2). To observe what happens to the quenched material in time, its structure being previously analyzed in Table 2 the initial sclerometrical determinings and after 2 years for the samples quenched at 820, 840 and 860C. All the sclerometrical determinings have been made on standard devices for determining hardness owned by the National Institute of Metrology- Laboratory, Forces -Hardness Timisoara. In order to determine the uniformity and durability of the hardness the following relations were used:

ef =

R 100 [%] d

(1)

for uniformity and

ej =

d d0 100 [%] d0

(2) (3)

for durability, where amplitude

R = d max d min
dmax the maximum average diagonal obtained at the measuring of every indent made at calibration. dmin the minimum average diagonal obtained at the measuring of every indent made at calibration.

1 n d i - the average of the indents from where the periodical hardness is calculated (4) n i =1 d + d - average indent diagonal d= I 2 d=

(5)

dI, d- - the diagonals of a print These formulas are used on standard hardness blocks. If ef and ej are lower than 1 we can say that the structure is homogenous and durable. Table 2: The initial sclerometrical determinings and after 2 years for the samples quenched at 820, 840 and 860C Initial determinings Determinings after 2 years No. Tq e ef ej Hardness Hardness HV10 f do d [C] [%] [%] [%] HV10 [m] [m] 1. 820 154,3 780 1,65 157 752 1,80 1,70 2. 840 149,5 830 2,34 160 724 3,12 7,02 3. 860 148 845 4,74 146 870 1,70 1,35 These results are based on the stress status given by the quenching martensite and the percentage of residue austenite that persists in the material and in time leads to a modification of the hardness. In order to reduce the percentage of residue austenite, the quenching at temperatures under 0C is imposed. The large percentage of martensite resulted after quenching imposes that the sub-zero treatment is applied immediately, at an interval of maximum 60 minutes after quenching [1,2,4,5]. In case of steels at which a great quantity of residue austenite is acquired after quenching, the treatment at sub-zero temperatures can be applied after 2 or 3 hours after quenching. In order to determine the temperature of the sub-zero quenching, experiments have been made on 20x10 samples. The samples were quenched at 840C and subsequently followed the sub-zero quenching (at temperatures of 30, -90, -120 and -183C. After the treatment for each sample the HV10 hardness was determined. Afterwards the fidelity error, ef, was calculated (hardness uniformity). After two years these determinings were re-performed for the same sample and the error was calculated (durability). The results of these experiments are given in Table 3. Each sample was metalografically prepared and structurally analyzed using electron microscopy and x-rays diffraction. The structure in the section is homogenous and formed out of

1191

fine martensite, remnant carbides from the initial status globulization- small and uniformly spread carbides, and quantities of residue austenite. The lower the temperature is the lower the quantity of residue austenite is[2].. Table 3: The influence of the sub-zero treatment on the hardness and structural uniformity Tquenching, [C] Tsub-zero, [C] Duration of the subzero treatment [min] 180 180 180 180 180 Initial determinings Determinings after 2 years ef [%] 830 830 835 843 850 2,34 1,67 1,34 0,67 0,67

No.

do
[m] 149,50 149,50 149,00 148,33 147,70

Hardness HV10

d
[m] 160,00 153,16 151,50 148,66 148,66

Hardness HV10

ef [%]

ej [%] 7,02 2,44 1,67 0,22 0,65

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

840 840 840 840 840

0 -30 -90 -120 -183

724 790 808 839 839

3,12 1,30 1,32 1,68 1,68

Figure 3., presents the overlapped diffractions in the maximum intensity point of the martensitic peak (211 Fess(C)) for the sample quenched at 30, -90 and -183C.

Sample quenched at 183 C Sample quenched at 90 C Sample quenched at 30 C

Figure 3: The overlapped diffractions peaks are presented, in the maximum force point of the martensitical peak (211 Fess), for the samples quenched at 30, -90 and 180 C[2] This overlapping shows that with the decrease of the cooling temperature, the width of the martensitic peak increases so the degree of tetragonality grows and more residue austenite is transformed. This was observed sclerometrically by a light increase of hardness. For the analyzed steel it has been determined a maximum cooling temperature of -120C. It is observed that at the temperature of 120 and -180C after two years the fidelity error had unappropriate values ( hardness uniformity ). This counts less on the percentage of residue

1192

austenite ( the percentage of residue austenite after the sub-zero treatment is lower than 1% ), what counts is the stress status in the material. The tempering treatment has as main purpose the partial or total elimination of the internal stress that appear in the quenching process, the increase of resilience and bringing the structure to a stabile status. The result of the tempering depends on the heating temperature and the period of treating. Not so important is the cooling speed [1,4]. Considering these aspects it is important to determine the influence that a structure formed out of tempering martensite resulted from the treatment of low tempering with a low density on dislocations and a lower internal stress status has on the uniformity and durability of the hardness. For this, there were analyzed samples quenched at 840C, oil cooled at 25C and immediately treated with the sub-zero treatment (-183C) with a time interval of 180 minutes in a cold environment and then tempered at 160C for two hours. The experimental results are presented in Table 4. Table 4: The influence of the tempering on the hardness and structural uniformity Initial determinings Ttempering, [C] Average hardness No. Determinings after 2 years

Average ef

Average ef

[m]

[%]

[m]

[%]

[%]

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

153,16 154,00 153,16 166,00 163,00 163,00 176,00 177,00 177,00 200,70 202,00 202,00 234,00 231,33 233,00 277,00 276,00 272,00 291,00 287,90 290,00

790 782 790 673 698 698 599 592 592 460 455 455 339 347 342 242 243 251 219 225 221

0,65 0,00 0,33 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,50 0,50 0,00 0,00 0,40 0,00 0,36 0,36 0,00 0,69 0,80 0,34

154,00 154,00 153,33 166,00 164,16 164,00 177,00 178,00 178,33 202,00 201,66 202,00 236,33 232,00 234,00 277,83 276,00 274,00 292,60 287,80 291,00

782 782 789 673 691 690 592 585 583 455 456 455 332 345 332 240 243 247 217 225 219

0,65 0,00 0,32 0,60 0,30 0,60 0,56 0,56 0,80 0,50 0,50 0,00 0,40 0,00 0,00 0,18 0,36 0,36 0,68 0,80 0,34

0,50 0,00 0,10 0,00 0,71 0,61 0,56 0,56 0,75 0,64 0,16 0,00 0,90 0,28 0,42 0,29 0,00 0,73 0,54 0,00 0,34

0,32

0,32

0,00

0,50

0,00

0,64

0,33

0,33

0,13

0,13

0,24

0,30

0,61

0,60

In the same table are presented the results from the tempering at 250, 350, 450, 550, 650, and 700C. It is observed that with low tempering the hardness of ~850HV10 resulted after the quenching treatment followed by the sub-zero treatment, decreases at ~787HV10 so with ~63 Vickers units (~3 HRC units ). It is important that the fidelity and justice errors are lower than the 1% limit. We can say that by tempering at 160C after the quenching treatment followed by the sub-zero treatment (-183C ) with a time interval of 180 minutes, the analyzed material is appropriate in what concerns the uniformity and durability of the hardness. It is also observed that by tempering at temperatures higher than 160C, appropriate results come along. This can be explained by the known effects that the increase of the tempering temperature has ( the increase of the carbide particles, stress reducing and the reducing of the quantity of the residue austenite and carbon percentage in the martensite ). The structures observed with the aid of electron microscopy show a part of the effects previously mentioned. Figure 5 presents structural aspect of the material after the tempering at 350 C, ( a) and 550 C, ( b).

1193

0,29

700

222

220

0,34

650

245

243

0,53

550

343

339

0,26

450

456

455

0,62

350

594

587

0,44

250

690

685

0,20

160

787

784

Average ej

do
Hardness HV10

d
Hardness HV10

Average hardness

ef

ef

ej

(a) (b) Figure 5: Structural aspect of the material after the tempering at 350 C, ( a ) and 550 C, ( b )

3. CONCLUSION
For many types of machine parts for which a well defined hardness ( in the 200-800 HV10 limit ) is wanted and a uniformity and durability of the properties the 100Cr6 steel can be used. The thermic treatment for the 100Cr6 steel that will comply with the previously mentioned conditions is the treatment of quenching at 840C with oil cooling at 25C followed by the sub-zero treatment (-183C ) and finally the tempering at the apropriate for the required hardness (Table 4.)

REFERENCES
[1] Serban, V.A., Rdu, A.: tiina i Ingineria Materialelor, Editura Politehnica, Timioara, 2010, ISBN: 978606-554-044-6. [2] Duma, S., Popescu, M.: The influence of thermic and thermochemical treatment on the structural characteristics and hardness on drills fabricated from HS 18-0-1 steel, Procedings,Annual Session of Scientific Papers, IMT Oradea-2010,pp.3.37,ISBN: 978-606-10-0128-6 [3] Duma. S.: Studies regarding the acquirement of hardness standard blocks for transmitting the Knoop hardness scale 275577 HK0.2 and Brinell 416589HBW 5/750 Scientific Bulletin of the POLITEHNICA University of Timisoara, 2009, Tom 54(68) Fasc. 3, ISSN :1224-6077. [4] Hazotte. A. (ed.): - Solid State Transformation and Heat Treatment. Wiley-VCH, Weinheim 2004, ISBN-10: 352731007X, ISBN-13: 9783527310074 [5] Cari, I., Duma, S.: The influence of the quenching technological parameters over the quantity of residual austenite, the hardness and RUL1 steel structure, for the fabrication of hardness standard blocks, Academics Days, POLITEHNICA University of Timisoara , mai 2001, pp. 135-140, ISBN: 973-8247-32-2.

1194

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DYNAMIC STUDY OF CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DRIVEN BY ELECTRIC INDUCTION MOTOR

2

Technical University of Gabrovo, Gabrovo, BULGARIA, E-mail: sratchev@scientist.com Technical University of Sofia, Faculty of Engineering&Pedagogy of Sliven, Sliven, BULGARIA, E-mail: dkoeva@abv.bg

Svilen Rachev1, Dimitrina Koeva2

Summary: The dynamic behavior of the centrifugal pump induction motor drive have been studied in the paper. The equations for the voltages of the induction motor windings are presented in a coordinate system rotating at a synchronous speed. The mechanical equipment is presented by means of a single-mass dynamic model. The system of differential equations is transformed and solved using suitable software product. As a result of the study the values of the driving moment, rotational frequency and instantaneous values of currents in the three phases of the induction motor in cases of different values of initial value of the resisting moment have been obtained. Some of the study results have been presented graphically. An analysis has been made and conclusions from the results obtained have been done. Keywords: transient processes, induction motor, electric drive, centrifugal pump.

1. INTRODUCTION
It is well known that electric motors as a part of electric drives are the greatest consumers of electricity produced all over the world. The most often used type of electric motors are induction ones about 90% of all electric motors. On the other hand it is established that about 55% of induction motors are used to drive pumps and fans. The wide application of induction motors calls for studying and modeling the physical and electrical phenomena arising in the course of their operation. In order to limit the starting currents, and respectively, to lower the starting torque of the motor it is necessary to analyze the influence of the operating conditions. A mathematical model is proposed for examining the transient processes in the centrifugal pump electric drive. The equations for the voltages of the stator and rotor windings of the induction motor are presented in a coordinate system which rotates at a synchronous speed and they are expressed in relative units. The centrifugal one-stage pump mechanism is presented with a single-mass dynamic model. The analysis of the transient processes in the induction motor is carried out with the generally accepted assumptions [3].

2. MATHEMATICAL MODEL
The horizontal centrifugal pump type 7MC32.4 /the object of investigations done/ is designed for transporting of pure water and other fluids without mechanical impurities with viscosity and chemical activity similar to those of water and temperature not higher than 80oC. In some cases this pump can be used for fluids where contents of mechanical impurities /clay, sand, etc./ cannot exceed 500 mg/l and fraction size can be 0,2 mm max. Possible applications of the pump are water-supply, irrigation, technological needs in the industry and agriculture. The operating duty of centrifugal type mechanisms depends on three quantities: flow-rate Q, pressure head and angular speed . These quantities are determinative about resisting moment and power on the mechanism shaft. The fundamentals of centrifugal type mechanisms theory are developed by Euler. The operational capacities of centrifugal type mechanisms are dependent on Q-H characteristics and relation between efficiency and flow-rate at =const. The theoretical estimation of the above mentioned characteristics is

1195

difficult therefore the experimental dependencies H=f(Q) and =(Q) are used in practice which are given in reference books for pumps on condition that rated angular speed N is invariant. In order to obtain Q-H characteristics which are different from rated one the rules of proportionality can be used. Because of some special features of centrifugal type mechanisms /construction and technological process conditions/ there is no need of reversal. The speed of pumps is conformed to the motor speed that is why there is no reduction gear in electric drive structure. The starting conditions are peculiarity as a rule initial moment is not exceeded 30-35% from the rated one [7]. The special features pointed out regarding centrifugal type mechanisms allow use of non-adjustable squirrel cage induction motors in most cases. In cases of considerable rated power installations /hundred and thousand kW/ the use of synchronous motors is expedient which in its turn allows to influence on reactive power consumed from the mains. A lot of pumps operate in corrosive or explosion-non-proof environment, at high temperatures and humidity. It is clearly that special feature of the pumps is dependence between static resisting moment L and rotational frequency of the mechanism. Considerable influence on dependence =f() gives pipeline where the mechanism is mounted. The resisting moment L of the mechanism is a sum from hydraulic resistance moment and moment conditioned by mechanical resistance /bearings friction, etc/. Frictional moment does not exceed 5% from the rated one in most cases. On the other hand when calculate starting characteristics it is not recommended to assume initial value of the moment less than 25% from rated one of the mechanism [8]. Pumps, as a rule, are mechanisms with continuous operating duty (S1); shaft load is balanced. Centrifugal pumps are high-r.p.m. mechanism, rated rotational frequency of the driving motor is higher than 600 min-1; the upper limit of rotational frequency is limited to value of 3000 min-1; the most perfect way of pump performance regulation is alteration of motor rotational frequency, control range is not a large usually. Common shortcoming of the adjustable electric drive in this case are heat losses inside the motor when speed slowing down. These losses cause additional warm up of the motor and it is necessary that measures should be taken regarding rising in motor power installed respectively. Furthermore capital costs for equipment of units with adjustable drives are needed. Starting of pumps is going on sliding rule usually, dependence between moment over the shaft and rotational frequency is quadratic with initial value lying in limits 40-80% from the rated moment [8]. The equations for the voltages of the windings of the induction motor in the coordinate system which rotates at the synchronous angular speed of the field s are [1, 3, 6]:
u sx = r1.i sx +
d sy d sx s . sy ; usy = r1.i sy + + s . sx ; dt dt d ry d rx + s s . rx , urx = r2 .i rx + s s . ry ; ury = r2 .i ry + dt dt

(1)

where

s =

2f N b ; = 2f N = b - circular frequency. = = p p p

* The stator voltages u * sx and u sy are determined from the expressions [6]:
u sx = 2 2 cos( + 2 ); kU u ) + uC A cos + u B cos( 3 3 3

2 2 sin( + 2 ). u ) + uC sy = kU u A sin + u B sin( 3 3 3 where:

(2)

* * u* A , u B and u C are the phase voltages in relative units. Since the motor is a induction type with * squirrel-cage rotor u * rx = 0 and u ry = 0 . The phase stator voltages in relative units are obtained to be:
u A = kU cos( + 0 ); uB = kU cos( + 0

2 2 ); uC = kU cos( + 0 + ), 3 3

(3)

1196

where:

kU =

U gives the account of supply voltage value; UN

0 initial phase of supply voltage.

It is proved that after substitution of (4) into (3) and transformation the result is:
2 3 3 2 3 3 u*sx = U cos0 = U cos0 ; u*sy = U sin0 = U sin0 . 3 2 2 3 2 2

(4)

The system of equations (1) can be presented in Cauchy-form in relative units using the generally accepted system of basic values (for example = b t time in relative units) [3, 6]. The parameters of the substitution circuit [2, 6] of the electric motor have been determined using calculation method for a value of the slip s = 1.
2 L.L r Ls.Lr s.L disx urx r2 u r m sx m 1 = .isx + .irx + isy. + (1 s).iry ; d Lr .Lm Le Lm Lr Lm Lr 2 disy s.L .L L L r2 .L usy ury r 1 r m m s r = (1 s).irx ; .isy + .iry + isx. d Le Lm Lr Lm Lr Lr .Lm
dirx d
diry d

2 r s.Ls.Lr Lm .L L r2 usx urx 1 s m = (1 s).isy + + .isx .irx + iry. Le Ls Lm Ls Lm Ls.Lm 2 u u * L.L sy ry r r2 .i + i . Lm s.LsLr + (1 s).i . = s m + + 1 .isy sx ry rx L.L L L s m m e Ls Lm Ls

(5)

The phase stator current can be obtained from the following equations:
i* A= 2* ; i cos i* sy sin sx 3

i* B=
* = iC

2* 2 * sin( 2 ) ; ) isy isx cos( 3 3 3

2* 2 * sin( + 2 ) . isx cos( + ) isy 3 3 3

(6)

The electromagnetic torque of the induction motor in relative units is obtained to be:
* pLb i 2 L* M b m i * i * i * i * = pu b ib Lm i * i * i * i * ; M = = sy rx sx ry sy rx sx ry MN MN M N b M N = M b - base moment;

(7)

The mechanical equipment is presented by means of a single-mass model. After transformation, the equation of motion is obtained to be [5, 7]:

p ds (M M L ) = dt J 1

(8)

1197

where:

M L resisting moment of the mechanism; J total inertia moment of the motor and of the mechanism, reduced to the motor shaft; p number of pole couples of the motor; 1 = 2f1 = b rotation frequency. The centrifugal pump is a mechanism which characteristics is presented by following equation [5, 7]:
* M * M * (1 s )2 M* L = M L INIT + L INIT LN

(9)

After transformation equation (8) is obtained to be:

pM b ds = d J 2 b pu i L* * * * * M* * M* 2 bb m M 1 s ( ) i sy irx i sx iry LINIT LN LINIT M N b

(10)

The full system of differential equations which describe the dynamics of the fan blower induction motor drive is formed by the equations (5) and (10).

3. RESULTS
lying in limits 25-80% According to above mentioned considerations initial value of resisting moment M L INIT from the rated moment have been chosen for investigations. The software product MathCAD 2001 [4] has been used for solving the system, including equations (5) and (10). Using the proposed mathematical model, the transient processes have been examined when the value of the supply voltage varies. Some of the results obtained are presented in the paper - Figures 1 7 and Table 1. 1500 n, min-1 1000 500 0 500

t, s

Figure 1: Characteristic n=f(t)

1198

M, Nm 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 100 200

0 0.13 0.25 0.38 0.5 0.63 0.75 0.88 1 t, s

Figure 2: Characteristic M=f(t)

1500

n, min-1
1000 500 0 500

200

200

400

600

800

M, Nm

Figure 3: Characteristic n=f(M)

1

iA*
5 0 5 1

0.

t, s

Figure 4: Characteristic iA*=f(t) Table 1: Values obtained with different values of initial resisting moment i impact* t transient process, s M impact, Nm (phase A) 714.37 6.54 0.250 717.79 6.58 0.252 721.15 6.63 0.254 724.48 6.66 0.254 730.99 6.73 0.258 737.33 6.79 0.260 743.47 6.85 0.266 749.43 6.89 0.288

M LINIT

0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80

1199

M impact , Nm

760 740 720 700 680

0, 25 0 0, 30 0 0, 35 0 0, 40 0 0, 50 0 0, 60 0 0, 70 00
INIT

y = -0,0398x3 + 0,8654x2 + 0,1045x + 713,79

Figure 5: Characteristic M impact =f( M L

7 i impact * 6,9 6,8 6,7 6,6 6,5 6,4 6,3 0,250 0,300
3

0,350

0,400
2

0,500

0,600 0,7000 0,8000 M LINIT *

y = -0,0006x + 0,0092x + 0,0096x + 6,525

Figure 6: Characteristic i impact =f( M L

INIT

0,29 t tr.pr. ,s 0,28 0,27 0,26 0,25

0, 60 0 0, 70 00

y = 1E-05x - 0,0002x + 0,0021x - 0,0095x + 0,0216x 0,0213x + 0,2572

Figure 7: Characteristic t transient process=f( M L

INIT

4. CONCLUSION
The mathematical model developed in the paper helps to examine both the transient processes when starting a centrifugal pump, and the influence of the initial value of the resisting moment over the operation of the mechanism. The mathematical model developed makes it possible to determine the impact electromagnetic moment, starting currents and angular speeds. This model could also be used to find the solution to the opposite

1200

0, 80 00
M LINIT *

0, 25 0

0, 40 0

0, 30 0

0, 35 0

0, 50 0

0, 80 00
M LINIT *

problem the development of an electric motor and a control system with parameters guaranteeing the running of the transient processes with customized requirements. The detailed study of electromagnetic and electromechanical transient processes makes possible the most rational design of induction electric drives.

5. APPENDIX
Technical data of the electric motor MO 180:
PN = 22kW

U N = 380V

f N = 50 Hz ;
Iph N = 24.1A ;

p =2;
J = 0.07646 kgm 2 ; M N = 143.5 Nm ;

n N = 1464 min 1 ;

I ST = 7.0 ; IN
r1 = 0.4843

M ST = 1.7 ; MN

M MAX = 2.2 MN
' = 0.619 r2

x1 = 1.154

' = 1.195 x2

x m = 51.719

Technical data of the centrifugal pump 7MC32.4 made by VIPOM JSC, Vidin, BULGARIA: Pressure head H = 128m 12,5; Flow-rate Q = 6.95 l / s ;110 l/s nN = 1450 min 1 ; PN = 22kW ;

Admissable suction height: 4,5 6.5m ; LA mm 828 LB mm 203 LC mm 328 LD mm 255

Admissable temperature: 80 o C ;

Weight: 155 kg. k.p.d. 73% HA mm 576 HB mm 240 a mm 370

Table 2: Dimensions of centrifugal pump 7MC32.4 LE BA BB BC BD BE mm mm Mm mm mm mm

118

353

360

230

350

300

Table 3: Dimensions of centrifugal pump 7MC32.4 flanges Ds Dd d s t mm mm mm mm mm 200 150 38 10 41

1201

REFERENCES
[1] Angelov, A. M.; Dimitrov, D. A.: Electrical Machines, Part 1, Tehnika, Sofia, 1976. (in Bulgarian). [2] Chapman, S. J.: Electric Machinery Fundamentals, McGraw-Hill, N. Y., 1985. [3] Dinov, V. R.: Non-Symmetric Regimes and Transient Processes in Electric Machines, Tehnika, Sofia 1974 (in Bulgarian). [4] Dyakonov, V. P.: MathCAD 2001 Special reference book, Peter, Sanct-Peterburg, 2002 (in Russian). ISBN 5-272-00069-2 [5] Kluchev, V. I.: Electric Drive Theory, Tehnika, Sofia, 1989. (in Bulgarian). [6] Rachev, S: Dynamic Study of Fan Blower Induction Motor Electric Drive, 4th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry RaDMI 2004, 31. August - 04. September 2004, Zlatibor, Serbia and Montenegro [7] Kluchev, V. I.; Terehov V.M.: Electric drive nad automation of industrial mechanism, Moscow, Energiya, 1980, pp. 300-315 (in Russian). [8] Eliseev V. A.; Shinyanski A. V.: Reference book on automated electric drive, oscow, Energoatomizdat, 1983, pp. 566-572 (in Russian).

1202

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

DIAGNOSTIC EXPERTS SYSTEMS BASED ON RISK IN MINING AND ENERGY

RB "Kolubara"d.o.o., Svetog Save 1, 11550, Lazarevac, SERBIA, e-mail: slobodanr@hotmail.com 2 High Technical School, Belgrade, SERBIA 3 Township Lazarevac, Karaoreva 42., 11550. Lazarevac, SERBIA, e-mail: milanradosavljevic@msn.com
Summary: Technical systems in mining and energy are the main factor for the achievement of production performance is based on the general stability of electrical energy. This approach is fully justified by the orientation towards the needs constant and no-notice work. The function of maintaining the necessary infrastructure and logistics Resource in this context gets completely new forms and shapes. The complexity and technical complexity of the system and complete technological lines, caused the high costs in stages of development and production practice maintenance. In dilemma is how to configure an effective diagnostic system based on risk, which could be incorporated in the overall management of the platform in a process-oriented company. The application of expert systems can contribute to creating the necessary preconditions for the construction of an appropriate diagnostic system. The paper shows the concept of the general process of determining the remaining service life of technical systems or equipment, based on the risk of the subject area with modern ekspetnih model. Considering the specificity of problems and approaches in this paper is based on several annual research and practical experience in the manufacturing practices by mining and energy. Keywords: diagnostics, technical system, expert system, risk, mining-energy sector.
1

Slobodan Radosavljevi1, Spasoje epanovi2, Milan Radosavljevi3

1. INTRODUCTION
Explicit requirements for an effective and almost without notice to the reduction of labor costs in the technical systems in the mining and energy, have stipulated the need for new approaches in the Maintenance primarily based on risk. This platform focuses on the maintenance process, which may provide critical and possible destruction and in this context to take certain measures in response, to prevent or minimize the same. This is the way that directly affects the extension of the century, the technical systems at the stage of the life cycle of exploitation, but also on the part of their overall technical performance (improvement of individual modules in relation to the projected level), [1] and [2]. The production of energy and mining practice, there is a dilemma, starting from conception and design of real diagnostic system to how it will work and how to incorporate the platform of other management processes? Ensure an integrated diagnostic system is the reality of individuals in all processes. The priority objectives of the science of diagnosis and the situation of individual properties are: meet the general laws which characterize the studied phenomenon, prediction of flow phenomena and to construct rules of rational behavior in appropriate situations. The cycle of going from observation to a theoretical definitions of the product to practice and new observations, it can be a quality basis for the further development of existing and new projection system for diagnosis based on the risk of the company. Logistics diagnostic system that applies to devices for the application of a qualitatively developed, (the technical performance related to the exact identification of the state, generating and transferring data from the spot with a simple and cost-effective practical use). So it follows that a complex, integrated system diagnostics and security in the mining and energy requirement for significantly boosting the efficiency of use and security necessary to determine operation of the modes, technology, maintenance, and the position of technical diagnostics in the general system of operation and process diagnostic approach based on risk, [3], [4], and [5].

1203

2. OBJECTIVES OF THE DIAGNOSTICS

To provide diagnostic systems used different methods and techniques. The funds in the system diagnostics can be used in the work of individuals (exploitation Diagnostics), stalled individuals (repair diagnostics) and in the development process and the withdrawal of specimens. In exploitation diagnostics, diagnostic equipment, has a role to detect and predict the occurrence of state failure to ensure proper functioning of the system and proper management of technological processes. In repair diagnostics, diagnosis is mandated to assess and verify the condition of individual components, and predict the duration of planned maintenance, and check the quality of work performed. Modern approaches in the diagnosis of stress the necessity of continuous diagnosis in all modes of the system status, [6] and [7]. Application of modern methods of diagnosis in the system must generate answers to the following questions: How long the system or its parts can be done in the current situation and conditions? Where are the mechanical disturbances in the system and that the weakest / critical positions? Which parts of the system and to what extent requiring repair, rehabilitation or replacement? How will these activities cost burden the company's total business? The establishment of criteria and quality metrics for the analysis of previous issues is necessary, especially in the part related to the assessment of need of repair, revitalization or replacement of certain parts. An important part of the diagnostic tests are carried out in a state of exploitation and stopping the system. Insight into the state system and the knowledge of his behavior at any time of diagnosis is a priority goal.This allows the security settings for optimal functioning of the system and predict to what point the system can operate before the need for revitalization and reconstruction.The main objectives of methods and procedures in the diagnosis of Mining and Energy are: extend the time the proper functioning of the system / designed to ensure reliability, prevent repetition of system failure, extend the life of the system at the stage of the life cycle of exploitation, stabilize and optimize the efficiency of the system / individual work, reduce total cost of ownership, to provide integrative functioning of the production and maintenance.

3. MODERN EXPERT SYSTEMS IN DIAGNOSTICS

In each expert system is adequately deposited large amounts of high quality knowledge on the problems of a domain activities. Storage space for information in the expert system is a permanent memory that is separate from the programs, systems and development tools and information used in solving the problem (mechanism of reasoning-decision). Technology is based on the most up to date developed expert system, characterized by wellknown methods and techniques of representation of knowledge in the field of application, reasoning and problem solving with appropriate support systems and software development tools, [1], [8] and [9]. Basis for the concept of expert systems of technical diagnostics are: acquired experience in the construction of the previous generation of expert systems, developing a theory of design and construction of expert systems, application of modern principles and engineering knowledge, intensive development of the theory of design of technical systems. The shape and characteristics of expert systems for diagnosis derived from the following requirements: minimize the likelihood that the diagnosis does not make the state system, minimize the time of diagnosis of the situation, use an integrated approach using knowledge of statistical data on previous work on knowledge of natural laws, knowledge on the functional descriptions of technical systems, understanding the different types of problems, the ability to constantly expand, update and maintenance of expert database. Expert system for technical diagnosis should have the following modules: design of technical systems in terms of application of technical diagnostics, design (methods, techniques treatment) technical diagnostics, management of technical diagnostics modern information technologies, rationalization of the projected technical diagnostics. An expert system for diagnosis of the situation based on the recognition that different types of functionalstructure of the diagnosis are the fundamental elements of blocks of knowledge. The diagnosis is related to: class identification (facilities, operations, features),

1204

the relationship between class-relations, which establish the relationships between the facility and operations, the space recognition.

Table 1:Overview of modern expert systems for diagnostics and maintenance on state-predictive maintenance. Serial Mark ES Name of Expert System number 1 CMS A system for tracking non-stationary phenomena and fatigue 2 EPRMS System reliability and condition monitoring equipment 3 CEMS The system for monitoring corrosion and erosion 4 APMS The system for monitoring of auxiliary pumps 5 VMS The system for monitoring valves 6 HXMS Monitoring system of heat exchangers 7 LMS System for monitoring leakage 8 REMSOURCE Database of materials 9 ICMA Slave system for measuring and regulating equipment maintenance 10 MIMS The system for monitoring metal 11 ECMS The system for monitoring electrical cables and electrical installations 12 AEMS The system for monitoring acoustic emission 13 XPECTION System to help experts in the assessment of thermal power plants 14 ESR-SYSTEM System for evaluation of durability of components 15 TMDS System to ensure the diagnostic state of rotary equipment 16 VMS The system for monitoring lines 17 BMS The system for monitoring boiler 18 TURBINEAID The system for monitoring turbine 19 GENAID The system for monitoring generator 20 CHEMAID System for monitoring water-chemical regime

Figure 1:Display of complex structures in the energy sector with specific technical systems, which explicitly position a system integrated approach to diagnosis with the possibility of incorporating ekspersih system based on risk The performance of the expert system depends on the quantity and quality of examples and rules established. It is necessary to harmonize the data collected with the working system performance depending on the type and circumstances in which the cancellation occurred. Most of the data base of knowledge is obtained through experimental, measuring the parameters of the system in working conditions. First, establish a database of raw data on the experimental values already mentioned, laboratory and service data, and supplementing the data during the experiment to work, [9], [10], [11] and [12].

1205

Input data

Experimental data Base input

Theoretical data

File application

The strategic model Information analysis

Allow phonetic typing Type text or a website address or translate a

Software for the introduction of rules

Allow phonetic typing

Generating rules

Expert knowledge

The prototype system based on rules

Input data

ALlow phonetic typing T t t

Knowledge Base

Allow phonetic typing Type text or a

Figure 2:Expert computing system (ECS) Special software process, from data collected form the base condensed data, which contains statistical results for the critical modules. The concept of expert systems for fault diagnosis figure 2 shows When it detects a problem, determine the requirements necessary to get the information. The data obtained from appropriate sources and properly organized in the database of input data. Followed by production problems with the model scheme of the process that leads to solutions. The model problem together with the input data base for "expert team to analyze information." It serves to define a file of examples, from which they are performed using appropriate software prototype "structure based on the rules." In order to complete the composition of the expert, the module is required for the decision, which consults the knowledge base and knowledge base constructed composition. Diagnosis includes the determination and analysis of static and dynamic significance of the assessment team.Changes in the composition of the state track and quantitative measures of the corresponding metric.The choice of diagnostic specificity of each component part or individual is renewed based on: study of their functions, methods and working conditions, analysis of the level of their performance, preparation of logical structure of cause-effect relationship and factors that affect your, ability of technical failure analysis, failure analysis, and more systems. Figure 3 shows the model of expert system (ESSO) to assess the state of the energy and mining. At the same methodological procedure is designed to determine the remaining service life (individual, technical systems, equipment) based on risk, using expert system (ESSO). The process is sufficiently adaptable, transparent, flexible, the possibilities of incorporating other process in the context of trends in stabilizing the functionality of the system status. One of the important features presented procedures is a function of the expert system, which in this case, integrative, science-based and based on the concept of engineering analysis of the situation, using contemporary methods, models, systems and development tools, [9], [13] and [14]. So this is a situation analysis of all identified in various areas in which the real object of analysis can be found. Presented an expert system (ESSO) is a structured reference to the following procedures, ((the area of Energy and Mines): additional testing of production, structural and propulsion data, calculations related to the driving rules and conduct, manufacturing procedures and rules related to the extent of maintenance and supervision, cost estimates for production status, decision on future status (individual, technical systems, equipment).

1206

Figure 3: The process of determining the remaining service life (individual, technical systems, equipment) based on risk, using expert systems ESSO, [1] and [9]

1207

Diagnostic specimens, technical systems and equipment has special features if it is already implemented in phases of the life cycle of exploitation and working conditions in relation to the newly designed equipment, which has yet to be brought into operation. Accelerated development of measuring equipment for diagnosis, lower costs of procurement and implementation, opportunities for transfer and processing, reduce/selecting a volume of data required for analysis. Very common are cases of individual, technical systems or equipment does not behave as defined in the project decision for different reasons. Some of them may be the only design solution may be inadequate, changing conditions in the operation or fatigue on the individual components. Diagnostic procedure is iterative, self-educational or self-correcting. Output of analysis from a single measurement/monitoring individuals can obtain a basis for improving the model to other individuals. As a result of diagnostic status and behavior of one individual can be conceived proposal for a second. This may affect the overall optimization of the maintenance process and to redesign/revitalization, [9],[15], [16]and [17]. In assessing the remaining individuals century, technical systems or equipment, open the following questions: What are all important factors (in total synergy) that are individually of the utmost importance during aging in the process of exploitation? How, and how to degrade the initial resistance of individuals, systems or equipment? What is the ratio of load growth and the extreme effects? What are the critical elements of the system? What and how the inspection process should be planned and organized? What kind of measurement, sampling, testing in the context of other diagnostic/measurement should be applied? What is the expected remaining life of structures?

Figure 3: Individual assessment process, technical system, equipment based on risk analysis In Figure 3 shows the procedure for individual assessment, technical systems, equipment in use based on risk analysis The reliability of individuals, systems, equipment, mining and energy can be determined with different methods and techniques (FTA, FMEA, FMECA, QFD, cause-effect diagram, block diagram of reliability, fault tree, tree failures, tree maintenance, the state transition diagram, a model strain , forecast maintenance and other amenities. The aim of these methods and techniques to find events which often cause a system failure, to identify critical paths or minimal processes and to identify current and future state of individual components, technical systems or equipment, [18], [19], [20] and [21]. The process of checking the security is intense and requires a sufficiently detailed reports to ensure timely detection of risks and their tendencies, and tagging that allows adequate monitoring. Reports of assessment based on risk should include: results of risk analysis and safety checks, measures taken to correct errors, the results of measurement, monitoring, testing and quantifying risk, process data use and maintenance, any other information in accordance with law, regulations and standards. Analysis of individual risk-based approach used in the world, the fundamental methodology RBI- (Risk based inspection) and RCM-(Reliability centered maintenance). These two methodologies are systematic and the

1208

results laid the foundation for application maintenance and inspections based on risk. They are different in that it refers to the RBI inspection, which includes reviews of most techniques of non-destructive testing. RCM methodology is usually related to the concept of choice or action of maintaining complex and complex system in which there is no dominant method of cancellation. It is a multidisciplinary team focusing on management techniques denunciations of technical systems. One can only conclude that they can jointly meet the needs of maintenance and inspection, as technical systems and structural elements of the system, [9], [22], [23] and [24]. The main aim and task of the methodology RBI (Risk based inspection) is to define the appropriate programs for individual technical reviews, technical systems or equipment, so that on the basis of detailed analysis: identify, grade and rank all the risks in terms of features the interruption of the process, determine the measures to be taken to reduce the significant risks / minimize or to reduce the likelihood of events and consequences that could arise from this. Since the scores level and determine the value of risk for all critical events and elements of the system, an important part of the RBI methodology is their ranking. For each element to evaluate the impact or significance in terms of performance of work functions, meet its functional requirements. We should identify the critical elements which lead to dismissal: consequences of unacceptable level of safety, a significant level of economic consequences. The basis for a decision on the existence of critical and non-critical in the process of risk analysis should be documented for each individual element or part, so that the listing of such possibilities exist to obtain all necessary data and information, [9], [25], and [26]. In addition to RBI methodology developed by other methods which are distinguished by the following: RBLM (risk-based life management), management of the century on the basis of risk, and refers to the analysis of all components of risk, ranking of critical components, determining the ways of solving problems and critical decisions on the implementation of optimization; RIMAP (risk-based inspection and maintenance procedures) and technical review procedures and riskbased maintenance, maintenance and other practices that are taken on this basis (maintenance, revitalization, reconstruction, modernization); MACRO (maintenance cost risk optimization), optimization of maintenance from the standpoint of cost and risk, it is designed for all types of technical systems.

4. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC TO PROCESS ACCESS

Diagnostic expert systems based on risk according to definitions previously set forth can be extremely highquality logistics instruments to determine the state of individuals and determining the working life of the remaining individuals, systems or equipment. Structure of diagnostic problem because the same is not recognized as a process. Specifically there is no process approach in the diagnosis of the system or it is very rare. Known theorists (Baldini and Furlanetto) are maintaining a defined diagnostic process: keeping the state may be regarded as a diagnostic process that results from the application of basic laws and techniques of specific empirical relationship in such a way to enable the determination of each individual situation. The diagnostic system provides maintenance management and maintainers insight into the state of equipment and parts, provides continuous audit planning or repairs based on the real situation, thus increasing the time of technical systems and eliminate unnecessary downtime. The theory and practice is developed diagnostic process maintenance. So diagnostic system is developed on the levels of the process of construction and to the withdrawal of technical systems from the use or recycling. The most common diagnostic system is positioned with system maintenance or the production process, to monitor and control production parameters. Application of modern model predictive maintenance system is driven approach, always with complete forts state and its individual components, as well as comprehensive definition of service life remaining individuals. Application of modern methods of diagnosis in the system must generate answers to questions in the work and to meet the diagnostic purposes. System of integrated diagnostic approach is a real need for security in all processes. The application of expert system based on risk assessment in the context of working life remaining individuals is indispensable constituent element of the system diagnostics, [1], [9], [27], [28] and [29].

5. CONCLUSION
In order to be able to apply modern diagnostic system models must be diagnostic status and characteristics of individuals approached systematically, constantly and completely determined by the state, as well as its individual components, as well as completely defined by the remaining century of real individuals. Diagnostic systems in recent times using modern methods and techniques for diagnosis of technical systems, so that the

1209

process is developed in terms of application of modern expert systems associated with time, information technology and virtual organization. Systematic and integrated approach to the process of diagnosis is imperative that at this time there is no alternative. Previous theory and practice of dealing with the diagnostic failure, breakdown or to support the maintenance process. This paper opens up new dimensions of the system (integrated) approach to diagnosis in the function of determining the status and properties of individuals. This approach contributes to the establishment and development of diagnostic systems as a process with the application of expert system based on risk in the context of determining the working life of the remaining individuals, technical systems, equipment, and overall maintenance process. Application of modern methods of diagnosis in the system has to meet defined objectives, and to generate answers to questions in the paper. The application of expert system based on risk assessment in the context of the remaining work is a must-century individuals integral component of diagnosis.

REFERENCES
[1] epanovi, S.:System Engineering, VT, Beograd, (2008), p. 114-119. [2] Dai, P.: Algorithm approach to determination of reliability of components technical systems, Plenary and invitation paper. Proceedings of 5th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industy - RaDMI 2005, Vrnjaka Banja, 04-07. September 2005, p. 34-45. [3] Dai, P.; Natsis, A. & Petropoulos, G.: Models of reliability for cutting tools: Examples in manufacturing and agricultural engineering. Strojniki vestnik Journal of Mechanical Engineering, Vol. 54, No. 2 (2008), pp. 122-130. ISSN 00392480. [4] Dai, P., (2001) Determination of reliability of ceramic cutting tools on the basis of comparative analysis of different functions distribution, International Journal of Quality & Reliability Management (IJQRM), Vol. 18 (2001), No. 4-5, pp. 433-446. [5] Radosavljevi, S.; Lili N.; uri S.; Radosavljevi M.: Risk Assessment and Managing Technical Systems in case of Mining Industry, Strojniki vestnik-Journal of Mechanical Engineering, 55(2009)2, (2009). pp. 119-130. [6] Radosavljevi, S.; Radosavljevi, M.: Risk Assessment in Mining Inustry: Apply Management, Serbian Journal of Management, An international Journal for Theory and Practice Management Science, Techical Faculty Bor, Serbia, volume 14., Number (1), ISSN 1453-4864., (2009) pp. 91-104. [7] Radosavljevi, S.: Risk evaluation model of work safety process in the section dry separation, Kolubara prerada, Vreoci, Doctoral dissertation, Faculty of Mining and Geology, Belgrade, Serbia, (2010) 39-81. [8] Roughton, J.; Crutchfield, N.: Job Hazard analysis: A guide for voluntary compliance and beyond, (Hardcover), Butterworth Heinemann, Burlington, MA, USA, (2007) pp. 129-142. [9] www.vanguardsw.com ,Internet references, (access 26.08.2010./20 hour). [10] Radosavljevi, S.: Technical Diagnostics Systems and Risk Analysis in Mining, VIII International Symposium, Mechanization And Automation In Mining And Energy, MAREN 2010, Lazarevac (2010). p. 158-161. [11] Radosavljevi, S.; Radosavljevi, M.: Contemporary models for risk analysis in mining Serbia, Tehnika dijagnostika, ISSN 1451-1975., Broj 1., Beograd, (2009), p. 17-24. [12] Radosavljevi, S.; Radosavljevi, M.: Risk technical systems: model and sotware Designsafe 5.0., International Journal of Software Systems and Tools, (IJSST), Volume 1., Number 1., (2009),pp. 45-53. [13] Radosavljevi, S.; Radosavljevi, M.: Hazop Analysis Of Mining-Management Application, Tehnika dijagnostika, ISSN 1451-1975., Years 7., number 2., Beograd, (2008), p. 25-32. [14] Radosavljevi, S.: Risk management in mining, Scientific And Technical Journal For Quality Improvement, ISSN 0354-2408, Quality, Poslovna politika, Beograd, number 7-8-2007., p. 68-72. [15] Sultan, K.S.; Ismail, M.A.; Al-Moisheer, A.S: Mixture of two inverse Weibull distributions: Properties and estimation, Computational Statistics & Data Analysis, vol. 51, (2007) p. 5377-5387. [16] Main, W.B: Risk Assessment: Basics and Benchmarks, Design safety engineering, inc, ann Arbor, Michigan, (2005), p. 21-23. [17] IS CEI 300-3-9. Part 3. Dependability management - Application guide-Section 9: Risk analysis of technological systems, 1995-12, (1995), p. 36-38. [18] Michael, S.; Joane, D.; Joseph, F.; Joseph, M.; Jan, R.: Fault Tree Handbook with Aerospace Applicationc, NASA Office of Safety and Mission Assurance-NASA Headquarters, Washington, DC 20546, (2002), p. 28, p. 12-20, p. 22-26. [19] [20] Martin, S.: Safety Analyse of Steam Turbine with Accessories, Faculty of Mechanical Engineering-Institute of Automation and Computer Science, BRNO 2008, (2008), p 17-25.

1210

[20] Michael, J.B.; Launa, G.M.: Focus on Prevention: Conducting a Hazard Risk Assessment, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health Pittsburgh Researc Laboratory, Pittsburgh, (2003), p. 3-5. [21] Biehl, M.; Prater, E.; Mcintyre, J.R.: Remote Repair, diagnostics, and Maintenance, Communications of the ACM, vol. 47, November 2004, (2004), p 101-106. [22] Jiang, R.; Murthy, P.: Models involving two inverse Weibull distributions, Reliability Engineering & System Safety, vol. 73, (2001), p. 73-81. [23] Etherton, J.; Main, B.; Clouthier, D.; Christensen, W.: Reducing risk on machinery: A field evaluation pilot study of risk assessment. Available from the author of the present article. Manuscript in review with Risk Analysis editor. (2007), p. 197-211. [24] ISO/CD TR 14121-2:2007: Safety of Machinery-Risk, Assessment-Part 2: Practical Guidance and Examples of Methods. Geneva, (2007), p. 17-19. [25] Main, W.B.; Cloutier, R.D.; Manuele, A.F;, Bloswick S.D.: Risk Assessment for Maintenance Work, Design safety engineering, inc, ann Arbor, Michigan, (2005), p. 59-61. [26] Afrazeh, A.; Bartsch, H.: Human Reliability and Flight Safety, International Journal of Reliability, Quality and Safety Engineering, Vol. 14, No. 5(2007), pp. 501-516. [27] Dhillon, B.S.: Reliability, Quality and Safety for Engineers, SRC Press, Boca Raton, (2005), P. 237. [28] Zio, E.: Computational Methods for Reliability and Risk Analysis, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd., Singapore, (2007), 362 p. [29] Nachlas, J.A.: Reliability Engineering, Probabilistic Models and Maintenance Methods, Taylor and Francis Group, Boca Raton, (2005), 403 p.

1211

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SOCIALLY RESPONSIBLE COMPANY IN BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA - COCA - COLA HBC BH DOO SARAJEVO
3

private sector, East Sarajevo , 2 Ministry of FBiH, Sarajevo prof. , Ministry of Defence of Bosnia and Herzegovina, I. Sarajevo, e-mail: radovanovic_danka@yahoo.com

Danka Radovanovic1, Nadija Bukvi2, Boro Todorovic3

Key words: responsibility, society, business, profit, local community, world standards, better and more beautiful future.

1. INTRODUCTION
To be able to discuss the topic of "socially responsible" companies (in English CSR - Corporate Social Responsibility) must first explain a closer meaning of the term. CSR is a concept in the organization, saying that the company must serve the general utility and welfare of the environment in which it is located, and in the following ways: economic, ecological, cultural, health and so on. In addition, CSR is associated with the principle of sustainable development and thus the total value of the company is no longer measured solely price of its shares or the height of her financial gain but taking into account its environmental and utjicaj post

2. INCLUDINGS CSR?
Aspects of CSR, we have already stated in the introduction, but it has many more and each one is special in its own way. Also, each covering a specific area of interest, and combine multiple aspects can cover a wide range of interest groups (if not all) of the community in which the company is located. 2.1. Ecology Currently the biggest area of focus. Recent events have led relationship of ecology and responsibility of companies on the front pages of newspapers. No, the issue of ecology has long been a wake up a lot of attention at the general public. Highlighting the importance of ecology and giving the public the knowledge to realize the responsibility towards this issue, companies can very strongly affect the positive development of its own image. True that it can (and some probably do) cheat the public, but companies that take care of the environment seriously accept part of CSR principles. 2.2. Employees It is also one of the areas of CSR aktualnijih cares about employees. Whether it was focused on health, education, dokolovanje, family, or something similar, this strongly affects primarily the responsibility of the internal factors in the company, and only secondarily on the environment. Motivation, seriousness, and relaxation are just some of the benefits resulting from concern about their employees. 2.3. Saving resources / Recycling Directly related to the first item, ecology, saving resources not only helps reduce costs, but building the image of environmentally aware of the company. Through recycling proves to be recognized using the new standards iskoristivih material, not the application of consumable materials and not preradivi.

1212

2.4. Environmentally friendly businesses Under this name hides one of the latest trends, and it means construction companies on the environment acceptable manner. This means: watch out for appearance, color, height and some other basic characteristics of companies in order to better rate with the environment. At first sight unnecessary aspect of CSR, according to various surveys is shown as a very important factor when you look at the impact on the environment. Therefore, it is important to say that CSR involves all stakeholders (stakeholders) - business partners, local communities, clients or customers, shareholders and investors, financial institutions, research and educational institutions, government, media, and of course employees. And although companies make decisions primarily on various financial indicators such as profits and dividends, supporting CSR in the business account should be taken and the current and long-term effects and consequences of those decisions on the environment and social issues.

3. WHY AND HOW TO IMPLEMENT CSR

One of the questions that arises when we talk about CSR is the maximization of profit. The owners of each company are Her shareholders who would be alone should decide what to do with the money earned. Often the approach to CSR in the philanthropic, which means that it is a good deed, that companies give scholarships, paid money to charities and the like. and all this in order to improve or even create the perception of socially responsible companies as either the consumer or end-state power [2]. Benevolence are short-term solutions and decisions on these solutions do not make the underlying shareholders, but managers. Philanthropic approach is essentially split the money and CSR in krajenjem end, remote and more beautiful future. Offended the opinion that business leaders do not care about social responsibility and not postihli world status "playing fair". Primijer are cited as Jack Welch and General Elektriks which caused a lot of natural pollution and Bill Gates and Microsoft, where Gates trotu aggressive policy to achieve the current financial status and the possibility of community. The fact is that business is not an ideal world and that nothing is ever black and white, but there are companies like IBM, Motorola and Coca-Cola, by and with the CSR achieve successful results. Often, small businesses just ignore the CSR with the excuse that they are not big companies that earn a lot of money so it can "share" and that it is difficult to deal with their own problems such as dismissal of workers, morale in the company and the like. and can not "waste time" dealing with social issues. The thing is only in the strategy and management of CSR-om. Even in the recently shown episode evog BBC documentary "Planet Earth" talked about the difficult times in which humanity has found. They were talking about the already visible effects of short-term and long-term projections of what we all expected if you do not osvijestimo world economy on the burning issues - both producers and consumers. Not pollute the solution even more talented people to forgive, ignore the change in consumer behavior toward socially responsible companies, do not patronize the community and prevent education of young people. Most ljusi as a responsible government and the companies that omaju big impact. Lobbying for legislation they indirectly contribute to development of local communities and their primijerom show times and other companies. The main objective of CSR is to achieve a positive impact on society, cultural differences and improve business results by using knowledge of their employees, communities and government institutions. There is a difference in the perception of CSR philosophy in the U.S. and Europe [2]. In the U.S. no longer uses the philanthropic approach - it is important to pay taxes, and companies donate money to some charities. In Europe, CSR-oriented approach so that the company operates in socially responsible way of investing in the local community and people. With a good strategy and management of CSR-om and maximize profit and value and public perception of the company.

4. A POSITIVE EXAMPLE - Coca-Cola SARAJEVO, BOSNIA AND HERCEGOVINA [8]

The concept of corporate responsibility and sustainability are an integral part of business. Commitment to this way of thinking is reflected in the mission and values which the company promotes. Corporate social responsibility takes place in key business plans and how to evaluate the work of our employees. Key areas of interest Because of the importance of the challenges related to the environment and the community is growing steadily, so the direct and efforts that are invested in their resolution. As a priority we highlight the issues that are most important for business investors, and they are:

1213

preservation conservation packaging Consumer development of waste

of energy

water resources management and and

resources climate recycling Health

of

their

employees

These key areas are in direct conjunction with their business imperatives. Thus, for example, initiatives related to health Consumer help them to expand sales asportiman and so respond to the growing consumer interest in health and good fitness. In a similar manner, striving to achieve greater efficiency programs to support the care of the environment, reduce energy use, water and materials to ensure pakovanje.Kako to effectively contribute in terms of sustainability initiatives, consult, and often working in partnership with investors. Managing corporate social responsibility Performance in the area of corporate social responsibility as rigorously monitored as any other segment of their business. Inter-sectoral team of corporate social responsibility is in charge of corporate social responsibility programs and directly accountable to the Director General who is responsible for overall performance. The team also reports to the Commission indirectly for corporate social responsibility at the Group, which monitors the overall performance of the company and reports to the Commission for Corporate Social Responsibility Board of Directors. Adopt and implement the leading standards, set goals and regularly monitor progress on this polju.Pored these activities, the annual report on performance achieved in the annual report on corporate social responsibility Group. Corporate social responsibility is one of the main quality that we expect from the director, and as such, is included in the assessment of their performance. Culture of sustainable development These activities and reports are just one way in which corporate social responsibility in making daily business. They also focused on capacity building and sustainable development of culture, as they were known for their business sign Youth Development We support the development of young people and their programs seek to help young people build confidence and gain leadership skills, as well as the activities of AIESEC, one of the leading student association in Bosnia and Herzegovina, aimed at developing future leaders and have a positive impact on drutvo.Pored AIESEC, supported by other organizations, students and young people and to develop and promote the same values. Support young people who in some way need special panja.Ve for many years, Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo working with "Christine Witcutt" all-day care center for children with special needs, and continuously support the activities of similar centers throughout Bosnia and Herzegovina Sport and physical activity Promoting sport and encouraging people of all age children to practice physical activities are at the center of their social initiatives. Every year, thousands of people actively participating in their sports and fitness activities itom Bosnia and Herzegovina. As part of Coca-Cola sports initiatives, podravajo many activities in the field of popular and professional sports. These programs are implemented in cooperation with international associations including FIFA, UEFA or the IOC. At the state level, the proud partner of the Olympic Committee of Bosnia and Herzegovina (OKBiH). For a number of years, Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo supports sports events such as the Sarajevo Olympus halfmarathon, which annually brings together an increasing number of participants from different countries. In addition to community sports programs, support and campaigns that promote active lifestyle among young people, such as the International Basketball Tournament, Gimnazijada (sports tournament that brings together high school students) and sports activities that include elementary schools like Winter swimming tournaments, football tournaments and "Ladybug" . Environment The goal is to reduce the impact of its operations on the environment. Part of that effort makes the application of internationally recognized environmental management system ISO 14001, and working on their full homologation in all countries where we operate. In Bosnia and Herzegovina, we have introduced ISO 14001 2003rd Since then apply it. Efforts to preserve the environment are focused on three areas that most influence and can therefore make a significant contribution.

1214

These are: preservation of water resources energy conservation and climate packaging waste management and recycling. Set performance targets for all the above areas and report on its progress in its annual report on corporate social responsibility Group. Also, the bottling operations in relation to the environment is regularly controlled by the standards of The Coca-Cola Company. Just as you reduce your impact on the environment, and is collaborating with others in addressing broader issues of sustainability. Working with governmental and non-governmental organizations and other organizations that support environmental preservation and education. Reporting on their progress Reporting on progress is an important part njihovogdijaloga with intresnim parties. The results reported in the group report. Coca-Cola Hellenic follows the provisions of the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI), the main framework for reporting on odrivosti.Jo since 2003. The company regularly publishes reports on the progress of business, a global agreement under the UN, since 2005. was accepted as a prominent reporter. On the road to sustainability Sustainable development is key to meeting the needs of the modern era imposed, but not at the cost of generation options that are dolazeDanas still far from achieving this goal. The problems of modern times, such as climate change and water shortages, are becoming alarming. Each individual must make an effort to overcome these problems. The role of the private sector is particularly important, given that this sector offers innovation, investment and expertise. By working together with government, NGOs and community, business sector can help overcome the challenges we all face. The Coca-Cola HBC B-H Ltd. Sarajevo, trying to make its contributions to sustainable development. Yet since 2002. was actively working to reduce the impact on the environment and invest in the community in which they operate. Work with partners to promote healthy and active lifestyle. As an example we can mention the cooperation on projects such as: "Sarajevo Olympus halfmarathon, Mostar street race, this race" Run to the mountains "" Run to Europe "and sporting events such as, Gimnazijada," apmpion junior "as well as cooperation with the Club water sports Novo Sarajevo and the handball club "Bosna - BH gas. Also, the impact of operations on the environment tend to minimum.Ovo consciousness is not just altruism, this paragraph used to their business. Reducing the impact on the environment-ie. the amount of water, energy and packaging which are used in the production of our beverages operate more efficiently. Effectively reduce costs and risks associated with long-term development poslovanja.Inicijativama related to sustainability, released its own capacity for innovation. Programs gained a reputation as the leading companies and their employees say they are proud to work with Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo. Wu assistance if a natural disaster and disaster To ensure clean drinking water is one of the highest priorities in the areas affected by flood, drought or other catastrophe or disaster. As a producer of beverages, njihovaj e duty in such situations to provide immediate assistance. In collaboration with other agencies to provide assistance, engage our people and resources to ensure prompt delivery of drinking water to those in need. When Bosnia-Herzegovina in January 2010. The severe floods hit, Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo was immediately reacted in coordination with the Red Cross of Bosnia and Herzegovina has organized the delivery of bottled drinking water in the most vulnerable areas across the country. Provide support to affected communities where necessary, helping them recover and rebuild after disasters and natural disasters. Some of these activities and support for mine clearance actions and educational campaigns aimed at raising awareness. While the war in Bosnia and Herzegovina ended 15 years ago, still there are many minefields. According to estimates, the 13.077 registered minefields remaining 220,000 mines and unexploded ordnance, which Bosnia and Herzegovina, the number of mines, makes it one of the most polluted countries in Europe. Over the past 15 years, since the end of the war up to now, registered 1.665 mine victims perished, including 328 children. As part of activities in the area of social responsibility, Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo is a community recognized as a leader in helping the mining stocks with the aim of achieving the vision of "Bosnia and Herzegovina free of mines to 2019th year. Organized by the Embassy of Canada and the United States and in cooperation with the American Chamber of Commerce (AmCham) in Bosnia and Herzegovina, Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo was involved in humanitarian action symbolic called "Night of Thousand Dinners" - which established a partnership between the private and public sectors in support of mining shares, with the goal of collecting sredstava.Coca-Cola HBC Ltd. Sarajevo has been recognized as a key corporate donor, and her award was awarded "Gold Sponsor" for consistent and continuous support to achieve the vision of "Bosnia and Herzegovina without mine." We believe

1215

that raising awareness and education about the dangers of mines the best way to achieve this vision without fatal consequences. Therefore, as a continuation of our activities in this field, since 2004. The work with the Red Cross of Bosnia and Herzegovina on a campaign to raise awareness about the dangers of mines among children of school age. Coca-Cola HBC B-H Ltd. Sarajevo continued support quiz contest "Think mines" that are organized across the country in which, until now, involved several thousand students. Awards and prizes Coca-Cola HBC B-H Ltd. trying to operate responsibly, consistently producing, high-quality drinks, and thereby reducing the impact on the environment and bringing benefits to their employees, customers, consumers and communities. Were honored as in Bosnia and Herzegovina received many awards for his work, which are some of the evidence of quality, commitment and reputation to enjoy the communities they operate AN 2009 The award for best business practices in the field of corporate social responsibility "GOOD 09" given the CocaCola HBC BH doo Sarajevo in March 2009. year for the previous year. In order to promote corporate social responsibility and raising awareness of its importance among companies in Bosnia and Herzegovina, the Foundation "Mosaic", under the motto "It's good to be good", organized this competition AIESEC - Most popular EMPLOYER AWARD AIESEC, the largest international association of students, appointed by the Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo as one of the most desirable employers in the country. Coca-Cola HBC Ltd. Sarajevo has been recognized as a preferred employer 2006th , and that status is retained in the next three years. At the event "Days of students 'career' (Career Days), organized by AIESEC, including more than 30 companies that have competed in various fields of business, Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo, has been awarded this prestigious recognition by winning more than 79% of the total votes. According to the survey pleasant working environment, opportunities for advancement and training, the reputation of the company, initial pay and flexible management style are listed as critical factors. American Chamber of Commerce - THE "GOLD SPONSOR" American Chamber of Commerce awarded the 2009 Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo award "Gold Sponsor" for the consistent support in achieving the vision of "Bosnia and Herzegovina free of mines by 2019. In May 2010th The American Chamber of Commerce awarded the Coca-Cola HBC BH doo Sarajevo award "Gold Sponsor" for the partnership project "UNICEF" Thousands of small osmejha "project support early development of children, with special emphasis on children from vulnerable groups of society and marginaliziraih, some of which live in isolated rural areas. Certificates Business bottling Coca-Cola HBC B-H Ltd. Sarajevo is conducted according to internationally recognized standards and management systems related to quality, health, Food Safety, environment, health and safety at work. In Bosnia and Herzegovina have received certificates for the following categories: Quality (ISO 9001:2008) - production, storage and distribution of soft drinks market and cooling equipment Environment (ISO 140 001: 2004) - production, storage and distribution of soft drinks market and cooling equipment Health and Safety at Work (OHSAS 18001) - production of soft drinks Health food safety (ISO 22000) - production, storage and distribution market of soft drinks and natural spring water All beverages produced in the Coca-Cola HBC B-H Ltd. Sarajevo must be in accordance with the legislation of Bosnia and Herzegovina, and meet or exceed standards of quality and safety of food products. Community In every community where we operate our goal is to be a good neighbor and contributing to quality of life. Economic bring benefit to their business, and also help and investment programs in the community. Position Judi employ 330 in its filling stations and within other business operations in Bosnia and Herzegovina. The aim is to provide challenging and satisfying careers to its employees, as well as safe working place organized by the principle of fairness is the optimal working conditions. We have been recognized for our efforts, receiving awards such as employer:

1216

5. GLOBAL STANDARDS AND INITIATIVES One of the most world organizations dealing with CSR-om the GRI (Global Reporting Initiative). This is a great multi-stakeholderska "organization that brings together thousands of experts from countries around the world to participate in the work of the GRI's to promote the basic principles of GRI's. Specifically, they incorporate transparency, accountability, reporting and sustainable development, and they are trying to promote, implement and accelerate. Advocate for the equality of reports of, for example, environmental and social work, and reports on finances The main point of their guidelines that companies should follow in order to properly spent and reported on the above matters. Since 1997. when the organization began its work and to this day more than 900 companies / organizations issued reports mentioned the GRI guidelines. His work will continue to systematically develop and pursue common development in the world economy and continue to support socially responsible business behavior. 6. CONCLUSION The importance of CSR and after this work do not have to emphasize once more, but it should prezentovaati javnosti.Nae opinion is that the whole concept of CSR and the Bosnian public under-represented, and finally the public is not aware of the real significance of it. CSR is the future and one of the guidelines of sustainable development. It should be installed as soon as possible to all companies and time to follow the world trend and the domestic companies. REFERENCES [1] http://www.mallenbaker.net/csr/ [2] http://www.mallenbaker.net/csr/CSRfiles/against.html [3] http://www.coca-colahbc.hr/hr/social_efficiency/ [4] http://www.hep.hr/hep/okolis/default.aspx [5] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corporate_social_responsibility [6] http://www.ksg.harvard.edu/m-rcbg/CSRI/ [7] http://www.globalreporting.org/Home [8] http://www.cchellenic.ba/bh/compani

1217

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

CAD MODELING AND NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF TWO IMPLANTED LUMBAR SPINE UNITS
C. Sftescu-Jescu1, D.I. Stoia2, L. Bereteu3
1

Politehnica University of Timisoara, Timisoara, ROMANIA, e-mail: cristi@cmpicsu.upt.ro 2 e-mail: ionut@cmpicsu.upt.ro, 3e-mail: liviu.bereteu@mec.upt.ro

Summary: The paper presents a study on two concepts of lumbar spine implants, in order to model and simulate new solutions for different degenerated lumbar units, followed by implant manufacturing and testing, in specialized laboratories. Both fusion and non-fusion implants were taken into account to design realistic implanted lumbar spine units, next following to endure stresses through a static structural simulation, using the Finite Element Method. In order to achieve the goal of the paper, Mimics 13 and Geomagic Studio 11 software for 3D reconstructions, SolidWorks 2007 for modeling, and Ansys WorkBench 11 for numerical analysis were used. Keywords: CT reconstruction, CAD modeling, Finite Element Method, implanted lumbar unit.

1. INTRODUCTION
Due to the constructive and functional complexity of the human spine, studying and understanding the physical, chemical, mechanical phenomenon, that occur in the spine represents a real challenge. Thus, its transposition into a virtual model, determining the forces acting on the spine during everyday activities, static and dynamic numerical analysis, modeling and testing of spinal implants are just a few branches of a research field found at the crossroad of two fundamental science entities: engineering and medicine The lumbar segment affections, also known as low back pain, represent a frequent disorder among people all over the world. Statistics show that approximately 70-80% of adults reported low back pain, at least once, in a lifetime. In fact, lumbar injuries became the second most common reason for seeing a doctor, the third most common reason for requiring a surgical procedure and the fifth reason for hospitalization [1]. The lumbar spine connects both the upper and the lower body, bearing a person most amount of weight. Due to this important function one may be easily injured when lifting heavy objects, reaching for something or even twisting. Other factors causing low back pain may refer to being over-weighted, having the incorrect posture at the workplace or suffering of degenerative disc disease. A positive aspect is the fact that, in many situations, low back pain disappears after a few weeks, following a minimal treatment. A surgical approach on the spine is rarely recommended as an initial solution, for most of the patients, surgery occurs after a three to six months therapy. Nevertheless, some records show surgery as an immediate procedure, especially for individuals aged 45 to 64 [2]. Lumbar implants are devices that surgeons use for decompressing and stabilizing the spine, trying, as much as possible, to maintain the joints anatomical mobility. Decompression implies the release of pressure on the spinal cord or nerve roots, while spine stabilization includes the vertebrae fusion, using bone grafts. In spite the technological progress during the last decades, the spine implantology field continues to raise questions regarding the efficiency of both procedures and devices taken into account, based on the design model or pre-/post-operative indicators. The paper presents a study of two implanted lumbar spine units, consisting in two vertebrae, L4 and L5, two stabilization cages and an anterior screw-plate system, for the first lumbar unit (fusion), and a total disc replacement for the second lumbar unit (non-fusion).

1218

2. METHODS
The present study followed a series of three steps: present status synthesis regarding lumbar implants, modeling the spinal unit components and Finite Element Analysis of the designed anatomical features. 2.1. Modeling The modeling process was focused on: vertebrae, anterior plate, intervertebral cages, and total disc replacement. 2.1.1. Vertebra modeling A basic functionality condition of any implant is defined by its geometry related to the place of insertion. Therefore, to obtain realistic models, the anatomical components (L4 and L5 vertebra) of the lumbar units were designed. The virtual reconstruction consisted in creating masks and generating 3D solids, during different working phases, from a rough-shaped form to an adequate functional model. A mask represents a collection of pixels, on which all the operations (editing, regional growing) and calculations (3D calculations, STL) are based [3]. The software used to reconstruct the vertebrae was MIMICS 13, an interactive program for visualizing and segmentation of CT images. For the performed study, a 50 year old male, accusing low back pain, was scanned, with a slice thickness of 1.5 mm. At the beginning, the entire lumbar spine was selected (figure 1), operation necessitating 177 slices, of 267mm length, and a threshold value corresponding to the cortical bone.

Figure 1: Rough-shaped form of lumbar spine, lateral and posterior view. The second phase implied the lumbar segment isolation from the surrounding bodies (figure 2). The masks were edited in sagittal, transversal or coronary planes, depending on the situation, by closing the contours, from the segmentation module. Each change generated a new mask, and implicitly, another 3D body, increasing the size of the working file and decreasing the computer resources. It is recommended to use a minimum number of masks.

Figure 2: Isolating the lumbar spine

1219

The separation and finalization of the L4 vertebra model (figure 3) followed the segmentation. A number of 41 slices, covering 62mm, length were used. After closing the contours a smoothing command was applied, defined by 5 iterations and a 0.9 geometrical factor.

Figure 3: 3D reconstruction of L4 vertebra The L5 vertebra was obtained following the same step succession, the 3D bodies being exported as point clouds, for future editing in different software. 2.1.2. Stabilization system modeling The anterior bone plate has two important roles: to restore the intervertebral disc natural height and to maintain stability during spinal fusion. An important aspect of the implant design consists in allowing the surgeons a fast and easy customization, depending on the unique anatomy of each patient. The lumbar stabilization implant system (figure 4) is composed of a lumbar conjugated shape plate, four bone screws and a locking screw system.

Figure 4: Lumbar stabilization implant system: 1 - bone plate; 2 - bone screws; 3 - locking system. Stability is obtained by attaching the bone plate (figure 5) to the vertebral body, while the bone screws (figure 6) are self-tapping, reducing the surgical intervention time interval. Bone screws may be used both for fixed or variable implantation angles. This type of implant is a temporary one, being extracted after the fusin process is over.

Figure 5: Anterior lumbar bone plate

1220

The anterior bone plate size is 27x24x3.5 mm, while the bone screws have a 4mm diameter, 20mm length, 1.5mm pitch, 13.5 revolutions at a 270 angle. Both components are light-weighted, with 7g for the bone plate and 1g for the bone screws, considering the same manufacturing material Ti-6Al-4V.

Figure 6: Bone screw and the locking system A truncated shape was considered to design the intervertebral cage geometry (figure 7), due to the fact that in the insertion area L4-L5, the consecutive vertebrae mutual position is deviated with a specific angle for each individual.

Figure 7: Intervertebral cage The parallel threaded areas of the cage ease the implantation procedure, while the other bevel help creating a better accommodation. The cage orifices have a crucial role in bone fusion and osteointegration, the cage being filled with bone graft for lumbar stabilization. When dimensioning the implant, the geometry of both the appropriate vertebra and the disc were taken into account. 2.1.3. Total disc replacement modeling Design of a total disc replacement involves specific constructive approaches, compared to the previous presented implants, due to the important role of restoring the anatomical mobility between the vertebrae. The intervertebral joint is considered a spherical one, thus the components of the model are based on a ball-socket joint. Following the anatomical structure of the intervertebral disc, resulted a three parts assembly, two metallic and one plastic, each serving well defined purpose. The inferior component (1 in figure 8) presents a profile, in the transversal plane, similar to the L5 vertebra, replacing the intervertebral disc inferior end-plate, and in the anterior plane, a stair step cut up profile. The clutch at the vertebra is realized using a base peg. The intermediary component (2 in figure 8) is inserted, by translation, into the inferior component, creating a small subassembly. As seen from a frontal view, the upper part has a spherical cup shape. The last component of the implant (3 in figure 8) is similar to the first one. In the inferior side a spherical region is cut up, with the same radius as the intermediary component, defining the intervertebral joint, and in the upper side it clutches at the L4 vertebra, through a peg.

1221

Figure 8: Total lumbar disc replacement: 1-inferior component; 2-intermediary component; 3-superior component. 2.2. Numerical Analysis The resulted implanted lumbar unit was exported to Ansys Workbench simulating environment, next following a static structural analysis using the Finite Element Method. Problems occurred while processing the L4 and L5 vertebrae geometries, the 3D bodies of the anatomical structures presenting holes (figure 9).

Figure 9: Vertebra L4 imported in Ansys After the image reconstruction, point clouds were obtained from a large number of nodes, concentrated into volumes of many surfaces. Despite the nodes significant decrease, the result was the same. In order to achieve a proper model, the Geomagic Studio software was used to reconstruct the lumbar vertebrae, from point clouds, to polygonal phases and finally, as a 3D volume. The number of surfaces was a lot smaller, the geometrical proportions remaining the same (figure 10).

Figure 10: L4 vertebra, post-processing in Geomagic Studio The meshing of the implanted lumbar units was considered implicit for all the components (figure 11). The material properties used were taken from the scientific literature [4]. Both models were tested for flexion, the forces considered in the study being adopted from different experiments, in vivo and in vitro, along the time. The body weight on L4-L5 was approximated at 450N, and the moment of flexion at 15Nm [4]. The analysis results regarding the maximum equivalent stress of the total disc replacement, as well as for the fusion implanted are presented in figure 12.

1222

Figure 11: Meshing the implanted lumbar unit

Figure 12: Maximal equivalent stress

3. CONCLUSION
The study succeeds in creating two implanted lumbar units, one using fusion implants, the other possessing a total disc replacement. The accuracy of the design is justified by the anatomical components, the L4 and L5 vertebrae, reconstructed from CT images, belonging to a 50 year old male, accusing low back pain. For the total disc replacement of the lumbar unit, the maximum equivalent stress appears at the contact surface between the superior endplate and L4 vertebra, measuring 103MPa, a high value, but in a tolerated anatomical interval. This marks the place where the load transfer takes place. Regarding fusion implanted lumbar unit, the maximum equivalent stress appears at the contact surface between the L4 vertebra and intervertebral cage, measuring 131MPa along the exterior transversal channels (figure 12). A more rigorous study on the forces that influence the movement of the spine, as well as a more precise meshing would have an important impact on the results.

AKNOWLEDGEMENT
This work was partially supported by the strategic grant POSDRU 6/1.5/s/13, (2008) of the Ministry of Labor, Family and Social Protection, Romania, co-financed by the European Social Fund Investing in people.

REFERENCES
[1] Kurtz, S.: Spine Technology Handbook, ISBN 13: 978-0-12-369390-7, pp. 21-30, Elsevier, Amsterdam, 2006. [2] Back pain statistics. Available on Web site: http://headsuponyourbody.blogspot.com/2008_06_01_archive.html, Accessed on20.03.2010. [3] MIMICS Financial Software. Available on Web site: http://www.mimics.com, Accessed on 12.04.2010. [4] Middleditch, A.: Functional Anatomy of the Spine. ISBN 0 750 62717 4, Elsevier, London 2005. [5] Rohlmann, A.: Determination of trunk muscle forces for flexion and extension by using a validated finite element model of the lumbar spine and measured in vivo data, Journal of Biomechanics 39 (2006) pp. 981 989.

1223

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

FIXED POINT PROPERTIES IN CONTINUOUS ENGINEERING MAXIMIZATION

Zdravko Dimitrov Slavov
Varna Free University, Varna, BULGARIA, e-mail: slavovibz@yahoo.com

Summary: In the present paper we study the Pareto solutions in the continuous engineering maximization problems. We discus the role of some assumptions of objective functions and feasible domain, relationship between them and the fixed point properties of Pareto sets. Keywords: continuous engineering maximization, Pareto-optimal, Pareto-front, fixed point, convex, compact.

1. INTRODUCTION
During the last four decades, the structure of the Pareto solutions in the continuous engineering optimization problems has attracted much attention for researchers, see [5], [8], [10], [11], [12] and [13] for more details. The aim of this paper is to present some new facts on fixed point properties of Pareto-optimal and Pareto-front sets in an engineering maximization problem. The standard form of the continuous engineering maximization problem is to find a variable x( x1 , x2 ,..., xm ) R m , m 1 , so as to maximize f (x ) = ( f1 (x ), f 2 (x ),..., f n (x )) subject to x X , where the feasible domain X is nonempty, J n = { 1,2,..., n} is the index set, n 2 , f i : X R is a given continuous function for all i J n [4]. Since the objective functions { fi }in=1 may conflict with each other, it is usually difficult to obtain the global maximum for each objective function at the same time. Therefore, the target of the maximization problem is to achieve a set of solutions that are Pareto-optimal. The notion of Pareto optimality was introduced by Vilfredo Pareto in 1896. such that f i ( y ) f i (x ) for all i J n and f k ( y ) > f k (x ) for some k J n . The set of the Pareto-optimal solutions of X is denoted by PO( X , f ) and is called Pareto-optimal set. The set PF ( X , f ) = f ( PO( X , f )) is called Pareto-front set. In this paper, let the feasible domain X be compact. It is well-known that PO( X , f ) and PF ( X , f ) are nonempty, and PF ( X , f ) bdf ( X ) [8]. One of the most important problems of engineering maximization is the investigation of the topological properties of the Pareto-optimal and Pareto-front sets. Information about structure of these sets is very important for computational algorithms generating Pareto solutions [5] [13]. Consideration of topological properties of the Pareto solutions sets is started by [10], see also [2], [5], [8] and [11]. In particular, consideration of fixed point properties of Pareto-optimal and Pareto-front sets is started by [12]. Definition 1. A point x X is called Pareto-optimal solution if and only if there does not exist a point y X

1224

2. DEFINITIONS AND NOTIONS

Recall some topological definitions. Definition 2. The set Y X is a retract of X if and only if there exists a continuous function r : X Y such that r ( x ) = x for all x Y . The function r is called a retraction. From a more formal viewpoint, a retraction is a function r : X Y such that r o r ( x) = r ( x ) for all x X , since this equation says exactly that r is the identity on its image. Retractions are the topological analogs of projection operators in other part of engineering mathematics. Definition 3. The topological space Y is said to have a fixed point property if and only if every continuous function h : Y Y from this set into itself has a fixed point, i.e. there is a point x Y such that x = h( x) . Let us consider a multifunction : Y Y . Let it be upper semi-continuous with nonempty, compact and convex images, shortly we say that is cusco. Definition 4. The topological space Y is said to have a Kakutani fixed point property if and only if every cusco : Y Y has a fixed point, i.e. there is a point x Y such that x ( x) . Fixed point and Kakutani fixed point properties of sets are preserved under retraction [7]. This means that the following statements are true: if the set X has the fixed point property and Y is a retract of X , then set Y has the fixed point property too; if the set X has the Kakutani fixed point property and Y is a retract of X , then set Y has the Kakutani fixed point property too. Remark 1. The Kakutani fixed point property is very closely related to the fixed point property. If S R n has the Kakutani fixed point property, then since any continuous function can be viewed as a cusco it follows that the set S will also have the fixed point property. Remark 2. Let S R n be compact. It can be shown that the set S having the Kakutani fixed point property is equivalent to S having the fixed point property. Remark 1 has shown that if S has the Kakutani fixed point property, then S has the fixed point property. Now, let : S S be cusco, S have the fixed point property and gph( ) = {( x, y ) S S | y ( x)} . From Cellinas Theorem it follows that there is an approximate continuous selection h of [1] [3]. That is, for each k N there exists a continuous function hk : S S such that d (( x, hk ( x)), gph( )) <
1 for all x S . From the assumption that S has the fixed point property, it follows k

that the function hk has a fixed point xk S . As a result we get a sequence {xk } k =1 S such that
1 , i.e. the point ( xk , xk ) approaches the set gph( ) . The set S is compact, implying that k ( k ) } there exists a convergent subsequence {xm m ( k ) =1 {xk }k =1 such that lim xm ( k ) = x0 S . We also see that d (( xk , xk ), gph( )) <
k

1 . But is cusco, then gph( ) is closed. Taking the limit as k we have m( k ) ( k ) , xm ( k ) ) = ( x0 , x0 ) gph( ) . This means that x0 S is the fixed point for , see m(k ) and obtain lim ( xm ( k ) , xm ( k ) ), gph( )) < d (( xm
k

also [6]. Finally, we find that S has the Kakutani fixed point property. We use R m and R n as the genetic finite-dimensional vector spaces. In addition, we also introduce the following notations: for every two vectors x, y R n , x( x1 , x2 ,..., xn ) = y ( y1 , y2 ,..., yn ) means xi = yi for all i J n , x( x1 , x2 ,..., xn ) y ( y1 , y2 ,..., yn ) means xi yi for all i J n (weakly componentwise order), x( x1 , x2 ,..., xn ) > y ( y1 , y2 ,..., yn ) means xi > yi for all i J n (strictly componentwise order), and x( x1 , x2 ,..., xn ) y ( y1 , y2 ,..., yn ) means xi yi for all i J n and xk > yk for some k J n (componentwise order).

1225

3. MAIN RESULT
There are two basic techniques for finding a single Pareto-optimal solution. The first technique forms a convex combination of the objective functions and we must solve the following optimization problem: maximize

n j =1

w j f j ( x) subject to

x X , where weights {w j }nj=1 R+

and

n j =1

w j = 1 . By choosing different weights {w j }nj=1 we can identify different Pareto-optimal solutions.

The second technique is related to goal programming and classification techniques. It maximizes one objective function to achieving a given goal. Without loss of generality, let f1 be the objective function and z R n 1 . So now, we must solve the following optimization problem: maximize f1 ( x) subject to f k ( x) zk , k = 2,3,..., n and x X . By choosing different z and different objective function we can identify different Pareto-optimal solutions. But, we are interested in finding the whole solution set PO( X , f ) . As a result, we consider a hybrid technique and solve the following optimization problem: for each x X

maximize

n j =1

f j ( y ) subject to f ( y ) f ( x) and y X . This hybrid technique will allow us to find the whole

Pareto-optimal solutions. First of all, begin with the following definition: (1) Define a multifunction : X X by (x ) = {y X | f ( y ) f ( x)} for all x X . (2) Define a function s : X R by s(x ) = j =1 f j (x ) for all x X .
n

In this paper, we will discus the role of the following assumptions in the continuous engineering maximization problem, relationship between them and the fixed point properties of Pareto sets. Assumption 1. X is convex. Assumption 2. Arg max( s, ( x)) = 1 for all x X .
Assumption 3. If d is a metric in R m , {xi }i = 0 X and lim d ( xk , x0 ) = 0 , then lim d ( y0 , ( xk )) = 0 for all
k k

y0 ( x0 ) . Assumption 4. f is bijective. In this case the following proposition holds.

Proposition 1. If Assumptions 1, 2, 3 and 4 hold, then PO( X , f ) and PF ( X , f ) have fixed point properties. In order to give the proof of our proposition, we will prove some lemmas. Lemma 1. If x X , x PO( X , f ) is equivalent to {x} = ( x) . Proof. Let x PO( X , f ) and assume that {x} ( x) . From both conditions x ( x) and {x} ( x) , it follows that there exists y ( x) \ {x} such that f ( y ) f ( x) . As a result we get that s ( y ) s ( x) , but x PO( X , f ) implies s ( y ) = s ( x) and f ( y ) = f ( x) . We have known that f is bijective (Assumption 4), therefore, x = y ; which contradicts the condition y ( x) \ {x} . Thus, we obtain {x} = ( x) . Conversely, let {x} = ( x) and assume that x PO( X , f ) . From the assumption x PO( X , f ) , it follows that there exists y X \ {x} such that f ( y ) f ( x) . Thus we deduce that y ( x) and x y , which contradicts the condition {x} = ( x) . Therefore, we obtain x PO( X , f ) . The lemma is proved. The proof of Lemma 1 uses only Assumption 4. Lemma 2. If x X , then Arg max(s, ( x)) PO( X , f ) . Proof. Let us choose y Arg max( s, ( x)) and assume that y PO( X , f ) . From the assumption y PO( X , f )

it follows that there exists z X \ { y} such that f ( z ) f ( y ) . As a result we derive z ( x) and s ( z ) > s ( y ) . This leads to a contradiction, therefore, we obtain y PO( X , f ) . The lemma is proved. Now, using Arg max(s, ( x)) PO( X , f ) (Lemma 2) and Arg max( s, ( x)) = 1 (Assumption 2), we are in a position to construct a function r : X PO( X , f ) such that r (x ) = Arg max(s, ( x) ) for all x X .
Remark 3. Applying Lemmas 1 and 2 it follows that: if x PO( X , f ) , then x = r ( x) ; if x X \ PO( X , f ) , then x r ( x) .

1226

Lemma 3. r ( X ) = PO( X , f ) . Proof. From Lemma 2 it follows that r ( X ) PO( X , f ) . Applying Lemma 1 and Remark 3 we deduce r (PO( X , f )) = PO( X , f ) . This means that r ( X ) = PO( X , f ) . The lemma is proved. The proof of Lemma 3 uses Assumptions 2 and 4. In the next steep continuity of r will be shown. Lemma 4. is continuous on X . Proof. First, we will prove that if {xk }k =1 , {yk }k =1 X is a pair of sequences such that lim xk = x0 X and

yk (xk ) for all k N , then there exists a convergent subsequence of {y

it follows that there exists a convergent subsequence {qk }k =1 {yk }k =1 such that lim qk = y0 X . Therefore, there exists a convergent subsequence {p
k k =1

The assumption yk (xk ) for all k N implies f ( yk ) f (xk ) for all k N . From the condition {yk }k =1 X

k k =1

whose limit belongs to (x0 ) .

{x

k k =1

such that qk ( pk ) and lim pk = x0 . Thus, we find

k

that f (qk ) f ( pk ) for all k N . Taking the limit as k we obtain f ( y0 ) f (x0 ) . This implies y0 (x0 ) . This means that is upper semi-continuous on X [9]. Second, we will prove that if {xk }k =1 X is a convergent sequence to x0 X and y0 (x0 ) , then there exists

a sequence {yk }k =1 X such that yk (xk ) for all k N and lim yk = y0 .

k

As usually, the distance between the point y0 X and the set (xk ) X is denoted by d k = inf {dis ( y0 , x ) | x (xk )} . Clearly, (xk ) is a nonempty compact; therefore, if y0 (xk ) , then there exists (xk ) such that d k = d ( y , yk ) . y There are two cases as follows: (1) If y0 (xk ) , then d k = 0 and set yk = y0 . . (2) If y0 (xk ) , then d k > 0 and set yk = y We get a sequence we obtain lim yk = y0 .
k

d k = d ( y0 , yk ) . Since lim xk = x0 and Assumption 3, the sequence {d k }k =1 is convergent and lim d k = 0 . Finally,
k k

{d k } R+ k =1

and a sequence

{yk } X k =1

such that yk (xk ) for all k N and

This means that is lower semi-continuous on X [9]. In summary, is continuous on X . The lemma is proved. The proof of Lemma 4 uses only Assumption 3. Lemma 5 [14]. Let S R n , R m , h : S R a continuous function, and D : S be a compactvalued and continuous multifunction. Then, the function h* : R defined by h * ( ) = max{h(x, ) | x D( )} is continuous on , and the multifunction D* : S defined by D * ( ) = {x D( ) | h(x, ) = h * ( )} is compact-valued and upper semi-continuous on . Lemma 6. r is continuous on X . Proof. As was mentioned before, the multifunction is compact-valued and continuous on X . Applying Lemma 5 for S = = X and D = , we deduce that r is an upper semi-continuous multifunction on X . Obviously, an upper semi-continuous multifunction is continuous when viewed as a function. This shows that r is continuous on X . The lemma is proved. The proof of Lemma 6 uses Assumptions 2, 3 and 4. Lemma 7 [14]. Let h : S S be continuous function from nonempty, compact and convex set S R n into itself, then h has a fixed point. Lemma 8 [14]. Let S R n be nonempty, compact and convex set and the multifunction : S S be cusco, then has a fixed point. Lemma 9. PO( X , f ) is homeomorphic to PF ( X , f ) .

1227

Proof. As is well-known every continuous image of the compact set is compact. In fact, the set X is compact and the function r is continuous on X . Hence, the set PO( X , f ) = r ( X ) is compact. Since the function
f : X R n is continuous it follows that the restriction h : PO( X , f ) PF ( X , f ) of f is continuous too. We

have known that the function h is bijective (Assumption 4). Consider the inverse function h 1 : PF ( X , f ) PO( X , f ) of h . As was proved before, the set PO( X , f ) is compact; therefore, h 1 is continuous too. As a result we find that the function h is homeomorphism. The lemma is proved. The proof of Lemma 9 uses Assumptions 2, 3 and 4. Now we are in position to prove the main result of this paper. Proof of Proposition 1. From Lemma 6 it follows that there exists a continuous function r : X PO( X , f ) such that r ( X ) = PO( X , f ) and r (x ) = Arg max(s, ( x) ) for all x X . This means that PO( X , f ) is a retract of X . We have shown that X is nonempty, compact and convex (Assumption 1), i.e. it has the fixed point and the Kakutani fixed point properties, see Lemmas 7 and 8. As a result we obtain that PO( X , f ) has the fixed point and the Kakutani fixed point properties. According to Lemma 9 we deduce that the Pareto-front set PF ( X , f ) has the fixed point and the Kakutani fixed point properties too. The proposition is proved. The proof of Proposition 1 uses Assumptions 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Remark 4. Note that the Pareto-optimal and Pareto-front sets are no convex in general.

REFERENCES
[1] Borwein, J.: Lewis, A.: Convex Analysis and Nonlinear Optimization: Theory and Examples. Springer, 2000. [2] Boyd, S.; Vandenberghe, L.: Convex Optimization. Cambridge University Press, 2004. [3] Cellina, A.; Fixed Point of Noncontinuous Mapping. Atti Accad. Naz. Lincei Rend., 49 (1970), 30-33. [4] Collette, Y.; Siarry, P.: Multi-objective Optimization. Springer, 2003. [5] Ehrgott, M.: Multi-criteria Optimization. Springer, 2005. [6] Franklin, J.: Methods of Mathematical Economics: Linear and Nonlinear Programming, Fixed Point Theorems. Springer-Verlag, 1980. [7] Hatcher, A.: Algebraic Topology. Cambridge University Press, 2002. [8] Luc, D.: Theory of Vector Optimization. Springer, 1989. [9] Mukherjea, A.; Pothoven, K.: Real and Functional Analysis. Plenum Press, 1978. [10] Peleg, B.: Topological properties of the efficient point set. Proc. Am. Math. Soc., 35 (1972), 531-536. [11] Slavov, Z.; Evans, C.: On the Structure of the Efficient Set. Mathematics and Education in Mathematics 33 (2004), 247-250. [12] Slavov, Z.: The Fixed Point Property in Convex Multi-objective Optimization Problem. Acta Universitatis Apulensis 15 (2008), 405-414. [13] Steuer, R.: Multiple Criteria Optimization: Theory, Computation and Application. John Wiley and Sons, 1986. [14] Sundaran, R.: A First Course in Optimization Theory. Cambridge University Press, 1996.

1228

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

BASIC OPTIMAL CONCEPTS AND METHODS IN ENGINEERING OPTIMIZATION PROBLEMS

Zdravko Slavov1, Christina Evans2, Desislava Slavova3
2

Varna Free University, Varna, Bulgaria, e-mail: slavovibz@yahoo.com The George Washington University, Washington, USA, e-mail: mrsevans@yahoo.com 3 Virginia Tech, Blacksburg, USA, e-mail: slavova_desi@yahoo.com

Summary: In this paper we consider the basic optimal concepts in engineering optimization problems. We discuss some methods for generating efficient and Pareto-optimal solutions. Two classical methods are studied in detail weighted-sum and epsilon-constraint, and we discuss a new method - hybrid. This method combines the basic ideas of the both classical methods. The key aim of this method is to generate all the efficient and Pareto-optimal solutions. Keywords: efficient solution, Pareto-optimal solution, weighted-sum, epsilon-constraint, hybrid.

1. INTRODUCTION
Optimization problems with several objectives arise in engineering, economics, applied mathematics and physics. Standard form of the multi-objective optimization problem is to find x( x1 , x2 ,..., xm ) R m , m 1 , so as to maximize f (x ) = ( f1 (x ), f 2 (x ),..., f n (x )) (P1) subject to g i ( x) 0, i J p

hi ( x) = 0, i J q
xi [ai , bi ], i J m ,

where { fi }in=1 are given objective functions, n 2 , {g i }ip=1 and {hi }iq=1 are given inequality and equality constraint functions, p, q 0 , and ai and bi are the lower and upper bounds for xi , ai < bi , J n = {1,2,..., n} is a index set [11]. In the case of n = 1 problem (P1) reduces to a standard optimization problem with a scalar-valued function. Actually it does not matter whether we investigate maximization or minimization problem. In this paper we consider only maximization problems. For our optimization problem let denote X = {x( x1 , x2 ,..., xm ) R m | g i ( x) 0 i J p , hi ( x) = 0 i J q , ai xi bi i J m } . As usual, let assume that the set X is nonempty. Maximization of a vector-valued function f means that we look for preimages of maximal element of the image set f ( X ) with respect to the natural partial ordering. In practice the maximal elements of the image set f ( X ) do not play central role but their preimages. Since the objective functions { fi }in=1 may be conflicting with each other on the domain X , it is usually difficult to obtain the global maximization for each objective function at the same time. Therefore, the target of the multiobjective optimization problem is to achieve a set of solutions that are Pareto-optimal. We will use R n as the genetic finite-dimensional vector space. Additionally, we will introduce the following notations: for every two vectors x, y R n , x( x1 , x2 ,..., xn ) y ( y1 , y2 ,..., yn ) means xi yi for all i J n (weakly

1229

componentwise order), x( x1 , x2 ,..., xn ) < y ( y1 , y2 ,..., yn ) means xi < yi for all j J n (strictly componentwise order), and x( x1 , x2 ,..., xn )p y ( y1 , y2 ,..., yn ) means xi yi for all i J n and xk < yk for some k J n (componentwise order). The above optimization problem is called convex if the given functions { f i }ip=1 and {g i }ip=1 are concave (convex or concave, quasi-convex or quasi-concave, strictly quasi-convex or strictly quasi-concave, convex or concave, strictly convex or strictly concave), and {hi }iq=1 are linear [2]. In this case we derive that the domain X is convex. In this paper, the key idea is to transfer the multi-objective optimization problem to single-objective optimization problem by define a unique objective function. We will discuss some methods for solving the multi-objective optimization problem (P1). The first method is weighted-sum, the second is epsilon-constraint, and in the end we will consider hybrid method.

2. BASIC OPTIMAL CONCEPTS

First, let M R n be a nonempty compact set. As is well-known the definitions of the efficient and ideal solutions of M can be formally stated as follows: Definition 1. (a) A point x M is called efficient solution if and only if there does not exist a point y M such that yi xi for all i J n and yk > xk for some k J n . Denote the set of the efficient solutions of M by Eff ( M ) and it is called efficient set. (b) A point x M is called weak efficient solution if and only if there does not exist a point y M such that yi > xi for all i J n . Denote the set of the weak efficient solutions of M by WEff ( M ) and it is called weak efficient set. From above definition it follows that Eff ( M ) WEff ( M ) bd ( M ) and Eff ( M ) is nonempty [11]. Definition 2. A point x M is called ideal solution if and only if xi yi for all i J n and all y M . Note that if there exists the ideal solution x M , then {x} = Eff ( M ) . Second, definitions of the Pareto-optimal solutions can be formally stated as follows: Definition 3. (a) A point x X is called Pareto-optimal solution if and only if there does not exist a point y X such that f i ( y ) f i (x ) for all i J n and f k ( y ) > f k (x ) for some k J n . Denote the set of the Paretooptimal solutions of X by PO( X , f ) and it is called Pareto-optimal set. The image PF ( X , f ) = f (PO( X , f )) is called Pareto-front set. (b) A point x X is called strictly Pareto-optimal solution if and only if there does not exist a point y X such that f i ( y ) f i (x ) for all i J n and x y . Denote the set of the strictly Pareto-optimal solutions of X by SPO( X , f ) and it is called strictly Pareto-optimal set. The image SPF ( X , f ) = f (SPO( X , f )) is called strictly Pareto-front set. (c) A point x X is called weak Pareto-optimal solution if and only if there does not exist a point y X such that f i ( y ) f i (x ) for all i J n . Denote the set of the weak Pareto-optimal solutions of X by WPO( X , f ) and it is called weak Pareto-optimal set. The image WPF ( X , f ) = f (WPO( X , f )) is called weak Pareto-front set. (d) A point x X is called ideal Pareto-optimal solution if and only if f i (x ) f i ( y ) for all y X and all i J n . Denote the set of the ideal Pareto-optimal solutions of X by IPO( X , f ) and it is called ideal Paretooptimal set. The image IPF ( X , f ) = f (IPO( X , f )) is called ideal Pareto-front set. If the ideal Pareto-optimal set IPO( X , f ) = Ii =1 Arg max( f i , X ) is empty, then in this situation we will accept
n

the elements into the Pareto-optimal and weak Pareto-optimal sets as two different solutions of our optimization problem. In this paper we will discuss some methods to find the Pareto-optimal solutions. In most cases there is not only one Pareto-optimal solution. In generally the number of solutions of our optimization problem (P1) is infinite. Note that the strictly Pareto-optimal solutions are the multi-objective analogue of unique optimal solutions in scalar optimization. PO( X , f ) WPO( X , f ) and From definitions it follows that Eff ( f ( X )) = PF ( X , f ) WPF ( X , f ) = WEff ( f ( X )) . It can be shown that the both sets PF ( X , f ) and WPF ( X , f ) lie in the boundary of the set f ( X ) , i.e. PF ( X , f ) WPF ( X , f ) bd ( f ( X )) [6] [12].

1230

In this paper, let also assume that the functions { fi }in=1 , {g i }ip=1 and {hi }iq=1 be all continuous. Therefore, the set X is compact. In this case, it is well-known that the Pareto-optimal set PO( X , f ) and Pareto-front set PF ( X , f ) are nonempty, and the weak Pareto-optimal set WPO( X , f ) and weak Pareto-front set WPF ( X , f ) are nonempty compact [7] [12].

3. CONCAVE OBJECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Convexity plays an important role in optimization theory and its applications. As is well known a set M R n is convex if and only if for any u, v M and t [0;1] , then tu + (1 t )v M . Recall some definitions for concave functions. Definition 4. A real function f on a convex subset X R m is call to be: (a) quasi-concave on X if and only if for any x, y X and t [0;1] , then f (tx + (1 t ) y ) min( f (x ), f ( y )) . (b) semi-strictly quasi-concave on X if and only if f is quasi-concave and for any x, y X , f ( x) f ( y ) and t (0;1) , then f (tx + (1 t ) y ) > min( f (x ), f ( y )) . (c) strictly quasi-concave on X if and only if for any x, y X , x y and t (0;1) , then f (tx + (1 t ) y ) > min( f (x ), f ( y )) . (d) concave on X if and only if for any x, y X and t [0;1] , then f (tx + (1 t ) y ) tf (x ) + (1 t ) f ( y ) . (e) strictly concave on X if and only if for any x, y X and t (0;1) , then f (tx + (1 t ) y ) > tf (x ) + (1 t ) f ( y ) . Remark 1. (a) Note that strictly quasi-concavity implies semi-strictly quasi-concavity and semi-strictly quasiconcavity implies quasi-concavity, but the reverse implications are not true in general. (b) Let X = [2;2] and
0, x [2;0], f ( x) = x, x (0;1], 1, x (1;2].

In this case f is continuous and quasi-concave on X , but it is not semi-strictly quasi-concave on X . (c) Let X = [0;2] and
x, x [0;1], f ( x) = 1, x (1;2]. We check at once that f is continuous and semi-strictly quasi-concave on X , but it is not strictly quasiconcave on X . Remark 2. Let {g i }ip=1 be quasi-concave and X = [2;2] . (a) If 0, x [2;0] f1 ( x) = x, x (0;2] and f 2 ( x) = x , then we show that PO( X , f ) = {2} U (0;2] is not compact and not connected. Here, f1 is quasi-concave and not semi-strictly quasi-concave, and f 2 is strictly quasi-concave. (b) If 0, x [2;0] f1 ( x) = x, x (0;2] and x, x [2;0] f 2 ( x) = , 0, x (0;2]

then we find that PO( X , f ) = {2} U {2} is compact and not connected. In this case, f1 is quasi-concave and not semi-strictly quasi-concave, and f 2 is semi-strictly quasi-concave and not strictly quasi-concave. (c) If f1 ( x) = x

1231

and
f 2 ( x) = 1 x , then we have that PO( X , f ) = [0;2] is compact and connected. Clearly, f1 and f 2 are strictly quasi-concave. Note that PO( X , f ) is convex. As mentioned before, in general case the weak Pareto-optimal set is compact. In [10], it is proved that the Pareto-optimal set is compact too, if the objective functions { fi }in=1 and the inequality constraint functions
{g i }ip=1 are quasi-concave, and the equality constraint functions {hi }iq=1 are linear.

It is well-known that if the objective functions { fi }in=1 are strictly quasi-concave, the inequality constraint functions {g i }ip=1 are quasi-concave and the equality constraint functions {hi }iq=1 PO( X , f ) = WPO( X , f ) and PF ( X , f ) = WPF ( X , f ) [7] [13]. are linear, then

4. CLASSICAL METHODS
There are some standard methods for dealing with multi-objective optimization problems, such as the weightedsum method and the epsilon-constraint method, that have to be combined with the optimization algorithm, see also [4] [5] and [14].
4.1 Weighted-sum method

The Pareto-optimal solutions of the multi-objective optimization problem can be generated with simple scalarizations of the problem. The most easily and perhaps most widely used method is the weighted-sum method. The single optimization function is formulated as a linear weighted sum of all the objective functions { fi }in=1 , see [1] and [8]. This is probable the simplest of all classical techniques.
n } , i.e. the weighting coefficient wi > 0 for all Let denote a weighted set W = {w( w1 , w2 ,..., wn ) R+ + | i =1 wi = 1 n

iJ . Now, let fix an arbitrary weighting coefficient w( w1 , w2 ,..., wn ) W . Consider a corresponding optimization problem with single optimization function as follows:

maximize (P2)

i =1

wi f i ( x)

subject to g i ( x) 0, i J p hi ( x) = 0, i J q
xi [ai , bi ], i J m .

It is important to note that the optimization function

n

i =1

wi f i is continuous.

Of course, the set Arg max(i =1 wi f i , X )) is nonempty for each coefficient w( w1 , w2 ,..., wn ) W . Denote a set the set WS ( X , f ) is nonempty. It is well-known that WS ( X , f ) PO( X , F ) , i.e. every combination of the weighting coefficients corresponds to the Pareto-optimal solutions [7] [9]. But in generally the converse does not hold. As a result we also obtain that the Pareto-optimal set PO( X , f ) and Pareto-front set PF ( X , f ) = Eff ( f ( X )) are nonempty. W, let also denote a closed weighted set In addition to the weighted set
n

of all solutions of the single optimization problem (P2) by WS ( X , f ) = UwW Arg max(i =1 wi f i , X ) . Therefore,
n

n W = {w( w1 , w2 ,..., wn ) R+ | i =1 wi = 1} , i.e. the weighting coefficient wi 0 for all i J n . Following the

given above idea, to consider an optimization problem (P2) for w W . Denote a set of all solutions of (P2) by
WS ( X , f ) WS ( X , f ) and WS ( X , f ) WPO( X , f ) , i.e. in this situation the weighted-sum method generates the weak Pareto-optimal solutions. As a result we also obtain that the weak Pareto-optimal set WPO( X , f ) and WS ( X , f ) = UwW Arg max(i =1 wi f i , X ) . It is well-known
n

that the set

WS ( X , f )

is nonempty,

1232

weak Pareto-front set

PF ( X , f ) = WEff ( f ( X ))

are nonempty. It is difficult to be sure that

WS ( X , f ) = WPO( X , f ) . Finally, we show that scalarization always generates Pareto-optimal or weak Pareto-optimal solutions, we have

shown WS ( X , f ) PO( X , f ) and WS ( X , f ) WPO( X , f ) . In practice, we choose an arbitrary coefficient w W or w W and solve the optimization problem (P2). By this we will generate a subset of the Pareto-optimal solutions or the weak Pareto-optimal solutions, respectively. If the optimization problem is convex, then the complete sets of Pareto-optimal and weak Pareto-optimal solutions can be found [3] [6] [9]. However, if the optimization problem is not convex, then there is no guarantee that this method will yield the entire Pareto-optimal and weak Pareto-optimal sets.
4.2 Epsilon-constraint method

The epsilon-constraint method is also written as trade-off method or constraint method. According to this method the original multi-objective optimization problem (P1) is replaced by a singleobjective. First, one objective function f of { fi }in=1 is selected for optimization and others are reformulated as constraints. Let Y be a set of all (1 , 2 ,..., n ) R n such that {x X | f i ( x) i , i J n \ {}} is nonempty. Next, let fix an arbitrary point (1 , 2 ,..., n ) Y . Consider a corresponding optimization problem with single optimization function as follows: maximize f ( x) (P3) subject to ui ( x) 0, i J n \ {} g i ( x) 0, i J p
hi ( x) = 0, i J q xi [ai , bi ], i J m ,

where the constraint functions ui satisfying ui ( x) = f i ( x) i for i J n \ {} . Note that the functions {ui }in=1,i are continuous. Let denote a set X , = {x X | ui ( x) 0, i J n \ {}} . Clearly, the set Arg max( f , X , ) is nonempty for each point Y . It is not hard to check that Arg max( f , X , ) WPO( X , f ) and if the solution of (P3) is unique, then Arg max( f , X , ) PO( X , f ) [3]. Denote a set of all solutions of the single optimization problem (P3) by EC ( X , f ) = U Y Arg max( f , X , ) .

Therefore, the set EC ( X , f ) is nonempty and EC ( X , f ) WPO( X , f ) . It is easy to verify that if Eff ( f ( X )) Y and f ( x) = , then x EC ( X , f ) , i.e. the epsilon-constraint method gives the opportunity to obtain the full Pareto-optimal set. Bun in general case we obtain the weak Pareto-optimal solution, which may be no Pareto-optimal. Clearly, if WEff ( f ( X )) Y and f ( x) = , then the statement x EC ( X , f ) is not true in generally.
EC ( X , f ) =
EC ( X , f ) WPO ( X , f ) . As a result we also obtain that the weak Pareto-optimal set WPO( X , f ) and weak Pareto-front set PF ( X , f ) = WEff ( f ( X )) are nonempty.

Denote also a set

EC ( X , f ) . Obviously, the set

EC ( X , f )

is nonempty and

5. HYBRID METHOD
We have already investigated in detail the two classical methods based on weights and constraints. Now we will discuss a new method hybrid. This method combines the basic ideas of the both classical methods. The key aim of this method is to generate all the Pareto-optimal solutions. First of all, begin with the following definitions: Define a function

:X R

by

Arg max( , X ) PO( X , f ) X .

(x ) = i =1 f i (x )
n

for

all

x X .

It

is

clear

that

1233

Define also a multifunction : X X by (x ) = {y X | f i ( y ) f i ( x), i J n } for all x X . Obviously is compact-valued. Now, let fix an arbitrary point z X . Consider a corresponding optimization problem with single optimization function as follows: maximize (x ) (P4) subject to ui ( x) 0, i J n g i ( x) 0, i J p
hi ( x) = 0, i J q xi [ai , bi ], i J m , where the functions ui satisfying ui ( x) = fi ( x) f i ( z ) for i J n . Note that the objective function f and

constraint functions {ui }in=1 are all continuous. Of course, the set Arg max( , ( z )) is nonempty for each point z X . Denote a set of all solutions of the single optimization problem (P4) by HM ( X , f ) =

nonempty. It is easy proved that PO( X , f ) = HM ( X , f ) .

z X

Arg max( , ( z )) . Therefore, the set HM ( X , f ) is

REFERENCES
[1] Abraham, A.; Jain, L.; Goldberg, R.: Evolutionary Multi-objective Optimization: Theoretical Advances and Applications, Springer, 2005. [2] Boyd, S.; Vandenberghe, L.: Convex Optimization, Cambridge University Press, 2004. [3] Chankong, V.; Haimes, Y.: Multi-objective Decision Making: Theory and Methodology, North-Holland, 1983. [4] Collette, Y.; Siarry, P.: Multi-objective Optimization, Springer, 2003. [5] Cohon, J.: Multi-objective Programming and Planning, Academic Press, 1978. [6] Jahn, J.: Vector Optimization: Theory, Applications and Extensions, Springer, 2004. [7] Luc, D.: Theory of Vector Optimization, Springer, 1989. [8] Steuer, R.: Multiple Criteria Optimization: Theory, Computation and Application, John Wiley and Sons, 1986. [9] Slavov, Z.; Evans C.: On a vector optimization problem in systems engineering, International Conference RaDMI 2003, Herceg Novi 19-23 September 2003, Serbia and Montenegro, 66-72. [10] Slavov, Z.: Compactness of the Pareto sets in multi-objective optimization with quasi-concave functions, Mathematics and Education in Mathematics 35 (2006), 298-301. [11] Slavov, Z.: On the Optimality Concepts in Decision Making Process, International Conference ISK 2006, Varna 28 30 June 2006, ISBN 9789547153035, 316-332. [12] Slavov, Z.: Topological Properties of the Pareto-optimal Set in Vector Optimization Problem, ISC FMNS 2007, Blagoevgrad 6 10 June 2007, Mathematics and Natural Sciences, ISBN 9789546805379, 101-106. [13] Slavov, Z.: On the Engineering Multi-objective Maximization and Properties of the Pareto-optimal Set, International e-Journal of Engineering Mathematics: Theory and Application (7) 2009, 32-46. [14] Zeleny, M.: Multiple Criteria Decision Making, McGraw-Hill, 1982.

1234

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

NORMAL FORMS FOR THE NON-LINEAR VIBRATIONS

1

NicolaeDoru Stnescu1, Stelian Mihalcea1

University of Piteti, Piteti, ROMANIA, e-mail: s_doru@yahoo.com, doru.stanescu@upit.ro 1 University of Piteti, Piteti, ROMANIA, e-mail: stelian_mihalcea_07@yahoo.com

Summary: In this paper we present the conditions for a system of non-linear second order differential equations to be put in the so called normal form. This normal form is used in all the books to discuss the behavior of the non-linear system. Practically, this normal form is not obtained in the process of writing the equations of motion and therefore we must know if we can transform the obtained system in one in normal form. In this paper we obtained the conditions in the most general case. Finally we present a complete solved numerical application. Keywords: non-linear vibrations, normal form, equations.

1. INTRODUCTION
In the theory of the non-linear many degrees of freedom vibrations the authors consider that the differential equations that describe these motions are in the form 2 & &1 + 1 &2 + 2 x x1 = P x (1) 1 ( x1 , x2 ) , & 2 x2 = P 2 ( x1 , x2 ) , in which P and P are polynomial of degree at least two without linear terms. 1 2 In the practical cases we do not obtain equations in form (1), but of a more complex form & &1 + a11 x1 + a12 x2 + K + a1n xn = f1 (x1 , x2 , K , xn ) , x & &2 + a21 x1 + a22 x2 + K a2 n xn = f 2 (x1 , x2 , K , xn ) , , x (2) & & xn + an1 x1 + an 2 x2 + K + ann xn = f n (x1 , x2 , K xn ) , where f i (x ) , i = 1, n , are non-linear functions with no linear terms. Because of the very complicate calculations that appear, in the bibliography the discussion is made only for the case n = 2 . In this paper we shall determine in which conditions the system (2) can be brought to the form (1).

2. THE TWO DIMENSION CASE

In this situation, the system (2) has the expression & &1 + a11 x1 + a12 x2 = f1 (x1 , x2 ) , & &2 + a21 x1 + a22 x2 = f 2 (x1 , x2 ) x x or, equivalently, & & + Ax = f (x ) , x where a a f (x ) x = [x1 x2 ]T , A = 11 12 , f (x ) = 1 . a a 21 22 f 2 (x ) (3) (4) (5)

From the theory of the normal forms for the vector fields it is known that there exists a linear transformation x = Py , (6) where P is a quadratic invertible second order matrix, such that the system (4) can be successively written

1235

& + APy = f (Py ) , P& y

& &+ y

P 1APy

P 1f

(Py ) .
1

(7)

(8)

On the other hand, the expression P AP defines exactly the Jordan form of the matrix A , (9) J = P 1AP , so that the relation (8) becomes & & + Jy = P 1f (Py ) y (10) or, denoting P 1f (Py ) = g(y ) , (11) one obtains the equation in the normal form & & + Jy = g(y ) y (12) We observe that the working procedure holds true no matter the value of n , the number of unknowns. In addition, the matrix J has a particular form, being constructed by Jordan blocks of different dimensions. Let us also observe that the matrix P is constructed with the aid of the eigenvectors of the matrix A . Recalling the expression (1), it is easy to observe that this expression is obtained if and only if the matrix J has the diagonal form, 0 J = 1 (13) , 0 2 where 1 and 2 are the eigenvalues of the matrix A . In addition, these eigenvalues must be positive. We have to find out the conditions in which the matrix A has positive and distinct eigenvalues. The characteristic equation reads now a11 a12 = 2 (a11 + a22 ) + a11a22 a12 a21 = 0 . a21 a22 The condition for the existence of the real, distinct roots is
= (a11 + a22 )2 4(a11a22 a12 a21 ) = (a11 a22 )2 + 4a12 a21 > 0 , and the conditions for the positive roots are a11 + a22 > 0 ,

(14)

(15) (16) (17)

a11a22 a12 a21 > 0 . The inequalities (15), (16), (17) are the conditions that the system (3) can be brought to the form (1).

3. THE THREE DIMENSION CASE

In this case the matrix A has the form a11 a12 a13 A = a21 a22 a23 , a31 a32 a33 and the characteristic equation reads a11 a12 a13 a21 a22 a23 = 0 , a31 a32 a33

(18)

(19)

wherefrom 3 + 12 + 2 + 3 = 0 , (20) with 1 = (a11 + a22 + a33 ) , (21) 2 = a11a22 a12 a21 + a11a33 a13a31 + a22 a33 a23a32 , (22) 3 = a11a22 a33 a13a21a32 a12 a23 a31 + a13a22 a31 + a12 a21a33 + a11a23a32 . (23) We shall have to determine the conditions in which the equation (20) has all the roots real, positive and distinct. Let us denote by h( ) the function
h( ) = 3 + 12 + 2 + 3 , its derivative being

(24)

1236

h( ) = 32 + 21 + 2 . The conditions that we are looked for are: the value of h at the point 0 is negative (i.e. we have at least one positive real root) h(0 ) = 3 < 0 ; the derivative has real, positive, distinct roots (conditions obtained in the previous paragraph) 2 1 3 2 > 0 , 2 1 > 0 1 < 0 , 3 2 > 0 2 > 0 ; 3 * denoting by * 1 and 2 the roots of the derivatives,
3 the last condition that we are looking for is * h * 1 > 0 , h 2 < 0 . * 1 =
2 3 1 1 2

(25)

(26) (27) (28) (29)

, *2 =

2 3 1 + 1 2

(30) (31)

( )

( )

4. THE FOUR DIMENSION CASE

Proceeding in an analogous way, keeping into account that the matrix A has the expression a11 a12 a13 a14 a a a a A = 21 22 23 24 , a31 a32 a33 a34 a41 a42 a43 a44 one obtains the characteristic equation 4 + 13 + 2 2 + 3 + 4 = 0 . Denoting by h( ) the function

(32)

(33) (34) (35)

h( ) = 4 + 13 + 2 2 + 3 + 4 , with the derivative h( ) = 43 + 312 + 2 2 + 3 ,

* 1, *2 * 3

by , its roots, the conditions we are looking for are: the value of the function h( ) at the point 0 is positive, h(0) = 4 > 0 ; the derivative h( ) has the roots positive, real and distinct,
* * * * * * 1 > 0 , 2 > 0 , 3 > 0 , 1 < 2 < 3 ; the function changes its sign between the derivatives roots and 0 , * * h * 1 < 0 , h 2 > 0 , h 3 < 0 .

(36) (37) (38)

( )

( )

( )

5. THE GENERAL CASE

In this case the matrix A having the form a11 a12 L a1n a a L a 2n A = 21 22 , L L L L an1 an 2 L ann the characteristic equation reads n + 1n 1 + 2 n 2 + K + n = 0 . Denoting by h( ) the function

(39)

(40)

1237

h( ) = n + 1n 1 + 2 n 2 + K + n , by h( ) its derivative,
* 1, *2 *n 1

(41) (42)

h( ) = nn 1 + (n 1)1n 2 + K + n 1 ,

and by , , the roots of the derivative, assuming that these roots are real, positive and distinct, the conditions that we are looking for are given by (43) ( 1)n n > 0 ,

( 1)n + i h(*i ) > 0 , i

= 1, n 1 ,

(44) (45)

where we assumed that * * 0 < * 1 < 2 < K < n 1 .

6. NUMERICAL APPLICATION
Let us consider the mechanical system from the figure 1, in which

m1

m2

m3

Figure 1: Numerical application

F1

x1 m1
F3 F4

F2
m3

F2 x3

x2 m2
F3

Figure 2: Isolation of the bodies

m1 = m , m2 = 2m , m3 = 3m , the elastic force in the spring i being given by the expression Fi = (5 i )kd + i d p ,

(46) (47)

where i > 0 , i = 1, 4 , k > 0 , p is a natural number , p 2 , and the springs are un-stretched. Isolating the bodies *fig. 2), we get the equations of motion &1 = 3k (x2 x1 ) 4kx1 + NL1 , 2m& &2 = 2k (x3 x2 ) 3k (x2 x1 ) + NL2 , m& x x &3 = kx3 2k (x3 x2 ) + NL3 3m& x or, equivalently, 7k 3k 3k 5k 2k NL1 NL2 & &1 = &2 = , & , x x1 + x2 + x x1 x2 + x3 + m m m 2m 2m 2m 2m NL3 2k 3k & &3 = , x x2 x3 + 3m 3m 3m where NL j , j = 1, 3 , mark the non-linear terms. With the notations used before, we have 7 3 0 k 3 5 A = 1 . m 2 2 0 2 1 3 The characteristic equation reads

(48)

(49)

(50)

1238

7 3 0 3 5 1 = 0 , (51) 2 2 2 1 0 3 wherefrom 21 2 131 25 3 + = 0. (52) 2 6 3 Denoting 21 2 131 25 , h( ) = 3 + (53) 2 6 3 it results 131 , h( ) = 32 21 + (54) 6 the roots of the derivative being * * (55) 1 = 1.270152 , 2 = 8.729848 and the conditions for positive, real, distinct roots of the characteristic equation (52) are fulfilled 25 h(0 ) = < 0, (56) 3 * h * (57) 1 = 4.5079 > 0 , h 2 = 39.7413 < 0 . In conclusion, the system can be brought to normal form. In addition, the roots of the characteristic equation are calculated with the aid of the Lobacevski-Graeffe method.

( )

( )

Step 0 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 1 1

Table 1: The calculation of the characteristic equations roots 1 2

10.5 66.583334 3829.95 14504973.3 2.10381 1014
21.833333 301.69444 81771.85 6649695348 4.42178 1019

8.333333 69.44444 4822.5309 23256804 5.40879 1014

It results the values

3
16

2.10381 1014 = 7.856 , 2 1

16

4.42178 1019 = 2.151 , 2.10381 1014

5.40879 1014 1 16 = 0.493 . 4.42178 1019

(58)

7. CONCLUSION
In our paper we determine the conditions in which a system of second order non-linear differential equations can be put into normal form. These conditions are obtained firstly for particular case and then in the most general case. A numerical application exemplifies the theory.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The second authors contribution to this paper is based on the European Program Dezvoltarea colilor doctorale prin acordarea de burse tinerilor doctoranzi cu frecven POSDRU/88/1.5/S/52826.

1239

REFERENCES
[1] Nayfeh, A., H., Mook, D., T.: Nonlinear Oscillations, John Wiley and Sons, New York, Chichester, Brisbane, Toronto, 1979, pp. 704, ISBN 1-472-03555-6. [2] Pandrea, N., Stnescu, N.D.: Mechanics, Didactical and Pedagogical Publishing House, Bucharest, 2002, pp. 466, ISBN 973-30-2774-X. [3] Stnescu, N.D., Munteanu, L., Chiroiu, V., Pandrea, N.: Dynamical Systems. Theory and Applications, vol. I, The Publishing House of the Romanian Academy, Bucharest, 2007, pp. 490, ISBN 978-973-27-1503-1. [4] Stnescu, N.D., Munteanu, L., Chiroiu, V., Pandrea, N.: Dynamical Systems. Theory and Applications, vol. II, The Publishing House of the Romanian Academy, Bucharest, 2010 (in press). [5] Stnescu, N.D.: Numerical Methods, Didactical and Pedagogical Publishing House, Bucharest, 2007, pp. 540, ISBN 978-973-30-1743-1. [6] Stnescu, N.D., Pandrea, N: Theoretical Mechanics, The Publishing House of the Romanian Academy, Bucharest, 2011 (in preparation). [7] Stnescu, N.D.: Stability of the Mechanical Systems, Bentham Publishing House, London, 2010 (in press). [8] Stnescu N.D.: Mechanical Systems with NeoHookean Elements, Lambert Academic Publishing, Saarbrcken, Germany, 2011 (in preparation).

1240

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SOME BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS OF RAPID PROTOTYPING

Politehnica University of Timisoara, Timisoara, ROMANIA, 1e-mail: ionut@cmpicsu.upt.ro 2 e-mail: mirela@cmpicsu.upt.ro

D.I. Stoia1, M. Toth-Tascau2

Summary: The paper presents some applications of Rapid Prototyping (RP) technologies in the field of Biomedical Engineering. Rapid Prototyping technology has become an essential tool in the designing and prototyping medical devices due to its remarkable advantages. There are presented general characteristics of (RP) technologies and two particular systems based on Selective Laser Melting and Electron Beam Melting. The prototypes presented in this paper were fabricated using the ARCAM S12 machine based on EBM technique at ARCAM Company and Formiga P 100 machine based on SLM technique in Laboratory of Rapid Fabrication of Politehnica University of Timisoara. The developed study has an educational purpose, the obtained (RP) models can be used as teaching aids for students in the classroom as well as for researches. Keywords: CAD model, rapid prototyping, Selective Laser Melting, Selective Laser Sintering, Electron Beam Melting.

1. INTRODUCTION
Modern medical devices involve many special requirements such as: complex geometry, modern manufacturing technology, appropriate biomechanical behavior and sometimes, biocompatibility. Because of the human bodys diversity, sometimes it is almost impossible to build a mechanical system for replacement or which fits with human anatomy and have positive responses. Advances in biomedical engineering deal with customized medical devices (implants, prostheses) which are more and more present in the engineers concern. The actual technological problem is to identify the best manufacturing technology from the available ones. Generally, the main categories of possible applications of Rapid Prototyping are: prototyping, rapid tooling, or rapid manufacturing. The Rapid Prototyping concept is currently used in fabrication of medical devices and plays a major role in customization of implants and prostheses. The main advantages of the Rapid Prototyping techniques consist in: fabrication flexibility, infinite diversity of the shapes, considerably reducing the CAD to metal time and a low rate of material waste. RP machines are highly productive systems for fabrication of objects with complex geometries directly from CAD data and within a very short time [1]. Using Rapid Prototyping technologies it is possible to build various medical devices and customized implants [2], [1]. There are several rapid prototyping technologies, such as: Stereolithography (SLA), Selective Laser Sintering (SLS), Selective Laser Melting (SLM), Fused Deposition Modeling (FDM), Electron Beam Melting (EBM), Laminated Object Manufacturing (LOM), Inkjet-based systems and three dimensional printing (3DP). Rapid Prototyping technologies can use wide range of materials (paper, plastic, metal and nowadays biomaterials) which give possibility for their application in different fields [1].

2. RAPID PROTOTYPING TECHNOLOGIES

Using Rapid Prototyping technologies it is possible to build solid parts directly from 3D models in a relatively short time. During the rapid prototyping process five individual steps are distinguished which must be followed to get the prototype [2], [3]: Developing of the 3D CAD model; Conversion of CAD model in STL format; Stratification of STL file;

1241

Layer-by-layer growth; Cleaning and finishing the prototype. CAD model creation. The part which has to be built by prototyping technique is modeled using CAD (ComputerAided Design) technique, with one of the available software such as Pro Engineering, CATIA, SolidWorks, SolidEdge. These 3D models allow a much better representation than wire-frame models made in AutoCAD environment. The great advantage is that the 3D model file can be directly used to prototyping. This step of the process is identical for all methods of RP. Conversion to STL format. Each CAD software uses different algorithms for solids representation. To establish a link between them, STL format was developed as standard format in RP industry. STL-stereolitography is a standardized format that represents a 3D surface as a set of flat triangles. Since the STL file uses planar elements, it cannot represent exactly any curved surfaces. For this reason, increasing the number of triangles improves the approximation of the actual area, but the disadvantage consists in obtaining of a large file, difficult to manage. A large file means more time for pre-processing and construction. So the designer must decide a balance between information quality and management of a STL file. Stratification of STL file. STL file preparation by stratification is performed by a pre-processing program. Programs able to perform this operation allow the user to change the size, location and orientation of the model. Vertical orientation is very important for several reasons. First, prototypes properties vary with different directions, for example, prototypes are usually weaker and less accurate in dimensional terms on the vertical axis (Z) than in the XY plane. So, object orientation directly determines the model construction time. Placing the minimum size along Z direction reduces the number of layers, significantly shortening the time of manufacturing. Pre-processing software stratifies the STL model in layers of thicknesses between 0.01mm and 0.7mm, depending on the used technique. The program can also generate additionally structures to support the model during construction. These structures are used for delicate components: thin wall sections or interior cavity prone areas. Layer-by-layer growth. Part generation represents the actual construction phase of the part when, using one of the specific RP techniques, the material (polymer, paper, metal powder) is applied layer-by-layer, to build the object. Cleaning and finishing the prototype. The last stage is the post-processing, which includes specific elements of prototyping methods. The common operations of each method may include: removal of the prototype from machine, elimination of support structures, and removal of non-fused material. To improve the surface quality, especially for metallic prototypes sanding and polishing operations can be applied. Of course, rapid prototyping is not a perfectly manufacturing process, being limited to a relatively small volume of parts (up to 0.125 m3) depending on the RP machine.
-

2.1. Electron Beam Melting (EBM) process The EBM process uses an electron beam to melt the metal powder in a layer-by-layer process to build the physical part (figure 1). The vacuum environment in the EBM machine protects the chemical composition of the material and provides an excellent environment for building parts with reactive materials such as titanium alloys. The electron beam high power ensures a high rate of deposition and an even temperature distribution within the part, which gives a fully melted metal with excellent mechanical and physical properties. The EBM process is ideal for applications where high strength or high temperatures are required: rapid manufacturing of medical implants and a range of products for the aerospace and automotive industries. In contrast to laser sintering (SLS), the electron beam fully melts the metal particles to produce a void-free part. The process occurs in a high vacuum, which ensures that the part is completely solid, without imperfections caused by oxidation. Titanium parts created on the system are accurate near-net shape and are heat treatable. The layer thickness is in the range of 0.05 to 0.2 mm. The resulting parts are comparable to wrought titanium and better than cast titanium, with a 95 percent powder recovery yield. The process uses a high power electron beam that is 95 percent efficient - 5 to 10 times more so than a laser beam. This efficiency results in the creation of parts 3 to 5 times faster than other metal additive-fabrication methods, and it uses only 7 kW of average power. With laser-based systems, like sintering, 95 percent of the light energy is reflected by the powder rather than absorbed, significantly reducing efficiency. Medical product manufacturers can benefit from the parts' high flexural strength for bone implants requiring cycle life exceeding 10 million cycles [3], [4].

1242

Figure 1: Electron Beam Melting process 2.2. Selective Laser Sintering (SLS) / Melting (SLM) process The SLS rapid prototyping process (figure 2) uses the heat of a CO2 laser to sinter or melt powdered thermoplastic materials (or thermoplastic binders in high temperature resistant powdered materials such as ceramics and metals) in layers of 0.07 to 0.15 mm. The laser is guided across the part bed by a scanning system and selectively sinters or melts the material based on cross-sectional slice information of the 3D CAD data file. The part or parts are built in an atmosphere that controls the thermal distribution and thus requires very little laser power to sinter the material. The powder in the building chamber acts as a support for the part during fabrication and thus no additional support structure is required. SLS is able to produce parts with tolerances and details similar to stereolitography, but with the added advantage of strength [3], [5].

Figure 2: Selective Laser Sintering/Melting process General characteristics of the process are: - Process capabilities: stainless steel, titanium or cobalt chrome alloys; - Design flexibility: produces highly complex geometries and features;

1243

- Excellent surface finish ranging from 5-10 m Ra; - Excellent machining after the building process; - The surface hardness as high as 20 HRc. The SLM process is very similar with the EBM process. In the process, the metal powder is locally melted by an intensive infrared laser beam that traces the layer geometry. The parts are built layer-by-layer with a thickness up to 30 m, depending on the metal powder type. The finest details, like thin vertical walls, are less than 100 m in thickness. Directly after the production process the manufactured parts are showing a surface roughness of approx. 10-30 m [6].

3. APPLICATIONS OF RAPID PROTOTYPING The models presented in this paper were fabricated using the ARCAM S12 machine based on EBM technique at ARCAM Company and Formiga P 100 machine based on SLM technique in Laboratory of Rapid Fabrication of Politehnica University of Timisoara. 3.1. Prototyping of a cervical vertebra using EBM technology Fabrication of a human vertebra model represents a technological challenge, almost impossible to achieve using conventional methods of cutting or EDM, due to geometric complexity that a vertebra has. The purpose of fabrication of a human vertebra model consisted in verifying of the model fidelity. A cadaveric third cervical vertebra was scanned using Siemens SOMATOM Plus 4 Power system in Medical Imaging Laboratory of CMPICSU Research Centre in Politehnica University of Timisoara. The complete scanning of the vertebra included a number of 67 images provided in DICOM format and 1 tomogram [7]. Therefore we tried to achieve a typical cervical vertebra (C3) model based on CT scans of the natural vertebra, rebuilt and converted in .stl format. Based on the .stl file generated in CMPICSU Research Centre Laboratory, the vertebra prototype was obtained using the ARCAM S12 EBM machine (figure 3) at ARCAM Company. Prototyping with such a machine requires a great attention for several reasons: working voltage up to 60 kV, presence of X-rays, flammability of powder, high temperatures developed during the process.

Figure 3: ARCAM S12 EBM machine First steps to effective prototyping process are similar for all prototyping machines until the transformation phase of .stl file in one layer containing information about the processes that will run for each layer. Starting with this step, ARCAM S12 EBM machine has a software tool dedicated to order the operations in each layer. Operations that machine can execute are of four types: pre-heating, generation of support structure, generation of support volume type, and selective melting. Fusion is the main operation, being executed the last one, to ensure that the temperature of the layer above is high enough to not create internal tensions into the material. Cervical vertebra was prototyped of 50m Titanium powder without support structure, due to its small size and lack of high-slope areas. The support volume however was used, where the partially molten powder has incorporated the entire model. Both the set and measured process parameters during the manufacturing process have been stored in a .log file type. The prototype shown in figure 4 resulted in two phases: the final phase of the prototyping process (figure 4.a) where you can see the appearance of rough surface model; sanding and polishing stage (figure 4.b) assures the prototype appearance of finished part, with a much reduced surface roughness. Rough surface appearance of the

1244

first phase is due to persistence of sintered powder pattern due to the high temperature process. After the removal of rough surfaces the model reveals dense, and could see the fused and deposited layers successively.

Rough surface

Finished surface

Traces of the layers

Rough from sanding process

a) Final phase of the prototyping process. Figure 4: Cervical vertebra prototype

b) Finished

The main feature of the achieved prototype is 99% density structure, characteristic directly and positively influenced by high energy electron beam melting. A major shortcoming of this energy is that the processing machine cannot work with very small layer thickness. In the case of the prototyped vertebra, the layer thickness was of 100 m. 3.2. Prototyping of spinal stabilization elements using SLM technology Formiga P 100 of EOS Company is a plastic laser-sintering system for the direct manufacture of series, spare parts and functional prototypes [8] (figure 5). The FORMIGA P 100 produces plastic products from polyamide or polystyrene within a few hours and directly from CAD data. Taking into account that the objective of manufacturing of spinal stabilization elements consisted only in validation of designed models and not in their testing or clinical use, and laboratory capability in terms of available material, models were made of Polyamide PA 2200. Polyamide is resistant to most chemicals, and the material itself is biocompatible. The Polyamide material allows the production of fully functional prototypes with high mechanical and thermal resistance.

Figure 5: FORMIGA P 100 (RP) machine Using FORMIGA P 100 (RP) machine several phisical models of spinal stabilization elements were prototyped. In this paper are presented as examples of the fabricated models (figure 6) an intervertebral fusion cage, cervical bone plate and artificial intervertebral disc. An intervertebral fusion cage (figure 6.a) is a small hollow cylindrical device, usually made of Titanium, with perforated walls. These cages restore load sharing within the anterior column, where up to 80% of the loads are transmitted. The purpose of using intervertebral fusion cages is often to restore lost disc height resulting from a collapsed disc and to relieve pressure on nerve roots [9]. A spinal stabilization system consists of the following elements: one bone plate and certain number of bone screws (usually four) [10]. The bone plate is a small stabilization implant designed to make connection between two or more consecutive vertebrae (figure 6.b).

1245

The intervertebral disc is the cornerstone of the joint complex that comprises the spinal motion segment. The disc functions to permit limited motion and flexibility, while maintaining segmental stability and absorbing and distributing external loads [11] (figure 6.c). An artificial intervertebral disc, or intervertebral disc prosthesis, is a synthetic replacement of the damaged intervertebral disc of the spine.

Superior endplate Inferior endplate

Core

a) Intervertebral lumbar b) Cervical bone plate c) Artificial intervertebral disc fusion cage components Figure 6: Spinal stabilization elements All the presented examples have an educational purpose, the obtained (RP) models can be used as teaching aids for students in the classroom as well as for researches.

4. CONCLUSION
Almost 70% of the whole volume of the medical devices (like implants and prostheses) can be produced with one of the Rapid Prototyping methods, without any additional process. The challenging parts of the prosthesis which need dimensional precision, small geometry deviation or high quality surface roughness require the use of a classical manufacturing method after the building process. For example, so far there are no Rapid Prototyping methods available to produce a part with the same high roughness class, like classical grinding process. The Electron Beam Melting and the Selective Laser Melting methods are the most successfully Rapid Prototyping techniques, used for metal and plastic parts fabrication. Due to the high power beam (electron or laser) developed in the process, the EBM and SLM techniques provide the best results using metallic materials like stainless steel, titanium or cobalt chrome alloys, or different types of Polyamide.

REFERENCES
[1] Milovanovi, J.; Trajanovi, M.: Medical Applications of Rapid Prototyping, Facta Universitatis, Series: Mechanical Engineering, Vol. 5, No 1, 2007, pp. 79 85. [2] Chua, C.K.; Leong, K.F.; Lim, C.S.: Rapid prototyping: Principles and Applications, 2nd Edition, World Scientific Publishing, 2003. [3] Cooper, K.G.: Rapid Prototyping Technology: Selection and Application, CRC Press, 2001. [4] EBM Process. Available on Arcam Web site http://www.arcam.com/technology/ebm-process.aspx. [5] Excellence in rapid product development. Available on CRDM LTD Web site http://www.crdm.co.uk/technical_sls.html. [6] Products. Available on CMP Group Web site http://www.mcp-group.com/rpt/rpttslm.html. [7] Stoia, D.I.: Modelarea, dezvoltarea si testarea implanturilor pentru coloana vertebrala, Editura Politehnica Timisoara, 2008. ISSN 1842-4937. ISBN 978-973-625-697-4 [8] FORMIGA_P_100_EN Brochure. Available on EOS Web site http://www.eos.info/fileadmin/user_upload/downloads_presse/pdf_files/FORMIGA_P_100_EN.pdf. [9] Zdeblick, T.A.: Spine Cages Help to Restore Correct Spinal Alignment, Available on Web site http://www.spineuniverse.com/exams-tests/devices/spine-cages-help-restore-correct-spinal-alignment. [10] Benzel, E.C.: Biomechanics of the Spine Stabilization, Thieme USA. 2001. [11] Bradford, D.S.; Berven, S.H.; Hu, S.: Intervertebral Disc Replacement. A Role in the Management of Chronic Low Back Pain Caused by Degenerative Disc Disease, Available on Web site http://www.spineuniverse.com/exams-tests/devices/spine-cages-help-restore-correct-spinal-alignment

1246

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

PREPAREDNESS AND RESPONSE TO EMERGENCY SITUATIONS AND ACCIDENT

1

Milorad Stojanovi1, Zoran Kuli2, Ivica Ristovi3

PD RB Kolubara d.o.o., Lazarevac, SRBIJA, e-mail:milorad.stojanovic@rbkolubara.rs 2 PD RB Kolubara d.o.o., Lazarevac, SRBIJA, e-mail:zoran.kulic@rbkolubara.rs 3 Faculty of Mining and Geology, Beograd, e-mail: ivica@rgf.bg.ac.rs

Summary: Potential emergency situations including those that may not be controlled, can in any case have a significant impact on the definition of organization and management system of safety and health at work and environmental protection. Key words: Emergency situations, influence, organization, safety, occupational health, environmental protection.

1. INTRODUCTION
The subject of this work are the activities and responsibilities for preparedness to respond to emergency situations and respond to them. Need to define the procedures that an organization must establish to identify possible emergencies and accidents that could have an impact on safety and health at work and on the environment, adequate measures for emergency response and their prevention through prevention or mitigation if the incidents situations arise. The organization must have a procedure that is applied after the identification of potential significant aspects and potential emergency situations and accidents that may have adverse impacts on the environment, life and health. The organization must periodically review and if necessary revise, their willingness to respond in emergency situations, as well as plans, procedures and response procedures, especially immediately after the incident or emergency situation. The procedure is applicable to all organizations in which they identify important aspects of the environment and threats to health and safety at work.

2. STANDARD REQUIREMENTS
System Requirements standard environmental management system ISO 14001 and managing the health and safety at work of OHSAS 18001 in paragraph 4.4.7 are identical and clear that the organization shall establish, implement and maintain procedures to identify potential emergency situations and potential accidents that could have impact on safety and health at work and on the environment, and the procedures for identifying ways of answering acidente and incidents. Emergency and accident response and the way they always have their own specifics, but preparedness and response to emergencies and accidents can be part of a common procedure. The reason is the need for organizations to establish procedures, fast and synchronized responses to actual emergencies and accidents that could lead to deaths, serious injuries or significant pollution of the environment and prevent or mitigate the consequences. Preparedness for emergency response includes: Identify potential hazards Establish written procedures readiness and response in the event of an incident or accident The obligation is that the organization must be periodically reviewed, and if necessary revise, their willingness to respond in emergency situations, as well as treatment response (especially immediately after the accident or emergency situation).

1247

3. PROCESS PROCEDURES
3.1 Identification of potencial incidents Identify potential incidents to the health and safety at work of employees of the Organization for the analysis taking into account: legal requirements and other regulations; Plan protection from damage, accidents and other accidents; performance reports. experience from previous disasters, emergencies and review the performance of practical exercises, as well as the results of such actions. results of risk identification, risk assessment and risk management results; availability of local emergency services and details of any responses to emergencies or consultations; He also performed the act on the assessment of risk for each position, and therefore plan the implementation of risk assessment defined responsibilities. Identification of potential incidents relating to the protection of the environment in the organization of the analysis: data on significant environmental aspects; Process Controls Requires legislative and other requirements; Results of previous accidents and exercises for response; Report on previous accidents; The effect on the environment. Discussing: emissions into the atmosphere in the event of an accident, spill into the water and soil in the event of an accident, the specific impact on the environment and ecosystem in the event of an accident. Identifying the risk of accidents must be performed in the process of designing and developing new processes and actions, or introducing new technology or equipment used for making and analysis of the impact of products, processes and systems of environmental sredinu.Na the data collected in the stage of identifying potential risks of accidents, must assess the risk of an accident based on the likelihood of accidents and possible consequences for human life and health and the environment, as well as the potential size of damages. It is necessary to document the register of significant impact on the health and safety of employees on the environment and quantifying the level of risk, and the necessary actions depending on the level of risk. The assessment must be defined by space, facilities and equipment which can cause accidents and that the volume will be affected by it, the number of workers or the surrounding population on which the accident had no impact and the consequences would be. It is necessary to take actions to reduce the level of risk to acceptable levels so that all risks with a value considerable define and implement preventive measures to reduce these risks. By the definition of preventive measures to evaluate the new situation and require that all activities, whose level of risk prevention measures can not be reduced to acceptable levels, the ban. 3.2 Prevention The priority is to prevent or minimize the possibility that incidents occur. When possible incidents identified as important, they must identify measures to prevent or reduce risk. These measures may include: List of equipment for emergency operations records of test equipment for emergency operations Changes in the present process; Replacement of certain materials to other safer and less hazardous materials; Audit of existing procedures and audit response training and exercises. Enforcement of existing programs and procedures to reduce the impact or development of new procedures in accordance with good management practices They must determine the persons responsible for implementing the above measures. The process of reacting in incidentnoj situation must be tested, where possible, at least once a year through training and exercises. This includes reporting performed after exercise. Once done any exercise, and get suggestions and comments from the participants and assessors present exercise, the process of reacting in an emergency situation can be modified. 3.3 Control operations Control operation is required, until the risk of potential incidents can not be eliminated. Each organization is responsible for establishing procedures for preparedness to respond in case of emergencies and respond to them and to suit its specific needs.

1248

Readiness for emergency response and the response to them must include: 1. Identification of potential disasters and emergencies on the basis of the priorities of the various emergency situations. 2. Identification and information on hazardous substances on site (eg, flammable liquid storage tanks, compressed gases), including the potential impact of each matter to security and human health and the environment and emergency measures to be taken in case of spills or discharges in the event of an accident ; 3. Reaction procedure (application crash, alerting, notification and information of people who should participate in responding to accident, the establishment of continuous measurement and monitoring) 4. A responsible person who will guide and a list of key personnel to respond in an emergency situation and their responsibilities; 5. Most likely type and range of emergencies or accidents 6. With opportunities for special events from the environment to the organization (to the nearest facility, workshop, plant, factory, road, railway line); 7. The most appropriate measures for responding to emergencies or accidents and the order of their execution 8. The required mitigation measures (remediation) damages 9. Provide adequate equipment to respond (alarm systems, lighting and emergency power supply, means of evacuation shelters, critical valves, switches, breaker, equipment for firefighting, first aid equipment, communications equipment, ..), whose validity examines at regular intervals. 10. To ensure availability of essential information during emergencies npr.nacrti facilities, information on hazardous materials, procedures, tel.brojeve Contact 11. Evacuation routes, meeting places and first aid 12. Provided for cooperation with a variety of specialized services for assistance (eg, fire brigade, cleaning services) that are important for the specific emergency situation, including contact details 13. The possibility of mutual assistance by the organization in the vicinity of 14. Plans for internal and external communication, including ways of informing the legislative institutions, neighbors and the public 15. Protection of vital equipment, equipment and documentation 16. Staff training plans that deal with activities in emergency situations (lectures and practical exercises), and testing their effectiveness 17. Periodic examination of procedures for emergency response 18. Report on the accident 19. The process of evaluation after the accident to determine the corrective and preventive measures Inclusion of external organizations (npr.Vatrogasna Service, Department for the protection and rescue of chemical accidents, police and ..) in planning for and respond to emergency situations should be clearly documented. These organizations should consult about the possible circumstances of their involvement and provide them with the necessary information to quickly and easily engage in activities to respond to emergencies. 3.4 Analysis accident possible consequences Based on data collected in the stage of identifying potential risks of accidents, it should be possible to analyze the extent of the accident and its consequences for the environment, health and safety of the public and potential size of damages. On the basis of supposed incidents to evaluate the effects of the assumed effects of significant aspects of the environment or potential hazards to health and safety at work. The assessment must be defined by space, facilities and equipment which can cause accidents and that the volume will be affected by it, the number of workers or the surrounding population on which the accident had no impact and the consequences would be. 3.5 Risk assessment Risk assessment determines the risk of an accident based on the likelihood of accidents and possible consequences for human life and health and the environment. Based on the database tables to do the classification and register a significant risk of accidents and quantifying the level of risk, and required actions depending on the level of classification rizika.Korienjem undertaken activities to reduce the level of risk to acceptable levels so that all the risks in these estimates whose value is important to define and implement preventive measures to reduce these risks. By the definition of preventive measures, assess the emerging situation and activities, whose level of risk prevention measures can not be reduced to acceptable levels, to stop. It is necessary to implement and control that comply with all measures that are in the order defined.

1249

3.6 Emergency response Preparedness response to danger basically consists in making an appropriate response plan for accidents and emergencies Wu presented the paper, and providing adequate equipment for emergency and regular testing of the ability of the Organization, through practical exercises simulated emergencies. Response to the accident provides measures and activities to be carried out when the accident happened. In this case, take the following actions: Report the accident; Manage Action response to the accident; Coordination of the participants in response to the accident; Establishing a continuous measurement and monitoring; Develop a plan of rehabilitation consequences of accidents; Review recovery plan; Implementation of the plan of rehabilitation; Preparation of reports on accidents; Review procedures to respond in case of accidents; The decision to amend the procedure. For every accident is necessary to start the procedure of implementation of corrective measures, ie. investigate the causes of accidents, define and implement appropriate measures to prevent repetition of the accident. Report on responding to the incident must be challenged. On the basis of the conclusions of the review donetii decisions on improving preparedness for response procedures in emergency situations and respond to them.

4. CONCLUSION
This paper provides guidance on how the organization through a procedure to respond to the requirements of systems, environmental management ISO 14001, system of managing the health and safety at work OHSAS 18001, (item 4.4.7) and effectively respond to the existing emergency events and accidents and procedures that prevent and reduce possible impacts on safety and health at work and on the environment. In addition, the law is the obligation of organizations to implement preventive measures and establish procedures to respond to accidents. It is defined by the Law on Safety and Health at Work (Official Gazette RS no. 101/2005), the Law on Emergency (Official Gazette RS no. 111/2009), the Law on Environmental Protection (Official Gazette RS 135/2004 36/2009) periodically review (and if necessary, revise), documentation and procedures for organizations to respond in emergency situations, in accordance with the guidelines of this work (especially right after an accident or emergency situation), provides a good basis for the fulfillment of legal requirements and required standards. At the end of the note not to take all protective and safety measures, do not take prevention and preparedness measures, rehabilitation, or no insurance against damages caused to third parties due to accidents, sanctioned by these Laws

REFERENCES
[1] [2] [3] [4] Law on Safety and Health at Work (Official Gazette RS no. 101/2005). Law on Emergency (Official Gazette RS no. 111/2009). Law on Environmental Protection (Official Gazette of RS 135/2004 36/2009) Regulation of the content of the policy of preventing accidents and making the content and methodology of the report on safety and accident protection plan (Official Gazette RS no. 41/2010). [5] Systems for Environmental Management ISO 14001 [6] A system of managing the health and safety at work OHSAS 18001

1250

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ELASTOMERS MODIFICATION WITH SILICON-ORGANIC OLIGOURETHANISOCYANATES

Sukachev V.V., Burya A. I.
Dniepropetrovsk State Agrarian University, Dniepropetrovsk, UKRAINE, e-mail: ol.burya@gmail.com
Summary: The influence of adding silicon-organic oligourethanisocyanates (SOUI) on structural and chemical transformations of elastomeric vulcanized rubbers based on the mixture of nitrile and divinyl rubber resins has been studied. SOUI have been stated to participate in the process of elastomer structuring, to act as stabilizers for thermally destructive processes, as well as to provide for the improvement of the system ordering, which in aggregate significantly improves the exploitation properties of vulcanized rubbers applied as rubber lining for ball mills of the binders dry milling. Key words: elastomeric vulcanized rubbers, mixture of nitrile and divinyl rubber resins, modification, silicon-organic oligourethanisocyanates, properties.

1. INTRODUCTION
The modern synthesis of rubbers based on carbon and hetero-chain elastomers widely applies their modification with silicon-organic compounds, while their alloying action is often revealed at even low concentrations of additions (0.1 5 mass %). Here we should distinguish between the two groups of silicon-organic modifiers: non-reactive and reactive ones. An example of applying non-reactive compositions can be that of applying oligomethyl(ethyl)siloxane liquids, characterized by weak intermolecular interaction and good flexibility of siloxane chain, as well as the limited compatibility with almost all the carbo-chain rubbers, which allows to apply them as interstructural plastifiers. Introducing oligoorganosiloxanes significantly improves the technological properties of rubber mixtures: decreases energy expenses on mixing, shrinkage at extrusion, decreases the velocity of profiling, decreases the mixtures viscosity [1]. The vulcanized rubbers reveal the increase of stability, which is likely to be connected with the decrease of inner stress at the space net formation. In [2] there is described using oligodimethyl or methylethylsiloxane liquids for modifying rubbers of general application aimed at improving the heat resistance and fatigue strength of vulcanized rubbers. Among the drawbacks of these systems there is the existence of only the physical interaction (and a rather weak one!) between the polymer matrix and the modifier, as a result of which there the latters migration from the vulcanized rubber is observed, accelerating at increased temperatures, which in the end decreases the modification effect. Oligosiloxane liquids with polar trifluoropropyl border radicals are better compatible with the elastomers, which significantly improves the exploitation properties of vulcanized rubbers [3, 4], but these compositions are rather rare and expensive. Special interest is drawn to silicon-organic modifiers with functional groups (alcoxy-, acetoxy-, etc.) at the account of which they are capable of forming the chemical links with macromolecules of rubber resin and other components of the rubber mixture. The elastomers modification with chemically active silicon-organic compounds allows to improve the set of the vulcanized rubbers technological and physico-mechanical properties [5, 6]. Among the chemically active modifiers there are also the silicon-organic carbon-functional polyisocyanates and organosiloxanisocyanate adducts whose application allows to obtain rubbers possessing the improved heat-, wear-resistance, fatigue strength and resistance to heat ageing [7, 8].

1251

2. SUBJECTS AND METHODS OF ELASTOMERS INVESTIGATION

The investigations used the rubber mixtures based on rubber resins combination of general application SCN 26 and SCD (80:20 mass parts). Vulcanized rubbers obtained from these mixtures are widely used as a wearresistant lining of ball mills of different types, for instance, 1456, applied for the binding materials dry milling (for example, lime and mixtures based on it). At such mills operation there happens the heating of their rubber lining at the account of contact with the heated material (up to 373 ) directed for milling, as well as at the account of heat release as a result of dynamic loads and friction of the ground material across the lining surface. As a result of low heat conductivity of rubber, the lining surface temperature can rise up to 423 473, which means that the lining operates in the conditions of intensive mechanical and temperature affect causing rubber ageing and wear. This means that increasing the lifetime of rubber lining is a rather topical task. The composition of rubber mixtures included: rubber resin SCN26-80, rubber resin SCD-20, sulphur-1, sulphenamide C -1.5, zinc oxide-5, neozone D-1, product 4010-1, nitrosodiphenilamine-0.5, stearin-1, technical carbon PM100-60, dibutylphthalate-25, SOUI (per 100% product)-1-10 mass parts per 100 mass parts of rubber resin. Rubber mixtures for investigations were prepared at laboratory equipment according to the regime cited in [4], which is optimal for the mentioned systems. SOUI was introduced in the end of the process of ingredients mixing. The mixtures were vulcanized within the mould at the temperature of 425 during 60 min. Physico-mechanical tests of vulcanized rubbers were held according to the following standards: elastic tensiontest properties GOST 27075, tear resistance GOST 26279, rebound elasticity ST UEC 10874, A Shore hardness GOST 26375, fatigue tolerance at multiple tension GOST 26179, resistance to heat ageing GOST 902474, resistance to wear at sliding GOST 42677. Studying the structural changes in elastomeric vulcanized rubbers by means of equilibrium swelling and IR spectroscopy was held with the help of well-known techniques described in [4].

3. EXPERIMENT RESULTS AND THEIR DISCUSSION

Earlier, in [9, 10] silicon-organic carbon-fuctional bi- and multi-atom spirits (hereinafter referred to as spirits) were synthesized. In this connection, it was presupposed that introducing silicon-organic oligourethanisocyanates (SOUI) derivatives from spirits and toluylene-diisocyanate (TDI) rubber mixtures also should provide for improving the exploitation properties of vulcanized rubbers. SOUI synthesis was held by means of TDI reaction (isomers inductrial mixture) with bi- and multi-atom spirits within the inert atmosphere (nitrogen) at the temperature of 323 328 within the dried dissolvent. Here is the general scheme of the reaction: R2[CH2OH]n + nOCNR1NCO R2[CH2OC(O)NHR1NCO]n where: R1 = C6H3(CH3), R2 siloxane fragment of spirit, n = 2 4.6. The synthesized SOUI (table 1) are resins joint in case of removing the dissolvent, that is why during the further work they were used as solutions with the concentration of 75 80 mass %. First, methylethylketone was used as a dissolvent, however, as the further investigations showed, better results are achieved in case of using a complex ether plastifier entering into the composition of the rubber mixture, for instance, dibutylphtalate. Table 1: Structure and characteristics of SOUI applied for elastomers modification Content, mass %, found/calculated compoFormula of SOUI (in 100 % substance) sition NCO Si I {(PhSiO1.5)1.3[O0.5SiMe2CH2OC(O)NHR1NCO]}4.6 9.0/9.56 /14.70 II {(PhSiO1.5)(MePhSiO)[O0.5SiMe2CH2OC(O)NHR1NCO]}3.2 7.7/7.83 /15.70 III {(PhSiO1.5)[Me(CF3CH2CH2)SiO)][O0.5SiMe2CH2OC(O)NHR1NCO]}2.7 7.2/7.55 /15.13 IV OCNR1NH(O)COCH2SiMe2OSiPh2OSiMe2CH2OC(O)NHR1NCO 10.3/11.37 /11.37 where: R1 = C6H3(Me) It should be mentioned that the compounds formulas in table 1 are idealized, as alongside with the blocking reaction according to the above mentioned scheme there is also possible the formation of inside- and intermolecular fragments of the following structure: SiCH2OC(O)HNR1NH(O)COCH2Si

1252

In order to state the optimum amount of the modifier introduced into the rubber mixture there was held a series of preliminary tests at various dosage of SOUI I: 1; 2; 3; 5 and 10 mass parts per 100 mass parts of the rubber resins mixture. These tests showed the improvement of some properties of vulcanized rubbers at the increase of SOUI I content up to ~3 mass parts (see figure), the further increase of its content leads to weakening of the modifying effect, deteriorating the technological and physico-mechanical properties of vulcanized rubbers. Due to these circumstances all the further investigations were held at SOUI I IV dosage of 3 mass parts per 100 mass parts of the rubber resins mixture, hence obtaining the following data (table 2): conventional stress at 300 % lengthening and conventional strength at extension of experimental vulcanized rubbers are higher than those of reference specimens (without SOUI) by 6 16 %; fatigue resistance by 31 77 %; coefficient of heat ageing at specific elongation (L) by 22 59 %; wear resistance by 17 26 %. Table 2: Physico-mechanical properties of vulcanized rubbers modified with SOUI (testing was held at 298 ) Refe SOUI according to table 1 Indices rence speI II III IV cimen Conventional stress at 300 % lengthening, P 6.8 7.8 7.9 7.8 7.0 ( 7.2 ) Conventional strength at extension, P 13.2 14.9 14.7 14.7 14.0 (14.0) Specific elongation, % 520 490 515 550 520 (525) Tear resistance, kN/m 52 52 52 55 52 (52) Rebound elasticity, % 32 32 32 32 32 (32) A Shore hardness, points 58 58 57 58 58 (59) Fatigue tolerance at multiple tension (lengthening 150 %), thous. cycles 26 34 37 46 35 (45) Coefficients of heat ageing (393 , 72 h) at tear resistance () at specific elongation (L) 0.82 0.41 0.93 0.50 0.93 0.55 29 0.99 0.65 26 0.95 (0.97) 0.50 (0.58) 28 (27)

Resistance to wearing at sliding, m3/J 35 28 -dissolvent- dibutylphtalate, in the rest of cases methylethylketone

1 conventional stress at 300% lengthening, P; 2 conventional tensile strength, P; 3 specific elongation, %; coefficients of heat ageing (393 , 72 h): 4 at fracture stress (), 5 at specific elongation (L); 6 fatigue strength at multiple strain (lengthening of 150%), thous. cycles; 7 resistance to abrasion at sliding, m3/J.

Figure 1: Dependence of physico-mechanical properties of vulcanized rubbers on the content of SOUI I (curve number corresponds to the scale number)

1253

Improving the strength indices and heat stability of the modified vulcanized rubbers is most likely to be conditioned by the change of overmolecular structure of vulcanized rubbers and the formation of additional chemical links between SOUI and the ingredients of the rubber mixture. As N.M. Shevchenko has shown [4], as well as according to our investigations performed at model systems (rubber resin SN26 + SOUI and rubber resin SN26 + SOUI + technical carbon PM100), Ngroups of SOUI are reactive towards the elastomeric matrix and other ingredients of the rubber mixture, which is revealed in the presence of the structuring effect of SOUI shown by means of equilibrium swelling and IRspectroscopy. Thus, in case of mixing rubber resin SN26 and SOUI (in the ratio of 100:3 mass parts) at rolls and their further heating at vulcanization temperature the changes are observed in IR-spectres of the mixture: there is decreased absorption intensity of 2270 cm1 stripe corresponding to the fluctuations of Ngroups at simultaneous increase of the intensity of peaks corresponding to the absorption stripes of urethane groups: 1720 1740 cm1 (=0 carbonyl) and 3350 cm1 (N urethane). This is most likely to happen as a result of the interaction between Ngroups with , , >N groups of the polymer chain of the nitrile rubber resin. The latters formation as a result of mechanochemical and thermal-oxidative processes occurring during the treatment of the nitrile rubber resin was stated in the work by D. I. Moiseyev and his collaborators [11]. The presence of groups on the surface of technical carbon is also known. Alongside with N groups exhaustion within model systems there is observed the decrease of the swelling peak at environ temperature by 1.3 1.5 times, the increase of cross-links concentration by 1.4 1.7 times this all testifies to the fact that SOUI takes active part in the process of elastomer vulcanization with the formation of siloxaneurethane fragments causing structural changes within elastomer. The mentioned fragments seem to be implemented between the macromolecules and overmolecular structures of rubber resin, thus decreasing inner stress and friction between them. This condition is of great importance because as a result there grows the vulcanized rubbers resistance to crack propagation, as well as decreases the heat release in polymer at the account of inner friction at dynamic loads [12], which has finally led to the increase of the fatigue resistance and wear resistance of vulcanized rubbers. The data cited in table 2 allows to see that vulcanized rubbers modified with SOUI III and IV which are likely to be best compatible with the elastomeric matrix seem to possess the best fatigue resistance, resistance to heat ageing and wear resistance. Compatibility improvement in case of SOUI III is obviously a result of the interaction of polar F322groups of siloxane fragments with nitrile rubber resin, and in case of SOUI IV it is conditioned with the spatial availability of linear siloxane fragments and macromolecules of rubber resin. There is an interesting fact that applying dibutylphtalate as SOUI dissolvent (during their synthesis) alongside with applying the plastifier in rubber mixture allowed to significantly increase vulcanized rubbers fatigue resistance (table 2, data in parenthesis for SOUI IV). Such an option of introducing SOUI into the rubber mixture is likely to cause a more even mode of siloxaneurethane fragments distribution within the vulcanized rubber structure.

4. CONCLUSIONS
Thus, SOUI have been found to participate in the process of elastomer structuring and to act as stabilizers of thermodestructive processes, as well as to provide for improving the system ordering, which in aggregate significantly improves the exploitation properties of vulcanized rubbers applied as rubber lining of for ball mills of the binders dry milling.

REFERENCES
[1] Bukanov A. M. The influence of small additions of silicon-organic compounds on rheological properties of carbon-chain rubber mixtures and the technological properties of rubbers / A. M. Bukanov, S. E. Timofeev, M. A. Otopkova // Reports of ASc of USSR. 1983. Vol. 109, 1. P. 8184. [2] . . 436828 USSR, IPC 08 9/10. Rubber mixture based on synthetic caoutchouc / G. N. Buiko, N. P. Krylova, E. V. Reztsova [et al.] (USSR). 1797610/235; application dated 13.06.72; published 25.07.74, bulletin 1974. 27, P. 51. [3] The influence of adding linear polymethylsiloxanes on the properties of rubbers for ball mills lining / N. M. Shevchenko, N. Ya. Kuz'menko, G. P. Shelud'ko [et al.] // Caoutchouc and rubber. 1986. 2. P. 44 45. [4] Shevchenko N. M. The synthesis of heat and wear resistant rubbers for ball mills lining: Thesis of a candidate of technical sciences / Natal'ya Mihailovna Shevchenko. Dnepropetrovsk. 1989. 206 p. [5] Kalabadze R. Sh. Investigation of the effect of 26 product in rubbers / R. Sh. Kalabadze, I. A. Tutorskiy, A. P. Bobrov // Rubber resin and rubber. 1984. 2. P. 4345.

1254

[6] .. 992531 USSR, 3 08 I 9/00. The composition based on ethylenepropylene copolymer / D. Ya. Zhinkin, B. V. Molchanov, A. N. Mihailova [et al.] (USSR). 3330789; application dated 3.08.81; published 30.02.83, Bulletin 4. P. 111. [7] On the influence of silicon-organic and organic polyisocyanates on the properties of rubbers / G. A. Blokh, N. M. Shevchenko, N. P. Smetankina [et al.] // Bulletin of higher educational institutions. Chemistry and chemical technology 1981. Vol. 24, 1. P. 103109. [8] . . 774208 USSR, 3 08 L 9/00, 08 L 75/00, 08 L83/06. Rubber mixture / Yu. V. Svetkin, N. Ya. Kuz'menko, E. S. Starodubtsev [et al.] (USSR). 2706031/2305; application dated 5.01.79. [9] Sukachev V. V. The synthesis of silicon-organic carbon-functional spirits / V. V. Sukachev, N. M. Shevchenko // Bulletin of the National Technical University KhPI. Collection of scientific works. Kharkv: NTU KhPI. 2008. 41. P. 135 140. [10] . . 904308 USSR, 3 08 77/14. Oligoorganosiloxanes containing oxymethyl groups as the initial substances for the synthesis of fast-hardened polyurethanes with the improved thermal and chemical resistance and the improved physico-mechanical properties and their way of obtaining / V. V. Sukachev, N. Ya. Kuz'menko, Yu. V. Svetkin (USSR). 2869774/2305; application dated 15.01.80. [11] The investigation of thermal treatment conditions on the structure of butadienenitrile caoutchouc by means of IR-spectroscopy / D. I. Moiseev, V. M. Potseluev, Yu. K. Gusev [et al.] // Caoutchouc and rubber. 1986. 6. P. 11 13. [12] Davydova V. N. Modifying isoprene rubber resins with oligoorganosiloxanes and the development of recipes of rubbers for the details operating in the conditions of dynamic loads: author's abstract of the Thesis of a candidate of technical sciences. Volgograd. 1988. 26 p.

1255

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

ON THE TRAVEL SAFETY OF TANK RAILWAY WAGONS

1

Aurelia Tnsoiu 1, Bogdan Tnsoiu 2, Ion Copaci 3

Departement of Engineering Aurel Vlaicu University Arad, ROMNIA, e-mail:aurelia.tanasoiu@gmail.com 2 REMARUL 16 Februarie Cluj Napoca, ROMNIA, e-mail: bogdan.tanasoiu@gmail.com 3 Departement of Engineering Aurel Vlaicu University Arad, ROMNIA, e-mail: ioncopaci@gmail.com

Summary: The paper presents a theoretical and experimental study on the torsional rigidity parameters of the bearing structure of a railway vehicle and that of the bogie which equip it, parameters which influence travel safety. We have established the necessity for using a parameter which characterizes the elasticity and implicitly the torsional rigidity of the car-bogies system, namely the equivalent rigidity Ctech. The study comprises experimental studuies for a towed railway freight vehicle (tank wagon of 86 m3 on 3 different types of bogies), from which results the importance of using the equivalent rigidity Ctech as a proposed parameter for establishing the capacity on travel safety of railway vehicles. Keywords: equivalent torsional rigidity, leading force of the leading wheel, average wheel load.

1. INTRODUCTION
The torsional capacity of the vehicle is defined as the limit value of the unloading of the leading wheel, which occurs on the crossing over the level defects of the railway, without producing the vehicles derailment. The vehicles torsional capacity must ensure its adaptability to the unloading of the leading wheel, implicitly to the torsioning of the railway [2]. Consequently, between the torsioning of the railway and the torsional capacity of the vehicle there must exist a well determined corellation through which, firstly, to ensure travel safety and also the dynamic overloads that it generates must become as little agressive as possible for the vehicle and railway At the correlation in regards to travel safety, the following phenomena must be taken into account: - the maximum unloadings of the leading wheels occur, usually, at low speeds, under 40 km/h, on a superelevated railway with high torsion; and, in particular, at the vehicles entrance on the ramp of the superelevation, where the railway torsion is maximum; - at low velocities, guidance capacity is influenced not only by the unloading of the leading wheel, but also by the quasistatic guidance forces, which are dependant, on different types of vehicles, by the effective radius of curvature of the railway, meaning the nominal radius to which the admissible tolerances are added; - also at low velocities the geometric guidance capacity plays an important role, determined by the qR 6,5 mm coefficient in correlation to the lateral wear of the rail and the gauge of the railway; - with the increase of speed, the unloadings of the leading wheel are gradually reduced through the action of the uncompensated centrifugal force, and consequently the importance of the torsion of the railway is reduced in regards to travel safety, however increasing the importance of the speed of variation of the torsion slope that generates dynamic overloads (torsion impulses) and which, in turn, depending on the frequency of appearance on the railway, contribute to the premature degradation of the bearing structures of the railway and vehicles, through the effect of fatigue strains. For railway vehicles, the values of the unloadings on the leading wheel depend both on the torsional rigidity of the vehicle and the torsional rigidity of the bogies. The bearing structures of the wagon and bogies , due to their elasticities and implicitly their torsional rigidities, determine values of the leading wheel unloadings Q t and Q t .
* +

1256

Consequently, the equivalent torsional rigidity is proposed as a coefficient to characterize the elasticity and rigidity of the car-bogie system [1]. Considering the mechanical system of the vehicle in figure 1 we have represented the car-bogie connection method.

C* t

C+ t

C+ t

2a *

Figure 1: Car-bogie connection method Admitting the parallel connection of bogie rigidities, connected in series with the car rigidity, the equivalent rigidity is expressed by:

C ech = t

+ 2C * t Ct + 2C t + C * t

(1)

We have used the equivalent rigidity characteristic that comprises both the influence of carbody torsional rigidity and the bogies rigidities, since it is a coefficient that determines the value of the unloadings of the leading wheels due to the torsional rigidities of the carbody-bogie system. Total unloading due to torsional rigidities of the car and the bogies is Qt,:
* Q t = Q + t + Q t

(2)

where: -total absolute decrease of wheel load due to railway twisting based on the bogie axle base; Q + t - total absolute decrease of wheel load due to railway twisting based on the car axle base. Q * t

2. EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF TORSIONAL RIGIDITY

The torsional rigidity C t of a carbody with own weight and the characteristics of the elastic elements of the suspension, are criteria of appreciating the travel safety of the car. The torsional rigidity
*

C* t is a characteristic of the carbody related to the axle base, expressed by a torsional

resulting in: * 2a
(3)

moment F 2b 2 applied to the carbody at an angular displacement

*

C* t = where:

2a * F 2b * z

KN mm 2 rad

2b * z - distance between the suspension supports on the axle [mm]; * 2a - car axle base [mm];
angular displacement [rad]; F variation of the vertical force [KN].

1257

The angular displacement [rad] can be expressed as:

h 2b * z

(4)

And the expression of the torsional rigidity:

* * C* t = 2a 2 b z

( )2 hF

KN mm 2 rad

(5)

F O P F

F M' N F 2b* z
Figure 2: Geometric characteristics of the vehicle
* It is sufficient for the F ratio to be determined experimentally in order to determine the torsional rigidity C t . h

2a *

A similar method is applied in the case of the bearing structure of the bogie, where C t is determined with respect to 2a+ , the bogie axle base [3].

3.EXPERIMENTAL STUDY ON THE EQUIVALENT RIGIDITY AND THE Y/Q RATIO

The experimental study was aimed at determining the following parameters for 9 different types of freight cars: - torsional rigidity of car bearing structure C t ; - torsional rigidity of bogie bearing structure (frame) C t . The experimental determination of the torsional rigidity C t and C t was conducted according to the methodology of the UIC, ERRI B12/DT135, and the values of the equivalent torsional rigidity Ctech were determined with equation (5). Furthermore, the values of the Y/Q ratio were determined for the leading wheel (Y-leading force of the leading wheel; Q-load on the leading wheel) according to the methodology of the UIC ERRI B12/RP49.
*

Y Ya = Q a Q0 (Qt + maxQfz0 + QHy )

where: Ya - leading force of the leading wheel; Q0 average wheel load;

(6)

1258

Qt total unloading due to torsional rigidity of car, bogies, car suspension and elastic slide; maxQfz0 maximum absolute deviation of wheel load; QHy absolute decrease of wheel load due to transverse force Hy in the axle box.

Figure 3: Necessary device and arrangement in order to conduct the test for the experimental determination of the F ratio for vehicles without bogies h

The results of the study are shown in table 1. As an example, we further present the tank wagon of 86 m3 with the following technical characteristics: - gauge.........................1435 mm - car axle base............10660 mm - bogie axle base..........1800 mm - tank capacity...................86 m3 - maximum axle load for bogie type Y25Cs/LHB71/LHB74 .....200 kN/axle Figures 4,5,6 and 7 show the force as a function of displacement diagrams obtained experimentally for the bogie frame and car chassis.

Ct+ = 0,3159051010 KNmm2/rad Figure 4: Force-displacement diagram for the torsioning of the type LHB 71 bogie frame

1259

Ct+ = 0,4080281010 KNmm2/rad Figure 5: Force-displacement diagram for the torsioning of the type LHB 74 bogie frame

Ct+ = 1,661010 KNmm2/rad Figure 6: Force-displacement diagram for the torsioning of the type Y25 bogie frame

Ct* = 8,5232711010 KNmm2/rad Figure 7: Force-displacement diagram for the torsioning of the 86 mc VTG tank wagon chassis Consequently it was possible to determine the values of C t and C t and the ratio Y/Q.
*
+

1260

No. Wagon type

2a* [mm] 2a+ [mm] Qo [kN]

Table 1: 1 2 86 m3 tank 86 m3 tank wagon with wagon with Y25Cs bogie LHB 71 bogie 10660 10660 1800 1800 28,204 28,204

3 86 m3 tank wagon with LHB bogie 10660 1800 28,204 0,4081010 8,521010 0,7451010 0.701

C+ t
[kNmm /rad]
2

1,661010 8,521010 2,3891010 0.953

0,31591010 8,521010 0,5881010 0.693

C* t
[kNmm /rad]
2

C ech t
[kNmm2/rad] Y/Q

4. CONCLUSIONS
The proposed parameter, equivalent torsional rigidity Ctech, a parameter which characterizes, as a whole, in regards to torsional rigidity, for a vehicle equipped with bogies, the travel safety as an effect on the Y/Q ratio. The Y/Q ratio depinds on the equivalent rigidity Ctech as well as other factors that determine the unloading of the leading wheel, such that we appreaciate that an experimentally obtained value of Ctech=5x1010KNmm2/rad is a limit value for freight cars that ensure an Y/Q1,2 , value imposed by the international norms of the UIC. In the future it is necessary for theoretical and experimental research to be conducted following: - definitivation and imposing a computation of the Y/Q ratio in relation to wheel unloadings determined as a function of the equivalent rigidity Ctech; - determining a range of values for the equivalent torsional rigidity Ctech that ensure travel safety by respecting the limits imposed for the Y/Q ratio.

REFERENCES
[1] Tnsoiu Aurelia Influena Elasticitilor Structurilor Portante ale Vehiculelor de cale Ferat Asupra Siguranei Ghidrii, Ph.D. Thesis, Politehnica University Bucharest, Department of Transportation, Bucharest, 2006. [2] Ilia N., Copaci I., Tnsoiu A. On the influence of Bearing structure Elasticity of a Railway Vehicle on Guidance Safety, International Congress Method and Instrument in Technological Systems, National Technical University, Harkov Politechnic Institute, Ukraine, nr. 73/2007, ISSN 0370-808X, pg. 82-86. [3] *** ORE B12 DT135 Report, Utrecht, 26.10.1984

1261

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

BALING MACHINES AS A CONSTITUENT PART OF THE WASTE RECYCLING SYSTEM

Mechanical Engenering Faculty University of Ni, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: temelj@masfak.ni.ac.rs 2 Technical Faculty of Bitola, Bitola, MACEDONIA, e-mail: stojance.nusev@uklo.edu.mk 1 Mechanical Engenering Faculty University of Ni, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: bojanr@masfak.ni.ac.rs Mechanical Engenering Faculty University of Ni, Ni, SERBIA, e-mail: petardjekic@masfak.ni.ac.rs
1

Dragan Temeljkovski1, Stojano Nusev2, Bojan Rani1, Petar eki 1

Summary: A baling machine has the task to form a product from waste materials into a desired shape, dimensions and mass for easier and less expensive transport and reloading, storing, keeping, as well as for technological demands of the production process. Baling also prevents scattering of materials in reloading, transport, and storing. Furthermore, baling reduces the storage space which also influences production costs. The division of baling machines, as well as their basic parts, is presented in this paper. The use of baling machines in technological production processes and treatment of metal, plastics, wood, and other raw materials leads to the increase in the degree of material exploitation. That way, by producing as little return (waste) material as possible and by collecting it adequately, the closed cycle is achieved. Key Words: Baling Machine, Material Recycling, Waste.

1. INTRODUCTION
The term recycling indicates the reprocessing of materials in the production process, for the original or other purposes, including organic recycling and excluding energy consumption [1,2]. The basic criterion for any recycling process is to have a determined input of used (packaging) material that can be reexploited as a usable material. In used packaging recycling, the input is used packaging which can be combined with other materials, though not necessarily, while the output is the technological reject or the material used in the production of new products which can be packaging or something else. The recycling process will vary significantly depending on the material being recycled, the sources from which it is provided, and the application of reused/recycled material. Further in the recycling process the reject from different production, filling, and packaging operations is used. As an addition to the primary production process, the recycling process is a useful way to redirect the material from its final disposal at landfills. It should be emphasized that the used packaging reprocessed through the recycling process is included into the degree of recycling as proposed by Directive 94/62/EC, while the reject is not included. When there are high demands for the second life usage concerning cleanliness and consistency, it is required that the recycling process ensures the high degree of extraneous/various materials removal in the cleaning phase where reusable material is washed, its color removed, etc. In other procedures, when the demands for new applications are more lenient within specifications, it is not necessary to separate the small quantity of extraneous materials nor are the complex cleaning procedures unavoidable. From the economic and environmental aspect, it is wrong to demand a higher quality of recycled material than it is specified for the input material, and the recycling operations are often designed to satisfy specific needs of the reused products, as well as the intended application of the recycled material.

1262

2 WASTE BALING MACHINES

The waste baling machines compress different waste materials into a more compact cubic shape allowing for an easier transport, melting, and some other types of processing [3]. 2.1. Division of Waste Baling Machines Based on the drive type, waste baling machines are divided into: manual mechanical. Depending on their drive type, mechanical baling machines can be: electro hydraulic electro pneumatic combined. Based on the direction of bale formation, baling machines can be divided into: vertical, horizontal. Figure 1 shows a photograph of a vertical waste baling machine under a. Vertical machines are used for softer and smaller materials and can usually be found in warehouses of companies which do not deal with baling. Bales of smaller dimensions are products of these machines. In Figure 1, under b, a photograph of a horizontal waste baling machine is shown, and this is the machine most frequently used in the industry, especially for materials such as steel residue. Bales of larger dimensions are products of these machines.

a.

b. Figure 1: Photographs of Waste Baling Machines

a) Vertical Waste Baling Machine and b) Horizontal Waste Baling Machine

Regarding their mobility, the waste baling machines can be: stationary (immovable) and mobile (movable). Figure 2, under a, shows a photograph of a stationary (immovable) waste baling machine. Stationary waste baling machines are machines which are situated in a destined facility on the location with an economically justified radius of material delivery to the terminal. The formed bale is positioned in the area around the baling machine. Figure 2, under b, shows a photograph of a mobile (movable) automotive horizontal waste baling machine which can be moved from one location to some other that also has the justified economic significance. Mobile waste baling machines can have a crane, platform, or be without both. The formed bales are later transported to a waste treatment location. Concerning the action and number of press pistons, baling machines are most often divide into: single compression (one piston), double compression (two pistons) and triple compression (three pistons).

1263

a.

b. Figure 2: Photographs of Waste Baling Machines

a) Stationary baling machine for waste and b) Mobile machine for baling waste from the crane

Figure 3, under a, shows a photograph of a single compression waste baling machine. The machine has one piston which compresses the recycling material towards the moving doors which are locked. After the compression process is completed, the doors are unlocked and opened, and the formed bale is ejected. Thus formed bales are of lowest density. Figure 3, under b, shows a photograph of a double compression waste baling machine. The machine has two pistons. In the first compression phase the recycling material is compressed towards the moving doors which are locked. After the completion of the first compression phase, the second piston, which is positioned perpendicularly in relation to the first piston, is activated and the bale is compressed again. After the second compression process is completed, the doors are unlocked and opened, and the formed bale is ejected. Thus formed bales are of higher density than the bales formed by presses with only one piston. Figure 3, under c, shows a photograph of a triple compression waste baling machine. The machine has three pistons. In the first compression phase the recycling material is compressed towards the moving doors which are locked. After the completion of the first compression phase, the second piston, which is positioned perpendicularly in relation to the first piston, is activated and the bale is compressed again. After the completion of the second compression phase, the third piston, which is positioned perpendicularly in relation to both the first and the second piston, is activated and the bale is compressed yet again. After the third compression process is completed, the doors are unlocked and opened, and the formed bale is ejected. Thus formed bales are of highest density.

a.

b.

c.

a) Single Compression with One Piston, b) Double Compression with Two Pistons and c) Triple Compression with Three Pistons.

Figure 3: Schemes of Waste Baling Machines According to the Action and Number of Pistons:

3.0. BALING MACHINE STRUCTURE

Baling machines belong to the group of machines that have a closed support structure [4]. They consist of standard i.e. basic parts and numerous accessory parts which are built into the machine in order to improve process performance and automation, and protect machine users.

1264

Here, the analyzed baling press for metal waste (sheet metal, wire and other shapes of low resistance) is of hydraulic type with manual working operations control, designed for the manufacture of waste material packages of various dimensions. 3.1. Basic Parts of Baling Machines Basic parts of a baling machine are: a) Support structure b) Working chamber rack c) Drive system d) Transmission system e) Executive organ f) Control part g) Lubrication system 3.1.1. Support structure The support structure of a baling machine, that is, the machine stand shown in Figure 4, under a, is designed in such a way as to ensure the necessary stability of machine in appropriate working modes and to secure a practical and functional connection of all other parts of the machine. It is manufactured out of certain types of steel or cast iron, which allow for its stability due to their characteristics, and ensure that a machine can successfully accept and balance all working loads. 3.1.2. Working chamber rack Working chamber rack of a baling machine shown in Figure 4, under b, is a place where the mere compression process is conducted, that is, where the direct contact between the executive part of a baling machine and the material being baled is achieved. When designing the working chamber, special attention should be paid to the movement speed and conditions of the executive part, since that is when friction occurs which may have a negative influence of the process. If necessary, the whole compression process should be realized in several stages which would reduce the effects of friction.

Radna komora

a.
a) Support Structure and b) Rack.

b.

Figure 4: Photographs of Basic Parts of Waste Baling Machines 3.1.3. Drive system The drive system of a baling machine shown in Figure 5 has the task of producing the sufficient amount of energy for the movement of the executive part of the machine under an established rule. The units for supplying energy to the executive part of the machine in mechanical presses are electro motors of relatively high power, while hydraulic machines are driven by hydraulic units with powerful hydro motors. 3.1.4. Transmission system The transmission system of a baling machine shown in Figure 6 has the task of transforming the input motor energy into mechanical energy of executive organs, and to transmit it to the consumer with the least possible

1265

losses. The transmission system in mechanical presses consists of belt or chain or perhaps snail transmissions connected into a single whole.

Figure 5: Various Types of Hydraulic Systems

Figure 6: Example of Hydrostatic Pressure Effect in Waste Baling Machines. 3.1.5. Executive part The executive part of a waste baling machine shown in Figure 7 is used for fastening and carrying of tools, and the machine directly acts upon the processed material through it. The executive part in mechanical or hydraulic baling machines is a piston. The executive part is positioned inside the working chamber and its movement is provided by the drive system over the transmission system of the machine under a predefined rule. This movement can be translatory, radial or a combination of the two.

Figure 7. View of the Executive Part of a Waste Baling Machine.

1266

3.1.6. Control part The control part shown in Figure 8 has the task of conducting the process by controlling all important process parameters, as well as securing that the drive system is timely turned on or off. It is most often realized as a command control, electronic panel with switches that are used for a manual issuing of instructions and a display that shows the reading of process feedback. The command control panel can usually be found on the machine frame in an easily accessible spot.

a) Command Control Panel and b) Multi-information Terminal Visualization of Process Data

Figure 8. Control Part of Waste Baling Machines 3.1.7. Lubrication system The lubrication system of a waste baling machine has to task of ensuring lubrication in all places where mobile machine elements slide and roll. The lubrication is most frequently done with adequate mineral oils in waste baling machines.

4. CONCLUSION
The constant growth and development of society and surroundings have led to the increase of waste in our living environment, and that is why we resort more and more to recycling. Recycling is especially important for some scarce materials. The baling process has a very significant role in recycling due to the following reasons: Environmental factor it influences the reduction of waste. Factor of technological characteristics bales have a great cubic mass, one can reduce the basic material volume up to several tens of times by using the baling process, which increases the coefficient of warehouse space exploitation. Factor of potential and resources it has a big role in recycling scarce materials, having in mind that metal raw materials can be recycled unlimited number of times. Waste baling machines exist as a constituent part of the recycling process in different configurations and sizes, but it is usually the case of stationary machines. A mobile baling machine has an enormous economic importance due to its mobility and capability of serving many plants within a single company or several companies within a single town or country, time savings and high transport costs. Mobile baling machines that travel from town to town and from country to country can be seen more and more in the market, and especially in the waste material industry. The greatest advantage of a mobile baling machine is that it can relatively easily be moved around the factory premises.

REFERENCES
[1] Directive 94/62/EC of the European Parliament and the Council on Packaging Waste - December 1994. [2] SRPS EN 13437:2008, Ambalaa i reciklaa materijala Kriterijumi za metode reciklae - Opis procesa reciklae i dijagram toka, Beograd 2008. [3] Popovi, P. Maine za obradu deformisanjem I - klasifikacijska, koncepcijska, eksploataciona analiza. Ni, 1991. YU ISBN 86-7181-001-7. [4] Popovi, P., Temeljkovski, D. Maine za obradu deformisanjem II - Nosea struktura. Ni, 1991..

1267

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

METHODS FOR FOOTPRINTS AND PLANTAR ARCH INDEX DETERMINATION

Politehnica University of Timisoara, Timisoara, ROMANIA, 1 e-mail: mirela@cmpicsu.upt.ro 2 e-mail: cosmina@cmpicsu.upt.ro, 3 e-mail: oanapa7@yahoo.com

M. Toth-Tascau1, C. Vigaru2, O. Pasca3

Summary: There are known from literature several methods to measure the footprints and to calculate the plantar arch index, which is an important guide to primarily establish the type of the foot. However there is no clear strategy for selecting the most appropriate measurements to classify the foot type. The paper presents a review of some methods of measuring footprints and calculation of plantar arch index. There are presented three methods to determinate 2D footprints: by static analysis using the Zebris FDM measuring system for force distribution, using a pedobarograph, and using graphite powder. Also, there are presented three methods to calculate the plantar arch index. Keywords: footprint, flat-foot, plantar arch index, plantar pressure.

1. INTRODUCTION
Foot problems are very common, both for adult people and children. About 70% of people suffer foot pain at some time in their lives. In many cases, these symptoms can be alleviated by using some orthotic shoe insoles. Orthotic insoles are designed to control the foot and heel position and movement, and to restore the natural foot function. Also, foot orthotics ensures that the body weight is more evenly distributed over the plantar surface of the foot. The study of plantar pressure measurements, both static and dynamic, has received a considerable attention in the assessment and treatment of various orthopedic disorders [1]. There are many instrumented systems to measure the plantar pressure or to record the footprints. In order to establish the type of the foot and to contribute to the diagnostic, footprints must be measured and plantar arch index must be calculated. There are known several methods to determine and measure the footprints and to calculate the plantar arch index, which is an important guide to primarily establish the type of the foot. There have been published several reports of normative plantar pressure and plantar arch index values or intervals, but there are some differences related to normal pressure position, pattern and value and plantar arch index. Sometimes, these results seem to be contradictory to each other [1]. There are several clinical and radiological methods available to classify foot posture. However there is no clear strategy for selecting the most appropriate measurements. Therefore, the aim of this study was to develop a brief review of footprint determination and calculation of plantar arch index.

2. DETERMINATION OF FOOTPRINTS
There are used several methods to get the footprints of a subject, including: determination of the 2D footprint by static analysis using measuring system for force distribution; determination of the 2D footprint using a pedobarograph; determination of the 2D footprint using graphite powder.

1268

2.1. Determination of the 2D footprint using measuring system for force distribution Recent advances in plantar pressure measurement technology assist orthopedists and other medical professionals in making the best diagnoses for patients having different foot disabilities. When assessing plantar pressure, a matrix of multiple sensors is used to measure the force acting on each sensor while the foot is in contact with the support area of the plantar surface. The magnitude of plantar pressure is determined by dividing the measured force by the known area of each sensor while the foot is in contact with the supporting surface. The developed measuring systems employ user-friendly software and generate statistical information and static/dynamic 2D and 3D profile images of plantar pressure distribution and magnitude. In figure 1 is presented the Zebris FDM measuring system from Motion analysis Laboratory of Politehnica University of Timisoara. The Zebris FDM measuring system functions using high-quality capacitive force sensors that are arranged in matrix form. The measuring plate enables both the static and dynamic plantar force distribution to be measured and analyzed during the patient stance and walking [2]. Due to the very large measuring areas the static/dynamic force and pressure distribution under the feet can be recorded from several contacts with the ground and analyzed.

Figure 1: Zebris FDM measuring system for plantar pressure measurement Static/dynamic footprints can be obtained for a certain investigated subject standing/walking on the measuring platform. Using Zebris FDM measuring system the plantar pressure on the heels and soles of the subject can be measured. The obtained 2D and 3D profile images and magnitude of plantar pressure distribution are presented in figure 2.

a) 2D profile images of plantar b) 3D profile images of plantar c) Magnitude of plantar pressure distribution pressure distribution pressure Figure 2: 2D / 3D profile images and magnitude of plantar pressure distribution 2.2. Determination of the 2D footprint using a pedobarograph The pedobarograph is a diagnostic device used for evaluation of foot pressure abnormalities in a variety of clinical conditions. The pedobarograph is very useful as primary evaluation tool to measure the severity of deformity for patients with foot problems. The severity of the deformity can be recorded with a single

1269

measurement, which has the best correlation with the clinical assessment. The investigation allows a direct evaluation of loaded feet, measurement of foot size, and heel position. Digitized image is computer processed, thus portions having different pressures are shown in different colors. Usually, dedicated software automatically finds specific areas of the foot on the analyzed image. An example of the recorded image is presented in figure 3. It can be observed that the highest values of the plantar pressure are situated on the heel. The intensity patterns of the investigated subject were not uniformly distributed on the plantar surface. The obtained footprint offers only qualitative information about the plantar pressure.

Figure 3: 2D footprint based on pedobarography 2.3. Determination of the 2D footprint using graphite powder In order to obtain the footprint, a graphite powder layer is distributed on a plastic plate and a sheet of paper is placed close to the platform. With the aid of an investigator, the subject places the studied foot on the graphite layer, with contra-lateral foot out of the platform. The investigator controls the foot position on the plate and next on the sheet of paper, in order to prevent foot slip that could invalidate the test. The plantar surface impregnated with graphite powder faces paper's upper surface (figure 4).

Figure 4: 2D footprint using graphite powder

3. CALCULATION OF THE PLANTAR ARCH INDEX

The plantar arch creates a space between the inner side of the foot and the a flat surface. The height of the arch varies between people, and a low arch (or no arch at all) or a hight arch can cause problems. Feet with fallen arches are often called flat-feet, the inner of the foot is flat and the foot may roll over to the inner side, or pronate. Depending on the height of the arch the foot can have neutral pronation, over-pronation or under-pronation (also called supination). Normal feet have a medium arch and leave a complete footprint that shows curvature through the arch area. Flat-feet have a low arch and leave a nearly complete footprint. This usually indicates an overpronated foot that means to roll inward excessively from heel strike to lift off. High-arched feet have high ridged arches and leave two distinct imprints of the heel and the forefoot with a separation between them. Underpronation (supination) is the tendency to roll outward from heel strike to lift off [3].

1270

The pictures presented in figure 6 show three possible types of the foot: low arch (flat-foot) (figure 5.a), normal arch (figure 5.b), and high arch (cavus foot) (figure 5.c) [4].

a) Low arch (flat foot)

b) Normal arch Figure 5: Types of foot

c) High arch (cavus foot)

The evaluation of foot problems can be obtained based on the footprints and the plantar arch index (PI), which establishes the ratio between different regions of the footprint. There are several methods used for classifying foot types [5], including visual examination (non-quantitative inspection), anthropometric values, footprint parameters, and radiographic evaluation [6]. Also, there are many methods proposed in literature to calculate the Plantar Arch Index (PI). Each of these methods has its own helpful drawings and limits to establish the foot type. Different criteria are suggested for the classification of footprints as high, normal, and flat arch. 3.1. Method 1 for calculation of the plantar arch index According to this method the plantar arch index establishes a relationship between central regions of the footprint (figure 6). The foot length is measured from the tip of the second phalanx (B) to the middle of calcaneus (A). The middle point E of this segment is determined. A line () is drawn tangent to the medial forefoot edge (V) and heel region (g). By considering the inner point (k), the segment di is defined by the points k and E. The plantar arch index (PI) is obtained with equation (1):
PI = dE Ei

(1)

The plantar arch index represents the ratio between the two parts of the central region dE and Ei [7]. According to the proposed normative reference values, there are the following cases: 0 PI 1 normal arch (normal foot); 1 PI 2 lower arch (between normal and flat foot); PI 2 low arch (flat foot).

Figure 6: Calculation of plantar arch index. Method 1 3.2. Method 2 for calculation of the plantar arch index. Stahelis plantar arch index According to this method [8], [9] the plantar arch index establishes a relationship between central and posterior regions of the footprint (figure 7). A line () is drawn tangent to the medial forefoot edge (1) and heel region (2). The middle point M of this segment is determined. Two perpendicular lines are drawn: one on point M, crossing the footprint, and the second one on point (B), the heel tangency point. On the resulted picture, there are

1271

measured the mid-arch width of the central region to the foot (A) and the mid-heel width (B) in millimeters. The plantar arch index (PI) is obtained with equation (2):
PI = A B

(2)

Figure 7: Calculation of Stahelis plantar arch index Based on [7], plantar arch indexes above 1.15 should be regarded as indicative of flat-foot. 3.3. Method 3 for calculation of the plantar arch index According to this method the plantar arch index establishes a relationship between three regions of the footprint (figure 8). The foot length (L) is measured from the tip of the second finger (B) to the middle of calcaneus (A). The length of the foot (excluding the toes) is divided into three regions having equal lengths: A forefoot; B mid-foot; and C heel. The plantar arch index (PI) is obtained with equation (3), by dividing the mid-foot region (B) by the entire footprint area [10]:
PI = B A+B+C

(3)

Figure 8: Calculation of plantar arch index. Method 3 According to the proposed normative reference values [10], there are the following cases: PI = 0.24 0.04 normal arch (normal foot); PI 0.30 0.07 low arch (flat foot).

4. CONCLUSION
The paper presents a review of some methods of measuring footprints and calculation of plantar arch index. There are presented three methods to determinate 2D footprints: by static/dynamic analysis using the Zebris FDM measuring system for force distribution, using a pedobarograph, and using graphite powder. Also, there are presented three methods to calculate the plantar arch index. In addition to the other two methods, the footprint obtained with Zebris FDM measuring system or other similar system allows to know the plantar pressure values

1272

in different sites of the plantar surface. In order to use the footprint to get information for plantar supports, the footprint image must be digitized. Further studies will determinate the plantar arch index based on several methods from literature. All the presented methods will be used to calculate the plantar arch index for a subject having a flat-foot.

REFERENCES
[1] Rai, D.V.; Aggarwal, L.M.; Bahadur, R.: Plantar pressure changes in normal and pathological foot during bipedal standing, Indian J Orthop 2006; 40:119-22. [2] Zebris FDM Measuring System for determining Ground Reaction Forces. Product information, Available on Web site: http://www.zebris.de/english/medizin/medizin-kraftverteilungsmessungfdm.php?navanchor=1010042, Accessed: 26.07.2010. [3] Tortoise and Hare Running and Fitness Center, Available on Web site: www.tortoiseandhare.com/products/feat.htm, Accesed: 26.07.2010. [4] DiyInjuryRehab.com, Available on Web site: http://www.diyinjuryrehab.com/2010/05/12/flat-feet-do-i-needan-arch-support/, Accessed: 26.07.2010. [5] Cavanagh, P.R.; Rodgers, M.M.: The arch index: a useful measure from footprints. J Biomech 1987, 20:547551. [6] Janchai, S.; Chaiwanichsiri, D.; Silpipat, N.; Tiamprasitt, J.: Ageing feet and plantar arch characteristics of the Thai elderly, Asian Biomedicine Vol. 2 No. 4 August 2008; pp. 297-303. [7] Zavalisca, A.: Recuperarea platipodiei la elevii ciclului gimnazial n procesul educaiei fizice, Teza doctorat, Chisinau, 2009, Available on Web site: http://www.cnaa.md/files/theses/2009/14179/aurica_zavalisca_abstract.pdf, Accessed: 26.07.2010. [8] Hernandez, A.J.; Kimura, L.K.; Ferreira Laraya, M.H.; Fvaro, E.: Calculation of Stahelis plantar arch index and prevalence of flat feet: a study with 100 children aged 5-9 years, Acta Ortopdica Brasileira, vol.15, no.2, So Paulo 2007. [9] Staheli, L.T.; Chew, D.E.; Corbett, M.: The longitudinal arch. J Bone Joint Surg Am.1987. 69:426-8. [10] Murley, G.S.; Menz, H.B.; Landorf, K.B.:A protocol for classifying normal- and flat-arched foot posture for research studies using clinical and radiographic measurements, Journal of Foot and Ankle Research 2009, 2:22, Available on Web site: http://www.jfootankleres.com/content/2/1/22, Accessed: 26.07.2010.

1273

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry

RaDMI 2010
16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

PUTTING INTO OPERATION AND TESTING OF THE 800W MAGNETRON

1

Mircea-Petru Ursu1, Traian Buido2

University of Oradea, Managerial and Technological Engineering Faculty, Oradea, ROMANIA, e-mail: mpursu1965@yahoo.com 2 University of Oradea, Managerial and Technological Engineering Faculty, Oradea, ROMANIA, e-mail: tbuidos@yahoo.com
Summary: this paper presents the operations that were made in order to put into operation the 800W magnetron designed and built at the University of Oradea, and to test it; also, here are shown some applications of the microwave technique, that the authors have used in their research activity concerning nonconventional technologies. Keywords: magnetron, microwave, anode, cathode, test bench

1. INTRODUCTION
The magnetron is a device that converts the energy of industrial frequency current into high-frequency electromagnetic energy, named microwaves. This is a very complex and delicate device, designed and built according to well-established and critical conditions, using components made of special and expensive materials. The Microwave Collective from the University of Oradea, of which the authors are members, has managed to design and build a set of functional magnetrons, and this special research activity has yielded to interesting results concerning the use of microwaves in nonconventional applications.

2. TEST BENCH FOR THE MAGNETRON

In order to put into operation and test the finished 800W magnetron, the Microwave Collective built a test bench that ensures precise conditions for power supply, loading and cooling, and conditions for determination of the electrical quantities at low/high frequencies, with special measures for personnel protection against the microwave leakage irradiation. This test bench provides: o filament heating voltage Uf = 6.3 V5%; o acceleration anode voltage Ua = 3.4 kV; o magnetic induction in the interaction zone B = 0.14 T; o cooling of the anodic body, so that its temperature should not exceed 80C; o artificial load which should dissipate the microwave power emitted by the magnetron; o observation of the magnetron oscillating state and measurement of the microwave leakage; o measurement of electrical and non-electrical quantities in order to establish the parameters of the normal operating conditions. Fig.1 shows the electrical circuitry of the test bench for the 800W magnetron, which contains: adjustable autotransformer m1 type ATR-18, wattmeter W1 type PsLL Metra-Blansko, step-up transformer m2 (220 V /3 kV /4 kVA), rectifier bridge made of silicon diodes D1-D40, ammeter A2 and shunt Rs which feed the anode circuit, and the start/stop is achieved by means of b1; adjustable autotransformer m3 type ATR-8, transformer m4 (220 / 12 V / 630 VA), voltmeter V1, current transformer m5 (50 / 5 A) type SM 5VA Metra-Blansko, ammeter A1, which feed the filament circuit;

1274

two stabilized power supplies ST1-ST2 0-6 V/10 A type ICCE connected in series, ammeter A3 and electromagnet EM (self-made), in order to provide the magnetic induction of 0.14 T; oscilloscope O type E-0103A IAEMI; when the switch K is set to position I, the oscilloscope visualizes thre shape of the anode voltage, and position II provides the dynamic characteristic of the magnetron, because the signal for Y amplifier is fed from the resistive voltage divider R2/R1+R2, and the signal for X amplifier is fed from the shunt Rs, which is proportional to the instantaneous value of the anodic current; a cylindrical metal shield, connected to the ground, enclosing the magnetron M800 together with the two inductive chokes Lf1-Lf2 in series with the filament, in order to prevent the leakage of the microwave energy through the heating circuit; an antenna which radiates the emitted microwaves into a closed metallic enclosure, mounted on the electromagnet EM, where it is absorbed by a known water quantity in a glass recipient; the electromagnet EM, shown in fig.2.

Figure 1: Electrical circuitry of the test bench for the 800W magnetron. The electromagnet is symmetrical, and the magnet circuit is ensured by yoke 1, lateral column 2, central column 6 and pole piece 9; these parts are made of OL-30 and each of them is doubled, with identical dimensions.

1 - yoke; 2 lateral column; 3 coil support; 4 excitation coil; 5 fixing nut; 6 central column; 7 adjusting handle; 8 - foot; 9 pole piece; 10 connecting terminals.

Figure 2: The electromagnet of the 800W magnetron test bench The central columns 6 can be adjusted by means of handles 7, so that the magnetron to be tested is tightened between the pole pieces 9. The excitation coils 4 have 610 turns of 2 CuEm, are wound on hard plastic, and are sustained by non-magnetic stainless steel supports 3, tightened by means of fixing hard plastic nuts 5. The winding ends are accessible by means of connections terminals 10 which allow the series or parallel connection, according to the characteristics of the power supply. Later, in order to use this device to test several different magnetron types, it was fitted with an accessories set.

1275

In order to test the 800W magnetron, this electromagnet was modified, as shown in fig.3. The superior column and the adjacent pole piece 9 were replaced by column 6' with larger interior bore 50, which can house the glass bell and the connection terminals of the magnetron. Only one column 6' is used this time, placed on the lower yoke, and the magnetron is fastened between supplemental pole pieces 18-19, so that the cathode connectors are placed inside the bore of column 6'. The two excitation coils are now mounted on a longer coil support, fixed on the lower yoke.

Figure 3: The modified electromagnet configuration, in order to test the 800W magnetron. The 800W magnetron is mounted on this electromagnet and fixed between 18-19, with the lower glass bell housed into the bore of the column 6', and the edge of the kowar bushing adjacent to the upper bell is at the upper level of the upper yoke. The coppered support metal ring 20 is fastened on the coppered plate 14, in order to fasten the perforated copper cylindrical enclosure 21 as tight as possible to plate 14. The component 21 is fitted with a cone-shaped cap, and it plays the role of the working enclosure, and the microwave energy is fed into it by means of an antenna which protrudes on a /4 length.

Figure 4: Approximation of the space for the 0.14 T magnetic induction. Taking into account the diameter of the 800W magnetron closing caps (D = 58 mm) and assessing them as being plane at the distance l = 30 mm (fig.4), the magnetic reluctance R0 of the cylindrical space between the caps is calculated, as a vacuumed space ( = 0 = 410-7 H/m). The area of the transversal section passed by the magnetic flux is: D2 (1) S= = 2.642 10- 3 m2 4 so the magnetic reluctance of the considered space is: l (2) = 9.04 106 H 1 R0 = 0 s Considering the value B = 0.14 T for the magnetic induction, the corresponding magnetic flux is: (3) F = B S = 14 . 101 T 2.642 103 m2 = 3.7 104 Wb The solenation for this flux is then calculated: (4) = ( R0 + R F ) where RF is the reluctance of the iron magnetic circuit. Because R0>>RF, the latter is neglected, so: (5) = R0 = 3.7 104 Wb 9.04 106 H 1 = 3.349 103 A sp Thus, in order to obtain the 0.14 T magnetic induction in the considered space, 3349 ampers-turns are necessary. If the excitation coils are connected in parallel, with N = 610 turns each, the excitation current value results from relation NIe = : 3349 (6) = A = 5.49 A Ie = N 610

1276

In case of series connection, the excitation current is halved. The dependence of the magnetic induction in the interaction space upon the excitation current is shown in tab.1. Table 1: The dependence of the magnetic induction in the interaction space upon the excitation current. Ie Bcalc Bms Bcalc Bms Ie [A] [T] [T] [A] [T] [T] [Asp] [Asp] 0.4 244 0.010 0.008 9 3.6 2196 0.092 0.090 0.8 488 0.020 0.017 10 4.0 2440 0.102 0.100 1.2 732 0.030 0.026 11 4.4 2684 0.112 0.110 1.6 976 0.040 0.036 12 4.8 2928 0.122 0.121 2.0 1220 0.051 0.047 13 5.2 3172 0.132 0.130 2.4 1464 0.061 0.057 14 5.6 3416 0.143 0.141 2.8 1708 0.071 0.066 15 6.0 3660 0.153 0.151 3.2 1952 0.082 0.077 16 6.4 3904 0.163 0.161

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

The following notations were used: Ie = intensity of the excitation current (coils in parallel); = solenation; Bcalc = calculated value of magnetic induction; Bms = measured value of magnetic induction. It results that the dependence is linear, so 5.6A current is necessary to obtain the 0.14 T magnetic induction, greater by 2% than the calculated value.

3. PLOTTING OF THE DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTIC

At the first testing of an experimental microwave installation fitted with magnetron, especially in the case of a magnetron prototype, it is highly recommended that the magnetron dynamic characteristic is plotted, because the adjustments and the setting of the matching conditions require complex operations that cannot be completed in proper time. The mismatch of the magnetron with the load or the inobservance of the supply parameters may lead to moding (mode changes) and the exceeding of limited parameters (Smax, Ia max), with negative and even fatal consequences for the magnetron. The mode changes, usually to mode N 2 1 , are shown by the doubling of the representative line of the dynamic characteristic or/and the instability of its inclination. By plotting the dynamic characteristic, these phenomena are easy to observe long before any destructive effects are produced upon the magnetron, and the causes can be eliminated by careful examination. The dynamic characteristic can be plotted point by point, using classical electrical instruments and filtered anodic voltage that is raised slowly, determining pairs of values (Ua, Ia). This method is uncomfortable and can be dangerous for the magnetron, so is not used in practice. The plotting of the dynamic characteristic by means of oscilloscope was achieved during normal operation, with the anode being fed by pulsating voltage. The signal of the anodic voltage, divided by R2/(R1+R2) = 200 was applied to the Y input, and the signal proportional to the instantaneous value of the anodic current, at the connections of the shunt Rs = 10 , is applied to the X input. Using the oscilloscope with sensibilities Sx = Sy = 2 V/div, the representation scales are Y = 400 V/div for Ua and X = 0.2 A/div for Ia. Taking into account that the anode of the magnetron and the ground of the oscilloscope are both connected to the ground of the test bench, the voltage of the cathode versus anode is represented, so the spot deviates from upper-right to lower-left (fig.5) The solid curve 1 represents the dynamic characteristic of the 800W magnetron in normal operating conditions, emitting microwaves to a water load of m = 0.1 kg in a 3 liters closed metallic enclosure mounted on the electromagnet shown in fig.3. Full-wave rectified voltage was used in the anode circuit, as shown in fig.1. For voltages under 2800V, the anodic current is null, and it raises to 1A when the anode voltage reaches 3400V, so the dynamic resistance is: U a 600 V (7) 600 Rd = Ia 1A The approximation results from the reading of the oscillogram, which is affected by slight errors

1277

Figure 5: The dynamic characteristic of the 800 W magnetron.

If the normal operating conditions are not ensured because of insufficient matching or if the magnetic induction is not sufficient, then the moding occurs, which is represented by the appearance of doubled traces, marked with dotted line 2 on fig.5. If the filament caps start also to emit, because of overheating or wrong shapes, the characteristic is also altered, its horizontal segment being replaced by an tilted one, with an inclination that increases with the anodic voltage, and the sharp shoulder of the characteristic is replaced by a curvature, as shown by dotted line 3.

4. DETERMINATION OF THE CATHODE THERMAL CONDITION

At the first runs of the experimental models of the 800W magnetron, a special attention was taken for the determination of the filament thermal condition, in order to ensure the 1900-2000 K temperature range, recommended for carburized thorium wolfram. If the filament temperature exceeds the superior limit, the thorium evaporates more intensely, but the insufficient heating is also harmful because the middle zone of the cathode wears out prematurely.

Figure 6: Radiation pyrometer PYROTYPO (Hartmann & Braun).

In order to directly measure the cathode temperature by means of a Pyrotypo radiation pyrometer (fig.6), one 800W magnetron model was fitted with a lateral observation window, but this solution proved to be very difficult and it was not used on other specimens. We concluded that the graph Rc = f(Tc) can be accurately drawn by measuring the dependence of the cathode temperature upon the filament voltage and current Uf and respectively If with no anodic current (Ia = 0). Once this function known, it allows the determination of the cathode temperature in real situations, in the presence of anodic current, when the retro-bombardment is added to the Joule-Lenz heating. This extra heat raises the temperature and the electrical resistance, causing the lowering of the filament current and decreasing of the power absorbed from the heating power supply. Fig.7 shows If = f(Uf), Pf = f(Tc) and Rc = f(Tc). On these diagrams, the range of interest is divided into six intervals of 35K each, and the filament resistance varies with temperature in a linear manner. These diagrams allow the determination of the filament temperature in various operation conditions of magnetron power supply / loading, as the amount of retro-bombardment depends upon these factors and the medium value of the anodic current. In the absence of the anodic current, at nominal filament voltage Uf1 = 6 V, the heating current is If1 = 28.1 A, and these values determine the heating power Pf1 = 168.24 W, the electrical resistance Rc1 = 0.213 W and cathode temperature Tc1 = 1850K.

1278

Figure 7: Diagrams If = f(Uf), Pf = f(Tc) and Rc = f(Tc).

After the anodic voltage is enables and the oscillations started, at normal operation of the 800W magnetron, the parameters of the filament change due to retro-bombardment. At the same filament voltage, the filament current decreases to If2 = 25.83 A due to the increase of its resistance at Rc2 = Uf1/If2 = 0.232 , so the power absorbed from the heating supply decreases to Pf2 = Uf1If2 = 154.72 W. But according to the diagram, to the resistance Rf2 = 0.232 corresponds the total heating power Pftot = 230.9 W and temperature 1955K. Thus, the heating power produced by retro-bombardment is Pb = Pftot - Pf2 = 230.9 W-154.72 W = 76.18 W. In conclusion, when the magnetron is started and the anodic current starts flowing, the filament temperature increases with about 105K, so the initial temperature 1850K is sufficient to safe oscillation initiation and the parameters stabilization in about 2 seconds. According to the endurance tests, we observed that the 1955K temperature is optimal for a log lifetime of the cathode. The setting of the initial heating parameters to values Uf1 = 6 V i If1 = 28.1 A allows the simple and fast start of the magnetron until 800W effective microwave power, without the necessity to decrease the heating power after start, so simple solutions can be applied for the cathode power supply.

5. NONCONVENTIONAL APPLICATIONS OF MICROWAVES

Nowadays microwaves are used for industrial applications, with great success and efficiency. Several applications have been studied and developed by the members of the Microwave Collective from the University of Oradea, such as pre-polymerization of bakelite powder, drying of hemp flakes, medical diathermy etc. Other nonconventional application consist of food processing, oils and essences extraction from plant preparations, measurement of several parameters of substances (granulation, humidity, concentration etc), long-distance data transmission, rubber vulcanization, wood drying, RADAR etc. Two very interesting nonconventional applications of microwaves are the treatment of seeds (pest elimination and/or seed sterilization), and the treatment of old patrimony objects, such as books, in order to re-balance their pH, eliminate pests, paper reconditioning etc. These applications are now studied in research contracts and in the PhD theses of the Microwave Collective members, and they both require very accurate times and levels of exposure, perfect matching, special protection measures etc.

6. CONCLUSION
More and more industrial applications use microwaves, so the development of the microwave technique is a must nowadays, due to its high efficiency, fast response, hygienic conditions, uniform volume heating and other advantages. However, magnetrons are difficult to design, build, test and use, because of their special requirements and particular operating conditions, and special precautions must be taken in order to ensure stable, reproducible and safe operation. Before putting into operation, the magnetrons must be thoroughly checked for vacuum tightness, material and assembling flaws, isolation problems etc, and their electrical parameters must be determined and verified, so that they should comply with certain specifications according to the operation to be made. Therefore, all tests must be carried out with utmost care, in order to ensure absolute safety and stable operation.

1279

REFERENCES
[1] Collins B.G., Microwave Magnetrons, McGraw Hill Book Company Inc., London 1948. [2] Maghiar T., Ungur P., Voicu N., Moga I., Buido T., Magnetronul; elemente de teorie, constructive, tehnologie, Editura Universitii din Oradea, 2000. [3] Nicolau E., Manualul inginerului electronist. Msurri electronice, Ed.Tehnic Bucureti, 1979 [4] Pschner H., Wrme durch Mikrowellen, Philips Technische Bibliothek Eindhoven, 1964. [5] Roman t., Cercetri i contribuii proprii la realizarea generatoarelor de microunde tip magnetron, tez de doctorat, Universitatea din Oradea, 1997. [6] Rulea G., Tehnica microundelor, Editura Didactic i Pedagogic Bucureti 1981. [7] Sandu S.D., Dispozitive electronice de microunde, Editura tiinific i Enciclopedic, Bucureti 1983. [8] Ursu M.P., Cercetri privind creterea randamentului energetic n cuptoarele cu microunde cu puteri variind ntre 100 1000W; contribuii personale la realizarea instalaiei-pilot, tez de doctorat, Universitatea din Oradea, 2009. [9] Ursu M.P., Buido T., Maghiar T., Microwave Power And Leakage Measurement, Sesiunea anual de comunicri IMT2007, Oradea, 2007. [10] Ursu M.P., Buido T., Maghiar T., Research Concerning Non-Conventional Applications Of Microwave Technique, Revista de Tehnologii Neconvenionale nr.2/2007, pp.127132, pg.6, ISSN-1454-3087, 2007.

1280

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry RaDMI 2010 16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

SEQUENTIAL ALGORITHM AND FUZZY LOGIC TO OPTIMUM CONTROL THE ORE GRIDDING AGGREGATES
University of Petrosani, Electrical Department, Petrosani, ROMANIA, e-mail: zoller_carol@yahoo.com, dobra@upet.ro 2 SaTCIP ltd., 36610 Vrnjaka Banja, SERBIA, e-mail: dasicp@yahoo.com
1

Carol Zoller1, Predrag Dai2, Remus Dobra1

Summary: Between the absorbed power and the ore fill of the gridding aggregates there is an extremal connection. Using just some information as absorbed active power, filling degree and recycled flow, can control by discrete steps the feed flow rate in order to obtain maximum processing capacity. In consequence, a sequential algorithm for processing information was developed for gridding aggregates. That was modeled on PC by using graphical software from HP-VEE for simulation the optimum command of the ore gridding aggregates. A fuzzy control was analyzed and proposed also in the paper also. Key words: gridding aggregates, productivity, VEE Pro 6 software, fuzzy control.

1. INTRODUCTION
The Classical engineering approach to drive some process is essentially a qualitative and quantitative one, based on more or less accurate mathematical modeling. In such an approach wordings as medium temperature, low pressure, very big speed and so, related to the characteristic variables of a controlled process (CP), are hard to interpret from a quantitative point of view. This aspect is due to the fact that the classical automation handles with variables/information which is processed with well specified values. In this context the elaboration of the control strategy and of the control equipment requires an as accurate as possible quantitative modeling of the CP. The process control based on fuzzy set theory, often called only fuzzy logic, or the fuzzy logic control is more pragmatically from this point of view by the capability to take over and to use a linguistic characterization of the quality of the controlled process and to adapt this characterization as function of the concrete conditions of the process operation, [1]. The fuzzy set theory found numerous and diverse application domains, but in this presentation we are developing one example of how this theory can be applied for optimum drive for copper ore grinding and separation process, using high capacity autogenously aggregates, in primary phase and ball mills in the second stage. The specific consumption of energy of such equipment is about 35kWh/t, but that can be decreased with 5% to 10% by introducing a control system. As the aggregates drive is accomplished with 4 MW synchronous motors, to decrease the specific consumption is a desideratum of high actuality. Its impossible to decrease the consumption maintaining constant ore feed flow rate and water-ore ratio, because of the continuous variation of the physical and mechanical properties (which can be expressed by grinding ability). It is usual to command the feed flow rate depending on the absorbed power together with electrical energy measured, but aggregates can be overloaded or under loaded because of the non-linear dependences between power and filling, [2].

2. MODELLING THE ALGORITHM

Knowing that this dependence has an extremal characteristic, a feed flow rate control system that uses information concerning the electric power absorbed by the driving motor together with information about the load (filling) with ore, obtained from the oil pressure transducer in the bearings or from an weight transducer [3].

1281

This solution is based on the following considerations: 1. The grinding aggregates productivity is mainly determined by the quantity of material in the aggregate (by its filling degree). Between the productivity (y) and the material reserve (filling degree x) there is an extremal dependence (figure 1), which is expressed by: 2. y = y max k(x x*)2 (1) where: ymax maximum productivity; x* ore reserve for which the productivity is maximum; k constant, aggregate characteristic. 9 It is unanimously recognized that, between the driving power and the productivity, there is the following dependence: the maximum productivity is obtained at the maximum consumed power. 9 It is justified to use process control methods based on power control as long as it is difficult to appreciate the grinding capacity and power information is more accessible. If y1 is the driving power and m the grinding ability (a high m meaning easy grinding), we assume that: 3. y1 increases monotonously with y2 and m (figure 3.a); 4. y1 decreases monotonously with the increment of the ore density ; 5. y2 (the pressure in the bearing) is linearly dependent on the reserve (x) and density () (figure 3.b). The target control system to be solved is to maintain the aggregate load at the value x*, corresponding to the nominal power. As practically x* is not known because of the stochastic variation of the ore characteristics, in order to determine x* (for which dy1/dx=0), figure 1b, the procedure follows gradual sequences as: 6. for a certain time moment t1, when x(t1) = x1 (immeasurable), the parameter y1(x1) is measured and stored in a memory location, M1; 7. a positive x step for feed rate x is added and commanded; 8. after a specific t time, at the time moment t2, the parameter y1 ( x1 + x ) is measured and stored also in a memory location M2 : 9. if y1 ( x1 + x ) > y1 ( x1 ) , than x1+2x is commanded, because M1 and M2 are identified on the M1 and M2 are identified on the descendant area of productivity graphic; y1 ( x1 x ) is read and memorized, and so on. 10. The command of the input feeding will continue with a positive increment step of the feeding flow every time when y1 (t i ) > y1 (t i 1 ) and with a negative increment step when y1 (t i ) < y1 (t i 1 ) ; following this in few steps the process will reach the maximum amplitude of productivity which corresponded to x*. 11. When y1 (ti ) = y1 (t i 1 ) = y1 (t i +1 ) no corrections are necessary on the process feeding flow. ascendant area of productivity graphic; if y1 ( x1 + x ) < y1 ( x1 ) ), x1-x is commanded because

a) b) Figure 1: Extremal dependence between the productivity and the filling degree

1282

So, as long as x belongs to the domain for which y1< y1max, must command the increment of the load x by increasing the feed rate x with x step. As the point y1max moves continuously, it is necessary that the system follows permanently the above sequences. In order to be sure that the variation of the power (y1) is caused by the load (x), the system needs to use another information (y2), which is the pressure in the bearing, depending linearly on x (figure 3.b). It is necessary to use two transducers: first for active power and a second one for weight on the bearing, in order to provide information from the technological process.

Figure 2: Optimum control flowchart of the ore gridding aggregates. Using just some information (absorbed active power, filling degree and re-circuited flow, (y3), we achieved the control by discrete steps of the feed flow rate in a view to obtain maximum processing capacity. Control and command algorithm is detailed described in [3] and [4]. The figure 2 algorithm was developed initially for a microsistem with the Motorola 4500 microprocessor and was laboratory experimented.

Figure 3: y1, y2 dependence on ore density

1283

3. HP-VEE PROCESS SIMULATION

The above algorithm was developed also using a the graphical programming software, HP VEE Pro6, for simulation, in the first stage, (figure 4) and for optimum control of the ore gridding aggregates, using a PC and data acquisition interfaces, in the second stage.

Figure 4: Graphical program for optimum control of the ore gridding aggregates. In figure 5 is presented the panel interface of the simulator, that presenting the graphical instruments to be set up by operator as: measured parameters (pressure, absorbed active power, etc.), prescriptions for limiting parameters evolutions, between minimum and maximum; delay between data acquisitions times, etc. Time evolution of the controlled parameters and regulated parameters are presented also in to graphical panel as data recorder charts and bargraphs.

Figure 5: Panel interface of the simulator.

1284

4. FUZZY PROCESS CONTROL

4.1. Block diagram of principle of Fuzzy Control System, FCS and the block diagram of principle of Fuzzy Controllers, FC Figure 6a presents the block diagram of an automatic control system based on fuzzy control system, FCS, considered as single input with the reference input (w) and a single output with respect to the assessment output (y). The essential particular feature is that of multiple interactions from the process to the controller by auxiliary ' variables, gathered in the vector e1 = y that are direct or indirect inputs of the fuzzy controller. No matter the a number of inputs of the FC, this one must have at least one input, denoted by e1, corresponding to the control error e = w y .

a)

b) Figure 6: Block diagram of FCS and FC

As a matter of principle, the operation of the FC takes place in terms of the block diagram from figure 6b and involves the following sequence of operations to be proceeded: 1. The crisp input information (the measured variables, the reference input, the control error) is converted into a crisp fuzzy representation, this operation is called the fuzzification of the crisp information; 2. The fuzzified information is processed on the basis of a set of rules that have to be well stated for controlling the process. The principles (rules) for evaluation of this set of rules are called inference engine and the result is the fuzzy form of the control signal u (the fuzzy control signal); 3. The fuzzy control signal must be converted in to a crisp wording, with well specified physical nature, directly usable at the actuator level; this operation is called defuzzification. 4.2. Treatment of fuzzy information In the case of automatic control the primary information concerning the process is available under the form of some crisp values of measured variables. In case of fuzzy control these crisp values are going to have attached a fuzzy characterization reflected in an adequate linguistic wording and in mathematical characterization of the linguistic wording under the form of membership function(s) (MF or MFS) corresponding to some linguistic variables. The linguistic wording further permits the clear engineering definition of the rules that make up the base of fuzzy inference. The terminology of linguistic variables (LVs) and linguistic terms (LTs) corresponding to fuzzy sets is used in the linguistic characterization of the fuzzy sets (FSs). So, resuming our example to the gridding aggregate, the linguistic variables (LV) introduced are: Pa-active power, Pr-bearings pressure and F- recycled flow, as physical variables. The corresponding linguistic terms (LTs) for active power are: very low power-VLPa, low power- LPa, moderate power- MPa, high power- HPa, very high power- VHPa; The corresponding linguistic terms (LTs) for pressure are: low pressure- LPr, moderate pressure- MPr, high pressure- HPr; The corresponding linguistic terms (LTs) for flow are: low flow LF, moderate flow -MF, high flow HF. Definitely speaking, the following correspondences appear in the process of fuzzification of crisp information as part of automatic process control: linguistic variables (LV)-as physical variables and linguistic terms (LTs)-as fuzzy descriptors corresponding to some sub-domains of values of the physical variables. The essence of the fuzzy representation is based on the introduction of a measure for the membership of a physical element to a set. The membership function (MF) is used for this purpose. Different ways are used for representing membership functions, (parametric representations under the form of analytical functions, direct graphical representations by means of graphics, discrete representations by singletons, in case of fuzzy systems

1285

with finite number of discrete elements). For exemplifying the concept of fuzzy set, FS, as graphics: figure 7a shoes the membership function of gridding absorbed active power, Pa; figure 7b shoes the membership function of the bearings pressure, Pr; figure 7c shoes the membership function transition of the gridding recycled flow, F. The examples shown in figure 7 a,b,c, points out the way of triangular shape graphical defining the membership function MF, with the continuous basic set voltages [V] obtained from active power -Pa transducer, bearings pressure -Pr transducer and recycled flow -F transducer, respectively. As example, it has to be outlined that the voltage of 3.5V, on active power-Pa, transducer, gives from MF of Pa, figure 7a, the following sensation which is read from the graphics: 1. 25% -Very Low Power, VLPa; 2. 75%-Low Power, LPa; 3. 0%-Medium Power, MPa; 4. 0%-High Power, HPa; 5. 0%-Very High Power, VHPa. So, by accepting in the fuzzy description of the gridding process the following 5 linguistic terms (LTs) for active power are: very low power-VLPa, low power- LPa, moderate power- MPa, high power- HPa, and very high power- VHPa, defined by the membership functions MF(S), having the graphical form depicted in figure 7a, it can be observed that the crisp value y1=3.5V is characterized by the 5-uple: y1*={0.25, 0.75, 0, 0, 0}. The above presented 5-uple contains the values of the membership degrees of the measured crisp value to the defined LTs in order VLPa, LPa, MPa, HPa, VHPa. In the same way can obtain y2* and y3* belonging to y2, respectively to y3 for a specific input crisp value.

MF
Degree of Membership

VLPa LPaMPa HPa VHPa

1
0.75

0.5
0.25

0 0 MF
3.5

Engineering units

10

Pa[kW] [V]

Degree of Membership

1 0.5 0 0 MF

LPr

MPr HPr

Engineering units

Pr[kg/cm2]

10

[V]

Degree of Membership

1 0.5 0 0

LF MF HF

Engineering units

F[t/h]

10

[V]

Figure 7 a,b,c: Fuzzification of the gridding informations as membership functions MF(S)

1286

The considered example allows concluding that in fuzzification process applied to crisp information playing the role of input variable of a fuzzy controller the following steps have to be proceeded: 1. the definition of the basic set X which characterizes the linguistic variables, LV, corresponding to the primary information; 2. the definition of the linguistic terms, LTs by which the crisp information is intended to be characterized; 3. the determination of the membership degrees of the crisp value to the defined LTs and the construction of the resulted n-uple. 4.3. Fuzzy inferences of the gridding aggregate. The fuzzy inference represents the base of processing of the fuzzy information. As a matter of principle, a fuzzy inference consists in evaluation of a rule or of a rule set having the form: IF (antecedent), THEN (consequent) where the antecedent (premise) represents the observed feature(s) and the consequent (conclusion) represents the asserted feature. Both the observed feature and the asserted one can be expressed by descriptors concerning classical sets, or /and fuzzy sets.
HPr Deg r e e of Memb e r shi p MPr
MF

Pr[kg/cm2]

[V]

LPr

10V VLPa LPa MPa HPa VHPa

1
0.75

0.5
0.25

Engineering units

3.5 5 0 10 Figure 8: The optimum aggregations (connections) between fuzzy sets MF(Pr) and MF(Pa)

Pa[kW] [V]

The aggregations (connections), figure 8,9, between fuzzy sets can be characterized by means of fuzzy relations, FR, in analytical forms or graphics, figure 9, in the case of compact sets and by matrix, in the case of discreet value sets. Optimum process control practically was observed at the intersection between VHPa &HPr &MF membership functions.
HF MF Degree of Member shi p

MF
LF

F[t/h] [V] LPa MPa HPa VHPa

1
0.75

VLPa

0.5
0.25 Engineering unit

0
0
3.5

10

Pa[kW] [V]

Figure 9: The optimum aggregations (connections) between fuzzy sets MF(F)and MF(Pa)

1287

The characterization of the relation between active power Pa, (y1), and pressure Pr,(y2), can be seen in table 1. (0- means no correction necessary in to the gridding feeding input, x and 1-means corrections are imposed in to x feeding value). Due to its contents (only crisp values of 0 and 1 appear, practically non usable), the relation seems to be more crisp than fuzzy, also fuzzy descriptors were used. On the basis of such reasoning, the initial table and matrix can be extended with new elements, which make less crisp the relation Pa-Pr, e.g. this is the way to construct the information in table or matrix, table 2. Table 1: Decision table of relation between active power and bearings pressure Pa VLPa LPa MPa HPa VHPa Pr LPr 1 1 1 1 1 MPr 1 1 1 1 1 HPr 1 1 1 1 0 The linguistic connectors AND were used for establishing the fuzzy relations characterizing the process variables. The AND connection of two fuzzy system sets, FSs, is extremely useful in fuzzy control and is named as Cartesian product of the two fuzzy sets. Table 2: Modified decision table of relation between active power, bearings pressure and recycled flow

4.4. Defuzzification of Fuzzy information of the gridding aggregate. The defuzzification is defined as an operation for obtaining a crisp value of output decision on the basis of the result of fuzzy inference. A lot of defuzzification methods are known and accepted. More frequently used in the field of automatic control are based on maximum sample or value method, the mean method, the incremental method, the centre of gravity method, etc. The use of one certain method depends on several factors as speed information processing, the method of information processing and of course by construction and operation of the used actuators. The incremental method was chosen for fuzzy driving the gridding aggregate, because always for a given crisp value (set of crisp values) of the input, one rule is fired; the linguistic terms corresponding to the output linguistic variables are of singleton type and each LT has associated an increment of the last crisp value of the control signal, that depending on the previous history, is added or subtracted from the previous (the last) crisp value of the control signal. So, the driving rule base of the gridding aggregate is synthesized by the inference table presented in table 2; the contents of the table can be accordingly modified / adapted depending on the previous experience.

5. CONCLUSIONS
For huge gridding aggregates the working regime at nominal power and maximum grinding capacity means, energetically speaking, to reduce the specific electric energy consumption. Between the absorbed active power and the ore fill of the aggregate there is an extremal connection; we use this information to command the input flow. For optimum drive of the ore gridding aggregates information aggregates information from bearings pressure and recycled flow is considered also. A specific program for simulation of the optimum command of the ore gridding aggregates, using HP VEE Pro 6 software and a fuzzy concept was developed in the paper, also.

1288

REFERENCES
[1] Mukaidono, Masao: "Fuzzy Logic for Beginners". Singapore: World Scientific, 2001. [2] A. J. Lynch, Mineral Crushing and Gridding Circuits, Oxford, Elsevier Scientific Publishing Co, 177. [3] Dan Visalon, Carol Zoller - Metod pentru reglarea automat optimal a puterii agregatelor de mcinare autogen a minereurilor complexe. Brevet de invenie nr. RO 121061, 2006, OSIM Bucureti ; [4] C. Zoller, T. Niculescu, System command for feeding rate depending on the absorbed power and on the load with raw material of gridding aggregate. Annals of the University of Petroani, Electrical Engineering, Vol. 6,(XXXIII), Universitas Publishing House, Petroani, 2004. ISSN 1454-8518 Pg. 117122; [5] V. Dan, C. Zoller, Annals of the University of Petroani, Electrical Engineering, Vol. 9,(XXXVI), Universitas Publishing House, Petroani, 2007. ISSN 1454-8518 Pg. 226231;

1289

10th International Conference Research and Development in Mechanical Industry RaDMI 2010 16 - 19. September 2010, Donji Milanovac, Serbia

APPLYING MULTIDIMENSIONAL SPACE DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY METHODS IN THE GRAPHICAL EXPRESSION OF THE TRIPLE INTEGRAL
1

Iosif Zoller1, Adrian Stark2

University of Petrosani, Mining Topography Department, Petrosani, ROMANIA, e-mail: zoller_iosif@yahoo.com, 2 University of Petrosani, Mining Topography Department, Petrosani, ROMANIA, e-mail: adrianstark13@yahoo.com

Summary: Generally, the shapes of surfaces can be defined by equations in an analytical way (cylinders, spheres, hyperboloids, etc.). In most cases, such an analytical approach can not be taken and the designer must create surfaces form simple elements, such as curves or points. The problem we approach comes from the needs of the industry (automotive, aeronautics, naval, etc.). When a prototype is conceived, a scale model needs to be fabricated in order to verify if the stylists designs can be realized. This shows a need to have the equations of different surfaces that define the object or, more accurately a good approximation of these surfaces. Keywords: descriptive geometry, triple integral, axonometric drawing.

1. INTRODUCTION
The qualities expected form different mathematical models are: supporting (insuring) good physical elements through a good behavior of primary derivates (adjustment points for the checkered surface) and secondary derivates (the curvature of surfaces); the facility to modify the shape of surfaces starting from parameters with a physical meaning that is easy to understand and manipulate by non-mathematicians; the calculus facility, these methods being designed for an interactive use.

2. A GEOMETRICAL APPROACH TO THE TRIPLE INTEGRAL

We know that a double integral such as

f ( x , y ) dx dy

(1)

is geometrically expressed by the volume V of the shape, limited by a part of the surface S, whose equation

z = f ( x, y )

(2)

is the projection of this part on the xOy coordinate plain and the cylindrical surface projected with generators, parallel to the Oz axis, of the Oxyz orthogonal coordinate system, to which all analyzed objects are reported. A physical approach to the double integral takes us to the notion of mass, distributed on the plain domain according to the law that is expressed by function (2). Analyzing the analogical mass distributed on the space domain V, in such a way, that its distribution law is expressed with the help of the function

1290

t = f(x, y, z )
we normally get to the physical approach to the triple integral of the following type

(3)

f(x, y, z) dx dy dz
V

(4)

A geometrical approach to the type (4) integral can not be found in integral calculus books, and the cause is obviously the fact that function (3) itself includes four variables and in order to express its geometrical content we need to operate with the notions of the four-dimensional geometrical space, that are not widely spread yet. The function t = f(x,y,z) is expressed through a certain surface of the four-dimensional space related to the orthogonal coordinate system Oxyzt. So, by expanding the geometrical approach for the double integral to the triple integral, we can conclude that the triple integral of type (4) is geometrically expressed by volume H of the hyper-corps, limited by a part of hyper-surface (3), by projecting this part on the hyper-plain of xyz coordinates and through the cylindrical surface projected with the generators parallel to the Ot axis. There are known examples of representing on orthogonal and axonometric drawings the construction of hypersurfaces. Based upon these facts we can conclude that using the methods of descriptive geometry in the four-dimensional space, we can eloquently express the geometrical substance of triple integration.

3. THE GRAPHICAL EXPRESSION OF TRIPLE INTEGRATION IN THE AXONOMETRIC DRAWING

With the help of the calculus example for the mass of the corpus limited by the surface of the ellipsoid

x2 y2 z 2 + + =1 a2 b2 c2

(5)

we show how the triple integration process can be suggestively represented in the axonometric drawing. We presume that the density in each point of the corpus is equal to the square of the distance from this point to the starting point of the coordinates. In such a case, the mass distribution law, according to the volume of the given corpus, will be expressed by the function
t = x 2 + y 2 + z2

(6)

And the mass m of the given corpus by the integral

m = (x 2 + y 2 + z 2 ) dx dy dz
V

(7)

Figure 1, in the dimetric oblique projection shows the geometrical object that expresses integral (7) as a whole. On this drawing V is the volume of the ellipsoid (5) which is the orthogonal projection of the hyper-function (6) on the hyper-plain of xyz coordinates, 2 is the projection of the hyper-surface (6) on the hyper-plain of xyz coordinates on a direction parallel to the zt coordinate plain, chosen in such a way that the positive direction of the Ot axis is projected on the negative direction of the Oz axis. Integral (7) can be represented as follows
z2

dz dx f ( x , y , z ) dy
x1 ( z ) y1 ( x , z )

x2 ( z )

y2 ( x , z )

(8)

z1

or, having in mind the actual values of the integration limits in function (3), as represented below
a c c2 z2 b 1 x2 a2 2 2 2 ( x + y + z ) dy z2 c2

dz

a c

c2 z2

dx

(9)

x2 z2 b 1 a2 c2

1291

Figure 1: If integrating after y the variables x and z remain constant and the interior integral takes the following values
b 1 x2 a2

x2 z2 2 3 ( ) ( ) + + = + 2 + b 2 1 x y z dy x z b 2 3 a c x2 z2 1
c2 2 2 2 2 2 a2 c2

z2

x2 z2 1 2 2 a c

(10)

The geometrical essence of such an integral is expressed by the surface represented in figure 2.a Integral (10) is described as follows

2 dz
c

a c a c

c2 z 2

2 x2 z 2 x2 z 2 2 + + 1 1 x b z b a2 c2 a2 c2 c2 z 2
2 2 x z 1 2 2 a c

b3 x2 z 2 + 1 2 2 3 a c
If we note

(a / c )

dx

(11)

c 2 z 2 = d we get
d 2 x2 + b3 3 a3 d 2 x 2 (d 2 x 2 ) + b c2 d 2 2 2 1 2 d x dx a a
(12)

c d b 2 dz x 2 c d a

1292

Figure 2.a:

Figure 2.b:

1293

If integrating after x variable z remains constant and the interior integral takes the following values
d b b3 b c2 2 2 2 2 ( ) 2 x2 d 2 x2 + d x d x + d 3 a3 a a ab 2 2 (a + b 4 c 2 )(c 4 2 c 2 z 2 + z 4 ) = 4 4 c 2 d 2 2 1 d c dx = 2 a

(13)

From a geometrical point of view the result of such integration is expressed by the volume represented in figure 2.b, where the element of this volume is reduced (brought) to the surface represented earlier in figure 2.a In the final stage of integration we substitute the value of the internal integral in expression (12) and we integrate after z.

ab
4 c
4

(a

+ b 2 + 4 c 2 ) (c 4 2 c 2 z 2 + z 4 ) dz =
c c

4 a b c (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) 15

(14)

Figure 3: The process of such integration is geometrically expressed by the summing of volumes, out of which one is indicated in figure 2.b. Following this summing, a hyper-volume is formed, whose element is shown in figure 3. This drawing also shows the elements presented before in figure 2. The expression

4 abc( a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) is the value of the triple integral (7). 15

4. CONCLUSION
This example shows that, by using four-dimensional space descriptive geometry methods, we can eloquently express the essence of the triple integral.

1294

REFERENCES
[1] Smirnov V.I., Superior mathematics course, (Russian language) [2] Kaplan I.A., Practical lessons of superior mathematics, Harkov, 1972, (Russian language) [3] Filipov P.V., Descriptive geometry of multidimensional space, Leningrad, 1979, (Russian language) [4] Procopiuc G., Analiza matematica, Iasi, 2002 [5] Diamandescu A., Analiza matematica probleme rezolvate, 2006. [6] Tnsescu A., Grafica asistata, Editura Tehnica, Bucuresti, 1989.

1295

In Memoriam

Prof. dr Georgios Petropoulos (1959-2010)

Georgios Petropoulos was born in Athens in 1959 and suddenly passed away in July 2010. He graduated from the Department of Physics, School of Applied Sciences at the Aristotles University of Thessaloniki, Greece, in 1983. He attended PhD studies at the School of Engineering, Department of Mechanical Engineering, Aristotles University of Thessaloniki, Greece. He defended his PhD entitled "Simulation of the Evolution of self-excited Vibrations in Turning and Milling to determine dynamically stable Cutting Conditions" at the Department of Mechanical Engineering, Aristotles University of Thessaloniki (in Greek) and thus he obtained a PhD degree in July 1991. Professional and Teaching Experience In the period 1984-1991 he worked as a Research Assistant in the Laboratory for Machine Tools and Machine Dynamics, (EE), Department of Mechanical Engineering, Aristotles University of Thessaloniki. He assisted in teaching of the following undergraduate courses: Vibrations and Machine Dynamics (1984-1991), Special Tasks of Vibration Analysis (1989-1991), Introduction to Manufacturing Processes-Metrology (1990-1991). He also organized laboratory exercises and supervised diploma project reports of research character. In the period 1991-1992 he was employed as a Research Fellow in the same laboratory ( ).

Dord Petropoulos je roen u Atini 1959.godine i iznenada preminuo u julu 2010.godine. Diplomirao je na Katedri za fiziku na Fakultetu primenjenih nauka na univerzitetu Aristotles u Solunu, Grka, 1983.godine. Pohaao je doktorske studije na Fakultetu tehnikih nauka, Katedra za mainstvo univerziteta Aristotles u Solunu, Grka. Odbranio je svoj doktorat pod nazivom Simulacija evolucije samouzbudnih vibracija u struganju i glodanju radi utvrivanja dinamiki stabilnih uslova seenja na Katedri za mainstvo Aristotles univerziteta u Solunu (na grkom jeziku) i tako je dobio titulu doktora nauka u julu 1991.godine. Profesionalno i nastavno iskustvo U periodu od 1984-1991, radio je kao istraivasaradnik u Laboratoriji za alatne maine i dinamiku maina, (EE), na Katedri za mainstvo Aristotles univerziteta u Solunu. Bio je asistent na sledeim osnovnim kursevima: Vibracije i dinamika maina (1984-1991), Specijalni zadaci analize vibracija (19891991), Uvod u proizvodne procese-metrologija (19901991). Takoe, organizovao je i laboratorijske vebe i nadgledao izvetaje diplomskih projekata istraivakog karaktera. U periodu od 1991-1992, radio je kao nauni saradnik u istoj laboratoriji ( ).

iii

In the period 1992-1995 he worked as an Associate Professor of Tribology in the Department of Mechanical Engineering, Technological Education Institute of Piraeus (third level of education). And in the period from 1995-2010 he was employed as a Lecturer in Manufacturing Processes, Department of Mechanical and Industrial Engineering, University of Thessaly. He taught undergraduate level courses in Introduction to Manufacturing, Theory of Manufacturing Processes, Technology of Manufacturing Processes, Vibrations and Machine Dynamics, Introduction to Tribology, and a Postraduate level course in Physical and Economical Models of Manufacturing Processes- Metrology. He had set up and directed the Laboratory of Manufacturing Processes of the Department. Research interests and activities The research interests and activities of G. Petropoulos involved Theory and Technology of Machining Processes, Tribology, Metrology, Machine Vibrations. He was a member of the following professional bodies: Union of Greek Physicists, EEEE (Hellenic Operational Society, a member of IFORS), Balkan Tribological Association, ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers), Greek Metallurgical Society. He participated in National Development and Educational Projects and was a reviewer in the Journal of Industrial Lubrication and Tribology and Journal of the Balkan Tribological Association. G. Petropoulos stood out for his gentleness, integrity, and many interests beyond science. He will always be remembered for the kind of person he was, and his contribution to science. He was a member of the Scientific Committee of RaDMI from the very beginning, until the current conference (2010). He has significantly contributed to RaDMI Conference by his scientific work, which is related to manufacturing processes and tribology. In most cases, he was also the reviewer of the Proceedings from RaDMI Conference, of which he was present at eight conferences on which he had invitation papers. In addition, he was an associate editor of the journal JRaDMI.

U periodu 1992-1995, radio je kao vanredni profesor tribologije na Katedri za mainstvo Instituta za tehnoloko obrazovanje u Piraeusu (trei nivo obrazovanja). I u periodu 1995-2010, radio je kao predava proizvodnih procesa na Katedri za mainstvo i industrijski ininjering univerziteta u Tesaliji. Predavao je na osnovnim studijama Uvod u proizvodnju, Teoriju proizvodnih procesa, Tehnologiju proizvodnih procesa, Vibracije i dinamiku maina, Uvod u tribologiju, i na postdimplomskim studijama je predavao Fiziki i ekonomski modeli proizvodnog procesa metrologija. On je na katedri uspostavio i vodio laboratoriju za proizvodne procese.

Istraivaki interesi i aktivnosti Istraivaki interesi i aktivnosti D. Petropoulosa su unkljuivali Teoriju i tehnologiju obrade, Tribologiju, Metrologiju, Vibracije maina. Bio je lan sledeih strunih organizacija: Savez fiziara Grke, EEEE (Helensko operativno drutvo, lan IFORS-a), Balkansko triboloko udruenje, ASME (Ameriko drutvo mainskih ininjera), Grko metalurko drutvo. Uestvovao je u Nacionalnom razvoju i Obrazovnim projektima a bio je i recezent asopisa Journal of Industrial Lubrication and Tribology, kao i asopisa Journal of the Balkan Tribological Association. D. Petropoulos se izdvajao po svojoj blagosti, integritetu i mnogim interesovanjima izvan nauke. Zauvek e biti pamen kao ovek kakav je bio i po njegovom doprinosu nauci. Bio je lan Naunog odbora RaDMI konferencije od samog poetka, sve do ovogodinje (2010). Znaajno je doprineo RaDMI konferenciji svojim naunim radom, koji je vezan za proizvodne procese i tribologiju. U veini sluajeva, bio je i recezent Zbornika RaDMI konferencije, na osam konferencija je bio prisutan i imao rad po pozivu. Takoe, bio je i zamenik urednika asopisa JRaDMI.

iv